IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


k 


A 


f/ 


^  .^. 


.«* 


i^ 


:/. 


'/. 


IX) 

LL 

1.25 


2.0 


Ui 
HI 
U 


1.4 


Ml 


1.6 


% 


a^ 


■^  '/. 


Photographic 

^Sciences 

Corporation 


A 


■^ 


V 


^ 


« 


« 


33  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WHSTIR.N.Y.  MSM 

(  7 1* )  173.4.103 


>^^^**^    ^ 

^V^ 

V 


i\ 


VV^ 

^^S 


z 


V 


^c 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICiVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Cenadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Inttitut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  hietoriques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  biblographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checlced  below. 


D 


D 


D 
D 


D 


□ 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


□    Covers  damaged/ 
Couverture  endommagie 

1—1    C^ 


Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurie  et/ou  pellicul6e 


I      I    Cover  title  missing/ 


Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


I      I    Coloured  maps/ 


Cartes  giographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  inic  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 


I      I   Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 


Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
Reli6  avec  d'autros  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

Lareliure  serr^e  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  ia  long  de  la  marge  intirieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  ccrtaines  pages  blanches  ajouties 
l<  ;s  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte. 
mais.  lorsque  cela  Atait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  tti  filmAes. 


Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmentaires: 


Virloui  pigingi. 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6tA  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  methods  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqute  ci-dessous. 


□   Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

□    Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagies 

n   Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restauries  et/ou  pelliculAes 

r~7]   Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 


D 
D 


Pages  d6color4es,  tacheties  ou  piqutes 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d6tach6es 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  prir 

Qualiti  inigaie  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  materii 
Comprend  du  materiel  supplimentaire 


I      I  Pages  detached/ 

r~7]  Showthrough/ 

I      I  Quality  of  print  varies/ 

I      I  Includes  supplementary  material/ 


The  c 
to  the 


Their 
possil 
of  the 
filmin 


Origin 
begini 
the  lai 
sion, 
other 
first  p 
sion, 
or  illud 


Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  pat.lally  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  be^t  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  At6  filmies  A  nouveau  de  fa^on  A 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


The  la 
shall  c 
TINUE 
whichi 

Maps, 

differe 

entirel' 

beginn 

right  ai 

require 

methoi 


( 

fhis  item  Is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film*  au  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-dessous 

10X                            14X                             18X                            22X 

26X 

30X 

A 

12X 

lex 

20X 

24X 

28X 

32X 

laire 
8  details 
ques  du 
It  modifier 
liger  une 
e  filmage 


1/ 
uAes 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanlcs 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  the  Public 
Archives  of  Canada 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  iegibiiity 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  —^(meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  ▼  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


L'exemplaire  filmA  fut  reproduit  grice  A  la 
g4n4rosit6  de: 

La  bibiioth^que  des  Archives 
publiques  du  Canada 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  AtA  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetA  de  l'exemplaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  ia  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimie  sont  fiimto  en  commenqant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration.  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  salon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmte  en  commenQ...it  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernlAre  page  qui  compone  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaltra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  seion  le 
cas:  le  symbols  -^  signifie  "A  SUIVRE  ",  le 
symbole  V  signifie  "FIN". 


lire 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  bt 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc..  peuvent  Atre 
filmAs  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diffirents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  ti  op  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seui  clichA,  11  est  film*  A  partir 
de  i'angle  supArleur  giuche,  de  gauche  A  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
iliustrent  ia  mAthode. 


}y  errata 
ed  to 

mt 

ine  pelure, 

agon  A 


1 

2 

3 

32X 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

A-roj? 


lilUll) 


steam  \ 


SCOTCH  STBA] 
WONGS, 
METALLIC  LII 
CHANDELIERS 
MOE  LIGHTS, 
WINDSAILS, 


fortl 


PIPES,  VALVES 
ftmiihodi 

V 


Detr( 


EVERY  DESCRIP 

8PEE] 

MaTALUO  AND  Wo 

's 

Row  ■nd  Plea 

Wrlt«  for  iLLuaxBA 


▲▼•nuf ,  I 


1. 


MARINE  COPPERSMITHS,  BRM  FINISHERS. 

Steam  Fitters  and  Sheet  Uetal  Workers. 

lUanfMJtare  and  Keep  la  Stock  the  foUowtog 
MARUnS  SPECIALTIES: 


SCOTCH  STEAM  WHISTLES, 

<JONOS. 

METALLIC  LIFE  BAFTS, 

CHANDELIERS, 

MDE  LIGHTS, 

WIND8AILS, 


THOMAS  FLUE  CLEANEBA, 
FOSTER  PRESSURE  REGULATORS, 
MOTION  INDICATORS, 
HURRICANE  and  BRACKET  LAMPS, 
BRiSS  LOCKS, 
HEADLIGHT  FRAMES. 


f  orfliiitiii  Steam  Piueps  anil  Coeiliiiim 

PIPES,  VA.UVES,   9TBAM   GOODS   AND   ENGINEER'S  SUPPL.IB8  OF 

MOST    APPROVED    MAKES. 

Birtmf  faralihed  promptlr  for  doing  work  at  «Djr  port  oo  the  Lakes. 

Works,  64  to  72  Orleans  St., 

DETROIT,    MICH. 

Detroit  Boat  Wojks 


]3UII^I3Bf«M    OP" 


STEEL, 

WOODEN, 
IBON, 

STEAM 


YACHTS 


I  And  SAIL      r::::"™":-::;:::::^::::::^ 

EVERY  DESCRIPTION    OF   BOATS   UP  TO    120   FEET   IN    LENGTH 

SPEED  AMD  BFFICIENCT  OUARAKTESD. 

YAWLS  of  all  aizea  always  in  stook. 

MavALUO  AMD  Wooden  X^iife  iBo^tai. 


Clahk'h  Patent  Adetnllio  I^lfe 

STEERING    WHEELS. 

Row  and  Pleasure  Boats.  Racing  Boats. 


Write  for  Illustratru  Catalooui  to 


DETROIT  BOAT  WORKS. 


JaflWWB  Avenue,  near  Bella  Ule  Bridga. 


DETROIT,    MICH. 


^' 


.-'.  ."« 


'  13 


't'l 


V  mi 


i\\ 

W 

)f 

le 

e 

>y 

32 


s. 


J  It- 

1  ve 

'^  Qe 

■I 


)o- 


ten 


f 
*     - 


'*^.T"^J  " 


Smtatb  or  H.  D.  Edwabdr.  OaoaoB  W.  Bdwamos. 


Fkame  W.  Bon 


V 


E8TABL.I8HEO    1855. 


^^.  EDWARDS  ,j^ 

Ship  Chandlery  and  Marine  Hardware. 


^A^e  have  fitted  out  more  Vessels  than  any  other  ooncern 
on  the  Great  Lakes.    \A^e  have  the  largest  establish- 
ment of  the  kind  in  the  country. 

— AGENTS    FOR  <Cii- 


AHERICAN  SHIP  WINDLASS  €0. 

SEWALL.  A.  DAY  CORDAGE  CO. 

PliYMOVTII  CORDAGE  CO. 

IHT.  YERNOiW  COTTON  DUCK. 

ROEBLING'S  WIRE  ROPE,  Etc. 

W  fine  line  of  MARINE  GLASSES,  BAROMETERS,  BRASS  BINNA- 
CLES, TAFFRAIL  LOOS,  COMPASSES,  etc  ,  altvayt  in  atook. 

16,  18,  20,  22,  A  24  Woodward  Auenut. 

(NKAR  FINRV  DOCK.;  MICH. 


DETROIT, 


SCOTT'S  NEW  COAST  PILOT. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CHANGES. 


Corrected  to  the  Opening  of  Navigation,  1894. 


LAKE  ONTARIO. 


Charity  ShonI  Buoy,  at  the  entrance  to  the  St.  Lawrence  River,  is 
changed  from  a  red  to  a  red  aud  black,  horizontally  striped  buoy. 

GENESEE  LIGHT-§T4TIOIV.— During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  6-inch 
steam  whistle  will  sound  blasts  of  three  seconds'  duration,  separated  by  silent 
intervals  of  flfty-seven  seconds  at  Genesee  Light  Station,  New  York,  thus: 


Blast 
3  sec. 


Silent 
interval 

57  sec. 


Blast 
!{  sec. 


Silent 
interval 

r>7  sec. 


Tlie  fog  signal  is  situated  on  the  old  light-house  crib  on  the  W.  side  of  the  West 
Pier,  and  about  1,000  feet  from  its  outer  end,  entrance  to  Charlotte  Harbor,  mouth 
of  Genesee  River,  Lake  Ontario,  New  York.  The  bell  will  be  discontinued  as  a  fog 
signal  unless  the  steam  whistle  should  be  disabled,  when  it  will  be  struck  by  ma- 
chinery every  thirty  seconds,  as  heretofore. 

IVine  Mile  Point  Steam  Foir  Horn,— From  and  after  the  oneniog  of 
navigation  in  the  spring  of  1894,  the  fog  bell  lieretofore  maintained  at  Nine  Mile 
Point  light-station,  on  the  west  extremity  of  Stmcoe  Island,  at  the  «'a8t  end  of  Lake 
Ontario,  in  the  County  of  Frontenac.  OnUirio,  will  be  discontinued,  ard  replaced  by 
a  steam  fog  horn  which  \ill  give  blasts  of  8  seconds' duration,  with  intervals  of  22 
seconds  between  the  blasts.  The  fog  alarm  building  is  a  square  wooden  building 
painted  white,  with  a  brown  roof,  and  stands  immediately  north-west  of  the  light- 
house tow'-'r.  The  horns  point  out  to  the  south-vrest,  and  are  elevated  16  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  lake.  Tlie  machinery  is  in  duplicate,  so  that  in  the  event  of  one 
horn  or  boiler  becoming  inoperati  e  the  other  may  be  put  in  operation. 


LAKE   ERIE. 

Niagara  Klver  (near  Buiffblo).— Two  spar  buoys  will  be  placed  oppo- 
site and  above  the  water  works  crib,  on  the  Canada  side. 

Seneca  Slioal.— A  black  spar  buoy,  in  seventeen  feet  of  water,  has  been 
placed  on  Seneca  Shoal. 

BUFFALO    BREAKWATER   (N.   end)    LIOHT-STATION.- 

During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  lOinch  steam  whistle  will  be  sounded  at  Buffalo 
Breakwater  (north  end)  Light  Station,  Lake  Erie,  New  York,  giving  blasts  of  three 
seconds'  duration,  separated  by  silent  intervals  of  twenty-seven  seconds,  thus: 

Silent  Silent 

Blast  interval  Blast  interval 


8  sec. 


27  sec. 


8  sec. 


37  sec. 


/' 


r 


2 


▲DDITIONH   AND   CHAN6B8. 


The  hell  will  be  discontinued  as  a  fog  sig^^a^  unless  the  steam  whistle  should  be 
disabled,  when  the  bell  will  be  struck  by  maciiinery  u  triple  blow  every  80  seconds. 

Pretque  Isle  Bay.— The  north  pier  has  been  extended  and  the  light  house 
moved  out. 

ASHTABULA  L.IOHT-STATION.— During  thick  or  foggy  weather, 
a  6-inch  :9team  whistle  will  sotind  bksts  of  three  seconds'  duration,  separated  by 
alternate  silent  intervals  of  twelve  and  forty-two  seconds  at  Ashtabula  Light- Station, 
Ohio. 

The  fog  signal  is  situated  on  the  outer  end  of  the  West  Pier,  entrance  to  Ashta- 
bula Harbor,  Lake  Erie,  Ohio. 

Falrport. — The  range  lights  have  been  started. 

Black  River  Range  Light.— Three  fixed  lights,  two  red  and  one  white, 
arranged  vertically  4  feet  apart,  with  the  white  light  in  the  middle,  will  be  shown 
from  lens  lanterns  suspended  from  a  triangular,  pyramidal,  skeleton  iron  tower, 
located  near  the  shore  end  of  the  west  pier,  and  about  1,170  feet  from  its  outer  end, 
entrance  to  Black  River  harbor,  Lake  Erie,  Ohio. 

The  lights  in  connection  with  the  light  on  the  outer  end  of  the  west  pier  form 
a  range  on  the  centre  line  of  the  pier,  and  the  range,  tlierefore,  marks  the  west  side 
of  the  channel  to  the  harbor. 

Toledo  Harbor,  Straight  Channel  through  the  Maumee  Bay.— 

The  straight  channel  into  the  Maumee  fiay  was  buoyed  and  the  buoys  in  the  old 
channel  discontinued. 

Bar  Point  Shoal  LIgh t-Yesse I.  —  Formerly  moored  about  H  miles  to 
the  southward  and  westward  of  Bar  Point,  mouth  of  Detroit  River,  Michigan,  will 
be  moved  about  400  feet  to  the  westward  to  a  position  approximately  the  same  as 
that  occupied  by  the  private  light-vessel  formerly  maintained  there. 

True  bearings  of  prominent  objects  are: 

Bois  Blanc  Light'iouae  (Canadian),  N.  by  E.  i  E.,  18,300  feet. 
Detroit  River  (Bir  Point)  Lighthouse,  8.  f  W.,  13,800  feet. 

The  vessel  lies  about  600  feet  to  the  westward  of  u  line  drawn  from  Bois  Blanc, 
(Canadian)  Lighthouse  to  Detroit  River  (Bar  Point)  Lighthouse. 


' 


DETROIT    IM;ER 

Limekiln  Crossing  Light- Vessels. — Two  small  light-vessels  placed  to 
mark  Limekiln  Crossing,  Detroit  River,  Michigan  „ 

The  ve«iseis  are  flat-bottomed  pcows,  with  trunk  cabins.  Th.  hulls  arejAinted 
white,  marked  with  red  letters  on  each  side,  r  3spectively,  "LIMEKII^kN  WOSS- 
ING  (SOUTH)"  and  "LIMEKILN  CROSSING  (NORTH)."  *     ' 

The  vessels  each  siiow  one  flxed  white  light  from  a  lens  lantern  suspended  19 
feet  above  the  vf^tar  from  a  crane  on  an  upright  rising  3  feet  above  a  tripod. 

During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  bell  will  be  struck  by  hand. 

True  bearings  and  distances  of  prominent  objects:— 
For  Limek'ln  Crossing  (South)  Light- Vessel : 
Texas  Dock.  N.,  4,680  feet. 

Head  of  Bois  Blanc  Island  Range  Liglit  (front),  8.  by  W.  f  W.,  8,600  feet. 
East  end  of  railroad    ler  on  Stony  IsTund  (Canada  Southern),  N.  W.  by  N., 
4,200  feet. 
For  Limekiln  Crossing  (North)  Light- Vessel: 
Texas  Dock,  N.  i  E. ,  2,000  feet. 

Head  of  Bois  Blanc  Island  Range  Light  (front),  S.  by  W.,  6,100  feet. 
East  end  of  railroad  pier  on  Stony  Island  (Canada  Southern),  W.  N.  W., 
2,400  feet. 

Ballard's  Reef  Light- Vessel. —A  flat-bottomed  scow  with  trunk  cabin. 
The  hull  is  painted  lead  color,  with  the  words  "BALLARD'S  REEF"  in  black 
letters  on  each  side,  moored  In  about  18  feet  of  water  off  the  easterly  end  of  Ballard 
Reef,  .making  off  from  Grosse  Isle,  west  side  of  Detroit  River,  Michigan. 

The  vessel  shows  one  flxed  red  lens  lantern  light  at  a  height  of  19  feet  above  the 
water,  suspended  from  a  cross-arm  on  an  upright  rising  three  feet  above  a  square 
platform  surmounting  a  tripod. 


e 

s 


h 


E 
8 

a 

VI 


'% 


ADDITIONS   AND   CHANGES. 


8 


During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  bell  will  be  struck  by  hand. 
Fort  Maiden  Range,  front  light  (Canadian).  S.  by  E.  k  E,  (S.  16«  27'  E.  true). 
Qrosse  Isle,  Lower  Range,  front  light,  N.  by  W.  t  W.  (N.  13»  26'  W.  true). 
Mamajuda  Lighthouse.  N.  i  W.  (N.  5°  05'  W.  true). 


LAKE  ST.  CLAIR. 

Light  for  Triangnlallon  Purposes.— A  fixed  white  lens-lantern  light 
was  established,  and  will  be  maintained  until  further  notice,  by  the  U.  8.  Engineers 
for  triangulation  purposes,  on  the  structure  recently  erected  in  8i  feet  of  water  near 
the  mouth  of  the  Old  Cut,  and  about  800  feet  north-wester' y  from  the  range  line 
marked  by  the  St.  Clair  Plats  Range  Lights,  Lake  St.  Clair,  >  ichigan. 

The  light  is  shown  at  a  height  of  20  feet  from  a  pole  rising  from  a  platform  6 
feet  above  the  water,  supported  on  a  cluster  of  piles. 

From  the  light  St.  Clair  Flats  Canal  (Upper)  Light-house  bears  N.  84°  E  (E.  i 
N.).  and  St.  Clair  Flats  Cana)  (Lower)  Light  house  bears  8.  58°  08'  E.  (S.  E.  by  E.  i 
E.)  7,900  feet. 


linted 
lOSS- 


LAKE  HURON. 

Lake  Huron  LI|rht-VeMsel.— Moored  in  about  20  feet  of  water,  in  the 
southern  end  of  Lake  Huron,  to  the  northward  and  AVtestward  of  North  west  Shoal, 
and  shows  at  the  foremast  head  a  group  of  3  fixed  white  lens  lantern  lights.  The 
focal  plane  of  the  light  is  40  feet  above  lake  level,  and  visible,  in  clear  weather,  13^ 
miles. 

The  vessel  has  two  masts,  schooner  rigged,  no  bowsprit,  and  has  a  black  circu- 
lar cage-work  day  mark  at  the  foremast  head.  The  hull  is  straw-colored,  with 
"LAKE  HURON"  in  large  black  letters  on  each  side  and  "No.  81"  on  each  bow. 

The  fog  signal  is  a  6-mch  steam  whistle,  and  in  thick  or  foggy  weather  sounds 
blasts  of  2  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  10  seconds. 

Fort  Gratiot  Light-house  S.  by  W.  i  W.  li  miles. 

Tile  vessel  is  anchored  with  a  mushroom  anchor,  and  passing  vessels  should  not 
approach  nearer  than  200  feet. 

FORT  OB4TIOT  LIGHT-8TATION.— This  light  has  been  changed 
from  a!* fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  two  fuinutes,  to  a  fixed  white 
light  varied  by  a  \vhite  flash  every  minute. 


r.  w., 

I  cabin. 

black 

lallard 

Ive  the 
pquare 


STRAITS  OF  MACKINAC. 

Poe  Rec-r  Light-Vessel.— Moored  in  about  80  feet  of  water  in  the  eastern 
entrance  to  the  Strait  of  Mackinac,  on  the  eastern  end  of  Poe  Reef,  north  side  of  the 
south  channel  of  the  Strait. 

The  vessel  shows  at  the  foremast  heiai  a  group  of  ii  fixed  white  lens-lantern 
lights,  40  feet  above  lake  level,  and  visible,  in  clear  weather.  18^  miles. 

The  vessel  has  two  masts,  schooner  rigged,  no  bow  sprit,  and  has  a  black  circu- 
lar cage  work  day  mark  at  foremast  head.  The  hull  is  painted  red,  with  "Poe 
Reef"  in  large  black  letters  on  each  side  uivl  "  No.  02"  on  each  bow. 

The  fog  signal  is  a  6  inch  steam  whistle,  and  in  thick  and  foggy  weather  sounds 
blasts  of  5  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  10  secon-ls, 

Northeast  point  of  Bois  Blanc  Island,  N.  |  E.  Spectacle  Reef  Lighthouse,  N. 
E.  by  E,  i  E.  Forty-Mile  Point,  8.E.  by  E.  Cheboygan  Light-house,  H.W.  i  W., 
Si  miles. 

CHEBOYC34N  LIf3HT-§TAT10M.-Ttiis  light  has  been  changed  from 
a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  white  flashes  evury  90  seconds,  to  a  fixed  white  light 
varied  by  a  white  Qash  •every  minute. 


ADDITIONS    AND    CHANOBS. 


GEORGIAN   BAY. 


Bustard  Rocks  IVIaIn  Light.— The  main  lighthouse  on  the  Bustard 
Rocks,  at  the  mouth  of  French  River,  Georgian  Bay.  District  of  Algoma.  Ontario, 
has  been  replaced  by  a  new  tower  built  20  feet  N.E.  4  E.  from  the  old  one. 

The  new  building  is  a  square  wooden  tower,  painted  white,  surmounted  by  a 
hexagonal  iron  lantern  painted  red.  The  height  of  the  tower  from  its  base  to  the 
vane  on  the  lantern  is  37  feet. 

The  light  will  be  as  heretofore,  fixed  white.  It  will  be  elevated  48  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  Bay.  and  should  be  visible  12  miles  from  all  points  of  approach, 
except  over  the  dangerous  rocks  and  shoals  to  the  N.  Eastward  and  Eastward.  The 
illuminating  apparatus  will  be  dioptric,  of  the  7th  order. 

Besides  serving  as  a  back  tower  for  the  two  ranges  described  below,  this  light  is 
intended  for  a  coast  light. 

Bustard  Rocks,  Front  Light  of  Inner  Range.— The  front  range 
light-house  on  the  Bustard  Rocks  has  been  replaced  by  a  new  tower,  built  near  the 
site  of  the  old  one,  229  feet  N.E.  i  E.  from  the  main  light  building.  It  is  a  square 
wooden  tower,  painted  white,  surmounted  by  a  s(iuare  wooden  lantern  painted  red. 
and  is  28  feet  high  from  its  base  to  the  vane  on  the  lantern. 

The  light  will  be  as  heretofore,  fixed  white,  catoptric,  elevated  39  feet  above  the 
water,  and  will  be  visible  6  miles  in,  and  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of,  the  line  of 
range. 

The  above  described  two  liglns  in  range  lead  in,  from  a  point  just  clear  of  the 
north  Bustard  Rock,  to  the  intersection  of  this  range  with  the  French  River  rarn-e. 

Bustard  Rocks,  Front  Light  of  Outer  Rtfnge.  (New  Light.)— 
An  additional  ran^e  light-house  has  been  erected  on  the  Bustard  Rocks.  193  feet  W. 
by  S.  from  the  mam  tower.  The  building  is  a  square  wooden  tower,  painted  white, 
surmounted  by  a  square  wooden  lantern  painted  red,  and  is  28  feet  high  fiom  the 
base  to  the  vane  on  the  lantern. 

The  light  will  be  fixed  white,  catoptric,  elevated  27  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
Bay.  and  sliould  be  visible  10  miles  in,  and  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of,  the  line 
of  range. 

This  light,  in  one  with  the  light  in  the  main  tower,  leads  in  E.  by  N.  from  deep 
water  clear  of  Isabel  Rock  on  the  north,  and  of  all  the  shoals  south-west  of  Bustard 
Rocks  on  the  south. 

French  River  Back  Range  Light.— The  back  range  tower  of  the 
French  River  range  has  been  replaced  by  a  new  tower,  built  in  the  village  840  feet 
back,  or  N.E.  by  N.,  from  the  old  tower. 

The  new  tower  is  a  square  wooden  building,  painted  white,  surmounted  by  a 
square  wooden  lantern  painted  red,  and  is  33  feet  high  from  its  base  to  the  vane  on 
the  lantern. 

The  light  will  be,  as  heretofore  fixed  red,  catoptric,  and  should  be  visible  6 
miles  in,  and  over  a  small  arc  on  eacu  side  of,  the  line  of  range.  It  is  elevated  37 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  Bay. 

The  French  River  range  will,  as  heretofore,  lead  in,  from  its  intersection  with 
the  inner  Bustard  range,  lo  Lefroy  Island,  c^^ai  of  all  obstructions. 

Giants  Tomb  Light-House.— A  light-house  established  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  Canada  on  the  southern  extremity  of  Giants  Tomb  Island,  in  the  soutl  -east 
portion  of  the  Georgian  Bay,  in  the  East  Riding  of  Simcoe,  Ontario,  was  put  in 
operation  on  the  opening  of  navigation  this  year. 

The  light  is  fixed  white,  elevated  40  feet  above  the  level  of  the  Bay,  and  should 
be  visible  11  miles  from  all  points  of  approach  by  water.  The  illuminating  appa- 
ratus is  dioptric  of  the  7th  order. 

The  light-house  stands  on  the  boulder  and  gravel  beach  at  the  southern  extremity 
of  the  island,  close  to  the  water.  It  consists  of  a  square  wooden  tower,  with  dwell- 
ing attached,  painted  white,  the  tower  surmounted  by  an  iron  lantern  painted  red. 
The  height  of  the  building,  from  its  base  to  the  vane  on  the  lantern,  is  37  feet. 


?  Bustard 
,.  Ontario, 

nted  by  a 
Hse  to  the 

feet  above 
approach, 
ird.     The 

is  light  is 


ont  range 
It  near  the 
3  a  square 
inted  red. 

above  the 
he  line  of 

;ar  of  the 
r  ranue. 

Jght.)— 

13  feet  W. 

ted  white, 

from  the 

?el  of  the 
f,  the  line 

rom  deep 
'  Bustard 


Br  of  the 
340  feet 

ted  by  a 
vane  on 

visible  6 
3vated  37 

,ion  with 


Qovern- 
outl  -east 
IS  put  in 

should 
ng  appa- 

Ktremily 
,h  dwell- 
ited  red. 
et. 


ADDITIONS   AND   CHANGES. 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 

WHITEIPI§H  POINT  LIOHT-STATION.— This  light  has  been 
changed  from  a  tixed  white  to  a  fixed  white  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  20  seconds. 

Ontonagon  Pierhead  Beacon  Light,  on  the  west  pier  at  Ontonagon, 
will  be  moved  about  430  feet  nearer  the  outer  end  of  the  pier.  The  elevation  and 
characteristics  of  the  light  will  remain  unchanged. 

§rPERIOR  PIERHEAD  LIGHT-STATION.— During  thick  or 
foggy  weather,  a  6-inch  st^am  Avhistle  will  sound  blasts  of  3  seconds'  duration,  sepa- 
rated by  silent  intervals  of  12  seconds,  at  Superior  Pierhead  Light-station,  Lake 
Superior.  Wisconsin. 

The  fog  signal  is  situated  on  the  South  Pier,  about  45  feet  in  rear  of  light-tower, 
and  serves  as  a  guide  into  Superior  and  AUouez  Bay. 

Superior    Bay. 

Tlje  following  described  post  lights  will  be  established  in  Superior  Bay,  Wis- 
consin and  Minnesota: 

Superior  Bay  Entrance  Range  Post  Llghls.— Two  fixed  white 
lens-lantern  lights,  each  on  an  upright  on  Wisconsin  Point.  Front  light  18  feet  above 
lake  level,  just  inside  the  entrance  to  the  soutlieasterly  end  of  Superior  Bay.  Rear 
light  24  feet  above  lake  level,  320  feet  8.  W.  |  W.  from  front  light.    The  range  will 

f;uide  into  the  southeasterly  end  of  Superior  Bay  through  the  natural  channel  from 
iake  Superior. 

Superior  Bay  Range  Post  Lights.— Two  fixed  white  lens-lantern 
lights,  each  on  an  upright  on  Wisconsin  Point,  just  inside  the  entrance  to  the  south- 
easterly end  of  Superior  Bay.  Front  light  16  feet  above  lake  level,  380  feet  E. 
of  Superior  Bay  entrance  front  range.  Rear  light  21  feet  above  lake  level,  290  feet 
S.E.  I  E.  from  Superior  Bay  front  light.  The  range  will  guide  up  Superior  Bay 
from  inside  the  entrance  past  the  old  dock  on  Minnesota  Point  to  the  entrance  to  the 
dredged  channel  to  Quebec   'ock. 


Quebec  Channel  f*o 

above  lake  level,  on  an  upri 
west  angle  of  the  intersect 
channel  to  Quebec  dock,  m  iK 


Light.— A  fixed  red  lens-lantern  light,  13  feet 
ing  from  a  square  pyramidal  cluster  of  piles  in  the 
the  main  channel  of  Super. or  Bay  and  the  dredged 
('  channel  through  Superior  Bay. 


Superior  Bay  Channel  (Lower)  Post  Light.— A  fixed  white  lens- 
lantern  light,  13  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  upright  rising  from  a  square  pyramidal 
cluster  of  piles  on  the  northeusterly  side  of  the  channel,  aad  about  3,500  feet  from 
Quebec  channel  post  light. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  (Lower  Middle)  Post  Light.— A  fixed 
white  lens-lantern  light,  13  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  upright  rising  from  a  square 
pyramidal  cluster  of  piles  on  the  northeasterly  side  of  the  channel,  about  3,800  feet 
from  Superior  Bay  Channel  (lower)  post  light. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  (Upper  Middle)  Post  Light.- A  fixed 
white  lens-lantern  light,  13  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  upright  rising  from  a  square 
pyramidal  cluster  of  piles  about  midway  of  the  Middle  Ground,  northeasterly  side 
of  the  channel,  and  about  4  700  feet  from  Superior  Bay  channel  (lower  middle)  post 
light. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  (Upper)  Post  Light.— A  fixed  white  lens- 
lantern  light,  13  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  upright  rising  from  a  square  pyramidal 
cluster  of  piles  on  the  northwesterly  end  of  the  Middle  Ground,  abreast  of  the  lum 
ber  docks  southeasterly  of  Connors  Point,  northeasterly  side  of  the  channel,  and 
about  2,000  feet  from  Superior  Bay  channel  (upper  middle)  post  light. 

Connors  Point  Range  Post  Lights.— Two  fixed  lens-lantern  lights, 
front  light  white,  13  feet  above  lake  level,  about  \  mile  E.  of  Connors  Point;  rear 
light  red,  18  feet  above  lake  level,  about  590  feet  N.E.  by  E.  i  E.  from  Connors 
Point  front  light.     Each  shown  from  an  upright  rising  from  a  square  pyramidal 


0  ADDITIONS   AND   OHANOBS. 

cluster  of  piles  southeasterly  of  Rice  Point,  Superior  Bay.  The  range  will  guide  in 
the  channel  from  the  Northern  Pacific  Railroad  bridge,  St.  Louis  Bay,  past  Connors 
Point  into  Superior  Bay. 

Rice  Point  Ranf^e  Post  Llvhts.— Two  fixed  lens-lantern  lights,  front 
light  white,  13  feet  above  lake  lerel,  590  feet  N.W.  by  N.  i  N.  from  Rice  Point  rear 
light;  rear  light  red .  Each  shown  from  an  upright  rising  from  a  square  pyramidal 
cluster  of  piles  southeasterly  of  Rice  Point.  Superior  Bay.  (The  rear  light  of  this 
range  is  the  rear  light  of  the  Connors  Pcint  range.)  The  range  will  guide  in  the 
channel  along  the  northeasterly  side^of  Rice  ^'oint  from  its  southeasterly  point  nearly 
to  the  Ohio  Central  coal  dock. 

Ohio  Central  Coal  Dock  Post  Light.— A  fixed  red  lens-lantern  light. 
18  feet  above  lake  level,  on  an  upriglit  rising  from  a  square  pyramidal  cluster  of 
piles  southeasterly  of  the  northeasterly  end  of  the  Ohio  Central  coal  dock,  northerly 
end  of  Superior  Bay.  The  light  marks  the  turning  point  from  th^  northerly  part  of 
Duluth  harbor  into  the  channel  marked  by  the  Rice  Point  range. 

North  Channel,  East  Range,  Post  Lights.— Two  fixed  white  tubular- 
lantern  lights,  each  on  uprights  on  a  platform,  natural  color,  supported  by  a  square 
gyramidal-cluster  of  black  piles,  standing  in  7  or  8  feet  of  water  to  the  westward  of 
iice  Point  and  at  the  easterly  end  of  the  nortli  channel.  The  focal  plane  of  the  front 
light  is  13  feet  above  the  water  and  of  the  rear  light  18  feet  above  the  same  level. 
The  rear  light  is  about  600  feet  north,  46°  30  east  (N.E.  i  E.)  from  the  front  light, 
and  the  range  guides  in  the  easterly  part  of  the  channel  to  the  west  range. 

North  Channel,  West  Range,  Post  Lights,— Two  fixed  white  tubu- 
lar lantern  lights,  each  on  uprights  on  a  wooden  platform,  natural  color,  supported 
on  a  square  pyramidal  cluster  of  black  piles,  standing  in  7  or  8  feet  of  water,  near 
the  lumber  dock,  West  Duluth,  ".t  the  westerly  end  of  the  north  channel.  The  focal 
plane  of  the  front  light  is  13  feet  abo\e  the  water  and  of  the  rear  light  18  feet  above 
the  same  level.  The  rear  light  is  about  550  feet  south,  46°  30'  west  (8.  W.  i  W.) 
from  the  front  light,  and  the  range  guides  in  the  westerly  part  of  the  channel  to  the 
east  range. 

South  Channel,  West  Range,  Post  Lights.— Two  fixed  white  tubu- 
lar-lantern lights,  each  on  uprights  on  a  wooden  platform,  natural  color,  supported 
on  a  square  pyramidal  cluster  of  black  piles,  standing  in  from  7  to  9  feet  of  water, 
near  the  lumber  dock,  West  Duluth,  at  the  westerly  end  of  the  south  channel.  The 
focal  plane  of  the  front  light  is  13  feet  above  the  water,  and  of  the  rear  light  18  feet 
above  the  same  level.  The  rear  light  is  about  950  feet  south,  70°  west  ( W.  S. W.  i  W.) 
from  the  front  light  (is  also  the  rear  light  for  the  north  channel,  west  range),  and  the 
range  guides  in  the  westerly  part  of  the  channel. 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


Frankfort  Pierhead  Reavon  Light.— A  fog-bell  struck  by  machinery, 
a  double  and  a  single  blow  alternately  at  intervals  of  20  seconds.  The  bell-tower  is 
situated  8  feet  in  rear  of  light-tower. 

Kewaunee  Pierhead  Light.— The  tubular-lantern  pierhead  light  at 
Kewaunee,  west  shore  of  Lake  Michigan,  Wisconsin,  was  moved  out  to  the  outer 
end  of  the  recently  extended  pier. 

The  light  is  shown  from  an  inclosed  glazed  end  of  a  conduit  extending  from  the 
light-tower  a  distance  of  335  feet,  the  focal  plane  being  33  feet  above  lake  level. 

CHICAOO  LIGHT-STATION.— This  station  has  been  discontinued. 

CHICAGO  HARROR  LIOHT-STATION.— A  flashing  red  and  white 
light  alternately  every  10  seconds;  3d  order,  visible  16  miles;  light  67^  feet  above 
lake  level;  conical  iron  tower,  painted  red  with  black  trimmings,  standing  on  a  rect- 
angular rock-faced  masonry  pier,  inside  of  and  near  the  south-east  extremity  of  the 
outer  breakwater.     A  coast  and  harbo'*  light. 

Fog-signal  building  alongside  of  tower.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather,  a  10- 
inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  5  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval 
of  2S  seconds. 


i'.i"ii  rnimii    I 


^.^..M.-.'  ,^^M^mm*m 


ADDn;ONS   AND   CHANGES. 


Oray't  Beef  L<f  ht  Vessel  Fog  signal  sounds  thus: 

Silent  Silent 

Blast.  interval.  Blast.  interval.  Blast. 

1  sec.  10  sec. 


Silent 
interval. 


3  sec. 


10  sec. 


1  sec. 


35  sec. 


LIOHT-STATION.— Painted  red  and  white  bori- 


WArGOSHANCE 

zontal  bands. 

Fox  Island  Skhoal  (middle). — Pled  and  black,  horizontal  stripes,  spar 
buoy  in  17  feet  of  water.  Marks  two  shoal  spots  lying  in  a  N.W.  and  S.E.  direction, 
about  250  yards  apart,  with  13  feet  least  depth  of  water.  The  buoy  is  on  the  south 
edge  of  the  N.W.  spot.  In  thick  or  foggy  weather,  vessels  should  avail  the  five 
fatnom  line.  South  Fox  Island  Light-House,  N.  }  £.  Qi  miles.  Fox  Island  Shoal 
outside,  S.  by  E.  i  E.  i  mile. 

Calumet  Entrance  ( §outh ).— Black  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  9f  water. 
Marks  the  south  bank  of  the  channel  leading  into  Calumet  River.  Calumet  Pier- 
head Light- Station,  W.  165  yards.  S.E.  end  of  Illinois  Steel  Co's  pier,  N.  N.W.  i 
W.  xV  of  a  mile. 

Calumet  Entrance  (IVorth).— lied  spar  buoy  in  18^  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  north  bank  of  the  channel  leading  into  Calumet  River.  Calumet  Pierhead 
Light  Station,  S.W.  by  W.  275  yards.  East  end  of  Illinois  Steel  Co's  pier,  N.W.  by 
N.  i  N.  I  of  a  mile. 

Hyde  Park  U^ater  IVorks  Crib  (Outer). 

Hyde  Park  Water  Works  Crib  (Inner).— BothMn  course  of  con- 
struction. 

South  Park  §hoal. — Red  and  black,  horizontal  stripes,  2d  class  can  buoy 
in  28  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  south  side  of  a  6  foot  shoal  off  South  Park,  city  of 
Chicago.  Calumet  Pierhead  Light-Station,  S.  |  E.  4i  miles.  Chicago  Pierhead 
Light-Station,  N.  N  W.  |  W.  7W  miles. 

IWadlson  Park  §hoal. — Red  and  black,  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in 
16  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  center  of  a  small  shoal  off  Madison  Park,  Chicago. 
Vessels  will  clear  the  shoal  by  giving  the  buoy  a  berth  of  300  feet.  16  feet  least 
depth  of  water.  Hyde  Park  Hotel,  W.  i  N.  l|  miles.  Chicago  Breakwater  Light- 
Station  (South),  N.  N.W.  f  W.  5i  miles. 

Hyde  Park  §hoal  (Outside).— Red  and  black,  horizontal  stripes,  8d 
class  nun  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  north  side  of  a  small  11-foot  shoal  off 
Hyde  Park,  city  of  Chicago,  2  miles  from  the  beach.  Calumet  Pierhead  Light- 
Station,  S.  i  E.  6i  miles.    Chicago  Pierhead  Light  Station,  N.  N.W.  i  W.  6tV  miles. 

Hyde  Park  §hoal  (Inside).— Red  and  black,  horizontal  stripes,  spar 
buoy  in  17  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  north  side  of  shoal.  Least  depth  of  water,  12 
feet.  E.  end  of  Casino  pier,  S.  i  E.  1|  miles.  Chicago  Breakwater  Light-Station 
(South),  N.  N.W.  i  W.  5^,  miles. 

Morgan's  Reef  (Outside).— Black  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  east  side  of  Morgan's  Reef,  off  the  city  of  Chicago.  Hyde  Park  Hotel,  S.W.  i 
W.  1  mile.     Chicago  Breakwater  Light-Station  (South),  N.  N.W.  4J  miles. 

lliorKan*s  Reef  (Inside).— Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
west  side  of  Morgan's  Reef,  off  the  city  of  Chicago.  There  is  but  12  feet  of  water 
in  the  channel  to  the  westward  of  this  buoy.  E.  end  of  Casino  pier,  S.  S.E.  i  E.  8 
miles.    Chicago  Breakwater  Light-Station  (South),  N.  by  W.  |  W.  4^  miles. 

Oakland  Shoal.— Black  second  class  nun  buoy  in  26  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  easterly  end  of  Oakland  Shoal,  off  the  city  of  Chicago.  Chicago  Water  Works 
Crib  (4  mile),  N.  N.E.  i  E.  31  miles.  Douglas  Monument.  N.W.  by  W.  i  W.  U 
miles. 

Oakland  Shoal  ( Inside. )— Red  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
westerly  edge  of  Oakland  Shoal,  off  the  city  of  Chicago.  Chicago  Water  Works  Crib 
(4-mile),  N.  E.  i  N.  4|^  miles.    Douglas  Monument  N.  W.  |  W.  1  mile. 

Chicago  Water  Works^Crlb  (a-lMlle).  — In  course  of  construction. 
A  course  steered  from  the  Chicago  Water  Works  Crib  (4-mile)  to  the  Hyde  Park 
Water  Works  Crib  (outer),  leads  to  the  east  of  Hyde  Park  and  South  Park  shoals, 
clearing  ^  and  ^  of  a  mile  respectively ;  and  from  the  Chicago  Water  Works  Crib 


8  ADDITIONS   AND  GHANGBS. 

(2-mile)  to  Hyde  Park  Water  Works  Crib  (inner),  leads  between  Hyde  Park  outer  and 
inner  shoals  and  between  Madison  Park  and  South  Park  shoals,  clearing  South  Park 
shoal  ^,  of  a  mile.  Hyde  Park  Water  Works  Crib  (outer)  S.  |  E.  5|  miles.  Chicago 
Breakwater  Light  Station  (south)  W.  i  N.  3|  miles.  Chicago  Water  Works  Crib 
(4-mile)  E.  |  N.  U  miles.  Hyde  Park  Water  Works  Crib  (inner)  8.  by  E.  i  E.  6^^ 
miles. 

Ran^  olph  §treet  Yiadact. — Red  and  black,  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy 
in  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  wreck  in  Chicago  harbor,  near  Randolph  street  viaduct, 
with  but  7  J  feet  of  water  over  it 

Lakevie^r  Water  Works  Crib  (Outer)  Building.— Chicago  Water 
Works  Crib  8.  by  E.  f  E.  4i  miles.  Outer  breakwater  (northwest  end)  S.  i  E.  4^ 
miles. 

LakeTleiv  Water  Works  Crib  ( Inner)  Building.-— Lakeview  Water 
Works  Crib  (outer)  E.  i  N.  f  mile.  Chicago  Harbor  Light-Station  S.  by  E.  |  E.  6 
miles. 


S' 


GREEN  BAY. 


Eleven-Foot  Shoal  Eilgiit-Yesiiel.— Moored  in  about  60  feet  of  water  off 
the  southward  and  westward  of  Corona  and  Eleven-Foot  Shoals. 

The  vessel  shows  at  the  foremast  head  a  group  of  3  fixed  white  Icns-lantern  lights, 
40  feet  above  lake  level  and  visible  in  clear  weather  13^  miles. 

The  vessel  has  two  masts,  schooner-rigged,  and  has  a  black  circular  cage-work 
day  mark  at  the  foremast  head.  The  hull  is  painted  black,  with  "Eleven  Foot 
Shoal "  in  lar^^e  white  letters  on  each  side,  and  ' '  No.  60  "  on  each  bow. 

The  Fog  Signal  is  a  6-inch  steam  whistle,  and  in  thick  and  foggy  weather  sounds 
blasts  of  5  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  an  interval  of  10  seconds. 

The  vessel  marks  the  shoals  and  the  turning  point  for  vessels  bound  into  Little 
Bay  de  Noquet. 

Eleven-Foot  Shoal  Buoy  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  If  miles.  Point  Peninsular  Light  N.  by 
E.  I  E.  in  range.  Corona  "Shoal  Buoy  E.  N.  E.  i  E,  If  miles.  Burnt  Bluff  (left 
tangent)  E.  N.  E.  i  E.  (in  range).     Escanaba  Light  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  9i  miles. 


Changes  to  be  Made  on  the  Opening  of  Navigation,  1 894. 

Wuugosliance. — From  fixed  white  varied  bv  white  fiash  every  00  seconds, 
to  fixed  white  varied  by  white  fiashes  every  4.1  seconds. 

Porte  des  Morts. — From  fixed  red  to  fixed  white  varied  by  wiiite  flash 
every  15  seconds,  4th  order. 

Eagle  Harbsr,  Midi. —From  fixed  white  raried  by  a  white  flash  every  2 
minutes,  to  fixed  white  varied  by  a  white  flasli  every  minute. 

Raspberry  liland,  Wis.— From  fixed  white  varied  by  white  Hush  every 
90  seconds,  to  fixed  white  varied  l)y  wnite  flash  every  minute. 

§t.  HlHry^fl  FallM  Canal,  Ri.  Pier.— From  fixed  red  6tli  order,  to  5tl)  order 
wliite  light  varied  by  red  tiasli  every  minute. 

ManlHtee,  mich.— Change  to  a  coast  liglit  on  keeper's  dwelling,  fixed 
white  5th  order,  varied  by  red  flaslies  45  seconds,  8th  February,  1894.  Ijight-Houfie 
Board.     Post  light  and  fog  signal  to  be  transferred  from  S.  to  N.  pier. 


h 


SCOTT'S  NEW  COAST  PILOT. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CHANGES 


CORRECTED  TO  THE  OPENING  OF  NAVIGATION,  1893. 


bound  into  Little 


LAKE  ONTARIO. 

BARRIFIELI^  COM]«!CI«  St4NGE  LIGHTS,  KII¥G8TON 
HA  HBOR— Front  LiKht-A  fixed  wliitc  lio;bt,  48  feet  ubove  thclake  level, 
370  feet  east  of  the  end  of  bridge  over  Great  Cataraqui  Creek. 

Rear  Light.— A  fixed  white  light,  75  feet  above  the  lake  level,  1,500  feet  N. 
E.  from  the  Front  light.  These  lights  are  shown  from  locomotive  head-light  lan- 
terns, hoisted  to  the  top  of  iron  skeleton  towers,  triangular  in  pmn,  with  ovai  slotted 
targets  or  beacons  at  their  top,  and  sheds  at  their  base.  The  beacons  are  white,  the 
iron  framework  red,  and  the  sheds  brown.  The  lights  are  visible  12  miles,  over  a 
small  arc  on  each  side  of  line  of  range.  Tlie  ran^e  leads  iaside  Caruthers  and  Point 
Frederick  shoals,  to  guide  between  Pour- Mile  Pomt  and  Kingston  Harbor.  Passing 
between  Four-Mile  Point,  and  Snake  Island  light,  steer  for  the  south  side  of  the  docks 
s^bout  N.  E.  ^  E.  This  course  leads  between'  Penitentiary  shoal  on  the  port  hand 
and  the  Myles  shoal  to  starboard,  these  shoals  are  marked  with  square  platform 
buoys,  with  frame-work  beacons.  Api)roaching  the  docks  get  on  the  range  of  the 
above  lights  N.  E. ,  which  will  lead  inside  the  Caruthers  and  Point  Frederick  shoals. 
See  page  48. 

Xny  of  <|utnte  Bridge  Lights.— A  highway  bridge  having  been  con- 
structed ac/oss  the  Bay  of  Quinte,  immediately  west  of  Belleville,  vessels  will  require 
to  be  cautious  in  approaching  the  draw  both  by  day  and  night.  The  centre  pier  of 
the  swing  span  is  195  feet  from  the  south  or  Prince  Edward  County  side  of  the 
bridge,  and  there  is  a  channel  100  feet  wide  both  north  and  south  of  this  central  pier, 
either  of  which  can  be  used  bv  vessels.  The  bridge  is  .straight,  and  runs  N.  J  W. 
(N.  18°  80'  W.  true),  and  S.  i'E. 

The  following  lights  have  been  established  for  the  guidance  of  Mariners  at  the 

f)lvotordraw  span  of  the  said  bridge  : — One  fixed  white  light  shown  from  a  lens 
autern  hoisted  18  feet  above  the  level  of  the  Bay,  at  the  south  of  the  southern 
opening,  and  one  similar  fixed  white  light  iit  the  north  of  the  northern  opening. 
When.Uie  dmw  is  closed  against  navigation  a  red  light,  (elevated  18  feet  above  the 
water,  will  show  at  each  end  of  tlu'  draw  Hi)Hn,  or  close  to  the  two  fixed  white  lights 
above  described,  and  sliowing  both  up  iind  down  iho  Bay.  When  the  draw  is  open 
two  green  lights  at  an  cli'vatlon  of  IH  feet  above  the  water  will  be  visible  from  each 
end  of  the  draw  span,  facing  east  and  west,  indicating  the  position  of  the  rest  piers. 
There  will  then  appear  to  a  vessel  a|>|iroacIiing  fn)m  either  direction  wlien  the  draw 
is  open,  two  green  lights  fiankcd  by  two  wliltc  lights  in  a  line  north  and  south. 

All  those  lights  sIk 'ild  be  visible  a  distance  of  three  miles  in  clear  weather,  both 
I  up  and  down  the  Bay. 

Light  on  Pottem  iMland.— A  mast  light  has  been  temporarily  established 
M)y  the  Government  of  Canada  on  the  outer  point  of  Potters  Island,  opposite  Nigger 
[island,  on  the  south  shore  of  tlie  Bii\  of  tjumte,  Province  of  Ontario. 

Woller'g  Bay  LlglltM^  Cliiiilge.— The  range  lights  at  Weller's  Bay,  on 
[the  north  shore  of  lake  Ontario,  have  been  moved,  and  the  colors  of  the  lights 
[changed. 


-T.-raryv; 


V*.r«.l.l.»W 


11 


ADDITIONS   AMD   0HANOB8. 


The  Front  Uaht  tower  now  stands  on  the  shore  of  the  bay,  at  the  southwest 
end  of  the  Carrying  Place  road,  843  feet  N.  i  W.  from  its  previous  position. 

The  light  has  been  changed  from  fixed  red  to  fixed  white;  it  is  elevated  26  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  lake,  and  should  be  visible  10  miles  in  the  line  of  range  and  tc 
the  eastward  until  cut  off  by  Bald  Head  and  to  the  westward  until  cut  off  by 
Presqu'ile  Point. 

Vlie  Back  Light  tower  has  also  been  moved  to  a  new  site  distant  608  feet 
N.  E.  i  E.  (N.  46°  E.  true),  from  the  front  one.  The  light  has  been  changed  from 
fixed  white  to  fixed  red,  and  is  elevated  87  feet  above  the  lake  level ;  it  should  be 
visible  7  miles  in,  and  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  line  of  range.  "Vessels 
approaching  from  the  westward  will  not  open  this  light  until  nearly  reaching  the 
alignment,  as  it  is  screened  by  trees. 

The  two  light  buildings  are  unchanged  in  character. 

There  is  a  bar  with  about  10  feet  on  it  across  the  mouth  of  the  Bay,  at  a  distance 
of  two  nautical  miles  from  the  front  light.  The  new  alignment  leads  over  this  bar, 
at  or  near  its  narrowest  part,  in  practically  the  best  water,  and  also  leads  clear  of 
the  extremity  of  the  spit  off  Bald  Head,  which  is  8,300  feet  inside  the  bar.  Vessels 
entering  can  now  pick  up  the  alignment  in  tlie  deep  water  of  the  lake,  cross  the  bar 
on  the  alignment,  N.  E.  f  E.,  and  keep  it  until  the  extremity  of  Bald  Head  spit  is 
passed  at  a  distance  of  about  150  feet,,  when  they  will  be  in  the  deep  water  of  the 
bay,  inside  of  all  r^angers. 

The  tripod  beacon  marking  the  end  of  Bald  Head  spit,  has  been  washed  away, 
and  will  not  be  replaced  at  present.    See  page  45. 

Port  Hope  Pierhead  Light,  Change.  —The  light  is  now  fixed  white, 
instead  of  a  fixed  red  and  white.  White,  square  wooden  tower,  110  feet  from  the 
outer  end  of  breakwater  protecting  the  east  side  of  the  harbor.  Light  40  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  lake,  visible  4  miles. ,  Formerly  the  tower  stood  250  feet  from  the 
end  of  the  pier,  and  within  60  feet  of  the  end  a  red  lantern  light  was  exhibited. 
When  the  lighthouse  was  moved  to  its  present  position,  the  red  lantern  was  dispensed 
with.    Bee  page  45. 

Fort  Niagara  Life-Saving  Station.— A.  Life-Saving  Station  has  been 
established  on  tlie  Military  Reservation,  east  bank  of  Niagara  River,  near  its  mouth. 


LAKE  ERIE. 

Long  Point  Light-Station.— A.  fog  horn  operated  by  steam  and  Cv>m- 
pressed  air  has  been  established  at  Long  Point,  East  End,  Light  Station.  The  horn 
will  sound  blasts  of  seven  seconds'  dunition,  with  silent  intervals  of  80  seconds.  The 
fog  alarm  building  is  situated  about  200  yards  south  of  the  lighthouse  and  about  400 
yards  from  the  shore.  It  is  of  wood  painted  white.  The  horn  is  elevated  20  fe«t 
above  the  level  of,  the  lake  and  faces  toward  the  east.    See  page  80. 

Conneaut  Pierhead  Light.— A.  fixed  white  light  is  shown  from  a  lens 
lantern  suspended  from  a  post  20  feet  above  lake  level,  on  the  outer  end  of  the  west 
pier  at  Conneaut.  The  lignt  is  visible,  in  clear  weather,  about  6  miles.  For  many 
years  the  harbor  at  Conneaut  has  been  in  ruins,  virtually  closed  to  commerce.  Last 
season  the  P.  B.  &  C.  R.  R.  Co.  temporarily  repaired  the  piers  and  dredged  a  narrow 
channel  between  them.  The  Qovernnuiut  has  made  an  appropriation  to  improve  the 
harbor.  The  present  project  is  to  relocate  the  chatmel,  and  dredge  to  a  depth  of  17 
feet  and  construct  new  piers.     See  page  61.     ' 

Cleveland  Light  Station,  Dlioontlnued.— At  the  opening  of  Naviga- 
tion, 1898,  the  fixed  white  light,  8^  order,  shown  from  the  lighthouse  on  the  hill, 
east  side  of  Cleveland  Hiirbor,  will  be  discontinued.     See  page  63. 

TOLEDO   H4RBOR,  STRAIGHT   CHANNEL   THROUGH 

MAimiEE  RA¥.— The  channel  is  now  open  to  navigation  with  a  depth  of  15^ 
tf^*.  at  the  onlmry  stage  of  water,  throughout  the  eutire  length,  which  is  about  7i 
miles,  and  a  wi(^h  of  200  feet  on  the  bottom,  except  iu  one  section  outside  the  main 
crib-lights  where  it  is  only  175  feet  and  1,800  feit  of  the  Turnout  8ubdivi8ion^  the 


ADDITIONS    AND  CHANOB8. 


Ill 


width  is  only  170  feet.    Tlie  new  channel  is  now  wider  and  is  thought  to  be  better 
than  the  old  one. 

Range  Lights  and  Pile-Protection  Work.— The  main  and  east  crib 
lights  of  the  Mauinee  Bay  range,  are  situated  in  the  axis  of  the  channel,  about  1,000 
feet  apart,  direction  about  8.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  from  seaward.  To  prevent  vessels 
from  colliding  with  tlie  cribs,  a  pile  protection  has  l)een  constructed.  At  present 
the  Turn-out  channel  is  on  tlie  north  side  of  the  main  and  east  crib  lights,  but  the 
project  is  to  have  a  channel  on  either  side  of  the  lights. 

Buoys.— The  New  or  Straight  cliannel  will  be  buoyed  on  the  opening  of.  navi- 
gation, and  the  buoys  in  the  Old  channel  will  be  removed.     See  page  72. 

Raisin  Point.— The  blacii  2d  class  can  buoy  marl^ing  this  point  will  be 
removed  on  tlie  opening  of  navigation,  1893. 

Point  Mouille.— The  black  2d  class  can  buoy  marking  this  point,  will  be 
removed  on  the  opening  of  navigation,  1893. 


DETROIT  RIVER. 


Rois  Blanc  Range  Itlghts.— The  wooden  structures  from  which  the 
range  liglits  at  the  head  olBois  Blauc  Isliuid  were  exhibited,  liave  been  replaced  by 
iron  skeleton  towers,  triangular  in  plan,  with  oval  slotted  targets,  or  beacons  at  their 
tops.  The  character  of  the  lights  is  the  same  as  heretofore.  The  front  tower  is 
70  feet  high,  painted  white.  The  rear  tower  is  90  feet  high,  painted  red  ;  it  stands 
450  feet  8.  by  W.  i  W.  from  the  front  tower.     Bee  page  88. 


ST.  CLAIR  RIVER. 


RIack  River  Shoal. — A  black  8|)ar  buoy  in  15  feet  of  water  on  theeeterly 
edge  of  the  Middle  Ground  off  the  moutii  of  Black  iliver,  I'ort  Huron  Tlie  lower 
side  of  grain  elevator  8.  W.  i  S.  Lower  end  of  dock,  upi)iT  side  of  mouth  of  Black 
River  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  650  yards.     Fort  Gratiot  lighlliouae  N.  by  W. 

Fort  Oratiot  Range  Light.— The  rear  light  is  now  shown  from  a  white 
pyramidal,  open  frame-work  tower,  with  day  mark  14  feet  long  and  10  feet  wide. 
The  focal  plane  of  the  light  is  80  feet  above  the  lake  level.     See  page  97. 


LAKE  HURON. 


Weather  §ignnlH  at  Thunder  Bay  and  Tfllddle  iNiands.— On  the 

opening  of  navigation,  storm,  cautionary  and  wind-direction  .signals  will  be  displayed 
from  or  near  the  Li^e-Saviug  Stations  (m  the  above  named  islands.  Submarine 
cables  will  be  laid  from  the  islands  to  the  mainland,  and  connected  by  wire  with 
Alpena. 


ST.  MARY'S  RIVER. 

Detour  Reef. — A  2d  (ilass  black  can  buoy  in  18  f<H>t  of  water,  on  the  easterly 
side  of  the  reef  off  Detour  Point.  Frying  Pan  Island  llglitliouse  N.  i  K.  2i  miles, 
Tangent  N.  W.  side  of  Druinmond  Island  N.  N.  E.  *  E.  Detour  lighthouse  N.  W. 
by  W.  i  W.  1.800  yartis. 

The  Following  Described  Lights  Have  Reen  Established  on 
St.  Mary's  River  t 


a 

^.      .."lllllpll 


f 


r 


-' 


f 


IV 


,a,uymp 


ADDITIONS   AND   ORANGES. 


Sweet'f  Point.— A  flxed  white  lens-lantern  light,  showing  through  360°  of 
arc,  on  a  crib  structure  standing  in  7  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  turning  point  in  the 
channel,  and  guides  up  the  river  to  the  northward  and  westward. 

Round  Island  Lli^ht.— A  flxed  white  lens-lantern  light,  visible  4  miles. 
The  focal  plane  is  40  feet  above  the  lake  level.  Square,  wooden  tower,  black  lantern, 
rising  in  tlie  front  of  a  H  story  frame  dwellinjr.  The  tower  and  dw^ellingare  painted 
buffj  with  white  trimmings,  red  roof,  with  background  of  trees  90  feet  high  on  the 
E.  side  of  Round  Island.     There  are  two  flxed  red  sectors. 

The  white  sector  lies  between  and  is  bounded  radially  by  the  two  red  sectors, 
and  illuminates  180°  of  the  horizon,  extending  from  N.  i  E.  through  eastward  to  8. 
i  W.  The  sotitherly  red  sector  covers,  and  its  easterly  edge  guides  clear  of,  tlie 
slioals  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Round  Island. 

The  red  sector  to  the  nortli  marks  the  turning  point  at  its  intersection  with 
Winter  Point  range,  foot  of  Mud  Lake. 

Pilot  Island  Range  litghtt.— Two  flxed  red  lantern  lights. 

,  Front  light  on  a  wiiite  post  27  feet  above  the  lake  level,  on  Pilot  Island. 

Rear  light  shown  from  an  iron  skeleton  tower  43  feet  above  lake  level,  on  pile 
cluster  1,600  feet  8.  by  vV.  i  W.  from  front  light,  visible  5^  miles. 

Tlie  range  intersects  the  Winter  Point  range  at  the  can  buoy  in  Mud  Lake,  and 
leads  up  to  Sailors'  Encampment 

Winter  Point  Range.— Two  flx(>d  white  lens-lantern  lights,  showing 
through  270'  of  arc.  The  front  light  is  shown  from  an  uprlglit  on  a  cluster  of  piles 
and  the  reii'"  light  from  an  iron  skeleton  tower  on  the  southern  end  of  Neebish  Island. 
The  range  guides  up  to  or  down  from  the  mid-channel  buoy  in  Mud  Lake.  The 
lights  are  1,500  feet  apart,  direction  N.  W.  |  W. 

Encampment  Crib.— A  flxed  red  tubular-lantern  light,  shown  from  an 
upright  on  a  crib  in  8  feet  of  water,  off  the  southern  end  of  Sailors'  Encampment. 
Marks  a  slioal  and  the  western  side  of  the  entrance  to  Sailors'  Encampment  passage. 

East  Range,  Darii  Hole. — Two  flxed  red  tubular-lantern  lights,  shown 
from  uprights  on  tlxe  upper  end  of  Sailors'  Encampment.  The  range  intersects  with 
Point  of  Woods  Range  to  mark  the  turning  point  in  the  channel,  and  leads  to  or 
from  an  intersection  with  the  channel  marked  by  the  West  Range,  Dark  Hole.  The 
lights  are  281  feet  apart,  direction  8.  by  E. 

Went  Range,  Dark  Hole.— Two  fixed  white  lens-lantern  lights,  shown 
from  uprights  on  the  upper  end  of  Sailors'  Encan'pment.  The  range  intersects  with 
East  Range,  Dark  Hole,  to  mark  the  turning  point  in  the  channel,  and  leads  to  or 
from  abn^ast  the  second  black  spar  buoy  below  Harwi»od'H  Point.  The  lights  are  760 
feet^apart,  direction  8  i  E. 

Point  of  Woods  Range. — Two  flxed  red  tubular-lantern  lights,  shown 
from  uprights  on  the  eastern  side  of  N^eebish  Island.  This  range  guides  through 
tlie  Dark  Hole  passage,  and  by  its  intersection  with  the  West  Range,  Dark  Hole, 
marks  the  turning  point  to  or  from  the  lower  reach  of  Little  Mud  Lake.  The  lights 
are  296  feet  apart,  direction  N.  W.  i  W. 

Hen  and  Chickens  (Neeblsli  Island)  Range.— Two  flxed  red  tubular- 
lantern  lights,  shown  from  uprights.  The  front  light  is  on  the  most  easterly  of  the 
small  group  of  islands  known  as  the  lien  and  Chickens,  and  the  rear  light  is  on  the 
northeasterly  shore  of  Neebish  Island.  1,700  feet  S.  W.  i  W.  from  front  light.  The 
range  guides  through  the  passage  between  Sugar  Island  and  St.  Joseph  Island 
(Canadian). 

HnrM^ood's  Point  Range  Liglits.— Two  flxed  white  tubular -lantern 
ligiits,  shown  from  uprights.  On  8.  E.  end  of  Sugar  Island,  the  rear  light  is  725 
feet  N.  J  W.  from  the  front  one.  The  range  intersects  with  Dark  Hole  West  Range 
at  Little  Mud  Lake  buoy,  black  No.  1)1  to  tiie  intersection  with  Hen  and  Chickens 
Kange  ofT  Stribbling's  Point.     The  N.  W.  point  of  St  Joseph's  Island. 

East  Nccblsli  Range.— Two  flxed  red  luhular-lartern  lights,  on  uprights 
on  Sugar  Island  at  the  foot  of  East  Neebish.  Tlie  rapge  guides  through  the  upper 
reach  of  East  Neebish,  and  its  intersection  with  Indian  Point  range  marks  the 
turning  point.    The  lights  are  2l)B  feet  apart,  direction  8, 


ADDITIONS    AND   CHANGK8. 


intersection  with 


n  Mud  Lake,  and 


Indian  Point  Ranire. — Two  fixed  white  tubular-lantern  lights,  on  up- 
rights on  Indian  Point,  Bast  Neebi8h.  The  range  guides  through  the  lower  reach  of 
East  Neebish  and  its  intersection  with  East  Neebish  Range  marlts  the  turning  point. 
The  lights  are  274  feet  apart,  direction  N.  W.  by  N. 

Dncic  Islnnd  Range. — Two  fixed  red  tubular-lantern  lights,  on  uprights 
near  the  water's  edge  on  the  channel  side  of  the  lower  end  of  Duck  Island,  above 
Bast  Neebish.  The  range  shows  upstream  towards  the  lower  Lake  George  crib- 
light,  and  the  range  between  these  may  be  followetl  from  the  crib  down  to  abreast 
of  the  head  of  Duck  Island.     The  lights  are  663  feet  apart,  direction  S.  i  E. 

Lower  Eiaifce  George. — A.  fixed  witite  tubular-lantern  light,  on  an  upright 
rising  from  a  crib  50  .feet  from  the  east  side  of  the  lower  end  of  the  main  Lake 
George  Channel.     Marks  the  lower  end  of  channel. 

middle  l<ake  George. — A  fixed  red  tubular-lantern  light,  on  top  of  a 
<lwelling  resting  on  a  crib  50  feet  from  the  east  side  of  the  main  Lake  George 
Channel,  at  the  elbow.  BuflE  dwelling  30  feet  square,  with  red  roof  on  crib  in  5  feet 
of  water. 

Upper  Lake  George. — A  fixed  red  lens-lantern  light,  on  an  upright  rising 
from  a  crib  50  feet  from  tlie  east  side  of  the  upper  end  of  the  main  Lake  George 
Channel,  and  marks  the  northerly  entrance  into  the  dredged  cut.  Crib  In  la  feet  of 
water. 

NoTK.— The  three  Lake  Qeorge  lights  mark  the  entrance  into,  the  elbow  of,  and  the  outlet 
from  the  main  channel  of  Lake  George. 

Cliurehs  Point. — A  fixed  white  lens-lantt;rn  light,  on  an  upright  rising  from 
a  crib  in  14  feet  of  water,  at  tlie  head  of  liake  George.  Marks  tlie  approach  to  the 
passage  between  Sugar  and  Squirrel  Islands  and  is  to  be  left  to  the  westward  by 
vessels  bound  cither  way. 

Cliurchville  Point.— Fixed  white  lens-lantern  light,  with  two  red  sectors, 
on  post  rising  from  center  of  square  lamp  house.  On  Churchville  Point,  east  point 
of  Sugar  Island.  The  southerly  red  sector  covers  the  black  spar  buoy  No.  49,  off 
Churchville  Point  crib,  marks  the  turning  point  to  and  from  the  channel  between 
Squirrel  Island  and  Churchs  Point.  The  northerly  sector  cuts  the  southerly  red 
[sector  from  Manhattan  Shoal  light,  and  marks  the  turn  midway  in  the  bend.  The 
white  arc  is  about  198°. 

IHanliattan  Siioai.— A  fixed  white  lens-lantern  light,  with  two  red  sectors, 

on  an  upright  rising  from  a  crib  on  a  10-foot  siioal  off  the  N.  E.  end  of  Sugar  Island. 

■The  light  shows  red  up  and  down  stream  and  wliite  between.    The  down  stream 

tline  between  the  white  and  red  light  marks  the  turn  to  the  eastward  to  be  made 

midway  in  the  bend,  and  the  like  line  up  stream  sliows  where  the  deflection  is  to  be 

made  to  pass  into  or  from  the  Garden  River  reach.       • 

Catiiollc   Mission   Ranve.— Two  white  fixed  tubular-lantern  lights  on 
[uprights  on  the  soutli  shore  of  Little  Lake  George,  north  end  of  Sugar  Island.     The 
[range  marks  the  upper  reach  of  Little  Lake  George,  and  its  intersection  with  Fv 
[ment  Range  marks  the  turning  point.      The  lights  are  810  feet  apart,  direction  9. 
|E.  iE. 

Payment  Range.— Two  fixed  red  tubular  lantern  lights,  on  uprights  on 
the  south  sliore  of  Little  Lalie  George,  north  end  of  Sugar  Isliiud.  Tlie  range  marks 
Uie  lower  reach  of  Little  Lake  George,  and  its  intersection  witli  the  Catholic  Mission 
inge  marks  the  turning  point.     Tlie  lights  are  756  feet  apart,  direction  W.  by  S.  i  S. 

Palmers  Point.— A  lixed  wliite  lens  lantern  light,  with  two  fixed  red  sectors- 
Lon  an  upright  rising  from  a  crib  on  the  ehannei  bank  olT  Palmers  Point,  upper  end  of 
[Little  Lake  George.  Tiie  northerly  edge  of  tlie  eastern  red  sector  cuts  the  first 
[black  buoy  below  the  light  and  tiic  nortlierly  edge  of  the  western  red  .sector  cuts 
Ithe  first  black  buoy  above  Wilson's  Wharf  thus  marking  th(!  two  turning  points. 

FarmerN  RUiges  Range.— Two  H.ved  red  tulnilar  lanlem  lights,  on  uprights 
Ion  the  northwest  siih'  of  Sugar  Island.  The  ran^((  guides  tliiough  the  Farmers 
jliidgcs  passa>fe.     The  lights  are  TM  feet  apart,  direction  N,  K.  by  K. 

Partridge  Point  Range.— Two  fixed  red  tubular  lantern  lights,  on  up 
rights  on  the  northwestern  side  of  Sugar  Island.     The  range  Intersects  with  Farmers 
fldgcs  range  to  mark  the  turning  point  in  the  channel  abreast  of  Brusauts  Point. 
The  lights  are  600  feet  apart,  direction  S.  by  W.  f  W. 


mamstmmmmfi 


VI 


ADDITIONS   AND  0HAN0E8. 


Topiail  Island  Banffe.--Two  fixed  red  tubular-lanterD  lights  on  uprights 
on  the  northwest  side  of  Sugar  Island.  The  range  intersects  with  Sault  Range  to 
lead  clear  of  the  shoal  extending  southward  from  Topsail  Island,  and  also  intersects 
with  Farmers  Ridges  range  at  the  turning  point  in  the  cha'^nel. 

NoTK.— One  lij^ht  serves  for  the  front  ligbt  of  the  TopsaU  Island  ^-an^e,  and  the  rear  light  of 
Partridge  Point  ran^e. 

Baylleld  Rock  Rnn^e.— Two  fixed  white  tabular-lantern  lights,  on  up- 
rights on  the  northwestern  side  of  Sugar  Island.     The  range  leads  past  Bayfield  Rock " 
to  the  lower  end  of  the  canal,  intersecting  with  Sault  range  to  mark  the  channel 
clear  of  Topsail  Island  shoal.     The  lights  are  945  feet  apart,  direction  E.  S.  E  |  E. 

Sault  Range.— Two  fixed  red  tubular-lantern  lights,  on  uprights  on  shore 
below  the  city  of  Sault  Ste.  Marie.  Intersects  w'th  Bayfield  Rock  range  to  mark 
the  channel  to  intersection  of  Topsail  Island  range,  and  also  marks  the  turuing  point 
in  the  channel  on  the  Bayfield  Rock  range  leading  uo  to  the  lowci  entrance  to  the 
canal.  The  front  light  is  160  feet  from  the  sh  )re,-  about  one  .nile  below  the  city;  the 
rear  light  is  on  the  shore  535  feet  W.  by  S.  from  the  front  one. 


. 


STRAITS  OF  MACKINAC. 

OLD  IMACKINAC  POINT  LIGHT  ST4TIOM.- Afiashing  red  light 
every  10  seconds,  ith  order,  visible  15^  miles.  Buff-brick  tower  forming  the  N.  W. 
corner  of  Keeper's  dwelling  which  is  ')u£E  brick  with  red  roof.  It  stands  90  feet  to 
the  westward  and  a  little  in  the  rear  of  the  fog-signal,  on  Old  Mackinaj  Point.  The 
light  is  visible  from  N.  W.  i  W.  through  the  northward  to  E.  i  S.  The  focal  plane 
is  60  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  Cheboygan  liglithouse  S  E.  by  E.  i  E.  16t 
miles.  McGul pin's  Point  lighthouse  W.  2^  miles.  St.  Helena  lighthouse  N.  W.  | 
W.  8  miles.     See  page  161. 

'WAIJGOSHANCJE  LIC  HT  STATION,  CHANGE.— The  color  of  the 
tower,  dwelling  and  fog-signal  has  been  changed  from  a  dull  brown  to  a  bright  red 
and  white,  painted  in  alternate  horizontal  bands  in  such  a  way  that  the  band  imme- 
diately under  the  lantern  goJlery  is  white,  and  that  lower  down  the  band  of  red 
covers  the  roof  of  the  dwelling,  tower  and  fog-signal  house  below  the  edge  of  the 
roof  white. 

The  first  band  immediately  under  the  gallery  is  8  feet  wide,  painted  white;  the 
second  band  8  feet  wide,  painted  red;  the  tliird  band  9  feet  wide,  painted  white,  and 
the  fourth  band  11  feet  wide,  painted  red,  and  will  cover  the  roof  of  the  dwelling. 
The  gallery  deck  and  lantern  will  remain  black  as  heretofore.     See  page  162. 

Waugoshauce  Sixteen-Foot  Shoal.— A  2d  class  black  nun  buoy  in  28 
feet  of  water,  about  15  yards  N.  W.  of  a  small  shoal  of  gravel  and  boulders,  recently 
located  about  900  yards  W.  f  8.  of  the  Waugoshacce  Eigh teen-Foot  Shoal,  the  least 
depth  of  water  over  which  is  15  feet  10  inches.  St.  Helena  Lighthouse  E.  N.  E  i  E. 
12i  miles;  Waugoshance  Lighthouse,  S.  E.  by  S  1^  miles;  Gray's  Reef  Light-Vessel, 
W.  S.  W.  I  W.  4  miles;  White  Shoal  Lieht-Vessel  N.  W.  by  N.  2|  miles.  The 
buoy  is  on  a  line  between  Waugoshance  Lighthouse  and  the  White  Shoal  Light- 
Vessel  and  a  little  northerly  of  a  line  between  St.  Helena  Lighthouse  and  Gray's 
Reef  Light-Vessel,  which  ranges  should  be  useful  in  turning  this  buoy  at  night. 

Waugoshance  Eighteen-Foot  Shoal.- 

black  horizontal  stripes,  has  been  discontinued. 

Beaver  Island  Channel.- A  black  spar  buoy  in  15  feel  of  water,  about 
1,100  yards  N.  N.  E.  f  E.  from  the  N.  E.  point  of  Beaver  Islaud.  The  shoal  is 
nearly  dry  about  20  vards  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  the  buoy,  the  N.  W. 
point  of  island  W.  ^  S.  This  channel  is  good  at  the  present  stage  of  water  for  a 
draft  of  18^  feet.  The  shoalest  water  extends  from  N.  E.  of  Beaver  Island  through 
the  17-foot  patch  on  the  chart,  apparently  all  the  way  across  to  <^jarden  Islaml. 
There  arc  6  fathoms  close  to  the  buoy. 

Whiskey  Island  Shoal.— A  red  spar  buoy  in  17  feet  of  water,  on  the 
extreme  south  point  of  the  slioal,  lying  to  tiie  southward  and  westward  of  Whiskey 
Island,  N.  W.  point  of  Beaver  Island  8.  E.  by  E.,  N.  W.  point  of  Trout  Island  W. 
8.  W.  i  W. 


-The  2d  class  nun  buoy,  red  and 


ADDITIONS  AMD  0HANOE8. 


yu 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


nd  the  rear  light  of 


of  of  the  dwelling. 


WHITE  RITER  L.I0HT-8TATI01V,  CHATVOE.— This  light  has 
been  changed  from  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  minute,  to  a  fixed 
white  light  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  40  seconds.    See  page  170. 

GRAND  H4VEN  LIGHT-STATIOW,  CHANGE.-This  light  has 
been  changed  from  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  ninety  seconds, 
to  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  minute     See  page  171. 

Kalamazoo  Pierhead  Reacon-Llslit,  Change.— This  light  has 
been  discoL'inued  as  a  pierhead  light,  and  re  established  without  change  of  charac- 
teristic as  a  coast  light  in  tlie  old  light-tower  surm(^inting  the  Keeper's  dwelling,  on 
the  N.  side  of  the  mouth  of  the  Kalamazoo  river.  The  focal  plane  is  58  feet  above 
the  lake  level  and  the  light  is  visible  in  clear  weather  14f  miles.     See  page  178. 

St.  Joseph  Pierhead  Range  Ught.— The  fixed  red  tubular  range  light, 
which  was  discontinued  in  1891.  owing  to  the  shifting  of  the  channel  over  the  outer 
bar,  has  been  re-established  on  a  post  35  feet  high,  on  the  outer  end  of  the  N.  pier. 
The  light  should  be  visible  on  a  clear  night  2  or  8  miles  and  with  the  St  Joseph 
Pierhead  Beacon-Light  forms  a  range,  showing  the  direction  of  the  pier,  and  the 
course  for  entering  the  harbor.    See  page  173,     . 

ST.  JOSEPH  LIGHT-STATION,  CHANGE.— The  light  on  the 
blufiE  has  been  changed  from  fixed  white,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  ninety 
seconds,  to  fixed  .vhite  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  45  seconds.  The  order  of  the 
light  has  not  been  changed.     See  page  173. 

St.  JoHeph  Channel  Buoy,  Change.— The  black  spar  buoy  that 
formerly  marked  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  has  been  removed,  and  a  red  spar 
buoy  placed  in  12  feet  of  water  on  the  northwest  point  of  the  shoal,  on  the  south  side 
of  channel.     See  page  176. 

Chicago  Onter  Breakwater  Light,  Change.— The  fixed  white  lens- 
lantern  on  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  outer  breakwater,  has  been  removed  to  the  Emer- 
gency Intake  Water  Works  crib,  an  extensiou  northwesterly  of  the  outer  break- 
water. The  focal  piane  of  the  iight  is  now  45  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  Light 
shown  from  a  post  attached  to  S.  E.  side  of  building  on  crib,  rising  8  feet  above 
house.    See  page  179. 

KENOSHA,  OR  SOUTHPORT  LIGHT-STATION,  CHANGE. 

This  light  has  been  changed  from  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white  flash 
every  90  seconds,  to  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  45  seconds. 
See  page  180. 

MILWAUKEE    LIGHT-STATION,  CHANGE.— This    light   has 
f  been  changed  from  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  two  minutes,  to 
a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  46  seconds.     See  page  184. 

Sheboygan  Pierhead  Range  Light.— A  flxed  red  lens-lantern  range 
■light  hiis  been  established  on  a  post  22  feet  high  on  the  oiiter  end  of  the  North  Pier. 
tThe  light  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  2  or  3  miles,  and  with  the  Pierhead 
iBeacon  light  forms  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the  piers  and  the  course  for 
[entering  the  harbor.    See  page  184. 

AHNAPEE     PIERHEAD     BEACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed  red  lens 
lantern  light,  visible  8^  miles.     White,  open  frame  tower,  square  in  plan,  upper 
part  enclosed.    Near  the  outer  end  of  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  Ahnapec  harbor. 
The  focal  plane  is  37  feet  above  the  lake  level.    See  page  187. 

Ahnapee   Pierhead    Rnnge   Light.— A  fixed  red  lens-lantern  range 

light  visible  2  to  3  miles  in  clear  weather.    On  a  post  22  feet  high  on  the  outer 

; end  of  the  north  pier.    This  light,  with  the  Pierhead  Beacon  light,  foras  a  range 

'showing  the  direction  of  the  pier  and  the  course  for  entering  the  harbot.    A  Life 

I  Saving  Station  has  been  established  in  this  harbor. 

Poverty  Island  Passage,  Change  of  Buoys.— The  black  spar  buoy 
[on  Gravelly  Island  17-foot  shoal,  has  been  removed,  and  a  black  second-class  can  buoy 
put  in  its  place.    Ppverty  Island  light  E.  by  8.  |  S.  8^  miles.    See  page  191. 


^^•"•ffWlP 


Vlll 


ADDITIONS    AMD  CHANGES. 


PoTertir  Island  Shoal. — The  black  and  red  horizontal  stripes  spar  buoy 
on  Poverty  Island  15-foot  shoal  has  been  removed.  A  red  second-class  can  buoy  has 
been  placed  in  20  feet  of  water,  marks  a  narrow  rocky  ledge  with  23  feet  of  water 
over  it.  extending  about  500  yards  S.  by  E.  from  this  buoy.  Poverty  Island  light  S. 
E.  byE.  I  E.,  2f  miles.     Gravelly  Island  S.  W.  f  8.,  H  miles. 

SCirAVr  ISLAND  light-station^.— a  fixed  red  light  varied  by  a 
red  flash  every  15  seconds,  4th  order,  visible  15J  miles.  Red  brick  tower  48  feet 
hip'\.  square  at  base,  and  octagonal  above,  and  forming  the  N.  W.  corner  of  red 
brick  dwelling  with  red  roof.  On  the  northerly  end  of  Squaw  Island,  the  most  north- 
erly of  the  Beaver  Island  group.  The  light  illuminates  the  entire  horizon.  The 
focal  plane  is  60  feet  above  the  lake  level.  During  thiclc  or  foggy  weather  a  10-inch 
steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  5  seconds'  duration,  separat':d  by  alternate  silent  inter- 
vals of  20  and  40  seconds.  The  log-signal  house  stands  about  200  feet  N.  by  IE. 
from  the  light  cower,  it  is  a  red  brick  structure  with  corrugated  iron  roof  painted 
brown.  A  coast  light  marks  the  turning  point  into  Lake  Michigan;  Garden  Island 
N. ;  Tangent,  E.  bv  8.  i  8.  3i  miles.  Seu'.  Choix  Pointe  lighthon:^?,  W.  by  N.  |  N. 
16i  miles;  Scott's  Point  N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.  9^  miles.     See  pa^'-  itfl. 

Squsaur  Island  '^hoal.— Black,  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  28  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  northerly  end  of  shoal  making  off  from  th*'  JT.  E.  end  of  Squaw  Island; 
Squaw  Island  lighthouse  8  by  W.  i  W.  1|  miles;  Garden  Island  shoal  buoy  E.  |.  S. 
3|-  miles;  Lansing  buoy  N.  Si  miles.     See  page  191. 

Lansing  Shoal. — A  red  2d-c]ass  nun  buoy  in  28  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
S.  E.  end  of  a  shoal  N.  f  E.  from  Squaw  Island  light.  There  is  a  spot  with  19^  feet 
700  yards  N.  W.  f  W.  and  another  with  23  feet  1500  yards  W.  f  N.  from  this  buoy. 
Seul  Choix  Pointe  lighthouse,  W.  i  N.  16^  miles;  Squaw  Island  lighthouse,  8.  ^  W. 
4i  miles;  Squaw  Island  buoy,  8.  3^  miles;  Simmons  Heef  liglit-vessel  E.  17^  miles. 
This  buoy  is  intended  to  cover  an  extensive  shoal. 

Garden  Island  Shoal. — A  red  and  black  rizontal  striped  spar  buoy  in 
15  feet  of  water.  Stands  in  the  center  of  small  shoal  .^T.  from  Garden  Island;  Squaw 
Island  buoy  W.  f  N.  3f  miles;  W.  end  of  Garden  Island  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  21  miles. 
See  page  191. 


GREEN  BAY. 

Sherwood's  Point  Ltght-Statlon.— A  fog  bell  tower  has  recently  been 
erected  on  Sherwood's  Point,  the  south  side  of  tlie  entrance  to  Sturgeon  Bay  from 
Green  Bay,  from  which  a  bell  is  sounded  in  thick  and  foggy  weather.  The  bell  is 
struck  by  muciiinery  a  single  blow  evci  '  12  seconds.  The  tower  is  a  square  pyra- 
midal structure.  25  feet  higli,  the  lower  part  painted  white,  upper  part  buflF,  roof 
bright  red.     It  is  situated  13  feet  N.  N.  E.  of  tlie  light  tower. 


CHANGE  IN  PILOT  RULES. 

At  a  meeting  of  the  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors  held  in  Washington,  D.  C. 
January  3l8t,  1893,  Section  8  of  Pilot  Rules  was  changed  so  as  to  read  as  follows": 
(For  rules  see  page  353). 

1st.  When  steamers  are  running  in  the  same  direction,  and  the  pilot  of  a 
steamer  which  is  nstern  shall  desire  to  puss  on  tlie  right  or  starbvoard  hahd  of  the 
stranier  ahead,  ho  sliall  give  one  sliort  blast  of  the  steam  whistle,  as  a  signal  of  such 
denlre  and  intention,  and  shall  put  his  lielrn  to  port,  or  if  he  shall  desire  to  pass  on 
th(  left  or  port  side  of  the  steamer  aheiid,  lie  shall  give  two  short  blasts  of  the  steam 
whistle  as  a  signal  of  such  desire  and  intention,  and  shall  put  his  helm  to  starboard. 
And  the  pilot  of  the  steamer  ahead  shall  answer  by  the  same  signals,  or  if  he  does 
not  think  it  sale  for  the  stcunicr  astern  to  attempt  to  pass  at  that  point,  he  shall 
immediately  signify  the  same  by  giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts  of  the  steam 
whistle,  aiid  under  no  circumstances  shall  the  steamer  astern  attempt  to  pass  the 
steamer  ahead  until  such  time  as  they  have  reached  a  point  whei-e  it  can  be  safely 


ADDITIONS   AND   OHANOB8. 


IZ 


al  Btripes  spar  buoy 
l-cla88  can  buoy  has 
th  23  feet  of  water 
rerty  Island  light  8. 

id  light  varied  br  a 
brick  tower  48  feet 
N.  W.  comer  of  red 
ind,  the  most  north- 
>ntire  horizon.  The 
gy  weather  a  10-inch 
iltemate  silent  inter- 
200  feet  N.  bjr  E. 
id  iron  roof  painted 
S&v;  Garden  Island 
ovze,  W.  by  N.  4  N. 
91. 

a  23  feet  of  water, 
d  of  Squaw  Island; 
i  shoal  buoy  E.  |.  S. 

)f  water.  Marks  the 
9  a  spot  with  19i  feet 
f  N.  from  this  buoy. 
I  lighthouse,  8.  i  W . 
-vessel  E.  17i  miles. 

striped  spar  buoy  in 
Jarden  Island;  Squaw 
S.  W.  i  W.  21  miles. 


yrer  has  recently  been 

Sturgeon  Bay  from 

weather.     The  bell  is 

rer  is  a  square  pyra- 
pper  part  buff,  roof 


done,  when  said  steamer  ahead  shall  signify  her  willingness  by  blowing  the  proper 
signals.  The  boat  ahead  shall  in  no  case  attempt  to  cross  the  bow  or  crowd  upon 
-,he  course  of  the  passing  steamer. 

2d.  That  in  the  navigable  channels  of  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  tributary  and 
connecting  waters  less  than  500  feet  in  width,  no  steam  vessel  shall  pass  another 
going  in  the  same  direction,  unless  the  steam  vessel  ahead  be  (Hsabled  and  signify  her 
willingness  that  the  steam  vessel  astern  shall  pass,  when  the  steam  vessel  astern  may 
pass  at  a  rate  of  speed  not  exceeding  five  miles  per  hour. 

8d.  And  when  steam  vessels,  running  in  opposite  directions,  are  about  to  meet 
in  such  channels,  both  such  vessels  shall  be  slowed  down  to  a  speed  not  exceeding 
tiVe  miles  per  hour. 

4th.  That  in  such  channels  the  descending  steam  vessel  shall  have  the  rifht  of 
way.  The  pilot  of  such  descending  steamer  shall  signify  his  desire  and  iotentfon  by 
giving  the  proper  signal  before  the  steamers  have  arrived  at  a  distance  of  one^haff 
mile  of  each  other. 

This  rale  when  approved  to  take  effect  May  1,  1893. 


WATER  TABLES. 


Showing  in  feet  and  decimals  the  mean  elevation  of  the  surface  of  Lake  Huron 
and  Lake  Michigan,  above  the  mean  tide  at  New  York,-  from  observations  made  at 
Port  Austin  and  Sand  Beach.     The  high  water  of  1838  is  584.84  feet  above  mean  tide 


ai  mew 

lorK  ^jnj: 

Date. 

May.             June. 

July. 

August. 

September. 

October. 

November. 

1891 
1892 

580.45 
579.83 

580.40 
580.16 

580.43 
580.45 

580.33 
580.53 

580.14 
580.36 

579.77 
580.15 

579.46 
579.82 

By 

will  be 

1 

subtracting 
Pound  to  CO 

l  the  figure 
rrespond  w 

8  iu  the  above  table  1 
ith  the  figures  in  the  U 

'or  the  year 
ible  for  tha 

1891,  from  534.34,  it 
t  year  on  page  284. 

TABLE  showing  in  feet  and  decimals  the  mean  elevation  of  the  surface  of  Lake 
iBuperior,  above  mean  tide  at  New  York  City,  from  observations  made  above  the 
locks  Rt  St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal:  • 


in  Washington,  D.  C. 
,s  to  read  as  follows  : 

and  the  pilot  of  a 
tarbviard  hahd  of  the 
e,  as  a  signal  of  such 
hall  desire  to  pass  on 
)rt  blasts  of  the  steam 
is  helm  to  starboard, 
ignals,  or  if  he  does 
that  point,  he  shall 
.  blasts  of  the  steam 
•n  attempt  to  pass  the 
hei-e  it  can  be  safely 


Date. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

AugruBt. 

September. 

October. 

November. 

1891 
1892 

t—. — 

601.281 
600.940 

601  180 
601.300 

601.292 
601.440 

601.304 
601.451 

601.238 
601.509 

601.294 
601.400 

601.185 
600.123 

N 

,-! 


i 


if 


u 


The  square  flags  indicate  the  character  of  the  storm,  whether  moderate  or  severe. 


MODERATE  STORM. 


SEVERE  STORM. 


Northwesterly  winds.    Northeasterly  winds.  Northwesterly  winds.    Northeasterly  winds. 


Southwesterly  winds.    Southeasterly  winds. 


Southwesterly  \«inds.    Southeasterly  winds. 


A  red  flag  with  a  white  center  indicates  that  the  winds  expected  will  not  lie  so 
severe,  but  well-found,  seaworthy  vessels  can  meet  them  without  ('anger. 

A  red  flag  with  a  black  center  indicates  that  the  storm  is  expected  t.>  be  of  marked 
violence. 

The  pennants  displayed  with  the  flags  indicate  the  direction  of  the  wind ;  red, 
easterly  (from  northeast  to  south) ;  white,  westerly  (from  southw^^st  to  north).  The 
pennant  above  the  flag  indicates  that  the  wind  is  expected  to  blow  from  the  northerly 
quadrant ;  below,  from  the  southerly  quadrant. 

Ry  ni^ht  n  red  light  will  indicate  easterly  winds,  and  a  white  light 
above  a  red  light  will  indicate  westerly  winds. 

Hoisting  signals  for  each  quadrant  is  an  opinion  only,  offered  to  aid  the  public 

The  "  Information  Signal"  consists  of  a 
red  pennant  of  the  same  dimensions  as  the 
red  and  white  pennants  (direction  .signals), 
and  when  displayed  indicates  that  the 
local  observer  has  received  information 
from  the  central  oflice  of  a  storm  covering 
a  limited  area,  dangerous  only  for  ve.ssels 
about  to  sail  to  certain  points.  The  signal 
will  serve  as  a  notification  to  shipma.stcrs 
that  the  necessary  information  will  be 
given  them  upon  application  to  the  local 
observer. 

MARK  W.  HARRINGTON, 

Cfiief  of  Weather  Bureau. 
Washington,  D.  C,  August  23,  1891. 

Note  —These  signals,  principally  for  the  information  of  maritime  inten!Sts. 
are  distinct  from  the  system  of  weather,  temperature  and  rain  signals  displayed 
throughout  the  country. 


Information  si^aaL 


■  \l 


il 


STORl  SIQNAL  CODE  AS  EIPLOTED  AT  CANADIAN  LAKE  STATIONS. 


<>(! 


■  ll 


'  I 


NIGHT    1  NSlor;^ 


NIGHT  ¥    N^Zor4 


STATIONS. 


N.^Zoj4 


Directions  to  Mariners,  with  Beference  to  Canadian 
Storm  Warnings  issued  for  the  Lakes. 


Fig.  No.  1.— This  signal,  if  displayed  on  Lakes  Superior,  Erie  or 
Ontario  indicates  "  moderate  gale  is  expected,  at  first  from  an  Easterly 
direction."  If  displayed  on  Lake  Huron  or  Georgian  Bay,  indicat*«  a 
"  moderate  gale  is  expected,  at  first  from  a  Southerly  direction." 

Fig.  No.  2. — If  displayed  on  Lakes  Superior,  Erie  or  Ontario,  indicates 
"  moderate  gale  is  expected,  at  first  from  a  Westerly  direction."  If  displayed 
on  Lake  Huron  or  Georgian  Bay,  indicates  "  moderate  gale  is  expected,  at 
first  from  a  Northerly  direction." 

Fig.  No.  3. — If  displayed  on  Lakes  Superior,  Erie  or  Ontario,  indicates 
that  a  "  heavy  gale  is  expected,  at  first  from  an  Easterly  direction."  If 
displayed  on  Lake  Huron  or  Georgian  Bay,  indicates  "heavy  gale  is 
expected,  at  first  from  a  Southerly  direction." 

Fig.  No.  4. — If  displayed  on  Lakes  Superior,  Erie  or  Ontario,  indicates 
"heavy  gale  is  expected,  at  first  from  u  Westerly  direction."  If  displayed 
on  Lake  Huron  or  Georgian  Bay,  indicates  "  heavy  gale  is  expected,  ai 
first  from  a  Northerly  direction." 

The  Cone,  when  hoisted  by  itself,  indicates  that  it  is  expected  that  the 
wind  will  attain  a  velocity  of  25  miles  an  hour,  but  will  not  exceed  35  miles, 
and  it  is  not  intended  that  an  ordinary  well  found  vessel  should  stay  in 
port,  but  simply  as  a  warning  to  mariners  that  strong  winds  are  expected 
from  the  quarter  indicated. 

The  Drum  will  always  be  hoisted  when  the  velocity  of  the  wind  is 
expected  to  exceed  35  miles  an  hour. 

The  night  signal  corresponding  to  Nos.  1  and  3  is  two  lanterns  hang- 
ing perpend  icithtrly. 

Niglit  signal  corresponding  to  Nos.  2  and  4  is  two  lanterns  hanging 
horizontally. 


Note  I.— Mariners  will  be  able  to  obtain  further  information  from  Storm  Signal  Agents,  or  by 
consulting  the  daily  probabilities. 

Note  II.— Mariners  must  always  bear  in  mind  that  the  storm  signals  are  merely  cautionary, 
and  do  not  necessarily  mean  that  a  storm  will  occur  at  the  place  where  the  signal  is  displayed,  but 
that  one  is  expected  either  there  or  within  such  a  distance  that  vessels  leaving  port  would  be  liable 
to  be  caught  in  it. 

Note  III.— October  and  November  are  the  months  in  which  severe  storms  most  frequently 
occur  on  the  Lakes.  In  these  fall  storms  on  Lakes  Erie  and  Ontario,  the  wind  almost  invariably 
commences  at  the  S.  E.,  works  round  through  Honth  to  West  and  North-West,  the  time  of  the 
hardest  blow  being  usually  when  the  barometer  begins  to  rise  as  the  wind  gets  around  to  the  West. 
On  Lake  Huron  and  the  Georgian  Bay,  the  wind  tliough  for  the  most  part  changing  as  on  the 
Lower  Lakes— not  unfrequenily  changes  with  great  suddenness,  chopping  after  a  lull  from  S.  8.  K. 
to  N.  W.,  and  blowing  hardest,  as  a  rule,  from  the  N.  W. 


CANADIAN  STORM  SIGNAL  STATIONS. 


KINGSTON, 
PI  U  ION, 
DK8ERONT0. 
COBOUHG, 
PORT  HUPB, 
TORONTO, 
PUKT  CRKDIT, 


OAKVILLE, 
HAMILTON, 
PORT  UALHOUSIE, 
PORT  UOLUORNE, 
PORT  DOVER, 
PORT  BURWELL. 
PORT  8TANLEY, 

PORT 


PELfiE  ISLAND, 
AMHERSTBURO, 
HARNIA, 
BAYFIELD, 
QOUERIOH, 
KINCARDINE, 
SAUGEEN, 
ARTHUR. 


TOBERMORY. 
PRESyUE  ISLE. 
OWEN  SOUND, 
COLLING  WOOD, 
MIDLAND. 
PERRY  SOUND. 
8AULT  STE.  MARIE, 


fl 


■•I 


.\  ! 


Explanation  of  the  Signals  adopted  by  the  United 
States  Weather  Bureau. 


1.  The  Weather  Bureau  furnishes,  when  practicable,  for  the  benefit  of  the  general 

public  and  those  interests  dependent  to  a  greater  or  less  extent  upon  weather  coiidi> 

tions,  the  "Forecasts,"  which  are  prepared  at  this  office  daily,  at  10  a  ra.  and  10  p.m., 

for  the  following  daj.     These  weather  forecasts  are  telegraphed  to  observers  at 

stations  of  the  Weather  Bureau,  railway  officials,  and  many  others,  and  are  so  worded 

as  to  be  readily  communicated  to  the  public  by  means  of  flags  or  steam  whistles. 

The  flags  adopted  for  this  purpose  are  five  in  number,  and  of  the  form  and  dimensions 

indicated  below 

Explanation  of  Flag  Signals. 

No  4.  No.  6. 

Black  TriangaUr  White  Flait  with  BUek 
Flag.  Square  In  Centre. 


No.  8. 

No.  1. 

No.  8. 

White  and  Blue 

White  Flag. 

Bine  Flag. 

Flag. 

P    M  >     t*] 


Clear  or  f«lr 


Rain  or  Loeal  Baini.  Temperatnre  Cold  Ware. 

weather.  Snow.  slguaU 

Number  1,  white  flag,  six  feet  square,  indicates  clear  or  fair  weather.  Number  3, 
blue  flag,  six  feet  square,  indicates  rain  or  snow.  Number  3,  white  and  blue  flag 
(parallel  bars  of  white  and  blue),  six  feet  square,  indicates  that  local  rains  or  showers 
will  occur,  and  that  the  rainfall  will  not  be  general.  Number  4,  black  trlanjrular 
flag,  four  feet  at  the  base  and  six  feet  in  length,  always  refers  to  temperature;  when 
placed  ai)ove  numbers  1,  3  or  8,  it  indicates  warmer  weather;  when  placed  lielow 
numbers  1,  2  or  3,  it  indic-ates  colder  weather;  when  not  displayed,  the  indications 
are  that  the  temperature  will  remain  stationary,  or  that  the  change  in  temperatu.o 
will  not  vary  more  than  four  degrees  from  the  the  temperature  of  the  same  hour  of 
the  preceding  day  from  March  to  October,  inclusive,  and  not  more  than  six  degrees 
for  the  remaining  months  of  the  year.  Number  5,  white  flag,  six  feet  square,  with 
black  square  in  centre,  indicates  the  approach  of  &  sudden  and  decided  fall  in  tempera- 
ture. This  signal  is  not  to  be  displayed  unless  it  is  expected  that  the  temperature 
will  fall  to  forty-two  degrees  or  lower,  and  is  usually  ordered  at  least  twenty-four 
hours  in  advance  of  the  cold  wave.  When  number  5  is  displayed,  number  4  is 
always  omitted 

Alpena. 

Buffalo. 

Chicago 

Clevbland, 

Detuoit. 


Ahnepeb. 
Asiir-AND. 
AsirrAnuLA. 
Bay  City. 
Baykif-ld. 

CAl'Ifi  ViNCICNT. 

Cii.vni.KVOix. 

ClIAIlIiOTTB. 

Chichoygak. 


DULUTH. 
EllIE. 

Guand  Haven. 
GiticiiN  Bay. 
Manistee. 

DUNKIUK 

East  Tawas. 
escanaba. 
Faiii  Haven. 

FllANKFOIlT. 

Glionn  Haven. 

Kkewaunbb. 

Kenosha. 


SX-A.TIOITS- 

Mauquettb. 

MiLWAUKEB. 
OSWEOO. 

Pout  Hubon. 


Rochester. 
Sault  Stb.  Marib. 
Sandusky. 
Toledo. 


ST-A.TI01SrS. 

LUDINOTON. 

MACKfNAO  City. 

Manitowoo. 

Menomineb. 

MiJsiiicaoN. 

Oscoda. 

PETOHIiEY. 

Racinb. 


Sand  Beach. 

SlIEBOXGAN. 

SoDus  Point. 
South  Haven. 
St.  Joseph. 
Sturgeon  Bay. 

ToNA  WANDA, 

White  Pish  1'oint, 


lie  United 


SCOTT'S 


3t  of  the  general 
I  weather  coiidi" 
m.  and  10  p.m., 
to  observers  at 
id  are  so  worded 
steam  whistles, 
land  dimensions 


No.  6. 
te  FInic  nith  Blaek 
quurein  Centre, 


Cold  Ware. 

ler.    Number  3, 

e  and  blue  flag 

rains  or  showers 

black  trianjrular 

iperature;  when 

n  placed  Itelow 

the  indications 

in  temperatuio 

lie  same  hour  of 

lian  six  degrees 

set  square,  with 

fall  in  tempcra- 

the  temperature 

ast  twenty-four 

,  number  4  is 


BSTBR, 

Stb,  Maris. 

SKY. 
Bio. 


Bbaob. 

>YOAN, 

Point. 
IIavkn. 

iBEIMI. 

KON  Bay, 

kVANDA, 
Fl8U   I'OINT. 


NEW  COAST  PILOT 


FOR    THE    LAKES, 


CONTAININa  A  aoMrLBTB  LUT  OV  ALL  IBM 


U0  M  Liilit-Eoim,  Foi  Sipals  anil  Boop, 


ON  BOTH  THE  AMERICAN  AND  CANADIAN  BHORLJi, 


WITH  A  FULL  UlSORiPnON  OV  ALL  THI 


HARBORS    AND    BREAKWATERS    COMPLETED    AND    IN    PROGRESS, 

WITH  DIRECTIONS  FOR    ENTERING    THEM.    A    LIST 

OP  ALL  THE  LIFE  SAVING  STATIONS,  AND 

OTHER  USEFUL  INt'ORMATlON; 


Coiirses(C9rrecteilforMapetic7ariationoftlieCoiiipass),Di!!taices 

And  Sailing  Direotiont  for  all  Lakea  and  BiTari,  and  Direotioni  for  Oorrectlng  Oonrsei 
and  Baaringt  for  Magnotio  Variation  and  Deviation  of  the  Oompaii. 

WITH  TABLES  OF  DISTANCES  FOB  EAOE  OF  THE  LAKES. 


Coinplled  from  the  most  reliable  louroee,  and  from  perBon&l  notes  and  obierratloui  ot  orer  fori>  jreart 

experience  on  the  lAkei. 

By  GEORGE  SCOTT,  Detroit,  Michigan,  • 
Licensed  Pilot  of  all  the  Lakes. 


FOURTH  EDITION.   REVISED   AND  ENLAItOED, 

WITH  MAPS,   DIAGRAMS  AND  ILLUBTIUTIU.>C>. 


DETROIT: 

THE  mil  PRESS  PRINTINO  OOMPANV. 

18S9. 


l'» 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  CouRress.  in  the  year  1S80, 

By  GEORGE  SCOTT. 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington.  I).  C. 

.  •       V'  /\  -/  ^  3   , 


.1] 

1 


CONTENTS. 


Variation  of  the  Oompasa,  8,  4. 
To  correct  a  ComiMwa  course  for  Tarlatlon,  4. 
To  correct  a  Oompasa  bearing  for  Tariation,  4. 
Obart  of  magnAtio  variation  Cor  the  lakes,  6. 
To  shape  a  Oompass  course  oorrectad  for 

Tarlauon,  •. 
Deviation  of  the  Compass  on  iron  and  steel 

ships,  6. 
The  magnet,  6. 
OompMS  needle,  6. 

Semicircular  deviation  of  the  compass,  7,  8. 
To  correct  a  compass  for  semicircular  devia- 
tion by  two  magnets,  8, 9. 
Suadrantal  deviation,  9. 
eellng  error,  10. 
Deviation  of  the  C!ompasa  on  wooden  ships,  10. 
Directions  for  ascertaining  the  deviation  of 

the  Compass  bv  swinging  the  ship,  10, 11. 
Directions  for  correollog  a  Compass  course 

for  deviation,  18. 
To  correct  Compass  bearings  for  deviation,  19. 
To  shape  a  Compass  course  corrected  for 

deviation,  18. 
To  correct  a  Compass  course  at  once  for  both 

deviation  and  variation,  14. 
To  shape  a  Compass  course  corrected  at  once 

for  both  deviation  and  variation,  14. 
Directions  for  passing  buoys,  17. 
Directions  for  marking  the  hand,  and  deep  sea 

lead  line,  18. 


ST.  LAWRENCE  RIVER. 
Lights,  bhoys,  sailing  directions,  etc.,  91  to  89. 


LAKE  ONTARIO. 

Lights,  buoys,  harbors,  etc.,  on  the  east  and 

south  shores,  29  to  86. 
Oompaas  courses  and  distances  on  the  south 

shore,  86  to  40. 
Compass  bearlnKS  and  distances  from  lights 

on  the  south  shore  to  lights  on  the  north 

shore,  41. 
Magnetic  declinations,  41. 
Lights,  buoys,   harbors,   etc.,   on   the   north 

shore,  42  to  49. 
Compass  courses  and  distances  on  the  north 

shore,  49  to  6a. 


NIAGARA  RIVER. 

Lights,  buoys,  and  sailing  directions  above  the 
Palls,  OS  to  66. 

LAKE  ERIE. 

Lights,  buoys,  harbors,   etc.,   on  the  south 

shore,  66  to  78. 
Oompaas  courses  and  distances  on  south  shore, 

78  to  79. 
Magnetic  declinations,  79. 
Lignts,   buuys,   harbors,  etc.,  on  the  north 

shore,  79  to  H8. 
CompasH  couraea  and  distanoea  on  the  north 

shore,  88  to  80. 
Buoys  at  the  mouth  of  and  in  Detroit  river,  85 

to  87. 


DETROIT  RIVER 
Lights,  buoys,  and  sailing  dhrections,  88  to  M. 

LAKE  ST.  OLAm. 

Lights,  buoys,  courses  and  distance!,  eto.,  on 
both  shores,  99,  98. 

ST.  CLAIR  FLATS. 
Lights,  buoys,  etc.,  98, 94. 

ST.  CLAIR  RIVBBi 
Lights,  buoys,  etc.,  94  to  97. 


LAKE  HURON. 

Lights,  buoys,  harbors,  etc.,  on  the  Amarlean 
shore,  97  to  108. 

Compass  courses  and  distances  on  tha  Ameri- 
can shore,  106  to  112. 

Magnetic  deollnatlnrs,  118. 

Lights,  buoys,  harbors,  etc.,  on  the  Canadian 
shore,  118  to  116. 

Compass  courses  and  distances  on  the  Cana- 
dian shore,  117  to  119. 

GEORGIAN  BAY  AND  NORTH  CHANNEL. 

Lights,  buoys,  harbors,  and  sailing  diraotiona, 

190  to  159. 
Compaaa  courses  and  distanoea,  18S  to  UT. 

STRAITS  OF  MACKINAa 

Lights,  buoys,  harboni,  etc.,  168  to  164. 
Compass  courses  and  distances,  188  to  Ml. 

LAKE  MICHIGAN. 

Lights,  buoys,  har^  ;rs,  etc.,  on  the  east  shon. 

164  to  176. 
Lights,  buoys,  harbors,  etc.,  on  the  west  shon. 

176  to  191. 
Oompaas  courses  and  distances  on  both  shorsa. 

908  to  318  ^ 

Magnetic  declinations,  818. 

GREEN   BAT. 

Lights,  buova,  harbors,  etc.,  191  to  198. 
Counies  und  distances,  SIS  to  917. 
Magnetto  deolluatlons,  917. 


[1] 


STRAITS  OF  ST.  MART. 
Lights,  buoys,  etc.,  919  to  989. 

LAKB  SUPERIOR. 

Lights,  buojra,  harbors,  etc.,  on  the  American 

shore,  ft<9  to  )289. 
Lights,  buoys,  harbora,  etc.,  on  Isle   Rovale 

and  Passage  Island,  940,  941. 
Courses  and  distances  on  both  shores,  841  tc 

M9. 
Magnetic  declinations,  949. 
Llgbta  on  the  Canadian  shore,  900,  MU. 


CONTEKT8. 


DIAGRAMS  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


storm,  cautionary,  and  wind  direction  signals. 

Weather  sienalB- 

Magnetic  chart,  6. 

Oswego  breakwater,  82. 

Toroi'to  harbor,  45. 

Buffalo  brealcwater,  66. 

Erie  harbor  Preaque  isle,  59. 

Cleveland  breakwat«>r,  62. 

Lime-kiln  Crossing  cut,  80. 

Sand  Beach  breaitwaier,  100. 

Ooderich  harbor,  114. 

Grand  Hj.Ten.  Mich..  ITS. 

St.  Joseph  harbor,  174. 

Michigan  City  breakwater,  175. 

Calumet  ($ouUi  Gbloago)  harbor,  177. 


Chicago  breakwater  and  harbor,  179. 

Racine  harbor,  181. 

Milwauk*'e  breakwater,  188. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Ship  canal,  188. 

Grand  Marafs,  Mich.,  224. 

Aflhiand,  Chaquamegon  bay,  234. 

Superior  Cify,  entrance  to  tit.  Louis  river,  990. 

Duiuth  harbor,  287. 

Two  Harbors  (Agate  bay),  988. 

Grand  Marals,  Minn.,  9^. 

Diagrams  to  illustrate  the  rtmning  lights,  256, 

257.258. 
Life  Saving  Service,  diagramfl  to  illustrate  t)ie 

manner  of  working  the  Breeches-buoy  and 

Life-car,  8«7, 268. 


K' 


TABLES. 


' 


For  registering  bearings  wbsn  bwlngin^  ship, 

Deviation  of  the  standard  Compasn,  12. 

For  converting  points  of  the  Compnss  and  their 

fractional  parts  into  degrees,  15,  16. 
Of  uistances  objecrg  can  be  seen  at  sea,  17 
For  converting  Statute  miles    into    Niiii'i<al 

miles,  and  Nautical  miles  into  Statute  uii  hs, 

19. 
Of  distances  on  the  St.  Lawrence  river  and 

Lake  Ontario,  42. 
Of  UistnnceH  on  Lake  Erie  from  Buffalo  to  Fort 

Gratiot,  87. 


Of  distances  on  Lake  Huron  from  Fort  Oratiot 

to  Old  Fort  Mackinac,  IIH. 
Of  distances  on  Lake  Michigan  and  Green  bay, 

218, 
Of  distances  on  Lake  Superior,  250. 
Of  distances  from  BufTalo  to  points  on  Lake 

Erie  and  the  Upper  Lakes,  252. 
Lenrcth  of  a  degree  of  longitude  in  different  lat 

ttudes,  264. 
Showing  the  smallest   locks  on   the  several 

canals,  382. 
Showing  the  mean  level  of  the  lakes  for  a  series 

of  years,  284. 


.    APPENDIX, 


Pilot  rules  for  the  lakes  and  seaboard,  ^^3,  254. 
KunninK  >iKht8,  iliiiKraiua,  and  the  rule  of  the 

road  lit  sen,  !25.5  to  2b^. 
RuleN  relating  to  fog  signals  for  steamers,  sail 

vuHselH,  and  tow  boats,  2tii/. 
Steering  and  sailing  rules,  '..>60,  261,  262. 
GencraT    rule'*  for  steamsbipa    meeting    and 

cros8.ng.  -Mi,  263. 
The  leud,  263. 

Code  of  engine  signals,  263,  264. 
Nautical  and  statute  miles,  264.  < 

Life  Having  Hervice,  265  to  271. 
Treatment  of  frost-bites,  271,  272. 
To  measure  dl-^tances  by  sound,  879. 
To  d>  terinine  the  distanoe  uf  an  object  on  shore, 

when  ruuulug  along  the  land,  V^d, 


The  barometer,  278. 274. 

The  thertnometer,  274. 

Instrumental  and  other  local  indications  of  a^ 

proaching  storms,  275,  V7ii. 
Proverbs  relating  to  clouds  /376,  277,  278. 
Proverbs  relating  to  the  moon,  278,  279. 
Proverbs  relating  to  rain,  2.9,  2H0. 
Proverbs  relating  to  rainbow.  280. 
Proverbs  relating  to  stars  and  meteors,  280, 881. 
Proverbs  relatiuK  to  the  sun,  281.  SSi. 
St  Cla>r  Flats  Ship-canal,  2»2,  tttM. 
St.  Mary's  Falls  Khlp-canai,  28;). 
Qreniesr  depth  of  water  on  the  lakes,  283. 
Area  of  the  lakes,  and  their  height  above  tb« 

•tta,284. 


-^^ 


"M:- 


PREFACE. 


ktlons  of  ap- 


In  presenting  the  Fourth  Edition  of  Scott's  New^  Coast  Pilot  to  the 
pnbiio,  the  author  desires  to  say  that  the  former  Editions  Lave  been 
carefully  revised  and  corrected  and  many  additions  made. 

The  publication  of  a  New  Edition  of  the  Coast  Pilot  at  this  time  is 
rendered  necessary  by  the  many  changes  that  have  taken  place  in  the 
Aids  to  Navigation  and  the  improvements  made  to  the  Rivers  and 
Harbors  within  the  last  two  years,  or  since  the  last  Edition  of  the  Coast 
Pilot  was  published. 

Among  the  many  new  Aids  to  Navigation  that  have  been  established, 
and  changes  made  during  the  last  year  may  be  mentioned  the  lights  on 
Devil  island,  Two  Harbors,  Seul  Choiz  pointe,  Chicago  breakwater. 
Windmill  Point  ranges,  and  Grosse  Isle  ranges ;  the  light-vessels  on 
Simmon's  reef,  White  shoals,  and  Gray's  reefs  ;  and  the  change  in  the 
character  of  tb&  lights  on  Point  Betsey,  Porte  des  Morts,  Saginaw  river, 
Tawas,  and  Portage  river,  Lake  Superior.  Fog-signals  on  Devil  island. 
Two  Harbors,  Lapoint,  and  Point  Betsey  ;  and  changes  at  Evanston  and 
Mississagua  straits  (Canadian)  ;  buoys  at  Squaw  island.  Garden  island, 
at  the  north  end  of  Lake  Michigan,  and  in  the  Strawberry  passage.  Green 
Bay  ;  and  the  removal  of  the  iron  buoys  on  Simmon's  reef.  White  shoals, 
and  Gray's  reefs,  and  change  from  spar  buoys  to  iron  buoys  o'^  'Vienna 
and  Waugoshance  shoals.  The  straight  channel  in  Maumee  Jay  has 
been  out  from  the  Bay  ranger  into  the  mouth  of  the  river.  Many  lights 
have  been  established  by  the  Canadian  Government,  and  the  canal  con- 
necting the  Bay  of  Qumte  with  Presque  Isle  bay  is  completed — all  of 
which  nave  been  carefully  noted. 

The  St.  Mary's  River  range  lights  and  beacons  are  now  in  the  course 
of  construction,  and  it  is  thought  they  will  be  in  operation  before  the 
close  of  the  season. 

A  little  map  of  Port  Arthur  and  Fort  William,  and  the  Storm  Signal 
Code,  as  employed  at  Canadian  Lake  Stations,  with  directions  to  mariners 
with  reference  to  their  use,  has  been  introduced. 

A  new  Magnetic  Chart  for  the  year  1890,  showing  the  lines  of  equal 
magnetic  declinations  (called  Isogonic  lines),  is  given.  This  chart  shows 
the  variation  of  the  compass  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Lakes,  and  it  is  very 
important  when  we  consider  that  all  the  courses  taken  from  the  charts 
of  the  Lake  Survey,  and  the  courses  and  bearings  given  in  the  U.  S. 
Lighthouse  and  Buoy  list)*  are  true,  and  require  to  be  corrected  for 
variation  before  being  used. 

The  Depth  of  Water  given  in  the  harbors  are  not  always  to  be  relied 
on,  owing  partly  to  the  fluctuations  of  the  water  surface  of  the  Lakts, 
but  more  particularly  lo  the  formation  of  sand  bars  between  or  in 
advance  of  the  piers.  The  only  remedy  for  these  obstructions  is  the 
extension  of  the  piers  and  annual  dredging. 

It  is  confidently  believed  that  the  "Coast  Pilot"  is  now  much 
improved,  and  will  be  of  service  to  Vessel  Masters  as  a  ready  reference. 
Bad  mistakes  are  frequently  made,  not  from  a  want  of  knowledge  on  the 
subject,  but  from  a  temporary  incorrectness  of  thought ;  this  is  fre- 
quently the  case  in  applying  variation,  and  deviation,  in  correcting  com- 
pass errors.  It  will  aho  be  of  service  to  those  who  are  not  gifted  with 
retentive  memories.  The  work  is  particularly  recommend  to  the  young 
sailor  who  desires  to  succeed  in  his  calling,  who  by  carefully  studying 
the  charts,  and  the  "Coast  Pilot,"  can  acquire  a  knowledge  of  the 
Lakes  in  a  short  time,  what  others  have  been  years  learning  by  personal 
observation. 


mmmm'mm 


v^ 


\ 


VABIATION   OF   THE  COMPASS. 


VARIATION  OF  THE  COMPASS. 

The  True  Meridian. — A  line  drawn  direct  from  the  north  pole 
to  the  south  pole,  cutting  the  equator  at  right  angles,  is  a  true  meridian. 

The  Magnetic  Meridian. — The  direction  taken  by  the  north 
end  of  a  freely  suspended  magnet  (compass  needle)  is  the  magnetic 
meridian. 

The  Magnetic  Equator. — The  term  magnetic  equator  is  applied 
to  those  places  where  the  needle  has  no  inclination  or  dip,  but  rests  in  a 
horizontal  direction.  The  line  of  no  dip  (magnetic  equator)  nearly  coin- 
cides with  the  geographical  equator;  proceeding  north  ward  the  north  end 
of  the  needle  is  drawn  downward  at  an  increasing  angle,  called  the  dip^ 
until  it  becomes  vertical;  but  proceeding  southward  the  south  end  of  the 
needle  dips  in  the  same  manner.  The  lines  of  equal  dip  are  nearly  par- 
allel. 

The  Magnetic  Pole. — The  term  magnetic  pole  is  generally 
applied  to  those  positions  on  the  earth's  surface  where  the  horizontal 
force  disappears  and  a  freely  suspended  needle  becomes  vertical. 

VariatioUc — The  angle  included  between  the  true  meridian  and 
the  magnetic  meridian  is  called  the  variation  of  the  compass.  The  error 
from  the  variation  of  the  compass  being  entirely  independent  of  the  ship, 
affects  every  point  of  the  compass  to  the  same  extent.  This  angle  varies 
in  different  localities,  and  there  is  a  small  annual  change;  the  easterly 
variation  is  decreasing,  and  the  westerly  variation  is  increasing  at  the 
rate  of  from  3'  to  5'  annually.  A  magnetic  chart  is  given  in  this  work 
showing  the  lines  of  equal  variation,  and  tables  of  magnetic  declinations, 
showing  the  variation  of  the  compass  at  the  most  important  points  on 
each  of  the  great  lakes.  These  tables  have  been  carefully  selected  from 
a  chart  and  table  of  magnetic  declinations  in  Professional  Papers,  Corps 
of  Engineers,  U.  S.  Lake  Survey,  corrected  to  the  year  1890. 

TO  CORRECT  A  COMPASS   COURSE   FOR  VARIA- 
TION. 

Case  I. — In  this  case,  suppose  the  course  has  been  steered  and  it  ia 
desired  to  find  the  true  course  made  good. 

If  the  Variation  is  Easterly^  that  is  if  the  north  point  of  the 
compass  is  drawn  to  the  eastward,  or  right  hand,  allow  it  to  the  right. 
If  the  variation  is  westerly,  that  is  if  the  north  point  of  the  compass  ia 
drawn  to  the  westward  or  left  hand,  allow  it  to  the  left. 

Note. — AH  courses  and  bearings  given  on  the  charts  of  the  Lake 
Survey  are  True,  and  require  to  be  corrected  for  variation  and  deviation 
where  it  exists. 

Example  1.  The  compass  course  steered  E.  by  S.  J  S.  or  S.  73"  1'  E. 
with  variation  6*  37'  E.  gives  the  true  or  chart  course  8.  67**  30'  E.  or 
£.  S.  Di.  

ExAMPLB  2.  The  compass  course  steered  S.  W.  by  W.  or  S.  56^  15' 
W.  with  variation  4°  W.  gives  the  true  or  chart  course  S.  62°  16'  W.  or 
S.  W.  f  W.  nearly. 

ExAMPLB  3.  The  compass  course  steered  N.  E.  or  N.  46**  E.  with 
variation  8*»  26'  E.  gives  the  true  or  chart  course  N.  53"  26'  E.  or  N.  E. 


' 


> 


'  T'E. 
E.  or 

i6o  16' 
W.  or 

with 

N.  E. 


6 


VARIATION   OF   THE   COMPASS. 


TO  CORRTJOT  A  COMPASS  BEARING  FOR  VARIA- 
TION. 

The  oorreotion  is  precisely  the  same  as  in  Case  L  for  oorreoting  a 
compass  course  for  variation. 

EzAMPLK  1.  An  object  bears  S.  E.  or  S.  46**  E.  the  variation  is  6° 
37'  W.  the  true  bearing  will  ha  S.  50»  37'  E.  or  S.  E.  ^  E. 

ExAHPLK  2.  An  object  bears  W.  by  N.  or  N.  78"  46'  W.  the  varia- 
tion is  no  16'  E.  the  true  bearing  will  be  N.  67°  30'  W.  or  W.  N.  W. 

Note* — With  easterly  variation  the  true  bearing  is  always  to  the 
right  of  the  magnetic  bearing,  and  with  westerly  variation  to  the  left. 
But  if  the  true  bearing  is  given  to  find  the  magnetic,  the  rule  must  be 
reversed. 

TO  SHAPE  A  COMPASS  COURSE  CORRECTED  FOR 

VARIATION. 

Case  II.  It  is  required  in  this  case  to  correct  the  course  for  varia- 
tion before  steering;  it  is  the  reverse  of  Case  I. 

^  the  variation  is  easterlyj  aUoto  it  to  the  left.  If  the  variation  it 
xoMterly^  aUoto  it  to  the  right  gives  compass  course. 

Example  1.  The  true  or  chart  course  from  Devil  island  to  Duluth, 
Lake  Superior,  is  W.  by  S.  f  S.  or  8.  70°  19'  W.  the  variation  at  Devil 
island  is  about  8°  E.  and  at  Duluth  10°  E.;  one-half  the  sum  of  these 
variations  9°  E.  is  the  mean  variation,  which  is  approximately  equal  to 
}  of  a  point  of  the  compass;  as  the  variation  is  easterly,  the  correction 
is  made  by  applying  the  9"  or  f  of  apoint  to  the  left  hand,  making  the 
corrected  compass  course  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  or  S.  61°  19'  W. 

Example  2.  The  true,  or  chart  course  from  Port  Dalhousie  to  the 
Ducks,  on  Lake  Ontario,  is  E.  by  N.  f  N.  or  N.  70°  19'  E.;  the  variation 
at  Port  Dalhousie  is  4°  W.  and  at  the  Ducks  about  7°  W.;  one-half  the 
sum  of  these  variations  5^°  W.  is  the  mean  variation,  which  is  practically 
equal  to  ^  a  point  of  the  compass,  as  the  variation  is  westerly,  the  oorreo- 
tion is  made  oy  applying  the  6^°  or  ^  a  point  to  the  right  hand,  making 
the  corrected  compass  course  E.  by  N.  i  N.  or  N.  76°  66'  £. 

Example  S.  The  true  or  chart  course  from  Chicago  to  Pilot  island, 
entrance  to  Green  bay,  is  N.  8°  E.  or  N.  f  E.  nearly,  the  variation  at 
Chicago  is  4°  12'  E.  and  at  Pilot  island  3**  28'  £.;  one-half  the  sum  of 
these  variations  8°  60'  E.  is  the  mean  variation,  which  is  practically 
equal  to  f  of  a  point  of  the  compass,  as  the  variation  is  easterly  the  cor- 
rection is  made  by  applying  the  f  of  a  point,  or  3°  60'  to  the  left  hand, 
making  the  corrected  compass  course  N.  4°  10'  E.  or  N.  f  E.  nearly. 

DEVIATION  OF  THE  COMPASS  ON  IRON  AND 
STEEL  SHIPS.— Extracts  from  Naval  Professional  Papers,  by  T. 
A.  Lyons,  Lieut.  Commander  IT.  S.  N.  The  Sailor's  Pocket  Book,  by 
Capt.  F.  G.  D.  Bedford,  R.  N.,  and  the  Reports  ot  the  Liverpool  Com- 
pass Committee. 

The  Magniet. — The  characteristic  features  of  a  magnet  are  two 
poles  of  equal  strength  but  of  different  nature  ;  they  are  separated  by  a 
neutral  ground. 

Induction. — The  production  of  magnetic  power  in  iron  by  the 
action  of  an  external  magnet  is  called  "  induction."      The  magnet  pole 


LRIA- 

aoting  a 

on  iit  6° 

le  varia- 
^.  W. 

B  to  the 
the  left, 
must  Im 

>  FOB 

»r  varia- 

iation  U 

Duluth, 
at  Devil 
of  these 
equal  to 
)rrection 
.king  the 

to  the 

rariation 

lalf  the 

Eiotioally 

oorreo- 

making 

island, 
ition  at 

sum  of 
lotioally 
the  oor- 
hand, 

ly. 

AND 

h  by  T. 
ook,  by 
)1  Com- 

ire  two 
ed  by  a 

by  the 
et  pole 


DEVIATION   OF  THE  COMPASS.  7 

by  induction  produces  a  pole  of  opposite  character  in  the  nearest  part  of 
the  iron. 

THE  COMPASS  NEEDLE  is  a  freely  suspended  magnet,  that 
is  free  to  move  horizontally. 

Polarity. — The  influence  that  gives  directive  force  to  the 
compass  needle,  causing  it  to  point  to  the  magnetic  north,  is  called 
polarity. 

It  is  customary  to  regard  the  polarity  which  exists  in  the  north  end 
of  the  compass  needle  "north"  (red)  polarity,  whence  it  follows  that 
"south"  (blue)  polarity  must  pervade  the  regions  of  the  terrestrial 
north,  because  it  is  a  law  of  nature  that  bodies  similarly  magnetized 
will  repel,  while  those  dissimilarly  magnetized  will  attract  each  other. 

Soft  Iron,  as  regards  magnetism,  is  iron  which  becomes  instantly 
magnetized  to  its  full  capacity,  when  exposed  to  the  influence  of  any 
magnetized  body,  and  which  loses  its  magnetism  instantly  when  the 
influencing  body  is  removed. 

Hard  Iron,  is  iron  which  does  not  become  magnetized  by  ordinary 
induction,  but  which,  when  magnetized,  retains  its  magnetism,  unafiFected 
by  the  influence  of  other  magnetic  bodies  ;  it  becomes  magnetic  by  in- 
duction aided  by  percussion  ;  permanent  magnets  are  necessarily  made 
of  hard  iron. 

Supposing  south  (blue^  polarity  to  pervade  the  northern  hemisphere, 
then  if  a  bar  of  "  soft "  iron  be  held  in  a  vertical  position,  it  becomes 
magnetic  through  the  inductive  agency  of  the  earth's  vertical  force,  the 
lower  end  will  be  magnetized  with  "north"  (red)  polarity,  and  the 
upper  end  with  " south "  (blue)  polarity  ;  turn  the  bar  eiu  for  end,  and 
the  polarity  is  instantly  reversed  ;  the  upper  end  of  the  bar  will  attract 
the  north  end  of  the  compass  needle,  and  the  lower  end  will  repel  it. 
If  the  bar  is  laid  horizontally  in  the  meridian  it  will  become  magnetic 
through  the  inductive  agency  of  the  earth's  horizontal  force,  the  north 
end  will  be  magnetized  with  "  north  "  (red)  polarity,  and  the  other  end 
with  "  south "  (blue)  polarity ;  if  the  bar  is  turned  transverse  to  the 
meridian,  that  is  cast  and  west,  it  will  lose  its  magnetism. 

THE  DEVIATION  of  the  compass  on  board  an  iron  or  steel  ship 
is  composed  of  three  parts,  namely,  the  /Semicircular  Deviation,  the 
Quadrantal  Deviation,  and  the  Heding  Error.  Some  persons  use  the 
terms  Variation  and  Deviation  of  the  compass,  as  if  they  were  of  the 
same  meaning.  The  well  informed  seaman  mal  zz  a  great  distinction 
between  the  two,  for  the  following  reasons  :  The  error  from  Variation 
of  the  compass,  arises  from  the  magnetic  north  not  coinciding  with  the 
true  north ;  it  is  always  the  same  at  the  same  place  and  time ;  it  is  inde- 
pendent of  the  ship  entirely,  and  affects  every  point  of  the  compass  to 
the  same  extent.  But  it  is  not  so  with  Deviation  of  the  compass,  which 
is  caused  by  the  iron  in  the  ship,  and  which  varies  on  almost  every  point 
of  the  compass. 

THE  SEMICIRCULAR  DEVIATION,  so  called  because  all 
the  phases  occur  in  a  semicircle,  is  due  chiefly  to  the  permanent  magnet- 
ism  acquired  while  the  ship  was  being  built ;  the  ship  has  become  a 
magnet  partly  by  the  inductive  agency  of  the  earth's  magnetism,  and 
partly  by  the  great  amount  of  hammering  she  has  received.    The  direo- 


R 


8 


DEVIATION    OF   THE  COMPASS. 


tion  of  the  magnetism  of  the  ship  as  affecting  the  compass  may  be 
inferred  from  the  direction  in  which  her  head  was  while  building.  The 
direction  of  the  ship's  magnetic  force  coincides  nearly  with  the  line  drawn 
on  deck  in  a  magnetic  north  and  south  direction,  and  the  points  of  max- 
imum  semicircular  deviation  are  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the 
ship's  head  in  building. 

In  iron  ships  the  north  end  of  the  compass  is  invariably  drawn 
towards  that  part  of  the  ship,  which  was  furthest  from  the  north  while 
the  ship  was  building. 

In  an  iron  ship,  built  with  her  head  to  the  north,  the  bow  becomes 
magnetized  with  "  north "  (red)  polarity,  and  the  stern  with  '*  south  " 
(blue)  polarity,  and  when  she  lies  with  her  head  in  a  north  or  south 
direction,  there  is  no  apparent  attraction  of  the  needle  towards  either 
side,  because  the  attraction  is  in  the  direction  of  the  needle,  but  with 
her  head  in  all  other  directions  there  is  a  strong  attraction  towards  the 
stern. 

With  ships  built  with  head  to  the  south,  the  same  principle  will  apply, 
the  deviation  being  then  towards  the  bow. 

When  built  with  head  to  the  east,  the  deviation  is  towards  the  star- 
board side  (the  south  in  building),  and  when  built  with  head  to  the  west, 
to  the  port  side  (the  south  in  building). 

In  ships  built  in  intermediate  positions  the  proceeding  chixracteristics 
are  combined,  thus  :  If  built  with  head  to  the  N.  E.,  the  attraction  will 
be  aft  and  to  starboard  ;  with  head  to  the  N.  W.,  aft  and  to  port.  If 
the  head  be  S.  E.  or  S,  W.,  the  attraction  will  be  forward  and  to  star- 
board, or  forward  and  to  port  respectively. 

The  amount  of  original  magnetism  appears  to  have  relation  to  the  size 
of  the  vessel,  or  the  quantity  of  iron  used  in  her  construction,  in  a  ship 
of  400  tons  built  head  to  east,  if  a  compass  be  carried  fore  and  aft  on  a 
ceiicer  line  three  or  four  feet  from  deck  the  deviation  may  be  10°  or  12** 
when  her  head  is  north  or  south.  In  a  ship  100^  tons  it  may,  under  tiie 
same  circumstances,  be  25*  or  30°. 

It  is  convenient  to  regard  the  magnetism  of  a  ship  as  taking  effect  in 
three  disturbing  forces,  the  one  acting /ore  and  aft,  one  acting  athwart- 
ship,  and  the  third  vertical.  The  one  acting  in  a  fore  and  aft  direction 
produces  a  deviation  named  B,  the  one  acting  in  an  athwartship  direc- 
tion producing  a  deviation  named  G  ;  therefore  B  and  C  constitute  the 
semicircular  deviation.  The  vertical  force  will  produce  no  deviation 
when,  as  we  here  suppose,  the  ship  is  on  an  even  keel. 

The  only  way  of  destroying  the  effect  of  one  magnetic  disturbing 
force,  is  to  introduce  another  magnetic  disturbing  agent,  whose  force 
follows  the  same  laws  and  has  the  same  magnitude,  but  which  acts  in  the 
opposite  direction,  or  in  other  words  the  effects  of  hard  iron  must  be 
corrected  by  hard  iron,  and  the  effects  of  soft  iron  by  soft  iron.  If, 
therefore,  in  the  semicircular  deviation  B  and  C  are  known,  the  direc- 
tion in  which  the  counteracting  force  should  be  introduced  can  readily 
be  determined,  and  the  deviation  corrected. 

TO  CORRECT  A  COMPASS  BY  TWO  MAGNETS.— 

This  is  the  method  mostly  used  in  the  merchant  service.  Bring  the 
ship's  head  east  or  west  magnetic  ;  then  place  a  magnet  in  a  fore  and  aft 
direction,  with  the  middle  of  the  magnet's  length  in  the  vertical  plane, 
passing  athwartship  through  the  center  of  the  compass  card  ;  move  the 
magnet  nearer  or  farther  off  until  the  compass  points  correctly  ;  that 


may  be 
r.  The 
e  drawn 
of  raax- 
of  the 

drawn 
h  while 

Decomes 
'  south  '* 
>r  south 
Is  either 
ut  with 
irds  the 

11  apply, 

the  star- 
;he  west, 

steristics 

ition  will 

ort.      If 

to  star- 

I  the  size 
1  a  ship 
on  a 
or  12® 
ider  tiie 

feet  in 
ithwart- 
irection 
direc- 
utn  the 

viation 

turbing 
force 
s  in  the 
uust  be 

If, 

I  direc- 

readily 


ITS.— 

|ng  the 

ind  aft 

plane, 

\\e  the 

that 


n. 


DEVIATION    OF   THE   COMPASS. 


9 


Jiart  of  the  semicircular  deviation  called  B  (produced  by  the  fore-and-aft 
,orce)  is  thus  corrected.  Similarly  with  the  ship's  head  north  or  south 
magnetic,  place  a  magnet  athwartship  parallel  to  the  deck,  with  the 
middle  of  the  magnet's  length  in  the  vertical  plane,  passing  fore  and  aft 
through  the  center  of  the  compass  ;  move  the  magnet  near  or  farther  off 
until  the  compass  points  correctly  ;  that  part  of  the  semicircular  devia- 
tion called  C  (produced  by  the  athwartship  force  of  the  ship)  is  thus 
corrected.  The  B  or  fore  and  aft  magnet  may  be  placed  either  on  the 
port  or  starboard  side  of  the  compass,  and  the  C  magnet  either  before  or 
abaft  the  compass,  but  neither  magnet  should  be  in  the  same  horizontal 
plane  as  the  card,  nor  should  either  be  within  twice  the  length  of  the 
compass  needle  from  the  centr"  of  the  compass  card. 

The  magnets  can  be  secured  to  the  sides  of  the  binnacle  or  to  the  deck, 
but  care  should  be  taken  that  they  be  not  reversed  if  taken  up  for  any 
purpose. 

The  semicircular  deviation  of  the  compass  in  an  iron  ship  alters  when 
the  vessel  has  lain  a  long  time  on  the  same  course,  or  has  been  a  long 
time  alongside  a  wharf,  or  in  a  dry  dock  with  her  head  in  one  direction. 

It  is  important  that  every  new  ship,  after  launching,  should  be  turned 
around  and  kept  with  her  head  in  the  opposite  direction  from  which  she 
was  built,  in  order  that  she  may  lose  as  much  as  possible  of  the  magnet- 
ism, which  has  not  been  firmly  hammered  into  her,  before  adjusting  the 
compasses. 

THE  QUADRANTAIi  DEVIATION  of  the  compass,  so 
called  because  all  its  phases  occur  in  a  quadrant,  is  caused  solely  by  the 
**  soft "  iron  in  the  ship  ;  it  does  not  change  by  the  lapse  of  time,  or  change 
of  geographical  position.  The  earth's  magnetic  force  which  produces  the 
greatest  force  when  the  ship  is  on  the  quadrantal  points,  viz  :  N.  E.,  S. 
E.,  S.  W.  and  N.  W.,  and  no  effect  when  she  is  on  the  cardinal  points, 
viz :  north,  east,  south  and  west.  This  will  appear  evident  when 
we  consider  that  when  a  ship  heads  north  or  south  the  attraction  is  in 
the  direction  of  the  needle  ;  and  when  heading  east  or  west  the  soft  iron 
loses  its  magnetism.  Such  deviation  is  caused  chiefly  by  the  iron  beams 
of  the  ship,  and  generally  is  easterly  when  the  ship's  ^c<id  points  in  the 
N.  E.  and  S.  W.  quadrants,  and  westerly  when  it  points  in  the  N.  W. 
and  S.  E.  quadrants.  Its  amount  does  not  usually  exceed  two  or  three 
degrees  except  in  Iron  Clads.  To  find  the  amount  of  the  quadrantal 
deviation,  take  J  the  algebraic  sum  of  the  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  points  ;  thus 
in  the  English  iron  ciad  ship  Achilles  the  deviation  at  the  N.  E.  is  24** 
10'  east  (marked  +),  the  deviation  at  S.  W.  is  10°  30'  west  (marked  — ) 
half  the  algebraic  sum  of  these  two  6°  50'.  To  find  the  quadrantal 
deviation  from  the  deviations  on  the  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  points,  the  signs 
of  both  quantities  must  be  changed  ;  thus  in  the  Achilles  the  deviation 
at  N.  W.  is  19°  30'  west  (or  — )  at  S.  E.  6°  east  (or  +) ;  half  the  alge- 
braic sum  of  +  19°  30'  and —  6°  is  -J-  6°  45'. 

As  the  deviation  is  caused  by  '*  soft"  iron,  we  must  use  "soft"  iron  to 
correct  it,  and  this  is  not  easy  in  practice,  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  get- 
ting iron  magnetically  "soft"  or  free  from  permanent  magnetism,  and 
also  from  the  close  proximity  to  the  compass  which  the  correctors  must 
occupy.  On  this  account,  as  well  as  from  the  fact  that  the  *.]uadrantal 
deviation  is  unvarying,  and  usually  of  moderate  amount,  correction  for 
quadrantal  deviation  is  not  often  applied.      The  object  of  mechanical 


1 


10 


DBYIATION   OF   THE   COMPASS. 


oorrection  of  th6  compass  being  not  an  attempt  at  rigorous  accuracy,  but 
to  bring  the  deviation  within  manageable  limits. 

For  the  correction  of  large  quadrantal  deviations,  cast-iron  cylinder!, 
from  nine  to  twelve  inches  long,  are  placed  on  a  level  with  the  compass 
needle;  for  smaller  errors,  boxes  containing  small  iron  chain  or  pieces  of 
annealed  wire  are  used,  one  on  each  side  of  the  compass. 

THE  HEELING  ERROR  is  caused  (1)  by  the  Vertical  force 
of  the  ship's  magnetism  which  was  acquired  while  building;  (2)  by  ver- 
tical  induction  in  vertical  soft  iron;  and  (3)  by  vertical  induction  in  the 
beams,  which  are  also  soft  iron.  The  mechanical  correction  is  made  by 
a  magnet  placed  in  a  vertical  position  under  the  center  of  the  compass 
card  at  such  a  distance  as  shall  be  found  suitable.  This  distance  may 
be  determined  by  heeling  the  ship  about  10**  with  her  head  in  the  direc* 
tion  which  was  north  by  compass  when  she  was  upright.  Then  place 
the  magnet  very  accurately^  in  its  position  perpendicular  to  the  ship's 
deck — with  windward  heelmg  error  the  north  end  of  the  magnet  should 
be  uppermost,  with  leeward  error  the  south  end.  Raise  or  lower  the 
magnet  until  the  compass  points  correctly.  Heeling  Error  applies  prin- 
cipally  to  iron  sailing  and  steam  ships  when  heeled  over  by  a  press  of 
canvas,  and  as  there  are  no  iron  sailing  ships  on  the  lakes  at  the  present 
time,  and  steamers  do  not  carry  suflScient  sail  to  heel  them  over,  the 
whole  subject  of  healing  error,  as  far  as  lake  navigation  is  concerned, 
might  be  dismissed  from  view. 

DEVIATION  OF  THE  COMPASS  ON  WOODEN 
SHIPS. — In  wooden  sailing  ships  the  points  of  maximum  deviation 
of  the  compass  are  at  east  and  west;  their  deviation,  which  is  small, 
arises  from  induced  magnetism  in  vertical  iron,  the  effects  of  which  vary 
as  the  tangent  of  the  dip.  In  the  northern  hemisphere  the  deviation  is 
easterly  on  easterly  courses,  and  westerly  on  westerly  courses. 

In  wooden  steam  ships  where  the  smoke  pipe  and  machinery  and  boil- 
ers are  forward  of  the  compass,  the  deviation  will  be  easterly  on  easterly 
courses,  and  westerly  on  westerly  courses;  but  if  the  smoke  pipe,  etc., 
are  abaft  the  compass  and  near  eno  \^b  to  influence  it,  the  conditions 
will  be  reversed. 

When  the  compass  in  a  wooden  ship,  sailing  continually  in  about  the 
same  latitude,  has  been  properly  adjusted,  it  is  permanent,  unless  some 
change  takes  place  in  her  smoke  pipe  or  machinery. 

[In  the  foregoing  remarks  on  the  deviation  of  the  compass,  directions 
have  been  given  for  its  correction  by  the  application  of  magnets. 

The  methods  appear  to  be  easy,  the  operation  being  entirely  mechani- 
cal; still,  to  meet  all  the  conditions  that  may  arise,  it  requires  skill  and 
experience,  and  the  placing  the  magnets  should  be  done  only  by  a  prac- 
tical compass  adjuster,  the  cost  of  which  is  trifling  when  compared  with 
its  importance, — Publisher.] 

As  the  correction  of  the  compass  for  deviation  by  magnets  does  not 
always  remove  quite  all  the  error,  and  as  the  magnetism  particularly  in 
new  iron  ships  is  liablo  to  change,  the  deviation  should  be  frequently 
ascertained  by  swinging  the  ship  around  so  as  to  bring  her  head  on  every 
point  of  the  compass;  and  as  her  head  approaches  each  of  the  points  to 
check  her  way,  in  order  to  prevent  the  swinging  of  the  compass  card; 
when  she  is  quite  steady,  and  her  head  exactly  on  any  point,  the  exact 
bearing  of  some  distant  object  (whose  magnetic  direction  is  known,  and 


DRYIATION   OF  THB  (X>MPA88. 


11 


whose  distance  should  not  be  less  than  8  miles)  is  to  be  taken  with  the 
standard  compass  and  noted  in  a  table  she  should  be  hauled  around  in 
the  same  manner  to  the  next  point,  and  when  steady  on  it,  the  bearings 
of  the  same  object  is  again  observed  and  recorded,  and  so  on  nntil  the 
bearings  of  the  distant  object  has  been  taken  successively  on  every  point 
of  the  compass  and  recorded. 

The  bearings  of  the  distant  object  can  be  ascertained  by  taking  the 
standard  compass  on  shore  to  some  place  where  the  distant  object  and 
the  ship  is  in  line,  and  there  observe  its  bearings.  Or  by  footing  up  all 
the  bearings,  if  taken  by  degrees,  and  dividing  the  sum  by  the  number 
of  observations  this  would  give  the  mean  bearing;  theoretically,  this  is 
the  more  correct  method. 

When  it  is  not  convenient  to  swing  the  ship,  it  is  a  good  plan  to  take 
the  standard  compass  on  shore  whenever  an  opportunity  occurs,  and  take 
the  bearings  of  some  object  in  line  with  the  binnacle,  and  then  take  the 
bearings  when  the  compass  is  restored  to  the  binnacle  and  note  the  dif- 
ference;  of  course  this  would  give  the  deviation  only  on  that  point,  and 
for  the  standard  compass  only. 

Another  method  is  to  watch  the  courses  she  makes  when  running  on 
compass  courses  that  are  well  known,  and  note  the  difference  for  that 
particular  course. 


FORM  GENERALLY  UPED   FOR  REGISTERING   BEARINGS 

WHEN  SWINGING  SHIP. 

Note. — The  following  are  actual  bearings  taken  of  the  Lower 
Lighthouse  at  the  St.  Clair  Flats  Canal  from  a  point  in  Lake  St.  Clair, 
nine  miles  distant: 

OOBBECT  MAGNETIC   BBABIXO   N.    28|*'    E.,    OB   N.    TSf,    B.    ^   E.    NBABLT. 


by  Standard 
Oompass. 


North. 
N.  by  B. 
N.  N.E. 
N.  E.  by  N. 
N.  E. 

N.  E.  by  E. 
E.  N.  E. 
E.  by  N. 
Bast. 
E.  by  8. 
B.  8.  E. 
8.  E.  by  B. 
S.  E. 

8.  E  by  S. 
8.  8.  E. 
8.  by  B. 


Bearings 

of  Liehchouse 

by  Standard 

Compass. 


N.  84Vi«  E. 
N.  22  E 
N.  19 
N.  17U  E 
N.  17  E, 
N.  16 
N.  16 

N.  leyi 

N.  17 

N.  18 

N.  19^ 

N.  21>2  E, 
E 
E. 


E. 


E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 
E. 


N.  24 

N.  2tt 


N.28U 
N.  80^ 


E. 

B. 


Deviation 

of  Standard 

Compass. 

4» 

E. 

«V 

jE. 

»M 

E. 

11 

E. 

IIV 

^E. 

KM 

E. 

\^A\ 

E. 

12 

E. 

IIV^ 

fE. 

\oy 

^E. 

d 

E. 

7 

fi. 

^M 

5E. 

2Vi 

^E. 

0 

2 

w. 

Head 

by  Standard 

Compass. 


W, 


South. 
8.  by  W. 
8.  8.  W. 
8.W.byS 
8.  W. 
8.  W.  by 
W.  8.  W. 
W.  by  S. 
West. 
W.  by  N. 
W.N.  W. 
N.  W.  by  W. 
N  W. 

N.  W.  by  N. 
N.  N.  W. 
N.  by  W. 


Bearings 

of  LiKbthouse 

by  Standard 

Compass. 

N. 

82W' 

E. 

N. 

34^ 

E. 

N. 

mi 

E. 

N. 

88^ 

E. 

N. 

39 

E. 

N. 

40 

E. 

N. 

41 

E. 

N. 

41 

E. 

N. 

m^ 

E. 

N. 

39 

E. 

N. 

38 

E. 

N. 

36H 

E. 

N. 

34 

E. 

N. 

32^ 

E. 

N 

30 

B. 

N 

87 

B. 

Deviation 

of  Standard 

Compass. 


4  W. 
l^W. 
IViE. 


The  sum  of  all  the  bearings  014<>  -i-  32  -  T&yi"  E.  nearly. 


Y  "'  'i: 


12 


DEVIATION   OF   THE   COMPASS. 


DEVIATION  TABLE  FOR  THE  STANDARD  COMPASS. 


Ship's  Head. 

Deviation. 

Coriect  Mag- 
netic Course. 

Ship's  Head. 

Deviation. 

Correct  Mae- 
nelic  Course. 

N. 

0 

4     E. 

0 

N.    4     E. 

8. 

• 
4     W. 

0 
8.  4     B. 

N.  by  E. 

N.  N.  E. 

6^E. 

N.  \t\  E. 

8.  by  W, 

6     W. 

8.   6WW. 

g^E. 

N.  32     E, 

8.  8.  W. 

8      W. 

8.  14W  W. 

N,  E.  by  N. 

HE. 

N.  4494  E.  . 

8.  W.  by  8. 

10    w. 

8.  88«  W. 
8.  34!  W. 
8.  4452  W. 

N.  E. 

11^  E. 

N.  56i?E. 

8.  W. 

low  w. 

N.  E.  by  E. 
E.  N.  E. 

13^  E. 

N.  6«^E. 

8.  W.  by  W. 
W.  8.  W. 

11«  w. 

12^  E. 

N.  80     E. 

12U  w. 

8.  65     W. 

E.  by  N. 

12     E. 

8,  8!*^  E. 

W.  by  8. 

12^  W. 

8.  6«W   W. 

E. 

10^  E.' 

8.  78U  E. 

W. 

12      W. 

8.  78      W. 

E.byS. 

s.  esy  E. 

8.  68>iS  E. 
8.  491.4  E. 
8.  40^  E. 
8.  81^  E. 

W.  by  N. 
W.  N.  W. 

low  W. 

N.  SAW  W. 
N.  77     W. 

E.  8.  E. 

ff^E. 

9^  W. 

8.  E.  by  E. 

7     E. 

N.  W.  by  W. 

8     W. 

N.  64W  W. 

8.  E. 

4^E. 
2^E. 

N.  W. 

6^  W. 

N.  60j2  W. 

8  E.  by  8. 

N.  W.  bv  N. 
N.  N.  W. 

4^  W. 

N.  8«2  W. 

8.  8.  B. 

0 

8.  22^  E. 

!«  W. 

N.  24      W. 

S.  by  E. 

8     W. 

8.  mk  E- 

N.  by  W. 

IViE. 

N.   ^W. 

DIRECTIONS     FOR     CORRECTING     A     COMPASS 
COURSE  FOR  DEVIATION. 

Case  III.  In  this  case  suppose  the  course  has  been  steered,  and  it 
is  desired  to  find  the  correct  magnetic  course  made  good. 

If  the  deviation  is  easterly,  allow  it  to  the  right. 

If  the  deviation  is  westerly,  allow  it  to  the  left. 

Note  1.  The  deviation  is  said  to  be  easterly  when  the  north  point  of 
the  compass  is  drawn  to  the  eastward  or  right  hand,  and  westerly  when 
the  north  point  of  the  compass  is  drawn  to  the  westward  or  left  hand. 

Note  2.  If  the  deviation  table  is  in  degrees  the  course  should  be 
expressed  in  degrees,  otherwise  in  points  and  fractions  of  a  point.  In 
reading  the  compass  by  degrees,  it  is  the  custom  on  shipboard  to  read 
from  north  to  90®  east  or  west,  and  from  south  to  90°  east  or  west. 

Example  1.  The  compass  course  steered  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  67°  30'  E.  with 
deviation  by  the  table  12**  30'  E.  gives  the  correct  magnetic  course  N. 
80«  E.  or  E.  I  N.  nearly. 

Example  2.  The  compass  course  steered  S.  W.  or  S.  45**  W.  with 
deviation  by  the  table  10°  80'  W.  gives  the  correct  magnetic  course  8. 
34°  30'  W.  or  S.  W.  I  S.  nearly. 

Example  3.  The  compass  coarse  steered  E.  S.  E.  or  S.  67°  30'  E.  with 
deviation  by  the  table  9**  E.  gives  the  correct  magnetic  course  S.  58°  30' 
E.  or  E.  S.  E.  f  S.  nearly. 

Example  4.  The  compass  course  steered  W.  by  N.  or  N.  78°  45'  W. 
with  deviation  by  the  table  10°  30'  W.  gives  the  correct  magnetic  course 
N,  89°  16'  W.  or  W.  \  N.  nearly. 


XO    CORRECT    COMPASS    BEARINGS    FOR 

DEVIATION. 

The  correction  is  applied  in  the  same  manner  as  in  case  HI,  except 
that  the  deviation  in  the  dirootion  of  the  ship's  head  is  applied,  and  not 
the  deviation  on  the  bearing. 

Example  i.  The  shipls  head  by  standard  compass  is  E.  N.  E.  the 
deviation  when  heading  on  that  point  of  the  compass  as  shown  in  the 


DEVIATION   OF  THE   0OMPAS8. 


13 


deviation  table  is  12*  30'  E.  a  light  bears  N.  67«  80'  W.  or  W.  N.  W.  the 
correct  magnetic  bearing  will  be  N.  65°  W.  or  N.  W.  ^  W.  nearly. 

Example  2.  The  ship's  head  by  standard  compass  is  S.  W.  the  devia- 
tion when  heading  on  that  point  of  the  compass  as  shown  in  the  devia- 
tion table  is  10**  30'  W.  a  light  bears  N.  22«  30'  E.  or  N.  N.  E.  the  cor- 
rect magnetic  bearing  will  be  N.  12°  E.  or  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  nearly. 

Note.  With  easterly  deviation  the  correct  magnetic  bearing  is 
always  to  the  right  of  the  compass  bearing,  and  with  westerly  deviation 
to  the  left.  This  rule  is  to  be  reversed  when  the  correct  magnetic  bear- 
ing is  given  to  find  the  compass  bearing. 


TO  Stt^  PE  A  COMPASS  COURSE  COBB^^CTED  FOR 

DEVIATION. 

Case  rV.  It  is  required  in  this  case  to  correct  the  compass  course 
for  deviation  before  steering  ;  it  is  the  reverse  of  case  III. 

If  the  Deviation  is  easterly,  allow  it  to  the  left.  If  the  deviation  is 
westerly  allow  it  to  the  right. 

Example  1.  The  correct  magnetic  course  is  E.  with  deviation  by  the 
table  11**  30'  E.  gives  compass  course  corrected  for  deviation  N.  78°  80' 
E.  or  E.  by  N.  nearly. 

Example  2.  The  correct  magnetic  course  is  W.  S.  W.  or  S.  67°  30' 
W.  with  deviation  by  the  table  12**  80'  W.  gives  compass  course  corrected 
for  deviation  S.  80°  W.  or  W.  |  S.  nearly. 

Example  3.  The  correct  magnetic  course  is  N.  N.  E.  or  N.  22°  30'  E. 
with  deviation  by  the  table  9°  30'  E.  gives  compass  course  corrected  for 
deviation  N.  13°  E.  or  N.  by  E.  |  fe.  nearly. 

Example  4.  The  correct  magnetic  course  is  N.  W.  or  N.  45°  W.  with 
deviation  by  the  table  5°  80'  W.  gives  compass  course  corrected  for 
deviation  N.  39°  30'  W.  or  N.  W.  ^  N.  nearly. 


\  with 
>urBe  8. 


I except 
Ind  not 

E.  the 
in  the 


TO  COBRECT  A  COMPASS  COURSE  AT  ONCE  FOB 
BOTH  VABIATION  AND  DEVIATION. 

As  in  case  I  for  correcting  a  compass  course  for  variation,  and  alio 
in  case  III  for  correcting  a  compass  course  for  deviation,  it  is  supposed 
the  course  has  been  steered,  and  it  is  desired  to  find  the  true  course  made 
good. 

If  both  the  deviation  and  variation  are  of  the  same  name,  that  is  both 
east  or  both  west,  add  them  together  and  apply  them  jointly  according 
to  their  name. 

Example.  The  compass  course  steered  is  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  67°  30'  E.  the 
deviation  by  the  table  is  12°  30'  E.  and  the  variation  10°  E.  their  sum  is 
22°  30'  E.  being  applied  to  the  right  hand  of  E.  N.  E.  gives  the  true 
course  N.  90°  E.  or  east. 

But  if  one  be  E.  and  the  other  W.  take  their  difference,  give  it  the 
name  of  the  greater  and  apply  it  according  to  that  name. 

EJxample.  Take  the  same  course  E.  N.  E.  or  N.  67°  30'  E.  and  let  us 
suppose  the  deviation  is  12°  30'  W.  but  the  variation  still  10°  E.  their 
difference  will  be  2°  30'  W.  being  applied  to  the  left  hand  of  E.  N.  E. 
gives  the  true  course  N.  66^  E.  or  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.  nearly. 


1 
I 

1 


14  DEVIATION    OF   THE   COMPASS. 

TO  SHAPE  A  COMPASS  COUBSE  CORRECTED  AT 
ONCE  FOR  DEVIATION  AND  VARIATION. 

( Whefi  the  variation  is  rniall.) 

The  oorreotion  is  applied  in  the  same  manner  as  in  case  II  for  shaping 
a  oompastb  course  corrected  for  variation,  and  in  cane  lY  for  shaping  a 
compass  course  corrected  for  deviation  before  steering. 

If  both  the  deviation  and  variation  are  of  the  same  name,  that  is  both 
east  or  both  west,  add  them  together  and  apply  them  jointly  according 
to  their  name. 

Take  the  3d  example  in  case  lY,  the  true  or  chart  course  from  Chicago 
to  Pilot  Island  is  N.  8^  E.  or  N.  f  E.  nearly ;  the  deviation  in  that 
course  by  the  table  is  6°  30'  E.  and  the  mean  variation  S*'  60'  E.  their 
sum  is  10°  20'  E.  or  nearly  f  of  a  point  of  the  compass,  being  applied  to 
the  left  hand  gives  the  correct  compass  course  N.  2°  20'  W.  or  N.  J  W. 
nearly. 

But  if  one  be  E.  and  the  other  W.  take  their  difference,  give  it  the 
name  of  the  greater  and  apply  it  according  to  that  name. 

Take  the  1st  example  in  case  lY.  The  true  or  chart  course  from 
Devil  island  to  Duluth  is  W.  by  S.  *  S.  or  S.  70«»  19'  W.  the  deviation 
on  that  course  by  the  table  is  12°  30  W.  or  1^  points  of  the  compass 
nearly,  the  mean  variation  is  9°  E.  their  difference  8°  30'  W.  which  beiiig 
applied  to  the  right  hand  gives  the  correct  compass  course  S.  73°  49'  W. 
or  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  nearly. 

Note.  In  ahaping  a  course  when  the  variation  is  large,  the  correction 
for  the  variation  should  be  applied  firftt  to  the  true  course  to  get  the  cor- 
rect magnetic  course,  and  then  the  deviation  for  that  point  taken  from 
the  deviation  table  and  applied  to  the  correct  magnetic  course  to  get  the 
compass  course.  The  reason  for  applying  the  variation  first  is  that  the 
deviation  changes  according  to  the  direction  of  the  ship's  head,  while  the 
variation  is  the  same  on  all  points  of  the  compass.  This  rule  gives  only 
an  approximate  compass  course,  particularly  when  the  deviation  is  large. 
There  are  several  Graphic  Methodo  for  reducing  courses  which  give 
accurate  results,  a  curve  of  deviations  constructed  upon  the  Napier 
method,  or  the  straight  line  method  of  Archibald  Smith  are  considered 
the  best. 


TABLE   OF  THE   ANGLES. 


15 


rED  AT 


or  shaping 
shaping  a 

hat  is  hoth 
according 

m  Chicago 
n  in  that 
10'  E.  their 
applied  to 
3r  N.  i  W. 

give  it  the 

)ur8e  from 
)  deviation 
le  compass 
^hioh  being 
73°  49'  W. 

)  correction 

ret  the  cor- 

aken  from 

)  to  get  the 

is  that  the 

I,  while  the 

^ives  only 

1  is  large. 

lich  give 

He  Napier 

considered 


TABLE 

FOR  CONVERTING  POINTS  OP  THE  COMPASS  AND  THEIB  FRACTIONAL  PARTS 

INTO  DEGREES. 


North  to  East. 

Pointa. 

Degrees, 

fto. 

Points. 

North  to  West. 

North. 

0 

e 

0 

0 

0 

0 

North. 

-   H 

1 

24 

82 

H  - 

N.J4E. 

H  - 

s 

48 

46 

r  ^ 

N.  J4W. 

-  % 

4 

18 

7 

H  - 

N.  HE. 

%  - 

6 

87 

80 

r  « 

N.  i^iW. 

-  % 

7 

1 

62 

H  - 

N.94E. 

H  - 

8 

26 

16 

-  r* 

N.%W. 

-  H 

9 

60 

87 

%  - 

N.byE. 

1 

11 

15 

0 

1 

N.  by  W. 

-   14 

12 

89 

22 

%  - 

N.  by  E.  ii  B. 

H,  - 

14 

3 

45 

-  ^ 

N.  by  W.  J4  W, 

-  H 

16 

28 

7 

%  - 

N.  by  E.  Jii  E. 

yi  - 

10 

52 

80 

-   Hi 

N.  by  W.  %  W. 

-  % 

18 

16 

62 

H   - 

N.  by  E.  %  E. 

9i   - 

19 

41 

16 

-   % 

N.  by  W.  %  W. 

-  H 

21 

5 

87 

%   - 

N.  N.  E. 

2 

22 

80 

0 

2 

N.  N.  W.         9 

-    % 

23 

54 

22 

H  - 

N.  N.  E.  M  E. 

H  - 

25 

18 

45 

-  H 

N.  N.  W.  M  W. 

-  H 

26 

48 

7 

H  - 

N.  N.  E.  14  E. 

•H  - 

28 

7 

80 

-  H 

N.  N.  W.  ^  W. 

-  H 

29 

81 

52 

H  - 

N.  N.  E.  H  E. 

H  - 

80 

66 

16 

-  « 

N.  N.  W.  %  W. 

-  H 

82 

20 

87 

H  - 

N.  E.  by  N. 

3 

88 

46 

0 

8 

N.  W.  by  N. 

-  H 

85 

9 

28 

«   - 

N.  E.  9i  N. 

H  - 

86 

88 

46 

r.  « 

N.  W.  ?i  N. 

-  % 

87 

68 

7 

H  - 

N.  E.  H  N. 

%  - 

89 

22 

80 

~     7jB 

N.  W.  ]4  N. 

-  « 

40 

46 

62 

H  - 

N.  K.  H  N- 

«  - 

42 

11 

16 

-  « 

N.  W.  M  N. 

-  H 

48 

86 

87 

H- 

N.  E. 

4 

45 

0 

0 

4, 

N.  W, 

-   ^ 

46 

24 

82 

H  - 

N.  E.  a  E. 

H  - 

47 

48 

45 

-  « 

N.W.  J<W. 

-  H 

49 

18 

7 

H  - 

N.  E.  H  E. 

H  - 

60 

87 

80 

T,  « 

N.W.  ^W.       . 

-  % 

62 

1 

68 

%  - 

• 

N.  E.  H  B. 

«   - 

68 

26 

16 

z « 

N.W.«W. 

-  Ji 

64 

60 

87 

5*-- 

N.  E.  by  E. 

6 

66 

16 

0 

5 

N.  W.  by  W. 

—  a 

67 

89 

82 

M  - 

N.  E.  by  E.  a  B. 

^  - 

69 

8 

46 

s  « 

N.W.byW.^W. 

-  H 

60 

28 

7 

H  — 

N.  E.  by  E.  ^  B. 

H  - 

61 

52 

80 

-  « 

N.W.byW.^W. 

-  H 

63 

16 

62 

H  - 

N.  B.  by  E.  «  B. 

H  - 

64 

41 

15 

S  « 

N.W.  by  W.  94  W. 

-  % 

66 

5 

87 

^^- 

B.N.E. 

6 

67 

80 

0 

e 

W.  N.  W. 

-   hi 

68 

64 

88 

H  - 

E.  N.  E.  J««  E. 

H   - 

70 

18 

45 

-  a 

W.  N.  W.  ^  W. 

-   H 

71 

48 

7 

H  - 

E.  N.  E.  H  E. 

H     - 

rs 

7 

80 

-  « 

W.  N.  W.  ^  W. 

-  « 

74 

81 

52 

M  - 

E.  N.  E.  9i  E. 

H  ~ 

76 

66 

16 

-  « 

W.  N.  W.  9iW. 

-  % 

77 

90 

87 

w»- 

E.byN. 

7 

78 

45 

0 

7 

W.  by  N. 

-   % 

80 

9 

88 

%  - 

B.94N. 

H.  - 

81 

88 

45 

-    M 

W.  «  N. 

-  % 

82 

58 

7 

%  - 

B.MN. 

«  - 

84 

82 

80 

r  « 

W.^N. 

-  % 

85 

46 

68 

H  - 

B.  MN. 

H.  - 

87 

11 

16 

-  H 

W.J4N. 

-   % 

88 

86 

87 

«-- 

BMt. 

8 

90 

0 

0 

8 

West. 

!  '1 


w 


16  TABLE   OF   THE   ▲NOLE8. 


TABLE 

FOR  CONVERTINO  POINTS  OF  THE  CiOMPASS  AND  THEIR  FRACTIONAL  PARTS 

INTO  DEGREES. 


1. 


South  to  East. 

Points. 

Degrees,  ftc. 

1 

Points. 

South  to  West. 

South. 

0 

• 
0 

0 

0 

0 

South. 

-    a 

1 

84 

88 

«    - 

8.J4B. 

H   - 

» 

48 

45 

r  ^ 

S.  M  w. 

-  H 

4 

18 

0* 
• 

H  - 

8.  «E. 

^   - 

6 

87 

80 

-  H 

s.«w. 

-  H 

7 

1 

58 

H  - 

B.94B- 

y*  - 

8 

86 

15 

-   « 

8.«W. 

-  % 

9 

50 

37 

%  - 

S.  byS. 

K 

11 

16 

0 

i 

S  by  W. 

-  H 

18 

89 

88 

«   - 

8.  by  E.  M  B. 

M  - 

14 

8 

45 

;::  « 

8.  by  W.  \i  W. 

—  « 

15 

88 

7 

H  - 

8.  by  E.  Vii  E. 

%  r 

16 

68 

80 

-  H 

8.  by  W.  %  W. 

-  % 

r. 

16 

68 

%  - 

8.  by  E.  H  B. 

9i  - 

19 

41 

15 

r  « 

8.  by  W.  %  W. 

-  H 

81 

5 

87 

H  - 

8.  S.  E. 

2 

82 

30 

0 

2 

S.  8.  W. 

-   H 

SB 

64 

88 

H  - 

8.  S.  E.  M  B. 

a  - 

85 

18 

45 

-   H 

8,  8.  W.  J4  W. 

-  « 

88 

48 

7 

H  - 

8.  S.  E.  yi  B. 

w  - 

88 

7 

80 

-   H 

8.  8.  w.  a  W. 

-  « 

89 

81 

58 

H  - 

8.  S.  E.  H  B. 

«  - 

80 

56 

15 

-  H 

8.  S.  W.94W. 

-   H 

88 

80 

87 

%  - 

8.  E.  by  8. 

8 

83 

45 

0 

8 

S.  W.  by  S. 

-   H 

85 

9 

88 

H  - 

S.K.9iQ. 

H  - 

86 

88 

45 

-  hi 

8.  W.9i8. 

-   % 

87 

68 

7 

H  - 

S.E.Vi8. 

M  - 

89 

88 

80 

-  « 

8.  w.j^a 

-  H 

40 

46 

58 

H  - 

8.  E.  H  8. 

«  - 

48 

11 

15 

-   H 

S.  W.  H  S. 

-  H 

48 

35 

87 

%  - 

8.  E. 

4 

45 

0 

0 

4 

8.  W, 

-   « 

46 

84 

88 

H  - 

8.  E,  H  B. 

H  - 

47 

48 

46 

-  H 

S.  W.  M  W. 

-  H 

49 

IS 

7 

H  - 

8.  E.  M  B. 

«  ;:: 

60 

87 

SO 

-  H 

W.J^W. 

-  H 

68 

1 

68 

%  - 

8.  E.  9^  E. 

H  - 

68 

86 

15 

-  « 

8.  W;9iW. 

-  % 

54 

60 

87 

%  - 

8.  E.  by  B. 

6 

66 

16 

0 

6 

8.  W.  by  W. 

-   M 

67 

89 

88 

a   — 

S.  E.  by  E  a  E. 

« s 

69 

8 

46 

-  a 

8.  W.  by  W.J4W. 

-  H 

00 

88 

7 

«  - 

8.  E.  by  E.  M(  B. 

^  r. 

61 

68 

80 

~  « 

8.  W.  byW.«W. 

-  % 

68 

10 

68 

w  - 

8.  E.  by  E.  H  B. 

^*  r. 

64 

41 

15 

-  H 

8.  W.  byW.«W. 

-  H 

66 

S 

87 

%  - 

E.  8.  E. 

6 

67 

80 

0 

e 

W.  8.  W. 

-  M 

68 

64 

88 

%  - 

B.  8.  E.  M  B. 

^  :: 

70 

18 

45 

-  M 

W.  8.  W.  ^  W. 

-  % 

71 

48 

T 

W  - 

E.  8.  E.  \i  B. 

^  r: 

78 

7 

80 

-  M 

W.  8.  W.  ^  W. 

H 

74 

81 

58 

%  - 

E.  8.  E.  9i  B. 

A   - 

75 

6« 

15 

-  H 

W.  8.  W,  H  W. 

-J^ 

77 

80 

87 

M  - 

E.  by  S. 

7 

78 

46 

0 

7 

W.  by  S. 

-   « 

80 

9 

88 

M  - 

E«S. 

«   r 

81 

88 

46 

-   J4 

W.«S. 

-   % 

89 

68 

7 

%  - 

B.«8. 

« z 

84 

89 

80 

-  M 

W.«8. 

-  H 

86 

46 

68 

H  - 

.       B.  M  8. 

«  ^ 

S7 

11 

16 

-  H 

w.  J4a 

-  H 

88 

86 

87 

M  - 

BMt. 

8 

90 

0 

0 

a 

W«Bt. 

PA8SIN&   BUOTa. 


17 


TABLE  OF  DISTANCES 

▲T  WKTCH  OBJECTS  CAN  BB  SBBN  AT  8BA,   ACCORDINQ  TO  TSSIR  RKSPBOTITH 
BLB7ATIONS  AKO  THE  BLBVATION  OF  THB  BTB  OV  THE  OBSBRYBH. 


I 

n 


s 

10 
16 
90 
96 
30 
S5 
40 
46 
60 
66 
60 
66 


3.968 
4.184 
6.193 
6.916 
^.614 
7.M5 
7.826 
8. 866 
8.874 
9*.  864 
9.811 
10.946 
10.666 


ll 

Q 


9.666 
8.628 
4.443 
6.180 
6.78« 
6.288 
6.787 
7.256 
7.696 
8.119 
8.509 
8.886 
9.949 


I 

« 

n 


70 

76 

80 

86 

90 

96 

100 

110 

190 

180 

140 

160 

900 


8| 

is 


11.067 
11.456 
11.882 
12.196 
12.549 
12.803 
18.228 
18.874 
14.490 
16.083 
16.662 
16.201 
18.708 


il 


9.598 
9.?fl5 
10.26 
10.67 
10.88 
11.18 
11.47 
12.03 
12.66 
18.08 
18.67 
14.22 
16.22 


.a 

s 

« 


250 
800 
850 
400 
450 
500 
550 
60U 
650 
700 
800 
900 
1000 


I 


200 


90.916 
92.gi3 
24.748 
26.467 
28.062 
29.580 
81.024 
82.408 
88.726 
86.000 
87.416 
80.836 
41.88S 


18.14 
19  87 
21.46 
22.94 
24.38 

25  65 

26  90 
98.10 
89.36 
S0.28 
83.46 
M.54 
M.SS 


Example. — A  tower  200  feet  high  will  be  visible  to  an  observer 
whose  eye  is  elevated  16  feet  above  the  water  23.82  statate  miles,  thus 
from  the  table: 

15  feet  elevation  distance  visible    5.12  statute  miles. 
200    "  "  "  «      18.70       "  ** 


2S.82 


Directions  for  passing  buoys  placed  by  the  authority  of 
the  Light  House  Establishment  : 

1.  In  approaching  the  channel,  &e.,  from  seaward,  bed  buoys,  with 
EVEN  NUMBERS,  wiU l)e  fouud  ou  the  STABBOABD  sido  of  the  channel,  and 
must  be  left  on  the  stabboabd  hand  in  passing  in. 

2.  In  approaching  the  channel,  <fec.,  from  seaward,  black  buots,  with 
ODD  wuMBBRS,  wiU  be  found  on  the  pobt  side  of  the  channel,  and  must 
be  left  on  the  port  hand  in  passing  in. 

3.  Buoys  painted  with  red  and  blaok  hobizontal  stbipbb  will  he 
found  on  obstruotioks,  with  channel-ways  on  either  side  of  them,  and 
may  be  left  on  either  hand  in  passing  in. 

4.  Buoys  painted  with  white  and  black  pbbpbkdicula^  stbipes 
will  be  found  in  mid-channel,  and  must  be  passed  olose-to  to  avoid 
danger. 


18 


BOUNDING. 


HAND  LEAD  LINE. 

The  weight  of  a  hand-lead  is  from   7  to   10  lbs. 
fathomii  in  length,  and  divided  into  Marks  and  Deeps. 

Uarloi. 
Hathoms. 


The  line  is   20 


Deeps. 
Fathoms 


l^ 


2  A  piece  of  leather  with  2  strips. 
8  A  piece  of  leather  with  8  strips. 

5  A  piece  of  white  rag. 
7  A  piece  of  red  rag. 


10  A  piece  of  leather  with  a  holt  in  it. 


18  A  piece  of  blue  rag. 
15  A  piece  of  white  rag. 


17  A  piece  of  red  rag. 


8 
» 

11 
12 

14 

16 

18 
19 


20  Two  knots. 


DEEP  SEA  LEAD  LINE. 

The  weight  of  a  deep  sea  lead  is  from  30  to  40  lbs.  The  line  is 
asaally  marked  the  same  as  a  hand  lead  line  up  to  20  fathoms,  then  a 
strip  of  leather  at  25  fathoms,  three  knots  at  30  fathoms,  then  a  strip  of 
leather  at  35  fathoms,  four  knots  a^  40  fathoms,  and  so  on  up  to  100 
fathoms. 


^1. 


BTATUTS   AND   NAUTICAL   HILK8. 


19 


line  is  20 


TABLES 

FOR  CONVBRTINO  STATUTE  MILES  INTO  NAUTICAL  MILES,  AND 
NAUTICAL  MILES  INTO  STATUTE  MILES. 

(The  STATUTE  MILB=5280  FEET.      ThE  NAUTICAL  MILE=6080  FEET.) 


Statate 

Nautical 

Statute 

Nautical 

Statute 

Nautical 

Statute 

Nautical 

Miles. 

MUea. 

Miles. 

Miles. 

Miles. 

MUes. 

MUes. 

Milea 

1.00 

0.868 

8.25 

7.164 

IS.BO 

18,460 

88.75 

19.756 

l.« 

1.065 

8.50 

7.381 

16.76 

18.677 

28.00 

19.978 

1.50 

1.802 

8.75 

7.598 

16.00 

18.894 

28.25 

80.190 

1.76 

1.519 

9.00 

7.815 

16.86 

14.111 

28,50 

80.407 

2.00 

1.738 

9.25 

7.038 

16.50 

14.888 

23.75 

80.626 

2.85 

1.953 

9.50 

8.850 

16.75 

14.546 

84.00 

20.842 

2.60 

2.171 

9.76 

8.467 

17.00 

14.768 

84.85 

81.059 

2.76 

2.388 

10.00 

8.684 

17.85 

14,U80 

84.60 

81.876 

8.00 

2.605 

10.26 

8.901 

17.50 

15.197 

84.76 

81.498 

8.26 

2.822 

10.50 

9.118 

17.76 

15.414 

25.00 

81.710 

8.50 

3.039 

10.76 

9.885 

18.00 

15,631 

85.85 

81.927 

8.76 

8.256 

11.00 

9.558 

18.85 

15.848 

25.50 

88.114 

4.00 

8  473 

11.25 

9.769 

18.60 

16.066 

86.75 

88.861 

4.25 

8.690 

11.60 

9.  S« 

18.76 

16.288 

86.00 

88.578 

4.60 

8.907 

11.75 

IO.SmS 

19.00 

16.500 

86.25 

88.798 

4  75 

4.186 

18.00 

10.481 

19.86 

16.717 

86.60 

88.018 

5.00 

4.848 

1-.J.25 

10.688 

19.50 

16.984 

86.76 

88  880 

6.25 

4.B69 

18.60 

10.855 

19.76 

17.161 

27.00 

83.447 

5.60 

4776 

18.76 

11.072 

20.00 

17.868 

87.86 

83  6^ 

5.76 

4.993 

18.00 

11.289 

20.25 

17.685 

27.60 

23.8dl 

6.00 

6.810 

18.86 

11.506 

20.60 

17.808 

87.76 

24.098 

6.25 

6.427 

13.60 

11.728 

80.75 

18.019 

88.00 

24.811 

6.60 

6.644 

18.76 

11.940 

81. CO 

18.286 

28,85 

84.58S 

6.75 

5.861 

14.00 

12.157 

81.86 

18.458 

28.50 

84.750 

7.00 

6.073 

14.85 

18.875 

81.50 

18.871 

28.75 

84.907 

7.26 

6.296 

14.60 

12.598 

21.75 

18.888 

29.00 

36.  IM 

7.50 

6.513 

14.75 

12.809 

82.00 

19.105 

7.76 

6,780 

15.00 

13.086 

22.86 

19.388 

8.00 

6.947 

15.85 

18.348 

88.60 

19.589 

Nautical 

Statute 

Nautical 

Statute 

Nautical 

Statute 

Nautical 

Statute 
Miles. 

Miles. 

Miles. 

Miles. 

Miles. 

MUes. 

Miles. 

Miles. 

1.00 

1.151 

7.26 

8.848 

18.60 

16.545 

19.75 

88  748 

1.85 

1  489 

7.60 

8.686 

18.76 

16,883 

20.U0 

23  030 

1.60 

1.729 

7.76 

8.924 

14.00 

16.121 

2U.26 

28.818 

1.76 

2.016 

8.00 

9.818 

14  86 

16.409 

20.50 

?3.60« 

2.00 

2.308 

8.85 

9.500 

14.60 

16.696 

20,75 

28,898 

2.26 

2.590 

8.60 

9.787 

14.76 

16.984 

21.00 

24.181 

S.50 

2.878 

8.75 

10.075 

16.00 

17.278 

21  86 

24.469 

8.75 

8.166 

9.00 

10.393 

'•-.86 

17.560 

81.60 

84.767 

8.00 

8.464 

9.86 

10.616 

15.50 

17,848 

21.75 

85  046 

8.25 

8.742 

9.50 

10.939 

15.75 

18.136 

82.00 

85.338 

8.60 

4.080 

9.75 

11  897 

16.00 

18  484 

88,85 

85.681 

8.7P 

4.318 

10.00 

11.515 

16.85 

18.718 

88.60 

26.909 

4.t 

4.606 

10.85 

11.808 

16.50 

18.999 

82.76 

26.196 

4.86 

4.893 

10.60 

18.090 

16,75 

19.887 

2S.00 

86.484 

4.60 

6.181 

10.75 

18.878 

17.00 

19,675 

88.85 

86.778 

4.76 

6.469 

11.00 

12.666 

17.25 

19.863 

88.50 

87.060 

.     5.00 

6.767 

11.26 

18.954 

17.50 

80.151 

83  75 

87.848 

s.a.'s 

6,045 

11.60 

18.248 

17.75 

20.4;i9 

24.00 

87.686 

5.50 

6.8.38 

11.76 

18.580 

18.00 

20.787 

84.25 

87.984 

5.75 

6.621 

18.00 

13.818 

18,85 

81.015 

84.60 

28.218 

6,00 

6,909 

18.85 

14,100 

.18.60 

21..S03 

84.76 

88.490 

6.25 

7.1')d 

18.50 

14.393 

18.76 

21  690 

86.00 

96.78T 

b.N) 

'''.4«4 

12.75 

14.681 

19.00 

21.878 

6.75 

7.772 

18.00 

14.1)69 

19.26 

2.  166 

7.00 

8.060 

18.85 

t 

16.857 

19,60 

88.464 

r  ^^  r 


f.15  .'.1 


^ 


^>^. 


% 


.> 


A 


1 


!> 


n,:J/f 


SCOTT'S  NEW  COAST  PILOT. 


Throughout  this  work  all  courses  and  bearings  have  been  corrected  for  mag- 
netic variation.    The  distances  are  expressed  in  statute  miles. 


ST.  LAWRENCE    RIVER. 
JVes^  or  Main  Channel  into  Ogdensburgh  River, 

Sailing^  Directions. — A  straight  course  may  be  Bteered  from 
buoy  to  buoy,  on  either  side.  The  red  buoys  should  be  kept  well  aboard, 
as  tne  current  sets  directly  across  the  channel  at  the  rate  of  about  1^ 
miles  per  hour.  The  outer  edge  of  the  shoal  on  lower  side  of  channel 
lies  parallel  with  the  shore  (N.  E.  f  E.j  for  one-half  mile,  from  the  Og- 
densDurg  Shoal  buoy,  and  then  curves  in  to  the  outer  end  of  the  Central 
Vermont  Railway  and  Steamer  wharves,  at  the  lower  end  of  the  city, 
which  are  built  out  to  deep  water.  Between  these  wharves  and  to  the 
month  of  the  Oswegatchie  river,  and  lying  close  to  the  shore,  is  a  7  to  9 
foot  natural  channel,  800  yards  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  narrowing  to 
76  yards  near  the  river  mouth.  Through  this  channel  a  "cut"  has  been 
made,  150  feet  wide  and  12  feet  deep,  in  a  straight  line  S.  W.  f  W.  from 
the  outer  end  of  the  Central  Vermont  wharves  to  the  upper  end  of 
Parish's  lumber  wharf,  and  theuce  along  the  ends  of  the  wharves,  to  the 
harbor,  in  the  mouth  of  the  river.  Abridge,  crossing  the  river  435  yards 
above  the  inner  buoy,  is  the  terminus  of  the  harbor.  Bottom  of  harbor 
and  channel,  soft;  shotds,  stony  or  rocky.  The  current  of  Oswegatchie 
rivar  is  about  1  mile  per  hour. 

OGDENSBUBGH  LIGHT-STATION.—A  fixed  whJte  licht, 
4th  order,  visible  12^^  miles.  Gray,  square,  limestone  tower,  40  feet 
high,  with  dwelling  attached,  lantern  black.  On  a  low  rooky  islet,  200 
feet  above  the  channel,  and  100  yards  from  the  shore,  with  which  it  is 
connected  by  a  side  track  of  the  B.,  W.  &  O.  R.  R,  extending  beyond 
the  station  to  the  IS-ioot  curve,  from  whence  its  cars  are  ferried  across 
the  river.  Flats  extend  beyond  the  light-house  at  this  point  nearly  half 
way  aonss  the  St.  Lawrence,  and  vessels  bound  up  or  down  should  keep 
oyer  toward  the  Canadian  shore.  The  dredged  channel  into  Ogdensburgh 
harbor  passes  the  light-house  islet,  on  its  lower  side,  at  a  distance  of  67 
yards. 

Ogdensburgh  Shoal,  Outer  Buoy,  No.  1.— Black  spar  buoy, 
in  80  feet  of  water,  lower  side  of  entrance  to  channel,  and  marks  th« 
upper  end  and  outer  edge  of  the  shoal  on  that  side.     The  buoy  stands  in 

[211 


J 


22 


BT.    LAWBBNOE    SIVEB. 


deep  water,  40  yards  from  the  curved  corner  of  the  shoal.    Ogdensburgh 
light-house,  S.  i  E.,  600  yards. 

West  Entrancei  No.  2.— Red  spar  buoy,  in  12  feet  of  water, 
marks  the  upper  side  oi  the  entrance,  and  the  outer  point  of  the  shoal  on 
that  side.  Ogdensburgh  light-house,  S.  |  E.,  470  yards.  North  end  of 
steam  elevator,  E.  f  N. 

Light-house  Buoy,  No.  4.— Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water, 
in  the  channel,  close  to  the  steep,  west  bank,  and  nearly  opposite  the 
light-house.  A  straight  course  may  be  made  from  this  buoy  to  the  lower 
corner  of  the  R.,  W.  &  O.  R.  R.  wharf,  on  the  west  side  of  the  river. 
Ogdensburgh  light-house,  northeast  corner  of  tower,  S.  W.  by  W.  East 
Bank  buoy,  E.  f  N.,  200  feet. 

East  Bank  Buoy,  No.  3.— Black  spar  buoy,  in  ^  2  feet  of  water, 
on  the  east  side,  just  inside  the  light-house  buoy.  Ogdensburgh  light- 
house, S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.  Lower  corner  of  R.-  W.  &  O.  R.  R.  wharf, 
8.  by  E.  f  E. 

Inner  Buoy,  No.  6. — Black  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water,  east 
side  of  channel  at  the  inner  end.  Stands  25  yards  c^  the  10-foot  point 
of  the  shoal.  Passing  it,  the  wharves  on  either  side  of  the  harbor  may 
be  steered  for.  From  this  buoy  the  shoal  trends  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  90  yards, 
(half-way  to  shore,)  to  the  entrance  to  the  channel  along  the  north  front 
of  the  city.  Ogdensburgh  light-house,  W.  N.  W.,  2V0  yards.  Lower 
corner  of  R.,  W.  &  O.  R.  R.  wharf,  S.  f  E.,  140  yards. 


Channel  South  of  BrocHs  Group,  standing  up  the  St. 

Lawrence  River. 

This  channel  is  buoyed  for  12  feet  draught  of  water. 

Sailing  Directions. — Good  anchorage  in  from  3  to  7  fathoms, 
soft  bottom  throughout  the  channel,  the  best  abreast  or  just  above  the 
Lower  buoy,  and  on  the  edge  of  the  bight  of  the  south  shore  opposite 
the  Upper  buoy  ;  except  at  these  points,  the  bottom,  in  three  fathoms  or 
less,  is  generally  rocky.  Approaching  from  below,  pass  (on  about  a  S. 
W.  \  8.  course)  south  of  Macuair's  islands,  and  the  island  near  the 
American  shore,  1^-  miles  above,  giving  the  latter  a  berth  of  at  least  100 
yards,  (the  opposite  shore  is  bold,)  and  steer  for  the  Lower  buoy  of  this 
channel,  thence  for  Middle  buoy,  Foul-Ground  buoy,  and  Upper  buoy  in 
turn.     From  Upper  buoy  steer  for  Mid-Channel  Reef  buoy. 

liOwer  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy,  25  feet  long  in  16  feet  of  water, 
on  north  side  of  entrance  to  channel.  Stands  in  soft  bottom,  and  marks 
the  southeast  point  of  a  9-foot  shoal  400  yards  long.  The  ranges  from 
this  buoy  to  the  North  Shoal  buoy  and  to  the  end  of  the  Brockville 
wharf  clear  the  south  and  east  edges  respectively  of  this  shoal.  Shoal 
water  extends  from  the  south  shore  nearly  half-way,  or  to  within  300 
yards  of  this  buoy.  Steer  for  the  Middle  buoy,  passing  the  North  Shoal 
buoy  to  the  southward  ;  the  point  of  the  south  shoro  opposite  the  latter 
buoy  should  be  given  a  berth  of  at  least  100  yards.  It  is  cleared  by  the 
range  between  the  Lower  and  Middle  buoys,  (S.  W  by  W.  |  W.,  \\ 
miles).  East  end  of  lower  island,  north  side  of  channel,  W.  N.  W.  \  W., 
1^  mile.  South  end  of  island,  \  mile  below  channel,  N.  E.  by  E.  iNorth 
Shoal  buoy,  W.  by  S.  \  S.,  \  mile. 


ST.    LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


28 


tensburgb 

of  water, 
3  shoal  on 
'th  end  of 

of  water, 
)08ite  the 
the  lower 
the  river. 
W.    East 

of  water, 
rgh  light- 
El.  wharf, 

ater,  east 
bot  point 
rbor  may 
90  yards, 
irth  front 
.    Lower 


e  vSV. 


fathoms, 
ove  the 

[opposite 
horns  or 
ut  a  S. 
ear  the 

east  100 
of  this 
buoy  in 

|f  water, 
'  marks 

[es  from 
>okville 
Shoal 
im  300 

Ih  Shoal 

|e  latter 
[  by  the 
W.,  i| 

North 


North  Shoal* — Red  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water,  on  north  side 
of  channel.  Stands  about  midway  between  the  lower  group  of  islands 
and  the  south  shore,  and  marks  the  end  of  a  shoal  making  out  from  the 
group.  Ranges  from  the  buoy  to  the  ends  of  this  group  mark  the  upper 
and  lower  sides  of  the  shoal.  Between  this  shoal  and  the  foul  ground 
north  of  the  middle  buoy,  there  is  good  water  up  to  the  islands,  north 
side  of  the  channel.  A  range  from  this  buoy  to  the  end  of  the  Brook-  • 
ville  wharf  guides  through  a  "north"  entrance  to  this  channel,  |  mile 
wide.  End  of  Brockville  wharf,  N.  E,  by  N.,  1|  miles.  Middle  buoy, 
S.  W.  i  W.,  1  mile. 

M  *ldle  Buoy. — Black  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  On  south 
side  of  channel,  pass  the  buoy  close-to,  channel  126  yards  wide.  The 
lower  edge  of  foul  ground  lying  between  the  channel  and  the  islands  to 
the  northward,  opposite  and  above  this  buoy  is  cleared  by  a  range,  from 
the  buoy  to  the  lower  end  of  the  middle  group  of  islands.  Lower  end 
of  middle  group  of  islands,  N.  f  E.,  ^  mile.  South  end  of  upper  island 
of  channel,  S.  W.  by  W.  i-  W. 

Foul-Ground  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water. 
North  side  of  channel,  abreast  the  upper  island  and  nearly  midway 
between  the  latter  and  the  south  shore,  marks  the  outer  point  of  the  foul 
ground  lying  between  channel  and  islands.  The  outer  points  of  the 
American  shore,  below,  in  range,  mark  the  position  of  a  9-foot  spot, 
opposite  this  buoy,  and  a  little  south  of  mid-channel.  Lov/er  end  of 
upper  island  of  channel,  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  333  yards.  Upper  buoy,  S.  V7. 
j-  W.,  780  yards. 

Upper  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy  in  1 6  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
outer  (southeast)  point  of  a  small  9|-foot  shoal,  north  side  of  channel  at 
its  head.  Steer  for  the  Oak  Point  Shoals  buoy,  passing  south  of  the 
Cole's  Ferry  Shoal  and  Mid-channel  Reef  buoys.  Cole's  Ferry  light- 
house (Canadian),  W.  |  S.     Oak  Point  Shoal  buoy,  S.  W.  ^  W.,  3  miles. 


Main,    or    West   Channel^  standing  up   the  St.   Lawrence 

River. 

The  river  is  buoyed  for  12  feet  draught  of  water. 

Sailing  Directions. — The  bottom  of  the  St.  Lawrence  river  is 
either  soft  or  rocky,  and  very  irregular,  varying  in  depth,  in  mid-channel 
and  within  short  distances,  from  7  to  30  fathoms.  Good  anchorage  may 
be  had  at  many  points  in  the  bights  or  bays  along  the  shore  and  among 
the  islands.  Unless  otherwise  stated,  the  "b'^als  marked  by  buoys  are 
rocky.  The  current  is  from  1  to  5  iuiles  per  hour  (except  at  certain 
points  specially  mentioned),  depending  upon  the  width  of  the  river. 
Both  the  current  and  depth  of  water  vary  with  the  winds  on  Lake 
Ontario,  being  increased  by  south' v^esterly  and  decreased  by  northeasterly 
winds.  Passing  the  Ogdensburg  Shoal  buoy,  the  course  to  Macnair's 
islands  is  8.  W.  f  W".,  lOf  miles.  No  dangers  in  this  reach.  Either  shore 
may  be  approached  within  300  yards  ;  average  width  of  river  rather 
more  than  a  mile.  Pass  north  of  Macnair's  islands,  and  steer  S.  W.  \ 
W.,  2  miles,  for  the  entrance  to  the  channel  north  of  Brock's  group  ;  a 
reef,  partly  bare,  lies  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel,  nearly  in  mid- 
river,  opposite  Brockville,  Canada.      The  channel  north  of  the  ^roup  is 


•K 


I 
h 


24 


6T.    LAWRENCE   BIVEB. 


8  miles  long,  150  to  300  yards  wide,  bold  on  both  sides,  with  a  3  to  4- 
mile  current.  The  only  danger  is  a  rock,  1  feet  under  water,  lying  600 
yards  below  the  head  of  the  group,  and  one-third  way  across  from  the 
north  side  of  channel.  Foul  ground  extends  from  the  nead  of  the  group 
(south  of  the  range  to  the  Cole's  Ferry  Shoal  buoy)  more  than  half  way 
to  that  buoy. 

Cole's  Ferry  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  ll^  feet  of  water. 
South  side  of  main  channel,  and  marks  the  upper  and  outer  (northwest) 
edge  of  a  5-foot  shoal,  200  yards  across,  lying  in  mid-river.  The  range 
(E.  f  N.)  between  this  and  the  upper  buoy  of  the  channel  south  of  Brook's 
group  clears  the  lower  edge  of  this  reef  and  the  upper  end  of  the  foul 
ground  at  the  head  of  Brock's  group,  furnishing  a  guide  through  to  the 
head  of  the  soulh  channel.  Steer  for  the  channel  between  the  Bay  State 
and  Oak  Point  iShoals  buoys,  passing  the  Mid-channel  Beef  buoy  on 
either  side.  No  dangers  along  the  north  side  of  this  stretch  except  a 
small  reef,  just  covered,  one-half  mile  above  the  Cole's  Ferry  light-house 
and  300  yards  off  shore;  also  a  7-foot  spot  between  that  reef  and  the 
light-house.  Cole's  Ferry  light-house  (Canadian),  W.  f  8.,  three-fourths 
mile.    Mid-channel  Reef  buoy,  S.  W.  ^  W.,  1^  miles. 

Mid-cbannel  Reef. — Red  and  black  horizontal  striped  spar  buoy 
in  11^  feet  of  water.  Stands  at  the  lower  side  and  near  the  northwest 
end  of  a  narrow  O^foot  reef,  60  yards  long,  lying  athwart  the  channel, 
nearly  in  mid-river;  can  be  passed  on  either  side.  Cole's  Ferry  light- 
house (Canadian),  N.  i  E.,  three-fourths  mile.  Cross-over  Island  light- 
house, 8.  W.  f  S.,  2^  miles. 

Oak  Point  Shoal* — Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.  South 
side  of  channel,  three-quarters  mile  above  Oak  Point,  and  marks  the 
outer  edge  and  lower  end  of  a  small  10^- foot  shoal,  400  yards  off  Whale's 
Back  shoal.  The  outer  edge  of  a  reef,  just  under  water,  600  yards  be- 
low this  buoy,  is  marked  by  this  and  the  Bay  State  Shoal  buoy  in  range 
and  the  range  between  this  and  the  Whale's  Back  Shoal  buoy  (S.  by  W. 
^  W.,  1,100  yards)  clears  a  7-foot  ledge  lying  about  midway  between  the 
two.  Cross-over  Island  light-house,  S.  W.  f  S.,  1  mile.  Bay  State 
Shoal  buoy,  S.  W.  ^  W.,  one  third  mile. 

Bay  State  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water,  marks  the 
outer  (southeast)  edge  of  a  small  5-foot  shoal,  one-half  mile  below  Cross- 
over island,  on  the  north  side  of  channel.  No  dangers  between  this  buoy 
and  Cross-over  island,  or  west  of  it  to  the  group  of  islands  near  the 
Canadian  shore,  except  a  5-foot  spot  200  yards  off  the  lower  island  of  that 
group.  Cross-over  island  light-bouse,  S.  S.  W.  f  W.  Upper  end  of 
outer  island  on  Whale's  Back  shoal,  E.  ^  S.,  700  yards. 

Whale's  Back  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  11^  feet  of  water. 
South  side  of  channel,  and  marks  the  outer  edge  of  a  small  8-foot  shoal, 
lying  250  yards  off  the  upper  end  of  Whale's  Back  shoal.     Some  rocks, 

t'ust  under  water,  lie  200  yards  off  shore,  three-fourths  mile  above  this 
»uoy  (marked  by  this  buoy  in  range  with  the  Oak  Point  Shoal  buoy). 
Except  at  that  point,  the  south  shore,  up  to  the  Superior  Shoal  buoy, 
may  be  approached  to  within  100  yards.  Cross-over  Island  light-house,  W. 
S.  W.  f  W.,  700  yards.  Outer  rock  of  group  near  south  shores  one-half 
mile  above,  S.  ^  W.     Chippewa  point,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W. 

CROSS-OVER  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.~A  fixed 
white  light,  6th  order,  visible  12^  miles.     Iron  circular  tower,  brown 


I  8  to  4- 
ying  600 
from  the 
ihe  groap 
half  way 

>f  water. 
)rtihweBt) 
'he  range 
f  Brock's 

the  foul 
gh  to  the 
Bay  State 
buoy  on 
except  a 
^ht-house 

and  the 
e-fourths 

par  buoy 
torthwest 
channel, 
•ry  light- 
ad  light- 

'.  Sonth 
arks  the 
Whale'M 
^ards  be- 
in  range 
3.  by  W; 
ween  the 
ay  State 

arks  the 
w  Cross- 
his  buoy 
tear  the 
of  that 
end  of 

water. 
>t  shoal, 
e  rooks, 
ove  this 

buoy). 

buoy, 
•use,  W". 
9ne-balf 


A 


fixed 
brown 


ST.    LAWKENCE    RIVEB. 


25 


color,  lantern  black,  114  feet  eastward  of  dwelling,  light  35  feet  above 
sea  level,  6^  miles  below  Sister  Islands  light,  on  Cross-over  island,  we-^t 
side  of  channel,  which  is  here  but  one-half  mile  wida.  Reefs  extend 
from  the  upper  end  of  island,  between  south  and  east,  to  a  distance  of 
150  yards;  passing  these,  the  range  between  the  light-house  and  Oneida 
Shoal  buoy  marks  the  northern  limit  of  channel.  The  range  between 
this  and  Cole's  Ferry  light  (S.  S.  W.  f  W.)  leads  up  from  the  latter  light 
to  Cross-over  island,  and  the  range  between  Cole's  Ferry  light  and  Chip- 
pewa point  (8.  S.  W.  ^  W.)  leads  from  abreast  Cross-over,  and  up  the 
"reach"  above  it,  until  the  Sister  Islands  light  is  opened  to  the  south- 
ward of  Round  island,  about  the  width  of  that  island,  when  the  latter 
light  may  be  steered  for  (8.  W.  f  S.).  The  Cross-over  and  Cole's  Ferry 
lights  in  range  mark  mid-channel  abreast  of  Chippewa  point. 

Oneida  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  9^  feet  of  water.  Stands  40 
feet  from  lower  end  and  outer  edge  of  a  reef,  just  covered  on  the  north 
side  of  channel,  1^  miles  above  Cross-over  island.  A  course  S.  W.  ^  S. 
leads  from  mid-channel,  abreast  this  buoy,  up  to  the  Sister  Islands  light- 
house, 5k  miles  above.  The  channel  (southeast)  side  of  Round  island  is 
bold.  A  12-foot  spot,  marked  by  buoy,  lies  300  yards  from  and  opposite 
its  upper  end.  Cross-over  Island  light-house,  N.  N.  £.  ^  E.,  1^  miles. 
Superior  Shoal  buoy,  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  1  mile. 

Pridgeon  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  25-foot  spar 
buoy  in  16^  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  in  the  channel,  about  300 
yards  from  he  south  shore  and  1  mile  below  Chippewa  point.  The  reef 
marked  by  this  buoy  is  about  100  yards  long,  in  a  direction  from  S.  W. 
by  S.  to  N.  E.  by  K,  with  a  width  of  from  16  to  20  yards.  Least  water 
found,  near  lower  end  of  shoal,  16^  feet.  Cross-over  Island  light-house, 
N.  I  E.   Lower  end  of  Shoemaker's  island,  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  about  1  mile. 

Superior  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  11^  feet  of  water.  Stands 
at  the  outer  edge  and  near  the  lower  end  of  a  loc^  narrow  ledge,  on  the 
south  side  of  channel,  150  yards  off  Chippewa  pomt.  The  reef  extends 
S.  8.  W.  from  the  buoy  to  100  yards  above  Chippewa  point;  least  water 
on  it,  3  feet,  close  to  the  buoy.  Reefs  make  out  from  the  head  of  Chippewa 
point  to  abreast  the  upper  end  of  Round  Top  island.  In  the  reach  be- 
tween Round  island  and  the  Sisters,  the  islands  on  either  side  of  chan- 
nel may  be  approached  within  100  yards,  and  the  only  unmarked 
dangers  are  a  reef,  a  quarter  mile  long,  at  the  head  of  >Jedar  islands,  and 
another  extending  350  yards  into  the  channel  from  the  lower  end  of  Oak 
island.  Upper  end  of  Chippewa  point,  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  220  yards.  Scow 
Island  Shoal  buoy,  S.  W.  |  8.,  2f  miles. 

Bound  Island  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar 
buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  middle  of  the  lower  side  of  a  small 
12-foot  shoal  between  Round  island  and  Cedar  island,  300  yards  from 
Round  island.  It  stands  almost  in  the  direct  course  of  vessels  up  to 
Sister  islands  and  may  be  passed  on  either  side.  The  channel  side  of 
Round  island  is  bold.  Low  r  end  of  Round  island,  N.  f  W.  Lower 
end  of  Cedar  island,  E.    Scow  Island  Shoal  buoy,  S.  W.  f  S.,  li  miles. 

Tent  Island  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy 
in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  middle  of  a  small  12-foot  shoal  in  mid- 
ohannel,  about  700  yards  from  Tent  island.  The  range  between  Sister  island 
and  the  middle  of  Round  island  passes  about  600  feet  to  westward  of 
this  shoal,  and  the  range  between  Pilot  island  and  Chippewa  point 


26 


ST.    LAWfiEMOE   KIVKK. 


directly  over  it.    Lower  end  of  Cedar  island,  N.  E.  ^  E.     Lower  end  of 
Tent  island,  N.  W.  ^  N. 

Scow  Island  Shoal. — Black  spar  baoy  in  12  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  northwest  edge  of  a  6-feet  shoal,  80  yards  long,  abreast 
Scow  island,  and  about  midway  between  the  islands  on  either  side  of 
channel.  Half-way  between  this  buoy  and  Scow  island  is  a  small  10-foot 
shoal.  Sister  Islands  light-house,  S.  W.  f  W.,  1^  miles.  Pilot  Shoal 
buoy,  S.  W.  f  W.,  1{  miles. 

Pilot  Shoa^. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in  11^ 
feet  of  water.  Ifiarks  the  north  end  of  a  narrow  10-foot  ledge,  26  yards 
in  length  (in  a  N.  N.  E.  and  S,  8.  W.  direction),  lying  in  the  channel 
500  yards  below  the  Sister  islands.  Pass  on  either  side.  The  Sister  and 
and  Lone  Brother  islands  in  range  lead  north  of  this  shoal.  Pilot  island, 
north  side  of  channel,  a  quarter  mile  below,  may  be  passed  close-to,  and 
a  straight  course  made  thence  to  the  Empire  Shoal  buoy.  Sister  Islands 
light-house,  S.  W.  i  S.     Sister  Islands  buoy,  S.  W.  f  W. 

Empire  Stioal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  11^  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
outer  edge  and  upper  end  of  an  8-foot  shoal,  90  yards  long,  on  the  north 
side  of  channel,  just  below  the  Sister  Islands  light-house.  Sister  Islands 
light-housf ,  S.  by  W.,  360  yards.  Sister  Islands  buoy,  S.  by  W.  J  W., 
280  yards. 

Sister  Islands.— Black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Stands 
opposite  the  lower  end  of  Sister  islands,  and  marks  the  outer  edge  of  the 
shoal  north  side  of  those  islands.  The  range  between  this  buoy  and 
Scow  island  clears  this  shoal  below  the  buoy,  and  the  buoy  in  range  with 
east  side  of  Pilot  island  clears  the  upper  end  of  shoal,  and  also  some  foul 
ground  lying  between  the  Sister  and  Lone  Brother  islands,  as  well  as  a 
narrow  reef  cxtcnuing  300  yards  from  the  head  of  the  latter  island. 
From  this  buoy  a  south  ;est  course  leads  up  to  the  Sunken  Rock  light- 
house, 6  miles  above.  Sister  Islands  light-house,  8.  by  E.  •}  E.,  100  yards. 
Scow  island,  E.  N.  E.  f  E.,  If  miles. 

SISTER  ISLANDS  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  6th  order,  visible  I2f  miles.  Square  gray  tower  risinc  ^'rom  lime- 
stone dwelling,  light  40  feet  above  ground.  South  side  of  .iianncl,  on 
the  lowerof  the  Sister  islands,  three  small  islands  connected  '  v  causewavs. 
A  good  channel,  600  yards  wide,  to  the  southward,  betwf  '  these  islands 
and  Third  Brother  island  and  south  of  Lone  Brother  islan  '  Passing  Pilot 
island  (north  side  of  channel,  one-half  mile  below)  c.  je-to,  steer  mid- 
way between  this  light-house  and  the  low  rocky  point  of  the  Grenadier 
Island  shore,  opposite,  until  abreast  the  light-house,  when  steer  for 
Sunken  Rock  light-house  (S.  W.);  after  passing  Lone  Brother  island, 
the  range  between  the  two  lights  may  be  entered.  Cross-over  Island  light- 
house, closed  behind  Pilot  island,  furnishes  another  guide  through  the 
narrow  channel,  north  of  the  Sister  islands.  A  small  10-foot  shoal  lies 
in  the  channel,  600  yards  below  this  light-house,  just  south  of  the  range 
between  this  and  Cross-over  Island  light-house.  Lower  end  of  Half-way 
island,  E.  |  S.,  seven-eighths  mile.     Sunken  Rock  light-house,  6  miles. 

Ironsides  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  11^  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  N.  W.  side  of  a  6-foot  shoal  60  yards  across,  lying  opposite  the  upper 
end  of  the  Ironsides  island  south  side  of  channel.  West  end  of  Lone 
Brother  island,  N.  E.  f  N.,  f  mile.  ,  ^  ,   .   , 


ST.    LAWRENCE   RIVER. 


27 


Marks 


SUNKEN  KOCK  LIGHT-ST  ATION  — A  fixed  white  light, 
6th  order,  visible  11^  miles.  Circular  iron  tower,  brown,  lantern  black, 
light  28  feet  above  sea  level.  A  wooden  wharf  and  boat  house  at  base 
of  tower,  on  Sunken  rock,  St.  Lawrence  river,  south  side  of  main  chan- 
nel, one-half  mile  below  Alexandria  bay.  When  abreast  the  upper  end 
of  Hart  island,  bring  the  Sister  Islands  light  in  range  with  or  open  a 
little  to  the  northward  of  this  light,  which  course  leads  past  Alexandria 
bay  and  up  to  the  first  island  above  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel. 
The  latter  island  should  be  passed  close  to,  and  avoid  Pullman's  shoal, 
lying  nearly  in  mid -river  opposite.     Rock  Island  light,  7  miles. 

Sunken  Rock. — Black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  South  side 
of  main  channel,  and  marks  the  outer  (west)  edge  of  a  reef,  just  under 
water,  and  100  yards  in  length,  lying  one-quarter  mile  above  the  light- 
house. The  channel  here  is  200  yards  in  width,  and  the  island  opposite 
is  bold.  Sunken  Rock  light-house,  N.  E.  f  E.  Lower  point  of  Alex- 
andria bay,  S.  E.,  350  yards. 

Frontenac  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  outer  edge  of  a  shoal  north  side  of  channel,  opposite  Alexandria  bay. 
The  islands  along  the  north  side  of  channel  above  are  bold.  Sunken 
Rock  light-house,  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  one-half  mile.  Pullman  Shoal  buoy, 
S.  W.  ^  S.,  one-half  mile. 

Squaw  Island. — Black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  outer  point  of  a  reef  at  the  foot  of  Squaw  island,  south  side  of  chan- 
nel off  the  upper  end  of  Alexandria  bay;  the  head  of  the  island  is  bold. 
The  range  from  the  buoy  to, the  "Thousand  Island  House"  wharf  clears 
the  lower  edge  of  the  reef.     Frontenac  Shoal  buoy,  N.  f  W.,  400  yards. 

Pullman  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  11}  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  outer  edge  of  a  5~foot  shoal,  40  yards  long,  on  the  north  side  of 
channel,  one- third  mile  above  Alexandria  bay;  a  narrow  channel  north 
of  this  shoal.  From  this  point  to  the  Rock  Island  light-house,  5f  miles 
above,  the  channel  is  from  200  to  300  yards  wide,  and  current  2  to  3 
miles  per  hour;  both  sides  of  the  reach  are  bold,  except  in  the  deep 
bights.     Sunken  Rock  light-house,  N.  E.  f  E.,  1  mile. 

Niagara  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  lower  end  and  outer  edge  of  a  6-foot  shoal,  200  feet  long,  on  the 
south  side  of  channel,  three-fourths  mile  below  ]Kock  Island  light-house. 
Rock  Island  light-house,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  J  mile. 

Granite  State  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  lower  end  and  outer  edge  of  a  reef  three-fourths  mile  long,  on 
the  north  side  of  channel,  at  the  head  of  the  "Narrows."  Rock  Island 
light-house,  S.  by  W.  f  W.  350  yards.  ^ 

ROCK  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
8th  order,  visible  12i  miles.  Circuliir  iron  tower,  painted  brown,  lantern 
black,  light  39^  feet  above  sea  level.  Light  is  obscured  by  keeper's 
dwelling  in  passing  for  about  75  yards  above  and  below.  A  white  lan- 
tern light  is  shown  from  veranda  of  the  keeper's  dwelling,  toward 
Thousand  Island  Park  dock,  during  the  hotel  season.  On  Rock  island, 
St.  Lawrence  river,  south  side  of  channel,  at  the  head  of  the  "Niirrows." 
The  group  of  which  this  island  is  one,  may  be  passed  below  the  light- 
house within  60  yards.  Keep  the  north  shore  well  aboard  until  passed 
Niagara  Shoal  buoy,  and  then  steer  directly  for  the  light  (about  8.  W.) 


28 


ST.    LAWBENOE  BIVEB. 


until  close  up  with  it  (good  water  to  within  50  yards  of  the  shore,  and 
channel  here  but  200  yards  wide),  when  stee'  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.  foi 
North  Oolborne  island.  These  directions  clear  the  long  reef  on  north 
side  of  channel,  at  the  head  of  the  "Narrows,"  as  well  as  the  reef  at  the 
upper  end  of  Rock  island.  Above  North  Golborne  island,  this  light, 
closed  behind  that  island,  leads  south  of  Chapman's  shoal,  and  up  past 
the  Calumet  islands.     Tibbett's  Point  light,  23  miles. 

Rock  Island  Reef. — Black  spar  buoy  in  li  feet  of  water. 
Stands  at  the  outer  edge  and  close  to  the  upper  end  of  the  reef  at  the 
the  head  of  Rock  island.  After  passing  Rock  Island  Reef  buoy,  steer 
directly  for  North  Colborne  island,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  passing  it  close- 
to,  and,  as  soon  as  abreast  of  it,  steer  for  bluff  just  above  Clayton  until 
abreast  of  Calumet  island ;  this  will  clear  Chapman's  shoal,  a  reef  partly 
bare,  lying  in  mid-channel,  600  yards  west  of  North  Colborne  island. 
From  the  Calumet  islands  steer  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  6^  miles,  past  Linda 
island  (lying  near  the  south  shore),  thence  W.  ^  S.,  5^  miles,  along  the 
north  side  of  Carleton  island.  In  this  stretch  the  channel  is  from  three- 
fourths  to  1^  miles  wide,  and  free  from  dangers;  good  water  to  within  200 
yards  of  either  shore.     Rock  Island  light-house,  E.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  200  yards. 

Hinckley's  Point  Spit. — Red  spar  buoy  in  U  feet  of  water, 
west  side  of  channel,  opposite  the  head  of  Carleton  island,  and  nearly  in 
mid-river.  Stands  at  the  outer  edge  and  450  yards  from  the  lower  end 
of  a  spit,  extending  2^  miles  below  Hihckley's  point.  Long  island. 
Eelow  the  buoy  the  shoal  trends  N.  f  W.  to  the  end,  on  which  is  9  feet 
of  water.  The  range  from  this  buoy  to  Tibbett's  point  clears  the  edge 
of  the  spit  above  the  buoy.  Good  water  carried  across  this  spit  into 
Button  bay  with  the  head  of  Carleton  island  bearing  about  east.  Shoals 
make  out  from  Mud  island  (west  side  of  channel,  1^  miles  below)  one- 
fourth  way  across  to  Carleton  island.  The  west  side  of  Carleton  island  is 
bold.  Point  of  tr«es  at  south  end  of  Carleton  island,  E.  f  S.,  1,670  yards. 
Hinckley's  point,  S.  W.  i  S.     Tibbett's  point,  S.  S.  W.  |  W.,  5  miles. 

Feather-Bed  Shoal. — Black,  3d  class  can  buoy  in  17  feet  of 
water.  Marks  the  edge  of  Feather-bed  shoal,  east  siae  of  channel, 
between  Carleton  island  and  Cape  Vincent,  and  stands  540  yards  W.  S. 
W.  of  a  rocky  part  of  the  shoal,  just  covered.  The  range  between  this 
buoy  and  the  eastern  ruined  chimney  on  Carleton  island'  (N.  E.  ^  N.) 
clears  the  shoal  below  the  buoy,  and  the  range  between  buoy  and  "  ele- 
vator "  at  lower  end  of  Cape  Vincent  (S.  by  W.  ^  W.)  clears  it  above. 
One-third  mile  above  this  buoy  the  shoal  trends  S.  S.  E.  to  the  shore.  A 
course  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  4  miles,  leads  in  mid-channel,  past  the  west  side  of 
Carleton  island,  between  this  shoal  and  the  spit  opposite,  and  up  to  Cape 
Vincent;  course  thence  to  the  lake  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  4  miles.  Above 
Cape  Vincent  there  are  no  dangers;  good  water  to  within  200  vards  of 
either  shore.     Hinckley's  Point  Spit  buoy,  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  1  mile. 

TIBBETT'S  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  visible  15  miles.  Gray,  round  tower  67  feet  above  sea 
level,  lantern  black,  dv  elling  to  northward,  on  Tibhett's  point,  south 
side  of  head  of  St.  Lawrence  river,  base  of  old  tower,,  on  extremity  of 
point.  Reefs  extend  200  yards  from  the  point.  Pigeon  Island  light- 
Douse  (Canadian),  W.  |  B.,  0  miles.  Sackett's  Harbor  light-house,  20 
miles.  Galloo  Island  lighthouse,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  15  miles.  Charity 
■hoal,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  about  7i  miles. 


LAKE   ONTASIt^. 


29 


Channel  South  of  Carleton   Island,  Entering  from  Below, 

This  channel  lies  between  Carleton  island  and  Feather-bed  shoaL 
The  buoys  stand  in  sandy  bottom,  and  mark  the  edge  of  the  shoal  at 
the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel,  near  the  head  of  the  island.  Above 
and  below  the  buoys  the  shoal  trends  away  from  the  range  between 
them,  which  thus  furnishes  a  guide  for  approaching  from  either  direc- 
tion. The  channel  decreases  in  width  from  two-thirds  mile  at  the 
entrance  to  270  yards  at  a  point  mid-way  between  the  buoys;  it  is  21 
miles  long,  being  a  mile  shorter  than  by  the  north  side  of  island.  Shoal 
water  extends  to  a  distance  of  400  yards  from  the  lower  end  of  island. 

Lower  Buoy. — Black  spar  in  16  feet  of  water.  South  side  of 
channel,  If  miles  above  the  foot  of  Carleton  island.  Below  this  buoy 
the  Carleton  Island  shore  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  250 
yards;  the  buoys  in  range  guide  near  the  south  side  of  the  channel. 
Good  water  to  within  70  yards  of  the  point  of  the  north  shore,  nidway 
between  this  and  the  upper  buoy.  A  straight  course  may  be  steered 
between  the  buoys.  Tower  of  elevator  at  Cape  Vincent.,  S.  W.  \  S. 
Upper  buoy,  W.  \  N.,  640  yards. 

Upper  Buoy. — Black  spar  in  18^^  feet  of  water.  South  side  of 
channel,  opposite  the  upper  end  of  bay  at  head  of  Carleton  island ;  good 
water  part  way  into  that  bay,  and  the  head  of  island  above  is  very  bold. 
This  buoy,  in  range  with  the  foot  of  Carleton  island,  clears  the  edge  of 
shoal  above  buoy.  When  the  range  between  the  Feather-bed  Shoal 
booy  and  the  eastern  ruined  chimney  on  Carleton  island  is  reached,  the 
main  channel  is  entered.  Hinckley's  point,  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.  Feather- 
bed Shoal  buoy,  S.  W.  f  W.,  1  mile. 


•  "i 


LAKE  ONTARIO. 

Light  Houses^  Buoys  and  Harbors,  along  the  East  and  South 
Shores  of  Lake  Ontario,  from  the  St.  Lawrence 

River  to   Wetland  Canal,  > 


Northeast  gales  lower  the  water  at  the  east  end  of  the  lake  about  a 
foot,  and  those  from  the  southwest  raise  it  nearly  twice  as  much.  From 
Stony  point,  2  miles  south  of  Tibbett's  point,  a  reef  makes  out  j^  of  a 
mile,  and  is  just  cleared  by  the  range  (S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  4^  miles)  from  the 
latter  point  to  the  west  side  of  Grenadier  island.  Shoals  extend  ^  mile 
from  the  southwest  end  of  Grenadier  island  and  Point  Peninsula,  the 
latter  7^  miles  S.  E.  {■  S.  of  Grenadier  island. 

Charity  Shoal. — Red  2d-olass  can  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water,  on 
the  eastern  side  and  800  yards  from  the  southern  end  of  a  narrow  rooky 
■hoal,  three-fourths  of  a  mile  long  (in  a  northeast  and  southwest  direc- 
tion) and  360  yards  wide  ;  the  shoalest  water,  6  feet,  is  north  of  the 


I 


I 


M 


'  I 


80 


LAKE    ONTARIO. 


buoy  ;  N.  E.  by  E.  2f  miles,  is  the  Allen  Otty  shoal,  a  narrow  reef,  700 
yards  long,  with  15  to  18  feet  of  water  on  it.  A  line  drawn  from  the 
middle  of  Charity  shoal  to  Hinckley's  point  crosses  the  west  side  of  the 
Allen  Otty  shoal.  It  lies  400  yards  north  of  the  range  between  this 
buoy  and  Tibbett's  Point  light-house,  and  should  be  avoided  in  rough 
weather.  Pigeon  Island  light-house,  (Canadian),  N.  W.  ^  W.,  3i  miles. 
Tibbett's  Point  light-house,  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  7^  miles.  Galloo  Island 
light-house,  S.  -J  E.  lOf  miles. 

SACKETT'S  HARBOR  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  5th  order,  visible  13^  miles.  Square,  red  brick  tower,  attached  to 
dwelling,  lantern  black,  light  49  feet  above  sea  level,  on  Horse  island, 
south  side  of  entrance  to  Black  River  bay  ;  s^oal  water  to  a  distance  of 
800  yards  on  the  southwest  and  200  yards  op  he  north  and  east  sides  of 
island  ;  a  narrow  spit,  visible  at  low  water,  between  the  island  and  main- 
land. The  shore  between  Horse  island  and  Sackett's  harbor  is  bold ; 
entering  the  latter  harbor,  the  Ship-house  point  may  be  rounded  close-to, 
and  the  eastern  wharves  of  the  tor  n  steered  for.  A  narrow  sand-bar 
extends  from  the  Ship-house  point  two-thirds  way  to  t'  e  southern 
wharves.  Point  Peninsula,  W.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  7  miles.  Sackv  it's  harbor, 
E.  N.  E.  J  E.,  IJ  miles.  Tibbett's  Point  light,  20  miles.  Stony  Point 
light,  11  miles. 

Chauniont  Bay. — The  entrance  to  this  excellent  harbor  is 
between  Point  Peninsula  and  Pillar  point ;  it  is  16  miles  in  a  southeast- 
erly direction  from  Tibbett's  point,  and  4^  miles  W.  N.  W.  from 
Sackett's  Harbor  light.  There  is  4  to  6  fathoms  of  water  in  the  bay, 
with  mud  bottom  ;  the  entrance  is  f  mile  wide,  with  bold  shores.  To 
enter  the  bay,  steer  in  about  N.  E.  by  N.,  and  come  to  on  the  N.  W.  side 
of  Cherry  island,  or  to  the  eastward  in  GuflSn  bay. 

Black  River  Bay. — This  bay  extends  in  a  N.  E.  direction,  the 
entrance  is  between  Horse  island  and  Bull  Rock  point ;  the  bay  is  5^ 
miles  in  length,  and  about  1  mile  in  width,  the  depth  of  water  from  7 
to  10  fathoms,  mud  bottom.  ShOal  water  extends  from  the  head  of  the 
bay  1^  miles.     Sackett's  harbor  is  on  the  south  side  of  this  bay. 

Henderson  Bay  is  between  Horse  island  and  Six  Town  point ; 
Gull  island  and  Snake  island,  two  small  islands  lying  in  the  middle  of  the 
entrance,  are  connected  with  shoal  water,  and  there  are  shoals  off  the 
ends  of  these  islands  extending  from  one-fourth  to  half  a  mile.  In  the 
bay  the  water  is  from  5  to  7  fathoms  deep,  with  mud  bottom. 

Galloo  Island  Shoal. — Black  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
water,  on  the  west  side  and  100  yards  from  the  southern  end  of  a  rocky 
shoal,  1^  miles  northwest  of  the  south  point  of  Galloo  island.  The  shoal 
ij  620  yards  long  and  300  yards  wide,  least  water,  6  feet,  near  the  north> 
east  end.  Pass  to  the  westward  ;  good  channel  also  between  the  shoal 
and  island.  Galloo  Island  light-house,  8.  E.  |^  E.,  1^^  miles.  North  end  of 
Galloo  island,  E.  N.  E.  i  E.,  3:^  miles.     Oswego,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  30  miles. 

GAIiLOO  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  visible  14J  miles.  Conical  gray  tower,  connected  by 
covered  way  with  dwelling,  lantern  black,  light  62  feet  above  sea  level. 
On  the  southwest  end  of  Galloo  island.  The  straight  sides  of  the  island 
are  bold,  but  at  the  ends  reefs  make  out  nearly  one-half  mile.  A  reef 
extends  500  yards  from  south  end  of  Little  Galloo  island,  between  this 


JlAKE   ONTARIO. 


»1 


and  Stony  island  ;  good  channels  between  these  islands.  A  shoal,  N.W., 
and  distant  1^  miles  from  the  light,  is  marked  by  a  black  caa  buoy. 
Stony  Point  light-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  8  miles.  Oswego  light,  S.  by 
W.  i  W.,  30  miles. 

Oaif  Island  Spit. — Second-class  nun  buoy,  black,  in  16  feet 
of  water.  Marks  the  extremity  of  a  narrow  rocky  spit,  extend- 
ing 1^  -"riles  southwest  from  Calf  island;  not  less  than  10  feet  of  water 
on  the  spit  for  three-quarters  of  a  mile  inside  the  buoy;  shoal  water 
between  Calf  and  Stony  islands,  also  to  a  distance  of  one-third  mile  from 
south  end  of  the  latter  island.  Galloo  Island  light-house,  N.  W.  ^  W., 
8^  miles.     East  side  of  Stony  island,  E.  N.  E.  f  E. 

STONY  POINT  LIGHT-STATION— A  fixed  white  light, 
varied  by  white  flashes  at  intervals  of  2  minutes;  5th  order,  visible  13 
miles.  Square  gray  «uwer  attached  to  dwelling,  lantern  black,  light  46 
feet  above  sea  level,  on  Stony  point,  east  shore  of  lake;  reefs  make  out 
one-quarter  mile  from  the  point.  A  reef,  with  4  feet  of  water  on  it,  lies 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  off  shore,  4^  miles  to  the  southward  and  east- 
ward. Galloo  Island  lighthouse,  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  8  miles.  Oswego, 
S.  S.  W.  f  W.,28  miles.  A  buoy  marking  the  end  of  a  spit  extending  1^ 
miles  S.  W.  from  Calf  island  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  4|  miles. 

Oswego  Beacon  Light. — A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  visible 
12^  miles.  Octagonal  brown  iron  tower,  dome  of  lantern  black,  light  39 
feet  above  sea  level.  On  crib  in  angle  of  west  breakwater,  Oswego 
harbor,  mouth  of  Oswego  river.  In  the  harbor  west  of  this  beacon, 
behind  the  new  breakwater,  there  are  3  fathoms  of  water,  shoaling 
to  2  fathoms  two-thirds  way  to  the  shore  at  the  east  and  west  ends,  and 
one-quarter  way  to  shore  in  the  middle;  hprd  bottom.  The  openhig 
between  the  east  end  of  the  v/est  breakwater  and  the  north  end  of  the 
light-house  pier  is  350  feet.  In  approaching  this  harbor  from  eastward 
or  westwai'd,  with  a  free  wind,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  fa!l  to  lee- 
ward of  the  range  between  the  beacon  and  main  lights.  Fog-signal  is  a 
bell  attached  to  north  face  of  beacon,  struck  by  machinery,  single  blows 
at  intervals  of  12  seconds.     Fair  Haven  light,  13  miles. 

NoTB. — The  east  breakwater  has  been  entirely  removed  and  there  are 
now  21  feet  of  water  in  the  position  it  occupied.  There  has  been  two 
spurs  built  extending  in  a  northerly  direction  from  the  west  breakwater. 
Depth  of  water  abreast  of  beacon  21  feet,  there  are  10  feet  abreast  of  the 
mam  light,  and  from  thence  to  abreast  of  the  North  Western  elevator 
14  feet  can  be  safely  carried.  The  best  water  is  in  mid-channel. 
The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

OSWEGO  LIGHT-STATiON.— A  fixed  white  light,  8d  order, 
visible  15^  miles.  Gray  octagonal  tower,  and  oil  room  attached,  lantern 
black.  Near  the  inner  end  of  pior  west  side  of  entrance  to  r'ver  harbor, 
1,250  feet  from  the  beacon;  the  oi'tranoe  i&  100  yards  wide.  The  end  of 
this  pier,  formerly  occupied  by  the  beacon,  will  be  kept  painted  white  to 
distinguish  it  at  night.  Standing  up  thu  river,  the  widest  channel  and 
best  water  is  east  of  the  middlo-grouod  piers.  A  rooky  6-foot  ledge 
extends  100  yards  ii'om  the  lower  end  of  the  middle-ground  pier  at  the 
draw-bridge.  During  northerly  gales  a  heavy  swell  sets  through  the 
entrance,  rendering  berths  in  the  lower  harbor  insecure.  Direction  of 
piers,  N.  N.  W.  i  W. 
» 


1 


89 


LAKE    ONTARIO. 


I' 


m 


OSWEGO. 

FAIR  KAVEN  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
4th  order,  visible  1 1^  miles.  Pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white 
above,  square  in  plan,  27  feet  high;  elevated  walk  along  pier  to  shore. 
Dwelling  on  bluff  west  of  harbor,  drab  color.  On  outer  end  of  west 
pier,entranoe  to  Little  Sodus  bay, width  between  piers,  235  feet;  direction 
of  piers,  north.  The  piers  have  been  extended  to  the  12-foot  curve  in 
extreme  low  water,  and  the  channel  between  them  dredged  to  a  depth  of 
12  feet  low  water.  The  d/edged  channel  has  never  been  carried  beyond 
the  outer  ends  of  the  piers,  and  a  shoal  nearly  1,000  feet  in  width,  carry- 
ing 12  to  14  feet  at  low  water  intervenes  between  deep  water  in  the  lake 
and  the  channel  between  the  piers.  The  point  of  land  west  of  the  light- 
house may  be  passed  within  one-fourth  mile  in  12  feet  of  water.  Little 
Sodus  bay  is  2  miles  long  (in  a  southerly  direction)  ;  average  width  one- 
half  mile,  4  to  6  fathoms  deep,  clay  bottom ;  bold  shores,  except  in  the 
bights,  and  no  dangers  except  a  shoal,  one-quarter  mih;  long,  and  marked 
by  rushes  growing  in  its  centre,  lying  near  the  west  bhore,  one-half  mile 
inside  the  entrance,  a  narrov  channel  between  shoal  and  shore.  This 
light,  opened  brightly,  leads  na^it  the  point  of  land  a  mile  to  the  westward 
in  2  fathoms  of  water ;  farther  inshore  the  naked  light  shows  dimljr.  Fog- 
signal  is  a  bell  striking  a  double  blow  every  20  seconds.  Nine-mile  point, 
N.  E.  \  E.,  6  miles.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  westward,  W.  f  S.,  1 
mile.     Big  Sodus  light,  16  miles. 

Fair  Haven  Ranpre  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  9 
miles.  A  lantern  shown  from  a  white  mast  14^  feet  above  sea  level, 
near  the  inner  end  of  the  west  pier,  serves  as  a  guide  within  the  bay  and 
as  a  range  to  enter  between  the  piers  from  inside  the  bay. 

Big  Sodus  Beacon-light. — (Outer.)  A  fixed  white  light,  6th 
ord.  ,  visible  llf  miles.  Pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white 
above,  square  in  plan,  27  feet  high;  elevated  walk  along  pier  to  shore. 
On  outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Big  Sodus  bay;  width  between 
piers,  460  feet;  dir^^otion  of  piers,  N.  ^  E.  A  channel  about  100  feet  in 
width  is  being  dredged  to  a  depth  of  16  feet.  A  7-foot  spot  lies  one- 
third  mile  off  shore,  2^  miles  to  the  eastward.  Point  of  shore  a  mile 
west  of  Fair  Haven  light-house,  E.  N.  E.  J  E.,  13  miles.  Outer  point  of 
■here  to  the  westward,  W.  N.  W.  f  W.,  6f  miles. 

Big  Sodus  Beacon-light.— (Inner.)  A  fixed  red  light,  6th 
order,  visible  10^  miles.     Octagonal  tower,  18  feet  high,  brown  below 


li 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


33 


curve  m 


and  white  above.  At  elbow  of  west  pier  entering  the  bay,  and  450 
yards  from  the  outer  beacon.  Big  Sodus  bay  extends  6  miles  in  a 
southeasterly  direction;  width  (west  of  the  islands),  1  mile,  narrowing 
to  one-half  mile  near  the  head;  3^  to  7  fathoms  deep;  soft  bottom;  12 
feet  of  water  may  be  carried  to  within  one  or  two  hundred  yards  of  the 
shore,  except  between  the  east  shore  and  the  islands.  The  range 
between  the  beacon  and  the  middle  of  Islay  island  (S.  E.  f  S.)  clears  a 
shoal  making  out  southwest  from  the  elbow  of  the  east  pier  and  guides 
up  the  middle  of  the  channel  (400  yards  wide)  between  Charles  point 
and  Sand  point;  the  end  of  the  latter  is  very  bold.  Eight  feet  of  water 
can  be  carried  through  the  channel  east  of  Islay  and  Arran  islands.  A 
small  6-foot  shoal,  marked  by  reeds,  lies  300  yards  off  the  point  of  the 
east  shore,  a  mile  north  of  Glasgow.  This  light  serves  only  as  a  guide 
within  the  bay,  and  as  a  range  to  enter  between  the  piers.  Sand  point, 
S.  by  E.  f  E.,  one-half  mile.  North  end  of  Arran  island,  8.  E.  ^  E.,  1^ 
miles. 

BIG  SODUS  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
varied  by  white  flashes,  at  intervals  of  2  minutes,  4th  order,  visible  16 
miles.  Square  gray  tower  45  feet  high,  with  dwelling  attached,  lantern 
black,  light  68  feet  above  sea  level.  At  Sodus  Point,  on  the  lake  bluff 
three-fifths  mile  west  of  entrance  to  Big  Sodus  bay,  Genesee  light-house, 
32  miles  to  the  westward. 

Pultneyville)  at  the  month  of  Salmon  creek,  is  lOf  miles  to  the 
westward  of  the  piers  at  Big  Sodus;  and  21  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the 
piers  at  the  mouth  of  Genesee  river.  It  has  no  light-house.  The  harbor 
works  consist  of  a  pier  running  easterly  from  the  west  shore,  and  thence 
northerly  into  the  lake,  with  an  east  pier  parallel  to  and  about  200  feet 
from  the  northerly  arm  of  the  west  pier.  Length  of  west  pier  from  the 
shore  arm,  558  feet.  Length  of  east  pier,  572  feet;  the  west  pier  extends 
about  300  feet  further  into  the  lake  than  the  east  pier.  Depth  at  low 
water,  6  feet. 

GENESEE  LIGHT-STATION.  —  A  fixed  red  light,  4th 
order,  visible  12^  miles.  Square  pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and 
white  above,  27  feet  high;  elevated  walk  along  the  pier  to  the  shore  ; 
light  31  feet  above  sea  level.  About  20  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  west 
pier  entrance  to  Charlotte  harbor,  mouth  of  Genesee  river;  width 
between  piers,  450  feet;  14  feet  of  water  carried  through  into  the  river; 
best  water  ^  way  from  west  pier.  Passing  *he  hotel  on  west  beach, 
vessels  drawing  more  than  12  feet  of  water  should  keep  nearest  the  east 
pier;  sandy  bottom.  Six  to  0  feet  of  water,  stony  bottom,  alongside  the 
outer  half  of  both  piers;  further  in,  alongside  the  old  piling,  showing  at 
surface  of  water,  there  is  from  11  to  13  feet.  The  fog-signal  is  a  bell, 
struck  by  machinery  at  intervals  of  30  seconds.  Five  miles  west  of 
Braddock's  point,  a  spit,  with  9  feet  of  water  near  the  end,  makes  out 
two-thirds  mile  from  the  shore;  and  three-fourths  mile  east  of  Devil's 
Nose,  a  10-foot  spot  lies  nearly  one-half  mile  off  shore.  Direction  of 
piers,  N.  E.  ^  N.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  eastward,  E.  ^  N.,  13 
miles.     Braddock's  point,  N.  W.  f  W.,  7  miles. 

Genesee  Rang^e  Ligrht.  (For  entering  Charlotte  harbor.) 
Three  fixed  lights,  two  red  and  one  white,  shown  vertically  with  white 
light  in  the  middle,  lens  lanterns  suspended  from  a  white  mast  at  the 
shore  end  of  elevated  walk  on  the  west  pier.     Lights  60  feet  above  lake 


34 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


level,  and  form  a  range  with  the  light  on  the  outer  end  of  the  pier  on  a 
line  with  the  direction  of  the  piers. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  at  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  the 
harbor. 

Braddock  Point.     Light-bouse  to  be  built. 

OAK  ORCHARD  1.IGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
4th  order,  visible  11^  miles.  Pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white 
above.  Square  in  plan,  27  feet  high ;  an  elevated  walk  along  pier  to 
shore.  On  outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Oak  Orchard  harbor; 
width  between  piers,  175  feet ;  channel  100  feet  wide  and  12  feet  deep  is 
being  dredged  next  to  east  pier.  An  eleven-foot  spot  lies  one-half  mile 
off  shore,  1^  miles  to  the  eastward,  bearing  E.  N.  E.  \  E.  from  the  light- 
house. Direction  of  piers,  N.  f  E.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  east- 
ward, E.  ^  S.,  If  miles.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  westward,  W.  |  N., 
9  miles.     Thirty-mile  Point  light-house,  W.  \  N.,  15  miles. 

THIRTY-MILE  POINT  lilGHT-STATION.— A  flashing 
white  light,  3d  order,  visible  15^  miles;  interval  between  flashes  90 
seconds.  Dark  gray  tower,  square  in  plan,  64  feet  high,  rising  from 
the  north  front  of  dwelling;  watch-roon  ,  black.  Lantern  black,  light 
78  feet  above  sea  level.  On  a  slight  projection  of  the  lake  coast,  30 
miles  eas'o  of  the  mouth  of  Niagara  river.  The  building  stands  close  to 
tie  water,  with  thick  woods  near  by  on  both  sides.  A  white  out-house 
OL  the  east  side.  A  shoal,  a  mile  in  length,  lies  one-half  mile  off  shore, 
2f  miles  (the  west  end)  east  of  this  light-house;  least  water  on  shoal,  8 
feet;  narrow  channel  inside.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  eastward,  E.  \ 
S.,  6  miles.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  westward,  W.  If  miles.  Olcott 
light-house,  W.  f  S.,  12  miles. 


OLCOTT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  6th  order, 
visible  11^  miles.  Pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above; 
square  in  plan,  27  feet  high;  an  elevated  walk  along  pier  to  shore.  On 
outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Olcott  harbor,  mouth  of  Eighteen- 
mile  creek;  width  between  piers,  176  feet.  Work  in  progress  to  obtain 
a  channel  11  feet  deep.  Direction  of  piers,  N.  ^  W.  Outer  point  of 
shore  to  the  eastward,  E.  by  N.,  4^  miles.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the 
.vest ward,  W.  by  S.,  6  miles.  Fort  Niagara  Shoal  buoy,  W.  by  S.,  18^ 
miles. 

Wilson's  Harbor,  at  the  mouth  of  Twelve-mile  creek,  is  12| 
miles  E.  by  N.  f  N.  from  Fort  Niagara,  and  W.  by  S.^S.,  6  miles  from  Ol- 
cott. It  has  no  light-house.  The  harbor  consists  of  two  parallel  piers 
of  navigable  width  extending  to  the  8-foot  curve  in  the  lake;  direction 
of  piers,  N.  ^  E.,  depth  at  low  water,  9  feet.  The  best  water  is  near  the 
west  pier. 

Niagara  River  Below  the  Falls. 

Two  and  three-fourth  miles  off  shore,  just  beyond  the  national  bound- 
ary, and  bearing  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  Fort;  Niagara  light-house,  is  the 
middle  of  a  reef  with  13  feet  of  water  on  it,  extending  two-thirds  mile 
in  an  east  and  west  direction  S.  W.  f  S.,  1^  miles  from  the  middle  of 
this  reef,  and  N.  W.  \  N.  from  Fort  Niagara  light-house,  is  a  small  11- 
foot  shoal.     The  vidtb  of  the  Niagara  between  its  mouth  and  Lewiston, 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


35 


N.  Y.,  6  miles  above,  is  about  600  yards;  depth,  5  to  12  fathoms;  muddy 
or  rocky  '  ottom;  banks  bold  and  high,  and  no  dangers.  At  Lewiston, 
which  is  half-way  to  the  Falls,  and  at  the  head  of  navigation,  the  current 
is  about  4  miles  per  hour,  decreasing  to  3  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and 
to  one-fourth  mile  at  a  distance  of  2  miles  off  shore.  The  strength  of 
the  river  current  and  depth  of  water  in  mouth  of  river  and  west  end  of 
lake,  generally,  are  materially  affected  by  winds  blowing  up  or  down 
the  lake;  the  former  decrease  the  current  and  raise  the  water,  and  the 
latter  produce  the  contrary  effect.  The  difference  in  water-level  is  some- 
times as  much  as  three  feet  each  way. 

Bell  Buoy. — A  bell  buoy  (Canadian)  painted  red,  in  20  feet  of 
water.  Off  the  west  side  of  the  mouth  of  Niagara  river.  The  buoy  is 
of  the  "Brown  patent"  pattern,  and  is  rung  automatically  by  the  action 
of  tlte  waves.  In  smooth  water  the  bell  does  not  sound.  1  his  buoy 
replaces  the  wooden  spar  buoy  heretofore  placed  on  the  bar  that  extends 
from  the  mouth  of  the  river.  Vessels  entering  the  Niagara  river  can 
run  close  up  to  the  bell  buoy,  leaving  it  to  starboard.  There  is  a  13- 
foot  shoal  one-third  mile  northeastward  of  the  buoy  on  the  port  side  of 
the  entrance.  From  the^uoy  Fort  Niagara  light-house  i  ars  S.  E.  by 
S.  ^  S.,  2.6  miles.  Forr  Mississauga  bears  S.  by  E.,  and  Four  Mile 
point,  S.  W.  i  S.,  and  a  course  2f  miles  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.  will  lead  up  to  the 
steamboat  wharf  at  Niagara  on  the  lake. 

Note. — In  consequence  of  the  establishment  of  this  bell  buoy,  the 
fog  bell  rung  by  machinery,  on  the  north  rampart  of  Fort  Mississauga 
at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  has  been  discontinued. 

Fort  Niagara  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water 
marks  the  northern  and  western  point  of  a  rocky  shoal,  east  side  of 
entrance  to  Niagara  river,  and  stands  two-thirds  mile  from  the  shore  and 
a  quarter  mile  inside  the  18-foot  curve  of  the  bottom.  The  water  shoals 
gradually  inside  the  buoy  to  a  depth  of  6  feet  close  to  the  shore.  Abreast 
the  outer  face  of  Fort  Niagara,  a  spur  of  the  reef  projects  a  little  beyond 
the  range  between  the  buoy  and  the  outer  corner  of  the  Fort  Niagara 
wharf.  Fort  Niagara  wharf,  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  three-quarters  mile.  Outer 
point  of  shore  to  the  westward,  W.  by  8.,  3  miles. 

Fk:iRT  NIAGARA  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
4th  order,  visible  16f  miles.  Gray  octagonal  tower  49  feet  high,  with 
oil  room  attached,  light  78  feet  above  sea  level,  on  the  high  east  bank  of 
the  river,  one-fourth  mile  from  its  mouth.  Only  the  upper  half  of  the 
tower  is  visible  from  the  lake.  Port  Dalhousie,  entrance  to  Welland 
canal,  11  miles  to  the  westward. 

To  Enter  Niagara  River.— -Bring  the  light  to  bear  S.  E.  |  E., 
one  mile  distant,  when  steer  S.  E.  by  S.,  keeping  a  little  outside  the  line 
of  the  wharves  under  the  Fort,  and  when  past  the  wharves,  keep  up  the 
middle  of  the  river. 

Note. — Steering  S.  f  E.,  heading  on  Fort  Niagara  light,  leads  to  the 
eastward  of  the  reefs  off  the  mouth  of  Niagara  river. 

Port  Dalhousie  (Canadian  light).— Revolving  white  li^ht, 
visible  13  miles.  White  circular  wooden  tower,  light  53  feet  above  high 
water.  On  the  east  pier,  339  feet  from  outer  end,  at  the  eastern  entrance 
to  Welland  canal.  Shows  from  E.  to  W.  by  S.  Interval  of  revolution, 
one  minute. 

Port  Dalhousie  (South  light).— A  fixed  white  light.    White, 


36 


LAKB   ONTABIO. 


square,  wooden  tower.  On  end  of  east  pier,  315  feet  S.  ^  W.  from  main 
light.  The  piers  are  200  feet  apart,  about  2,000  feet  in  length,  direction 
iC  i  E.  Depth  of  water  14  feet  at  low  water.  The  north  side  of  the 
outer  reef  off  the  mouth  of  Niagara  river,  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  11  miles. 
Burlington  Eay  light,  W.  by  N,  f  N.,  27  miles.  Gibraltar  light,  N.  | 
W.,  28  miles.  One  lamp  shows  N.  ^  E.,  one  N.  W.  and  one  S.  W.,  or 
up  the  harbor. 

NoTB. — There  are  rangco  for  ascertaining  compass  errors  at  this  port. 
Particulars  can  be  obtained  at  canal  office. 


i 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  on  the  South  Shore  of  Lake 

Ontario. 

Cape  Vincent  to  Niagara  and  Port  Dalhousie.— When 

abreast  of  Cape  Vincent  and  ^  a  mile  from  the  shore,  steer  S.  W.  by  W. 
\  W.,  28  miles  to  a  point,  4  miles  S.  \  W.  of  False  Ducks  light,  passing 
\  mile  north  of  Charity  shoal ;  when  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  121  miles  to  a 
point,  4  miles  N.  \  W.  from  Fort  Niagara  light,  or  131  miles  to  a  point, 
4  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Port  Dalhousie. 

Oape  Vincent -to  Charlotte. — When  at  a  point  4  miles  S.  f 
W.  of  False  Ducks  J'ght,  as  in  the  course  from  Cape  Vincent  to  Niagara, 
Bteer  S.  W.  f  W.,  66^  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  N.  E.  from  Genesee 
light. 

Cape  Vincent  to  Big  Sodus. — When  abreast  of  Cape  Vin- 
cent and  i  a  mile  from  shore,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  4  miles,  until 
Tibbett's  Point  light  bears  E.  f  S.,  1  J  miles  distant,  then  S.  W.  |  S.,  62 
miles,  until  in  range  of  the  two  beacons  and  2  miles  N.  ^  E.  from  the 
outer  beacon. 

Cape  Vincent  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  at  a  point  4 
miles  S.  f  W.  of  False  Ducks  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Cape  Vincent 
to  Niagara,  steer  W.  by  8.  19^  miles  to  a  point  8  miles  S.  f  W.  of  Point 
Peter  light,  thence  W.  ^  S.  113  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Gibraltar 
Point  light.     See  Toronto  range  lights. 

Cape  Vincent  to  Kingston. — When  abreast  of  Capo  Vincent 
and  ^  a  mile  from  shore,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.O^  miles,  until  Bear 
point  bears  N.  f  E.,  1  n^ile  distant,  thence  W.  f  N.  4\  miles  to  a  point 
1^  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  of  Pigeon  Island  light,  and  in  line  with  the  light 
and  Long  point  on  Wolfe  island,  thence  N.  by  W.  f  W.  6^  miles  to  a 
point  f  mile  W.  f  N.  from  Simcoe  Island  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  f  N.  1^ 
miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  ^  E.  from  Simcoe  Island  light,  and  in  range 
with  it  and  Pigeon  Island  light,  when  steer  N.  ^  E.  2^  miles,  keeping 
Pigeon  Island  and  Simcoe  Island  lights  in  range,  until  Snake  Island  light 
bears  S.  E.  f  S.  1^  miles  distant,  when  steer  E.  by  N.  4  miles,  keeping 
within  i  of  a  mile  of  the  north  shore  until  abreast  of  Kingston. 

Cape  Vincent  to  Oswego. — When  at  a  point  W.  f  N.,  H 
miles  from  Tibbett's  Point  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Cape  Vincent  to 
Big  Sodus,  steer  S.  S.  W.  |  W.  16  miles  to  a  point  8|  miles  W.  ^  N.  of 
Galloo  Island  light,  when  steer  S.  |  W.,  28^  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  | 
Bl  of  OswBgo  beacon-light. 

Kingston  to  Niagara  River  and  Port  Dalhousie.— 

When  abreast  of  Kingston  and  ^  mile  from  shore,  steer  W.  by  S.,  4  miles 


LAKK    ONTARIO. 


37 


until  Snake  Island  light  bears  S.  E.  f  S.,  1^  miles  distant,  when  steer  S. 
i  W.  on  a  range  of  Simcoe  and  Pigeon  Island  lights  for  2^  miles  until 
within  1  mile  ot  Siracoe  Island  light,  when  steer  S.  .W.  I  S.,  22^  miles  to 
a  point,  4  miles  S.  -|  W.  of  False  Ducks  light,  when  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S., 
121  miles  to  a  point,  4  miles  N.  4  W.  from  Fort  Niagara,  or  131  miles  to 
a  point  4  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Port  Dalhousie  light. 

Note. — When  running  on  the  course  S.  ^  W.  on  a  range  of  Simcoe 
and  Pigeon  Island  lights,  the  course  leads  very  close  to  the  west  side  of 
a  15-foot  shoal  If  miles  N.  |  E.  from  Simcoe  Island  light. 

Kingston  to  Oswego. — When  l  mile  N.  ^  E.  from  Simcoe 
Island  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  PigeoTi  Island  light,  as  in  the 
course  from  Kingston  to  Niagara  river,  steer  S.  W.  f  S.,  1^  miles  to  a 
point  f  mile  W.  f  N.  of  Simcoe  Island  light,  thence  S.  f  W.,  46^  miles 
to  a  point  1  mile  N.  f  E.  of  Oswego  beacon  light. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Charlotte. — When  i  a  mile  north  of 
Sackett's  Harbor  light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  9  miles  to  a  point  3  miles  N.  f  E. 
of  Stony  Point  light,  when  steer  W.  S.  W.  f  S.  75^  miles  to  a  point  3 
miles  N.  E.  from  Genesee  light. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Big  Sodus. — When  at  a  point  3  miles 
N.  f  E.  of  Stony  Point  light  as  in  the  course  from  Sackett's  harbor  to 
Charlotte,  steer  S.  W.  i  W.,  52  miles,  until  in  range  of  the  two  beacon 
lights  at  Big  Sodus,  and  2  miles  N.  ^  E.,  from  the  onter  beacon. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Oswego. — When  f  a  mile  north  of 
Sackett's  Harbor  light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  9  miles  to  a  point  3  miles  N.  f  E. 
of  Stony  Point  light,  when  steer  S,  S.  W.  ^  W.,  30  miles  to  a  point  1 
mile  N.  f  E.  of  Oswego  beacon  light. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Kingston. — When  ^  mile  north  of 
Sackett's  Harbor  light,  steer  W.  f  N.  7  miles,  passing  f  mile  south  of 
Point  Peninsular  until  the  west  side  of  the  point  bears  N.  f  E.,  then 
steer  N.  W.  ^  W.,  15  miles  to  a  point  ,1^  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  of  Pigeon 
Island  light  and  in  line  with  the  light  and  Long  point,  on  Wolfe  island, 
thence  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  5^  miles  to  a  point  f  mile  W.  f  N.  of  Simcoe 
Island  light,  then  N.  E.  f  N.,  1^  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  -J  E.  of  Sim- 
coe Island  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Pigeon  Island  light  ;  thence 
N.  ^  E.,  2^  miles,  keeping  Pigeon  Island  and  Simcoe  Island  lights  in 
range  until  Snake  Island  light  bears  S.  E.  f  S.,  H  miles  distant,  when 
steer  E.  by  N.  4  miles,  until  abreast  of  Kingston,  keeping  a  ^  of  a  mile 
from  the  north  shore. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Point  Peter.— When  ^  mile  north  of 
Sackett's  Harbor  light  steer  W.  S.  W.  12^  miles  to  a  point  3  miles  west 
of  Stony  Point  light,  thence  W.  f  N.  41  miles  to  a  pomt  3  miles  S.  f  W. 
of  Point  Peter  light. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Points  on  the  north  shore  east  of 
Toronto.  See  Courses  and  Distances  on  the  north  shore  from  Long 
Point,  or  Point  Peter. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  at  a  point 
3  miles  west  of  Stony  Point  light  as  in  the  course  from  Sackett's  Harbor 
to  Point  Peter,  steer  due  west  152  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Gi- 
braltar light.  This  course  should  lead  about  4  miles  south  of  Point  Peter 
light. 

Sackett's  Harbor  to  Burlington  Bay.— When  at  a  point 


38 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


8  miles  west  of  Stony  Point  light  as  in  the  course  from  Sackett's  Harbor 
to  Point  Peter,  steer  W.  ^  9.  175^  miles  to  the  piers. 

OswesTO  to  Niagara  River  and  Port  Dalhousie.— When 

1  mile  N.  by  W.  of  Oswego  light,  steer  W.  ^  N.  99  miles,  until  Thirty- 
mile  Point  light  bears  8.  I  W.,  6^  miles  distant,  when  steer  W.  by  S.  I 
S.,  32  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  N.  |  W.  from  Fort  Niagara  light,  or  42 
miles  to  a  point  4  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Port  Dalhousie. 

Little  Sodus  Bay  to  Sackett's  Harbor.— When  i^  miles  N. 
f  E.  of  Fair  Haven  light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  41  miles  to  a  point  3  miles  N. 
f  E.  o^tony  Point  light,  when  steer  E.  N.  E.,  9  miles  to  a  pointy  a  mile 
north  UKackett's  Harbor  light. 

Little  Sodus  Bay  to  Cape  Vincent.— When  i^  miles  K  | 
E.,  of  Fair  Haven  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.,  37  miles  to  a  point  3^  miles  W. 
f  N.  from  Galloo  Island  light,  thence  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  16  miles  until  Tib- 
bett's  Point  light  bears  E.  f  8.,  1^  miles  distant,  thence  N.  E.by  E.  ^  E., 
4  miles  until  abreast  of  Cape  Vincent. 

Little  Sodus  Bay  to  Kingston.— When  H  miles  N.  f  E.  of 
Fair  Haven  light,  steer  ^ .  f  E.  40  miles  until  False  Ducks  light  bears 
W.  f  N.  4^  miles  distant,  when  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  15  miles  to  a  point  f 
mile  W.  f  N.  from  Simcoe  Island  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  1^  miles 
to  a  point  1  mile  N.  ^  E.  from  Simcoe  Island  light,  and  in  range  with  it 
and  Pigeon  Island  light,  when  steer  N.  ^  E.,  2^  miles,  keeping  Pigeon 
Island  and  Simcoe  Island  lights  in  range,  until  Snake  Island  light  bears 
8.  E.  f  8.  1^  miles  distant,  when  steer  E.  by  N.  4  miles,  keeping  within 
^  of  a  mile  of  the  north  shore  until  abreast  of  Kingston.  (See  note  under 
the  course  from  Kingston  to  Niagara  river.) 

Little  Sodus  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  li  miles  N.  f  E. 
of  Fair  Haven  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  136  miles  to  a  point  1  mile 
south  of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Little  Sodus  Bay  to  Niagara  River  and  Port  Dal- 
housie.— When  1^  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Fair  Haven  light,  steer  W.  f  N. 
for  89^  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of  Thirty-Mile  Point  light, 
thence  W.  f  S.,  30  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  N.  f  W.  of  Fort  Niagara 
light,  when  steer  W.  by  S.  :^  S.  10  miles,  or  until  Port  Dalhousie  light 
bears  S.  f  W,,  4  miles  distant.  ' 

Little  Sodus  to  Charlotte.— When   l   mile  N.  f  E.  of  Pair 

Haven  light,  steer  W.  1°  S.  45  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  E.  of  Genesee 
light. 

Big  Sodus  to  Sackett's  Harbor.— When  2  miles  N.  |  E. 
from  the  outer  beacon,  and  in  range  with  the  two  beacons  at  Big  Sodus, 
steer  N.  E.  f  E.  52  miles  to  a  point  3  miles  N.  f  E.from  Stony  Point 
light  when  steer  E.  N.  E.,  9  miles  to  a  point  ^  a  mile  north  of  Sackett.'g 
Harbor  light. 

Big  Sodus  to  Kingston.— When  2   miles  N.  |^  E.  from   the 

outer  beacon  and  in  range  of  the  two  beacons  at  Big  Sodus,  steer  N.  N. 
E.  I  E.,  6 If  miles  to  a  point  }  of  a  mile  W.  f  N.  of  Simcoe  Island  light, 
when  see  course  from  Little  Sodus  bay  to  Kingston. 

Big  Sodus  to  Niagara  River  and  Port  Dalhousie.^ 

When  2  miles  N.  ^  E.  from  the  outer  beacon,  and  in  range  of  the  two 
beacons,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  62  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Oak 
Orchard,  thence  W.  f  N.,  15  miles  to  a  point  2   miles  N.  f  E.  of  Thirty-  . 


-■-f ' 


LAKE    ONTAEIO. 


39 


fl  Harbor 

—When 

1  Thirty- 
^  by  S.  I 
bt,  or  42 

miles  N. 

miles  N. 

.  i  a  mile 

lies  N.  I 
miles  W. 
ntil  Tib- 
■  E.  -J  E., 

.  f  E.  of 
;ht  bears 
t  point  i 
li  miles 
e  with  it 
Pigeon 
ht  bears 
»  within 
te  under 

N.f  E. 
;  1  mile 

b  Dal- 

W.  I  N. 
3t  light, 
N'iagara 
ie  light 

of  Pair 
Genesee 

!^.   iE. 

Sodus, 

y  Point 

ackett's 

Dm    the 

N.N. 
d  light, 

sie.— 

ihe  two 
of  Oak 
Thirty-  . 


mile  Point  light,  whence  see  the  course  from  Little  Sodus  bay  to  Niagara 
river  and  Port  Dalhonsie. 

Big  Bodu^  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  two  miles  N.  |  E. 
from  the  outer  beacon  and  in  range  of  the  two  beacons,  steer  W.  by  N.  f 
N.,  123  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Big  Sodus  to  Cape  Vincent. — When  2  miles  N.  ^  E.  from 
the  outer  beacon,  and  in  range  of  the  two  beacons,  steer  N.  E.  ^  N.  62 
miiCS  to  a  point  1^  miles  \7.  f  N.  of  Tibbett's  Point  light,  thence  N.  E. 
by  E.  ^  E.  4  miles  until  abreast  of  Cape  Vincent. 

Charlotte  to  Kingston.— When  3  miles  N.  E.  i  A  from 
Genesee  light,  steer  N.  E.  I  E.,  56^  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  S.  ^  YvTfrom 
False  Ducks  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  22^  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N. 
^  E.,  from  Simcoe  Island  light  and  in  range  with  it  and  Pigeon  Island 
light,  when  see  course  from  Little  Sodus  bay  to  Kingston. 

Charlotte  to  Oswego. — When  3  miles  N.  E.  i  N.,  from  Gene- 
see light,  steer  E.  f  N.  55  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by  W.  of  Oswego 
beacon-light. 

Charlotte  to  Niagara  River  and  Port  Dalhousie. — 

When  2  miles  N.  ^  E.,  from  Genesee  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  W.,  10  miles 
or  until  the  point  3  miles  west  of  Braddock's  point  bears  S.  ^  W.,  2  miles 
distant,  when  follow  along  the  shore  W.  by  N.,  21^  miles  or  until  Oak 
Orchard  light  bears  S.  f  W.,  2  miles  distant,  thence  W.  f  N.,  15  miles  or 
until  Thirty-mile  Point  light  bears  S.  f  W.,  2  miles  distant,  when  see 
course  from  Little  Sodus  bay  to  Niagara  river  and  Port  Dalhousie. 

Charlotte  to  Gibraltar  Point.-r-When  2  miles  N.  ^  E.,  from 
Genesee  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  W.,  10  miles  or  until  the  point  3  miles  west 
of  Braddock's  point  bears  S.  ^  W.,  2  miles  distant,  when  steer  W.  by  N. 
f  N.,  83  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Charlotte  to  Whitby. — When  2  miles  N.  ^  E.  of  Genesee  light, 
steer  N.  W.  ^  W.  10  miles  or  until  the  point  3  miles  west  ol  Braddock's 
point  bears  S.  ^  W.,  2  miles  distant^  then  N.  W.  by  W.  65  miles  to  a 
point  1  mile  south  of   Whitby  light. 

Charlotte  to  Burlington  Bay. — When  Thirty-mile  Point 
light  bears  S.  |  W.,  2  miles  distant  as  in  the  course  from  Charlotte  to 
Niagara,  steer  W.  66^  miles  to  the  piers  at  Burlington  Bay. 

Oak  Orchard  to  Cape  Vincent. — When  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of 
Oak  Orchard  light,  steer  E.  N.  E.^E.,11^  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  S.  f  W., 
of  False  Ducks  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  28  miles  to  abreast  of 
Cape  Vincent  and  ^  mile  from  shore.  Passing  ^  mile  N.  W.  of  Charity 
shoal. 

Oak  Orchard  to  Niagara  Biver  and  Port  Dal- 
housie.— When  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of  Oak  Orchard  light,  steer  W.  f  N., 
15  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  ^  E.  from  Thirty-mile  Point  light,  whence 
see  the  course  from  Little  Sodus  bay  to  Niagara  river  and  Port  Dal- 
housie. 

Oak  Orchard  to  Kingston.— When  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of  Oak 
Orchard  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  f  N.  77^  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  S.  f  W. 
of  False  Ducks  light,  when  see  course  from  Port  Dalhousie  to  Kingston. 

Oak  Orchard  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of 
Oak  Orchard  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  61^-  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south 
of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 


r 


40 


LAKB    ONTARIO. 


Thirty-mile  Point  to  Oswego.— When  3  miles  N.  |  E.  of 
Thirty-mile  Point  light,  steer  E.  i  8.  99  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by 
W.  of  Oswego  beacon-light. 

Thirty-mile  Point  to  Niagara  and  Port  Dalhousie.— 

When  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of  Thirty-mile  Point  light,  steer  W.  f  S.  30  miles 
to  a  point  4  miles  N.  f  W.  of  Fort  Niagara  light,  when  steer  W.  S.  W., 
^  S.  10  miles  or  until  Port  Dalhousie  light  bears  S.  f  W.  2  miles  distant; 
this  course  leads  close  to  the  reefs  off  Niagara  river. 

Port  Dalliousie  to  Kingston. — When  4  miles  N.  f  E.  of 
Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  131  miles  to  a  point  4  miles  8. 
^  W.  of  False  Ducks  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  f-  N.  22^  miles,  to  a  point 
1  mile  N.  ^  E.  of  Simcoe  Island  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Pigeon 
Island  light;  thence  N.  ^  E.  2^  miles,  keeping  Pigeon  Island  and  Simcoe 
Island  lights  in  range  until  Snake  Island  light  bears  S.  E.  f  8.,  1^  miles 
distant,  when  steer  E.  by  N.,  4  miles  until  abreast  of  Kingston,  keeping 
i^  of  a  mile  from  the  north  shore.  (See  note  under  the  course  from 
Kingston  to  Niagara  river.) 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Cape  Vincent.— When  4  miles  S.  |  W. 
of  False  Ducks  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Port  Dalhousie  to  Kingston, 
steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  28  miles,  to  abreast  of  Cape  Vincent,  and  ^  mile 
from  shore,  passing  ^  mile  north  of  Charity  shoai. 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Oswego.- When  4  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Port 

Dalhousie  light,  steer  K.  by  N.  f  N.  29  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  N.  f  E. 
of  Olcott  light,  when  steer  E.  i  S.  Ill  miles,  to  a  pv/int  1  mile  N.  by  W. 
of  Oswego  beacon-light. 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Burlington  Bay.— When  i  mile  N.  ^ 
E.  of  I'ort  Dalhousie  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  27  miles  to  Burlington 
Bay  light. 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  i  mile  N.  f 
E.  of  Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  N,  by  W.,  27  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
southwest  of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Whitby.— When   l  mile  N.  f  E.  of  Port 

Dalhousie  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  44^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
Whitby  Harbor  light. 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Port  Hope.— When  i  mile  N.  f  E.  of 
Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  69  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south 
of  Port  Hope  light. 

Port  Dalhousie  to  Prestme  Isle.— When  2  miles  N.  |  E.  of 
Port  Dalhousie  light,  steer  E.  N.  E.  ^  N.,  94  miles,  to  a  point  2  miler 
S.  ^  W.  from  Presque  Isle  light;  this  course  leads  1  mile  south  of  th« 
10  foot  spot,  6  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  Presque  Isle  light. 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


41 


ST.  I  E.  of 
lile  N,  by 

[)usie. — 

,  30  miles 
¥.  S.  W., 
s  distant; 

.  f  E.  of 
4  miles  S. 
o  a  point 
id  Pigeon 
id  Simcoe 
1^  miles 
,  keeping 
Lirse  from 

s  S.  I  W. 
Kingston, 
id  ^  mile 

.  of  Port 

is  N.  f  E. 
N.  by  W. 

mile  N.  f 
irlington 

aile  N.  | 
It  1  mile 

i.  of  Port 
south  of 

f  E.  of 
lie  south 

.  f  E.  of 
2  miler 
h  of  th« 
ight. 


Compass  Bearings  and  Distances  from  Lights  on  the  South 
Shore  to  Lights  on  the  North  Shore. 

Stony  Point  to  Point  Peter W.  i  N.  43    Miles. 

Stony  Point  to  Gibraltar  Point W.  155^ 

Stony  Point  to  Burlington  Bay W.  J  8.  178^ 

Oswego  to  False  Ducks N.  by  W.  i  W.  36 

Oswego  to  Point  Peter N.  W.  iN.  42 

Oswego  to  Port  Hope N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.  93 

Oswego  to  Gibraltar  Point W,  i  N.  145 

Oswego  to  Whitby W.  by  N.  |  N.  123i 

Charlotte  to  Point  Peter N.  E.  by  N.  45i 

Charlotte  to  Presque  Isle N.  i  E.  49 

Charlotte  to  Port  Hope N.  N.  W.  f  W.  66^ 

Big  Sodus  Beacon  to  Point  Peter N.  f  W.  40 

Big  Sodus  Beacon  to  Port  Hope N.  W.  |  W.  78^ 

Big  Sodus  Beacon  to  Whitby N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  105 

Oak  Orchard  to  Point  Peter. N.  E.  by  E.  |  E.  61 

Oak  Orchard  to  Port  Hope N.  38i 

Oak  Orchard  to  Whitby N.  W.  48 

Oak  Orchard  to  Gibraltar  Point W.  N.  W.  i  W  62^ 

Thirty-mile  Point  to  Gibraltar  Point. . .  .N.  W.  by  W.  |  W.  48 

Thirty-mile  Point  to  Burlington  Bay W.  66i 

Thirty-mile  Point  to  Point  Peter E.  N.  E.  73 J 

Thirty-mile  Point  to  Port  Hope N.  by  E.  i  E.  39i 

Thirty-mile  Point  to  Presque  Isle N.  E.  i  E.  58 

Olcott  io  Gibraltar  Point N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  88 

Olcott  to  Port  Hope N.  E.  by  N.  46^ 

Fort  Niagara  to  Whitby .  .N.  by  E.  i  E.  40 

Fort  Niagara  to  Port  Hope N.E.  6U 

Fort  Niagara  to  Presque  Isle N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  85  J 

Fort  Niagara  to  Point  Peter E.  N.  E.  |  E.  103 

Fort  Niagara  to  Gibraltar  Point N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.  30 

N.  B. — A  good  opportunity  is  afforded  masters  of  vessels  to  test  the 
working  of  their  compasses,  while  on  their  course  north  of  Simcoe  Island 
light,  or  by  dropping  upon  the  range  of  the  lights  of  Pigeon  and  Simcoe 
islands,  about  two  miles  to  the  south  of  Pigeon  island  and  sailing  upon 
the  range  of  the  two  lights.  The  true  range  of  the  two  lights  is  N.  3® 
W.  The  magnetic  variation  on  shore  in  that  vicinity  is  about  8°  W. 
When  sailing  upon  this  range  the  course,  as  indicated  by  the  needle, 
should  either  be  N.  6*"  E.  or  S.  6**  W.,  which  is  practically  N.  \  E.  and 
S.  iW. 

Magnetic  Declinations  in  degrees  and  tenths,  corrected  to 
the  year  1890: 

Kingston 8.0  W. 

Oswego 8.0  W. 

False  Ducks 7.8  W. 

Big  Oodus 7.2  W. 

Charlotte 8.9  W. 

Thirty-mile  Point 5.8  W. 

Niagara 4.8  W. 

Toronto 4.6  W. 

Burlington  Bay 4.8  W. 


42 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


I 


Sailing  Distances  on  the  St.  Lawrence  River,  Lake  Ontario^ 

and  Wetland  Canal. 


Canadian    Light   Houses,    Buoys   a7id    Harbors   along 
North  Shore  of  Lake  Ontario,  from  Brock- 
ville  to  the   Wetland  Canal. 


the 


COLE  SHOAL  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  6  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  37  feet  high.  On  pier,  6 
miles  west  of  Brookville,  three-fourths  mile  from  the  north  shore  of  the 
river  8t.  Lawrence. 

GRENADIER  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
white  light,  visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  37  feet  high, 
light  65  feet  above  high-water  mark.  On  southwest  point  of  island, 
north  side  of  channel,  2  miles  below  RooV.port. 

LINDOE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
lighv,  visible  7  miles.  White,  square  wo)d  tower,  '20  feet  high,  light  40 
feet  above  high- water  mark.  On  northwest  point  of  island,  south  side 
of  channel,  5  miles  west  of  Rockport. 

GANANOQUE     NARROWS     LIGHT-STATION.  — A 

fixed  white  light,  visible  7  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  37  feet 
high.  On  northeast  end  of  Little  Stave  island,  south  side  of  channel,  6 
miles  l)olow  Gananoque. 

JACKSTRAW    SHOAL    LIGHT-STATION.  — A    fixed 

white  light,  visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  29  feet  high. 
On  north  side  of  channel,  2  miles  below  Qananoque.     On  a  pier  in  river. 


♦  . 


fej 

ehl 

w| 
O^ 


641 
of 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


43 


i 


1173 

)163 

ilfil 

1120 

8« 

72 

60 

44 

28 

126 

9S 

74 

68 

53 

69 

0 


I 


Beacon. — A  small  pier,  surmounted  by  a  red  drum  on  a  mast,  700 
feet  southeast,  one-half  east  from  the  light,  marks  the  south  edge  of  the 
channel. 

SPECTACLE  SHOAL  LIGHT-STATION.  —  A  fixed 
white  light,  visible  9  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower  26  feet  high. 
On  north  side  of  channel,  1^  miles  west  of  Gananoque.  On  a  pier  in 
river. 

RED  HORSE  ROCK  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  9  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  On  a  pier  at  head  of 
an  island,  southeast  side  of  channel,  1  mile  above  Spectacle  shoal. 

BURNT  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  26  feet  high,  li^ht 
64  feet  above  high-water  mark.  On  southeast  part  of  island,  north  side 
of  channel,  one-half  mile  above  Red  Horse  Rock. 

WOLFE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  6  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  On  Quebec,  or  east 
point  of  island. 

BROWN'S  OR  KNAPP'S  POINT  LIGHT-STA- 
TION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood 
tower,  20  feet  high.  On  north  side  of  Wolfe  island,  4  miles  below 
Kingston. 

KINGSTON  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visi- 
ble 17  miles.  Wooden  tower,  on  stone  building,  city  clock.  Light  96 
feet  from  the  base.  Kingston  has  one  of  the  best  harbors  on  Lake 
Ontario.  There  are  three  channels  by  which  it  can  be  entered  from  the 
lake.  The  north  channel  is  generally  preferred.  To  enter  by  this  chan- 
nel, when  three-fourths  mile  W.  i  N.  from  Simcoe  Island  light,  sUer  N. 
E.  f  N.,  1^  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  ^  E.  from  Simcoo  Island  light,  and 
in  range  with  it  and  Pigeon  Island  light,  when  steer  N.  ^  E.,  keeping  the 
lights  in  range  2  J  miles,  until  Snake  Island  light  bears  S.  E.  f  S.,  1^ 
miles  distant,  when  steer  E.  by  N.  4  miles,  to  abreast  of  Kingston  and 
one  fourth  of  a  mile  from  shore.  Good  anchorage  off  the  shipyard. 
The  depth  of  water  in  the  harbor  and  at  the  landing  pisrs  and  wharves 
varies  from  12  to  16  feet.  The  rocky  bed  of  the  river  at  the  entrance  is 
being  deepened  to  15  feet. 

SNAKE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light, 
visible  6  miles.  Square  tower,  35  feet  high,  stone  dwelling  attached. 
On  a  pier  on  bar  about  550  yards  S.  E.  ^  E.  from  Snake  island,  and  4 
miles  from  Kingston.  There  is  a  dangerous  shoal  with  only  4  feet  of 
water  on  it,  2^  miles  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  from  Snake  Island  light.  Siiiicoe 
Island  light  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  2^  miles  from  Snake  Island  light.  Shoal 
water  connects  Snake  island  and  Snake  Island  liglit. 

SIMCOE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.- A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  III  miles.  White,  circular  stone  tower,  40  feet  high,  light 
45  feet  above  high-water  mark.  On  southwest  point  of  Simcoo  island. 
There  is  a  shoal,  least  water  4  feet,  N,  N.  W,  ^  W.  2^  miles  from  this 
light.  A  fog  bell,  struck  by  machinery,  sounds  4  times  each  minute,  in 
thick  or  foggy  weather.  False  Ducks  light  S.  W.  ^  W,,  I8f  miles. 
Pi,t,'eon  Island  light,  S,  f  W.,  5!^  niiles. 

PIGEON  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving  white 
light,  visible  13  miles,  period  of  revolution,  70  seconds.      White  tower, 


44 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


n 


41  feet  high,  light  46  feet  above  high  water.  On  Pigeon  island,  S.  W.  I 
W.,  4  miles  from  Longpoint.  Charity  Shoal  buoy,  S.  E.  ^  E.,  3^  miles. 
False  Ducks  light,  S.  W.  by  W.  |  W.,  14^  miles.  Galloo  Island  light,  S. 
by  E.  I  E.,  13|  miles.     Tibbett's  Point  light,  E.  ^  N.,  9  i  miles. 

FALSE  DUCKS  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
3d  order,  visible  16  miles.  White  tower,  62  feet  high,  light  68  feet  above 
high  water.  On  the  east  point  of  False  Ducks  island.  Pleasant  Point 
light.  N.  i  W.  9  miles.  Stony  Point  light,  E.  S.  E.  i  S.,  26  miles.  West 
point  of  the  main  Duck,  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  8  miles.  A  shoal  with  12^  feet  of 
water  over  it,  lies  S.  W.  ^  W.  3^  miles. 

SOUTH  BAY  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red 
light,  visible  11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  with  dwelling  at- 
tached, light  36  feet  above  high  water.     On  Point  Traverse. 

CENTRE  BROTHER  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— 

A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles.  White,  square,  wood  tower,  kitchen 
atcached,  red  iron  lantern.  On  the  northeast  point  of  Centre  Brother 
island,  at  the  east  entrance  to  the  north  channel,  between  Amherst  island 
and  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Ontario.  About  7^  miles  to  the  westward 
of  Kingston. 

POINT    PLEASANT    LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white 

light,  visible  10^  miles.  Octagonal  tower  52  feet  high.  West  point  of 
entrance  to  Bay  of  Quinte.  Pigeon  Island  light  E.  by  S.,  14  miles. 
South  Bay  Point  light,  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  9  miles. 

DESERONTO  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  II  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  On  the  roof  of  the  freight 
shei^  of  the  Bay  of  Quinte  Railway  near  the  outer  end  of  Company's 
wharf.  Lit  by  gas.  Will  guide  to  Deseronto  from  Belleville,  Pioton, 
and  Napanee. 

TELEGRAPH  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
white  light,  visible  12  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  on  dwelling, 
li^ht  46  feet  above  high-water  mark.  On  north  side  of  Bay  of  Quinte,  7 
miles  from  Belleville. 

BELLEVILLE  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  on  octagonal  pier.  On 
southeast  edge  of  shoal,  at  entrance  of  Harbor,  450  feet  west  from  (  nd  of 
Grand  Junction  Railway  wharf. 

POINT  PETER,  OR  LONG  POINT  LIGHT-STATION. 

— Flashing  white  light,  interval  of  flash  35  seconds,  visible  16^  miles. 
White,  circular  stone  tower,  60  feet  high,  light  62  feet  above  sea  level  on 
Long  point.  Steam  fog-horn,  16  feet  above  water,  gives  blasts  of  9 
seconds,  with  silent  intervals  of  28  seconds.  The  fog  alarm  building  is 
of  wood,  white,  with  brown  roof,  stands  close  in  front  of  tower.  A  spit 
extends  from  this  point  nearly  south  1^  mile.  Ssilmon  Point  light 
N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  4  miles.     Galloo  Island  li^'ht,  E.  i  S.,  36  miles. 

SALMON,  OR  WICKED  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— 

A  fixed  rod  light,  visible  12^  miloL.  White,  square  tower  on  dwelling, 
light  40  feet  above  sea  lovo'  On  point  4  miles  to  westward  of  Long 
point.  Scotch  Bonnet,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  13^  miles.  A  spit  extends  W. 
S.  W.  2  J  miles  from  the  point. 

SCOTCH  BONNET,  OR  EGG  ISLAND  LIGHT-STA- 
TION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles.    White  stone  tower,  light 


LAKK   ONTilBIO. 


Ua 


64  feet  above  sea  level.    On  small  island  1  mile  southwest  of  Nicholson's  island. 
Cobourg,  W.  by  N.  32^  miles.     Presque  Isle  light,  N.  W.  |  W.,  10  miles. 

Presque  Isle  Main  lil^bt. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  16i  miles.  White, 
octagonal  stone  tower,  63  feet  high,  light  67  feet  above  sea  level.  On  East  point  24^ 
miles  loo  the  eastward  of  Cobourg.  There  is  a  shoal  spot  with  3  feet  of  water  over 
it,  E.  t  S.,  nearly  2  miles  f'oar  the  main  light,  and  another  S.  W.-by  W.  i  W.  5J 
miles  with  10  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Mnrrajr  Canal  and  approaches.  Including  aids  to  naTlgatfon. 

The  Murray  canal  is  a  straight  cut  (tangent)  6^  statute  miles  long  between  extremi- 
ties of  piers,  80  feet  wide  on  the  bottom,  and  12^  feet  deep  below  the  ordinary  low 
water  level  of  Lake  Ontario,  or  the  zero  of  the  Toronto  gauge,  joining  the  head  of 
the  Bay  of  Quinte  with  Presqu'ile  Bay  in  Lake  Ontario.  It  has  no  locks  but  is 
crossed  by  3  highway  bridges  and  1  railroad  bridge.  At  each  end  of  the  canal  crib- 
work  piers  have  been  built  out  on  both  sides  into  the  sliallow  water,  and  beyond 
them  a  dredged  channel  200  feet  wide  has  been  continued  until  water  of  the  same 
depth  as  that  in  the  canal  is  reached.  The  dredged  cut  at  the  east  end  extends  2,800 
feet  beyond  the  piers,  and  is  for  its  whole  length  in  the  axis  of  the  canal,  viz.:  E. 
by  N.  f  N. ;  at  the  west  end  the  dredging  follows  the  axis  of  the  canal  W.  by  8.  -f  8. 
6,520  feet;  it  is  then  deflected  10°  to  the  southward  and  runs  straight  on  the  bearing 
of  8.  W.  by  W.  t  W.  a  distance  of  8,820  feet,  where  deep  water  in  Presqu'ile  bay 
is  reached.  From  this  poi"t  a  bearing  of  8.  E.  i  8.  and  distance  of  4,150  feet  lead  to 
the  entrance  of  the  dredgtvi  channel  from  Presqu'ile  bay  into  Lake  Ontario.  This 
channel  bears  8.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  is  9,200  feet  long  and  leads  past  Calf  Pasture  shoal 
'and  8alt  Point  lights,  the  former  being  left  560  feet  and  the  latter  300  feet  distant 
on  the  cfcarboard  hand  going  out.  After  passing  8alt  point  the  channel  gradually 
widens  to  1,000  feet  until  deep  water  in  Lake  Ontario  is  reached. 

The  canal  was  opened  for  traffic  on  April  14,  1890,  and  completed  in  August, 
1890.  Its  approaches  have  been  marked  by  a  system  of  buoys  and  lighted  beacons, 
as  follows: 

Buoys.  1.  Approaching  the  canal  from  the  eastward,  or  Bay  of  Quint6  side, 
a  red  spar  buoy  16  leet  long  has  been  moored  in  10  feet  water  on  the  east  end  of 
a  shoal  which  extends  from  Indian  island,  in  the  Bay  of  Quinte.  From  this  buoy 
the  centre  pier  of  the  swing  of  Trenton  bridge  bears  N.  W.  by  N.  distant  11,040  feet, 
the  single  tall  pine  tree  on  Indian  island  W.  by  8.,  distant  6,000  feet,  and  the  east 
entrance  of  the  canal  8.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  distant  11,360  feet.  This  buoy  is  only 
about  1.800  feet  from  the  Prince  Edward  County  shore,  but  the  best  channel  is  to 
the  south  of  it. 

2.  A  similar  buoy  has  been  moored  in  13  feet  water  near  the  east  end,  and  on  the 
north  side  of  the  dredged  channel  leading  from  deep  water  of  the  Bay  of  Quints  to 
the  eastern  entrance  of  the  canal.  This  buoy  is  distant  1,640  feet  from  the  end  of  the 
cribwork  at  the  east  end  of  the  canal.  The  middle  of  the  dredged  channel  is  100  feet 
south  of  the  buoy. 

8.  In  Presqu'ile  bay  8  red  spar  buoys,  16  feet  long,  moored  in  18  feet  water  on 
the  south  edge  of  the  dredged  channel  which  is  parallel  with  the  axis  of  the  canal, 
and  respectively  2,260.  4,420  and  6,500  feet  distant  from  the  west  end  of  the  canal 
cribwork.  The  last  described  of  these  buoys  (No.  20)  is  placed  at  the  angle  between 
that  part  of  the  dredged  cut  which  bears  W.  by  8.  f  8.  and  the  part  which  bears  8. 
W.  by  W.  i  W.,  and  from  it  Brighton  range  light  No.  8  is  distant  W.  *  8.  700 
feet. 

4.  A  red  spar  buoy,  No.  18,  in  13  feeo  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel  bearing  8. 
W.  by  W.  J  W.,  and  midway  between  Nos.  20  and  16. 

5.  A  red  spar  buoy.  No.  16,  in  13  feet  at  the  west  extremity  and  on  the  south  side 
of  the  last  named  dredged  channel.  From  this  buoy  range  light  No.  1  bears  8.  W. 
by  W.  i  W.,  distant  1,400  feet. 

6.  A  red  spar  buoy.  No.  14,  in  13  feet  water  on  the  north  side  and  at  the  west 
extreme  of  the  dredged  channel  boarinu'  8.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  whicli  leads  from  Presqu'ile 
bay  to  Lake  Ontario.  From  this  last  imnied  buoy  outwards  the  sides  of  the  dredged 
cut  are  marked  by  six  black  and  six  red  spar  l)uoy8. 

vJanal  Lights. — There  an;  6  lights,  maintained  by  the  canal  authorities  on  the 
pici'heads  and  bridges  as  follows; 

1,  A  fixed  red  light  visihlo  4  miles  from  all  points  of  approach  by  water,  shown 
from  a  lenticular  lantern,  elevated  19  feet  above  the  water,  standing  on  a  square 


V^ 


v/: 


,/ 


Ub 


LAK£   O^TAKIO. 


W 


pyramidal  open  frame  30  feet  from  the  end  of  the  nort?i  pier  at  the  east  entrance  of 
the  canal.    The  frame  is  12  feet  high  above  the  pier  and  is  painted  brown, 

2.  A  light  visible  6  miles  up  and  down  the  canal  is  shown  from  a  lenticular  lan- 
tern, elevated  85  feet  above  the  water,  and  placed  over  the  swing  pier  of  the  Carrying 
Place  highway  bridge,  which  is  4,725  feet  up  the  canal  from  the  last  described  light. 
The  lantern  is  so  arranged  that  when  the  swing  is  open  for  vessels  a  white  light  is 
shown  over  the  southern  edge  of  th^i  swing  piei,  and  when  closed  a  red  light  is 
shown  directly  over  the  middle  of  the  pier. 

3.  A  similar  light  to  the  last  described,  but  only  20  feef  above  the  water,  on  the 
swing  pier  of  the  Central  Ontario  Railway  bridge,  which  is  1,500  feet  westerly  from 
the  Carrying  Place  bridge. 

4.  A  light  similar  in  every  respect  to  No.  2  on  the  Smithfleld  bridge,  which 
crosses  the  canal  near  the  middle  of  its  length  or  6,600  feet  westerly  from  the  railway 
bridge 

5.  A  similar  light  on  Lovatt's  bridge,  which  crosses  the  canal  6,490  feet  from  the 
western  extremity  of  the  western  piers  or  7,700  feet  from  the  last  named. 

8.  A  fixed  red  light,  visible  4  miles  from  all  points  of  approach  by  water  is  shown 
from  a  lenticular  lantern  elevated  14  feet  above  the  water,  standing  within  a  square 
pyramidal  open  frame  30  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  west 
entrance  of  the  canal.  The  frame  is  12  feet  high  above  the  pier  and  is  painted 
brown. 

Brighton  Range  Etights. — A  range  light  which  will  be  known  as  Brighton 
Range  Light,  No.  3,  established  by  the  government  of  Canada.  The  tower  is  a 
square  wooden  building  painted  white,  and  30  feet  high  from  its  base  to  the  vane  on 
the  lantern.  It  stands  upon  an  octagonal  cribwork  pier  sunk  in  15  feet  water  in  tlie  ' 
axis  of  the  canal  and  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel  which  bears  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W. 
It  is  distant  7,200  feet  from  the  end  of  the  canal  piers  and  3,920  feet  from  Brighton 
wharf.  The  light  is  fixed  while,  elevated  29  feet  above  the  water,  aad  visible  3  miles 
down  the  canal  and  in  the  direction  of  No,  1  range  light.  In  one  with  No.  2  light  it 
leads  up  from  the  canal  through  the  centre  of  the  channel  and  is  to  be  left  100  feet 
on  the  starboard  hand  in  passing  up.  After  being  passed  if  brought  directly  astern 
with  No.  1  directly  ahead  it  will  guide  through  the  remainder  of  the  dredged  chan> 
nel. 

A  range  light  which  will  be  known  as  the  Brighton  Range  Light  No.  2,  estab- 
lished under  similar  circumstances,  stands  5,360  ftet  W.  by  8.  f  S.  from  No.  3  or 
1.440  feet  from  Brighton  wharf.  The  light  is  fixed  red,  elevated  45  feet  above  the 
water,  and  should  be  visible  6  miles  down  the  canal  in  alignment  with  No.  3.  or  from 
W.  by  8. 1  8.  and  through  the  dredged  channel,  through  fcialt  Point  and  Calf  Pasture 
shoals  in  alignment  with  No.  1,  or  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.  The  tower  is  a  square  wooden 
building,  painted  white,  47  feet  high,  and  stands  on  a  square  cribwork  pier  sunk 
Presqu'ile  bay  in  7  feet  water. 

A  range  light,  which  will  be  known  as  Brighton  Range  Light,  No.  1,  stands  1.420 
feet  8.  E.  by  E.  i  F  from  No.  2,  and  1,100  feet  from  Brighton  wharf.  The  light  is 
fixed  white,  elevated  28  feet  above  the  water,  and  should  be  visible  6  miles  in  align- 
ment with  No.  2,  and  also  toward  No.  3  light.  The  tower  is  a  square  wooden  build- 
ing,  painted  white,  with  iron  lantern  red,  is  30  feet  high,  and  stands  on  an  octagonal 
cribwork  pier  sunk  in  Presqu'ile  bay  in  14  feet  water. 

Calf  Pasture  Shoal  Light.— (Discontinued.) 

Salt  Point  Back  Kange  Light. — (Discontinued.) 

Sailing  Directions.— Vessels  approaching  the  canal  from  the  eastward  should 
keep  the  Prince  Edward  shore  close  on  board  after  passing  the  Nigger  Island  buoys, 
until  the  Indian  Island  buoy  is  passed,  when  they  can  bear  up  b.  W.  by  W.  i  W. 
towards  the  canal  entrance  until  the  centre  line  of  the  canal  is  reached.  By  day  the 
centres  of  the  swings  of  the  bridges,  by  night  the  lights  on  the  same  (white  if  swings 
are  open,  red  if  closed),  in  one  will  indicate  with  suflicient  accuracy  the  middle  of 
the  dredged  channel  and  of  the  canal,  and  are  to  be  kept  in  alignment.  Each  bridge 
is  passed  to  the  south  of  the  swing,  which  is  somewhat  to  the  northward  of  the 
axis. 

In  leaving  the  canal  going  westward,  the  same  marks  In  rear  wiV  give  the 
middle  of  the  first  portion  of  the  dredged  channel,  while  No.  3  and  No.  3  Brighton 
light  in  one  in  front  sliow  tlio  siinie  alignn  ent.  The  middle  of  this  channel  is  only 
100  feet  distant  from  llie  throe  red  buoys  marking  its  south  edge.  A  conspicuous 
point  of  rushes  at  No.  22  buoy  runs  out  into  deep  water  and  sliould  be  passed  close 
to  instead  of  being  given  a  wide  berth  as  is  usual.     This  course,  W.  by  8.  |  8.,  ii 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


45 


kept  unlfl  No.  3  light  is  only  200  feet  ahead,  when  the  vessel  should  hear  up  S.  W. 
by  W.  5  W.,  for  No.  1  Brighton  li^ht.  As  soon  aa  huoy  No.  16  is  passed  she  should 
bear  up  8.  E.  i  S.  until  lights  Nos.  1  and  2  are  brought  in  one  bearing  N.  W.  by  W. 
i  W.  astern.  This  alignment  leads  out  through  the  middle  of  the  dredged  channel 
through  Calf  Pasture  and  Salt  Point  shoals,  and  as  soon  as  Presqu'ile  main  light 
W.  bears  the  vessel  is  in  Lake  Ontario  clear  of  all  shoals. 

The  bearings  are  magnetic.    The  variation  of  the  magnet  for  1891  is  about  7* 
westwardly, 

Weller's  Bay,  Bear  Light.— A  fixed  white  light.  White, 
square,  open  frame- work,  wood  tower  37  feet  high.  Near  the  west  end 
of  Quinte's  Carrying  Place. 

The  rear  light  tower  at  Weller's  Bay  has  been  moved  31  feet  west- 
wardly so  as  to  bring  the  two  lights  in  line  with  the  extremity  of  the 
Spit  off  Bald  Head.  In  this  position  they  show  the  best  water  over 
Weller's  Bar,  which  lies  about  3,300  feet  outside  of  Bald  Head  Spit. 
Vessels  entering  should  bring  the  lights  in  range  bearing  N.  E.  by  E., 
and  should  find  10  feet  water  on  the  bar  on  this  line.  Inside  the  bar 
they  will  have  to  open  the  lights  to  the  westward  to  clear  the  spit,  which 
is  marked  by  a  white- washed  tripod  16  feet  high.  Good  water  will  be 
found  on  the  line  of  range  inside  the  spit  until  in  line  with  Pine  Point. 

Weller's  Bay,  Front  Kange  Light. — A  fixed  red  light. 
White  square  wood  tov/er  27  feet  high,  520  feet  S.  W.  by  W.  from  rear 
light. 

Cohourg  East  Pier. — A  fixed  white  light.  White,  square  wood 
tower,  visible  8  miles.  On  east  pier.  This  is  a  corporation  light  and  not 
under  the  Marine  Department.    Lighted  with  gas. 

Cohourg,  East  Pierhead  Light.— A  fixed  white  light,  on  a 
mast.  On  the  east  pierhead,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  380  feet  outside  of  the  Cor- 
poration light.  *' 

Cohourg,  West  Pierhead  Light.— A  fixed  red  light.  Shown 
from  a  lantern  on  a  mast  20  feet  above  the  pier.  Oswego  light,  E.  S.  E. 
f  S.,  88^  miles.  Port  Dalhousie  light,  S.  W.  |  W.,  74  miles.  Gibraltar 
Point  light,  W.  by  S.  f  S.;  66  miles.  Harbor  piers  130  feet  apart,  direc- 
tion of  piers  south. 

PETER  ROCK,  OR  GULL  ROCK  LIGHT-STATION — 

A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  miles.  Octagonal  stone  tower  48  feet 
high.  On  a  rock  off  the  point,  about  3  miles  W.  by  S.  from  Cobourg 
light,  and  about  2^  miles  east  of  Port  Hope  light. 

Port  Hope  Pierhead  Light.— A  fixed  red  and  white  light. 
On  pierhead  east  side  shows  a  red  liglit  to  the  south  and  a  white  light 
to  the  east  and  west.  Long  Point  light,  PI  by  S.  55  miles.  Burlington 
Bay  light,  8.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  87i  miles.  The  shore  line,  10  miles  to 
the  westward,  bears  W.  by  8.  J  8. 

The  direction  of  harbor  piers  south.  The  breakwater,  300  feet  in 
length,  is  completed;  depth  of  water  in  the  new  harbor,  11  feet,  and  in 
the  old  harbor  9A  feet.     The 


12  inches. 


'ho  elevation  in  the  water  fluctuates  from  6  to 


_  Newcastle  Pierliead  Light.— A  fixed  white  light  visibii!  lo 
miles.  Small  wooden  tower  rising  Iroin  the  roof  of  storehouse.  On  the 
outer  end  of  the  easterly  pier.  The  harbor  is  located  about  6  miles  to 
the  eastward  of  Port  Darlington,  at  the  Point  marked  on  the  Admiralty 
charts  "  Bond  Head,"  and  now  known  as  Newcastle  harbor.     It  was 


46 


I^AKK   ONTARIO. 


n 


originally  a  marsh  through  which  ran  a  stream.  The  entrance  is  pro- 
tected by  two  breakwater  piers. 

Darlington  Pierhead  Liffht.— A  fixed  white  light.  On  a 
stone  house  on  the  east  pier,  20  miles  to  the  westward  of  Port  Hope 
and  15  to  the  eastward  of  Whitby.  Point  Peter,  or  Long  Point  light, 
E.  i  S.,  74  miles.  Port  Dalhousie  light,  S.  W.  i  S.,  54|  miles.  The 
harbor  piers  are  160  feet  apart;  direction  of  piers  south. 

Oshawa  Pierliead  Ligllt.— A  fixed  white  light  on  pierhead. 
Thare  is  only  one  pier,  six  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Whitby. 

Wllitby  Pierhead  Light* — A  fixed  white  light.  On  a  square, 
wood  tower  on  the  west  pier.  Gibraltar  Point  light,  S.W.  by  W.  f 
W.,  28  miles.  Long  Point  light,  E.  f  S.,  87^  miles.  The  harbor  piers 
are  250  *eet  fpart;  direction  of  piers  S.  by  E.  The  west  pier  is  646 
feet  in  '  <y*n,  and  the  east  pier  390  feet.  To  enter  the  harbor  run 
straight  ..nc'  'hen  past  the  end  of  the  west  pier  haul  to  the  west- 
ward and  >me  t .  anchor,  or  run  to  the  wharves.  Depth  of  water 
between  the  piers,   ;•    feet. 

Frenchman's  Bay,  or  Pickering  Pierhead  Light.— A 

fixed  green  light,  visible  10  miles.  White  octagonal  wood  tower  47 
feet  high  on  the  east  pierhead.  Direction  of  piers  about  S.  by  E.  ^ 
E.  The  east  pier  is  685  feet  in  length  and  the  west  pier  835  feet. 
Pickering  is  about  20  miles  to  the  north,  and  east  of  Gibraltar  point 

GIBRALTAR     POINT     LIGHT-STATION.— Revolving 

white  light,  interval  of  revolution  45  seconds,  visible  16  miles.  White, 
hexagonal  stone  tower,  62  feet  high,  keeper's  dwelling  near,  light  66 
feet  above  sea  level.  Fog  whistle  building  of  wood,  white,  with  brown 
roof.  On  the  southwest  side  of  Gibraltar  point  If  miles  south  of  Tor- 
onto. During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  fog  horn,  operated  by  com- 
pressed air,  sounds  blasts  of  7  seconds'  duration,  with  intervals  of  90 
seconds;  established  1886.  Fog  signal  house  1150  feet  S.  W.  by  S. 
from  the  light-house.  Burlington  Bay  light,  S.  W.  k  W.,  28^  miles. 
Long  Point  light,  E.  f  K,  113  miles.  Presque  Isle  light,  E.  by  N.  90 
miles. 

Toronto  Range  Lights,  Front  Light.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  9  miles,  white,  hexagonal  wood  tower,  23  feet  high.  On 
west  end  of  Queen's  wharf;  37  feet  from  extreme  end,  visible  over  an 
arc  of  180''.     Fog  bell  rung  by  hand  attached  to  tower. 

Baclc  Range  Light. — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  8  miles,  red 
octagonal  wood  tower,  35  feet  high.  On  an  extension  shoreward  of  the 
wharf,  200  feet  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  from  front  light,  visible  over  an  arc  of 
180«>.     The  two  lights  in  range  lead  clear  of  the  point  of  the  bar. 

A  storm  signal  apparatus,  established  in  1874,  is  located  close  to  the 
front  range  light  tower. 

The  following  described  buoys  are  placed  oflP  Gibraltar  point  to  mark 
the  bank  to  the  south  and  southwest  or  the  light-house  point: 

One  iron  can  buoy  painted  red,  with  black  ring,  and  black 
ball  on  the  end,  the  point  light-house  bears  from  it  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N. 

A  bell  buoy  (red),  the  light  bears  N.  N.  W.  i  W. 

Another  red  can  buoy,  the  light  bears  N.  f  W. 

Another  red  can  buoy,  the  light  bears  N.  by  E. 


r   i 


LAKE   ONTABIO. 


47 


ice  18  pro- 

■; 

cht.     On  a 

1 

Port  Hope 

1 

*oint  li&:nt, 

1 

liles.     The 

1  pierhead. 

7- 

i 

n  a  80  u  are, 

1 

by  W.  f 

1 

arbor  piers 

1 

pier  is  646 

'; 

larbor  run 

»  the  west* 

of  water 

.ight.— A 

tower    41 

3.  by  E.  i 

835    feet. 

dtar  point 

-Revolving 

P 

s.     White, 

r,  light   66 

irith  brown 

ith  of  Tor- 

d  by  com- 

I 

rvals  of  90 

>; 

W.  by  S. 

28^  miles. 

;.  by  N.  90 

:ed    white 

high.     On 

le  over  an 

miles,  red 

ird  of  the 

•  an  arc  of 

)ar. 

3se  to  the 

It  to  mark 

ind  black 

f.  IN. 

I 

Nl 


Another  red  can  buoy  (with  white  ring  around  it  and  white 
ball  on  the  end),  the  light  bears  N.  E.  ^  E. 

•  A  red  spar  buoy  stands  on  the  northwest  point  of  the  bank, 
N.  W.  ^  N.  from  the  can  buoy,  with  white  ring  and  white  ball  on  the 
end.  The  lighthouse  bears  E.  N.  E.,  and  the  cupola  on  the  Central 
Prison  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.  Tho  can  buoys  are  placed  in  eight  fathoms 
of  water  and  the  spar  buoy  in  17  feet,  vessels  should  not  pass  inside  of 
them,  as  the  bank  rises  very  abruptly. 


48 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


1 


I 


An  additional  spar  bnoy  painted  red  has  been  placed  on  the  north- 
west point  of  the  island  in  17  feet  of  water. 

West  Channel. — A  red  spar  buoy,  No.  16,  placed  in  13  feet  of 
water,  at  the  entrance  of  the  west  channel,  on  the  southwest  point  of  the 
bar. 

A  black  spar  buoy.  No.  1,  on  the  north  side  and  western  extremity  of 
the  channel.  Between  these  two  buoys  is  the  dredged  channel,  about 
fourteen  feet  deep  forming  the  western  entrance  to  the  harbor.  The 
range  of  lights  leads  in  between  them,  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N. 

There  are  six  red  spar  buoys  in  9  feet  of  water  on  the  face  of  the  bank 
to  the  eastward  of  No.  16,  defining  the  southern  limit  of  the  dredged 
channel,  which  is  about  300  feet  wide.  The  northern  limit  of  the  chan- 
nel is  defined  by  the  wharves. 

£ast  Channel* — The  buoys  it  the  east  channel  are  placed  thus, 
namely:  Two  black  spar  buoys  on  the  west  or  port  side  coming  into 
the  bay,  and  two  red  spar  buoys  on  the  east  or  starboard  side.  There 
are  6  feet  of  water  mid-channel  between  the  buoys.  Landmarks  on  com- 
ing into  the  East  Channel  are,  the  cupola  of  the  St.  Lawrence  Hall,  in 
range  with  steeple  of  the  Methodist  Church  (with  four  spires  on  the  top) 
on  Church  street.  The  course  by  compass  coming  in  is  N.  W.  by  N. 
A  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  the  boiler,  or  to  the  south  of  the  Gap.  Vessels 
should  not  go  to  the  N.  W.  of  it. 

Port  Credit  Pierhead  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible 

11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  36  feet  high.  At  the  outer  end 
of  north  breakwater  pier,  visible  from  all  points  of  approach.  Gibraltar 
Point  light  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  10  miles.  Port  Dalhousie  light  S.  E.  by  S.  f 
S.,  28  miles. 

Oakville  Pierhead  Light.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  ii 
miles.  White  wood  towei',  39  feet  above  lake  level.  On  a  crib  6^  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  east  pier.  The  center  of  the  tower  is  31  feet  from 
the  southern  extremity  of  the  pier,  and  14  feet  from  the  inner  or  western 
edge,  and  about  330  feet  outside  the  shore  line.  Port  Dalhousie  light  S. 
E.  i  E.,  26  miles.  Burlington  Bay  light  S.  W.  |  S.,  11  miles.  Gibraltar 
light  N.  E.  i  E.,  17  miles. 

BURLINGTON  BAY  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  15  miles.  White  stone  building,  light  VO  feet  above  sea 
level.     On  the  shore  near  the  middle  of  the  south  pier. 

Burlington  Bay  Pierhead  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  vis- 
ible 10  miles.  White,  wood  tower,  light  30  feet  above  sea  level.  Near 
the  outer  end  of  son^h  pier.  Gibraltar  Point  light,  N.  E.  J  E.,  28^ 
miles.     Port  Dalhousie  light,  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  27  miles. 

Burlington  Bay  is  at  the  west  end  of  Lake  Ontario  ;  it  is  formed 
by  a  narrow  neck  of  land  6^  miles  in  length,  connecting  the  north  and 
south  shores  of  the  lake.  A  channel  has  been  cut  through  this  neck  1^ 
miles  from  the  north  shore,  connecting  the  deep  water  in  the  lake  with 
the  deep  water  in  the  bay  The  sides  of  the  channel  are  protected  by 
two  piers  nearly  parallel.  The  south  pier  is  2,850  feet  long  and  the  north 
pier  2,430  feet  in  length.  Width  between  the  piers,  at  the  lake  ends,  110 
feet,  narrowing  to  116  feet  at  the  shore  lines.  Direction  of  piers,  N.  E. 
i|  E.      The  least  water  is  midway  between  the  two  lights,  average  depth 

12  feet,  with  17  feet  at  the  entrance  from  the  lake. 

To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  lake,  bring  the  lights  to  bear 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


49 


bove  sea 


southwest  when  they  should  be  in  range,  and  run  for  them,  approaching 
the  pier,  open  the  lights  a  little  to  port,  and  run  in.  On  a  aark  night, 
keep  the  south  pier  close  on  board,  to  avoid  the  end  of  the  north  pier, 
which  is  420  feet  inside  the  end  of  the  south  pier;  this  precaution  is 
also  necessary  because  the  south  pier,  when  opposite  the  end  of  the  north 

Sier,  diverges  a  little  to  the  northward.  Burlington  Bay  is  one  of  the 
est  harbors  on  the  lake  ;  there  are  from  6  to  10  fathoms  of  water  over 
mud  and  clay  bottom.  There  is  a  rush-bed,  with  from  4  to  6  feet  of 
water  on  it,  8.  W.  by  S.  from  the  piers,  about  600  feet  from  the  shore, 
and  300  feet  east  of  the  H.  &  N.  W.  elevator,  marked  with  a  black  barrel 
buoy  on  the  northwest  end  in  8  feet  of  water.  Another  rush-bed  off  the 
foot  of  James  street,  Hamilton,  extends  about  900  feet  into  the  bay, 
which  is  marked  with  a  black  spar  buoy  in  9  feet  of  water  on  the  north- 
west end  of  it,  bears  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  the  piers.  Vessels  bound  to 
the  city  wharves,  or  the  G.  T.  R.  R.  wharves,  will  pass  this  buoy  to  port. 
Course  from  the  pier  to  the  city  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  4^  miles. 

PORT     DALHOUSIl.     LIGHT  -  STATION.— Revolving 

white  light,  visible  13  miles.  White  circular  wooden  tower,  light  53 
feet  above  high  water.  On  the  east  pier,  339  feet  from  the  outer  end, 
at  the  eastern  entrance  to  Welland  canal,  shows  from  E.  to  W.  by  S. 
Interval  of  revolution,  1  minute. 

Note. — The  Welland  canal  (new)  is  28  miles  in  length,  with  28  locks, 
the  locks  are  270  feet  long  and  45  feet  wide  and  capable  of  locking  a 
vessel  250  feet  long  and  44  feet  beam,  the  depth  of  water  is  from  12|  to 
14  feet. 

Port  Dalhousie  (South  light).— A  fixed  white  light.  White, 
square  wood  tower.  On  end  of  east  pier,  315  feet  S.  ^  W.  from  main 
light.  The  piers  are  200  feet  apart,  about  2,000  feet  in  length,  direci 
tion  N.  :^  E.  Depth  of  water  14  feet  at  low  water.  The  north  side 
of  the  outer  reef  off  the  mouth  of  Niagara  river,  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  11 
miles.  Burlington  Bay  light,  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  27  miles.  Gibraltar  light, 
N.  f  W.,  28  miles.  One  lamp  shows  N.  J  E.,  one  N.  W.,  and  one  S.  W., 
or  up  the  harbor. 

N.  B. — There  are  ranges  for  ascertaining  compass  errors  at  this  port. 
Particulars  can  be  obtained  at  the  canal  ofUce. 

Niagara  Fog  Bell. — On  the  north  rampart  of  Fort  Mississagoa 
has  been  discontinued.  A  bell  buoy  has  been  placed  on  the  reef  off  the 
mouth  of  the  Niagara  river.     See  page  35. 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  on  the  North  Shore  of  Lake 

Ontario. 


Kingston  to  Long  Point  or  Point  Peter.— When  abreast 
of  Kingston  and  one-fourth  mile  from  shore,  steer  W.  by  S.,  4  miles,  until 
Snake  Island  light  bears  S.  E.  f  S.,  \\  miles  distant,  when  steer  S.  \  W., 
on  a  range  of  Simcoe  and  Pigeon  Island  lights  2^  miles,  up+il  within 
1  mile  of  Simcoe  Island  light,  when  steer  S.  W.  f  S.,  22^  miles,  to  a  point 
4  miles  S.  f  W.  of  False  Ducks  light,  when  steer  W.  by  S.,  19^  miles  to  a 
point  3  miles  S.  f  W.  of  Long  Point  light. 

NoTB. — When  running  on  the  course  S.  ^  W.  on  a  range  of  Simcoe 


50 


LAKB   ONTARIO. 


and  Pigeon  Island  lights,  the  course  leads  very  close  to  the  west  side  of 
a  16-foot  shoal  If  miles  N.  I  E.  from  Simcoe  Island  light. 

Lon^  Point  to  Presque  Isle.— When  3  miles  S.  f  W.  of 
Long  Point  light,  steer  W.  N.  W.  i  N.,  18  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  S.  ^ 
W.  From  the  Scotch  Bonnet  light,  when  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.  heading  on 
Presque  Isle  light  for  9  miles,  or  to  within  1^  miles  of  it,  when  steer 
about  north  until  in  range  of  the  Harbor  light  and  Salt  Point  light. 

Long  Point  to  Port  Hope.— When  3  miles  S.  f  W.  of  Long 
Point  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  65  miles,  to  a  point'  1  mile  south  of 
Port  Hope  light.  This  course  leads  close  to  the  south  side  of  a  reef 
with  18  feet  of  water  over  it,  4  miles  S.  ^  W.  from  the  Scotch  Bonnet 
light. 

Long  Point  to  Wllitby.— When  3  miles  S.  f  W.  of  Long 
Point  light,  steer  W.  f  N.,  87^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Whitby. 

Long  Point  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  3  miles  S.  f  W. 
of  Long  Point  light,  steer  W.  i  S.,  113  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Long  Point  to  Burlington  Bay.— When  3  miles  S.  |  W. 
of  Long  Point  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  136  miles,  to  within  1  mile  of  the 
beacon  sKt  Burlington  Bay. 

Lon^  Point  to  Niagara  River.— When  3  miles  S.  ^  W.  of 
Long  Point  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  102^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N. 
W,  J  W.  from  Fort  Niagara;  see  course  from  Gibraltar  to  Fort  Niagara. 

Long  Point  to  Cape  Vincent.— When  3  miles  S.  f  W.  of 
Long  Point  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  1 9^  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  S.  f  W.  Qf  False 
r-ucks  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  28  miles  to  abreast  of  Cape 
Vincent,  and  ^  a  mile  from  shore.  Passing  ^  mile  north  of  Charity 
shoal. 

Compass  Bearings  and  Distances  from  Point  Peter  light 
to  lights  on  the  south  shore:  v 


To  Stony  Point E. 

Oswego S, 


8 43  miles. 


3.iS 


42 


"  Charlotle 

•*  BIj?  Sodus 8.  i  E. 

"  Oak  Orchard 8.  W.  by  W.  f 

*•  Thirty-mile  Point W.  8.   W 

••  Fort  Niagara W.  8.  W.  |  W. 


S.W.  byS 45J 

~       ~  40 

61 

73i 

103 


Presque  Isle  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  3  miles  S.  ^  W. 
from  Presque  Isle  light,  steer  W.  i  S.,  89  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south 
of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Presque  Isle  to  Port  Dalhousie.— When  2  miles  S.  ^  W. 
from  Presque  Isle  light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  94  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
N.  f  E.  of  Port  Dalhousie  light. 

Presque  Isle  to  Charlotte. — When  1  mile  S.  E.  from  main 
light,  steer  S.  ^  W.,  47^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  E.  ^  N.  from  Gfenesee 
light. 

Presque  Isle  to  Oswego. — When  1  mile  S.  E.  from  main 
light,  steer  S.  E.  |  S.,  9^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  S.  ^  W.  from  the  Scotch  Bon- 
net light,  thence  S.  E.  f  E.,  67  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by  W.  of  Os- 
wego beacon-light. 


.■.'lit. 

J. 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


61 


Presque  Isle  to  Big  Sodus.— When  2  miles  S.  i  W.  from 
main  light,  steer  S.  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  57i  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  |  E. 
from  the  piers  and  in  line  with  the  range  lights. 

Cobourg  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  l  mile  south  of  Co- 
bourg  lights,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  66  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Cobourg  to  Long  Point.— When  l  mile  south  of  Cobourg 
lights,  steer  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  50^  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  S.  f  W.  of  Long 
Point  light.  This  course  leads  across  the  south  end  of  the  3  fathom 
shoals  south  of  the  Scotch  Bonnet  light.  In  rough  weather  it  would  be 
well  to  keep  a  little  farther  to  the  southward. 

Cobourg  to  Oswego. — When  l  mile  south  of  Cobourg  lights, 
steer  E.  S.  E.  i  S.,  88  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by  W.  from  Oswego 
beacon  light. 

Port  Hope  to  Port  Dalhousie.— When  i  mile  south  of 
Port  Hope  light,  steer  S.  W.  i  W.,  69  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 
Port  Dalhousie  light. 

Port  Hope  to  Whitby.— When  1  mile  south  of  Port  Hope 
light,  steer  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  10  miles,  thence  W.  i  S.,  24  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  south  of  Whitby  light. 

Port  Hope  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  i  mile  south  of 
Port  Hope  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  |  S.,  10  miles,  thence  W.  by  S.  |  S., 
61  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Gibraltar  Point  light. 

Port  Hope  to  Burlington  Bay.— When  l  mile  south  of  Port 
Hope  light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  87  miles,  to  the  piers. 

Whitby  to  Gibraltar  Point.— When  l  mile  south  of  Whitby 
light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  |  S.,  28  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
Gibraltar  Point  light 

Whitby  to  Fort  Niagara.— When  l  mile  south  of  Whitby 
light,  steer  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  38^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  W.  i  W. 
from  Fort  Niagara  light. 

Whitby  to  Charlotte.— When  l  mile  south  of  Whitby  light, 
steer  S.  E.  by  E,  ^  E.,  66  miles,  or  until  the  point  3  miles  west  of 
Braddock's  point  bears  S.  ^  W.  2  miles  distant,  thence  S.  E.  ^  E.  10 
miles,  or  until  Genesee  light  bears  S.  ^  W.,  2  miles  distant. 

Whitby  to  Little  Sodus.— When  l  mile  south  of  Whitby 
light,  steer  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  1 15^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  f  E.  of 
Fair  Haven  light. 

Gibr«altar  Point  to  Long  Point,  and  Kingston.— When 

one  mile  south  of  Gibraltar  Point  light,  steer  E.  ^  N.,  113  miles,  to  a  point 
3  miles  S.  f  W.  of  Long  Point  light,  thence  E.  by  N.,  19^  miles,  to  a 
point  4  miles  S.  f  W.  of  False  Ducks  light,  when  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  22  J 
miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  ^  E.  of  Siracoe  Island  light,  and  in  range  with 
it  and  Pigeon  Island  light ;  thence  N.  ^  E.  2^  miles,  kf^ping  Pigeon 
Island  and  Simcoe  Island  lights  in  range  until  Snake  Is^  d  light  bears 
S.  E.  f  S.,  1 J  miles  distant,  when  steer  E.  by  N.,  4  miles,  ;  .til  abreast  of 
Kingston,  keeping  ^  of  a  mile  from  the  north  shore. 

Note. — When  running  on  the  course  N.  J  E.  on  a  range  of  Simcoe 
and  Pigeon  Island  lights,  the  course  leads  very  close  to  the  west  side  of 
a  16-foot  shoal  which  lies  N.  f  E.,  1^  miles  from  Simcoe  Island  light. 


52 


NIAGASA   BIVER. 


Gibraltar  Point  to  Fort  Niagara.— When  i  mile  south  of 
Gibraltar  Point  light,  steer  S.  li.  f  S.  26  miles,  to  a  poii.  ,  N.  f  W.  Sf 
miles  from  Fort  Niagara  light,  then  steer  S,  f  W.  with  Fr .  t  Mississagua 
a  little  to  starboard  for  3  miles,  or  until  Fort  Niagara  light  bears  8.  E. 
by  S.  distant  1  mile,  when  steer  about  S.  E.  by  S.\  8.,  keeping  a  little 
outside  the  range  of  the  wharves  under  the  Fort^ntil  past  the  wharves, 
when  keep  up  the  middle  of  the  river,  6  miles  to  Lewiston  ;  no  dangers 
in  the  river. 

Gibraltar  Point  to  Burlington  Bay. — When  i  mile  west 
of  Gibraltar  Point  light,  steer  S.  W.  i  W.,  28  miles,  to  the  pier  head 
light. 

Burlington  Bay  to  Oswego. — When  ^  mile  east  of  the 
beacon  iiglro,  steer  E.  i  N.,  65  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  f  E.  of  Thirty- 
mile  Point  light,  thence  E.  ^  S.,  99^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by  W. 
from  Oswego  beacon  light. 

Burlington  Bay  to  Niagara  River.— When  i  mile  east  of 
the  beacon  light,  steer  E.  i  S.,  35  miles,  to  a  point  N.  f  W.,  3f  miles 
from  Fort  Niagara  light,  when  see  course  from  Gibialtar  Point  to  Fort 
Niagara. 


NIAGARA  RIVER. 


Jl 


Light-Houses   and    Buoys    Standing    up   the   River   above 

the  Falls. 

Sailing  Directions. — There  is  no  good  anchorage  in  this  river, 
owing  to  the  strong  current  and  the  character  of  the  bottom,  which  is 
rocky  throughout.  Southwest  gales  in  Lake  Erie  raise  the  water  at  the 
head  of  the  river  from  3  to  5  feet,  and  increase  the  current;  further 
down,  the  effect  is  not  so  great;  northeast  winds  produce  a  contrary 
affect.  The  Rapids  begin  a  mile  above  the  Falls  and  just  below  Chip- 
pewa, Canada.  On  the  American  side,  foul  ground  commences  three- 
fourths  mile  below  Grand  island,  and  extends  more  than  half-way  across 
the  river.  The  channel  west  of  Grand  island,  up  to  the  head  of  Straw- 
berry island,  is  known  as  the  "Chippewa"  channel;  it  is  10  miles  long, 
660  to  1,150  yards  in  width  (only  450  at  Navy  island),  and  2  to  6 
fathoms  deep. 

Tonawanda  Channel. — This  channel  lies  on  the  south  and 
east  sides  of  Grand  island,  and  the  east  of  Frog  and  Strawberry  islands; 
length,  8  miles  from  foot  of  Tonawanda  island  to  head  of  Strawberry 
island;  width,  350  to  1,000  yards.  It  is  not  safe  to  attempt  to  take 
more  than  12  feet  draught  between  Tonawanda  and  Grand  islands;  best 
water  on  the  Grand  island  side,  above  Tonawanda  to  Strawberry  island, 
3  to  5  fathoms;  14  feet  of  water  east  of  Strawberry  island.  The  east  - 
shore  of  channel  is  bold  throughout,  also  the  west  niiore,  until  up  with 
the  Mink  Island  Shoal  buoy;  current,  3  to  6  miles  per  hour,  depending 
on  width  of  channel. 

Sailing  Directions. — From  channel  cast  of  Tonawanda  island, 
round  Buoy  No.  1,  close  aboard,  or  pass  around  Iron-works  Shoal  buoy, 


NIAGARA   RIVER. 


53 


as  may  be  most  oonvenient;  then,  standing  up  the  channel,  pass  the  red 
buoys  in  order,  leaving  them  to  the  starboard,  and  giving  them  a  fair 
berth.  After  passing  Nice's  Shoal  buoy,  No.  4,  keep  in  mid-channel, 
favoring,  if  anything,  the  Grand  Island  shore,  until  up  with  the  foot  of 
Frog  island,  when  take  the  eastern  shore  and  pass  the  buoys  in  order. 
From  Strawberry  Island  buoy,  No.  10,  steer  for  the  draw-pier  of  the  In- 
ternational Railroad  bridge.  From  this  bridge  up,  see  directions  for 
main  channel. 

Iron-works  Shoal. — Spar  buoy,  red  and  black  horizontal 
stripes,  in  12  feet  of  water.  On  a  small  shoal,  southeast  corner  of  Iron- 
works wharf,  E.  f  S. 

Tonawanda  Spit. — Black  spar  buoy  in  11  feet  of  water,  on 
north  point  of  spit  making  out  from  Tonawanda  island.  Southwest  cor- 
ner of  Iron-works  wharf,  N.  N.  E.  Jl^  E. 

West  Bank. — Red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water,  on  west  bank 
of  channel  between  Grand  island  and  Tonawanda  island.  Cupola  of 
iron-works,  N.  E.  f  E. 

!East  Bank. — Black  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water,  on  east  bank 
of  channel  between  Grand  island  and  Tonawanda  island.  Cupola  of 
iron-works,  N.  by  E.  j[  E. 

Nice's  Slioal. — Red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water,  on  west  bank 
of  channel  between  Grand  island  and  Tonawanda  island,  above  Tona- 
wanda island.  Northeast  corner  of  Capstan-house  on  Grand  island,  N. 
|W. 

Mink  Island  Shoal. — Red,  3d-class  can  buoy  in  13  feet  of 
water,  west  side  of  channel,  and  marks  the  outer  edge  of  a  rocky  spit, 
extending  out  from  Strawberry  island,  just  below  Mink  island.  Draw- 
pier  of  International  bridge,  S.  f  E. 

Elbow. — Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water,  marks  the  elbow  of  the 
shoal  at  the  head  of  Strawberry  island,  and  stands  about  midway  between 
the  island  and  the  main  land.  A  straight  course  may  be  made  between 
this  and  the  Strawberry  Island  Shoal  buoy,  bearing  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  Mink 
Island  Shoal  buoy,  N.  by  W.  i  W. 

Strawberry  Island  Shoal. — Red,  2d-cla88  nun  buoy  in  13  feet 
of  water,  on  the  west  side  and  at  the  head  of  Tonawanda  channel^  it 
stands  360  yards  from  the  American,  and  770  yards  from  the  Canadian 
shore,  and  marks  the  end  of  a  rocky  shoal  extending  one-third  mile  from 
the  upper  end  of  Strawberry  island.  Draw-pier  of  international  bridge, 
S.  i  E. 


Grand  Island  Channel. 

Sailing  Directions. — This  channel  lies  between  Grand  island, 
on  the  west,  and  Frog  and  Strawberry  islands,  on  the  east;  it  is  a  mile 
long,  '259  yards  in  width,  and  12  foot  of  water  may  be  carried  tlirough. 
Shoal  water  extends  from  Grand  island  nearly  half-way  across  to  the  op- 
posite side;  Frog  island  and  the  islet  above  are  bold.  A  spit  makes  out 
100  yards  into  the  chnnnol  from  the  lower  end  of  Strawberry  island. 
The  channel  east  of  Strawberry  island  should  be  taken  in  preference  to 
this,  except  by  those  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  locality.  The 
navigation  of  this  channel  should  not  oe  attempted  except  by  those  well 


64 


NIAGARA.   EIVBB. 


acquainted  with  it,  as  the  bottom  is  irregular,  solid  rock,  and  the  current 
very  strong. 

Grand  Island  Shoal. — Red,  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  13  feet  of 
water.  West  side  of  channel,  near  its  head,  and  marks  the  eastern  edge 
of  a  shoal  extending  500  yards  southeast  from  the  head  of  Grand  island. 
It  stands  close  to  the  end  of  the  shoal.     Hell's  Half- Acre  buoy,  S.  E. 

Hell's  Half- Acre. — Black,  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water. 
On  the  east  side  of  channel,  at  its  head,  and  marks  the  outer  edge  of  a 
small  reef,  with  4  feet  of  water  on  it,  extending  to  westward  from  Straw- 
berry island,  near  its  middle.  Twelve  feet  water  can  be  carried  between 
these  buoys.     Draw-pier  of  International  bridge,  S.  S.  E.  f  E. 


Main  Channel  Above  Strawberry  Island. 

Sailing^  Directions. — The  reach,  known  as  the  "Narrows,"  be- 
ginning at  the  lower  end  of  Squaw  island,  is  2  miles  long,  one-third  mile 
wide,  and  from  3  to  6  fathoms  deep;  good  water  to  within  150  yards  of 
either  side;  current  5  miles  per  hour,  increasing  to  7  at  the  head;  at  the 
latter  point,  a  little  east  of  mid-channel,  is  the  Buffalo  water-works  crib, 
which  may  be  passed  on  either  side,  good  water  close  to  tbj  Black  Rock 
Harbor  pier  for  one-third  n.ile  above  and  below  the  crib.  Black  Rock 
harbor  is  a  canal,  3^  miles  long  and  100  to  800  feet  wide,  formed  along 
the  river  front  of  Buffalo  by  Squaw  island  and  a  pier  extending  from  its 
upper  end.  This  canal  is  used  by  light-draught  vessels  bound  up,  to 
avoid  the  strong  current  of  the  Narrows;  7  feet  of  water  may  be  carried 
through;  a  lock  near  the  lower  end.     No  danger. 

International  Bridge. — This  bridge  spans  the  river  nea*  ,he 
middle  of  Squaw  island.  The  drav  is  nearest  the  east  shore,  c  is 
lighted  at  night  by  a  stationary  red  fight  on  each  end  of  the  draw  \  lers, 
low  down  on  the  free  end  of  each  protection  pier,  and  on  each  side  of 
the  pivot,  pier  where  it  is  crossed  by  the  axis  of  the  bridge.  Three 
square  lanterns,  each  16  feet  above  the  top  of  the  draw  span,  mark  its 
ends  and  middle,  and  show  reJ  up  and  down  stream  when  the  draw  is 
closed;  but  when  the  draw  is  open,  the  lantern^  show  three  green  lights 
in  line  up  and  down  stream,  with  the  stationary,  low  red  lights  marking 
the  width  of  the  openings.  The  signal  to  open  the  dr^^v.  (a  continuous 
whistle  of  at  least  30  seconds'  duration)  should  bo  made  on  entering  tlie 
river.  Pass  through  the  draw  on  west  side  of  swing-pier.  If,  for  any 
reason,  the  draw  cannot  be  opened,  a  red  flag  is  hoisted  on  the  *'  swing." 

Buffalo  Water-works  Inlet  Pier  is  on  the  east  side  of  the 
channel,  at  tlie  head  of  the  "  Narrows"  of  the  Niagara  river,  and  1^ 
miles  below  the  Horseshoe  Reef  light-house;  is  marked  at  night  l»y  a 
red  light  22  feet  above  i,he  waier. 

Nliiynrn  River  Kunge  Boacoii  (fV*oiit).— A  fixed  white  light,  fl)\own 
from  II  wliitc  mast  W*  feet  lii^li,  sdrmounU'd  l)y  circuliir  gridiron  day-mari{,  with 
HlatH  |)iii!it(Ml  nlti  rimlt'ly  black  and  wliito.  On  tlie  outer  hank  of  the  Erie  canal,  HOO 
feet  K.  by  H.  from  the  IJulfalo  Waler-works  Inlc't  j»ier,  and  is  i{!{  feet  above  the  water- 
level  of  the  ( lUial 

l\IUKiti'n  Klvor  Rniive  BeiUMin  (rc)iir).~A  llxed  white  Pgiit,  shown  from 
a  trianjiuiar  Hkeletou  pyramid  painted  brown,  earryiiiK'  near  the  top,  on  tlie  Hide  fac- 
ing the  elmnnel,  an  elliptieal  gridiron  day-mark  8  feel  by  Vi  feet,  with  slats  painted 
alternately  black  and  white.  Light  i()!3  feet  above  lake  level.  In  Niagara  street,, 
City  of  Jiullalo,  UTG  feet  from  the  front  light.     Horseshoe  Hoef  light  8.  .S.  W.,  8 


NIAGARA   KIVER. 


55 


be  oarrent 

3  feet  of 
3tern  edge 
ind  island. 
,  S.  E. 

t  of  water, 
edge  of  a 
om  Straw- 
d  between 


rows,"  be- 
-third  mile 
0  yards  of 
ad;  at  the 
v^orks  crib, 
lack  Rock 
Hack  Rock 
med  along 
ig  from  its 
und  up,  to 
be  carried 

jr  nea'  lie 
)re,  E  is 
raw  ^  lers, 
ich  side  of 
Three 
mark  its 
le  draw  is 
"een  lights 
marking 
ontinu(»U8 
ring  the 
',  for  any 
*'  swing." 

(JO  of  the 
I",  and  1|- 
iglit  l>y  a 

nht,  sliown 
mark,  with 
(•anal,  HOO 
1  the  water- 

hown  from 

i(>  Hide  fac- 

atH  ])iiin1cd 

twwK  slrcot,, 

S.  W.,  8 


miles.  The  above  lights  are  'iocomotive  heiid-lights.  This  range  is  designed  for 
crossing  Lime-kiln  reef,  and  intersects  the  cliannel  on  the  east  side  of  the  water  works 
crib  about  1,000  feet  above  the  crib.  Heavy  tows,  after  passing  the  lower  buoy, 
will  probably  have  to  keep  well  up  on  this  range  in  order  to  make  the  turn  without 
being  carried  too  close  to  the  crib  by  the  strong  current. 

Bird  Island  Reef. — Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.  On 
tho  east  side  of  channel,  and  marks  the  western  point  of  a  reef  making 
out  from  the  corner  of  Black  Rock  Harbor  pier,  near  its  upper  end;  4  to 

9  feet  of  water  between  the  buoy  and  pier;  17  feet  in  the  channel  be- 
tween this  and  the  red  buoy  opposite.  The  range  between  this  and  the 
Emerald  Channel  buoy  (S.  f  W.)  clears  the  west  side  of  reef.  Horseshoe 
Reef  light-house,  S.  by  W.  f  W.  Buffalo  light-house,  S.  E.  ^  S.,  \\ 
miles. 

liiine  Kiln  Reefi — Red  2d-cla8s  nun  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water. 
Stands  about  700  yards  from  the  Canadian  shore,  nearly  opposite  to  the 
Bird  Island  Reef  buoy,  and  marks  the  eastern  point  of  a  reef  with  8  to 

10  feet  of  water  on  it;  current,  4  miles  per  hour.  The  range  from  this 
buoy  to  the  west  shore  at  the  head  of  the  "  Narrows  "  marks  the  west 
side  of  the  channel  between.     Bird  Island  Reef  buoy,  E.  by  S. 

Middle  Reef. — Black  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
west  point  of  Middle  reef.  Above  the  buoy  the  reef  trends  S.  ^  E  ,  250 
yards,  and  then  makes  in  towards  the  light-house.  Channel  at  this  point 
one-third  mile  wide ;  shoal  water  makes  out  from  the  Canadian  shore 
opposite,  rather  more  than  a  third  way  across.  Current,  If  miles  per 
hour.     Horseshqe  Reef  light-houoe,  S.  E.  \  S.,  350  yards. 

HORSESHOE  REEF  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  varied  by  white  flashes  at  intervals  of  90  seconds,  4th  order,  visible 
12|  miles.  White  square  one-story  beacon,  elevated  10  feet  above  a 
masonry  pier;  pier  protected  on  south  and  west  sides  by  a  crib-work  ice- 
breaker. Light  43  feet  above  water.  Dome  of  lantern  black.  On  Mid- 
dle reef,  at  the  entrance  (from  Lake  Erie)  to  Niagara  river.  This  reef 
separates  the  main  or  Canadian  channel  from  the  Emerald  channel,  and 
lies  one  third  way  from  the  Canadian  to  the  American  shore;  the  light- 
house stands  250  yards  from  the  south  end  of  the  reef.  The  range 
between  this  light-house  .and  Point  Abino,  10  miles  to  the  westward, 
clears  shoals  west  of  the  entrance  to  river.  Buffalo  light-house, E.  by  S,, 
1^  miles.  Buffalo  Breakwater  light-house,  E.  S  E.  \  E,  seven-eighths 
mile.     Point  Abino  (Canada),  W.  S.  W.  \  W. 

Waverly  SIiobI.— Hod  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2nd  class  can  biioy,  in  18 
feet  of  water,  near  tho  northeast  cud  of  shoal,  stony  l)ottom.  Tliis  shoal  extends 
about  700  fe((t  in  a  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  direction,  and  about  100  feet  wide;  'cast  water 
12  feet,  abo\it  S.  W.  from  the  buoy  400  feet  distant.  Horseshoe  Ucef  liniit  liouse  N. 
E.,  If  miles.  IJullalo  ligiil-house,  E.  N.  E.  fE.,  2J  miles.  Windmill  point  (Can- 
ada), \V.  J  N.,  8i  miles. 

Emerald  Channel. 

Sailing  DirectlonH. — This  channel  is  used  by  vessels  bound  to 
and  from  Buffalo  and  Niagara  river,  and  lies  between  Middle  reef  on  the 
west,  and  Bird  island  and  llorsesluxi  reefs  on  the  north  and  east  sides, 
respectively.  The  range  between  the  l.iine-kiln  Keef  buoy  and  '.he 
Breakwater  light-hous  (S.  E.  by  8.)  guicies  between  Bird  island  and 
Middle  reefs,  in  mid-channel  and  best  wa'er  (14  feet),  and  leads  up  to  and 

t»a8t  the' Horseshoe  Reef  buoy       ri»t'  north  end  of  Horseshoe  reef  bears 
fi.  700  yards  from  tho  Emorald  Channel  but)y.     This  channel  should  only 


'  >l 


56 


LAKE    BRIE. 


'■.Hi  niMA  3i'*on.'j  across 


be  attempted  by  light-draaglit  vessels,  as  the  on- 
it. 

Eli.'i<3raM  Channel. — Red  ad-class  car  Imoy  in  1  feei,  cf  water. 
South  Gido  of  entrance  to  channel,  and  marks  tlip  .'/jrtl  cud  of  Middle 
reef.  The  north  side  of  entrance  to  channel  is  on  the  range,  and  mid- 
way (300  yards)  between  this  and  the  Bird  Island  Reef  buoy.  Current, 
1^  miles  per  hour.  Horseshoe  Reef  light-house,  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  1,000 
yards. 

Horseshoe  Reef. — Black  spar  buoy  in  17  feet  of  water,  east  side 
of  head  of  channel,  and  marks  the  southwest  point  of  Horseshoe  reef, 
lying  between  Middle  reef  and  t'le  American  shore;  the  west  ride  of  the 
reef  trends  N.  by  W.  from  this  buoy.  Current,  1  mile  per  hour.  Buf- 
falo Breakwater  light-house,  S.  E.  600  yards.  Buffalo  light-house,  E.  S. 
E.  ^  E.,  three-fourths  mile. 


LAKE    ERIE. 

Light-Houses,    Buoys,    and  Harbors,    on   the 
Standing  to  the   Westward. 


^o?ith  Shore, 


Bufialo. — Southwest  gales  raise  the  water  in  Buffalo  harbor  from  3 
to  6  feet,  and  gales  from  the  opposite  direction  lower  it  as  much.  The 
new  breakwater  is  parallel  with  and  two-thirds  mile  from  the  shore 
south  of  the  harbor  piers;  length  of  breakwater  (to  date),  6,350  feet; 
direction,  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.;  entrance  by  either  end;  good  .^uchorage  behind 
it,  in  3  to  6  fathoms;  clay  and  sand  bottom.  At  and  near  (to  the  south- 
ward) the  south  pier  of  harbor,  shoal  water  extends  beyond  the  pier-head; 
further  south  there  is  12  feet  of  water  to  within  250  yards  of  the  shore. 
North  of  the  river  harbor  is  F  •;  '  asin,  behind  a  stone  breakwater,  700 
yards  long;  best  After  by  scui.li  entrance  (100  yards  wide)  between 
breakwater  and  north  pier  at  rav,c>ta  of  river;  narrow,  dredgod  channel, 
12  feet  deep,  along  the  wliarvos  inside  basin,  shoal  near  the  breakwater; 
the  shore  to  the  northward  may  be  followed  up  to  the  entrance  to  Black 
Rock  harbor,  1,000  yards  distant. 


BUFFALO. 


LAKE    ERIE. 


57 


oxyj  across 


I  c{  water, 
of  Middle 
,  and  mid- 
Current, 
W.,  1,000 

r,  east  side 
eshoe  reef, 
ide  of  the 
jur.  Biif- 
ouse,  E.  S. 


'7  Shore, 


bor  from  3 
loh.  The 
the  shore 
350  feet; 
fe  behind 
-he  south- 
)ier-head; 

he  shore. 

Eter,  700 
between 

channel, 

ak  water; 

to  Black 


BUFFALO    BREAKWATER    LIGHT    STATION. -A 

fixed  red  ligl>%  4th  order^ -visibi*'  12^-  milea.  W'nite,  squate  «)ii<  fttcry 
beacoT',  9  feet  abt  ve  the  crib  on  which  it  is  built.  Light,  37  feet  3A)0Vv) 
water.  On  eouth  side  of  entrance  to  harbor,  behind  the  north  fid  of 
new  breakwater;  the  latter  may  be  passed  close-to.  In  thick  ''•r 
weather,  a  bell,  rung  by  machinery,  is  struck  three  blows  in.  qn" 
cession,  at  intervals  of  30  seconds.  North  end  of  Erie  Basin  brar 
K.  E.  \  E.,  two-thirds  mile.  Buffalo  light-house,  E.  \  S.,  one-ha' 
Dunkirk  light-house,  S.  W.  \  S.,  36  miles. 


k  SU"- 

A  at';r.j 


BUFFALO  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  3d 
order,  visible  14f  miles.  Gray  octagon?!  tower,  51  feet  high,  lantern 
black.  On  south  pier  of  entrance  to  harbor,  125  yards  from  the  outer 
end.  The  south  pier  projects  350  yards  beyond  the  north;  width  be- 
tween piers,  200  feet;  16  feet  of  water  in  mid-cliannel;  13  to  14  feet 
alongside  north  pier,  and  8  feet  alongside  south  pier;  soft  bottom.  To 
enter  the  harbor,  pass  100  yards  north  of  the  breakwater  light,  and  steer 
for  Buffalo  light,  which  courst.  will  be  in  range  with  the  south  pier.  In 
September,  1889,  16^  feet  could  be  carried  in  at  low  water. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  south  side  of  the 
entrance  to  the  harbor. 


Channel  into  Dunkirk  Harbor. 

Sailing   Directions. — Making  this  harbor  from  the  eastward, 
!r  for  the  entrance,  between  the  Dunkirk  beacon  and  the  Diiy-Beacoii 


steer 


buoy,  with  the  latter  well  open  to  the  southward  of  the  pier  of  f'  ;mer 
— that  is,  nothing  in-shore  of  a  S.  W.  f  S.  course.  Entering  from  the 
westward,  the  Day-Beacon  buoy  and  south  end  of  easv  breakwater  in 


range  leads  past  Pomt  Gratiot  in  good  water;  between  liie  Po'^t  and 
the  west  pier  of  harbor  the  water  shoals  graduf^lly  to  ti.'i  s>.  ro.  A  chan- 
nel, excavated  in  rocky  bottom  to  a  depth  of  12  feet  (h  .t  tencf  ncy  to 
fill  at  inner  end,  only  11  feet  there  at  present)  and  IV  feet  in  width, 
leads  from  between  the  beacon  and  Day-Beacon  l)uoy  in  .i'  iro<*t  line  (E 
8.  E),  for  the  entrance  to  the  Eric  Railway  Company's  dot  k,  >^n*Vl  good 
water  is  reached,  about  midway  betw<'  i  the  breakv.^ut(>r  aiiu  the  city 
docks.  Anchorage  in  12  feet,  off  the  d  oks,  with  northevu  li'iit  nearly 
two-thirds  way  to  the  line  of  the  breakwater,  eastern  limit,  a  little  beyt>nd 
the  East  dock  to  the  eastward,  the  water  shoals  gradually  to  the  shore. 
East  part  of  anchorage,  hard  bottom;  middle  and  west  part,  boft  bottom. 
In  the  docks,  11  to  12  feet  of  water  at  entrance,  shoaling  toward  the 
head;  soft  botto.n  near  entrance,  simdy  bottom  inside,  During  north- 
erly gales  a  heavy  swell  sets  into  the  harbor,  pawt  the  east  end  of  break- 
water, rendering  berths  in  the  docks  insecure;  9  feet  of  w.itor  may  be 
carried  into  this  harbor  oust  of  the  breakwater,  with  the  elevaior  on  the 
Erie  Railway  west  dock  bearing  S.  S.  W.  Winds  up  the  lake  lower,  and 
winds  down  the  lake  raise  the  water  in  the  harbor. 

DUNKIRK  LIGIIT-STATTON.— A  fixed  white  lii^'ht,  8d 
order,  varied  by  white  iiaslies  at  intt^rvals  of  90  seconds,  visible  16^ 
miles,  A  reddish-gray,  square  tower,  52  feet  high,  with  dwelling  con- 
nected by  covered  way;  white  dwellivig  near  by,  to  the  eastward. 
Lantern  black.     On  Point  Gratiot,  a  bh'ff  TtO  yards  west  of  entrance  to 


58 


LAKE    ERIE. 


harbor.  BuildingF.  | .utly  hidden  by  trees.  Erie  light,  8.  W.  by  W.  ^ 
W.,  42f  mileB.  Presque  Isle  Beacon  light-house,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  44 
miles. 

Dunkirk  Beacon-light. — A  fixed  white  light,  6th  order, 
visible  12^'  miles.  Octagonal  brown  tower;  light,  38  feet  above 
water;  elevated  walk  along  pier  to  shore.  Lantern  black.  On  a 
square,  masonry  pier,  which  rises  10  feet  above  the  water,  at  the 
outer  end  of  west  pior  of  harbor;  south  side  of  entrance  to  channel. 
A  sunken  crib,  about  25  feet  wide,  lies  in  the  channel  alongside  the 
beacon  pier.  The  pier  extends  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  1,100  feet  from  W.  shore 
of  harbor.  The  dredged  channel  into  the  harbor  enters  between  this 
beacon  and  a  black  spar  buoy,  which  marks  the  site  formerly  occupied 
by  day-beacon,  100  yards  E.  N.  E.  of  this,  and  leads  E.  S.  E.  past  theS. 
W.  end  of  the  new  breakwater,  until  good  water  is  reached,  about  half 
way  up  to  the  city  docks.  Inside  the  breakwater  the  dredged  channel  is 
marked  by  two  red  buoys  on  the  south  side  close  to  bank.  This  light  is 
shown  whenever  the  weather  is  such  that  it  can  be  reached.  Dunkirk 
light-house,  W.  by  N.,  740  yards. 

Day-Beacon  Buoy. — Black  spar  buoy  in  17  feet  of  water.  North 
side  of  entrance  to  channel.  May  be  rounded  on  the  west  side  within  60 
yards.  Marks  the  point  formerly  occupied  by  Dunkirk  day-beacon, 
portions  of  which  still  show  above  water.  Dunkirk  beacon,  W.  S.  W., 
300  feet.     South  end  of  breakwater,  E.  S.  E.,  600  feet. 

Outer  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.     In  the  channel 

close  to  the  south  side,  and  marks  the  outer  end  of  a  ledge  of  rocks,  just 
covered,  extending  along  the  south  bank  of  channel  nearly  to  the  Inner 
buoy.  A  straight  course  may  be  steered  between  this  and  the  inner 
buoy,  400  yards  beyond.  Soutu  end  of  breakwater,  E.  ^  N.,  310  feet. 
Dunkirk  beacon,  W.  N.  W.  |  W.,  400  feet. 

Breakwater. — A  crib-work  bveakwater,  in  process  of  construction 
across  the  front  of  the  harbor.  It  extends  from  the  north  side  of  channel, 
in  an  E.  N,  E  direction,  about  400  yards  (to  date).  The  end  resting  on 
channel  mriy  »e  passed  close-to.  The  ruins  of  an  old  breakwater,  a  few 
feet  under  wa,'oer,  lie  about  60  yards  outside  of  the  present  breakwater, 
along  its  entire  length,  nnd  between  its  south  end  and  the  Day-beacon 
buoy  Inside  the  breakwater,  there  is  6  to  8  feet  of  water  close-to,  deep- 
ening gradually  to  the  anchorage. 

Inner  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy  in  10^  feet  of  water.  South  side 
of  ex<  ava^ed  channel,  at  the  inner  end.  Be'.ween  this  buoy  and  the 
entr^roe  to  west  dock  there  is  not  less  than  10^  feet  of  water,  shoaling 
gradual' V  <'-o  the  south  shore.  Dunkirk  water-works  crib,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W., 
480  yo'rds.     Ou.'  :^r  corner  of  west  dock,  S.  E.,  260  yards. 


Channel  into  Eric,  Presque  Isle  Bay, 

Sailing  DirecilouH. — The  16-foot  curve  of  the  bottom  passes 
through  the  station  of  the  Outer  buoy,  black,  and  follows  the  trend  of 
the  shore  on  both  sides  of  the  harbor  entrance,  passing  the  Erie  light- 
house at  a  distance  of  one-third  mile,  and  Presque  Isle  point  at  a  distance 
of  300  yards;  inside  this  curve  the  water  shoals  gradually  to  the  shore. 
Width  between  piers,  360  feet,  sandy  bottom.      Both  piers   riprapped 


LAKE    EBIE. 


69 


inside.  Strong  currents  are  produced  between  these  piers  when  the 
water  level  outside  is  changed  by  winds  blowing  up  or  down  the  lake. 
The  buoys  on  the  banks  of  this  channel  are  placed  a  few  feet  back  from 
the  edge,  and  a  straight  course  may  be  steervid  between  them,  on  either 
side.  Last  season  the  north  pier  was  extended,  and  the  beacon  moved 
out  to  within  30  feet  of  the  outer  end.  Vessels  not  drawing  more  than 
6  feet  or  water  may  stand  across  the  flats  on  the  south  side  of  channel, 
keeping  north  of  the  range  between  the  inner  end  of  north  pier  and 
west  side  of  the  elevators  in  Erie.  The  general  depth  of  water  in 
Presque  Isle  bay  is  from  3  to  5  fathoms,  mud,  clay,  or  sand  bottom, 
chiefly  mud  in  deep  water,  and  sand  on  the  shoals;  three  fathoms  of 
water  can  be  carried  to  within  500  yards  of  the  north  and  south  shores 
of  the  bay,  except  opposite  the  railroad  wharf  at  west  end  of  city,  where 
a  shoal  makes  out  from  the  north  shore,  one-third  way  across  the  bay, 
its  extremity  bearing  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  nearly  a  mile,  from  the  Inner 
buoy  (north).  The  Outer  buoy,  red,  may  be  approached  from  the  east- 
ward on  any  course  between  S.  S.  W.  and  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  The  range 
to  carry  through  between  tho  piers  W.  S.  W.  is  formed  by  the  beacon- 
light  on  east  end  of  north  pier  (red)  and  the  wh  te  range-light  on  west 
end  of  same  pier.  From  the  west  end  of  north  pier  a  straight  channel 
200  feet  wide  and  with  not  less  than  16  feet  of  w.'.ter  leads  to  the  deep 
water  of  the  inner  bay.  Continue  on  the  course  which  leads  between 
piers  until  the  range  beacon  on  west  end  of  pier  is  bi'ought  on  with  the 
beacon  near  southwest  corner  of  keeper's  dwelling;  take  this  range  until 
Inner  Black  buoy,  No.  7,  is  passed.     From  this  point  steer  for  docks. 


BRIE. 

ERIE  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  3d  order,  visi- 
ble 19  miles.  Light  gray  conical  tower,  60  feet  high,  with  oil-room 
attached,  lantern  black.  Detached  dwelling.  On  the  high  bluff  of  the 
lake  shore,  to  the  eastward  and  just  outside  I'resque  Isle  bay;  buildings 

eartly  hidden  by  trees.  End  of  north  pier  of  entrance  to  bay,  N.  W.  ^ 
r.,  1  mile.  Light  128  feet  above  lake  level,  '^he  apparatus  is  arranged 
to  illuminate  180  degrees  of  the  horizon,  between  the  bearings  E.  N.  E. 
f  E.  by  northward  to  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  but  the  light  is  obscured  through 
the  greater  part  of  the  arc  between  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  and  W.  i  N.  by 
woods  on  Presque  Isle.  " 


1  I 


i 


60 


LAKE    ERIE. 


Outer  Buoy. — Black  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
south  side  of  entrance  to  channel.  It  stands  in  sandy  bottom,  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  south  pier,  and  250  yards  outside  the  end  of  north 
pier.  Not  less  than  13  feet  of  water,  on  either  side  of  harbor  entrance, 
between  this  buoy  and  end  of  north  pier.  Presqne  Isle  point,  N.  N.  W. 
^  W.,  three-fourths  mile.  Erie  light-house,  S.  E.  |  S.,  seven-eighths 
mile. 

Outer  Buoy. — Red  3d-class  can  buoy  in  18 J  feet  of  water.  On 
the  prolongation  of  inner  face  of  north  pier,  and  marks  the  northern  side 
of  entrance  to  channel.  Heavy  draught  vessels  should  not  attempt  to 
pass  to  the  northward  of  this  buoy.  Presque  Isle  Beacon  W.  S.  VV.  450 
yards. 

Presque  Isle  Beacon  Lig^ht. — A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,vi8i- 
ble  12:^  miles.  White  pyramidal  tower,  with  brown  trimmings,  30  feet 
high.  Dwelling  brown,  on  the  peninsula,  back  of  pier,  with  small  white 
out-houses  in  rear  of  it.  Lantern  and  gallery  black.  On  east  end  of 
north  pier.  Brown  life-saving  station  and  two  white  sheds  stand  behind 
pier  west  of  dwelling.  A  bell  is  struck  by  machinery,  at  intervals  of 
20  seconds,  in  thick  or  foggy  weather,  by  fog-signal  in  base  of  beacon. 
The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  the 
harbor. 

Erie  Range  Beacon  No.  1. — White  octagonal  lantern  on  a  skel- 
eton base,  near  west  end  of  north  pier. 

Erie  Range  Beacon  No.  !3.— White  mast  beacon  with  oval  black 
day-mark.  Fixed  white  lights,  -visible  8^  miles.  No.  1,  on  west  end  of 
north  pier;  No.  2,  near  southwest  corner  of  keeper's  dwelling.  Presque 
Isle  beacon  forms  a  range  with  No,  1  for  approaching  and  passing 
between  the  piers.  The  range  between  No.  1  and  No.  2  guides  through 
the  newly-dredged  channel  into  harbor.  Lights  900  feet  apart,  bearing 
from  each  other,  S.  W.  by  W.  and  N.  E.  by  E. 

North  Bank. — Red  spar  buoy  in  10^  feet  of  water.  On  the  north 
bank  o''  dredijed  channel. 

South  Bank  (outer). — Black  spar  buoy  in  lOj  feet  of  water. 
At  the  outer  angle  of  the  south  bank  of  dredged  channel  100  yards 
inside  the  north  bank  buoy. 

Middle.— Red  spar  buoy  in  13^  feet  of  water.  Stands  on  the 
north  bank  close  to   channel. 

South  Bank  (inner). — Black  spar  buoy  in  10^^  feet  of  water. 
On  the  south  bank  of  channel. 

Inner  Buoy  (north). — Red,  2d-cla88,  nun  buoy  in  16  feet  of 
water.  Stands  on  tlie  north  bank  at  the  inner  end  of  the  dredged 
channel. 

Inner  Buoy  (south). — Black  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water. 
Stands  on  the  inner  end  of  dredged  channel,  south  side,  185  yards 
from  the  South  Bank  buoy  (inner).  Passing  this  buoy,  steer  for  the 
city  docks  (11  to  14  feet  of  water  alongside)  or  find  anchorage  in  the 
bay.  A  straight  course  may  be  made  from  this  buoy  to  the  "  Anchor 
line  "  wharf  in  Erie.  Inner  end  of  north  pier,  N.  E.  f  E.  Center  of 
Public  dock,  S.  ^  W.,  1,000  yards. 


LAKE    EBIB. 


61 


3rn  on  a  skel- 


!)n  the  north 


md8  on  the 


t  of  water. 


Standing    Westward  along  the  South  Shore  of  Lake  Erie. 

FRESQUE  ISLE  LIGHT-STATION— A  flashing  red  and 
white  light,  at  intervals  of  10  seconds,  4th  order,  visible  14  miles.  Red 
square  tower,  45  feet  high,  with  dwelling  attached.  Lantern  blr  ':, 
light  57  feet  above  sea  level.  On  north  shore  of  peninsula,  400  feet 
from  the  lake,  three-fifths  mile  west  of  the  most  northern  projection  of 
peninsula,  and  3  miles,  by  water,  west  of  entrance  to  Presque  Isle  bay, 
Pennsylvania.  Dwelling  partly  .hidden  by  trees.  Conneaut  light-house, 
S.  W.  by  W.  \  W.,  20  miles.  Long  point,  N.  \  E.,  26f  miles.  Rondeau 
point,  W.  \  N.,  93  miles. 

CONNEAUT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  6th 
order,  visible  llf  miles.  Brown  below  and  white  above,  pyramidal 
tower,  27  feet  high,  square  in  plan.  On  bluff  west  side  of  mouth  of 
river,  near  keeper's  dwelling.  Remnants  of  the  old  piers  still  remain, 
but  the  harbor  is  entirely  closed,  and  the  light  is  only  useful  as  a  coast 
light.  Ashtabula  light-house,  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  13^  miles.  Pel^e  Spit 
light  W.  \  S.,  101  miles.  Marblehead  light  W.  by  S.  115  miles.  Long 
Point  light  N.  E.  ^  N.,  48  miles. 

A§HTABULA  ILIGIIT-STATIOW.  — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by 
white  flashes,  at  intervals  of  2  minutes,  5th  order,  visible  llj  miles.  Brown  below 
and  white  above,  pyramidal  tower,  27  feet  high,  square  in  plan.  An  elevated  walk 
along  pier  to  shore.  Dwelling,  cream-color,  on  the  west  side  of  mouth  of  river. 
Near  the  outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Ashtabula  harbor,  Ohio;  width  between 
piers,  160  feet.  Work  is  progress  to  excavate  a  channel  through  the  outer  bar  to  a 
depth  of  18  feet  and  full  width.  The  channel  between  the  piers  is  being  dredged  to 
a  depth  of  17  feet.  The  east  pier  in  front  of  the  canal  leading  to  the  railroad  com- 
pany's slips  is  being  removed.  As  now  constructed  the  west  pier  extends  about  150 
feet  beyond  the  east  pier.  The  project  is  to  remove  the  east  pier,  and  re-locate  the 
same  45  feet  to  the  eastward  of  its  present  position.  Direction  of  piers  north.  Outer 
point  of  shore  to  the  wejtward,  W.  S.  W.  |  W.,  11  miles.  Fairport  light-house,  27 
miles  to  the  westward.  Rondeau  light-house  W.  N.  W.  \  N.,  63  miles.  Marble- 
head  light-house.  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  112  miles.  Long  Point  light-house  N.  E.  \  N.,  58 
miles. 

A§htabula  Range  L.tg[llt.— Three  fixed  lights  shown  from  lens  lanterns, 
two  red  tind  one  wliite,  arranged  vertically,  with  tlie  white  light  in  the  middle,  sus- 
pended from  a  triangular  skeleton  iron  pyramid  60  feet  high,  painted  brown.  On  the 
inner  end  of  the  west  pier.  Forms  a  range  with  the  main  pierliead  light,  which 
must  be  left  on  the  .starboard  hand  on  entering. 

FAIRPORT  L.IOHT-STATIOW.— A  fixed  white  light,  3d  order,  visible 
17^  miles.  Gray  conical  tower  60  feet  high,  connected  with  dwelling  by  covered 
way.  Lantern  black,  liglit  100  feet  above  sea-level.  On  the  bluff  east  side  of  mouth 
of  Grand  iliver,  at  Fairport.    Cleveland  light-house,  28i  miles  to  the  westward. 

Fairport  Beacon  Light.— A  fixed  white  light,  6th  order,  visible  12  miles- 
Brown  below  and  white  al)ove.  pyramidal  wooden  tower  27  feet  Jiigli,  square  in  plan. 
An  elevated  walk  along  pier  to  sliore.  On  crib  at  outer  end  of  oast  pier,  entrance  to 
Fairport  harbor,  mouth  of  Grand  River.  The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  west  side 
of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor.     Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  eastward,  E.  N.  E.     Outer 

Boint  of  shore  to  the  westward,  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W  .  3i  miles.     Rondeau  light-house 
1.  W.  i  N.,  48  miles.     Port  Burwell  light-house  N.  N.  E.,  65  miles. 

Fairport  Range  Ugiit.— Three  fixed  lights,  shown  from  lens  lanterns,  two 
red  and  one  white,  arranged  vertically,  with  the  white  light  in  the  middh;,  suspended 
from  a  triangular  skeleton  iron  pyramid  60  feet  high,  painted  brown.  On  the  inner 
end  of  the  east  pier,  forming  a  range  with  the  beacon  light  on  the  outer  end  of  the 
east  pier  which  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand  on  entering. 

Tlie  iinrbor  vir^irliN  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  connecting  the  deep 
water  in  Lake  Erie  with  the  deep  water  in  Grand  River.     Width  between  piers 


62 


LAKE   ERIE. 


200  feet,  direction  of  piers  N.  f  W.  Depth  of  water,  last  summer  there 
was  15^  feet  over  the  bar  and  16  feet  between  the  piers.  Dredging  was 
in  progress  to  give  16  feet  over  the  bar.  The  west  pier  extends  40  feet 
further  into  the  lake  than  the  east  pier. 

CliEVELiAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  3i 
order,  visible  20^  miles.  Red  octagonal  tower  84  feet  high,  connected 
with  dwelling  by  covered  way;  structure  of  brick,  with  stone  finish  and 
foundation.  Lantern  black,  light  154  feet  above  lake  level.  At  Cleve- 
land, Ohio,  on  the  hill  east  side  of  harbor.  The  upper  half  of  the  tower 
only  is  visible  above  the  surrounding  buildings.  Black  River  light- 
bouse,  25  miles  to  the  westward. 


CLEVELAND.     , 

Cleveland  Breakwater  (West  Arm). — A  crib  breakwater 
starts  from  the  lake  shore  at  a  point  about  700  feet  west  of  the  extremity 
of  the  old  bed  of  Cuyahoga  river,  running  into  the  lake  nearly  due  north 
a  distance  of  3,130  feet,  thence  to  the  eastward  about  parallel  with  the 
lake  shore  4,000  feet,  its  eastern  extremity  being  nearly  in  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  west  pier.  Vessels  entering  with  westerly  winds  should  keep 
well  to  windward,  as  a  strong  set  makes  along  the  breakwater  with 
westerly  winds.  Sail  vessels  should  keep  a  good  press  of  canvas  until 
inside  the  entrance,  as  a  strong  current  (with  the  wind  oflE  the  lake)  sets 
out  of  the  entrance.  ' 

Cleveland  Breakwater  (East  Arm). — The  East  Arm  of 
the  breakwater  commences  500  feet  from  the  east  end  of  the  West  Arm, 
and  will  extend  in  the  same  direction  about  E.  N.  E.,  900  feet,  thence 
east  about  3,600  feet,  terminating  in  over  20  feet  of  water,  so  that 
vessels  may  enter  safely  from  the  eastward.     There  is  now  completed 


LAKE    ERIE. 


68 


mmer  there 
edging  was 
jnda  40  feet 


ite  light,  3i 
1,  connected 
le  finish  and 
At  Cleve- 
jf  the  tower 
River  light- 


^LTL 


b  breakwater 

[the  extremity 

irly  due  north 

lallel  with  the 

1  the  prolonga- 

is  should  keep 

(akwater  with 

canvas   until 

the  lake)  sets 

[East  Arm  of 
le  West  Arm, 

\o  feet,  thence 
i^ater,  so  that 

[ow  completed 


;j,080  feet  of  the  East  Arm,  with  a  spur  of  118  feet  long  similar  ir 
all  respects  to  the  one  on  the  West  Arm.  The  spurs  have  a  riprap- 
ping  of  stone  on  both  sides  and  angles  nearly  to  the  surface,  and 
extending  to  the  entrance. 

A  Red  Light  is  exhibited  from  a  lantern  on  a  pole  20  feet  high 
and  15  feet  from  the  west  end  of  the  East  breakwater. 

Unfinished  work  at  the  east  end  is  not  marked  by  light  or  day 
signal. 

Depth  of  Tracer.— There  is  from  15  ft.  8  in.  to  17  feet  in  mid- 
channel  and  from  13  to  14  feet  alongside  the  piers.  Westerly  winds 
lower  the  water  from  6  to  12  inches.  27ie  Life- Saving  Station  is  on 
the  west  side  of  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

Cleveland  Breakwater  liiglit.— A  flashing  red  and  white 
light,  at  intervals  of  10  seconds,  4tb  order,  visible  12  miles.  Brown 
octagonal  iron  tower,  surmounted  by  a  black  lantern  and  railing.  The 
focal  plane  is  27  feet  above  the  base  of  the  tower  and  36  feet  above 
the  lake  level.  On  crib  24  feet  south  of  the  east  end  of  the  West 
breakwater.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  there  will  be  sounded 
at  this  station  a  10-inch  steam  whistle  giving  a  blast  of  3  seconds  fol- 
lowed by  a  silent  interval  of  27  seconds. 

Distress  Signal. — In  case  of  shipwreck  there  will  be  displayed  from  the  fog- 
signal  house  adjoining  the  tower  a  red  light  at  night  and  a  white  flag  in  the  day 
time,  for  the  information  of  the  Life  Saving  crew. 

Water-works  crib,  W.  i  N.,  li  miles.     Rondeau  light-house  N.  by  W.,  53  miles. 

Cleveland  Beacon-light  (East). — A  fixed  red  light,  6th 
order,  visible  12^  miles.  Square  pyramidal  wood  tower,  brown  below 
and  white  above,  30  feet  high,  light  37  feet  above  water.  An  elevated 
walk  along  the  pier  to  the  shore.  Beyond  the  arc  of  illumination,  to 
the  eastward,  the  lights  show  dimly,  and  warn  vessels  that  they  are 
too  far  inshore.  On  outer  end  of  east  pier,  entrance  to  Cleveland  har- 
bor, Ohio.  Width  between  piers,  200  feet;  direction  of  piers  N.  N.  W. 
f  W.     Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  eastward,  N.  E.  f  E.,  18  miles. 

Cleveland  Beacon-light  (West). — A  fixed  white  light,  6th 
order,  visible  13:^  miles.  Pyramidal  wooden  tower  40  feet  high,  brown 
below  and  white  above,  square  in  plan.  Elevated  walk  along  pier  to 
shore.  On  the  outer  end  of  west  pier.  Outer  point  of  shore  to  the 
westward,  W.  \  N.,  15^  miles. 

Signals  to  open  the  Bridges. — Lake  Shore  Bridge,  1  long,  and 
2  short  whistles;  River  Bed  Bridge,  1  long,  1  short,  1  long,  1  short  whis- 
tle; Main  St.  Bridge,  2  long  whistles;  Viaduct  Bridge,  3  long  whistles; 
Valley  R.  R.  Bridge,  4  long  whistles;  All  bridges  above  the  Viaduct,  4 
long  whistles.  White  light  over  center  of  R.  R.  bridges  when  closed. 
Red  when  open.  City  Bridges  red  light  when  open. 

BLACK  RIVER  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
4th  order,  visible  13  miles.  Pyramidal  wooden  beacon  40  feet  high, 
brown  below;  white  above,  squar?  -n  plan.  Elevated  walk  along 
pier  to  shore.  On  the  outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Black 
River  harbor.  The  harbor  works  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  200 
feet  apart,  direction  northwest,  connecting  the  mouth  of  Black 
River  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Erie.  Last  summer  the  east 
pier  was  extended  102  feet,  and  the  channel  dredged  to  a  depth 
of  16  feet  to  the  ore  docks.  Vermillion  light  house,  W.  S.  W.  | 
W.,  11  miles.     Outer  point  of  shore  to  the  eastward,  E.  N.  E.  \  E.,  2^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


1.25 


I^IM    125 

lis    ^^      ^^* 

Ui  Ui   |22 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


33  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTIR.N.Y.  MSM 

(716)  •73-4303 


^^% 


5.*\-^>,^^ 


z 


64 


LAKE   ERIE. 


i^' 


miles.     LonePoint  light-house,  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  182  miles.     Aliddle  of  South 
Passage,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  to  abreast  of  Marblehead  light,  19i  miles. 

Black  River  Range  Llfflit.— Three  fixed  lights  shown  from  lens  lanterns, 
two  red  and  one  white,  arranged  vertically,  with  the  white  light  in  the  middle,  sus- 
pended from  a  triangular  skeleton  iron  pyramid  60  feet  high,  painted  brown.  On 
the  inshore  end  of  the  west  pier,  forming  a  range  with  the  pierhead  light,  which 
must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  on  entering. 

VERMILIilON  LIOHT-STATIOnr.— A  fixed  red  light,  6th  order,  visible 
llf  miles.  Brown  octagonal  tower  27  feet  high.  Elevated  walk  along  pi  }r  to  shore. 
Lantern  black.  Near  outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Vermillion  harbor,  Ohio. 
Width  between  piers,  125  feet;  10  feet  of  water  can  be  carried  through,  in  mid-chan* 
nel,  into  the  mouth  of  the  river;  sand  and  rock  bottom;  direction  of  piers,  N.  i  W. 
Huron  light-house^^  W.  1^  8^,  9f  miles.  Pel6e  Spit  light- house,  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  82 
rs.  E. , 


miles.    Fairport,  E. 


60i  miles. 


fllJRON  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th  order,  visible  12^ 
miles.  Brown  iron  skeleton  tower  80  feet  high;  lantern  black.  Elevated  walk  along 
i)ier  to  shore.  On  crib  at  outer  end  of  west  pier,  entrance  to  Huron  harbor,  Ohio. 
The  harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  running  out  into  the  lake  in  a 
northeast  direction,  140  feet  apart.  Last  summer  the  west  pier  was  extended  120 
feet,  and  the  channel  dredged  to  a  full  depth  of  16  feet  throughout,  and  the  fuU 
width  of  140  feet.  Cedar  point  light,  9f  miles.  Outside  buoy  of  Sandusky  bay,  N. 
W.,  9i  miles.  Vermillion  light-house,  E.  by  N.,  9f  miles.  Marblehead  light-house, 
N.  W.iN.,12i  miles. 


•i 


Main  Channel  cf  Sandusky  Bay, 

Sailings  Directions. — This  channel  consistB  of  an  outer  dredged 
channel  across  the  bar  at  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  a  natural  channel 
between  the  Sand  Point  and  Oedar  Point  shoals,  and  an  inner  dredged 
channel,  in  three  straight  reaches,  lying  north  and  west  of  Horseshoe 
shoal,  and  leading  up  to  the  city  of  Sandusky.  Channel  4  miles  long, 
bottom  and  banks  sandy,  (until  up  with  the  inner  reach,  where  both  are 
soft),  and  16  feet  of  water  carried  through.  The  outer  ^wo  reaches  of 
the  aredged  channel  in  the  bay  are  200  feet  in  width,  and  the  inner  bank 
curved  at  the  elbows  ;  the  Inner  reach,  and  also  the  dredged  channel 
across  the  bar  at  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  will,  when  completed,  be  the 
same  width.  The  spr.r  buoys  on  the  banks  of  the  dredged  part  of  chan- 
nel stand  within  a  few  feet  of  the  edge. 

The  dredged  channel  terminates  100  ^ards  from  the  city  wharves  ; 
10  to  12  feet  of  water  beyond  and  alongside  the  wharves ;  12  feet  of 
water  (unless  unusually  low  water)  on  both  sides  of  the  Inner  reach 
(until  past  the  Inner  buoy)  to  a  distance  of  one  mile  on  the  east  side  and 
one-third  of  a  mile  on  the  west ;  best  anchorage  on  east  side,  behit  d 
Horseshoe  shoal;  the  Inner  Elbow  buoy,  in  range  with  the  south  end  of 
Johnson's  island,  marks  the  northern  limit  of  anchorage.  The  outer 
edges  of  the  Sa.id  Point  and  Cedar  Point  shoals  trend  N.  W.  \  W.  and 
S.  by  E.,  respuocively,  from  the  outside  buoy,  until  within  a  third  of  a 
mile  of  the  snore  ;  6  feet  of  water  can  be  carried  across  the  outer  end  of 
Sand  Point  shoal,  east  of  the  range  between  Marblehead  light-house  and 
Cedar  Point  beacon,  and  across  the  Cedar  Point  shoal  to  within  a  third 
of  a  mile  of  the  shore. 

When  up  with  Cedar  point,  vessels  drawing  not  more  than  6  feet 
may  take  the  oast  channel,  shortening  the  distance  to  the  city  three- 


I^KE   BBIE. 


65 


?aartera  of  a  mile ;  from  the  entrance,  between  Cedar  Point  and  the 
*oint  of  Horseshoe  shoal  buoy,  stand  along  the  west  side  of  Cedar  Point 
100  to  200  yards  from  the  shore,  until  it  trends  sharply  to  the  eastward, 
half  a  mile  below  the  light-house,  then  steer  S.  S.  W.  for  the  eastern 
wharves  of  the  oity.  This  course  leads  across  the  south  arm  of  Horse- 
shoe shoal  in  not  less  than  6  feet  of  water. 

Note. — The  dredging  of  a  straight  channel  from  Cedar  point  to  the 
B.  &  O.  R.  R.  docks  to  a  depth  of  13  feet  is  in  progress.  The  proposed 
final  depth  for  the  straight  channel  is  17  feet. 

The  Outer  Bar  buoy  may  be  approached  from  the  eastward  on  any 
course  between  N.  W.  and  S.  £.  by  E.  It  is  just  to  northward  of  the 
Cedar  Point  range.  From  it  steer  S.  W.  ^  W.,  on  the  range  past  Bar 
buoy,  No.  4,  to  South  Shoal  buoy,  No.  1,  then  haul  to  westward  to  pass 
Cedar  Point  buoy,  No.  3,  to  northward,  take  up  the  West  Sandusky  Bay 
range  and  follow  it  to  Curve-of-Bank  buoy,  No.  11.  The  west  side  of 
this  curve  is  marked  by  buoys  Nos.  11,  13,  and  16,  when  the  North 
Sandusky  Bay  range  is  reached  and  followed  until  Inner  Elbow  buoy, 
No.  20,  is  reached  from  which  the  West  beacon  of  Sandusky  Bay  ranges 
bear  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  The  range  between  this  beacon  and  City  Hall  clock 
tower  (illuminated)  leads  mid-channel  to  its  end. 

Outside  Buoy. — Red,  2d-class  can  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water.  At 
north  side  of  entrance  to  dredge  channel  acroes  the  bar.  Channel,  150 
feet  wide  ;  best  water  on  the  range.  Cedar  Point  Range  beacon,  S.  W., 
1  mile.  •  Marblehead  light-house,  N.  W.  by  N.,  3  miles.  Bar  buoy,  S. 
W..  one-quarter  iiii'c 

Cedar  Point  Banire  Beacon-light. — A  fixed  red  li^ht,  6th 
order,  visible  11  miles.  White,  shed-roofed  frame  building,  with  long 
panelled  front  to  traverse  the  light  at  pleasure.  Hight  of  light  above 
water,  26  feet.  On  crib  at  outer  side  of  Cedar  point,  200  yards  south  of 
channel,  and  Hamc  distance  northeast  of  Cedar  l*oint  light-house.  The 
lantern  window  of  the  beacon  (between  parallel  black  stripes  from  crib 
to  eaves),  in  range  with  the  tower  of  the  light-house  (S.  W.),  guides 
across  the  bar.  This  light  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  one- 
third  mile  on  the  range,  nor  passed  entering  the  bay  nearer  than  200 
yards. 

CEDAR  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
6th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  White  dwelling,  surmounted  by  a  low 
tower;  light,  21  feet  from  the  ground,  on  Cedar  point,  south  side  of 
channel,  which  passes  the  point  at  a  distance  75  yards.  Frame  buoy- 
house,  with  jetty  wharf,  on  inner  shore  of  the  point,  near  the  light-house. 
Marblehead  light,  4  miles  N.  by  W.  i  W. 


Sandusky  Bay  Ranges, 

North  Beacon-liflrht.— Brown  cylinder,  30  feet  high,  20  inches 
in  diameter,  with  octagonal  watch-room  at  base;  crib  in  10  feet  of  water. 

Main  Beacon-light. — White,  sauare,  one-story  building,  ele- 
vated 11  feet  above  its  crib,  lighted  with  gas;  light  exhibited  from 
southeast  corner  of  building;  crib  in  12  feet  of  water.  Cedar  Point 
light-house,  £.  \  N.    City  Hall  dock,  S.  |  E. 


6« 


LAKE   ERIE. 


'■ 


West  Beacon-liflrl^t. — Brown  cylinder,  30  feet  hieh,  20  inches 
in  diameter,  with  octagonal  watoh-room  at  base;  crib  in  12  feet  of  water. 
Connected  with  Main  Beacon-light  by  a  pile  bridee. 

The  Sandusky  Bay  ranges  are  fixed  with  white  lights  on  cribs,  the 
Main  beacon  at  the  elbow  on  the  outer  (N.  W.)  bank,  and  touching  the 
channel  and  the  North  and  West  beacons  1,000  feot  to  the  northward 
and  westward,  respectfully,  of  the  Main  beacon.  The  West  beacon,  in 
range  with  the  south  side  of  Main  beacon  (E.  by  N.  ^  N.)  guides  through 
the  west  reach,  in  mid-channel,  to  Cedar  point,  1^  miles  distant.  The 
North  beacon,  in  range  with  the  east  side  of  Main  beacon  (S.  ^  W.) 
guides  through  the  south  reach,  in  mid-channel,  to  the  inner  elbow,  one- 
half  mile  distant.  The  range  between  the  West  beacon  and  the  City 
Hall  clock  (S.  by  E.)  leads  through  the  inner  reach,  in  mid-channel. 


Standing  Westward  through  Kellers  and  Bass  Islands. 

Kelley's  Island. — Along  the  east  and  southeast  sides  of  the 
island,  shoal  water  extends  ^  to  f  of  a  mile  from  shore,  with  smooth  flat- 
rock  bottom.  The  bay  on  the  south  side  of  the  island  affords  excellent 
protection  from  north,  northeast  and  easterly  gales.  To  make  a  lee, 
coming  from  the  eastward,  haul  around  the  south  point  of  the  island, 
giving  it  a  berth  of  not  less  than  ^  a  mile,  and  come  to  off  the  docks  in 
8^  fathoms;  good  holding  ground.  There  is  a  submarine  telegraph 
cable  laid  between  the  island  and  Marblehead,  the  shore  end  on  tne 
island  is  a  little  to  the  east  of  the  most  easterly  dock,  where  a  large  sign 
is  put  up.  The  shore  end  on  Marblehead  is  at  the  light-house.  Vessels 
should  not  come  to  on  that  range. 

Kelley's  Island  Reef* — Black,  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  16  feet  cf 
water,  marks  the  east  end  of  a  reef  northeast  of  Kelley's  island.  The 
reef  extends  W.  by  S.  \  S.,  1;^  miles  from  the  buoy,  and  is  600  yards 
across  its  widest  part.  The  west  end  is  1,500  yards  northeast  from  the 
bold  northeast  point  of  Eelley's  island.  Least  water  on  reef,  6  feet. 
Deep  water  60  yards  east  of  the  buoy;  16  feet  of  water  can  be  carried 
between  this  buoy  and  Oull  Island  Shoal  buoy.  Marblehead  light-house, 
S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  8  miles.     Gull  Island  Shoal  buoy,  N.  W.,  2f  miles. 

Oull  Island  Shoal* — Black,  2d-clas8  can  buoy  in  16  feet  of 
water,  stands  in  rocky  bottom  on  northeast  point  of  Gull  Island  shoal. 
The  water  shoals  gradually  inside  the  buoy  until  rocks  show  above  water 
1,600  yards  S.  W.  i  S.  of  buoy.  Middle  Island  light-house  (Canadian), 
N.  i  W.,  1  mile.  North  end  of  Ballast  island,  W.  \  N.,  6i  miles.  Bal- 
last Island  Channel  buoy,  W.  \  N. 

Ballast  Island  Channel  (outer)*— Black  spar  buoy  in  16 
feet  of  water,  stands  in  rooky  bottom  at  the  south  side  of  eastern  entrance 
to  a  channel,  with  14  or  16  feet  of  water,  to  the  southward,  and  within 
220  yard~i  of  Ballast  island.  Least  width  of  channel,  130  yards  opposite 
Ballast  island.  The  south  side  of  channel  extends  660  yards  W.  N.  W. 
from  the  buoy,  and  its  western  end  is  passed  when  the  range  between  the 
southeast  point  of  Ballast  island  and  the  east  side  of  Gibraltar  island  is 
reaohed.  Th«  north  side  of  Ballast  island  may  be  passed  close-to.  East 
end  of  Ballast  island,  N.  f  W.,  800  yards.  South  end  of  Middle  Bass 
inland,  W.  i  S. 


LA£E   ERIE. 


67 


Ballast  Island  Channel  (inner) .—Black  spar  buoy  in  16 
feet  of  water,  stands  on  the  south  side  at  inner  end  of  channel.  South 
end  of  Middle  Bass  island,  W.  f  S.  East  end  of  South  Bass  island,  S.  i 
W.    Outer  buoy,  8.  S.  E.,  700  yards. 


Entering  Put-tn-Bay,  South  Bass  Island,  from  the   West- 
ward. 

Peach  Orchard  Point. — Bed  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water, 
marks  the  elbow  of  a  rooky  shoal  extending  375  yards  northeast  from 
Peach  Orchard  point  (west  side  of  bay),  and  thence  170  yards  in  towards 
Oibraltar  island  ;  western  edge  of  shoal  lies  140  yards  outside  the  point. 
Northeast  point  of  Gibraltar  island,  S.  S.  E.  \  E.,  500  yards.  West  side 
of  South  Bass  island,  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.  Pass  the  buoy  to  the  north- 
ward (deep  water  close-to),  and  steer  to  round  the  bold  northeast  end  of 
Oibraltar  island.     Good  anchorage  and  secure  harbor  inside. 


Standing  Westward  Along  the  South  Shore  of  Lake  Erie^ 
Between  Sandusky  and  Maumee  Bays. 

MABBLEHEAD  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  whit« 
liffht,  4th  order,  visible  14^  miles.  White  conical  tower,  55  feet  high, 
with  detached  dwelling.  Lantern  black.  On  the  northeast  end  of 
Marblehead,  and  south  side  of  eustern  entrance  to  channel  between  the 
Kelley's  and  Bass  islands  and  the  mainland.  The  Ltfe  Saving  Station 
is  near  the  Quarry  docks  to  the  westward  of  the  light.  The  shore  is 
low  and  rocky,  with  deep  water  800  yards  aistant.  Good  water  to  within 
400  yards  of  itelley's  island,  opposite.  Four  and  three-<]^uarter  miles  to 
the  westward,  and  just  south  of  the  range  between  this  ligbt-kouse  and 
Mouse  island,  is  a  rocky  4-foot  shoal;  a  channel,  500  yards  wide  betweeu 
the  shoal  and  shore.  The  range  between  Marblehead  light  and  Green 
Island  light  (N.  W.  ^  W.,  11  miles^  guides  between  Starve  Island  reef, 
on  the  north  side  of  channel,  and  Scott's  Point  shoal  and  Mouse  Island 
reef  on  the  south.  Range  between  it  and  east  end  of  Kel ley's  island 
leads  directly  over  middle  of  Kelley's  Island  reef.  North  end  of  Mouse 
island,  N.  W.  by  W.  4  W.,  7^  miles.  Scott's  Point  Shoal  buoy,  N.  W. 
i  W.,  6j}  miles.  Rondeau  light-house  N.  E.  ^  N.,  63^  miles.  Fairpori 
light-house  E.  by  N.,  76  miles. 

Scott's  Point  Shoal. — Black,  2d-class  can  buoy  in  Id  feet  of 
water.  Marks  the  northeast  point  of  a  rocky  shoal  on  the  south  side  of 
the  channel  south  of  the  Kelley  and  Bass  islands.  The  shoal  stretches 
towards  and  half-way  to  Mouse  island,  and  is  400  yards  wide;  least  water 
in  it  12  feet  near  the  buoy,  a  channel  1,000  yards  wide,  between  the 
shoal  and  Mouse  island ;  the  latter  and  the  headland  southwest  of  it  are 
bold.  North  side  of  Mouse  island  W.  S.  W.  i  W.,  li  miles.  Green 
Island  light-house,  N.  W.  i  W.,  4i  miles.  Mouse  Island  Reef  buoy,  N. 
W.  by  W.  t  W.,  li  miles. 


Starves  Island  Beef.—Red,  2d-olMS  nun  buoy  :a  14  feet  of 
water, 
on 


,ei'.    Marks  the  southwest  point  of  a  reef,  400  feet  in  diameter^  lying 
the  north  side  of  channel,  very  near  the  track  of  vessels  bound 


68 


LAKE   ERIE. 


i    ' 


through  ;    ezaotly  on  range  of  Green  Island  light-house,  and  southwest 

Soint  of  South  Bass  island.  When  Green  island  can  be  seen  clear  of 
outh  Bass  island,  vessels  are  clear  of  the  shoal  to  southward ;  least 
water  on  reef,  11  feet.  Two-thirds  way  from  this  reef  to  Starve  island, 
is  a  rocky  patch,  with  11  feet  of  water  on  it.  A  reef  extends  from 
South  Bass  island  to  Starve  island,  leaving  a  narrow  channel  between. 
Twelve  feet  of  water  within  30  feet  of  buoy  to  the  southward  and  east- 
ward. Scott's  Point  Shoal  buoy,  S.  E.  f  S.,  2,000  yards.  Starve  island, 
N.  by  W.,  1  mile.  East  end  of  Mouse  island,  8 .  S.  W.  ^  W.,  If  miles. 
Bold  south  end  of  South  Bass  island,  N.  W.  f  W.,  If  miles. 

Mouse  Island  Reef. — Black,  8d-class  can  buoy  in  16  feet  of 
water.  Marks  the  north  side  of  a  small  reef,  1  mile  north  of  Mouse 
island  ;  least  water  on  reef,  12  feet.  Shoalest  water  S.  "W.  by  W.  from 
buoy,  about  160  yards.  Green  Island  light-house,  N.  W.  f  N.,  3  miles. 
Moore's  Point,  S.  S.  W.  i  W.  2f  miles.  Starve  Island  Reef  buoy,  E.  N. 
E.  ^  E.,  seven-eighths  mile.  Niagara  Reef  buoy,  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  8 
miles. 

GREEN  ISLAND  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  varied  by  red  flashes  at  intervals  of  one  minute,  visible 
14  miles.  Gray,  square  tower,  43  feet  high,  attached  to  dwelling,  lan- 
tern black.  On  the  west  end  of  Green  Island,  Lake  Erie;  a  rocky,  wooded 
island,  15  acres  in  extent,  one  mile  west  of  South  Bass  island  ;  shores 
bold ;  shut  in  by  woods  from  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  by  E'd  to  8.  E.  by  E. 
West  Sister  Island  light-house,  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  14  miles.  This 
liglit,  ojoen  S.  of  South  Bass  island,  just  clears  Starve  Island  reef  on  S. 
side.  The  range  between  this  and  West  Sister  Island  light  (N.  W.  by 
W.  f  W.,  14  miles)  passes  about  1  mile  N.  of  Niagara  reef.  Kept  open 
on  W.  end  of  Rattleiiinake  island,  clears  Hen  and  Chickens  one-half  mile. 

Niagfara  Reef. — Black,  2d-class  can  buoy  in  14  feet  of  waTer. 
Marks  the  north  side  of  a  snail  reef,  with  7  feet  of  water  on  it  and  deep 
close-to,  lying  1{-  miles  south  of  the  range  between  Green  Island  and 
West  Sister  Island  light-houses.  There  is  much  foul  ground  between 
this  reef  and  the  south  shore,  and  strangers  should  not  attempt  the 
passage  on  that  side.  Shoalest  spot,  southwest  from  buoy,  200  yards. 
North  end  of  West  Sister  island,  N.  W.  f  W.,  8|  miles.  Greeu  Island 
light-house,  E.  S.  E.  ■}  E.,  6i  miles. 

WEST  SISTER  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
white  light,  4th  order,  visible  13^  miles.  White,  conical  tower,  44  feet 
'  high,  connected  to  dwelling  by  covered  way;  light  61  feet  above  lake 
level.  On  the  southwest  end  of  West  Sister  island.  Lake  Erie  ;  area  of 
island,  about  100  acres.  A  reef  extends  one-third  mile  from  the  south- 
east side  of  the  island;  bold,  rocky  shore  on  other  sides.  A  redlistht 
shown  from  the  station  in  place  of  the  usual  white  light,  is  to  be  under* 
stood  as  a  distress  signal.  On  N.  E.  side  of  island,  the  light  is  obscured 
by  trees  through  an  arc  of  about  1^  points.  Passing  the  island  one-half 
mile  to  the  southward,  the  conrse  to  Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy  is  W.  f 
N.,  14i  miles.  Green  Island  lisht-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  14  miles. 
Turtle  Island  light,  W.  i  N.,  uj  miles. 

Port  Ollnton. — Light  discontinued  and  buoys  removed. 


LAKE   ERIE. 


Maumee  Bay, 

Main  or  West  Channel  of  Maumee  Bay.— This  channel 
is  dredged  from  the  Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy,  in  six  straight  reaches 
(following  the  deepest  water)  across  the  bay,  to  within  three-fourths  of 
a  mile  of  the  mouth  of  the  Maumee  river,  where  a  deep  natural  channel, 
about  200  yards  wide,  is  reached,  leading  up  the  river  to  the  city  of 
Toledo.  The  dredged  channel  is  200  feet  in  width,  widened  at  the 
elbows  to  from  300  to  400  feet,  and  the  inner  bank  rounded;  bottom, 
mud  or  day  throughoat,  and  15  to  17  feet  of  water  can  be  carried 
through;  the  elbows  are  marked  by  buoys,  which  stand  in  the  channel 
close  to  the  outer  bank,  and  exactly  at  the  angle ;  the  spar  bnoys  on  the 
banks  are  placed  a  few  feet  back  from  the  channel ;  a  straight  course 
may  be  steered  from  buoy  to  buoy  on  either  side.  The  five  inner 
"  reaches  "  of  the  dredged  channel  of  the  bay,  and  the  natural  channel 
beyond,  into  the  mouth  of  the  river  as  far  as  Grass  point,  are  marked  by 
range  lights,  two  to  each  range;  the  first  three  in  entering  (after  passing 
Turtle  island  and  Bend-of-Channel  buoy.  No.  11),  viz.:  South  and  Long 
reaches  and  the  Outer  reach  are  marked  by  xohite  lights,  and  the  Middle 
and  Inner  reaches  by  red  lights.  Ranges  intersect  each  other.  Care 
must  be  taken  not  *o  mistake  the  "  middle  "  for  the  "  outer  "  range,  the 
prolongation  of  the  former  being  crossed  by  vessels  entering  before  the 
outer  range  is  reached.  The  bottom  of  tne  bay  is  mud,  clay,  or  sand 
throughout,  except  some  gravel  bottom  along  the  west  shore,  near  the 
mouth  of  the  river.  Northeast  gales  raise  the  water  of  the  bay  3  to  4 
feet  above  the  ordinary  level,  and  southwest  gales  lower  it  as  much. 
Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy  (the  outer  bar)  may  be  approached  from  the 
eastward  on  any  course  between  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  W.  Pass  the  buoy  on 
either  side  close-to  and  steer  S.  W.  for  No.  2  Outside  Elbow  buoy.  Two 
spar  buoys  at  equal  intervals  between  these  buoys  mark  the  east  bank  of 
dredged  channel.  Passing  Outside  Elbow  buoy,  No.  2,  to  eastward,  you 
take  up  the  South  Reach  range,  passing  close  to  Turtle  Island  buoy.  No. 
9,  thence  S.  through  this  reach  to  the  Main  beacon  and  Long  Reach 
Turning  buoy,  No.  10,  taking  up  Long  Reach  range,  thence  S.  W.  by 
W.  through  this  reach  to  No.  21,  Outer  Range  Elbow  buoy,  thence  W. 
^  N.,  to  No.  26,  Middle  Range  Elbow  buoy.  This  reach  is  marked  by 
the  range  beacons  on  S'  ore  also.  From  Middle  Range  Elbow  buoy  steer 
W.  S.  W.  to  No.  28,  Inner  Range  Elbow  buoy  (Range-beacons  on  shore 
mark  this  channel),  thence  S.  S.  W.  \  W.,  on  Inner  Range  to  No.  37, 
End-of-Range  buoy.  From  this  point  steer  to  pass  close  to  Ironville 
wharf,  thence  to  draw  of  Wheeling  and  Lake  Erie  Railroad  bridge  and 
passing  Middle  Ground  buoy.  No.  32,  steer  for  draw  to  Pennsylvania 
Railroad  bridge  and  to  docks. 

Note. — Dredging  is  in  progreat  for  a  straight  channel  11  feet  deep 
from  the  mouth  of  the  Maumee  river  to  the  lake. 

Turtle  Island  Shoal.-— Black,  2d-class  can  buoy  in  16  feet  of 
water.  Stands  in  soft  bottom,  at  the  east  side  of  entrance  to  dredged 
channel.  The  12-foot  point  of  Turtle  Island  shoal  bears  S.  by 
E.  ^  E.,  1,000  yards  from  tnis  buoy,  and  is  further  marked  by  the  range 
from  the  light-house  to  North  Cape  point.  Fifteen  feet  of  water  near 
this  reach  of  channel,  on  the  west  side,  and  not  less  than  14  half-way  to 
the  west  shore  of  lake.    Turtle  Island  light-house,  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  if 


70 


LAKE    ERIE. 


I 


miles.    East  end  of  woods  on  C*  "^ar  point,  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  4  miles.    Raisin 
Point  buoy,  N.  N.  E.,Vf  miles. 

Outside  Elbow,  No.  2.— Red  spar  baoy  in  16  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  first  elbow  of  the  channel;  pass  it  to  the  eastward.  Betweer 
this  buoy  and  the  Twelve-foot  Curve  buoys  there  is  18  to  14  feet  of 
water  on  the  west  side  of  channel,  shoaling  to  12  feet  at.  a  distance  of 
one-third  mile  from  the  channel;  also  the  same  water  on  the  east  side  of 
the  channel,  when  200  yards  inside  of  Turtle  island.  Turtle  Island 
light-house,  S.  S.  E.  f  E.,  726  yards.  North  Cape  point,  S.  W.  i  8.,  2 
miles. 

TURTLE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  visible  13^  miles.  Yellow,  square  tower,  44  feet  high, 
attached  to  dwelling,  black  lantern.  On  Turtle  island,  a  small,  low 
island  at  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  east  side  of  channel  and  150  yards  from 
it.  The  light-house  stands  near  the  north  end  of  the  island.  This  light, 
bearing  S.  Dy  E.,  is  obscured  by  the  chimney  of  the  dwelling.  The  chan- 
nel in,  passes  the  light  at  a  distance  of  200  yards.  North  end  of  Turtle 
Island  shoal,  N.  E.  ^  E.,  1^  miles.  East  end  of  woods  on  Cedar  point,  S. 
E.,  3^  miles.  Detroit  River  light-house  (Bar  point),  N.  E.  |  N.,  21| 
miles. 

South  and  Long  Reach  Range  Lights, 

Main  Beacon-light. — Light  exhibited  from  a  platform  on 
extreme  north  corner  of  buoy  shed  on  crib.  Keeper's  dwelling  to  the 
right,  painted  white.    Turtl«^  island,  N.  \  £.     Cedar  point,  E.  S.  E. 

East  Beacon-light. — Brown  iron  tube,  with  octagonal  lantern. 

South  Beacon-light.—  Br  own  iron  tube,  with  octagonal  lantern. 

The  South  and  Long  Reach  i?ange  lights  are  fixed  white  lights 
on  cribs,  the  main  beacon  exactly  at  the  elbow  of  the  South  and  Long 
reaches,  and  the  east  and  south  berx)ons,  1,000  feco  to  the  southward  and 
eastward,  respectively,  of  the  main  beacon.  The  south  and  main  beacons 
in  range  guide  from  Buoy  No.  11  to  the  latter  beacon,  and  the  east  and 
main  besoons  in  range  guide  to  the  outer  range. 

Turning  Buoy  No.  lO. — Red  spar  buoy  in  11  feet  of  water. 
On  the  west  nank,  exactly  at  the  turning  point,  and  opposite  the  main 
beacon. 


Outer  Reach  Range, 

Outer  Range  Elbow  No.  21.— Black,  2d-olas8  nun  buoy  in 
13^^  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  elbow  of  chacinel,  entering  the  Outer 
Range  reach,  nearly  1  mile  in  length.  Pass  it  to  the  northward.  The 
Outer  Range  beacons,  in  line,  serve,  together  with  the  buoys,  to  guide 
in  this  reach.  Outer  Range  beacons,  W.  f  N.,  2^  miles.  North  Cape 
point,  N.  by  E.  t^  E.,  \\  mileu. 

Outer  Range  Beacon-light  (front)  .—Square  tower,  18  feet 
high,  red  above  and  white  below. 

Outer  Range  Beacon-light  (rear).— Scjunre  tower,  24  ftei 
high,  painted  white.    Detached  brown  dwelling  behind. 


LAKE    KRIE. 


71 


Raisin 

f  water. 
Between 

feet  of 
tanoe  of 
i  side  of 
e  Island 

i8.,  2 


The  outer  range  lights  are  fixed  white  lights,  visible  9f  and  11  miles. 
On  the  west  shore  of  the  bay,  1^  miles  north  of  the  mouth  of  the  river. 
Distance  between  beacons,  830  feet. 


Middle  Range  Reach. 

Middle  Range  Elbow  No  26.— Red  spar  buoy  in  12^  feet 
of  water.  This  buoy  marks  the  elbow  of  channel  entering  the  Middle 
range  reach,  1,100  yards  in  length.  Pass  to  southward  of  the  buoi . 
The  Outer  and  Middle  Beacon  ranges  intersect  in  this  elbow;  the  latter 
rsnge,  together  with  the  buoys,  guides  up  the  reach.  Outer  range 
beacon,  W.  k  N.,  1^  miles.     West  end  of  Nagg's  '  iland,  N.  ^  E. 

Middle  Range  Beacon-light  (front).— Square  wooden 
tower,  12  feet  high,  red  above  and  white  below. 

Middle  Range  Beacon-light  (rear).— A  white,  shed- 
roofed,  frame  building,  with  long  panelled  front,  to  traverse  the  light  at 
pleasure;  a  black  stripe,  from  ground  to  eaves,  on  each  side  of  lantern- 
window;  height  of  light,  21  feet. 

The  Middle  range  beacon  lights  are  fixed  red  lights,  visible  9}  and  11 
miles.  On  the  west  shore  of  the  bay,  two-thirds  of  a  mile  north  of  the 
month  of  the  river.    Distance  between  beacons,  1,260  feet. 


Inner  Range  Reach. 

Inner  Reach  Elbow  No.  28.— Red,  Sd-class  can  buoy,  in  14 
feet  of  water.  Marks  the  elbow  of  channel  entering  the  Inner  range 
reach.  If  miles  in  length.  Pass  the  buoy  to  the  eastward.  The  Middle 
and  Inner  beacon  ranges  intersect  in  this  elbow;  the  latter  range,  to- 

g ether  with  the  buoys,  guides  up  the  reach.  From  200  yards  above  this 
uoy  to  the  end  of  dredged  channel,  12  to  13  feet  of  water  is  found  on 
the  west  side  and  within  100  yards  of  the  channel.  Front  beacon.  Outer 
range,  N.  W.  by  W.    Inner  range  beacons,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  2f  miles. 

Inner  Range  Beacon-light  (£ront).-rSqttare  tower,  12  feet 
high,  red  above,  white  below. 

Inner  Range  Beacon-light  (rear).— A  white,  shed-roofed 
building,  with  long  panelled  frdnt,  to  traverse  the  light  at  pleasure;  a 
black  LvTipe,  from  ground  to  eaves,  on  each  side  of  lantern  window; 
hight  of  light,  21  feet. 

The  Inner  Range  beacon-lights  are  fixed  red  lights,  visible  10  and 
Hi  miles.  On  the  east  bank  of  the  Maumee  river,  1^  miles  above  its 
mouth.     Distance  between  beacons,  730  feet. 

Middle  Ground. — Red  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water;  the  last 
buoy  stands  in  clay  bottom,  at  the  upper  end  and  outer  edge  of  the 
Middle  ground;  pass  it  to  the  eastward.  Along  this  stretch,  flats  with 
only  6  feet  of  water  in  places  make  out  from  the  east  bank,  one-half  to 
two-thirds  way  across  the  river.  Draw-pier  of  Pennsylvania  Railroad 
bridge,  S.  W.  f  W.,  seven-eighths  mile.  Draw-pier  of  Wheeling  and 
Lake  Brie  :Railroad  bridge,  N.  E.  k  £. 


72 


LAKE    EUIE. 


Straight  Channel  in  Maumee  Bay, 

The  inner  end  of  the  Straight  Cut  is  completed,  and  with  the 
Long  reach  forms  a  straight  channel  from  Grassy  point  to  the  Maumee 
Bay  ranges,  about  4f  miles  in  length.  It  enters  the  Long  reach  at  its 
intersection  with  the  Outer  Range  reach,  which  was  marked  at  the  elbow 
with  black  can  buoy  No.  21.  This  buoy  has  been  moved  to  the  south 
side  of  the  Straight  cut,  but  still  marks  the  turning  point  of  the  old 
channel.  From  thence  to  Qrassy  point  the  new  cut  is  marked  with  8 
buoys,  4  on  each  side,  and  numbered  from  1  to  8.  Bound  in  the  first 
buoy  is  No.  2  red,  and  the  last  one,  marking  the  turn  into  the  main 
river,  is  No.  7  black.  Buoy  No.  7,  new  cut,  has  been  moved  out  nearly 
opposite  to  No.  8. 


Standing  North  along  the   West  Shore  of  Lake  Erie,  and 

into  the  Detroit  River. 


Note. — Southwest  gales  lower  the  water  at  this  end  of  the  lake 
from  2  to  3  feet,  and  northeast  gales  raise  it  about  as  much. 

Raisin  Point. — Black,  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  15  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  end  of  a  shoal  extending  1^  miles  from  Raisin  point;  hard 
sand  bottom.  Monroe  light-house,  N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  \\  miles.  Stony 
point,  N.  E.  by  N.  \  N.,  5  miles. 

MONROE  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order, 
visible  13  miles.  White,  square  low  tower  on  white  dwelling,  lantern 
black.  On  crib  at  outer  end  of  north  pier  of  entrance  to  the  ship  canal 
leading  into  the  River  Raisin,  Michigan,  1^  miles  above  its  mouth.  The 
crib  is  partially  enclosed  for  the  protection  of  the  buildings.  The  12- 
foot  curve  of  the  bottom  lies  about  one-fourth  mile  outside  the  pierhead; 
best  water  is  found  by  standing  in  in  line  with  the  straight  (inner)  sec- 
tion of, the  north  pier  (W.  N.  W.  \  W).  On  this  course  10  feet  of  water 
may  be  carried  in.  Width  between  piers',  200  feet  at  outer  end,  100  feet 
iln^ide.  S2,ndy  bottom  between  and  outside  the  piers;  north  pier  projects 
140  feet  beyond  the  south.  A  straight  course  may  be  made  from  the 
Raisin  point  buoy  to  the  point  outside  for  entering  this  harb^^r.  Stony 
point  to  the  northward  may  be  passed  within  one-fourth  mile.  Stony 
point,  N.  E.  \  E.,  4^  miles.  Detroit  River  light-house  N.  E.  f  E.,  12| 
miles. 

Point  Mouill^* — Black,  2d-cla8s  can  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  end  of  a  shoal  extending  1^  miles  southeast  from  Point 
Mouill6;  hard  sand  bottom.  Stony  point,  S.  W.  \  W.,  6  miles.  Gibral- 
tar light-house,  N.  \  W.,  7  J  miles. 

DETROIT  RIVER  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  for 
one  minute,  followed  by  six  consecutive  white  flashes,  at  intervals  of  10 


LAKE   £BI£. 


78 


seconds;  4th  order,  visible  14  miles.  Brown,  iron,  circular  tower,  lan> 
tern  black.  Focal  plane  56  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  On  a 
masonry  pier  1 1  feet  above  water  and  in  23  feet  water.  There  is  also  on 
the  pier  a  fog-signal  house,  of  corrugated  iron,  the  same  color  as  the 
tower.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  there  will  be  sounded  at  this 
station  a  10-inch  steam  fog- whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  5  seconds' duration, 
followed  by  an  interval  of  25  seconds.  Entering  Detroit  river,  keep  on 
the  line  joining  Detroit  River  light  and  Bois  Blanc  light  until  within  1^ 
miles  of  it,  when  steer  N.  by  £.  f  E.  until  abreast  of  the  light,  when 
keep  in  the  middle  of  the  river.  A  straight  channel  into  the  river  is 
buoyed  by  the  Canadian  Government.  Bois  Blanc  light,  N.  by  E.,  64- 
miles.  Monroe  light,  S.  W.  i  W.,  12^  miles.  West  Sister  light,  S.  i  E., 
18i  miles.    North  side  of  Middle  Sister,  S.  E.  |  S.,  12f  miles. 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  on  the  South  Shore  of  Lake 

Erie. 


Note. — Courses  and  bearings  corrected 
Distances  in  statute  miles. 


for    magnetic    variation. 


Buffalo  to  Long  Point,  Felee  Spit,  and  Detroit  River 
liigl  t. — When  at  the  north  end  of  breakwater,  steer  W.  by  8.  f  S., 
63f  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  Long  Point  light,  thence  W.  by  S. 
f  S.,  134  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light.  When  steer 
W.  by  N.  \  N.,  Z^\  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  N.  by  E.  from  Detroit  River 
light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Bois  Blanc  light,  passing  1  mile  north  of 
Colchester  Reef  I'^ht,  and  i  mile  south  of  Bar  Point  red  buoy,  which 
marks  the  positioi  formerly  occupied  by  the  lightship.  For  further 
directions  see  sailinsr  '''rections  for  Detroit  river. 

Buffalo  to "       ?  Point,  Pelee  Spit,  and  Toledo.—When 

1^  miles  south  of  j.  e.  Spit  light,  as  in  the  previous  course,  steer  W.  by 
N.  J  N.,  2f  miles,  thence  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  with  the  Spit  light  directly 
astern,  passing  close  to  the  middle  ground,  29^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
north  of  West  Sister  Island  light,  passing  \  mile  south  of  East  Sister 
island;  thence  W.  \  N.,  13f  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  N.  E.  by  N.  \  N. 
from  Turtle  Island  light.  Whence  see  directions  for  entering  Maumee 
Bay. 

Buffalo  to  Dunkirk. — When  at  the  north  end  of  breakwater, 
steer  8.  W.  \  W.,  34|  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  beacon-light. 

Buffalo  to  Erie. — When  at  the  north  end  of  breakwater  steer  S. 
W.  f  W.,  76^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northeast  from  Presque  Isle 
beacon-light. 

Buffalo  to  Ashtabula. — When  at  the  north  end  of  breakwater, 
steer  S.  W.  by  W.  \  W.,  117  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Ashtabula 
light. 

Buffalo  to  Fairport. — When  at  the  north  end  of  breakwater, 
steer  S.  W.  by  W.  \  W,,  143  miles,  to  a  point  2  J  miles  north  of  Fair- 
port  beacon-light. 

Buffalo  to  Cleveland.— As  in  the  course  to  a  point  2^  miles 
north  of  Fairport,  thence  S.  W.  \  W.,  29  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north 
of  breakwater  light. 


•u 


LAKE   BBIB. 


Buffalo  to  Black  River.— When  at  the  north  end  of  break- 
water, steer  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  198^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 
light. 

Buffalo  to  Sandusky. — When  at  the  north  end  of  breakvrater, 
tteer  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  216  miles,  to  the  red  can  buoy,  1  mile  N.  E.  of 
Cedar  Point  Range  beacon,  whence  see  sailing  directions  for  entering 
Sandusky  bay. 

Buffalo  to  South  Passage. — When  at  the  north  end  of  break- 
water, steer  W.  S.  W.,  216  miles,  to  a  point  1|  miles  north  of  Marble- 
head  light,  whence  see  course  from  Sandusky  to  Green  island.  The 
course  from  Buffalo  to  South  passage  leads  3^  miles  south  of  Long  Point 
light. 

Buffalo  to  Middle  Passage. — When  at  the  north  end  of  break- 
water, steer  W.  by  S.  f  8.,  210  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  south  of  Middle 
Island  light.     Passing  2^  miles  south  of  Long  Point  light. 

NoTB. — ^The  magnetic  variation  at  Buffalo  is  4°.2  W.;  at  Middle 
island  there  is  no  variation.  The  mean  variation  on  this  course  is  2°  .1 
W.,  or  practically  i  of  a  point  of  the  compass,  which  is  applied  to  the 
right  hand.    The  True  or  Chart  course  is  W.  S.  W. 

Buffalo  to  Port  Golbome. — When  at  the  north  end  of  break- 
water, steer  W.  by  S.  |  S.,  lOi  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Point 
Abino,  then  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  8^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  S.  by  W.  from 
Main  light. 

Buffalo  to  Port  DoTer.— When  at  the 

water,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.  10^  miles,  to  a  point  1 


north  end  of  break- 
mile  south  of  Point 
a  point  1  mile  S.  by  E.  from  the  light  at 


^bino,  then  W.  56  miles,  to 
Port  Dover. 

Dunkirk  to  Erie.— When  l  mile  N.  W.  by  N.  from  beacon-light, 
steer  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  43  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  E.  from 
Presque  Isle  beacon-light. 

Dunkirk  to  Fairport  and  Cleveland.— When  i  mile  N. 
W.  by  N.  from  beacon-light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  110  milts  to  a  point 
2^  miles  north  of  Fairport  beacon,  thence  S.  W.  i  W.,  29  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  north  of  breakwater  light. 

Dunkirk  to  South  Passage.— When  i  mile  N.  W.  by  N. 
from  beacon-light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  184^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
north  of  Marblehead  light. 

Dunkirk  to  Pelee  Spit.— Wh^en  i  mile  N.  W.  bv  N.  from 
beacon-light,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  168^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of 
the  Spit  light. 

Brie  to  Fairport  and  Cleveland. — When  i^  miles  northeast 
from  Presque  Isle  beacon-light,  steer  N.  W.  |  W.,  3  miles,  then  W.  S. 
W.,  66^  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  north  of  Fairport  beacon-light,  thence 
S.  W.  ^  W.,  29  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  breakwater  light. 

Brie  to  South  Passage. — When  1|  miles  northeast  from 
Presque  Isle  beacon-light,  steer  N.  W.  }  W.,  3  miles,  then  steer  W.  by 
S.  ^  S.,  141  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of  Marblehead  light,  whence 
see  course  from  Sandusky  to  Green  island. 

Erie  to  Middle  Passage. — When  1^  miles  northeast  from 
Presque  Isle  beacon-light,  steer  nT  W.  f  W.,  3  miles,  thence  W.  by  S.  ^ 


LAKE  EBIB. 


Tft 


8.,  137  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  south  of  Middle  Island  light.  See  course 
from  Middle  Passage  to  Bar  Point,  etc. 

Erie  to  Point  Pelee.— When  l^  miles  north jast  from  Presque 
Isle  beacon-light,  steer  N.  W.  I  W.,  8  miles,  thence  W.  1  S.,  126  miles, 
to  d  point  1^  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light.  See  course  from  Buffalo  to 
Long  Point,  etc. 

Erie  to  Port  Stanley. — When  l^  miles  northeast  from  Presque 
Isle  beacon-light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  68  miles,  to  a  point  il  mile 
south  of  Port  Stanley  light. 

Erie  to  Rondeau. — When  l^  miles  northeast  from  Presque  Isle 
beacon-light,  steei-  N.  W.  f  W.,  3  miles,  thence  W.  ^  N.  a  little  norther- 
ly, 94  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  main  light. 

Ashtabula  to  Fairport  and  Cleveland.— When  2  miles 
N.  W.  of  Ashtabula  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  t  S.,  26  miles,  to  a  point  2^ 
miles  north  of  Fairport  beacon-light,  thence  S.  W.  ^  W.,  29  miles  to  a 
point  1  mile  north  of  breakwater  Tight. 

Ashtabula  to  South  Passage.— When  2  miles  N.  W.  of 
Ashtabula  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  101  miles  to  a  point  1^  miles  north 
of  Marblehead  light.  Whence  see  courses  from  Sandusky  to  Green 
island,  and  Green  Island  light  to  Bar  point,  etc. 

Ashtabula  to  Pelee  Spit. — When  l  mile  north  of  Ashtabula 
light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  88  miles  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  Spit  light. 

Ashtabula  to  Port  Stanley. — When  l  mile  north  of  Ashta- 
bula light,  steer  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  54  miles,  to  a  point  i  mile  south  of 
Port  Stanley  light. 

Ashtabula  to  Buffalo. — When  l  mile  north  of  Ashtabula  light, 
steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  117  miles,  to  the  north  end  of  the  breakwater. 

Ashtabula  to  Rondeau.— When  l  mile  north  of  Ashtabula 
light,  steer  W.  N.  W.,  62^  miles  to  a  point   1  mile  south  of  main  light. 

Ashtabula  to  Long  Point. — When  l  mile  north  of  Ashtabula 
light,  steer  N.  E.  56  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  Long  Point  light. 

Fairport  to  Cleveland. — When  l^  miles  northwest  from  Fair- 
port  beacon-light,  steer  S.  W.  ^  W.,  27^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 
breakwater  light. 

Fairport  to  Black  River. — When  U  miles  northwest  from 
Fairport  beacon-light,  steer  W.  S.  W.,  50  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north 
of  Black  River  light. 

Fairport  to  South  Passage. — When  i^  miles  northwest  from 
Fairport  beacon-light,  steer  W.  i  S.,  74^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north 
of  Marblehead  light.     See  course  from  Sandusky  to  Green  Island,  etc. 

Fairport  to  Pelee  Spit. — When  1|  miles  northwest  from  Faii 
port  beacon-light,  steer  W.  f  N.,  62^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of 
the  Spit  light. 

Fairport  to  Port  Stanley.— When  l  miie  north  from  Fairport 
beacon-light,  steer  N.  ^  £.,  60^^  miles,  to  a  point  i  mile  south  of  Fort 
Stanley  light. 

Fairport  to  Rondeau.— When  l  mile  north  from  Fairport 
beacon-light,  Bteer  N.  W.,  46  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Rondeau 
main  lieht. 


■7' 


I 


76 


LAKE   EBIB. 


Fairport  to  Buffalo. — When  2}  miles  north  of  Fairport  beacon- 
light,  steer  N.  £.  by  E.  i  E.,  143  miles,  to  the  north  end  of  Baffalo 
breakwater. 

OleTeland  to  Black  Biyer,  Yennllion,  and  Huron.— 

When  1^  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  from  Cleveland  Breakwater  light,  steer  W. 
f  N ,  14  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Avon  point,  thence  W.  by  8.  f 
S.,  9^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Black  River  light;  or  same  course 
19^  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Vermilion  light,  or  W.  by  S.  ^  8., 
28|  miles,  or  until  Huron  light  bears  S.  W.  1  mile  distant. 

Cleveland  to  Sandusky. — When  l^  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  from 
the  breakwater  light,  steer  W.  f  N.,  14  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 
Avon  point,  thence  W.  ^  8.,  35  miles,  to  Outer  buoy,  1  mile  northeast 
from  Cedar  Point  Range  beacon. 

Cleveland  to  South  Passage.— When  i^  miles  N.  W.  by  W. 
from  the  breakwater  light,  steer  W.  ^  N.,  51  miles,  to  a  point  1}  miles 
north  of  Marblebead  light.  This  course  leads  close  to  Avon  point.  See 
course  from  Sandusky  to  Green  island  and  Detroit  river. 

Cleveland  to  Middle  Passage.— When  at  the  breakwater  light, 
steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  51  miles,  to  &  point  i  mile  south  of  Middle  Island 
light.     See  course  from  Middle  passage  to  Bar  point. 

Cleveland  to  Pel^e  Spit  and  Detroit  River  Light.— 

When  at  the  breakwater  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  47  miles,  to  a 
point  1^  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light,  thence  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  34^  miles, 
to  a  point  ^  mile  N.  by  £.  from  Detroit  River  light,  and  in  range  with 
it  and  Bois  Blano  light,  passing  1  mile  north  of  Colchester  Reef  light, 
and  ^  mile  south  of  Bar  Point  red  buoy. 

Cleveland  to  Port  Stanley. — When  at  the  breakwater  light, 
steer  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  82  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  south  of  Port  Stanley 
light. 

Cleveland  to  Port  Colborne. — When  l  mile  north  of  break- 
water light,  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  29  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  north  of  Fair- 
port  beacon-light;  thence  N.  E.  by  E.,  127  miles,  or  until  Port  Colborne 
main  light  bears  N.  by  E.,  1  mile  distant. 

Cleveland  to  Buffalo* — When  l  mile  north  of  breakwater  light, 
steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  29  miles,  to  a  point  2|  miles  north  of  Fairport  beacon- 
light;  thence  N.  £.  by  E.  ^  E.,  143  miles,  to  the  north  end  of  Buffalo 
breakwater. 

Cleve^fiind  to  Rondeau. — When  l  mile  north  of  breakwater 
light,  steer  !N.  by  W.  51  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Rondeau  main 
light. 

Black  River  to  South  Passage.— When  l  mile  north  of  pier- 
head light,  steer  W.  by  N.,  27^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of 
Marblehead  light-house,  whence  see  course  from  Sandusky  to  Green 
Island  light,  and  Detroit  river. 

Black  River  to  Middle  Passage.— When  i  mile  north  of 
pierhead  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  28^  miles,  to  a  point  |  milo 
south  of  Middle  Island  light,  passing  ^  mile  north  of  Gull  Island  Shoal 
buoy.     Whence  see  course  from  Middle  Passage  to  Detroit  River  light. 

Black  River  to  P^lee  Spit. — When  l  mile  north  of  pierhead 
light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.,  30  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  the  Spit 
light. 


LAKE    BRIB!. 


77 


Termilion  to  South  Pa8sa|fe.— When  1  mile  noith  of  pier- 
head light,  steer  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.,  19^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  mile'  north  of. 
Marblehead  light-house.       Whence  see  course  f fodi.  ^an^usky-to  "^fSen 
Island  light. 

Vermilion  to  Avon  Point. — When  l  mile  north  of  pierhead 
light,  s  r  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  19^  miles,  or  until  the  point  bears  south  dis- 
tant 1  mile. 

Huron  to  South  Passage. — When  l  mile  north  of  pierhead 
light-house,  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  12f  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  noith  of 
Marblehead  light-hopse. 

Huron  to  Point  Avon. — When  1  mile  northeast  of  pierhead 
light-house,  steer  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  28^  miles,  or  until  the  point  bears  south 
1  mile  distant. 

Sandusky  to  Green  Island  and  Detroit  River  Light. 

— When  1^  miles  northeast  of  Cedar  Point  light  and  in  range  of  beacon, 
steer  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  4^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of  Marble- 
head light;  thence  N.  W.  by  W.,  for  9^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
Green  Island  light.  Then  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  80  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
N.  by  E.  from  Detroit  River  light.  « 

Sandusky  to  Buffalo. — When  l^  miles  northeast  of  Cedar 
Point  light  and  in  range  of  beacon,  steer  N.  £.  by  E.  f  E.,  216  miles  to 
the  nortn  end  of  breakwater. 

Green  Island  to  Detroit  River  Light.— When  i  mile 
south  of  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  80  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by 
E.  from  Detroit  River  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Bois  Blanc  light, 

Eassing  ^  mile  west  of  Middle  Sister  island,  and  about  f  of  a  mile  east  of 
Detroit  River  light. 

Green  Island  to  Entrance  to  Maumee  Bay.— When  i 
mile  south  of  Green  Island  li^ht,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  for  15  miles  to  a 
point  1  mile  north  of  West  Sister  Island  light,  then  steer  W.  ^  N.,  18f 
miles,  to  Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy,  or  until  Turtle  Island  light  bears  S. 
W.  by  S.  i  S.,  If  miles. 

To  pass  south  of  West  Sister  island,  when  1  mile  south  of  Oreen 
Island  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  for  6^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 
Niagara  Reef  buoy  and  in  line  with  Green  island  and  West  Sister  lights, 
when  steer  W.  by  N.  -f  N.,  2  If  miles,  to  north  side  of  Turtle  Island 
Shoal  buoy. 

Green  Island  to  Monroe. — When  i  mile  south  of  light,  steer 
N.  W.  f  W.,  29  miles,  to  a  point  I  mile  east  of  Monroe  light. 

Entrance  to  Maumee  Bay  to  Pel^e  Spit.— When  if  miles 
N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from  Turile  Island  light,  west  side  of  black  can  buoy, 
steer  E.  4*  S.,  13f  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  West  Sister  Island 
light,  thence  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  for  29^  miles,  ranging  on  Pel6e  Spit  light, 
and  to  within  2f  miles  of  it,  when  steei  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  for  2f  miles  to  a 
point  1^  miles  south  of  Spit  light.  This  course  leads  close  to  the  north 
end  of  Middle  ground. 

Entrance  to  Maumee  Bay  to  Detroit  River  Light.— 

When  If  miles  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from  Turtle  Island  light,  steer  N.  E.  i 
N.  19  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  S.  by  W.  of  Detroit  River  Tight  and  in  range 
with  it  and  Bois  Blanc  Island  light. 


I 


7« 


LAlKB  bbik. 


Entrance  to  Maumee  Bay  to  Marblehead  and  Buf- 
falo.— Round  Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy,  and  steer  E.  by  S.  f  S.  21f 
miles  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Niagara  Reef  buoy,  and  in  range  of 
West  Sister  island  and  Green  Island  lights,  when  steer  S.  E.  by  E.,  16 
miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of  Marblehead  light,  passing  between  the 
buoys  on  Mouse  Island  reef  and  Starve  Island  reef.  When  steer  £.  N. 
E.,  216  miles,  to  the  north  end  of  Buffalo  breakwater. 

Middle  Passasre  to  Bar  Point,  Detroit  River  light.— 

When  ^  mile  south  of  Middle  Island  light  steer  W.  f  miles,  or  until  the 
west  end  of  Middle  Island  bears  N.,  wnen  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  19  miles, 
until  the  east  side  of  Middle  Sister  bears  N.  1^  miles,  passing  f  mile 
north  of  North  Bass  island,  when  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  14f  miles,  to 
a  point  1  mile  N.  by  E.  from  Detroit  River  light,  and  in  range  with  Bois 
Blanc  light. 

Middle  Passage  to  the  Entrance  of  Maumee  Bay.— 

When  ^  mile  south  ot  Middle  Island  light,  steer  W.  f  mile  or  until  the 
west  end  of  Middle  island  bears  north,  when  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  7f  miles, 
or  until  the  middle  of  North  Bass  island  bears  south  distant  one  mile, 
when  steer  W.  I  N.  28^  miles  to  Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy,  or  until 
Turtle  Island  light  bears  S.  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  1^  miles.  This  course  passes 
I^  miles  north  of  West  Sister  Island  light. 

Middle  Passage  to  Put-in-Bay.— When  ^  mile  south  of 
Middle  Island  light  steer  W.  ^  N.,  5^  miles,  to  a  point  \  mile  north  of 
Ballast  island,  thence  S.  W.  2^  miles  to  the  dock  in  Put-in-Bay. 

Marblehead  to  Detroit  River  Light,  passing  be- 
tween Middle  Bass  and  South  Bass  Islands.— When  i^ 

miles  north  of  Marblehead  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  3^  miles,  to  a 
point  ^  mile  west  of  the  west  point  of  Kelley's  island,  then  steer  N.  by 
W.  f  W.,  6^  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  east  of  Ballast  island,  haul  around 
the  island  until  its  west  side  bears  south  ^  mile  distant,  then  steer  S.  W., 
heading  on  Gibraltar  Island,  If  miles,  when  steer  west  with  the  north 
point  of  South  Bass  island  directly  astern  4  miles,  then  steer  N.  W.  by 
N.  ^  N.,  27 J  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by  E.  from  Detroit  River  light 
and  in  range  with  Bois  Blanc  light.  Passing  ^  mile  west  of  Middle  Sis- 
ter island. 

Put-in-Bay  to  Detroit  River  Light,  passing  be- 
tween Snalce  and  Middle  Bass  Islands.-  -when  i  mile  east 
of  Gibraltar  island  steer  N,  W.  by  N.,  29^  miles,  to  a  point  N.  by  E.  1 
mile  from  Detroit  River  light,  and  in  range  with  Bois  Blanc  Island 
light.     This  course  leads  north  of  Middle  island  ^  of  a  mile. 

Put-in-Bay  to  Entrance  to  Maumee  Bay.— When  close 
to  the  east  side  of  Gibraltar  island,  steer  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  ^  mile  to  clear 
Peach  Orchard  buoy,  when  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  29^  miles,  to  a  point  If 
miles  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from  Turtle  Island  light,  passing  1  mile  south  of 
West  Sister  island  light. 

Detroit  River  Light  to  Pelee  Spit.— When  i  mile  N.  by 
B.  from  Detroit  River  light  and  in  range  with  Boin  Blanc  light,  steer  E. 
by  S.  f  S.,  passing  ^  mile  south  of  Bar  Point  red  buoy,  and  1  mile 
north  of  Colchester  Reef  light  house,  844^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south 
of  the  Spit  light. 

Detroit  River  Light  to  Monroe. — When  ^  mile  south  of 


LAKE    EBIE. 


T» 


Detroit  Biver  light,  steer  S.  W.  ^  W.,  11^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east 
of  Monroe  ligbt,  passing  close  to  Stony  point. 

Monroe  to  Pelee  Spit. — When  l  mile  east  of  Monroe  light, 
steer  E.  |  S.,  41^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light 

Magnetic  Declinations  in  degrees  and  tenths,  corrected  to  the 
year  1890: 

Buffalo 4*.8W. 

PortColborne 4°  .6  W. 

Long  Point 3"  .8  W. 

Erie 3"  .6  W. 

Pairport 2'  .  3  W. 

Cleveland r  .  8  W. 

Black  River 1°.0W. 

Cedar  Point 0°  .5  W. 

Pel6e  Island 0°  .8  W, 

Kelley'fl  Island 0'  .6  W. 

Toledo 0°.0 

KIngaville 0*  .8  W. 

Bois  Blanc  Island 0"  .6  W. 


Canadian  Light- Houses,  Buoys,  and  Harbors  on  the  North 

Shore  of  Lake  Erie  Standing  to  the 

Westward, 


PORT  COLBORNE  lilGHT-STATION.— Main  light.  A 
fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles.  Open,  wood,  frame  tower,  light  70 
feet  above  lake  level.  On  west  pierhead,  at  the  Lake  Erie  entrance  to 
Welland  canal. 

Port  Colbome  Range  ILight.— A  fixeu  red  light.  White, 
square,  wood  tower,  light  38  feet  above  lake  level.  On  the  E.  side  of 
entrance,  on  crib,  2030  feet  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  from  main  light.  The  two 
lights,  in  range,  give  deepest  water  to  entrance  of  canal  clear  of  Sugar 
Loaf  reef.  In  entering  main  light  must  be  passed  to  port,  back  one  on 
starboard  side.     Fog  horn  sounds  blasts  of  1 1  seconds  every  1^  minutes. 

Port  Colborne  Beacon. — A  vertically  striped  red  and  white 
beacon,  surmounted  by  a  globe,  stands  on  the  outermost  crib  of  east 
pier,  not  lighted. 

To  enter  the  harbor,  bring  the  lights  in  range,  heading  about  N.  by 
E.  \  E.,  and  when  near  the  end  of  the  west  pier  port  so  as  to  clear  it,  and 
follow  it  into  the  basin;  16  feet  can  be  carried  in. 

Sugar  Loaf  hill,  \\  miles  west  of  Port  Colborne,  is  a  good  mark  for 
vessels  bound  down  the  lake.  A  reef  extends  from  the  east  side  of  the 
entrance,  in  a  southerly  direction,  an  11-foot  spot  near  its  outer  end  bears 
S.  by  E.  \  E.  from  the  main  light  1,000  yards  distant;  from  12^  to  14 
feet  can  be  carried  through  the  Welland  canal. 

MOHAWK  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving 
white  light,  showing  3  bright  flashes  with  intervals  of  30  seconds  be- 
tween their  points  of  greatest  brilliancy,  followed  by  an  eclipse  of  76 
seconds,  or  making  a  complete  revolution  in  2^  minutes,  visible  15  miles. 
White,  circular,  stone  tower,  00  feet  high,  light  64  feet  above  lake  level. 
On  an  island  1  mile  southwest  of  main  land,  and  3^  miles  S.  E.  by  B. 
from  the  entrance  to  Pore  Maitland,  and  14  miles  west  of  the  entrance  to 


80 


LAKU    EKIU. 


the  WeDand  canal.  Good  protection  from  S.  W.  and  W.  gales  can  be 
had  by  anchoring  under  the  lee  of  a  reef  which  extends  in  a  southeast 
direction  about  2^  miles  from  the  light,  come  to  in  about  3^-  fathoms 
with  the  light  bearing  west.  Shoal  water  extends  to  the  westward  of 
Point  Selkirk,  which  is  2^  miles  east  of  the  light. 

PORT  MAITLAND  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  13  miles.  White,  open  frame,  wood  tower,  light  51  feet 
above  lake  level.     On  west  pier  at  the  entrance  to  Grand  river. 

Grand  River,  or  Port  Maitland,  is  a  good  harbor  and  easy 
to  make,  the  piers  are  1,60U  feet  in  length.  To  enter  the  harbor  run 
straight  in,  keeping  the  west  pier  well  on  board;  depth  of  water  at  the 
entrance,  11  to  12  feet.  To  come  to  anchor,  run  above  the  entitince  to 
canal,  which  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  river. 

PORT  DOVER  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light., 
visible  8  miles.  White,  hexagonal,  wood  tower,  20  feet  high.  On  the 
west  pier.  The  piers  are  1,020  feet  in  length,  with  from  11  to  12  feet  at 
the  entrance.     Long  Point  light  bears  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  18^  miles. 

L.ONG  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving  white  lijht, 
interval  of  revolution  1  minute,  visible  15  miles.  Octagonal  wood  tower, 
light  65  feet  above  lake  level.     On  the  east  extremity  of  Long  poi/it. 

Fog  Signal.— A  steam  fog  horn  is  to  be  established  at  the  east  end  of  Long 
point,  and  the  contract  for  the  necessary  buildings  has  been  let. 

Port  Colborne  light  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  47  miles.  Dunkirk  light  E.  | 
S.,  36  miles.  '  Presque  Isle  light  S.  |-  W.,  26f  miles.  Long  poi  3t  affords 
good  protection  and  shelter  from  aU  southerly  and  westerly  gales.  To 
make  a  lee,  haul  around  the  low  sandy  point,  giving  the  light  a  berth  of 
seven-sighths  Of  a  mile  and  come  to  between  the  point  and  Big  Bluff  in 
from  4  to  6  fathoms,  good  anchorage.  Shoal  water  extends  from  Bluff 
point,  which  is  3  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  light,  to  the  northward 
and  westward,  2f  miles. 

WEST  END  OF  LONG  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— 

A  revolving  red  light,  interval  of  revolution  1  minute,  visible  12  miles. 
White,  square,  wood  tower,  dwelling  attached.  On  the  east  side  of  new 
channel.  Visible  from  all  points  seaward.  When  lifeboat  is  required 
the  light  will  be  obscured  towards  Port  Rowan. 

Port  Burwell,  or  Big  Otter  Creek.- A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  12  miles.  Octagonal  wood  tower,  333  yards  in-shore.  The  west 
pier  extends  into  the  lake  850  feet,  and  the  east  pier  670  feet;  width 
Detween  piers,  170  feet;  depth  of  water  at  entrance,  10  to  11  feet.  The 
light  is  on  the  hill  east  side,  the  focal  plane  is  96  feet  above  lake  level. 
Presque  Isle  light,  S.  E.,  49  miles.  Fairport  light  S.  S.  W.,  65  miles. 
Rondeau  point  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  60  miles. 

Port  Bruce,  or  Catfish  Creek. — A  fixed  white  light.  On  a 
pole.  The  west  pier  is  750  feet  in  length,  and  the  east  pier  700  feet.  Port 
Bruce  is  10  miles  west  of  Port  Burwell  and  about  the  same  distance  east 
of  Port  Stanley. 

PORT  STANLEY  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light. 
White,  square,  wood  tower.  On  west  pier,  vi.'hle  from  all  points  sea- 
ward. The  west  pier  is  1,870  feet  in  length,  and  the  east  pier  1,150  feet. 
Depth  of  water  at  entrance,  11  to  14  feet.  Rondeau-  point,  S.  W.  f  W., 
43  miles.     Ashtabula  light  S.  by  E.  i  E.,  56  miles. 


m 


-M 


;| 


■l-.t 


LAKE    BSIB. 


81 


RONDEAU  LIGHT-STATION  (Main  liight).— A  revolv- 
ing light  showing  alternate  red  and  white  flashes  every  1^  minutes,  vis- 
ible 16  miles.  Octagonal  wooden  tower,  white,  on  a  steel-faoed  cylind- 
rical base,  built  up  from  the  pier  and  painted  brown.  Focal  plane  of 
light  70  feet  above  the  lake  level.  On  the  eastern  breakwater  780  feet 
K  by  E.  i  E.  from  the  front  range  light. 

Rondeau  Harbor  (Front  Iilgbt).— A  fixed  white  light  visible  18  miles, 
over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  range.  White,  square,  wooden,  open  framework 
tower.    On  a  cribwork  block  upon  the  outer  end  of  the  east  breakwater  pier.    The 

Sosition  formerly  occupied  by  the  main  light.    The  two  lights  in  range  N.  by  E.  i 
I.  lead  up  to  the  outer  end  of  the  east  pier,  and  the  light  must  be  left  on  the  star- 
board hand  on  entering. 

Rondeau  Harbor  is  on  the  south  side  of  Point  aux  Pins,  W.  |  8.,  98  miles  from 
Long  point.  It  is  a  natural  basin,  enclosed  by  Point  aux  Pins,  with  a  cut  through 
the  neck,  or  sand  bank;  the  sides  of  the  cut  are  protected  by  two  parallel  piers  788 
feet  in  length,  and  250  feet  apart,  direction  north  and  south.  Depth  of  water  at 
the  entrance,  18  to  21  feet.  Pel6e  Spit  light  8.  W.  |  W.,  40  miles.  Cleveland  light 
8  by  E..  53  miles.  Fairport  light  8.  E.  i  8.,  48  miles.  The  east  side  of  Point  aux 
Pins  affords  a  good  shelter  from  westerly  gales,  good  anchorage  in  6  to  7  fathoms, 
clay  bottom,  vessels  frequently  come  to  west  of  the  harbor  for  shelter  in  north- 
east galea. 

PEL^E  SPIT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving  white  light, 
visible  15  miles.  White,  octagonal,  wood  tower,  61  feet  high,  light  76 
t(jeX  above  lake  level.  On  a  crib  2^  miles  south  of  the  point.  Fog  horn 
operated  by  compressed  air  has  been  established  at  this  station.  The 
horn  projects  horizontally  from  the  S.  E.  face  of  the  pier,  and  is  20  feet 
above  lake  level.  It  sounds  blasts  of  7  seconds'  duration,  with  intervals 
of  45  seconds.  Pel6e  Island  light  bears  W.  S.  W.  7f  miles.  Colchester 
Reef  light  W.  by  N.,  20^  miles.  The  west  ^de  of  Point  Pel6e  affords 
excellent  shelter  from  all  northeast  and  easterly  gales,  and  the  east  side 
from  northwest  or  westou;  gales.  To  make  a  lee  on  the  west  side, 
coming  from  the  eastward,  run  past  the  light,  give  it  a  berth  of  ^  to  ^  a 
mile,  and  haul  up  N.  by  W.  for  from  3  to  5  miles,  when  come-to  in  about 
6  fathoms,  clay  bottom.  There  are  shoal  spots  from  1^  to  If  miles  B.  to 
E.  S.  E.  from  the  light;  least  water  13  feet.  The  north  end  of  the  mid- 
dle ground  bears  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  4^  miles,  and  the  south  end  8.  W.  by 
W.  i  W.,  4f  miles,  and  a  range  between  Pel6e  Spit  and  Pel^e  Island 
lights,  passes  a  little  north  of  the  middle  of  the  shoal. 

Shoals  near  Point  Pel^e  Lig^ht.— The  Deputy  Minister  of 
Marine  of  Canada  has  issued  the  following  Notice  to  Mariners,  dated 
October  25,  1888:  *' Notice  is  hereby  given  that  a  spot  with  only  13  feet 
of  water  is  reported  on  the  shoals  lying  about  1^  miles  to  the  eastward 
of  Point  PelSe  light-house,  which  shoals  are  shown  on  the  American  chart 
of  the  lake.  Also  that  the  wrecked  schooner  *  Walter  H.  Oades '  lies 
about  400  feet  southwest  of  the  13-foot 
only  6  feet  of  water  over  her." 


spot,  in  21  'feet  of  water,  with 


PELEE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  12  miles.  White,  circular,  stone  tower,  40  feet  high,  light  46  feet 
above  lake  level.  On  the  northeast  point  of  Pel6e  island.  The  north 
end  of  Middle  ground  bears  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  3^  miles,  and  the  south  end 
K.  J  N.  8  miles.  Colchester  Reef  light  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  14|  miles. 
South  side  of  East  Sister  island  W.  |  8.,  1  If  miles.  A  reef  extends  from 
the  light  1  mile,  in  a  northeast  direction.  There  is  good  anchorage  on 
the  west  side  of  the  island,  and  protection  from  easterly  gales.     Th« 


r 


82 


LAKE    ERIE. 


east  side  of  Pel6e  island  shoald  not  be  approached  nearer  than  If  miles. 
Ghickenolee  reef  is  2f  miles  from  southeas'  point  of  island. 

MIDDLE  ISIiAND  LIGHT-STilTION.— A  fixed  red  light, 
visible  12  miles.  White,  square,  wood  tower,  49  feet  high;  light  70  feet  - 
above  sea  level.  This  light  is  between  Pel6e  aij  J  Kelley's  island,  and 
marks  the  channel  between  thera.  Gull  Island  Bhoal  buoy  S.  ^  E.,  1 
mile;  the  best  channel  is  between  this  buoy  and  the  light.  There  is  a 
shoal,  least  water  10  feet,  £.  N.  E.  ^  N.,  f  mile.  To  pass  north  of  Mid- 
dle island,  brin^  the  light  to  bear  E.,  end  run  for  it  on  that  course  to 
within  f  of  a  mile,  when  steer  W.  N.  W.  i  N ,  8  miles,  to  a  point  f  mile 
north  of  North  Bass  island. 

LEAMINGTON  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  1!J  miles.  White,  square,  wood  tower ^  light  48  feet  above  lake 
level.  On  shore  near  the  pier.  Pel6e  Spit  light  S.  S.  E.  i  E.,  12  miles. 
Colchester  Reef  light  W.  S.  W.  -J  S.,  16  miles. 

KING8VILLE  LIGHT-STATION   (Front    Light).— A 

fixed  red  light,  lantern  on  a  pole,  27  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  On 
the  outer  end  of  the  east  breakwater  pier. 

Back  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles,  light  55  feet 
above  lake  level.  Square,  white  wooden  tower,  lantern  red.  On  the  bank 
of  the  lake  at  the  head  of  the  east  pier  1,060  feet  N.  by  W.  from  Front 
light.  The  two  lights  in  range  lead  up  to  the  entrance.  The  front  light 
to  be  left  on  the  right  hand  or  starboard  side  in  entering. 

KJngSVille  is  situated  6f  miles  west  of  Leamington,  and  10  miles 
to  the  eastward  of  Litt;«'s  point.  The  Aarbor  works  consist  of  two  piers. 
The  east  pier  is  880  feet  in  length  and  extends  south;  the  west  pier 
diverges  so  as  to  inclose  a  basin  in  the  form  of  the  letter  V.  Pel6e  Spit 
light  S.  E.  i  E.,  16i  miles.     Colchester  Reef  light  S.  W.  I  W.  10^  miles. 

COLCHESTER  BEEF  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 

light,  3d  order,  visible  14  miles,  illuminates  the  entire  horizon.  Circular 
Btone  pier  20  feet  above  the  lake,  surmounted  by  a  hexagonal  wood  tower 
painted  white.  The  vane  of  the  lantern  is  60  feet  above  the  pier.  The 
structure  stands  near  the  southeastern  edge  of  the  reef,  in  18  feet  of 
water,  with  19  feet  of  water  within  1,000  feet  of  it  on  every  side.  The 
lightship  is  removed.  Visible  all  around  the  horizon.  A  fog  bell  struck 
by  machinery,  is  placed  in  a  belfry  on  south  side  of  tower,  55  feet  above 
the  lake  level,  and  in  thick  and  foggy  weather  will  sound  one  stroke 
everv  15  seconds.  Middle  Sister  S.  Vv.,  8|  miles.  Dock  at  Little's  point, 
N.  W.  by  N.,  4  miles. 

Bar  Point  Lightship. — Removed,  the  position  is  marked  by  a 
large,  red,  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water,  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  1  mile  from 
the  Detroit  River  light,  100  yards  south  of  the  west  end  of  reef.  Bois 
Blano  light  N.,  5^  miles.  Vessels  passing  inside  should  give  the  buoy  a 
berth  of  ^  a  mile,  and  heavy  draught  vessels  should  pass  to  the  south- 
ward. 

To  Enter  Detroit  River,  north  of  the  red  spar  buo^,  where  the 
lightship  was  formerly  moored. — When  1  k  miles  south  of  Little's  point 
steer  W  N.  W.  to  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile  northeast  from  buoy, 
thence  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  heading  on  Celeron  island,  until  in  ranee  with 
Detroit  river  and  Boia  Blano  lights,  when  steer  for  Bois  Blano  light,  nntil 
within  li  miles  of  it,  thence  N.  by  E.  |  £.  into  the  river.  Only  li^icbt 
draught  vessels  shonM  attempt  this  passagp. 


LAKE    ERIK. 


km 


than  If  miles. 


and  10  miles 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  on  the  North  Shore  of 

Lake  Erie. 


Port  Colborne  to  Dunkirk.— When  l  mile  S.  by  W. 


\ 


from 
byN. 


main  light,  steer  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  25  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
from  beacon-light. 

Port  Colborne  to  Erie.— When  l  mile  S.  by  W.  from  main 
light,  steer  IS.  W.  i  S.,  63  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northeast  from 
Presque  Isle  beacon-light. 

Port  Colborne  to  Ashtabula.— When  i  mile  S.  bv  W.  from 
main  light,  steer  S.  W.  \  W.,  102  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Ashta- 
bula light. 

Port  Colborne  to  Falrport  and  Cleveland.— When  i  mile 
S.  by  W.  from  main  light,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  127  miles,  to  a  point  2^ 
miles  north  of  Fairport  beacon-light,  when  steer  S.  W.  \  W.,  29  miles,  to 
a  point  1  mile  north  of  Cleveland  breakwater  light. 

Port  Colborne  to  Longr  Point.— When  l  mile  S.  by  W.  from 
main  light,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  47  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of 
light. 

Port  Colborne  to  bandusky.— When  2  miles  south  of  Long 
Point  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Port  Colborne,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  1 
W.,  152  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northeast  of  Cedar  Point  light,  and  in 
range  with  beacon. 

Port  Colborne  to  South  Passage,  and  Toledo.— When 
2  miles  south  of  Long  Point  light,  as  in  the  oourae  from  Port  Colborne, 
steer  S.  W.  by  W.  \  W.,  15 1^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of  Marble- 
head  light,  when  steer  N.«W.  by  W.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 
Niagara  Reef  buoy,  and  in  line  with  Green  island  and  West  Sister  Island 
lights,  when  steer  W.  by  N.  |  N.  21f  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  N.  E.  by 
N.  \  N.  from  Turtle  Island  light. 

Port  Colborne  to  Middle  Passage,  Detroit  and  Toledo. 
—When  2  miles  south  of  Long  Point  light  as  in  the  course  from  Port 
Colborne,  steer  W.  8.  W.,  146^  miles,  to  a  point  \  mile  south  of  Middle 
Island  light;  thence  W.  \  mile,  or  until  the  west  end  of  Middle  island 
bears  north,  when  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  19  miles,  until  the  east  side  of 
Middle  Sister  bears  N.  1^  miles,  passing  }  mile  north  of  North  Bass  island, 
when  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  14f  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  by  K  from 
Detroit  River  li^ht  and  in  range  with  Bois  Blanc  light. 

Or  when  \  mile  south  of  Middle  Island  light,  steer  west  \  mile,  or 
until  the  west  end  of  Middle  island  bears  north,  when  steer  N.  W.  by 
W.  7f  miles,  or  until  the  middle  of  North  Bass  island  bears  south  dis- 
tant one  mile,  when  steer  W.  f  N.  28^  miles  to  Turtle  Island  Shoal  buoy 
or  until  Turtle  Island  light  bears  S.  W.  by  S  ^  S.  If  miles  passing  1^ 
miles  north  of  West  Si%ter  Island  light. 

Port  Colborne  to  Detroit  River  Light. —  When  2  milet 
south  of  Long  Point  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Port  Colborne,  steer 
W.  by  S.  f  S.,  134  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light, 
when  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  84|  miles,  to  a  point  \  mile  N.  by  K.  from 
Detroit  River  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Bois  Blanc  light,  pasBing 
1  mile  north  of  Colchester  Reel  light,  and  \  mile  south  of  Bar  Point 
red  buoy.      The  position  formerly  occupied  by  the  Bar  Point  light^ship. 

Port  Colborne  to  Port  Maitland.  —When  i  mile  ft  by  W. 
from  main  light,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  8  miles,  then  steer  W.  |  N.,  » 


84 


LAKE    SRIE. 


I 


miles,  to  a  point  3.  W.  f  W.,  8  mileR  from  Mohawk  light;  thenoe  N.  by 
W.  2  miles,  or  until  in  range  of  west  pier.  Entering  keep  the  west  pier 
well  on  board  and  follow  it  up  into  the  river. 

Port  Colborne  to  Port  Dover.— When  i  mile  S.  by  W.  from 
the  main  light,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  8  miles;  thenoe  west  41  miles, 
to  a  point  1  mile  S.  by  E.  from  the  light. 

Port  Maitland  to  Port  Dover.— When  i  mile  south  of  light, 
steer  8.  W.  by.  W.  for  7  miles,  then  steer  W.  ^  N.,  26  miles,  to  a  point 
1  mile  S.  by  E.  from  the  light. 

Port  Maitland  to  Lbngr  Point.  —When  i  mile  south  of  light, 
steer  S.  W.  ^  W.,  33  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  light. 

Port  Dover  to  Liong  Point. — When  l  mile  south  of  pier,  steer 
S.  S.  £.  i  £.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  east  of  Loug  Point  light. 

Longf  Point  to  Buffalo. — When  2  miles  so^iih  of  Long  Point 
light,  steer  E.  by  N.  f  N.  63f  miles,  to  the  nortli  end  of  the  Buffalo 
breakwater. 

'  JjOng  Point  to  Erie.  — When  two  miles  south  of  Long  Point 
light,  steer  S.  ^  W.,  24  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northeast  of  Presque 
Isle  beacon-light. 

Long  Point  to  Fairport  and  Cleveland.  —When  2  miles 
south  oflight,  steer  8.  W.  f  W.,  80  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  north  of 
Fairport  beacon-light;  thence  S.  W.  ^  W.,  29  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
nortn  of  Cleveland  breakwater  light. 

Long  Point  to  South  Passage.—  See  course  from  Port  Col- 
borne to  Toledo. 

Long  Point  to  Middle  Passage.  -See  course  from  Port  Col- 
borne to  Middle  Passage. 

Long  Point  to  Pel6e  Spit.  — When  2  miles  south  of  light, 
steer  wTby  S.  f  S.,  134  miles,  to  s,  point  1^  miles  south  of  spit  light. 

Long  Point  to  Rondeau.  — When  2  miles  south  of  lij^-ht,  steer 
W.  f  S.,  98  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  main  light. 

Long  Point  to  Port  Bur  well. — When  2  miles  south  of  light, 
steer  W.  ^  N.,  28^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  Clear  creek;  thence 
W.  N.  W.  f  N.,  11^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  piers. 

Long  Point  to  Port  Str  nloy. — When  2  miles  south  of  light, 
steer  W.  f  N.,  28^  miles,  to  a  po.nt  1^  miles  south  of  Clear  creek;  thenoe 
W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  31^  miles,  s;o  a  point  1  mile  south  of  light. 

Port  Burwell  to  Port  Stanley. — When  i  mile  south  of  the 
piers,  steer  W.  ^  N.,  20|  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  light;  this 
course  leads  very  close  to  Port  Bruce. 

Port  Stanley  to  Rondeau  and  Pelee  Spit.— When  i  mile 
south  of  light,  steer  S.  W.  1  W.,  45  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  S.  E.  |  S. 
from  main  light;  thence  S.  W.  f  W.  41  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south 
of  Pel6e  Spit  light. 

Rondeau  to  Pelee  Spit. — When  l  mile  south  of  light,  steer  S, 
W.  f  W.,  40  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  Spit  light. 

Pelee  Spit  to  Detroit  River  Light. — See  course  from  Port 
Colborne  to  Detroit  River  light. 

Pel^e  Spit  to  Erie.— When  l^  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light,  steer 
£.  I  N.  126  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  N,  by  E.  ^  E.  from  Presque  Isle 
light;  thence  S.  E.  f  E.,  3  miles,  or  until  Presque  Isle  beacon-light  bears 
S.  W.  U  mile. 

Pel^e  Spit  to  Long  Point,  and  Buffalo.— When  H  miles 
south  of  the  Spit  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  134  miles,    to  a  point   Ijf 


•y 


LAXB   BBIS. 


85 


r-M 


miles  south  of  Long  Point  light;  thenoe  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  63|  miles,  to  the 
north  end  of  Buffalo  breakwater. 

Pel^e  Spit  to  Dunkirk.— When  l*  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light, 
steer  KhjN.i  N.,  168^  miles,  to  a  point  \  mile  N.  W.  by  N.  from 
Dunkirk  beacon-light. 

Pelee  Spit  to  Ashtabula.— When  li  miles  south  of  the  Spit 
light,  steer  E.  i  N.,  88  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Ashtabula  light. 

Pelee  Spit  to  Fairport. — When  1|  miles  south  of  the  Spit  light, 
steer  E.  f  8.,  62^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northwest  from  Fairport 
beacon-light. 

Pel6e  Spit  to  Cleveland.— When  l^  miles  south  of  the  Spit 
light,  steer  S.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  47  miles,  to  the  Cleveland  breakwater  light. 

Pell)e  Spit  to  Black  River.— When  l^  miles  south  of  the  Spit 
ligat,  s'ieer  S.  E.  by  S.,  30  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Black  River 
light. 

Pelee  Spit  to  Entrance  of  Maumee  Bay.— When  U  miles 
south  of  the  Spit  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  f  K,  2f  miles,  thence  W.  by  S.  i 
S.,  with  the  Spit  light  directly  astern,  passing  close  to  the  Middle  ground, 
29i  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  West  Sister  light,  passing  |  mile 
south  of  East  Sister  Island;  thence  W.  ^  N.,  13j  miles,  to  a  point  If 
miles  N.  E.  by  TH.  ^  N.  from  Turtle  Island  light.  Whence  see  directions 
for  entering  Maumee  bay. 

Buoys  of  the  Dominion   Government  at  the  Entrance  to  De- 
troit River. 


Bed  Barrel  Buoy. — In  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  south  side 
of  a  small  shoal  near  the  shore,  to  the  southeastward  of  Bar  point.  De- 
troit River  light  bears  W.  8.  W.  \  S.,  3^  miles. 

liigfht  Ship  Buoy. — A  30-foot  red  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  position  formerly  occupied  by  the  Bar  Point  light-ship.  De- 
troit River  light  bears  W.  by  S.  \  S.,  \  mile. 

Bed  Spar  Buoy. — In  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  on 
eas^.  side  of  channel,  between  the  Detroit  River  and  Bois  Blanc  lights. 
Detroit  River  light  bears  S.  by  W.  \  W.,  1^  miles. 

Black  Spar  Buoy. — ^In  19  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  on 
the  west  side  of  channel.    Detroit  River  light  bears  S.  by  E.,  \\  miles. 

Bed  Spar  Buoy. — In  le  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  on 
the  east  side  of  channel.     Detroit  River  light  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  Ij  miles. 

Black  Spar  Buoy. — In  14  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  on 
the  west  side  of  channel.     Detroit  River  light  S.  f  E.,  \\  miles. 

Black  Spar  Buoy.— In  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot 
with  13^  feet  of  water  over  it,  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel.  From 
this  buoy  the  light-house  at  Gibraltar  is  just  closed  with  southwest  side 
of  Celeron  island.  Thb  Light-ship  is  moored  at  this  buoy.  Detroit 
River  light,  8.  i  W.,  2|  miles. 

Light-ship.— Gray,  with  white  bulwarks.  "Bar  Point  Light- 
ship "  in  black  letters  on  the  bulwarks.  Two  lights  are  shown  vertically 
from  lens  lanterns,  hoisted  in  a  frame  amidships,  red  over  white.    Moored 


86 


DBTBOIT   BTVSB. 


111 
'1' 


in  16  feet  of  water  on  eastern  edge  of  shoals,  on  the  west  side  of  channel 
between  Detroit  River  and  Bois  Blano  lights. 

Red  Spar  Buoy. — ^In  18  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  on 
the  east  side  of  channel  nearly  opposite  the  black  baoy  and  light-ship. 
Detroit  River  light  S.  by  W.,  nearly  Sf  miles. 

Red  Barrel  Buoy. — In  20  feet  of  water  on  the  east  side  of 
channel.  This  was  the  lower  buoy  off  Bar  point  moved  farther  out  into 
the  ohannc'  .  Blano  light  N.  f  E.,  2f  miles.     Bar  point  N.  E.  by  E., 

i  mile. 

Red  Barrel  Buoy. — In  14  feet  of  water  on  the  east  side  of  chan- 
nel.    Bois  Blanc  light  N.,  f  mile. 

Black  Barrel  Buoy. — In  14  feet  of  water,  on  the  west  side  of 
channel.  Marks  the  lower  end  of  spit  off  the  foot  of  Bois  Blano  island. 
The  light  bears  N.  by  E.  nearly,  f  mile. 

Red  Barrel  Buoy. — Marks  the  channel  bank  on  east  side  of 
channel  opposite  the  lower  end  of  spit  off  the  foot  of  Bois  Blanc  island. 
The  light  bears  N.  f  W.  nearly,  f  mile. 

Red  and  Black  Striped  Spar  Buoy. — Marks  a  shoal  spot  in 
the  middle  of  the  channel  with  only  14^  feet  of  water  over  it.  There  is 
a  good  channel  500  feet  wide  on  either  side  of  the  buoy. 

Black  Barrel  Buoy. — In  14  feet  of  water,  on  west  side  of 
channel.  Marks  the  edge  of  the  spit  off  the  foot  of  Bois  Blanc  island, 
about  midway  between  its  lower  end  and  the  light.  The  light  bears  N. 
I  E.,  i  mile. 


Standing  up  Detroit  River  Main  Channel  above  Bois  Blanc 

Island  Light. 

Black  Spar  Buoy. — In  16  feet  of  water,  on  the  west  side  of 
channel.     Marks  an  elbow  in  the  channel  bank  nearly  abreast  the  light. 

Black  Spar  Buoy. — In  12  feet  of  water,  on  west  side  of  chan- 
nel. Marks  a  shoal  spot  with  deep  water  inside  of  it,  ^  mile  above  the 
S.  E.  point  of  Bois  Blanc  island.  This  shoal  is  nearly  one-third  the  dis- 
tance across  the  river,  called  the  Boston  shoal. 

Red  Spar  Buoy. — In  14  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  on  the 
east  side  of  channel  with  deep  water  inside  of  it,  a  little  above  the  last- 
described  buoy,  called  the  Spokane  shoal. 

Amherstburgr  Rang^e  liights.— Two  red  lights  shown  from 
lens  lanterns  to  guide  into  the  river.  Front  tower  white,  open  frame,  50 
feet  high,  and  80  feet  from  the  water  edge,  2,300  feet  north  of  Fraser*8 
dock.  Rear  tower  red,  open  frame  structure,  80  feet  high,  N.  by  K  ^ 
E.,  475  feet  from  Front  light;  both  towers  are  slatted  on  uie  side  facing 
the  range. 

Black  Spar  Buoy. — In  is  feet  of  water  on  the  west  side  of 
channel,  400  feet  east  of  the  head  of  Bois  Blanc  inland,  called  Mil- 
waukee shoal. 

Red  Spar  Buoy* — ^In  14  feet  of  water,  on  the  east  side  of  chan- 
nel.    Marks  the  point  of  the  shoal  off  Fort  Maiden. 

Black  Barrel  Buoy.— In  14  feet  of  water  on  west  tide  of 


tmnuxi  Kivjcs. 


87 


)  side  of  channel 


channel  Marks  the  channel  bank  ^  mile  above  the  head  of  Bois  Blane 
island. 

Black  Barrel  Buoy. — In  U  feet  of  water,  on  west  side  of 
channel.  Marks  the  channel  bank  opposite  the  Lime  Kiln  crossing,  ^ 
mile  above  the  head  of  Bois  Blanc  island. 

Bed  Barrel  Buoy. — In  18  feet  of  water,  on  the  east  side  of 
channel.     Marks  a  rock  ^  mile  above  the  Texas  dock. 


Mt  side  of  chan- 


je  Bois  Blanc 


Standing  up  the  Channel  east  of  Fighting  Island. 

Foot  of  Fig^htine  Island. — Black  spar  buoy,  in  le  feet  of 
water,  on  the  west  side  of  channel.  Marks  the  lower  end  of  the  spit  off 
the  foot  of  Fighting  island.     South  point  of  island  bears  N.  f  W.,  \  mile. 

Bed  Spar  Buoy. — In  16  feet  of  water,  on  the  east  side  of  chan- 
nel. Marks  the  channel  bank  opposite  the  end  of  the  spit  off  the  foot  of 
Fighting  Island. 

Black  Spar  Buoy. — ^In  16  feet  of  water,  on  the  west  side  of 
channel.  Marks  the  channel  bank  about  half-way  from  the  end  of  the 
spit,  to  the  south  point  of  Fighting  island. 

Bed  Spar  Buoy. — In  16  feet  of  water,  on  the  east  side  of  channel. 
Marks  the  channel  bank  opposite  the  black  buoy. 

Head  of  Fightings  Island. — Black  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
water,  on  west  side  of  channel.  Marks  the  upper  end  of  spit  off  the 
head  of  Fighting  island.     N.  £.  point  of  island  bears  S.  S.  E.  f  mile. 

Bed  Spar  Buoy. — In  16  feet  of  water,  on  the  east  side  of  chan- 
nel. Marks  a  large  flat,  and  turn  in  the  channel  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  river,  from  the  head  of  Fighting  island  and  a  little  above  it.  N.  E. 
point  of  Fighting  island  bears  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  i  mile. 


Sailing  Distances  on  Lake  Erie,  etc.,  from  Buffalo  to 

Fort  Gratiot. 


side  of  ohan- 


west  cide  ^f 


BuCEalo 
Fort  Colbome 
Dunkirk 
Long  Point . 

Brie 

AidiUbul*. 

PortSUnley 

Fatrport 

Rondeau 

Cleveland 

BlaokBiver 

Pel«eBpit 

SanduMty 

Bar  Point 

Monroe 

Toledo 

Detroit. 

F<wtQnrtlolLt 


88 


DETROIT   RIVBB. 


DETROIT    RIVER. 

Light  Houses  and  Buoys  Standing  up  the  Main  or  East 

Channel. 

Southwest  gales  of  any  duration  lower  the  water  in  Detroit  river  from  1  to  8  feet, 
and  northeast  gales  raise  it  about  as  much.  Current  from  1  to  d^  miles  per  hour. 
Until  the  Limekilns  have  been  crossed,  this  channel  is  in  Canadian  waters. 

Entering  Detroit  river  from  Lake  Erie,  pass  Detroit  River  light-house  on  either 
side,  get  on  the  line  joining  it  and  Bois  Blanc  light,  N.  lOi"  E.,  or  N.  by  E.  nearly, 
keeping  the  red  buoys  to  starboard,  and  black  to  port,  untU  within  H  miles  of  Bois 
Blanc  light,  when  haul  in  N.  by  E.  \  E.  on  the  Amherstburg  ranges  (see  list  of  Can- 
adian buovB,  page  85).  Keep  in  the  middle  of  the  river  until  abreast  of  Amherstburg, 
when  haul  over  a  little  towards  the  head  of  Bois  Blanc  island,  to  clear  the  red  buoy 
off  Fort  Maiden.  When  past  the  head  of  the  island,  get  on  the  Bois  Blanc  ranges, 
which  lead  to  the  lower  end  of  the  Lime-kiln  cut,  when  take  up  the  Lime-kiln 
Crossing  ranges  on  Canadian  shore,  which  leads  through  the  centre  of  the  cut.  There 
are  also  range  lights  above  the  cut  on  the  Texas  dock,  kept  by  the  pilots. 

After  passing  the  Lime-kilns,  get  on  the  range  of  the  Orosse  Isle  Range  lights  N. 
by  W.  i  W.,  which  leads  to  the  range  of  Mamajuda  and  Qrassy  Island  lights.  Haul 
up  on  this  range  N.  -f  E.  (A  good  opportunity  is  afforded  vessel  masters  while 
running  on  this  range  to  test  the  working  of  their  compasses;  the  course  is  between 
N.  I E.  and  N.  \  E.)  When  within  about  300  yards  of  the  light-house,  bear  to  east- 
wani  slightly  to  clear  Mamajuda  shoal,  and  when  700  yards  above  the  light,  the 
range  between  it  and  Grassy  island  may  again  be  taken.  Arriving  within  one-half 
mile  of  Grassy  Island  light,  haul  to  eastward  to  clear  it,  and  when  600  vards  above, 
again  take  the  range  until  upper  end  of  Fighting  island  is  reached,  when  steer  up 
river  in  mid- channel. 

BAit  POINT  LIGHT-SHIP.— Two  fixed  lights,  shown  verti- 
cally, red  over  white.  Wooden  barge,  hull  gray,  bulwarks  white,  with 
"Bar  Point  Light-ship*'  in  black  letters;  moored  in  16  feet  of  water, 
on  the  eastern  edge  of  shoals,  on  the  west  side  of  channel,  near  the  nar^ 
rowest  point  between  Detroit  River  and  Bois  Blanc  lights. 

BOIS  BLANC,  OR  AMHERSTBURG  LIGHT-STA- 
TION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  14  miles.  White,  circular  stone 
tower,  40  feet  high,  light  66  feet  above  lake  level.  On  lower  end  of 
Bois  Blanc  island. 

AmherstbursT  Range  Lights. — Two  red  lights  shown  from 
lens  lanterns  to  guide  into  the  river.    Front  tower  white,  open  frame,  60  ' 
feet  high,  and  80  feet  from  the  water  edge,  2,300  feet  north  of  Eraser's  dock. 
Rear  tower  red,  open  frame  structure,  80  feet  high,  N.  by  E.  \  E.,  475  feet 
from  Front  light;  both  towers  are  slatted  on  the  side  facing  the  range. 

Bois  Blanc  Range  (front). — A  fixed  white  light.  White, 
square,  open -framed  tower,  light  26  feet  above  lake  level.  On  northeast 
point  of  island. 

Bois  Blanc  Range  (rear). — A  fixed  red  light.  Lantern  on  a 
mast  surmounted  by  a  red  barrel,  160  yards  S.  by  W.  \  W.  from  front 
light. 

lilme-kiln  Croislniif  Range  Lights.— Front  li^ht  is  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  2  miles.  Iron  skeleton  tower,  80  feet  high.  On  crib  m  6  feet  of  water,  oppo- 
site Fort  Maiden. 

Rear  light  is  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  2  miles.  Iron  skeleton  tower,  60  feet 
high.  On  crib  in  4  feet  of  water,  890  feet  S.  ^  E.  from  the  Front  light.  The  align- 
ment of  these  lights  can  be  kept  from  its  intersection  with  the  alignment  of  Bois 
Blanc  Island  range,  northward  to  its  Intersection  with  the  alignment  of  range  lights 
at  the  head  of  Grosse  Isle. 

The  Straight  Cut  at  the  Llme-klln  Crossing.— This  very  important 
improvement  is  nearly  completed.  It  is  2,500  feet  in  length,  20  feet  deep,  and  fully 
440  feet  wide. 


DETBOIT   BITBB. 


Main  or  East 


Fort  Maiden  Rangre  lilgrhts. — To  mark  the  best  channel  from 
the  head  of  the  Lime>kiln  Grossing  cut  to  the  foot  of  Fighting  island. 
Front  light  fixed  white,  shown  from  an  open  frame  tower,  painted  white, 
50  feet  high,  opposite  the  lower  end  of  the  Lime-kiln  Crossing  cut.  Bear 
light  fixed  red,  shown  from  an  open  frame  tower,  80  feet  high,  painted 
red.  On  the  east  side  of  the  street,  about  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  646  feet  from 
front  tower.  The  light  is  108  feet  above  water.  The  towers  are  slatted 
on  the  side  facing  the  range  to  make  them  conspicuous  day  marks. 


90 


DKTROIT   RIVRR. 


I 

ill! 


GiroMe  Isle  Flats.— Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.  Stands  in  sandy 
bottom,  at  the  elbow  of  the  flats,  west  side  of  channel,  2^  miles  above  Lirae-kim 
crossing.  Width  of  channel  in  this  stretch,  i  to  i  mile.  Mamajuda  light-house,  N. 
i  W..  »J  miles. 

IBallard  Reef  Light. — A  lixed  red  light  shown  from  a  amall  red  aeow, 
moored  just  inside  the  above  described  buoy.  This  light  is  maintained  by  vessel 
owners. 

Fighting  Island. — A  red  spar  buov  in  9i  feet  of  water  stands  on  the  east  side 
of  channel,  and  marks  the  outer  edge  of  the  bank,  at  lower  end  of  Fighting  island; 
soft  bottom;  deep  water  close-to.  The  edge  of  the  bank,  for  a  quarter  mile  above 
and  below  the  buoy,  is  nearly  straight,  trending  about  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.,  then 
curves  to  the  eastward.     Mamajuda  light-house,  N.  i  W.,  1\  miles. 

Grosse  Isle  Range  Lights.— Two  fixed  white,  lens  lantern  lights,  shown 
from  brown,  triangular,  skeleton  iron  pyramidal  towers,  front  tower  71  feet,  and 
rear  tower  103  feet  high.  The  upper  25  feet  of  each  tower  is  covered  with  white 
slats,  and  the  lights  are  exhibited  14  feet  below  the  tops  of  the  structures. 

Front  light  on  crib  at  the  nbrth  end  of  Grosse  Isle.  Mamajuda  light-house, 
N.  E.  by  N. 

Rear  light  on  crib  1,493  feet  N.  by  W.  i  W.  from  the  Front  light.  The 
range  leads  from  the  center  of  the  Lime-kiln  crossing  cut,  and  clears  a  small  patch  of 
bowlders  a  little  above  the  cut.  The  range  line  is  150  feet  to  the  westward  of  the 
Fort  Maiden  range  lights,  and  intersects  the  range  of  Grassy  Island  and  Mamajuda 
Island  lights  1^  miles  below  Mamajuda  light. 

mAMA JIJDA  LIOIIT-§TATIO]V.-A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  visible 
12  miles.  White  dwelling  with  low,  square  tower  on  top;  pile  foundation.  Light 
82  feet  above  foundation.  Station  connected  with  fishing-station,  on  north  side,  by 
a  short  footbridge.  On  Mamajuda  shoal,  west  side  of  channel;  200  feet  from  chan- 
nel, and  700  yards  from  the  lower  end  of  shoal.  Good  water  within  60  feet  of  the 
small  pile  wharf  abreast  the  light-house.  Between  this  point  and  the  upper  Fighting 
Island  buoy,  the  channel  is  one-quarter  mile  wide.  Grassy  Island  light-house,  N.  % 
E.,  2i  miles. 

East  Bank. — Red  spar  buoy  in  IH  feet  of  water.  East  side  of  channel,  about 
midway  between  the  two  light-houses,  and  marks  the  outer  point  of  the  Fighting 
Island  bank.  It  stands  in  soft  bottom  with  deep  water  close-to.  In  the  bight  of  the 
channel  opposite,  the  range  between  the  two  light-houses  serves  as  a  channel-guide 
for  a  distance  of  two-thirds  of  a  mile  above  and  below  this  buoy.  Gr.assy  Island 
light-house.  N.  i  W.,  IJ  miles. 

GRASSY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  varied  by  white  flashes  at  intervals  of  one  minute,  6th  order,  visi- 
ble llf  miles.  Cream-colored  dwelling,  with  tower,  29  feet  high  attached; 
stone  foundation.  On  Grassy  Island  shoal,  west  side  of  channel.  Stands 
at  the  elbow  of  the  shoal,  seven-eighths  mile  from  upper  end  of  shoal, 
and  600  feet  from  channel.  Seven  miles  below  Detroit.  Mamajuda 
light-house,  S.  I  W.,  2^  miles. 

Grassy  Island. — Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  elbow  of  the  Grassy  Island  shoal.  It  stands  abreast  the  light-house, 
in  sandy  bottom.  The  light-house  range  mav  be  entered  600  yards 
above  this  buoy,  and  leads  past  the  upper  Fighting  Island  buoy,  a  little 
to  the  westward  of  mid-channel.  The  range  between  this  buoy  and  Mud 
Island  Shoal  buoy  just  clears  the  head  of  Grassy  Island  shoal.  Grassy 
Island  light-house  (upper  side  of  new  structure),  W.  ^  S.  500  feet. 

Fightings  Island. — Red  spar  buoy  in  iHfeet  of  water.  Marks 
the  elbow  of  the  flats  at  the  upper  end  of  Fighting  island.  It  stands  in 
soft  bottom,  with  deep  water  close-to.  This  buoy,  in  range  with  Grassy 
Island  light-house,  just  clears  the  flat  between  the  buoy  and  the  head  of 
Fighting  island.  Grassy  Island  light-house  (new  structure),  S.  by  W.  ^ 
W.,  1,600  yards. 

Mud  Island  Shoal. — Black  spar  buoy  in  10  feet  of  water. 
Stands  in  sandy  bottom  at  the  southeast  point  of  Mud  Island  shoal,  and 
marks  the  west  side  of  main  channel,  and  north  side  of  eastern  entrance 


OKTBOIT   BIYKB. 


91 


to  a  channel  between  Mud  Island  and  Grassy  Island  shoals.  Grassy 
Island  light-house,  S.  |^  E.  1  mile. 

Sandwich  Point. — A  red  barrel  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  position  of  the  piles  driven  in  the  river  to  protect  the  feeding 
pipe  at  the  Government  Fish  Hatchery  at  Sandwich.  The  buoy  is  about 
125  feet  from  shore,  opposite  the  hatchery.  The  piles  are  in  11  feet  of 
water,  and  inside  the  channel  bank. 

The  Detroit  Biver,  between  Fighting  island  and  Belle  Isle,  is 
free  from  obstructions.  Belle  Isle  divides  the  river  into  two  channels. 
The  main  channel  is  on  the  Canadian  side.  A  shoal  extends  from  the 
lower  end  of  Belle  Isle  about  seven-eighths  of  a  mile,  and  is  marked  with 
a  spar  buoy.  The  main  channel  is  free  from  obstructions  until  the  east 
end  of  Belle  Isle  is  reached,  which  can  be  passed  close-to,  then  starboard 
and  get  on  the  line  of  the  Windmill  Point  range  lights,  heading  about 
N.  E.  for  If  miles,  or  to  within  about  one-third  mile  of  the  shore.  This 
course  leads  between  the  shoals  extending  from  the  head  of  Belle  Isle 
an<'/  the  foot  of  Isle  aux  Pdches,  the  ends  of  which  are  marked  by  spar 
buoys.  Then  haul  up  the  river,  keeping  the  north  shore  best  on  board, 
and  when  abreast  of  Windmill  Point  light  and  about  one-third  the  dis- 
tance across  the  river,  steer  E.  N.  E.,  heading  between  Grosse  Pointe 
beacon  and  the  black  spar  buoy  2f  miles,  passing  about  500  feet  to  the 
northward  of  the  beacon,  steer  about  N.  E.  f  E.  If  miles,  passing  mid- 
way between  the  light-ship  and  black  spar  buoy;  when  haul  up  N.  E. 
for  the  entrance  to  the  St.  Clair  Flats  canal  13^  miles. 

In  the  American  Channel,  between  Belle  Isle  and  the  main- 
land an  iron  bridge  spans  the  river  from  the  Boulevard  to  a  point  on  the 
island  about  1,000  feet  from  its  southwest  point,  the  draw  is  near  the 
main  shore.  Tbo  signal  to  open  the  draw  is  three  blasts  of  the  whistle. 
The  passage  ways  are  125  feet  wide  on  each  side  of  the  pivot  pier. 
Above  the  bridge  there  is  a  shoal — Scott's  Middle  Ground — extending 
in  a  northeast  and  southwest  direction  If  miles,  which  is  marked  on  its 
northern  and  western  sides  by  three  led  spar  buoys,  and  vessels  should 
not  attempt  to  pass  between  the  shoal  and  Belle  Isle.  In  using  the  Am- 
erican channel,  leave  ihe  buoy  on  the  southwest  end  of  Belle  Isle  on  the 
starboard  hand;  keeping  nearer  to  the  north  shore,  pass  through  the  draw 
of  the  bridge,  and  to  the  northward  of  the  buoys  on  Scott's  Middle 
ground,  and  when  the  middle  buoy,  which  is  opposite  the  Hamtramck 
Bouse,  and  near  the  middle  of  the  shoal,  is  reached,  steer  for  Windmill 
Point  light,  with  a  large  elm  tree  directly  over  the  stern  until  up  to  the 
north  point  of  Belle  Isle,  when  steer  E.  ^  S.,  with  the  north  point  of  Isle 
aux  P6ches  open  on  the  starboard  bow,  until  the  range  of  Windmill 
Poiut  and  Belle  Isle  lights  are  reached. 

Belle  Isle. — Rod  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in  13  feet 
of  water.  Marks  the  L»nd  of  the  shoal  off  the  foot  of  Belle  Isle.  There 
are  3  fathoms  of  water  close  to  the  buoy.  Walker's  mill  (Canada),  S.  S. 
E.  800  yards. 

BELLE  ISLE  LIGHT-STA'J  ION.— A  iixed  red  light,  4th 
order,  visible  12f  miles.  Red,  square  tower,  36|  feet  high,  with  dwell- 
ing attached,  both  of  red  brick.  On  the  southeast  point,  head  of  Belle 
Lsle,  Detroit  river.  Marks  the  head  of  Belle  Isle,  and  the  channel  be- 
tween it  and  the  foot  of  Isle  aux  P6che8.  Windmill  Point  light,  N.  E. 
i  E.  2  miles. 


92 


LAKE    ST.  OLAIB. 


ISelle  Itle. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  extreme  easterly  point  of  the  shoal  off  the  head  of  Belle  Isle,  and  the 
dividing  point  of  the  channels  on  each  side  of  the  Island.  Windmill  point  light,  N. 
E.  by  E.  li  miles. 

Isle  aux  Peclies. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  11  feet  of  water,  marks  the  extreme 
point  of  the  shoal  off  the  west  end  of  Isle  aux  Peches.  The  flye-fathom  channel  be- 
tween the  islands  is  about  350  yards  wide.    Windmill  Point  light,  N.  £.  l-fr  miles. 

WIND1IIIL.L.  POINT  RANOE  LIGHTS.— Two  fixed  red  lights.  The 
front  light  is  a  lens  lantern,  and  the  rear  light  a  6th  order  lens;  they  are  487  feet 
apart,  on  a  line  nearly  S.  W.  The  structures  are  square,  pyramidal,  wooden  skele- 
tons, upper  part  enclosed,  lanterns  black.  The  front  tower  is  red,  and  the  rear  tower 
is  white.  The  front  tower  is  34  feet  and  the  rear  tower  49  feet  above  the  lake  level. 
The  lights  are  a  guide  between  Belle  Isle  and  Isle  aux  Peches.  The  range  passes 
about  600  feet  southeasterly  of  Belle  Isle  light. 

WUVnUIILL.  POINT  L.IGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  varied 
every  fifteen  seconds  by  a  red  flash,  4th  order,  visible  14  miles.  White,  brick  tower, 
51  feet  high,  connected  by  covered  way  with  red  brick  dwelling.  On  the  north  side 
of  the  Detroit  river  entrance  to  Lake  St.  Clair. 

OroHse  Pointe  Beacon. — Two  lights  shown  vertically,  red  over  white, 
from  lens  lanterns,  suspended  from  a  mast  about  34  feet  above  lake  level.  Pile 
cluster  13  feet  in  diameter,  11  feet  high,  surmounted  by  a  white  wooden  house  8  feet 
square  and  10  feet  high,  above  which  rises  a  mast,  and  day-mark  8  feet  square,  both 
painted  white.  On  the  S.  E.  side  of  the  head  of  the  Detroit  river,  in  15  feet  of  water, 
and  in  the  position  formerly  occupied  by  the  lower  light-ship  and  since  by  a  red  spar 
buoy.  Vessels  should  pass  to  the  northward,  and  between  it  and  the  black  spar 
buoy.  In  connection  with  the  Grosse  Pointe  light-ship  this  beacon  forms  a  range  to 
cross  the  Grosse  Pointe  flats. 

Head  of  Detroit  River.— Black  spar  buoy,  in  16i  feet  of  water,  at  the 
head  of  the  Eiver  Bed,  on  the  north  side  of  channel,  and  where  the  Grosse  Pointe 
flats  commence.  Windmill  Point  light,  W.  by  8.  f  8.,  2^  miles.  Grosse  Pointe 
church,  N.  i  W.,  Ij  miles. 


LAKE  ST.  CLAIR. 
Light-Houses  and  Buoys  on  both  Shores  of  Lake  St.  Clair. 

Grosse  Point  Light-ship. — A  fixed  white  light,  25  feet  above 
level  of  the  lake,  shown  from  a  lantern  hoisted  on  a  mast,  surmounted 
with  a  black  cage.  The  light-ship  is  red,  with  name  painted  on  each 
aide,  and  has  1  mast.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  bell  will  be 
rung  by  hand.  Windmill  Point  light,  W.  8.  W.  \  8.,  8|  milcB.  Milk 
River  point,  N.  \  W.,  6^  miles.  Passing  down  through  the  St.  Clair 
Flats  Ship  canal,  S.  W.  i  S.,  when  \  mile  pa3t  the  lower  light,  steer  S.  W.  12^ 
miles,  to  the  north  side  of  light-ship  about  S50  feet,  then  steer  well  up 
for  the  red  buoy,  leave  it  to  port  about  350  feet,  when  steer  for  the 
middle  of  Belle  Isle. 

Gross©  Point©.— Black  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
edge  of  a  16-foot  patch  700  feet  N.  W.  of  light-ship.  There  is  from  \*l 
to  18  feet  midway  between  this  buoy  and  light-ship. 

Tliam©s  River  (Canadian)  Main  Light.— Fixed  white 
light,  visible  12  miles.  White,  circular,  stone  tower,  light  34  feet  above 
lake  level.     At  mouth  of  river,  south  shore. 

Thames  Kiv©r  Range  Light.— Fixed  white  light,  visible  o 
miles.  Square,  wood  tower,  red,  16  feet  high,  460  yards  N.  W.  \  N.  from 
main  light.     These  lights  in  range  lead  over  the  bar. 


¥k 


n4 
bj 
oi 

BC 


LAKE   ST.  OLAIB. 


93 


Windmill  Point  to  Month  of  the  Thames  BlTer.— 

When  i  mile  south  of  light,  steer  E.  by  N.,  3^  miles  ;  thence  E.  f  S.,  20^ 
miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  main  light,  and  in  range  with 
the  beacon.  Heavy  draught  vessels  should  pass  on  the  north  side  of  the 
light-ship,  then  E.  f  S.,  20  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  N.  W.  ^  N.  from 
main  light,  as  above. 

Windmill  Point  to  Clinton  River. — When  f  of  a  mile  east 
of  the  light,  steer  N.  E.  ^  N.,  2  miles,  to  abreast  of  Glub-House  dock,  then 
N.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  14^  miles,  to  a  point  Ik  miles  east  of  Point  Huron,  and 
note  that  a  range  line  from  the  upper  canal  light  and  the  St.  Clair  Flats 
beacon-light  crosses  the  south  end  of  the  spit  to  the  south  and  eastward 
of  Point  Huron  in  6  feet  of  water;  thence  N.  ^  W.,  2  miles,  to  a  point  f 
of  a  mile  east  of  the  old  light-house,  when  follow  the  buoys  in,  passing 
south  of  and  close  to  a  crib,  north  of  the  dredged  channel. 

Windmill  Point  to  New  Baltimore.— When  l^  miles  east 
of  Point  Huron,  as  in  the  course  to  Clinton  river,  steer  N.  by  E.,  8  miles, 
to  the  dock  at  New  Baltimore. 

Mouth  of  the  Thames  River  to  St.  Clair  Flats  Ship 
Canal. — When  l^  miles  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  main  light,  and  in  range  of 
the  two  lights,  steer  N.  W.  i  N.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  light 
on  the  lower  end  of  west  pier,  when  haul  up  gradually  uutil  the  lights 
are  in  range. 

Mouth  of  Thames  River  to  Mouth  of  Clinton  River.— 
When  Ij  miles  N.  W.  ^  N.,  from  the  main  light,  and  in  range  of  the  two 
lights,  steer  N.  W.,  21  miles,  heading  on  Point  Huron,  to  within  1^  miles 
of  it,  when  steer  N..  3^  miles,  to  a  point  f  miles  east  of  the  old  light- 
house; when  see  course  from  Windmill  point  to  Clinton  river. 


a^e  5V.  Clair, 


St.  Clair  Flats,  Old  Cut. 

To  Enter  the  St.  Clair  River  through  the  old  cut.— From 

the  light-ship,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  12|-  miles,  or  until  in  range  of  the  lights, 
and  If  miles  from  the  beacon,  when  haul  up  on  the  range,  bearing  N.  E. 
by  E.,  which  course  will  lead  through  the  center  of  the  channel,  the  north- 
west side  of  entrance  to  which  is  marked  by  black  buoy  No.  1.  Keep  the 
light  and  beacon  in  range,  following  tl.a  buoys  until  near  the  beacon, 
when  haul  gradually  to  E.  8.  E.,  bringing  the  stern  of  the  vessel  on  the 
beacon,  and  steering  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  upper  canal-light,  or 
keeping  the  light  a  little  open  on  the  port  bow.  When  midway  between 
the  two  black  buoys,  Nos.  3  and  5,  haul  gradually  to  the  northward  for 
the  middle  of  south  channel  of  St.  Clair  river.  The  old  cut  and  channel 
through  the  St.  Clair  flats,  from  Lake  St.  Clair  to  abreast  the  upper  light 
of  the  ship-canal,  is  about  2^  miles  in  length,  and  from  50  to  60  yards 
wide  in  its  narrowest  part  ;  it  is  now  used  only  by  small  craft  under  sail 
and  tugs  towing  rafts. 

St.  Clair  Flats  Beacon-light.— A  fixed  white  light,  6th 
order,  visible  1 1  miles.  Yellow  brick  tower,  23  feet  high.  On  a  crib, 
1,000  feet  S.  W.  by  W.  from  main  light.  This  beacon,  with  the  main 
light,  forms  the  range  for  the  old  out.  St.  Clair  Flats  Canal  lower  liaht. 
8.  by  E.  i  E.,  If  miles.  **    ' 

ST.  CLAIR  FLATS  LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  visible  13  miles.     Yellow  brick  tower,  37  feet  high,  con- 


.94 


ST.    OLAIB   BITEB. 


i 


nected  with  dwelling  by  a  covered  way.  On  a  pier  foundation.  At  the 
head  of  the  old  cut  thi'ough  the  St.  Clair  flats.  Guide  to  and  through 
this  cut.     St.  Glair  Flats  Canal  upper  light,  E.  S.  E.  i  E.,  1^  miles. 


.5V.   C/az'r  Flats  Ship  CanaL 

To  Enter  the  St.  Clair  River  through  the  ship  canal,  steer 
N.  E.  13^  miles,  from  the  Grosse  Pointe  light  ship,  which  course  will 
lead  to  the  lower  entrance  of  the  canal,  and  after  passing  through  the 
oanal,  take  the  mid-channel.  Steamers  in  passing  through  the  canal  will 
slow  down  to  a  speed  of  four  miles  per  hour. 

The  Canal  through  the  St.  Clair  flats  is  7,300  feet  in  length,  and 
300  feet  in  width.  On  either  side  of  the  canal  is  a  dike,  which  consists 
of  timber  cribs  resting  upon  piles,  and  filled  with  material  dredged  from 
the  canal.  Willow  trees  have  been  set  out,  and  the  banks  are  covered 
with  grass.  A  double  row  of  sheet  piles  has  been  driven  and  the  chan- 
nel dredged  the  entire  width  to  a  depth  of  18  feet;  the  entrance  to  the 
oanal  at  each  end  has  been  deepened.  Direction  of  the  canal,  N.  E. 
iN. 

ST.  CLAIB  FLATS  CANAL  LOWER  LIGHT-STA- 
TION. — A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  visible  13  miles.  Red  brick  tower, 
40  feet  high,  rising  from  corner  of  dwelling.  Marks  the  lower  end  of 
the  west  pier  of  the  ship-canal  through  the  St.  Clciir  flats. 

ST.  CLAIR  FLATS  CANAL  UPPER  LIGHT-STA- 
TION.— A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  visible  13  miles.  Red  brick  tower, 
40  feet  high,  rising  from  corner  of  dwelling.  Marks  the  upper  end  of 
the  west  pier  of  the  ship-canal  through  the  St.  Clair  flats. 


*"'(« 


/ 


ST.  CLAIR  RIVER. 


Light-Houses  and  Buoys  Standing  up  the  St.  Clair  River. 


■  .m 


The  St.  Clair  River  from  the  upper  end  of  the  ship  canal  to 
Fort  Gratiot  light-house,  is  39^  miles  in  length.  After  leaving  the  canal 
follow  the  mid-channel  until  abreast  of  the  Star  Island  House,  when  take 
up  the  range  of  Lights  Nos.  1  and  2,  which  guide  through  the  lower 
reach,  and  leads  up  to  the  foot  of  the  Southeast  bend;  when  get  on  the 
back  range  of  Lights  Nos.  2  and  3,  which  leads  up  through  the  South 
east  bend,  when  haul  to  the  eastward  passing  Lights  Nos.  4,  6,  and  6, 
which  mark  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  and  when  up  to  the  Canadian 
Club  House,  take  up  the  range  of  Lights  Nos.  &  and  9,  which  leads  up 
to  the  foot  of  Herson's  island,  and  past  the  flat  ofP  the  west  side  of 
Squirrel  island;  then  get  on  the  back  range  of  Lights  Nos.  7  and  8,  which 
leads  up  to  Laoroix's  dock  (Fish's);  then  take  up  the   range  of  Lights 


^^v 


:*\ii,-  -  's^i,;, 


ST.  GLAIR   RIVER. 


0& 


undation.  At  the 
e  to  and  through 
E.,  1^  miles. 


18  ship  canal,  steer 
which  course  will 
.ssing  through  the 
ugh  the  canal  will 

set  in  length,  and 
ke,  which  consisto 
irial  dredged  from 
banks  are  covered 
ven  and  the  chan- 
le  entrance  to  the 
the  canal,  N.  £. 


LIGHT-STA- 

Red  brick  tower, 
the  lower  end  of 

ats. 

LTGHT-STA- 

Red  brick  tower, 
the  upper  end  of 
Its. 


C/air  River. 

he  ship  canal  to 
leaving  the  canal 
louse,  when  take 
rough  the  lower 
when  get  on  the 
rough  the  South 
Nos.  4,  6,  and  6, 
to  the  Canadian 
which  leads  up 
he  west  side  of 
7  and  8,  which 
range  of  Lights 


Nos.  10  and  11,  which  leads  up  to  the  south-east  side  of  Russell's  island, 
the  range  of  Lights  Nos.  11  and  12  leads  clear  of  the  shoal  at  the  head  of 
the  island,  and  about  100  feet  to  the  '3astward  of  Russell  Island  buoy. 
The  last  two  Lights,  11  and  12,  are  not  for  a  range  to  run  on,  but  more  to 
indicate  a  line  that  should  be  crossed  above  the  shoal  by  vessels  bound 
down,  before  hauling  down  by  Russell's  island.  There  are  shoals  at  the 
head  and  foot  of  Woodtick  island,  marked  at  the  ends  by  buoys,  and 
there  is  a  channel-way  on  either  side  of  the  island,  but  the  one  on  the 
American  side  is  the  most  frequently  used.  After  passing  the  upper 
Woodtick  Island  buoy,  keep  in  mid-channel  until  near  St.  Clair  city,  when 
haul  to  either  shore  to  avoid  the  St.  Clair  middle  ground,  the  ends  of 
which  are  marked  by  buoys.  When  above  the  upper  buoy  follow  mid- 
channel  until  within  a  mile  of  Stag  island,  and  then  the  channel  on  either 
side  of  it  may  be  taken,  but  the  Canadian  is  generally  preferred.  Avoid 
the  shoals  extending  from  the  head  and  foot  of  the  island,  the  ends  of 
which  are  marked  by  buoys,  and  when  above  the  upper  buoy  take  the 
mid-channel  until  a  mile  below  the  Port  Huron  and  Lake  Michigan  Rail- 
road  depot,  when  haul  to  the  Canadian  shore  to  avoid  the  shoal  ground 
off  Port  Huron,  until  abreast  the  Great  Western  depot  at  Sarnia;  then 
steer  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  1  mile,  after  which  take  mid-channel  until  abreast 
of  Fort  Gratiot  light-house. 

NoTB. — The  saoal  ground  oflf  Port  Huron,  forip"']  by  the  Black  river, 
which  was  dredged  to  a  depth  of  16  feet,  is  makih^  again;  deep  draught 
vessels  should  be  careful  to  avoid  it. 


Lights  on  the  St.   Clair  River  between  the  Si.  Clair  Flat^ 
Canal  and  tf\j  upper  end  of  Russell's  Island. 

No.  1.  A  fixed  white  light  suspended,  about  12  feet  above  the  water- 
level,  from  a  cluster  of  piles  on  the  west  shore  in  the  first  bend  above 
St.  Clair  Flats  canal,  and  about  2^  miles  from  St.  Clair  Flats  Canal  Upper 
li^ht.  This  light  forms  a  range  with  No.  2  for  about  1^  miles,  in  line 
with  the  west  gable  of  Star  Island  Hotel,  to  guide  through  the  lower 
reach. 

No.  2.  A  fixed  red  light  suspended,  about  25  fe^t  above  the  water- 
level,  from  a  tripod  erected  in  the  marsh  about  900  feet  back  of  Light 
No.  1,  and  1,000  feet  back  of  Light  No.  3,  and  forms  a  ranga  with  each. 

No.  3.  A  fixed  white  light  suspended,  about  12  feet  above  the  water- 
level,  from  a  cluster  of  piles  near  the  west  bank,  and  forms,  with  Light 
No.  2,  a  range  for  about  1^  miles,  to  guide  between  the  lower  bend  and 
Southeast  bend.     The  range  terminates  near  Light  No.  4. 

No.  4.  A  fixed  red  and  white  light  suspended,  about  12  feet  above 
the  water-level,  from  a  cluster  of  piles  near  the  west  shore.  The  light 
will  show  wAtVddown  the  range  made  by  Lights  Nos.  2  and  8,  and  change 
to  red  at  about  the  point  where  the  range  should  be  left  by  vessels 
ascending  and  taken  up  by  vessels  descending  the  river. 

No.  6.  A  fixed  red  light  suspended,  about  12  feet  above  the  water- 
level,  from  a  cluster  of  piles  on  the  west  bank.  A  guide  in  running 
Southeast  bend. 

No.  6.     A  fixed  red  and  white  light.  The  light  will  show  white  up  the 
stream  and  change  to  red  at  about  the  point  where  the  Herson's  Island 


96 


ST.  CLAIR   BIVBB. 


range  (Nob.  8  and  0)  should  be  left  by  vessels  descending  and  taken  np 
by  vessels  ascending  the  river. 

No.  1.  A  fixed  red  light  shown,  about  20  feet  above  the  water-level, 
from  a  tripod  erected  in  the  marsh  near  the  lower  end  of  Herson*s  island. 
Forms  a  range  with  No.  8  for  about  1  mile  to  guide  between  that  point 
and  Fish's  dock. 

No.  8.  A  fixed  white  light  suspended,  about  12  feet  above  the  water- 
level,  from  a  qluster  of  piles  near  the  shore  in  the  water  below  Herson's 
island.  This  light  forms  a  range  with  Nos.  7  and  9,  being  about  1,050 
feet  distant  from  the  former,  and  1,200  feet  from  the  latter. 

No.  9.  A  fixed  red  light  shown,  about  26  feet  above  water-level, 
from  a  tripod  standing  at  the  edge  of  the  timber  near  the  lower  end  of 
Herson's  island.  Forms  a  range  with  No.  8  for  about  1^  miles  between 
Herson's  island  and  Southeast  bend.  The  range  terminates  above  No.  6, 
in  the  vicinity  of  the  end  of  the  Canadian  Club  wharf  on  the  east  shore. 

No.  10.,  A  fixed  white  light  suspended,  about  12  feet  above  the  water- 
level,  from  a  tripod  in  the  marsh  near  the  lower  end  of  RusselPs  island. 
Forms  a  range  with  No.  11  for  about  2^  miles  between  Russell's  island 
and  Fish's  dock. 

No.  11.  A  fixed  white  and  red  light  shown,  about  25  feet  above  the 
water-level,  from  a  mast  supported  by  a  cluster  of  piles  in  the  water 
abreast  the  point  of  woods  on  Russell's  island.  Forming  ranges  with 
Nos.  10  and  12,  distant  about  1,800  feet  from  the  former  and  1,500  feet 
from  the  latter.  The  light  will  show  white  down  stream  toward  Fish's 
dock,  and  red  up  stream  toward  Baby's  Point  on  the  Canadian  shore. 

No.  12.  A  fixed  red  light  shown,  about  12  feet  above  water  level, 
from  a  tripod  on  the  shore  near  the  upper  end  of  Rfissell's  island.  Forms 
a  range  with  No.  11  for  about  1^  miles,  to  guide  clear  of  the  shoals  at 
the  upper  end  of  the  island.  The  range  passes  about  100  feet  to  the 
eastward  of  the  black  and  red  buoy,  and  to  keep  well  clear  of  the  shoal 
vessels  should  cross  the  range  above  the  buoy. 

Buoys  on  the  St,  Clair  River  above  the  CanaL 

Squirrel  Island. — Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks 
edge  of  the  flat  off  the  west  side  of  Squirrel  island,  in  the  south  channel 
of  the  St.  Clair  river,  and  is  6  miles  above  the  St.  Clair  Flats  Canal 
upper  light.     Head  of  Bassett'a  channel,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  1  mile. 

Squirrel  Shoal.—- Red  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  On  the 
western  edge  of  the  northern  end  of  a  shoal  near  mid  channel,  abreast  of 
the  centre  of  Squirrel  island,  on  which  as  little  as  13  feet  has  been  found. 
Fisher's  dock,  N.  E.  f  N.,  1,30Q  yards. 

Russell  Island. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in 
16  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  dividing  point  of  the  north  and  south 
channels  of  the  St.  Clair  river,  and  is  on  the  northeast  point  of  the  shoal 
at  the  head  of  Russell  island. 

Woodtlck  Island. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy 
in  11  feet  of  water,  Marks  the  extreme  point  of  the  shoal  extending  to 
the  southward  of  Woodtiek  island.  There  is  a  channel-way  on  eithei 
side  of  the  island;  the  American,  being  the  straightest  and  widest,  is  thf 
one  most  frequently  used. 


^.i 


A 


:! 
'J- 


MM 


Dding  and  taken  up 


LAKE    HURON. 


97 


*3,i- 


Woodtick  Island.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in  16  feet 
of  water.  On  the  shoal  extending  to  the  northward  of  Woodtick  island.  The  shoal 
extends  further  to  the  northward,  but  with  16  and  18  feet  of  water  on  it. 

St.  Clair  Middle  Grtniund.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in 
17  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  south  end  of  the  middle  ground  off  St.  Clair  citjr.  The 
shoal  is  about  2,000  yards  in  length,  extending  in  a  N.  N.  E.  and  8.  8.  W.  direction, 
and  is  230  yards  wide.  It  divides  the  river  into  two  channels,  the  Canadian  being 
the  widest  and  most  frequently  used.  The  lowest  depth  of  water  ou  the  shoal  la  8 
feet. 

!lt.  Clair  Middle  Ground. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in 
16  feet  of  water.  On  the  north  end  of  the  middle  ground.  Shoal  water  extends 
some  distance  to  the  northward  of  it,  but  not  less  than  17  feet  of  water  will  be  found. 

Stag  Island. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in  11  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  end  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  southward  of  Stag  island,  on  either  side 
of  which  there  is  a  channel  way.  the  Canadian  being  the  one  most  freouently  used. 

Stag  Island.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  spar  buoy  in  16  leet  of  water. 
On  the  shoal  extending  to  the  northward  of  Stag  island.  The  shoal  extends  a  short 
distance  to  the  northward  of  the  buoy,  but  with  not  less  than  17  feet  of  water  on  it. 

Corunna  Range  Lights  (Canadian).— Two  fixed  white  lights,  shown 
from  white,  square,  wooden,  skeleton  towers,  40  feet  high.  The  sides  facing  the 
range  are  slatted  to  make  day-marks. 

Front  Light  is  near  the  old  wharf  at  the  foot  of  Fane  street  in  the  village  of 
Corunna.    The  focal  plane  is  50  feet  above  the  water  level. 

Rear  Light  668  feet  S.  13°  E.  from  the  front  one,  elevated  68  feet  above  the 
water. 

The  two  lights  in  range  indicate  the  best  water  in  the  Canadian  channel,  and  lead 
between  the  shoals  off  the  head  of  Stag  island  on  the  west,  and  the  shoal  off  the 
mouth  of  Talford's  creek  on  the  east  side. 

Fort  Gratiot  Range  Lights.— Two  fixed  red  lights,  shown  from  masts, 
surmounted  by  small  triangles  for  day -marks,  in  the  rear  of  the  lower  freight  shed  of 
the  Grand  Trunk  R.  R.  on  the  American  side.  The  range  guides  into  the  river  on  a 
bearing  of  8.  8.  W.  i  W.  nearly.  These  lights  are  now  maintained  by  the  U.  8. 
Light  House  Est. 


LAKE  HURON. 


Light  Houses,  Buoys,  and  Harbors  on  the  American  Shor€^ 

FORT  GRATIOT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light 
varied  by  a  white  flash  at  intervals  of  two  minutes,  3d  order,  visible, 16 
miles.  White  tower,  76  feet  high,  red  briok  dwelling  detached.  On  the 
west  side  of  the  St.  Clair  river  at  the  southern  extreme  of  Lake  Huron, 
and  marks  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  from  tlie  lake  into  the  river. 
During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  there  is  sounded  a  steam  whistle,  giving 
every  minute  a  blast  of  8  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  an  interval  of 
52  seconds.    The  fog-signal  in  duplicate. 


Buoys  on  the  Flat  above  Fort  Gratiot. 

Gorsloa  Shoal.— Red  and  black  horizontal  striped  spar  bnoy  in 
16  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  of  hard  gravel  1^  miles  N.  E.  by 
N.  from  Fort  Gratiot  light,  and  in  line  with  west  side  of  the  dock  at 
Point  Edwards  and  the  middle  of  Botsford's  large  elevator.     Northwest 


98 


LAKX    HUB02T. 


Shoal  buoy  bears  N.  by  W.  700  yards.    Harlem  Shoal  buoy  E.  by  N.  i 
If.  435  yards. 

Harlem  Shoal* — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes  spar  buoy  in 
18  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  N.  E.  i  N.  2,451  yards  from  Fort 
Gratiot  light.  Northwest  Shoal  buoy,  N.  W.  ^  N.  800  yards.  Corsica 
Shoal  buoy,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  435  yards.  The  east  side  of  the  passenger 
depot  at  Point  Edwards,  and  east  side  of  the  most  easterly  elevator  in 
line. 

Northwest  Shoal. — Bed  and  black  horizontal  stripes  spar  buoy 
in  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  shoal  spot  of  gravel  of  about  100  feet 
diameter  inside  the  18-foot  curve,  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.  2,700  yards  from  Fort 
Gratiot  light.  Corsica  Shoal  buoy  S,  by  E.  700  yards.  Harlem  Shoal 
buoy  800  yards  S.  E.  ^  S.  The  chimney  of  the  G.  T.  Repair  shop  is 
open  to  the  east  of  lighthouse  about  1  diameter  of  the  lantern. 


Range  Lights  to  Guide  into  St.  Clair  River. 

Point  Edwards  Range. — Two  fixed  lights,  lens  lanterns,  white 
over  red,  shown  from  high,  open  frame-work  towers,  which  are  conspic- 
uous day  marks.  On  F'oint  Edwards,  about  \  mile  east  of  the  entranen 
to  St.  Ciair  river.  The  range  leads  450  feet  to  the  westward  of  the 
Northwest  shoal,  which  is  the  most  westerly  of  the  shoal  spots.  Heavy 
draught  vessels  entering  the  river  should  run  for  Fort  Gratiot  light, 
bearing  about  S.  S.  W.,  and  when  within  about  2^  miles  and  in  4  fathoms 
of  water,  haul  in  for  the  upper  end  of  Huronia  Beach  until  the  range  on 
Point  Edwards  is  taken  up,  then  haul  down  on  the  range  about  S.  f  E. 
until  the  Fort  Gratiot  range  is  taken,  when  steer  for  the  entrance  on  the 
range  about  S.  S.  W.  \  W.  The  Point  Edwards  range  lights  are  main- 
tained by  American  vessel  owners. 

To  enter  St.  Clair  Biver  from  Lake  Huron,   inde- 

gendent  of  the  Ranges. — Bring  the  light  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow 
eading  S.  W.  by  S.  \  S.  and  run  in  on  that  course,  keeping  a  lookout 
for  the  spit  extending  133  yards  east  of  the  light-house  and  the  spit  off 
Point  Edwards,  on  the  opposite  side.  The  lights  at  the  Grand  Trunk 
R.  R.  wharves  mark  the  channel  on  each  side.  When  past  the  rapids 
keep  the  American  side  on  board,  until  near  the  docks  at  Port  Huron, 
when  heavy  draught  vessels  should  oross  over  towards  the  Canadian 
shore  to  avoid  the  middle  ground  off  the  mouth  of  Black  River.  In 
coming  to  anchor  small  sailing  vessels  should  come  to  well  over  in  Sarnia 
bay  in  order  to  leave  the  channel  clear  for  long  tows;  large  sail  vessels 
should  run  down  about  \  mile  below  the  Sarnia  elevator  and  haul  over 
to  the  American  side,  and  come  to  off  the  Port  Huron  and  Michigan  R. 
R.  dock,  below  the  middle  ground. 

PORT  SANILAC  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light, 
4th  order,  visible  16^  miles.  Octagonal  brick  tower,  whitewashed,  62 
feet  high,  connecting  to  brick  dwelling.     A  coast-light.     In  the  village 


^** 


t 


■Hi 


LAKE    HURON. 


99 


buoy  E.  by  N.  i 


of  Port  Sanilac,  30^  miles  N.  i  W.  from  Fort  Gratiot  ligbt.  Above  Port 
Sanilac  the  coast  is  rocky,  and  should  not  be  approached  within  half  a 
mile. 

The  Coast  south  of  Sand  Beach,  as  far  as  Blue  Ledge,  is  rock, 
with  rocky  spits,  and  shoal  spots  extending  from  ^  to  f  of  a  mile  from 
shore. 

Sand  Beach  Harbor  of  Refuge.— This  harbor  is  an  artificial 
one,  formed  by  breakwaters,  situated  on  the  west  shore  of  Lake  Huron, 
59  miles  to  the  northward  of  Fort  Gratiot  light-house.  The  breakwater 
commences  near  the  shore,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  above  the  dock  at 
Sand  Beach,  and  extends  out  in  an  E.  by  S.  }  S.  direction,  700  yards,  to 
deep  water;  then  in  a  S.  E.  ^  S.  direction,  three-quarters  of  a  mile;  then 
south  100  yards  to  the  northern  side  of  eastern  entrance,  which  is  200 
yards  wide. 

In  the  breakwater  extending  out  from  the  shore  there  is  an  opening 
100  yards  wide,  at  a  distance  of  100  yards  from  the  angle,  to  allow  ves- 
■els  to  enter  the  harbor  from  the  northward. 

The  southern  breakwater  extends  in  a  north  and  south  direction,  from 
the  southern  side  of  the  eastern  entrance,  for  a  distance  of  1,900  feet. 
The  two  principal  lights  are  shown  from  the  north  side  of  the  eastern 
entrance  and  the  east  side  of  the  northern  entrance,  respectively;  and,  in 
addition  to  these,  red  lights  are  shown  from  iron  tripods  on  the  south 
side  of  the  eastern  entrance  and  west  side  of  northern  entrance. 

The  main  light  at  the  eastern  entrance  is  shown  from  a  circular  iron 
tower,  painted  brown;  the  lantern  painted  black.  The  main  light  at  the 
northern  entrance  is  shown  from  an  open  frame-work  tower,  painted 
white.  To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  southward  and  eastward,  bring  the 
main  light  (flashing  red  and  white  alternately  every  5  seconds)  to  bear 
anywhere  to  the  westward  of  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.  When  bearing  N.  W.  ^ 
N.,  it  should  range  with  the  fixed  white  light  at  the  north  entrance.  On 
reaching  the  entrance,  pass  close  to  the  main  light,  leaving  it  on  the  star- 
board hand,  and  haul  at  once  to  the  northward,  to  make  fast  to  the  snub- 
bing-posts  on  the  breakwater. 

To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  northward,  bring  the  main  light  at  that 
entra.ice  (fixed  white)  to  bear  nothing  to  the  southward  of  S.  W.  ^  S., 
and  head  for  the  light  On  reaching  the  entrance,  leave  the  main  light 
close  aboard  on  the  port  hand,  and  haul  at  once  to  the  eastward,  to  make 
fast  to  the  snubbing-posts  on  the  breakwater.  Vessels  desiring  to 
anchor  will  find  good  anchorage  in  from  4  to  4^  fathoms  of  water  inside 
of  and  close  to  the  breakwater. 

The  best  anchorage  is  north  of  the  outer  end  of  Jenk's  dock,  outsido 
the  range  of  the  buoys.  Small  vessels  will  find  good  anchorage  about  S. 
S.  E.  from  6  to  8  hundred  feet  from  outer  end  of  the  dock  in  17  feet  of 
water. 

Jenk's  Dock  is  nearly  opposite  the  eastern  entrance,  and  bears 
from  it  W.  by  N.,  about  1,000  yards.  A  light  on  the  dock  shows  red 
from  the  east,  and  white  from  the  north  and  south;  there  are  16  feet  of 
water  for  one  boat's  length  at  the  outer  end.  Goal  is  kept  on  the  dock 
for  sale.  The  obstructions  off  the  end  of  the  dock,  as  appears  on  the 
chart  of  the  Lake  Survey,  have  all  been  removed.  Life  Saving  station  at 
the  inner  end  of  dock. 

Buoys  in  Position.— Black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water,  aoath 


100 


•I 

f 


LAKE    HUBON. 


side  of  eastern  entrance,  bears  S.  W.  |  W.,  about  600  yards  from  main 
light. 

Another  Black  Spar  Bvioy.—In  12  feet  of  water,  8.  by  E.  f 
£.,  about  750  yards  from  the  end  of  Jenk's  dock. 

Three  Spar  Buoys. — In  14  feet  of  water,  placed  at  about  equal 
distances,  and  nearly  in  line  with  the  outer  end  of  Jenk's  dock  and  the 
west  side  of  northern  entrance. 

Two  Spar  Buoys. — In  14  feet  of  water,  outside  the  northern 
entrance,  to  be  left  on  the  starboard  side  on  entering. 

Sailings  Vessels  making  the  harbor  for  refuge,  from  the  north- 
ward, when  there  is  not  too  much  sea,  will  find  it  most  convenient  to 
enter  at  the  north  entrance,  particularly  when  the  wind  is  northwest; 
light  vessels  would  be  safe  to  enter  on  a  bearing  of  S.  W.  by  S. 


s^^ 


VL^bxzzjna 


unooaL 


^^- 


-^a 


Sail  vessels  making  the  harbor  by  the  eastern  entrance,  with  north- 
erly winds,  should  carry  a  good  press  of  canvas,  keeping  well  to  wind- 
ward, and  directly  they  pass  the  main  light,  haul  up  by  the  wind  and 
stand  over  for  the  anchorage  to  the  northward  of  Jenk's  dock,  and  if 
necessary  beat  up  to  it  Vessels  frequentlv  enter  at  the  eastern  entrance 
without  sufficient  canvas,  and  the  sheets  off,  when  they  fall  off  to  the  lee- 
ward and  are  compelled  to  let  go  their  anchors  on  the  rocky  bottom  in 
shoal  water;  in  such  cases  they  have  to  employ  a  tug,  at  considerable 
expense,  to  tow  them  to  the  anchorage. 

A  custodian,  or  harbor-master,  has  been  appointed  by  the  govern- 
ment. All  vessels  are  required  to  take  such  berths  as  he  may  direct. 
The  general  rule  is  given  that  "  all  steam  craft  will,  when  practicable, 
make  fast  to  the  snubbing-posts  in  the  breakwater.  Sailing  craft  will  so 
locate  themselves  that  they  will  not  lie  in  the  way  of  other  vessels  enter- 
ing  the  harbor,  or  in  any  way  interfere  with  the  work  of  construction  or 
repairs  that  may  be  in  progress  at  the  time." 


LAKE    HURON. 


101 


SAND  BEACH  LIGHT-STATION.— Main  light  flashing 
red  and  white,  alternating  at  intervals  of  6  seconds,  and  will  illuminate 
the  entire  horizon,  visible  ISf  miles.  The  focal  plane  is  44|  feet  above 
the  base  of  the  tower,  and  54^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  Brown, 
iron,  circular  tower;  lantern  black;  standing  on  a  rectangular  crib  on  the 
north  side  of  the  main  entrance.  There  is  also  on  the  crib  a  fog-signal 
house  of  corrugated  iron,  painted  the  same  color  as  the  tower.  Durirg 
thick  and  foggy  weather  there  will  be  sounded  at  this  station  a  10-inch 
steam  fog-whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  6  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  an 
interval  of  25  seconds. 

The  South  Side  of  the  Main  Entrance  is  marked  by  a  red 
light,  illuminating  *he  entire  horizon,  exhibited  from  a  lantern  at  the  top 
of  an  iron  skeleton  tripod,  21^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  Point 
Clark  light-house  (Canadian),  E.  N.  E.  i  E.,  47^  miles.  Goderich  light- 
house (Canadian),  E.  f  S.,  47^  miles.  Fort  Gratiot  light-house,  S.  i  E., 
69  miles. 

Northern  Entrance. — The  east  side  of  the  northern  entrance  is 
marked  by  a  fixed  white  light  of  the  6th  order,  illuminating  the  entire 
horizon,  exhibited  from  an  open  frame- work  tower  painted  white;  focal 
plane  42  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake;  visible  12f  miles. 

The  West  Side  of  the  Northern  Entrance  is  marked  by 
a  red  light,  illuminating  the  entire  horizon,  exhibited  from  a  lantern  at 
the  top  of  an  iron  skeleton  tripod,  27^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake. 

Pointe  aux  Barques  Reef. — Black,  ist-class  bell  buoy  in  6^ 
fathoms  of  water.  Marks  the  reef  extending  off  the  shore  to  the  east- 
ward of  Pointe  aux  Barques  light.  Vessels  should  not  pass  inside  of  the 
buoy.  There  is  a  12-foot  patch  about  1  mile  S.  by  E.  f  E.  Pointe  aux 
Barques  light  W.  i  N.  2.4  miles.  Stafford's  elevator  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  6^ 
miles. 

POINTE  AUX  BARQUES  lilGHT-STATION.— A  flash- 
ing  white  light,  3d  order,  visible  16^  miles;  the  interval  between  flashes 
is  10  seconds.  White,  circular  tower,  79  feet  high,  light  89  feet  above 
lake  level.  On  the  Michigan  shore  of  Lake  Huron,  75  miles  to  the  north- 
ward of  Fort  Gratiot  light,  and  marks  the  turning-point  into  Saginaw 
bay.  Between  Sand  Beach  and  Pointe  aux  Barques  lights,  shoal  water 
extends  out  from  the  land  from  1  to  2  miles,  and  vessels  should  be  care- 
ful in  approaching  the  land  in  this  locality.  The  soundings  oflf  the  point 
are  even  and  gradual,  and  the  frequent  use  of  the  lead  in  thick  or  foggy 
weather  is  of  great  importance.  Life  Saving  station  a  little  sorth  of 
light  house. 

PORT  AUSTIN  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light  for 
1  minute,  followed  by  5  consecutive  red  flashes,  with  an  interval  of  12 
seconds  between  flashes,  visible  16  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower, 
67  feet  high,  on  a  crib,  light  80  feet  above  sea  level.  On  reef  off  Old 
Pointe  aux  Barques,  south  side  of  entrance  to  Saginaw  bay,  about  1^ 
miles  from  the  main  land  and  500  feet  from  the  end  of  the  reef.  Vessels 
in  passing  the  light  should  leave  it  one-half  of  a  mile  to  the  southward. 
There  is  no  passage-way  between  it  and  the  main  land.  A  first-class 
steam-siren  (in  duplicate),  sounded  in  thick  and  foggy  weather,  giving 
blasts  of  7  seconds  at  intervals  of  SO  seconds.  There  are  ledges  and  de- 
tached rocky  spots  between  Pointe  aux  Barques  and  Port  Austin  lights, 


102 


LAKE   HURON. 


11 


rendering  the  coast  dangerous  within  1^  miles.  There  is  a  flat  off  Port 
Austin  wharf,  which  extends  one-half  a  mile  to  the  northwest  Shoal 
ground  off  Flat  Rook  point  extends  one-half  a  mile  out,  and  continues 
out  this  distance  along  the  coast  to  the  westward  as  far  as  Portage  river. 

To  run  into  Port  Austin,  hring  the  dock  at  the  mouth  of  Bird  creek 
to  bear  south  and  run  in  on  the  course,  keeping  a  lookout  for  a  rocky  spot 
to  the  northwest  of  the  end  of  the  dock. 

Life  Saving  Station,  1  mile  northwest  of  Grind  Stone  City. 

Wild  Fowl  Bay. — To  enter  the  bay  from  the  east.  When  1^  miles 
north  of  Port  Austin  light,  steer  W.  S.  W.  23  miles,  until  Oak  point 
bears  east,  and  Sand  point  due  south,  when  haul  up  west  4i  miles,  until 
the  light-house  on  Charity  island  is  in  range  with  the  west  end  of  Little 
Charity  island,  then  steer  due  south,  till  Sand  point  bears  east,  when 
steer  E.  S.  E.  into  the  bay.  The  channel  south  of  Charity  island  was 
buoyed  by  the  Government  a  few  years  ago,  but  as  it  was  intricate  and 
seldom  used,  there  being  less  than  10  feet  of  water,  the  buoys  were  re- 
moved. 

Charity  Island. — Black,  2d-class  can  buoy,  in  17  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  northwest  point  of  the  shoal  off  Charity  island.  Charity  Island 
light-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  2^  miles.  West  end  of  Little  Charity  is- 
land, S.  f  E.,  3f  miles.  Vessels  bound  into  Saginaw  bay,  from  the  south- 
ward of  Pointe  aux  Barques,  will  pass  at  least  one-half  of  a  mile  to  the 
northward  of  Port  Austin  light,  then  steer  W.  i  S.,  for  26  miles,  which 
will  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  buoy,  being  careful  on  approaching  it 
to  keep  it  well  open  on  the  port  bow,  to  avoid  the  shoal  ground  extend- 
ing li  miles  to  the  northward  of  Charity  island  light.  The  passage-way 
to  the  southward  of  th6  island  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers. 
After  passing  the  buoy,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  for  the  Saginaw  river,  leaving 
the  Gravelly  Point  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand. 

CHARITY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  visible  13  miles.  White,  brick  tower,  39  feet  high,  con- 
nected by  a  covered  way  with  frame  dwelling.  On  the  northwest  point 
of  Charity  island,  Saginaw  bay.  Main  channel  is  to  the  westward  of  the 
light.  Stranger^  f>hould  not  attempt  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  light. 
Tawas  light  N.,  16  /mles.  Point  aux  Gres,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  12^  miles.  There 
are  shoals  extending  If  miles  to  the  northward  and  the  same  distance  to 
the  eastward  of  the  li^ht-Iiouse.  A  flat  extends  for  1  mile  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  Big  Charity,  and  there  is  a  rocky  spot  1^  miles  southeast  of 
the  Little  Charity. 

Gravelly  Point. — Red,  Ist-olass  nun  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  extreme  point  of  the  shoal  extending  in  a  south-easterly  direq- 
tion  from  Gravelly  point,  Saginaw  bay.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to 
pass  between  the  point  and  buoy.  Gravelly  point  N.  W.  by  W.,  2^  miles. 
Charity  Island  light-house  E.  f  N.,  4|  miles.  A  good  lee  can  be  made 
under  the  point,  and  protection  from  all  northerly  gales.  Come  to  in  4 
fathoms  with  the  point  bearing  N.  E. 


Saginaw  River, 

The  Mouth  of  Saginaw  River  is  obstructed  by  a  bar,  through 
which  a  channel  has  been  dredged  to  the  13-foot  curve  of  the  bay  on  the 
range  lights,  extending  in  a  N.  ^  £.  and  S.  ^  W.  direction,  about  1^ 


mm 


LAKE    HURON. 


108 


miles.    The  depth  of  water  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  is  increased  from 

7  to  15  inches  with  north  and  northeast  winds,  and  decreased  from  2  to 

8  inches  with  south  and  southwest  winds.  At  the  ordinary  sta^e  of 
water,  14  feet,  can  be  carried  in  to  the  river.  To  enter  the  river  from 
Saginaw  bay,  bring  the  lights  in  range  when  2i  miles  from  the  front 
light,  and  steer  in  on  the  range  S.  i  W.,  passing  between  the  can  and  spar 
buoys  at  the  entrance  to  the  cut,  which  are  about  2  miles  from  the  front 
light.  Keep  on  the  range,  following  the  buoys,  until  within  f  of  a  mile 
from  the  front  light  and  buoys  Nos.  11  and  12  have  been  passed,  when 
change  course  to  S.  ^  E.  (nothing  to  the  eastward  until  abreast  beacon- 
light);  then  follow  mid-channel  until  near  Bangor,  when  haul  to  the  north 
shore  to  avoid  the  shoal  ground  on  the  south  shore,  opposite  to  Lord's 
mill,  after  which  there  is  no  obstruction  until  the  first  drawbridge  is 
reached.     The  signal  to  open  the  draw  is  four  blasts  of  the  whistle. 

The  bridges  at  Bay  City  are  lighted  at  night  according  to  the  system 
adopted  by  the  Light-house  Board,  viz.:  a  stationary  red  light  on  each 
end  of  the  draw-piers,  low  down  on  the  free  end  of  each  protection-pier, 
and  on  each  side  of  the  pivot-pier  where  it  is  crossed  by  the  axis  of  the 
bridge.  Three  square  lanterns,  each  15  feet  above  the  top  of  the  draw- 
span,  mark  its  ends  and  middle,  and  show  red  up  and  down  stream  when 
the  draw  is  closed,  but  when  the  draw  is  open  the  lanterns  show  three 
green  lights  in  line  up  and  down  stream,  with  stationary  low  red  lights, 
marking  the  width  of  the  openings. 

Entrance  Buoy. — Red,  2d  class,  nun  buoy,  in  18  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  into  the  cut.  Front  range  light  S.  ^ 
W.,  2^  miles. 

Entrance  Buoy. — Black  spar  buoy,  in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  west  side  of  the  entrance  into  the  cut. 

There  is  good  anchorage  northeast  2^  miles  from  these  buoys  in  3^ 
fathoms. 

Saginaw  River  Range  Lights. — Front  light,  fixed  red,  6th 
order,  visible  12:^  miles.  Rear  light,  fixed  red,  4th  order,  visible  14^ 
miles.  Front  tower,  open  framework,  30  feet  high,  painted  red,  on  a 
crib.  Rear  tower  on  northeast  corner  of  dwelling,  53  feet  high,  built  of 
Milwaukee  brick.  On  the  Miest  side  of  the  entrance  into  Saginaw  river, 
and  when  in  range,  guide  vessels  through  the  cut  in  the  bar  at  the  mouth 
of  the  river.     Lights  2,310  feet  apart.     N.  J  E,  and  S.  I  W. 

TAWAS,  OR  OTTAWA  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— 

A  fixed  white  light  for  25  seconds,  followed  by  an  eclipse  of  five  seconds, 
between  N.  W.  by  E'd  to  S.  W.,  4th  order,  visible  15  miles.  White  tower 
61^  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  red  dwelling,  both  brick. 
On  the  southwest  end  of  Ottawa  Point,  easterly  side  of  Tawas  bay.  A 
sand  flat  extends  nearly  a  mile  to  the  southward  and  westward  from  the 
light. 

A  Red  Sector  covers  this  flat,  between  the  bearings  of  S.  W.  hj  W'd  to  N. 
"W.,  the  light  will  show  as  fixed  red  for  25  seconds,  followed  by  an  eclipse  of  5  sec- 
onds. The  northwesterly  edge  of  the  Sand  flat  is  very  abrupt,  dropping  from  6  to  24 
feet  in  a  vessel's  length.  Port  Austin  light-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  |  E.,  26^  miles.  TJie 
Life-baving  Station  is  i  mile  N.  E.  of  the  light-house. 

Ottawa  Point. — Red,  2d  class  nun  buoy,  in  33  feet  of  water. 
Placed  oflf  the  extreme  southwest  point  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the 
southward  and  westward  of  Ottawa  point.     Tawas  (Ottawa  point)  light- 


r^ih 


t 

I 


104 


LAKE   HURON. 


m  % 


\ 


house,  N.  E.  J  E.,  1|  miles.     Mill  at  Tawas  city,  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  3 
miles. 

Ottawa  Shoal  Buoy.-  -A  red  26-foot  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
water.  Marks  the  extreme  northwest  point  of  the  shoal.  Entering  pass 
the  buoy,  and  haul  up  N.  N.  E.  for  about  ^  mile  and  come  to  with  the 
light  bearing  about  S.  S.  E.,  in  4  fathoms  water.  Tawas  light  E.  S.  E.  \ 
S.,  i  mile.     Ottawa  Point  buoy  S.  by  W.,  1  ^  miles. 

Tawas  Harbor. — To  anchor  in  Tawas  harbor,  vessels  from  the 
northward  will  bring  the  buoy  and  mill  at  Tawas  city  in  range,  bearing 
N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  then  haul  up  for  Tawas  city,  passing  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  buoy.  When  the  buoy  has  been  passed  ^  of  a  mile  haul  up 
to  the  north  for  little  more  than  a  mile  to  abreast  the  red  spar  buoy, 
light  bearing  E.  S.  E.  \  S.,  when  steer  N.  N.  E. ;  see  Ottawa  Shoal  buoy. 
Care  must  be  taken  not  to  approach  too  close  to  the  shoal  ground,  which 
extends  nearly  a  mile  to  the  northwestward  of  Ottawa  point. 

To  enter  the  Harbor  from  the  southward,  steer  north  from 
abreast  of  Charity  Island  buoy,  and  when  the  Ottawa  Point  buoy  bears 
S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  distant  1^  miles,  change  the  course  toN.  E.,  and  anchor 
in  4^  or  5  fathoms  of  water,  clay  bottom,  with  the  light  bearing  from 
S.  E.  to  S.  S.  E. 

To  enter  Taw^as  Bay  at  night  from  the  northward. — When  3 
miles  east  of  Point  Sable,  in  9  fathoms,  steer  S.  W.  f  W.,  IC  miles,  until 
Ottawa  Point  light  bears  N.  W.,  1  mile  distant,  and  in  6  to  7  fathoms  of 
water,  then  steer  W.  ^  S.,  If  miles,  or  until  the  light  bears  N.  E.,  1^ 
miles,  keeping  a  sharp  lookout  for  the  end  of  the  spit,  which  is  very 
abrupt,  dropping  off  suddenly  from  1  to  4  fathoms,  then  haul  up  N.  W. 
by  W.,  for  1^  miles,  until  the  light  bears  E.  by  N.,  when  steer  N.  E. 
into  the  bay,  and  come  to  in  3|  fathoms,  with  the  light  bearing  about 
southeast. 

Note. — Observe  that  when  the  bearing  of  N.  E  is  crossed  the  red 
sector  will  be  entered,  that  is  the  fixed  part  of  the  light  will  be  red, 
instead  of  white,  the  line  is  just  outside  the  buoy. 

NoTB. — The  light  is  not  where  it  is  indicated  on  the  chart.  It  is  near 
the  end  of  the  low  sandy  point,  about  f  of.  a  mile  S.  W.  by  S.  from  the 
old  light-house  site. 

Au  Sable  Pierhead  Beacon-light.— A  fixed  red  light,  6th 
order,  visible  11^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  27  feet  high. 
On  a  small  crib  outside  of  the  north  pier  at  the  mouth  of  the  Au  Sable 
river,  Michigan.  A  guide  into  the  river.  The  harbor  works  consist  of 
two  parallel  piers  100  feet  apart,  extending  in  an  easterly  direction;  the 
south  pier  has  a  pile  revetment  extension  700  feet  in  length.  Depth  of 
water,  at  the  present  time  9  feet,  can  be  carried  across  the  bar  and  up  to 
the  Swing  bridge.  The  channel  across  the  bar  is  120  feet  wide.  It  is 
expected  that  this  channel  will  soon  fill  up  again.  Vessels  load  at  pile 
piers.     There  is  good  anchorage  off  the  piers  in  4^  to  6  fathoms. 

NoTB. — A  Sand  spit  sits  oflF  the  shore  south  of  the  mouth  of  the  Au 
Sable  river  in  a  northeast  direction.  Heavy  draught  vessels  should  not 
cross  the  spit  until  the  light  bears  west;  on  this  bearing  the  end  of  the 
spit  is  about  1^  mile  from  the  light. 

Point  Sable,  si  miles  south  of  the  Au  Sable  river,  affords  shelter 


LAKE   HURON. 


105 


W.  by  W.  i  W.,  3 


affords  shelter 


from  north  winds.     To  make  a  lee,  haul  around  the  point,  giving  it  a 
berth  of  f  of  a  mile,  and  steer  in  west  1  mile,  come-to  in  3^  fathoms. 

Harrisville  is  3^  miles  south  of  Sturgeon  point.  It  has  a  harbor 
of  limited  capacity,  protected  by  piers. 

STURGEON  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  3^  order,  visible  16  miles.  White  tower,  65  feet  high,  connected 
with  dwelling  by  covered  way.  A  coast-light  on  the  west  shore  of  Lake 
Huron,  on  the  most  easterly  point  between  Saginaw  and  Thunder  bays. 
Thunder  Bay  Island  light-house,  N.  by  E.,  23^  miles.  Porl  Austin  light- 
house, S.  by  £.  i  E.,  46^  miles.  Life  Saving  station  close  to  the  light- 
house. 

The  Shore* — There  are  rocky  shoals  and  spits,  from  Au  Sable  river 
to  Sturgeon  point.  A  10-foot  spot,  1  mile  from  shore,  7  miles  north  of 
Au  Sable  river.  A  spit  off  Sturgeon  point  extends  1  mile  E.  N.  E. 
Rocky  spots  extending  1^  miles  east  of  Black  river.  Foul  ground 
around  Black  River  island,  extending  E.  N.  E.,  f  of  a  mile,  and  from 
thence  to  the  main  shore. 

Black  River. — Vessels  wishing  to  enter  Black  River  should  not 
approach  the  shore  nearer  than  2  miles  until  the  buildings  at  the  mouth 
of  the  river  bear  W.  S.  W.,  then  steer  for  the  most  southerly  wharf. 
The  bottom  is  rocky  and  uneven,  shoaling  to  12  feet  of  water  at  about 
600  yards  from  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

Note. — The  buoys  off  Black  River  have  been  removed. 

Thunder  Bay. — Foul  ground  around  South  point  and  islands. 
The  shore  is  shoal  from  thence  to  Devil  river;  6-foot  spot  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  northward  of  Sulphur  island;  11-foot  shoal  1^  miles  northeast 
of  Partridge  point.  Flat  in  bay  west  of  Whitefish  point;  12  foot  spot 
1  mile  southeast  of  North  point,  marked  by  a  red  can  buoy.  Foul 
ground  and  rocky  lumps  between  Sugar  island  and  the  main  land.  Spits 
extending  southeast  of  Sugar  island.  The  shores  of  Thunder  bay  are 
generally  good  holding  ground.  Excellent  anchorage  is  found  along  the 
north  shore,  and  protection  from  all  winds,  except  southeasters.  Protec- 
tion from  south  and  south-southeast  winds  can  be  found  between  Devil 
river  and  Scarecrow  island. 

THUNDER  BAY  RIVER  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
red  light,  4th  order,  visible  13^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower, 
44^  feet  high.  On  a  crib,  57  feet  east  of  and  in  a  line  with  Gilchrist's 
wharf,  on  the  northern  side  of  the  entrance  into  Thunder  Bay  river. 
Serves  as  a  guide  into  the  river  and  bay.  The  piers  at  the  mouth  of 
Thunder  Bay  river  extends  S.  E.  i  E.  Width  of  dredged  channel,  150 
feet.  Depth  of  water,  13  feet.  The  channel  is  straight  in.  A  red 
light  is  shown  from  the  draw  of  the  bridge.  Entering  keep  the  light  on 
the  bridge  open  to  the  southward  of  the  main  light. 

The  fog  signal  at  ThutidtT  Bay  river,  or  Alpena,  is  a  bell  struck  by  machinery, 
gives  a  single  blow  every  10  seconds. 

Devil  River. — When  abreast  of  South  point  and  distance  6  miles 
due  west,  steer  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.,  6^  miles,  or  until  Soaroerow  island 
bears  due  south  and  1  mile  distant,  then  haul  up  W.  ^  N.,  4  miles,  until 
abreast  of  houses  at  Devil  river. 

To  make  Thunder  Bay  River.— When  abreast  of  South 
point  and  6  miles  distant  due  west,  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  16  miles,  to  a  point 
1  mile  southeast  of  light.  To  make  an  anchorage  between  Thunder  bay 
and  Suflfar  island,  steer  in  north  midway  between  the  two  islands.     The 


106 


LAKK   HURON. 


H  'ill?. 


chart  shows  14  feet,  but  at  the  present  stage  of  water  10  to  11  feet  is  all 
that  can  be  found.  Come-to  off  the  fish  houses  on  Sugar  island.  Enter- 
ing, keep  a  sharp  lookout  for  the  spit  extending  southeast  from  Sugar 
island,  and  spit  off  the  west  side  of  Thunder  Bay  island,  northwest  from 
the  Life  Saving  station. 

To  make  Thunder  Bay   River   from  the   North.— 

When  one-half  a  mile  southeast  from  the  south  point  of  Thunder  Bay 
island,  steer  W.  S.  W.  ^  8.,  4  miles,  passing  south  of  the  can  buoy  on  the 
spit  off  North  point,  when  haul  up  W.  N.  W.,  8  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
southeast  of  the  light. 

To  make  Devil  River  from  the  North.— When  one-half 
mile  southeast  from  the  south  point  of  Thunder  Bay  island,  steer  S.  W. 
by  W.  i  W.,  13  miles.     Come-to  off  the  houses  in  3  fathoms. 

North  Point* — Red,  2d-class  can  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  extreme  end  of  the  shoal  extending  in  a  southeasterly  direc- 
tion from  North  point  in  Thunder  bay.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to 
pass  to  the  northward  of  the  buoy.  East  end  of  North  point,  N.  by  W. 
I  W.,  li  miles.  Thunder  Bay  Island  light-house,  N.  E.  by  E.,  3  7-16 
miles.     Thunder  Bay  River  light,  N.  W.  by  W.  |  W.,  9^  miles. 

THUNDER    BAY    ISLAND    LIGHT-STATION.— A 

flashing  white  light,  4th  order,  interval  between  flash  00  seconds,  visible 
14^  miles.  Yellow  tower,  rubble-stone  base,  brick  above,  66  feet  high, 
connected  by  covered  way  with  dwelling  of  Milwaukee  brick.  On  the 
east  shore  of  Thunder  Bay  island,  and  about  400  yards  from  its  south- 
east end.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to  pass  between  the  island  and  the 
main-land.  During  thick  or  foggy  weather  there  is  sounded  a  steam- 
whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  8  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  10  sec 
onds;  then  a  blast  of  2  seconds  followed  by  an  interval  of  40  seconds, 
alternating  in  this  way  every  minute.  Sturgeon  Point  light-house,  S.  t)y 
W.,  23^  miles.  Detour  light-house,  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  73^  miles.  A  spit 
extends  southeast  one-quarter  mile  from  southeast  point  of  island.  To 
make  a  lee  under  Sugar  Island,  haul  around  Thunder  Bay  island,  giving 
it  a  berth  of  one-halt  mile,  when  steer  W.  by  N.,  ll  miles,  until  the 
middle  of  Sugar  island  bears  north.  Come-to  in  6  or  6  fathoms,  with 
Thunder  Bay  Island  light  bearing  about  E.  by  N.  The  Life  Saving 
station  is  on  the  S.  W.  side  of  the  island,  and  a  watch-house  on  the  S.  E. 
point. 

Middle  Island. — Bed,  2d-clasB  nun  buoy  in  21  feet  of  water. 
Placed  outside  the  shoal  off  the  southeast  point  of  Middle  island.  To 
anchor  between  the  island  and  the  main-land,  vessels  from  the  north- 
ward will  pass  outside  the  buoy  one-half  mile,  and  when  it  is  in  range 
with  the  southeast  point  of  the  island,  haul  up  to  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  and 
when  the  west  point  of  the  island  bears  N.  by  W.,  haul  up  for  it,  anchor- 
ing in  4  or  4}  fathoms  of  water,  about  one-half  mile  from  the  island, 
which  forms  a  lee  for  northeast  winds.  To  make  a  lee  in  southeast  gales, 
haul  around  the  north  side  of  the  island  and  come-to  on  the  northwest 
side,  be  careful  not  to  stand  in  too  far.  Southeast  point  of  Middle  island, 
W.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  seven-eighths  of  a  mile.  Thunder  Bay  Island  light- 
house, 8.  S.  E.  i  E.,  11^  miles.  The  Life  Saving  station  is  on  the  N.  W. 
point  of  the  island,  and  watch-house  on  the  S.  E.  point. 

False  Presque  Isle  is  9  miles  southeast  of  Presque  Isle  light; 
it  has  good  anchorage  and  shelter  from  all  winds,  except  those  from  E. 


\:> 


,1 


ijg 


LAKE    HURON. 


107 


iOto  11  feet  is  all 
ar  island.  Enter- 
heast  from  Sugar 
i,  northwest  from 

the  North.— 

t  of  Thunder  Bay 
le  can  buoy  on  the 
to  a  point  1  mile 

— When  one-half 
land,  steer  S.  W. 
loms. 

i  feet  of  water, 
itheasterly  direc- 
l  not  attempt  to 
point,  N.  by  W. 
E.  by  E.,  3  7-16 
>i  miles. 

rATION.— A 

•  seconds,  visible 
ve,  66  feet  high, 
I  brick.     On  the 

from  its  south- 
le  island  and  the 
Junded  a  steam- 
terval  of  10  sec 

of  40  seconds, 
»ht-hou8e,  S.  by 
\  miles.  A  spit 
t  of  island.  To 
y  island,  giving 
miles,  until  the 
fathoms,  with 
he  Life  Saving 
use  on  the  S.  E. 

feet  of  water, 
le  island.  To 
i-om  the  north- 
n  it  is  in  range 
W.  I  W.,  and 

for  it,  anchor- 
cm  the  island, 
outheast  gales, 
the  northwest 
Middle  island, 

Island  light- 
9  on  the  N.  W. 

^ue  Isle  light; 
those  from  E. 


V" 


to  S.  E.     To  make  the  anchorage,  steer  in  northwest,  rup  well  up  in  the 
bay,  keeping  on  the  north  side.     Come-to  in  3^  fathoms. 

Presque  Isle  Harbor  Range-Lights.— Two,  6th  order, 
fixed  white  lights,  visible  6  and  8  miles.  Front  tower  painted  white,  16 
feet  high.  Rear  light  on  white  frame  dwelling,  25  fe^n'  high.  Lights 
1,000  feet  apart,  bearing  E.  i  S.  and  W.  ^  N.  On  the  west  shore  of 
Presque  Isle  harbor.  To  enter  the  harbor,  bring  the  lights  in  range  W. 
^  N.,  with  the  old  light-house  on  the  north  point  bearing  W.  by  N.,  1^ 
miles  distant.  Run  m  on  the  range.  A  bar  extends  from  the  north  to 
the  south  points  of  the  harbor.  When  crossing  this  bar  on  the  range 
there  are  at  the  present  time  not  more  than  13^  feet  of  water;  when  over 
it  the  water  deepens  suddenly  to  20  feet ;  the  old  light-house  should  bear 
a  little  abaft  the  beam,  when  haul  up  S.  S.  W.  for  the  wood  dock,  or  come- 
to  abreast  of  it  in  3^  fathoms;  soft  bottom.  There  is  a  rocky  shoal,  least 
water  8  feet,  1,000  yards  E.  f  S.  from  the  old  tower;  running  in  on  the 
range  the  course  leads  close  to  the  south  side  of  it.  The  M'ood  dock  is 
in  a  very  dilapidated  condition,  and  at  present  is  not  safe  to  lie  to. 

PRESQUE  ISLE  LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white  light, 
8d  order,  visible  18f  miles.  White  tower,  100  feet  high,  connected  by  a 
covered  way  with  dwelling.  About  500  yards  from  the  northern  end  of 
Presque  Isle.  Detour  light-house,  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  47  miles.  Spectacle 
Beef  light-house,  N.  W.  ^  W.,  42^  miles.  In  the  bay  west  of  Presque 
Isle  the  bottom  is  rocky. 

The  fog-signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle  giving  blasts  of  6  seconds, 
with  silent  interval  of  26  seconds.  The  fog-signal Jhouse  is  on  the  beach 
1,240  feet  N.  by  W.  from  the  light-house. 

The  Shore  from  Thunder  Bay  island  to  the  Straits  of  Mackinac. 
Shoal  I  mile  S.  E.  of  Middle  island,  marked  with  buoy.  Flats  ^  mile 
from  S.  W.  point  and  ^  mile  from  N.  W.  point  of  Middle  island.  Middle 
ground  between  Middle  island  and  the  main-land,  10  feet  spot  ^  mile  N. 
W.  of  first  point  below  Presque  Isle  harbor;  10  feet  spot  f  mile  S.  E.  of 
the  old  light-house  at  tha  entrf.nce  to  Presque  Isle  harbor;  6  feet  spot  1 
mile  S.  E.  from  Adams  point. 

SPECTACLE  REEF  LIGHT-STATION.— A  flashing  light, 
showing  alternately  a  red  and  white  flash.  The  interval  between  flashes 
is  30  seconds,  2d  order,  visible  16  i  miles.  Gray  tower,  86  feet  high.  A 
square  wooden  crib,  12  feet  above  water,  surrounds  the  tower.  On  the 
westerly  edge  of  Spectacle  reef.  The  reef  is  about  seven-eighths  of  a 
mile  in  extent  nortn  and  south,  and  one-fourth  of  a  mile  east  and  west. 
The  Boundlngaare  irregular  near  thereof,  with  6  and  12  fathoms  close-to. 
During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded,  giving  a  blast 
of  3  seconds,  then  an  interval  of  12  seconds;  then  another  hlast  of  3  sec- 
i  •  onds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  42  seconds,  and  so  on.  Bois  Blanc  light- 
house, W.  by  N.,  14  miles.  Cheboygan  light-house,  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W., 
15i-  miles.     Detour  light-house,  N.  E.  i^  N.,  16|  miles. 

Thirteen-foot  Shoal.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2d 
class  call  buoy  in  17  foet  of  water.  Marks  a  dangerous  shoal  between 
Bois  Blanc  and  Spectacle  reef.  Should  not  be  approached  nearer  than 
one-fourth  of  a  mile.  The  shoal  extends  in  an  east  and  west  direction; 
the  buoy  is  near  the  middle  of  the  shoal  on  the  north  side.    Spectacle 


W-*^\ 


'-"  '-f '-T.'"' 


■■*tT" 


:| 


-IS 


108 


LAKE   ttUKON. 


Reef  light-house,  E.  f  S.,  3}  miles.    Bois  Blanc  light-house,  W.  N.  W. 
i  W.,  lOi  miles.     Cheboygan  light-house,  S.  W.  f  W.,  12^  miles. 

Martin's  Reef. — Black,  Ist-class  can  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 
Placed  off  the  southeasterly  end  of  Martin's  reef,  on  which  the  steamer 
"Garden  City"  was  lost.  Vessels  should  pass  to  the  southward  of  the 
buoy.  Between  Martin's  reef  and  the  main-land  there  are  several  reef!) 
extending  in  a  northwesterly  direction  with  channel-ways  between  them 
which  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers.  Spectacle  Reef  light- 
house, S.  ^  E.,  9f  miles.  Detour  light-house,  E.  N.  E.  f  E.,  11^  miles. 
Beaver-tail  point  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  3|-  miles.  Bois  Blanc  light-house,  S. 
W.  by  W.  I  W.,  15  miles. 

Scammon's  Harbor. — The  entrance  to  this  harbor  is  11^  miles 
N.  E.  by  N.  from  Bois  Blanc  light,  and  N.  W,  by  N.  f  N.,  16  miles  from 
Spectacle  Reef  light  It  is  between  Boot  island  on  the  east  and  Isle 
William  on  the  west.  Off  the  southeast  end  of  Isle  William  there  is  a 
small  rocky  islet,  from  which  a  spit  extends  three-eighths  of  a  mile  in  a 
southeasterly  direction,  with  large  boulders  on  it,  and  there  is  a  rocky 
flat  on  the  northeast  side  of  this  islet.  When  inside  there  is  plenty  of 
room,  and  protection  from  all  winds.  The  water  is  deep  in  the  entrance, 
but  strangers  should  be  very  cautious  in  making  it.  To  enter  the  harbor, 
bring  the  passage  to  bear  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  run  in  on  that  bearing. 
Keep  the  starboard  side  best  on  board,  about  one-third  the  distance 
across  the  channel,  and  when  a  little  past  the  west  point  of  Boot  island, 
haul  to  the  north  to  clear  a  spit  off  a  little  point  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  channel,  and  when  into  the  bay,  haul  to  the  northwest  and  come-to  in 
7  fathoms,  mud  and  clay  bottom. 

DETOUR  LIGHT-STATION.— See  Straits  of  St.  Marie. 

Scammon's  Cove. — Red,  Sd-olass  nun  buoy  in  21  feet  of  water 
on  the  outer  end  or  south  point  of  Scammon's  Cove  reef.  Point  Smith, 
8.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  1^  miles.  East  side  of  entrance  to  Scammon's  cove, 
N.  W.  by  N.  i  N.J  If  miles.     Spectacle  reef,  W.  S.  W.,  27  miles. 

There  is  a  saw-mill  at  Scammon's  cove,  and  considerable  trade  in 
oedar  posts,  ties,  etc.  From  10  to  11  feet  can  be  carried  into  the  harbor; 
a  tug  18  generally  in  readiness  to  tow  vessels  in  and  out  of  the  harbor. 

Compass   Courses  and  Distances  on   the  American  side  of 

Lake  Huron, 

Fort  Gratiot  to  the  Straits  of  Mackinac— When i  mile 
N.  E.  by  N.  from  Fort  Gratiot  light,  steer  N.  f  W.,  58^  miles,  to  a  point 
1^  miles  east  of  main  light  at  Sand  Beach,  thence  N.  by  W.  \  W.,  87^ 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Tiiunder  Bay  Island  light,  thence  N.N.  W. 
\  W.,  26^  miles,  to  a  point  6  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Presque  Isle  light,  tlience 
to  the  south  channel  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  47  miles,  or  until  Spectacle  Reef 
light  bears  N.  £.  8  miles  and  the  east  point  of  Bois  Blanc  island  N.  W.  \ 
!Krthe  same  distance,  when  steer  due  west  8  miles  to  a  point  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  north  of  Cheboygan  light.  To  pass  through  the  north  channel 
when  6  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Presque  Isle  light,  steer  N  W.  by  W.  \  W., 
68  miles,  to  a  point  one-half  mile  north  of  Bois  Blanc  light,  thence  W.  \ 
N.,  9i  miles  to  Mackinac. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Detour  Passage.— When  5  miles  E.  N.  E. 


'/>le^ 

y 


LAKK    HURON. 


109 


house,  W.  N.  \V. 
12^  miles. 

18  feet  of  water. 
Hrhich  the  steamer 
southward  of  the 
i  are  several  reefs 
ays  between  them 
3tacle  Reef  light- 
;.  f  E.,  Hi  miles, 
mo  light-house,  S. 

larbor  is  11^  miles 
N.,  15  miles  from 
the  east  and  Isle 
ifVilliam  there  is  a 
ths  of  a  mile  in  a 
1  there  is  a  rocky 
there  is  plenty  of 
ep  in  the  entrance, 

0  enter  the  harbor, 

1  on  that  bearing, 
bird  the  distance 
int  of  Boot  island, 
te  opposite  side  of 
est  and  come-to  in 

I  of  St.  Marie. 

1  21  feet  of  water 

eef.     Point  Smith, 

Scammon's  oove, 

,  27  miles. 
Biderable  trade  in 

d  into  the  harbor; 

t  of  the  harbor. 


lerican  side  oj 


ftC. — When  1  mile 
}^  miles,  to  a  point 
by  W.  \  W.,  m\ 
It,  thence  N.N.  W. 
B  Isle  light,  thenoe 
til  Spectacle  Reef 
no  island  N.  W.  \ 
)int  three-quarters 
the  north  channel 
W.  by  W.  i  W.. 
ight,  thence  VV.  \ 

6  miles  E.  N.  E. 


t 

J: 


from  Presque  Isle  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Fort  Gratiot  to  Mackinac, 
•teer  N.  N.  W.  f  W..,  45  miles,  ranging  on  Detour  light,  to  within  two 
miles  of  it  and  in  range  with  Frying  Pan  island  and  Pipe  Island  lights, 
when  haul  up  on  this  range  heading  N.  i  W.  nearly.  See  directions  for 
entering  Straits  of  St.  Mary. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Sagrinaw  River.— When  i  mile  N.  E.  by  N. 
from  Fort  Gratiot  iight,  steer  N.  f  W.,  58^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  east 
of  main  light  at  Sand  Beach,  thence  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  15  miles,  to  a  point 
3  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Point  aux  Barques  light,  not  approaching  the  shore 
nearer  than  If  miles,  then  N.  W.  by  W.,  9  miles,  until  Port  Austin  light 
bears  W.  S.  W.,  6  miles,  thence  W.  i  S.,  80  miles,  to  a  point  3  milea 
^northwest  of  Charity  Island  light  and  half  a  mile  north  of  the  buoy, 
hence  8.  W.  by  S.,  33  miles,  to  the  outer  buoys  at  the  north  entrance  to 
e  cut  In  daylight  when  abreast  of  Sand  Beach  follow  the  coast 
ound,  not  approaching  it  nearer  than  If  miles,  until  Port  Austin  light 
ars  W.  S.  W.,  5  miles  distant,  when  proceed  as  above. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Thunder  Bay  River. — When  i^  miles  east 
f  main  light  at  Sand  Beach,  as  in  the  course  from  Fort  Gratiot  to  Sagi- 
naw river,  steer  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  93  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  southeast  of 
|he  light.    Dark  nightd  or  in  a  fog  this  course  should  be  watched,  as  it 
leads  close  to  Scarecrow  island.     The  soundings  are  gradual. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Lexington. — When  i  mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from 
Fort  Gratiot  light,  steer  N.  by  W  ^  W.,  18  miles,  to  a  half  mile  east  of 
pier. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Fort  Sanilac— When  l  mile  N.  E.  by  N. 
from  Fort  Gratiot  light  steer  N.  ^  W..,  29^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east 
of  the  dock.  ^ 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Forestville.— When  l  mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from 
Fort  Gratiot  light,  steer  N.  ^  W.,  46  miles,  to  a  point  one  mile  east  of 
the  dock. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Port  Hope.— When  l^  miles  east  of  Sand 
Beach  main  light  as  in  the  course  from  Fort  Gratiot  to  Saginaw  river, 
■teer  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  7f  miles,  to  a  point  I  mile  east  of  Stafford's  dock. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Point  aux  Barques.— See  course  from 
Fort  Gratiot  to  Saginaw  river. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Port  Austin.— When  3  miles  E.  N.  E.  from 
Point  aux  Barques  light  as  in  the  course  from  Fort  Gratiot  to  Saginaw 
river,  ateer  W.  N.  W.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  north  of  Burnt  Cabin 
point,  thence  W.  i  S.,  3f  miles,  passing  ^  mile  north  of  Port  Austin  light 
and  ^  mile  vast  it,  when  haul  in  due  south,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the 
rocky  spot  N.  W.  of  the  end  of  the  dock. 

Sand  Beach  to  Goderich.— From  main  entrance  steer  E.  by 
6.,  46  miles,  to  1  mile  west  of  front  range  light. 

Sand  Beach  to  Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay.— From  main 
entrance  steer  N.  N.  E. ^  E.,  Ill  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  W.  i  N.  of 
Cove  Island  light. 

Sand  Beach  to  Southampton. — From  main  entrance  steer 
N.  E.f  E.,  76  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  northwest  of  Chantry  Island 
light. 

Point  aux  Barques  to  Saginaw  River,  Pas«ing  South 
of  Charity  Island.— When  S  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Point  aux  BarquoH 


'■■    i: 


T? 


110 


LAKE    HURON. 


light,  Steer  N.  W.  by  W.  J  \V.,  11^  miles,  thence  W.  S.  W.,  26  miles, 

gassing  1^  miles  N.  of  Port  Austin  light,  until  Oak  point  bears  east  and 
and  point  due  south,  when  haul  up  west  for  4f  miles  until  the  light  on 
Charity  island  is  in  range  with  the  west  side  of  Little  Charity  island, 
then  steer  S.  W.  ^  S.,  27^  miles,  to  the  outer  buoys  at  the  entrance  to  the 
out  into  Saginaw  river.  Buoys  in  channel  south  of  Charity  island  re- 
moved. 

Point  aux  Barques  to  Tawas.— When  3  miles  E.  N.  E.  of 
Point  aux  Barques,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  9  miles,  until  Port  Austin  light 
bears  W.  S.  W.,  6  miles,  thence  W.  by  N,  f  N.,  30^  miles,  to  a.  point  1^ 
miles  southwest  of  Tawas  light.  For  directions  to  enter  the  harbor,  see 
Tawas  Light  Station. 

Point  aux  Barques  to  Au  Sable.— When  3  miles  E.  N.  E. 
of  Point  aux  Barques  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  W.,  38  miles,  to  a  point  1 
mile  east  of  light. 

A  sand  bar  makes  out  from  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  to  Sable 
river,  from  which  a  spit  entends  in  a  northeast  direction  about  1^  miles. 
This  shoal  seems  to  be  extending  rapidly,  probably  from  the  present  low 
stage  of  water.  Heavy  draft  vessels  bound  to  Au  Sable  should  not  cross 
the  spit,  until  the  light-house  at  Au  Sable  bears  west,  the  end  of  the  spit 
is  a  little  more  than  one  mile  from  the  harbor  piers. 

Point  aux  Barques  to  Harrisville.— When  3  miles  E.  N. 
£.  of  Point  aux  Barques  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  50^  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  east  of  Harrisville.  ' 

Saginaw  to  Point  aux  Ores.— From  the  buoys  at  the  north 
entrar^je  to  the  cut,  steer  N„  N.  E.  ^  E.,  22f  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
southeast  of  point.        • 

Saginaw  Biver  to  Point  Sable  and  Tliunder  Bay 
Island. — From  the  buoys  at  north  entrance  to  the  cut,  steer  N.  E.  by 
N.,  62  miles,  until  Sable  point  bears  N.  W.  4  miles  distant,  thence  N.  | 
E.,  52  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Thunder  Bay  Island  light.  See 
course  from  Fort  Gi .  clot  to  Mackinac  and  St.  Mark's  river. 

Saginaw  River  to  Georgian  Bay.— From  the  buoys  at  the 
north  entrance  to  the  cut,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.,  33  miles,  until  Charity  Is- 
land light  bears  southeast  3  miles,  thence  northeast  120  miles,  to  a  point 
3  miles  W.  f  N.  of  Cove  Island  light. 

Saginaw  River  to  Goderich. — When  3  miles  northwest 
from  Charity  Island  light,  steer  E.  ^  N.,  30  miles,  until  Port  Austin  light 
bears  W.  S.  W.,  6  miles,  and  Point  aux  Barques  S.  E.  i^  S.,  7f  miles, 
when  steer  E.  S.  E.  ^  S.,  63  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  front  range 
light. 

Saginaw  River  to  Wild  Fowl  Bay.— From  the  buoys  at 
the  north  entrance  to  cut,  steer  N.  E.  f  E.  25f  lailes,  ranging  on  Sard 
point  until  within  2  miles  of  it,  when  haul  in  E.  S.  E.,  passing  thr  je- 
quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  North  island. 

Saginaw  River  to   Tawas  Bay.— From  the  buoys  at  the 
north  entrance  to  the  out,  steer  N.  B.  by  N.,  83  miles,  until  Charity  Is- 
land light  bears  southeast  3  miles,  when  steer  north  12f  miles,  into  the . 
middle  of  the  bay.  ■" 

Tawas  Bay  to  Sable  Point  and  Thunder  Bay  River.- 

When  1^  miles  southwest  of  Ottawa  Point  light,  and  a  little  south  of  tliol 


LAKE  HURON. 


Ill 


S.  W.,  25  miles, 
jint  bears  east  and 
until  the  light  on 
,le  Charity  island, 
the  entrance  to  the 
Charity  island  re- 
miles  E.  N.  E.  of 

Port  Austin  light 
oiles,  to  ft  point  H 
nter  the  harbor,  see 

len  3  miles  E.  N.  E. 
miles,  to  a  point  1 

he  entrance  to  Sable 
jtion  about  1^  miles, 
rom  the  present  low 
ible  should  not  cross 
t,  the  end  of  the  spit 

-When  3  miles  E.  N. 
\  N.,  50i  miles,  to  a 

ie  buoys  at  the  north   ; 
18,  to  a  point  1  mile   . 

i  Thunder  Bay 

le  cut,  steer  N.  E.  by 
8  distant,  thence  N.  | 
ay  Island  light.  See 
V's  river. 

p'rom  the  buoys  at  the 
fles,  until  Charity  Is- 
^  120  miles,  to  a  point 

.1  3  miles  northwest 
Intil  Port  Austin  light 
[s  S.  E.  i  S.,  7i  miles, 
west  of  front  range 

|-From  the  buoys  at 
liles,  ranging  on  Sard  ^^ 
I   S.  E.,  passing  thr  je-  > 
Id. 

am  the  buoys  at  the 
liles,  until  Charity  Is- 
rth  12f  miles,  into  the 

iderBayRlver.- 

id  a  little  south  of  tin- 


buoy,  steer  E.  i  N.,  If  miles,  until  the  light  bears  N.  W.,  1  mil«,  thence 
N.  £.  f  E.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  east  of  Sable  point,  thence  N.  | 
E.,  30  miles,  to  a  point  5  miles  northeast  of  Sturgeon  Point  light,  thence 
N.  N.  W".  I  W.,  23  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  southeast  of  Thunder  Bay 
River  light.  This  course  leads  close  to  Scarecrow  island,  and  should  be 
watched  carefully. 

Tawas  Bay  to  Au  Sable. — When  i  mile  southeast  of  light,  as 
in  the  course  to  Thunder  Bay  island,  steer  northeast  8^  miles,  to  a  point 

1  mile  east  of  Sable  point,  then  N.  f  E.,  5^  miles,  to  1^  mile  east  of  An 
Sable  light;  this  course  leads  close  to  Sable  point  and  close  to  the  sand 
spit  off  Au  Sable  river. 

Tawas  Bay  to  Port  Austin. — When  1}  miles  southwest  of 
light,  steer  S.  E.  by  E.  f  £.,  27  miles,  to  the  dock  at  Port  Austin. 

Au  Sable  to  Sturgeon  Point  and  Thunder  Bay 
River. — When  2  miles  east  of  light,  steer  N.  i  E.,  21^  miles,  to  a  point 

2  miles  east  of  Sturgeon  Point  light,  thence  N.  i  W.,8^  miles,  to  a  point 
2  miles  east  of  Black  Biver  island,  thence  N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  18  miles,  to  1 
mile  southeast  of  light. 

Au  Sable  to  '^'hunder  Bay  Island.— When  2  miles  east  of 
light,  steer  N.  |  E.,  44  miles,  to  apoint  2  miles  east  of  Thunder  Bay  Island 
light.  When  see  courses  from  Fort  Gratiot  to  Straits  of  Mackinac,  and 
Detour. 

Au  Sable  to  Goderich. — Wl^en  2  miles  east  of  light,  steer  S. 
E.  by  E.  ^  £.,  90^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  front  range  light. 

Au  Sable  to  Cove  Island. — When  2  miles  east  of  light,  steer 
.  E.  ^  E.,  97  miles,  to  a  point  W.  f  N.,  3  miles  from  Cove  Island  light. 

Thunder  Bay  Biver  to  Thunder  Bay  Island.— When  i 

lie  S.  E.  of  the  light,  steer  E.  S.  E.,  8^  miles,  passing  ^  mile  south  of 
^the  red  can  buoy  on  the  end  of  shoal  off  North  point,  thence  E.  N.  E.  ^ 
~ '.,  3f  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  southeast  from  the  south  point  of  Thunder 
Bay  i>land. 

Thunder  Bay  Biver  to  Saginaw.— When  1  mile  S.  E.  of  the 

ight,  steer  S.  E.  ^8.,  15  miles,  to  apoint  5  miles  east  of  the  South  point; 

ihence  S.  ^  W.,  41^  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  S.  E.  of  Sable  point;  thence 

).  W.  by  S.,  62  miles,  to  the  buoys  at  the  mouth  of  Saginaw  river,  and 

in  range  of  the  two  lights. 

Thunder  Bay  River  to  Fort  Gratiot.— When  i  mile  8.  E. 

f  the  light,  steer  S.  E.,  by  S.  ^  S.,  10  miles,  to  1  mile  N.  E.  of  Scare- 

w  island;  thence  S.  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  for  83  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  east 

main  light  at  Sand  Beach ;  thence  S.  f  E.,  58^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 

!K.  E.  by  N.  from  Fort  Gratiot  light-house. 

Thunder  Bay  River  to  Goderich.— When  i  mile  S.  E.  of 
e  light,  steer  "^  E.  f  S.,  124  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  front 
nge  light. 

Thunder  Bay  River  to  Southampton.— When  i  mile  S.  E. 
et  the  light,  steer  E.  S.  E.,  8  miles,  pr  ising  south  of  North  Point  buoy; 
Whence  E.  S.  E.,  96  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  northwest  of  Chantry  Island 
'^ght. 

Thunder  Bay  Island  to  Georgian  Bay,— When  2  miles  east 
^f  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  69  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  W.  f  N.  of  Cove 
sland  light. 


I 


a  !• 


ill 


ii?  J.t 


112 


LAKE    HURON. 


Thunder  Bay  Island  to  Southampton.— YThen  2  miles  east 
of  light,  steer  E.  S.  £.  k  S.,  91^  luiles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  northwest  of 
Chantry  Island  light. 

Thunder  Bay  Island  to  Point  Clark.— When  2  miles  east 
of  light,  steer  southeast,  Qg^  miles,  to  Point  Clark  light. 

Thunder  Bay  Island  to  False  Presque  Isle.— When  2 
miles  east  of  the  light,  steer  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  18^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
east  of  False  Presque  Isle  point,  passing  li  miles  east  of  Middle  Island 
buoy. 

Thunder  Bay  Island  Liight  to  the  Lig^ht  on  the 
Great  Ducks.— N.  by  E.  f  E.,  42^  miles. 

False  Presque  Isle  to  Presque  Isle. — When  2  miles  east  of 
False  Presque  Isle  point,  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  8  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east 
of  Presque  Isle  light. 

Presque  Isle  Light  to  Duck  Island  Light.— N.  E.by  E., 
82  miles. 

Presque  Isle  Light  to  Manitoulin  Light.— On  the  east 
■ide  of  the  Straits  of  Mississagua,  N.  by  £.  f  E.,  39  miles. 

Detour  to  Mackinac. — When  l  mile  east  of  light,  and  in  range 
of  Frying  Pan  island,  and  Pipe  Island  lights,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  26| 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  north  of  Bois  Blanc  light;  thence  west  ^i^  miles^ 
to  the  middle  of  Mackinac  harbor.  This  course  leads  ^  mile  south  of 
Ist-class  black  can  buoy,  on  Martin's  or  Garden  City  reef.  In  foggy 
weather  or  dark  nights  it  would  be  advisable  to  keep  a  sharp  lookout. 

Detour  to  SpectacleKeef  Light.— When  i  mile  east  of  light 
and  in  range  of  Frying  Pan  island,  and  Pipe  Island  lights,  steer  S.  W., 
18  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  light. 

Detour  to  Cheboygan. — When  l  mile  east  of  light,  and  in  range 
of  Frying  Pan  island,  and  Pipe  Island  lights,  steer,  S.  W.  f  W.,  heading 
on  Cheboygan  light  for  80  miles,  or  to  within  2  miles  of  it;  thence  W. 
by  S.,  3  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  from  Cheboygan  River  pierhead  light, 
and  in  line  iitrith  the  range  lights.  This  course  leads  to  the  westward  and 
very  close  to  Thirteen-foot  shoal,  8i  miles,  W.  f  N.  from  Spectacle  Reef 
light;  heavy  draught  vessels  should  keep  more  to  the  eastward  until 
abreast  of  Spectacle  reef,  and  then  haul  up  for  Cheboygan  light. 

Spectacle  Reef  to  Cheboygan.— With  the  light  directly 
astern,  steer  W.  S.  W.,  a  little  southerly,  until  in  range  with  the  Cheboy- 
gan range  lights,  and  main  light  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  1^  miles,  when  haul  up 
for  St.  Helena  light,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  with  Cheboygan  light  over  the 
stern. 

Cheboygan  to  Georgian  Bay. — When  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  north  of  Cheboygan  light,  steer  east  8  miles;  thence  E.  by  S.  i  8., 
124  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile  north  of  Cove  Island  light. 

Mackinac  to  Georgian  Bay.— From  the  middle  of  the  har- 
bor, steer  E.  f  S.,  9^  miles,  to  a  point  one-half  mile  north  of  Bois  Blanc 
light,  then  E.  S.  E.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  two  miles  south  of  Spectacle 
Reef  light,  when  steer  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  119  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  north  of  Cove  Island  light. 


■.«■ 


:V'4*; 


LAKE    HURON. 


113 


V7hen  2  miles  east 
lies  northwest  of 

l^hen  2  miles  east 
t. 

Isle. — When  2 
to  a  point  2  miles 
of  Middle  Island 

Light  on  the 

lien  2  miles  east  of 
point  2  miles  east 

ht.— N.  E.by  E., 

;ht. — On  the  east 
iles. 

light,  and  in  range 
^  by  S.  i  a,  261 
nee  west  Q^  miles^ 
is  I  mile  south  of 
1  reef.  In  foggy 
\  sharp  lookout. 

1  mile  east  of  light 
ghts,  steer  S.  W., 

light,  and  in  range 
W.  %  W.,  heading 

of  it;  thence  W. 
^er  pierhead  light, 

the  westward  and 
)ra  Spectacle  Reef 
he  eastward  until 

^an  light. 

the  light  directly 
with  the  Cheboy- 
iles,  when  haul  up 
jan  light  over  the 

iree-quarters  of  a 
nee  E.  by  S.  i  S., 
Cove  Island  light. 

iddle  of  the  har- 
th  of  Bois  Blanc 
3uth  of  Spectacle 
int  three-quarters 


•><' 


Magnetic  Declinations  in  degrees  and  tenths,  corrected  to  the 

year  1890. 

• 

Lakeport 3  0  W. 

Lexington 2  0  W. 

Sanilac a.  1  W. 

White  Rock 3.2  W. 

Port  Austin 2.0  W. 

Mouth  of  Saginaw  River 0.8  W. 

Point  aux  Ores 0.5  W. 

Tawas  Point. 0.8  W. 

Harrisville 1.3  W. 

Alpena LOW. 

North  Point  of  Thunder  Bay 1.3  W. 

Middle  Island 1.3  W. 

Hammond's  Bay 0.3  W. 

Cheboygan 0.1  E. 

Detour  L.  H 1.3  W. 

Drummond's  Island,  east  side 3 .0  W. 

Duck  Island  Light-house ..  3.0  W. 

Cove  Island 5.3  W. 

Chantry  Island 4.5  W. 


Light  Houses  and  Harbors  on  the  Canadian  Shore  of  Lake 

Huron. 

GODEBICH  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  21  miles.  White,  square,  stone  tower,  with  dwelling  attached. 
On  high  bank  south  of  entrance  to  harbor;  light  150  feet  above  lake 
level. 

Front  Range  L^ht. — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  5  miles.  White 
square,  open-frame  tower.  On  north  pier;  light  45  feet  above  lake 
level. 

Back  Range  Light* — A  fixed  green  light,  visible  6  miles.  White, 
square,  wood  tower.  On  north  pier;  1,209  feet  E.  by  S.  from  front  light. 
These  lights  in  range  lead  to  head  of  north  pier. 

A  Steam  Fog  Whistle  in  oonnection  vith  the  water  works  dar- 
ing thick  weather  will  give  blasts  of  10  seconds,  with  intervals  of  60 
seconds  between  them.  The  water-works  buildin^i:  is  oir  the  beach  S.  E. 
by  E.,  1,200  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier.  It  is  of  red 
brick,  with  unpainted  roof,  with  high  brick  chimney.  It  is  partially 
hidden  from  the  lake  by  an  old  wooden  storehouse.  The  8-inch  whistle 
rises  from  the  roof,  and  is  30  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake. 

Goderich  is  a  harbor  of  refuge. — It  is  an  enclosed  basin, 
with  a  channel  cut  through  the  beach,  connecting  it  with  the  deep  water 
in  Lake  Huron.  The  sides  of  the  channel  are  protected  with  piers  ex- 
tending into  the  lake  about  W  ^  K.  The  north  pier  is  1,320  feet  in 
length,  and  the  south  pier,  1,520  feet;  width  between  piers  200  feet. 
Depth  of  water. — There  are  15  feet  at  the  entrance,  which  depth  can  be 
carried  through  the  piers  and  into  the  basin,  except  around  the  island 
where  there  are  only  12  feet.  There  is  an  artificial  bank,  between  the 
harbor  and  the  River  Maitland;  the  river  discharges  into  the  lake 
through  the  north  beach  and  not  through  the  harbor.  There  are  high 
clay  banks  (100  feet)  on  each  side  of  the  harbor.      Good  anchorage  ofT 


114 


LAKE   HUBON. 


the  piera,  clay  bottom.  To  enter  the  Harbor,  )niag  the  ]>ier 
lights,  red  and  green,  in  range  E.  by  S.,  and  ran  for  them;  approaching 
the  north  pier  port  and  ran  straight  in  between  the  piers,  K.  i|  S.,  ana 
into  the  basin.  Point  aux  Barques.  W.  N.  W.,  68  miles.  Cape  Ipper- 
wash,  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  39i  miles. 

There  is  a  Life  SaTiiig  Station  at  Goderioh. 


'^'VfR  M4ITLANO 


ff    llWT 
a        Nouu 


^  "  GODKUICH. 

Bayfield  is  12  miles  south  of  Goderioh.  It  has  a  harbor  composed 
>f  two  piers  and  basin.  TLa  north  pier  is  820  feet  and  the  south  pier 
975  feet  long.  Width  betw  Ben  piers  200  feet  at  entrance.  Depth  of 
water,  10  to  12  feet  at  entrance.    No  light. 

POINT  CLARK  LIGHT-STATION.— A   revolving    white 
light,  2d  order,  intervals  between  revolutions  half  a  minute,  visible  15 


LAKE    HUBON. 


115 


r,  firing  the  i»ier 
iiem;  spproaohing 
piers,  £.  i|  S.,  and 
ilea.    Cape  Ipper- 


f*». 


a  harbor  compoBed 
and  the  south  pier 
itrance.    Depth  of 

revolving    white 
minute,  visible  15 


miles.  White,  circular  stone  tower,  87  feet  high.  A  coast-light  on 
Point  Clark,  23  miles  north  of  Goderioh.  A  reef  extends  west  from  the 
point,  which}  together  with  a  detached  shoal,  requires  that  it  should  be 
given  a  berth  of  two  miles;  the  shore  from  Point  Clark  to  Chantry  island 
M  rocky 'and  dangerous,  and  should  not  be  approached  by  strangers 
nearer  than  1^  miles.  Three  miles  south  of  Point  Clark  a  reef  extends 
ioQt  If  miles.  Pointe  aux  Barques  light  bears  W.  i  S.,  62  miles.  Point 
Douglas  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  19  miles. 

Kincardine  Front  Lieht. — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  8  miles 
in  the  direction  of  the  range.  White,  square,  wood  tower,  37  feet  above 
sea  level.     On  north  p'er,  1,185  feet  W.  by  N.  f  N.  from  main  light. 

Kincardine  Back  Rang^e  and  Main  Lieht.— Alternate 
white  and  red  flash  every  20  seconds;  visible  14  miles.     Fawn  color,  octa- 
gonal wood  tower,  dwelling   attached,  on  high  stone   foundation.     In 
town,  on  hillside.     The  range  leads  somewhat  to  the  northward  of  the 
i  liead  of  the  north  pier,  visible  from  all  points  seaward.     Point  Douglas, 
g3K.  by  E.  i  E.,  10  miles.    Thunder  Bay  Island  light,  N.  W.  i  W.,  97 
'{miles. 

Inverhuron  is  9  miles  north  of  Kiiicardine.  It  has  one  pier  460 
feet  in  length  with  14  feet  at  the  outer  end.     It  has  no  light. 

PORT  ELGIN  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
lantern  on  a  pole  from  corner  of  a  shed.  On  the  outer  end  of  Govern- 
ment wharf.     Port  Elgin  is  4  miles  from  Chantry  island,  and  24  milei 

m  Kincardine. 

CHANTRY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.—A  fixed  white 
ight,  visible  15  miles.     White,  circular,  stone  tower,  86  feet  high,  2d 
er,  coast-light.    About  2^  miles  to  the  westward  of  Saugeen. 

Southampton  Harbor  Ranee  Llgrhts,  Front  Lieht.— 

fixed  red  light  to  the  north,  white  in  the  harbor,  visible  7  miles.    White, 
|uare  tower.    On  the  east  end  of  west  breakwater,  933  yards  from 
antry  Island  light,  N.  E.  by  £. 

Back  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  miles.  White, 
nare  wood  tower,  light  34  feet  above  lake  level.     On  shore  south  of 

ding  pier  2,100  yards  S.  f  E.  from  the  front  light.  These  lights  in 
nge  lead  to  the  opening  in  breakwater  at  north  end  of  harbor. 

Chantry  Island  is  a  small  rocky  island  about  half  a  mile  long:  If 

lies  W.  S.  W.  from  the  mouth  of  Saugeen  river.     The  Harhor  con- 

iSts  of  a  breakwater  1,600  feet  long,  extending  in  an  easterly  direction 

m  the  old  breakwater  at  tb<)  northern  end  of  the  island.     A  break- 

kter  2,0  lO  feet  long,  on  a  curved  line  from  the  main-land  to  within  400 
t  of  the  end  of  the  breakwater,  extending  from  Chantry  island.  A 
ding  pier  has  been  built  in  the  inner  harbor,  where  a  quantity  of 

ulder  stone  has  been  removed  from  a  shoal  adjoining  the  anchorage 
und.  The  breakwaters  are  built  of  crib  work,  filled  with  stone.  The 
th  of  water  in  channel,  reported  about  14  feet,  is  not  sufficient  to  make 

vigation  safe  for  heavy  draught  vessels. 

Saugeen  Light. — A  fixed  green  light,  visible  7  miles.    Lantern 

mast,  with  brown  shed  at  base,  on  a  crib  or  breakwater.     On  the 

rth  side  of  mouth  of  river.      To   guide  fishing  boats  into  Saugeen 

ver.    Chief's  point  bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  13  miles.    Cape  Hurd,  N.  by 

"^  f  W.,  53  miles. 


I 


■  I  I     I 


It 


I  ■■} 


)i! 


116 


LAKE    HURON. 


LYAL  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving  white 
light,  visible  12  miles;  interval  between  revolutions,  15  seconds.  White, 
■qnare  wood  tower,  57  feet  high,  attached  to  keeper's  dwelling.  On  the 
west  side  of  Lyal  island.  The  light,  besides  being  a  general  lake  coast 
light,  will  serve  as  a  guide  into  the  harbor  of  Stokes  bay,  but  as  there 
are  shoals  in  the  entrance  it  must  not  be  attempted  without  local  know- 
ledge.    Chantry  Island  light,  S.  i  W.,  32  miles. 

ISLE  OF  COVES  LIGHT-STATION.  —  See  lights  in 
Georgian  bay. 

MICHAEL'S  POINT  LIGHT-STATION— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  13  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  40  feet  above 
Is^e  level.  On  Michael's  point,  south  side  of  Michael's  bay.  A  reef  ex- 
tends from  the  point  about  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  2^  miles  from  the  light.  Gove 
Island  light,  S.  E.  i  S.,  24  milei.  Michael's  bay  is  on  the  south  side  of 
Manitouiin  island. 

GREAT  DUCK  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  re- 
volving red  and  white  light,  one  red  and  two  white  flashes  every  two  min- 
utes. Greatest  brilliancy  every  40  seconds.  Visible  15  miles.  White,  square 
wood  tower,  with  dwelling  attached,  light  64  feet  above  lake  level.  On 
southwest  point  of  island.  The  fog-horn,  operated  by  steam  during  thick 
and  foggy  weather,  will  give  blasts  of  8  seconds'  duration,  with  intervals 
of  35  seconds.  The  fog  signal  is  150  feet  southeasterly  from  the  light- 
house, built  of  wood,  painted  white,  with  brown  roof.  A  reef  extends 
If  miles  in  a  southerly  direction  from  the  southeast  point  of  the  island, 
and  a  reef  extends  1^  miles  in  the  same  direction  from  the  south  point 
of  Outer  Duck  island,  lying  east  of  the  south  end  of  the  Great  Duck. 
There  is  a  good  channel  south  of  Western  and  Inner  Duck.  Spectacle 
Reef  light,  W.  by  N.,  68  miles.  Detour  light,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  62 
miles.     Presque  Isle  light,  S.  W.  by  W.,  32  miles. 

MISSISSAGUA  STRAITS  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
white  light,  visible  13  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  46  feet 
above  lake  level.  On  southwest  point  of  the  west  end  of  Great  Mani- 
touiin island.  For  guiding  vessels  through  Mississagua  straits  for  either 
entrance.  The  fog-signal  is  a  steam  whistle,  giving  blasts  of  8  seconds 
duration,  with  silent  intervals  of  2  minutes.  The  whistle  is  usually 
called  a  "wildcat"  whistle;  it  is  fitted  with  a 'piston  which  changes 
the  tone  of  the  blast,  beginning  low,  rising  to  a  screech,  and  again 
sinking  to  a  low  note  at  the  end.  Presque  Isle  light,  S.  S.  W.  30 
miles. 

mississagua  Straits  is  between  the  Grand  Manitouiin  and  Cockburn  islands. 
Tlie  passage  is  about  8  miles  in  length  and  2  miles  wide  at  the  narrowest  part. 
Depth  of  water  from  10  to  30  fathoms.  To  make  the  passage,  bring  the  middle  of 
it  to  bear  N.  by  E.  i  E.,  and  run  through  on  that  course. 

Tlie  Magnetic  Reefs,  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  from  Lake  Huron, 
extend  around  the  southeast  coast  of  Cockburn  island  S^  miles  from  the  shore  and 
are  very  dangerous.  On  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  reefs  extend  from  the  south- 
west point  of  Manitouiin  island  in  a  south  and  southwest  direction  for  1  mile. 

False  Detour  Channel  is  between  Drummond  and  Cockburn  islands.  It 
is  about  7  miles  in  length  and  a  little  over  a  mile  wide  at  the  southern  entrance. 
Run  through  the  passage  from  Lake  Huron,  heading  N.  E.  by  N.  Keep  the  west 
side  of  the  entrance  best  on  board.  On  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  from  the  south 
there  is  a  small  island  with  shoal  water  to  the  west  of  it. 


LA.KE    nURON. 


117 


A  revolving  white 
6  seconds.  White, 
I  dwelling.  On  the 
general  lake  coast 
(8  bay,  but  as  there 
rithout  local  know- 

J,  —  See   lights    in 

iN. — A  fixed  white 
light  40  feet  above 
I's  bay.  A  reef  ex- 
)m  the  light.  Cove 
on  the  south  side  of 


PATION.— A  re- 

ishes  every  two  min- 
aiiles.  White,  square 
)ove  lake  level.  On 
r  steam  during  thick 
ation,  with  intervals 
erly  from  the  light- 
of.  A  reef  extends 
point  of  the  island, 
rom  the  south  point 
)f  the  Great  Duck, 
r  Duck.  Spectacle 
W.  by  W.  i  W.,  62 

ATION.— A  fixed 
tower,  light  46  feet 
end  of  Great  Mani- 
;ua  straits  for  either 
blasts  of  8  seconds 
whistle  is  usually 
3ton  which  changes 
screech,  and  again 
light,   S.  S.  W.  30 

and  Cockburn  islands, 
at  the  narrowest  part. 
i^e,  bring  tlie  middle  of 

auce  from  Lake  Huron, 
es  from  the  shore  and 
extend  from  the  south- 
ction  for  1  mile. 

Cockburn  islands.  It 
the  southern  entrance, 
by  N.  Keep  the  west 
itranoe  from  the  soutli 


>  ' 


iC^ompass  Courses  and  Distances  on  the   Canadian   Side  of 

Lake  Huron, 

Port  Gratiot  to  Cape  Ipperwash. — When  1  mile  N.  E.  by 
.  from  the  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  £.,  24  miles,  ranging  on  the  point. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Bayfield.— When  i  mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from 
e  light,  steer  northeast,  52  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  the  piers. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Goderlch.— When  i  mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from 
e  light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  61^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  front 
range  light. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Point  Clark.— When  l  mile  N.  E.  by  N. 
>  from  the  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  79^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of 
ligbt. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Kincardine.— When  2  miles  W.  of  Point 
Clark,  steer  N.  N.  E.  :^  E.  4  miles,  then  K  E.  ^  E.  6  miles,  to  a  point  1 
''mile  west  from  front  light. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Sonthampton.— When  2  miFes  W.  of  Point 
Clark,  steer  N.  N.  E.  \  E.,  17  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  west  of  Inverha- 
.ron,  thence  N.  E.  f  N.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  northwest  of  Chantry 
Ibland  light. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay.— When  i 
mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from  the  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  \  E.,  163  miles,  to  a  point 
Z  miles  W.  f  N.  of  Cove  Island  light,  giving  Gat  point  a  berth  of  1^  miles. 

Fort  Gratiot  to  Great  Duck  Island  Light.— When  i  mile 
iSr.  E.  by  N.  from  the  light,  steer  N.  ^  W.,  182^  miles,  to  the  light. 

Bayfield  to  Goderich. — When  1^  miles  west  of  Bayfield,  steei 
ttorth,  12  miles,  to  a  poiut  1  mile  west  of  Goderich. 

'<     Goderich  to  Kincardine. — When  l  mile  west  of  front  range 
ght,  steer  N.  ^  W.,  23  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Point  Clark 
ight,  thence  N.  N.  E.  \  E.,  4  miles,  when  steer  N.  £.  \  E.,  6  miles,  to  a 
int  1  mile  west  of  front  light  on  north  pier. 

Goderich  to  Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay.— When  2  miles 
est  of  Point  Clark,  as  in  the  course  to  Kincardine,  steer  N.  ^E.,  88 
iles,  to  a  point  3  miles  W.  f  N.  from  Cove  Island  light. 

Goderich  to  Inverhuron  and  Southampton.— When  2 

lllilts  west  of  Point  Clark,  as  in  the  course  to  Kincardine,  steer  N.  N.  E. 
jl  E.,  17  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  west  of  Inverhuron,  thence  N.  E.  \  N., 
19  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  northwest  of  Chantry  Island  light. 

Goderich  to  the  Straits  of  Mackinac  and  St.  Mary's 
iver. — When  1  mile  west  of  front  range  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.,  140 
iles,  to  a  point  5  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Presque  Isle  light,  thence  to  the 
_,  ►nth  channel  N.  W.  by  W.  #  W.,  47  miles,  or  until  Spectacle  Reef  light 
'  Wrs  N.  E.  8  m"'  s  and  the  east  point  of  Bois  Blano  island  N.  W.  f  N. 
||ie  sanie  distance,  when  steer  due  west,  8  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters 
<j(f  a  mile  north  of  Cheboygan  light.  To  pass  through  the  north  chan- 
nel, when  5  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Presque  Isle  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W. 
^W.,  68  miles,  to  a  point  one-half  mile  north  of  Bois  Blano  light,  thenoe 
W.  f  N.,  9^  miles,  to  Mackinac.  When  6  miles  E.  N.  E.  from  Presque 
lie  light,  steer  N.  N".  W.  |  W.,  46  miles,  ranging  on  Detour  light  to 


mitm 


118 


LAKE    HURON. 


within  2  miles  of  it,  and  in  range  with  Frying  Pan  Island  light  and  Pipe 
Island  light,  when  haul  up  on  this  range  heading  N.  ^  W.  nearly.  When 
see  directions  for  entering  Straits  of  St.  Mary. 

Goderich  to  Straits  of  Mississagua.— When  i  mile  west 
of  front  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  165  miles,  until  the  light  bears 
northeast  2  miles  distant. 

Kincardine  to  Saginaw  River.— When  i  mile  west  of  front 
light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  91  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  northwest  of  Charity 
Island  light,  passing  1^  miles  north  of  Port  Austin  light,  then  S.  W.  by 
S.,  33  miles,  to  the  ouoys  at  the  entrance  to  the  cut. 

Kincardine  to  Straits  of  Mackinac— When  i  mile  west  of 
front  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  120  miles,  to  a  point  5  miles  E.  N.  E.  of 
Presque  Isle  light,  when  see  course  from  Goderich  to  thb  Straits  of 
Mackinac. 

Kincardine  to  Detour  Passage. — When  i  mile  west  of  front 
light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  164  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  8.  E.  f  E.  of 
Detour  light.     See  directions  for  entering  St.  Mary's  river. 

Kincardine  to  Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay.— When  i 
mile  west  of  front  light,  steer  N.  ^  W.,  80^  miles,  to  a  point  8  miles  W. 
f  N.  of  Cove  Island  light. 

Kincardine  to  Fort  Gratiot.— When  2  miles  west  of  front 
light,  steer  S.  W.  ^  S.,  9  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Point  Clark 
light;  thence  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  19^  miles,  or  until  Fort  Gratiot  light  bears 
S.  W.  by  S.,  1  mile  distant. 

Kincardine  to  Sand  Beach. — When  2  miles  west  of  front 
light,  steer  W.  8.  W.  ^  S.,  52  miles,  to  a  point  1  mil  i  east  of  main  light. 

Soutliampton  to  Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay.— Whsn 
2^  miles  northwest  of  Chantry  Island  light,  steer  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  68^ 
miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  W.  f  K.  of  Cove  Island  light. 

Southampton  to  Detour. — When  2^  miles  N.  W.  of  Chantry 
Islarid  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  W.,  165  miles,  ranging  on  Detour  light  and 
within  l^  miles  and  in  range  of  Frying  Pan  Island  and  Pipe  Island  lights, 
when  haul  in  on  the  range. 

Southampton    to   Straits   of    IVIaclcinao.  —  Whe^    ii 

miles  northwest  of  Chantry  Island  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.,  113  miles, 
to  a  point  5  miles  E.  N.  E.  of  Presque  Isle  light,  when  see  course  from 
Goderich  to  Straits  of  Mackinac. 

Southampton  to  Saginaw  River.-— When  2^  miles  north- 
west of  Chantry  Island  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  106  miles,  to  a  point  3 
miles  northwest  of  Charity  Island  light,  thence  S.  W.  by  S.  33  miles  to 
the  buoys  at  the  entrance  to  the  cut. 

Southampton  to  Sand  Beach.— When  2^  miles  northwest 
of  Chantry  Island  light,  steer  S.  W.  |-  W.,  76  nill«8,  to  the  main  entrance 
to  the  harbor. 

Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay  to  Straits  of  Maclcinac. 

— When  J  mile  N.  of  Cove  Island  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  124  miles,  or 
until  Spectacle  Reef  light  bears  N.  E.  8  miles,  and  the  east  point  of  Bois 
Blanc  island  N.  W.  f  N.  the  same  distance,  when  steer  due  west  8  mileis, 
to  a  point  f  mile  north  of  Cheboygan  light. 

Entrance   to   Georgian   Bay  to  Detour   Passage.— 


LAKE    HUKOM. 


119 


and  light  and  Pipe 
W.  nearly.    When 

-When  1  mile  west 
til  the  light  beara 

.  mile  west  of  front 
thwest  of  Charity 
ght,  then  S.  W.  by 

Vhen  1  mile  west  of 
miles  E.  N.  E.  of 
a  to  thfc  Straits  of 

1  mile  west  of  front 
es  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  of 
river. 

d  Bay.— When  1 
a  point  3  miles  W. 

miles  west  of  front 

38t  of  Point  Clark 

Gratiot  light  bears 

niles  west  of  front 
east  of  main  light. 

an  Bay.— When 

.  by  W.  f  W.,  68i 
t. 

N.  W.  of  Chantry 
n  Detour  light  and 

Pipe  Island  lights, 

lac.  —  Wheu  ki 
by  W.,  113  miles, 
see  course  from 

|en  2^  miles  north- 
miles,  to  a  point  3 
[.  by  8.  33  milea  to 

l^  miles  northwest 
the  main  entrance 

of  Mackinac. 

r.  iN.,  124  miles,  or 
east  point  of  Boia 
ir  due  west  8  milen, 


When  3  miles  W.  f  N.  of  Cove  Island  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  56^ 
miles,  to  apoint  8  miles  soath  of  Ghreat  Duck  Island  light,  when  steer 
N.  W.  I  W.,  55  miles,  to  a  point  two  miles  S.  S.  E.  f  E.  of  Detour  light, 
when  see  directions  for  entering  St.  Mary's  river. 

Entrance  to  Georgian  Bay  to  Mackinac,  North  of 
Bois  Blanc  Island. — When  f  mile  N.  of  Cove  Island  light,  steer 
i  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  119  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  Spectacle  Reef  light- 
[house,  thence  W.  N.  W.,  15  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  north  of  Bois  Blanc 
IHght-house,  when  steer  W.  f  N.,  9^  miles,  to  the  middle  of  Mackinac 
Iharbor. 

Entrance  to  Georg^ian  Bay  to  Thunder  Bay.— When  3 
"miles  W.  f  N.  of  Cove  Island  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  74  miles,  to  a 
point  1 J  miles  S.  by  E.  f  E  from  North  point. 

Mississagua  Pasisage  to   Straits  of  Mackinac  and 

^^etour  PaHSage. — When   1   miles  S.    W.  ^  8.  from  MississagUa 

Straits  light,  steer  w.  f  S.,  54  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile 

lorth  of  Cheboygan  light,  or  W.  ^  N.,  53  miles,  to  a  point  one  half  mile 

)rth  of  Bois  Blanc  light,  or  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  28  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles 

MBOutheast  of  Detour  light. 

False  Detour  Passag^e  to  Straits  of  Mackinac— When 

miles  west  of  Point  Smith,  and  3  miles  S.  S.  W.  of  the  west  point  of 
itrance  to  False  Detour  passage,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  44  miles,  to  a 
>int  three-quarters  of  a  mile  north  of  Cheboygan  light,  passing  close  to 
le  south  end  of  Spectacle  reef,  or  W.  ^  S.,  42  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
^orth  of  Bois  Blanc  light. 

Catling  Distances  on  Lake  Huron,  etc.,  from  Fort  Gratiot  to 

Old  Fort  Mackinac. 


mr   Passagre. 


rrt 


120 


GKORGIAX    BAY. 


G'^ORGIAN  BAY. 


Light-Houses,  Buoys  and  Harbors. 

ISLE  OF  COVES  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving  white 
light,  interval  of  revolutions?  seconds,  2d  order,  visible  15  miles.  White,  ^  ^ 
circular  stone  tower,  86  feet  high.  On  Gig  point,  the  north  extremity  of  v 
Cove  island,  entrance  to  Georgian  bay.  In  thick  and  foggy  weather  a 
fog  horn,  operated  by  compressed  air,  will  give  blasts  of  10  seconds'  , 
duration,  with  intervals  of  110  seconds  between  the  blasts.  Fog  signal 
stands  about  200  yards  westward  of  light.  Northeastward  200  yards 
from  the  light  is  a  rook  2  feet  high,  which,  as  well  as  the  remainder  of 
Gig  point,  may  be  approached  to  within  100  yards.  The  shore  from  Gig 
to  Gat  point  is  fairly  bold,  and  the  light,  kept  well  open  of  Gat  point, 
leads  to  the  northwestward  of  the  shoal  water  extending  in  a  southwes- 
terly direction  300  yards  from  Gat  point.  N.  E.  point  of  Flower  Pot 
island,  E.  by  8.  i  S.,  6  miles.  S.  W.  point  of  Echo  island,  S.  E.  by  E., 
2f  miles.  Gat  point,  W.  S.  W.  \  S.,  1\  miles.  S.  side  of  Snake  island, 
E.  i  N.,  5i  miles. 

MAIN  CHANNEL,  or  principal  entrance  into  Georgian  bay  from 
Lake  Huron,  lies  between  Cove  and  Lucas  islands. 

Bad  Neighbor  Rock. — Black  spar  buoy,  in  6^  fathoms  of  water, 
on  the  southern  portion  of  the  rock.  This  buoy  is  situated  close  to  a 
patch  of  11  feet,  and  bears  S.  by  W.  \  W.,  distant  400  yards  from  the 
north  and  shallowest  end  of  the  rock,  which  has  only  3  feet  on  it.  The 
buoy  bears  also  N.  N.  W.  -J  W.,  distant  2i  miles  from  Cove  Island  light. 
A  vessel  may  pass  close  to  the  southward  of  the  buoy,  but  if  passing 
northward  it  should  receive  a  berth  of  half  a  mile.  The  north  end  of  ' 
the  shoal  bears  N.  N.  W.,  2j  miles,  from  Cove  Island  light,  and  8.  \  E., 
nearly  2  miles,  from  the  south  point  of  Lucas  island.  This  reef  rises 
abruptly  from  the  bottom  on  the  east  and  south  sides,  there  being  30 
fathoms  within  160  yards.  To  pass  southwestward  of  this  rock,  keep 
Eagle  point  on  the  north  side  of  Cove  island,  in  rh  '^e  with  northeast 
extreme  of  Gig  point,  S.  E.  J  8. 

West  Sister  and  East  Sister  are  two  rocky  patches,  on  each 
of  which  there  is  a  depth  of  21  feet.  They  bear  N.  W.  4  and  3^  miles 
respectivelv  from  Cove  Island  light.  To  pass  between  them  and  Bad 
Neighbor,  keep  Eagle  point  of  Cove  island  m  line  with  the  north  extrem- 
ity of  Gig  point,  8.  E.  ^  S.  To  pass  southward  of  the  Sisters,  bring  the 
south  end  of  Echo  island  to  touch  Cove  Island  light-house,  S.  E.  by  E. 
Vessels  of  heavy  draught  in  bad  weather  should  use  the  latter  range,  as 
Echo  island  is  more  easily  recognized  than  Eagle  point,  and  the  sea  will 
probably  be  more  regular. 

Eagfle  Point,  bluff  and  steep-to,  is  situated  half-way  between 
North  Otter  island  and  Cove  Island  light-house.  In  the  large  bight 
formed  between  Eagle  point  and  North  Otter  island,  sailing  vessels  may 
find  shelter  from  southerly  and  westerly  winds  in  16  fathoms  sand  and 
mud,  half  a  mile  from  shore.  A  sailing  vessel  should  not  anchor  nearer 
Cove  island  than  this  distance,  so  that  in  the  event  of  a  shift  of  wind  to 
the  northward,  she  may  have  good  room  to  get  under  way;  more  ospct!- 


m 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


121 


'bors. 

— A  revolving  white 
ible  16  miles.  Wliite, 
le  north  extremity  of 
.nd  foggy  weather  a 
)lasts  of  10  seconds* 
8  blasts.  Fog  signal 
beastward  200  yards 
as  the  remainder  of 
The  shore  from  Gig 
I  open  of  Gat  point, 
riding  in  a  southwes- 
joint  of  Flower  Pot 
►  island,  S.  E.  by  E., 
side  of  Snake  island, 

;o  Georgian  bay  from 

6^  fathoms  of  water, 
I  situated  close  to  a 
;  400  yards  from  the 
y  3  feet  on  it.  The 
ra  Cove  Island  light. 
buoy,  but  if  passing 
The  north  end  of 
d  light,  and  8.  \  K, 
ind.  This  reef  rises 
ides,  there  being  30 
of  this  rock,  keep 
'^e  with  northeast 

cy  patches,  on  each 
W.  4  and  3^  miles 
een  them  and  Bad 
th  the  north  extrera- 
le  Sisters,  bring  the 
•house,  S.  E.  by  E. 
the  latter  range,  aH 
nt,  and  the  sea  will 

half-way  between 
In  the  large  bight 
sailing  vessels  may 

fathoms  sand  and 
d  not  anchor  nearer 

a  shift  of  wind  to 
r  way;  more  espo*!- 


J? 


lily  as  the  water  does  not  materially  lessen  its  depth  until  within  200 
rards  of  the  shore. 

GREAT  BARRIER.— Snake  island  is  a  narrow  ridge  of  small 

mlders,  elevated  5  feet  above  the  bay,  and  forming  the  southeastern 

}rminu8  of  an  extensive  rocky  bank  on  the  Georgian  bay  side  of  the 

Entrance  known  as  Great  Barrier.     This  narrow,  dry  ridge,  called  Snake 

Bland,  is  nearly  600  yards  long,  the  southeast  end  being  bare  and  white, 

rhile  the  opposite  end  has  upon  it  two  conspicuous  bushes.     Scattered 

stones  lie  northwestward  of  the  latter  a  distance  of  360  yards. 

Snake  Island  Bank,  under  the  depth  of  18  feet,  extends  west- 
^rard  1  mile  from  this  bushy  end  of  Snake  island,  and  from  the  bare 
•xtreme  is  continued  200  yards  further,  making  the  total  length  of  the 
■hoal  1^  miles,  with  an  average  width  of  a  little  over  one-third  of  a  mile. 
Confiance  Shoal,  with  19  feet  of  water  over  it,  lies  with  itsnear- 
#et  part  distant  600  yards,  W.  S.  W.,  from  the  west  extreme  of  Snake 
Island  bank.  This  shoal  is  rather  more  than  one-third  of  a  mile  long 
lorthwest  and  southeast,  and  600  yards  broad.  The  ^all  of  Cabot  head, 
range  with  the  south  extreme  of  Bear's  Rump,  E.  S.  E.,  leads  south  of 
>nfiance  Shoal.  The  southwest  end  of  Fitzwilliam  island,  in  one  with 
te  northeast  side  of  Teo  island,  N.  W.  \  N.,  leads  across  the  south  end 
"  it,  in  23  feet  of  water. 

White  Shingle,  is  the  name  given  to  a  collection  of  stones  for- 
merly 2  or  3  feet  above,  but  now  covered  by  1  foot  of  water.     The  center 
Mrs  from  Cove  Island  light  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  distant  4  miles,  and  under 
le  depth  of  4  feet  it  is  600  yards  long,  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.      At  this 
[stance  due  east  from  its  center,  is  another  shoal  spot  with  6  feet  over  it. 
le  whole  of  White  Shingle  bank  under  the  depth  of  12  feet  is  nearly 
If  a  mile  long,  east  and  west,  by  one-fourth  of  a  mile  in  width.      A 
jssel  may  stand  towards  this  bank,  and  to  the  whole  of  the  Great   Bar- 
ler  from  the  southwestward,  until  the  southwest  extreme  of  Fitzwilliam 
^land  is  in  line  with  the  northeast  extreme  of  Yeo  island  bearing  N.  W. 
N.     The  Great  Barrier  may  be  crossed  between  Snake  Island  bank  and 
'^hite  Shingle  by  keeping  the  east  side  of  Echo  island  in  line  with  the 
.'■irest  fall  (not  the  extreme  point)  of  North  Otter  island,  S.  W.  \  S.,  with 
'  ^ot  less  than  21  feet.     The  west  side  of  Echo  island  touching  northeast 
tooint  of   Cove  island   (Otter  island  channel),  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  leads 
Detween  the  same  two  banks,  with  the  least  depth  of  f>\  fathoms. 

Til  ton  Reef,  with  depth  varying  from  11  to  21  feet,  is  one  mile 

jjong  in  a  northwest  and  southeast  direction,  with  an  average  breadth  of 

Ibalf  a  mile.     It  is  the  next  shoal  northwest  of  White  Shingle  bank,  being 

•^parated  therefrom  by  a   narrow  lane   of  water,   with   a   depth    of   6 

"fathoms.     To  cross  the  Great  Barrier  over  the  western  part  of  Tilton 

jpeef,  with  not  less  than  21  feet,  keep  the  whole  of  North  Otter  island  a 

'Ittle  open  westward  of  Echo  island  S.  \  W.     The  southwest  extreme  of 

Titzwiiliam  island  in  line  with  the  northeast  end  of  Yeo  island,  N.  W.  \ 

T.,  loads  southwest;  and  the  south  point  of  Bear's  Rump  touching  Snake 

land  bushes,  S.  E.  \  E.,  leads  northwest  of  Tilton  reef. 

Anderson  Ledge,  the  north westermost  shoal  on  the  Great  Bar- 
tier,  its  shoalest  spot  of  13  feet  boars  E.  \  S.,  nearly  1^  miles  from  the 
ilortheast  part  of  Lucas  island.  The  southwest  extreme  of  Yeo  island. 
Id  line  with  the  northwest  end  of  Lucas  island,  W.  by  N.  *  N.,  leads 
iieast  of  this  shoal  s[)ot.   In  thick  weather,  or  at  night.  Hie  portion 


122 


OEOROIAN    BAT. 


of  the  Great  Barrier  northwestward  of  Confiance  shoal  should  not  be 
approached  to  a  less  depth  than  10  fathoms. 

LiUCas  Island,  lOO  feet  high,  is  situated  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  distant  a 
little  more  than  4f  miles  from  Cove  Island  light-house.  The  west  and 
south  sides  of  this  island  are  steep-to. 

Lucas  Island  Reef,  with  depths  under  6  feet,  extends  in  an  east 
southeasterly  direction  from  the  northeast  part  of  the  island,  460  yards. 
To  pass  eastward  of  this  reef,  keep  the  east  fall  of  Fitzwilliam  island 
open  the  breadth  of  James  island,  eastward  of  the  latter,  N.  by  E.  ^  E. 
The  southwest  extreme  of  Yeo  island  touching  the  south  end  of  Lucas 
island,  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  leads  south  of  Lucas  Island  reef.  To  pass 
northward  of  it,  keep  the  whole  of  Yeo  island  well  open  northwest  of  Lucas 
island. 

LiUCas  GhanneTi.  -There  is  a  deep  passage  between  Lucas  island 
and  Anderson  ledge  (the  northwest  end  of  the  Great  Barrier),  over  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  with  depths  varying  from  5  to  20  fathoms.  To 
Eass  through  this  channel  from  tlie  southward,  keep  the  south  end  of 
long  beach  (  l^itzwilliam  island)  in  line  with  the  east  side  of  James  island, 
N.  by  E.,  until  the  southeast  side  of  T  o  island  appears  on  end,  bearing 
W.  by  S,  when  a  vessel  may  haul  to  ti*e  northeastward,  being  well  clear 
of  the  Great  Barrier. 

TOBERMORY  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light, 
visible  8  miles.  White,  hexagonal  wood  tower,  light  40  feet  above  lake 
level.  Red  iron  lantern.  On  the  southeast  extreme  of  Light-house 
point.     At  water's  edge,  west  side  of  entrance. 

Tobermory  Harbor  is  situated  at  the  northwest  extremity  of 
Saugeen  peninsula,  and  contains  perfect  shelter  from  all  winds.  Both  it 
and  the  approach  thereto  are  free  from  danger.  The  best  shelter  is  in 
the  southwest  arm,  making  fast  to  the  western  shore,  which  is  steep-to. 

The  Southwest  Arm  extends  from  Light-house  point  "W.  by 
S.  i  S.,  900  yards,  with  an  average  width  of  100  yards;  7  to  8  fathoms 
over  mud  bottom  will  be  found  all  over  this  arm,  excepting  near  the  bot- 
tom, when  a  muddy  flat  extends  120  yards  to  the  depth  of  18  feet.  The 
harbor  being  too  narrow  for  vessels  to  lie  at  anchor  they  are  compelled 
to  make  fast  to  the  shore,  for  which  purpose  the  Government  has  had 
ring-bolts  sunk  into  the  rocks. 

Eastern  Arm. — From  North  point  shoal  water  extends  70  yards 
southwestward,  and  thence  to  Rixton  rock  in  Shoal  bight;  vessels  pro- 
ceeding to  Eastern  arm  should  give  it  the  necessary  berth.  Rixton's 
rock  is  S.  E.  ^  E.,  nearly  1^  cables  from  the  westerly  extreme  of  North 
point.     It  is  2  feet  high. 

Middle  Point  is  the  name  given  to  the  land  dividing  the  two 
arras,  and  on  the  eastern  side  of  it  is  an  indentation  known  as  Fisherman 
cove.  From  this  cove  shoal  wcter  extends  halfway  across  Eastern  arm, 
but  may  be  avoided  by  keeping  the  eastern  shore  on  board. 

Bear's  Rump  is  the  name  given  to  an  island  having  somewhat 
the  outline  of  that  animal.  Its  northeast  end  is  faced  by  a  steep  cliflf,  80 
feet  high,  the  summit  of  the  island  being  considerably  higher.  The 
southwest  side  is  low,  and  from  it  extends  for  a  quarter  of  a  mile  a  reef 
known  as 

Bear*s  Rump  Slioal. — To  pass  south  of  this  reef  keep  Cove 


ai 


I 
d 
C 


OEO&OIAN    BAY. 


123 


hoal  should  not  be 

^  W.  i  W.,  distant  a 
se.     The  ^eat  and 

>,  extends  in  an  east 
e  island,  450  yards. 

Fitzwilliam  island 
ter,  K  by  E.  ^  E. 
outh  end  of  Lucas 
nd  reef.     To   pass 

northwest  of  Lucas 

ween  Lucas  island 
Carrier),  over  three- 
io  20  fathoms.  To 
»  the  south  end  of 
ide  of  James  island, 
rs  on  end,  bearing 
3,  being  well   clear 

.  fixed  red  light, 
40  feet  above  lake 
le  of   Light-house 

west  extremity  of 
ill  winds.  Both  it 
best  shelter  is  in 
which  is  steep-to. 
)use  point  "W.  by 
s;  7  to  8  fathoms 
•ting  near  the  bot- 
k  of  18  feet.  The 
ey  are  compelled 
ernment  has  had 

extends  70  yards 
)ight;  vessels  pro- 
berth.  Rixton's 
xtreme  of  North 

iividing  the  two 
wn  as  Fisherman 
'OSS  Eastern  arm, 
ard. 

aving  somewhat 
y  a  steep  cliflf,  80 
ly  higher.  The 
r  of  a  mile  a  reef 

reef  keep  Cove 


[island  light  shut  in  with  the  north  end  of  Flower-pot  island,  an  espeoial- 
hy  good  mark  at  night.  The  northwest  side  of  Doctor  island,  touching 
fthe  east  side  of  Middle  island  W.  S.  W.,  leads  southeastward  of  this 
Ishoal;  and  to  pass  northwestward  of  it,  keep  the  same  part  of  Doctor 
luland  in  one  with  the  southeast  side  of  Flower-pot  island,  S.  W.  by  W. 
liW. 

Flower-pot  Island  derives  its  name  from  two  isolated  rocks  on 
|it8  east  shore.  The  castle  is  a  detached  cliffy  portion  of  this  island,  at 
Ithe  northeast  extremity,  elevated  200  feet.  A  spit  extends  off  the  south 
[point  of  the  island  200  yards,  and  a  bar  of  rocks  lies  across  the  mouth 
fof  Beachy  cove,  on  the  southeast  side  of  Flower-pot  island;  the  re- 
fmainder  of  the  shores  of  the  island  is  bold. 

Middle  Island,  small  and  round,  lies  between  Flower-pot  island 
and  Tobermory  harbor,  and  is  steep-to  on  all  sides. 

Echo  Island,  140  feet  high.  If  miles  westward  of  Flower-pot 
island,  is  steep-to  on  all  sides. 

Otter     Islands    are    separated  from  northeast  point    of  Cove 
land  by  Otter  island  channel,  which  has  deep  water,  with  the  exception 
"  a  small  rock  with  10  feet  on  it;  100  yards  westward  of  North  Otter, 
d  nearly  200  yards  from  its  southwest  extreme. 

Doctor  Island,  lying  between  the  north  extreme  of  Russell  island 
d  Tobermory  harbor,  has  deep  water  close  to  all  but  its  northeast  side, 
hence  a  reef  extends  100  yfirds. 

Half-Moon  Island,  12  feet  high,  is  650  yards  long,  N.  W.  by 
W.  and  S.  E.  by  E.,  and  about  100  yards  wide.  It  lies  about  8  miles  N. 
E.  by  N.  from  the  Bear's  Rump,  and  the  same  distance  south  of  Lonely 
island.  It  is  composed  of  small  stones,  with  a  few  small  trees  in  two 
damps.  The  north  and  east  sides  may  be  approached  to  200  yards,  but 
from  the  east  and  west  points  and  the  south  side  there  extends  out  to  the 
Bouthwestward  for  a  distance  of  2  miles,  a  large  area  of  shallow  water 
with  depth  under  10  fathoms,  known  as  Half-moon  bank;  nearly  1  mile, 
8.  S.  W.,  from  the  east  point  of  the  island  there  is  a  depth  of  3^  fath- 
oms, and  a  third  of  a  mile  nearer,  only  10  feet.  The  west  side  of  Lonely 
island  open  east  of  Half-moon  island  N.  ^  W.  leads  eastward  of  the 
shoal. 

Cabot  Head  may  be  easily  identified  by  its  three  limestone  cli£p8, 
known  as  Boulder,  Middle,  and  West  bluflfs,  the  last  of  which  is  810  feet 
high.  The  eastern  one  derives  its  name  from  the  huge  moss-covered 
stone  near  the  edge. 

Darl\ng*s  Reef.— A  rock  with  17  feet  of  water  over  it,  which 

1  will  be  known  as  Darling's  reef,  has  been  discovered  by  Commander 

[Boulton,  R.  N.  in  the  Goorgian  bay.     It  lies  approximately  N.  E.  by  E., 

distant  2^  miles  from  Cape  Chin,  and  2  miles  'nside  the  line   joining 

[Cabot  Head  and  Capo  Croicer. 

Surprise  Shoal,  which  lies  8  miles  N.  N.  W.  i  W.  from  the  east 
;  point  of  Cape  Croker,  is  marked  with  a  black  spar  buoy,  placed  near  a 
shoal  f.pot  with  t!<jfht  feet  cf  water  on  it.  The  MoNab  rock,  with  13  feet 
of  water  over  it,  lies  E.  i  S.,  a  little  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  buoy 
on  Surprise  shoal.  At  McNab  rock  Cape  Croker  is  in  line  with  the 
middle  of  Griffith's  island;  and  the  west  extreme  of  Barrier  island  is 
under  the  foot  of  the  high  bluff  of  Cape  Dundas.     A  vessel   ])assing 


124 


GEORGIAN   BAY. 


northeastward  of  both  of  these  dangers  should  keep  the  whole  of  Griffith's  island 
open  of  Cape  Croker.  The  line  joining  Cabot  head  and  Cape  Croker  leads  inside  or 
southwestward  of  the  same. 

GRIFFITH'S  ISLAIID  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  3d 
order,  visible  17  miles.  Wnite  circular  stone  tower.  On  the  northeast  end  of  the 
island,  20  miles  from  Owen  8ound.  Point  Rich  bears  8.  E.  4-  E.,  16  miles.  Cape 
Croker  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  8  miles.     The  shores  of  the  island  are  steep-to. 

WIARTON  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  6  miles.  Lens 
lantern  suspended  from  a  mast  15  feet  high  vith  a  white  shed  at  the  base.  Near  the 
outer  end  of  the  breakwater  at  Wiarton,  at  the  head  of  Colpoy's  bay.  The  break- 
water is  380  feet  long  and  25  feet  in  widtli,  near  the  head  of  the  harbor  on  the  west 
side,  good  anchorage  at  the  head  of  the  bay  in  from  3  to  5  fathoms.  The  bay  is  pro- 
tectea  at  its  mouth  by  three  large  islands,  and  is  free  from  obstructions,  except  Gun- 
derson's  shoal,  with  three  feet  of  water  over  it,  li  miles  W.  by  8.  i  S.  from  Kid's 
point,  southwest  point  of  White  Cloud  island.  Wiarton  is  the  terminus  of  tlie 
Georgian  Bay  and  Lake  Erie  Branch  of  the  Grand  Trunk  Railway.  It  is  30  miles  to 
the  northwestward  of  Owen  Sound. 

ITIcKGNZIE'S  WHARF  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  12  miles.  White,  square,  wood  tower,  light  35  feet  above  lake  level.  On 
Presque  Isle.     Owen  8ound  range  lights  bear  8.  by  W.  i  W.,  8^  miles. 

OWEN  SOUND.— Front  light  fixed,  red.  visible  6  miles.  White  with  vertical 
red  stripe  facing  channel;  square  wood  tDwer,  23  feet  high.  On  block  on  starboard 
side  of  dredgfcd  channel,  about  800  yards  outside  the  end  of  west  pile-work  embank- 
ment at  mouth  of  river. 

Oiiren  Sound.— Back  light,  fixed  white,  visible  11  miles.  White,  with  verti- 
cal red  stripe  facing  channel;  light  39  feet  above  lake  level.  On  west  pile  work, 
1,520  feet  8.  W.  i  8.  from  front  light.  In  range  lead  to  dredged  channel  at  mouth  of 
river,  and  are  left  on  the  starboard  hand  in  entering  the  harbor. 

The  ToMrn  of  Oviren  Sound  is  situated  on  Sydenham  river,  which  flows 
into  the  head  of  Owen  Sound,  an  arm  of  Georgian  Bay.  It  is  the  terminus  of  the 
Toronto,  Grey  and  Bruce  Railway. 

The  harbor  works  consist  of  two  parallel  rows  of  pile-work,  200  feet 
apart,  extending  fj'om  the  shore  a  distance  of  600  feet,  together  with 
about  1,000  feet  of  bank  protection;  and  the  dredging  of  the  channel  of 
the  river,  from  the  upper  end  of  the  steamboat  wharf  to  its  mouth,  and 
from  thence  to  18  feet  of  water;  14  feet  can  be  carried  to  the  steamboat 
dock. 

Ratig^eS)  for  ascertaining  compass  errors,  have  been  established  at 
Owen  Sound,  by  which  vessels  navigating  the  sound  can  ascertain  the 
errors  of  their  compasses. 

On  the  northwest  shore  of  the  sound,  and  about  half  a  mile  beyond 
Findlay's  mill,  are  erected  four  posts.  That  nearest  the  shore  is  sur- 
mounted by  a  plain  white  triangle.  The  remaining  three  back  beacons 
have  marked  on  them  in  black  letters  S.  W.,  W.  and  N.  W.  These 
brought  in  line  with  the  aforesaid  triangular-top  beacon  will  point  out 
respectively  the  southwest,  west,  and  northwest  correct  magnetic  lines. 

A  similar  set  to  be  ranged  in  the  same  manner  is  erected  on  the  south- 
east shore,  on  a  clearing  between  the  French  village  and  Squaw  point. 
These  posts  indicate  the  east,  southeast  and  south  lines.  The  southeast 
side  of  Griffith's  island  just  in  sight  open  of  the  shore  near  Cape  Com- 
modore bears  N.  f  E. ;  Point  William  and  Squaw  point  in  one  may  be 
taken  for  the  N.  E.  line. 

Each  of  these  ranges  should  be  kept  exactly  ahead  for  a  short  inter- 
val until  the  difference  between  their  correct  bearing  and  the  ship's 
course  is  noted  as  the  error  on  that  particular  course. 

ME AFORD  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible 
13  miles.  White,  square,  wood  tower,  light  42  feet  above  lake  level. 
On  end  of  pier.  Point  Rich  bears  N.  by  W.  7J  miles.  Christian  Island 
light,  E.  N.  E.  i  N.,  25i  miles.  • 


OBOROIAN   BAT. 


125 


The  Town  of  Meaford  is  situated  on  Georgian  Bay,  18  miles  to 

the  westward  of  CoUingwood.    The  pier  is  on  the  west  bank  of  the  Big 

lead  river;  extends  oat  660  feet,  with  an  arm  200  feet  in  an  easterly 

lireotion  to  afford  protection  against  northeast  winds.     A  breakwater 

klO  feet  long  is  built  on  the  east  side  of  the  river.     The  least  water  now 

Is  14  feet  at  the  outer  end  and  11  feet  in  the  inner  harbor. 

THORNBURY  HARBOR  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 

sd  light,  shown  from  a  lens  lantern  hoisted  on  a  mast,  32  feet  above 
jlake  level,  visible  7  miles.     On  the  outer  end  of  the  west  breakwater 
>ier  at  the  entrance  to  harbor. 

Thornbury  is  situated  at  the  mouth  of  Beaver  river,  which  erap- 
^ties  into  Georgian  bay,  13  miles  from  CoUingwood.  A  channel  14  feet 
'deep  has  been  opened  through  the  shoal  or  bar  off  the  wharf,  and  the  out 
.alongside  the  pier  deepened  for  a  distance  of  300  feet. 

NOTTAWASAGA     ISLAND     LIGHT-STATION.— A 

(flashing  white  light,  2d  order,  interval  between  flashes  30  seconds,  visi- 
Ible  15  miles.  White,  circular,  stone  tower,  85  feet  high.  About  2^  miles 
[northwest  of  CoUingwood. 

A  red  sector  is  shown  in  the  light  on  Nottawasaga  island,  over  an 
laro  of  30  degrees,  from  Fisherman's  point  southwesterly,  covering 
ithe  whole  of  CoUingwood  harbor  and  the  dangerous  shoals  between 
[Nottawasaga  island  and  the  harbor.  Vessels  approaching  CoUingwood 
lliarbor  from  the  northwestward  should  keep  the  breakwater  pier  light 
UdM  open  northeastward  of  Nottawasaga  Island  light,  to  clear  the  Mary 
iWard  ledges,  and  after  passing  Nottawasaga  island  should  keep  north  of 
Ithe  red  sector,  with  the  white  light  in  sight,  until  the  breakwater  light 
[bears  S.  W.,  when  it  should  be  steered  for  on  that  bearing. 

Vessels  leaving  CoUingwood  should  steer  N.  E.  from  the  breakwater 
[pier  light  until  the  red  sector  of  Nottawasaga  Island  light  changes  to 
ttohite,  when  they  may  haul  to  the  northwestward. 

Caution. — Masters  of  heavy  draught  vessels  must  remember,  that  in 
|addition  to  the  continuous  rocky  bank  connecting  Nottawasaga  island 
land  the  breakwater  pier,  for  the  avoidance  of  which  this  red  sector  has 
[been  established,  there  exist  two  reefs  with  12  and  13  feet  water  on 
ithem,  the  former  being  known  as  Lafferty's  Home,  bearing  E.  by  S.  ^  8., 
il  miles,  and  the  other  called  George  Rock,  lying  E.  by  N.  f  N.  one- 
|4hird  of  a  mile,  from  Nottawasaga  Island  light-house. 

Oolllngwood  Breakwater  Light. — A  fixed  red  light,  visi- 
Ible  8  miles.  Framework  tower,  or  breakwater  pier.  Lafferty^s  Home 
loal  bears  N.  N.  E.  f  E.  1^  miles,  with  12  feet  of  water  on  it.  Entering 
[pass  about  150  feet  east  of  the  breakwater,  when  steer  for  the  inner  light 
[on  crib;  pass  it  on  the  east  side,  when  steer  for  the  lights  at  the  railway 
Freight  depot  with  the  inner  light  on  crib  over  the  stern.  There  is  good 
|water  at  the  railway  docks. 

CoUingwood  Inner  light.— A  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  a 
last,  with  white  shed  at  base,  on  crib.     At  the  turn  of  dredged  channel 
in  harbor.    Only  required  to  show  in  the  harbor. 

CoUingwood  is  situated  on  the  southern  shore  of  Georgian  bay^ 
and  is  90  miles  from  Toronto  by  rail.  It  is  the  terminus  of  the  Northern 
and  Northwestern  railway.  The  harbor  works  consist  of  an  outer  break- 
water, 700  feet  long,  extending  in  a  northeasterly  direction  from  the  west 
)oint  of  the  bay ;  and  <^  breakwater  1,200  feet  long  extending  in  a  north- 


126 


GEORGIAN   BAY* 


westerly  direction  from  the  north  wharf,  in  the  direction  of,  and  to 
within  600  feet  of  the  east  end  of  the  outer  breakwater.  The  present 
channel  is  270  feet  wide  and  14^  deep  at  low  water.  There  are  6  red 
baoys  on  the  edge  of  the  channel,  west  side,  one  just  outside  the  break- 
water, three  between  the  breakwater  and  the  crib,  on  which  the  inner 
light  is  placed,  and  one  inside  the  crib.  And  there  are  6  black  buoys  on 
thb  east  channel  bank,  one  outside  the  east  breakwater  and  5  inside. 

CHRISTIAN  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
white  light,  4th  order,  visible  16  miles.  White,  circular  tower,  60  feet 
high.  On  the  southeast  end  of  island,  about  2  miles  from  main-land. 
Nottawasaga  light  S.  S.  W.,  18^  miles.  A  10-foot  spot  bears  S.  by  E.  |  E. 
If  miles.  This  shoal  is  1  mile  from  mainland,  and  nearly  in  range  of  Point 
Gockburn.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  the  bay  north  of  the  light.  Keep 
about  mid  channel.     Depth  of  water  13  to  15  feet. 

HOPE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving  white 
light,  interval  of  revolution  1  minute,  visible  12  miles.  White,  square, 
wood  tower,  with  dwelling  attached.  On  northeast  point  of  island.  Gin 
Rock  light  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  14^  miles.  The  most  westerly  of  the  Western 
islands  N.  W.  ^  W.,  13^  miles.  The  shores  of  the  island  are  rocky,  and 
should  no  '>  be  approached  on  the  north  side  nearer  than  three-fourths  of 
a  mile. 

GIN  ROCK  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visi 
ble  10  miles.  White,  square,  wood  tower.  Entrance  to  Gloucester  Bay. 
For  guiding  vessels  into  Penetanguishene  and  Midland  harbors.  Whiskey 
Island  light  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  3^  miles. 

WHISKEY  ISLAND  LIGHT.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible 
11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  At  entrance  to  Penetanguishene 
harbor.     To  point  out  the  island  and  shoals  adjacent. 

PENETANGUISHENE  LIGHT-STATION.  —  A  fixed 
white  light,  visible  8  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  On  a  block 
built  on  the  outer  end  of  the  shoal  running  north  from  the  Reformatory 
point,  this  block  is  connected  with  the  shore  by  a  long  pier,  now  much 
out  of  repair.  It  is  on  the  south  side,  and  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand 
in  entering  the  harbor. 

LONE  ROCK  BELL  BUOY.— A  Bell  Buoy  painted  red  has 
been  moored  iu  48  feet  of  water  300  feet  from  the  Lone  Rock,  in  tiie 
Waubuno  Channel,  Georgian  Bay.  The  buoy  is  of  the  "  Brown  patent " 
pattern,  and  the  bell  is  rung  automatically  by  the  action  of  the  waves.  In 
very  smooth  weather  the  bell  may  not  sound.  The  buoy  must  be  kept 
on  the  starboard  hand  in  going  up  the  bay  to  the  northward,  as  there  is 
good  water  on  the  west  side  of  the  rock,  but  on  the  east  side  it  is  shoal. 
This  buoy  replaces  the  red  barrel  buoy. 

PARRY  SOUND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  13  miles.  White,  octagonal  wood  tower  on  pier.  On  Red  Reck. 
The  channel  up  to  the  harbor  is  marked  by  buoys  and  day  beacons.  Cabot 
head  W.  i  S.,  46  miles.     Owen  Sound  lights  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  61  miles. 

Clark  Rock,  with  9  feet  of  water  over  it,  lies  1^  miles  IS.  i  K. 
from  Red  Rook  light-house;  there  is  also  another  rock  with  14  feet  over 
it  1  mile  from  the  same  on  the  same  bearing. 

Point  au  Baril  Range  Lights.— Front  or  Outer  light.    A 


.  5t:!S 


OEOBOIAN  BAY. 


VAQa 


rection  of,  and  to 
Iter.  The  present 
There  are  5  red 
outside  the  break- 
a  which  the  inner 
•e  6  black  buoys  on 
ir  and  5  inside. 

.TION.— A  fixed 
ular  tower,  60  feet 
!S  from  main-land. 
t  bears  S.  by  E.  ^  E. 
rly  in  range  of  Point 
I  of  the  light.  Keep 

A  revolving  white 
s.  White,  square, 
loint  of  island.  Gin 
srly  of  the  Western 
and  are  rocky,  and 
an  three-fourths  of 

I  white  light,  visi- 
I  to  Gloucester  Bay. 
i  harbors.  Whiskey 

white  light,  visible 
to  Penetanguishene 

'ION. —  A  fixed 
wer.  On  a  block 
1  the  Reformatory 
g  pier,  now  much 
;  on  the  port  hand 

y  painted  red  has 
one  Rock,  in  the 
"  Brown  patent " 
)n  of  the  waves.  In 
loy  must  be  kept 
hward,  as  there  is 
»  side  it  is  shoal. 


sr. 


L  fixed  white  light, 
On  Red  Reck. 
ay  beacons.  Cabot 
4  W.,  61  miles. 

1^  iniies  IS.  ^  E. 
with  14  feet  over 

r  Outer  light.    A 


*4" 


fixijd  white  light,  visible  10  miles,  white,  aquare  wooden  tower,  33  feet 
high.  On  the  southern  extremity  of  Point  au  Baril,  close  to  the  edge  of 
the  water,  visible  from  ail  points  seaward. 

Rear  or  Inner  Light. — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  10  miles,  80 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  bay,  visible  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of 
the  line  of  range.  Square  open  frame  tower  surmounted  by  an  enclosed 
room  and  lantern;  the  frame  is  brown,  the  enclosed  part  white,  44  feet 
hiwh.  On  the  summit  of  an  island  in  the  inner  channel,  4,800  feet  E.  by 
S.^f  S.  from  from  light.  The  two  lights  in  range  lead  through  the 
channel  between  the  shoals  which  lie  off  the  point.  The  outer  light  is 
to  be  left  on  the  port  hand  in  entering,  the  inner  en  starboard  hand. 

Day  Beacons  at  Point  au  Baril.— Two  white  beacons  have 
been  erected  on  the  shore  2  miles  northwestward  of  Point  au  Baril  front 
range  light-house,  on  the  east  shore  of  the  Georgian  bay.  Kept  in  line 
bearing  N.  E.  ^  E.,  they  will  lead  a  vessel  northwest  of  the  shoals 
between  the  Black  Bills  and  Point  au  Baril.  This  range  will  be  found 
serviceable  in  daylight,  to  a  vessel  proceeding  to  Point  au  Baril  harbor 
from  the  southeastward.  It  intersects  the  Hne  of  the  Point  au  Baril 
range  light-houses,  at  2\  miles  distant  frc  a  the  front  one  of  the 
latter. 

Day  Beacons  in  inside  channel,  between  Point  au 
Baril  and  Parry  Sound. — Fifteen  beacons  (6  red  and  9  white) 
have  been  erected  between  Twin  island,  Sha-wa-na-ga  bay  and  Point  an 
Baril,  to  assist  in  the  navigation  of  part  of  the  inside  channel  leading 
to  Parry  sound,  on  the  east  side  of  Georgian  bay.  These  beacons  are 
not  placed  as  ranges  to  clear  shoals,  nor  is  it  intended  that  a  vessel 
should  rigidly  steer  from  one  to  the  other,  but  like  the  larger  beacons 
in  Parry  sound  itself,  they  are  for  the  purpose  of  affording  to  a  stran- 
ger an  indication  of  the  route  among  the  numerous  islands  off  this 
shore. 

In  proceeding  towards  Parry  sound,  a  vessel  should  keep  the  red 
beacons  on  her  starboard  hand. 

A  few  directions  are  now  given,  with  a  description  of  these  beacons, 
which  may  assist  a  stranger  drawing  not  more  than  10^  feet  in  getting 
through. 

The  inside  channel  between  Twin  Island  and  Point  au  Baril  may  be 
divided  into  three  parts  or  reaches,  the  southern,  widest  and  longest, 
being  a  part  of  Sha-wa-na-ga  bay;  the  northern  and  narrowest  division 
may  bo  termed  the  Point  au  Baril  reach,  the  remaining  portion  being 
considered  the  middle  reach. 

Of  the  beacons,  four  are  erected  in  Sha-wa-na-ga  bay,  viz. :  a  red  one 
surmounted  by  a  white  square  on  the  southeast  point  of  Twin  island,  a 
similar  one  on  the  soutlieast  extremity  of  Grave  or  Bald  island,  a 
white  beacon  and  triangle  on  the  summit  of  Lloyd  island  (situated  near 
the  latter),  and  another  of  the  same  character  on  Turning  island  at  the 
junction  of  Sha-wa-na-ga  bay  with  middle  reach.  To  reach  clear  of  the 
dangers  between  Twin  and  Grave  islands,  Turning  island  should  be 
kept  its  breadth  open  of  Grave  island.  Between  the  last  mentioned 
islands,  a  vessel  may  steer  from  one  beacon  to  the  other. 


120^ 


GBOROIAN   BAY. 


In  the  middle  reach,  there  aie  three  beacons,  which  includes  that  on 
Turning  island ;  the  little  rock  on  which  the  center  one  is  placed  being 
named  Pym  rock.  The  western  white  beacon  is  placed  on  Sedgewick 
point  near  the  junction  of  the  middle  and  Point  au  Baril  reaches. 
Between  Pym  rock  and  Sedgewick  point  beacons  a  vessel  should  keep 
nearer  the  north  shore  to  avoid  a  rock  with  6  feet  of  water  over  it, 
lying  on  the  south  side  of  the  channel. 

In  the  Point  au  Baril  reach  there  are  9  beacons,  4  of  which  are  red, 
to  be  kept  as  before  stated,  on  the  starboard  hand  when  proceeding  to 
Parry  sound. 

Tiae  two  southernmost  red  beacons  are  upon  Abbott  and  Passage 
islands,  between  the  latter  of  which  and  Sedgewick  point  is  the  narrow 
channel  generally  used,  although  (as  will  be  seen  when  the  chart  is  pub- 
lished) the  channel  between  the  next  island  and  Abbott  island  is  broader 
and  deeper. 

If  using  the  narrow  channel  keep  rather  nearer  Sedgwick  point  than 
Passage  island,  and  a  vessel  will  carry  15  feet  of  water  and  avoid  a 
shallow  rocky  spur  making  out  from  Passage  island. 

When  through  these  narrows,  the  first  white  beacon  come  to  marks 
the  south  point  of  a  bight,  the  coast  of  which  a  vessel  should  follow 
round,  in  order  to  avoid  a  rock  with  8  feet  of  water  over  it,  abreast  of 
and  connected  with  an  island  with  a  pole  on  it. 

In  the  bottom  of  this  bight  a  pair  of  small  white  beacons  should 
be  kept  in  line  to  lead  east  of  this  danger,  and  between  the  shoals  155 
yards  north  of  it,  with  14  feet  of  water. 

From  this  to  Point  au  Baril  harbor  a  vessel  has  only  to  keep  in  the 
middle  of  the  channel  pointed  out  by  the  remaining  beacons. 

When  past  the  northern  white  beacon  on  Sidney  island,  the  front 
light-house  may  be  steered  for;  and  if  going  out  into  Georgian  bay,  care 
must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  rock  with  4  feet  of  water  on  it,  lying  in  the 
middle  of  the  passage  north  of  Double  island,  by  keeping  close  to  its 
north  point  marked  by  the  fishermen  with  a  pole  and  red  barrel. 

Kennedy's  Bank. — A  spar  buoy  marked  with  white  and  black 
horizontal  bands,  has  been  placed  in  6i^  fathoms  of  water  on  Kennedy's 
bank,  which  has  9  feet  of  water  over  it.  The  buoy  bears  west  and  is 
distant  3^  miles  from  the  highest  Black  Bill  island.  The  water  is  good 
close  to  the  northeast  side  of  the  buoy,  but  a  vessel  passing  southwest 
should  give  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile. 

Morden  Rock. — A  spar  buoy,  marked  with  white  and  black 
horizontal  bands,  has  been  placed  in  6^  fathoms  100  yards  southwest- 
ward  of  Morden  rock,  with  8  feet  of  water  on  it,  situated  3  miles  south- 
ward of  the  line  of  the  Byng  Inlet  range  lights,  on  the  f^ame  coast. 

The  buoy  bears  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  and  is  distant  2i  miles  from  red 
rock  of  Byng  inlet. 

Although  there  is  deep  water  all  around  this  rock  it  is  advisable  for 
a  vessel  to  pass  southwestward  of  it  and  the  buoy. 

BYNG  INIiET  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  12  miles.    White,  square  wood  tower,  47  feet  high.     On  Gorcaux 


~  '"■tsimaiUK.- 


OKORylAN    BAY. 


127 


includes  that  on 
!  is  placed  being 
id  on  Sedgewick 
■u  Baril  reaches, 
ssel  should  keep 
f  water  over  it, 

f  which  are  red, 
m  proceeding  to 

3tt  and  Passage 
nt  is  the  narrow 
the  chart  is  pub- 
island  is  broader 

wick  point  than 
ter  and  avoid  a 

come  to  marks 
el  should  follow 
er  it,  abreast  of 

beacons  should 
n  the  shoals  155 

'  to  keep  in  the 
tons. 

land,  the  front 

>rgian  bay,  care 

it,  lying  in  the 

ng  close  to  its 

barrel. 

lite  and  black 
on  Kennedy's 
lars  west  and  is 
le  water  is  good 
sing  southwest 


lite  and  black 
rds  southwest- 
3  miles  south- 
tne  coast, 
ailes  from  red 

advisable  for 


white  light. 
On  GenMux 


t._i' 


island ;  to  guide  in  to  Byng  Inlet.  Point  Wingfield  S.  W.  i  W.,  48  miles. 
BuPtard  Rocks  light  N.  W.  f  W.,  17|  miles. 

Byng  Inlet  Range  Lights.    Front  Light.-— A  fixed  red 

liglit,'34  feet  above  water,  visible  8  miles  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side 
of  the  range.  Square,  white,  wooden  tower,  stands  close  to  the  channel, 
on  its  south  side  f  mile  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  from  the  light  on  Gereaux 
island. 

Rear  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  60  feet  above  water,  visible  18 
miles  over  a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  range.  E.  by  N.  1,620  feet 
from  the  Front  light.  Square,  white,  open  frame  wooden  tower,  the 
lantern  and  upper  story  are  enclosed,  and  the  side  facing  the  range  is 
slatted  for  a  day  mark. 

The  two  lights  in  range,  bearing  E.  by  N.,  lead  in  to  the  mouth  of 
Byng  inlet  through  the  best  water,  clear  of  the  Maganatawan  ledges  on 
the  south  and  Burton  bank  on  the  north  side. 

Roclc  in  the  Approach  to  French  River.— Staff-Com- 
mander Boulton,  R.  N.,  reports  that  a  rock  with  9  feet  over  it  at  mean 
water  (8  feet  at  the  present  time),  lies  W.  i  S.,  half  a  mile  from  the 
southwest  dry  rock  of  the  Bustards,  in  the  approach  to  French  ri^er. 

From  the  rock  the  main  light-house  appears  midway  between  the 
pine  tree  and  the  small  red  light-house. 

This  is  doubtless  the  reported  rook  referred  to  in  Notice  to  Marinenti 
No.  33  of  1888. 

BUSTARD  ROCKS  Range  Light.— Main  or  back  light,  fixed 
white,  visible  11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  On  a  rocky  islet  at 
entrance  to  French  river  A  lO-ioot  spot  bears  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  1} 
miles. 

Front  Range  Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  6  miles.  Red, 
square,  open-frame  wood  tower,  77  yards  N.  E.  ^  E.  from  the  last  described 
light.  After  rounding  the  Bustard  Rocks  these  two  lights  should  be  kept 
in  range  bearing  S.  W.  \  W.  until  the  two  range  lights  in  the  river  are 
brought  into  line,  bearing  N.  E.  by  N.  East  fall  of  Cabot  head  8.  8.  W. 
k  W.,  49  miles.  South  side  of  the  east  Papoose  Island  W.  ^  8.,  16^ 
miles. 

French  River  Range  Light. — Front  light  fixed  white,  visible 
6  miles.  White,  square,  open-frame  tower.  On  Lefroy  island  west  side 
of  mouth  of  river. 

French  River  Range  Light.— Back  light  fixed  red,  visible  6 
miles.  White,  square,  open-frame  wood  tower.  Near  the  creek,*  E.  side 
of  river  N.  E.  by  N.  f  mile  from.  Lefroy  Island  light. 

LONELY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  20  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  attached  to  dwelling.  On 
the  edge  of  cliff,  300  yards  back  from  the  north  shore  of  the  island, 
light  195  feet  above  lake  level.  Towards  Cabot  head  the  light  is  obscured 
by  the  southeastern  portion  of  the  island,  when  bearing  northward  of  N. 
N.W.  ^  W.  The  light  is  also  cut  off  by  the  wentern  and  southern  portion 
of  the  island. 

Lonely  Island  is  almost  circular  in  form;  greatest  diameter  1} 
miles.  It  lies  in  direct  line  between  Cabot  head  and  Cape  Smyth,  the 
east  extreme  of  the  island  bearing  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  distant  20  J  miles  from 
Cabot  head,  and  S.  by  E.  }  E.  15  miles  from  Cape  Smyth.     A  bank 


128 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


extends  from  the  north  and  northeast  sides  of  the  island.  There  are  not 
more  than  18  feet,  at  400  yards;  the  bight  in  the  south  shore  is  shoal  to 
the  line  of  its  points.  The  remainder  of  the  island  can  be  approached  to 
within  800  yards. 

Da^^son  Bock. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  placed  in  6^  fathoms  near 
the  north  extremity  of  Dawson  rock.  A  vessel  may  pass  close  north- 
eastward of  the  buoy,  but  on  all  other  sides  it  should  receive  a  berth  of 
not  less  than  l^-  miles.  Lonely  Island  light  bears  W.  S.  W.,  11  miles.  This 
shoal  is  1  mile  in  length  and  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  width.  The 
least  water  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  reef,  varying  from  4  feet  on  the 
southern  part  to  10  feet  on  the  north  extremity.  Young  Squaw  islet, 
situated  one-half  mile  noi'theast  from  the  entrance  of  Squaw  Island  har- 
bor, bears  N.  N.  W.  }  W.,  16^  miles  from  the  north  end  of  the  reef,  and 
Lonrly  Island  light  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  11  miles  from  the  south  end. 

Northeast  Shing^Ie  is  the  name  given  to  a  narrow  bank,  the 
shallowest  part  of  which,  800  yards  long  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  is  com- 
posed of  boulders,  on  which  there  is  only  2  to  6  feet  of  water.  This 
northern  portion  bears  from  Lonely  Island  light  N.  E.  ^  E.,  distant  4 
miles  and  generally  breaks.  In  addition  to  this  very  shallow  patch,  dan- 
gerously shoal  water  extends  from  it  in  a  N.  E.  and  8.  S.  W.  direction, 
half  a  mile  and  1  mile  respectively,  making  the  total  length  of  the  shoal 
1^  miles.  The  southern  extreme,  with  a  depth  of  12  feet,  bears  N.  E. 
by  E.,  distant  a  little  over  3  miles  from  the  light-house.  The  summit  of 
Fitzwilliam  island,  in  line  with  the  northwest  extrem'ty  of  Lonely  island, 
W.  by  S.,  leads  1  mile  southward  of  Northeast  Shingle.  The  southeast 
visible  extreme  of  Fitzwilliam  island  touching  the  same  part  of  Lonely 
island,  bearing  W.  S.  W.,  leads  a  quarter  of  a  mile  southeast  of  it,  with 
6  fathoms.  The  northwest  side  of  Fitzwilliam  island  in  line  with  the 
same  side  of  Club  island,  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  leads  northwestward  of  this 
Bhoal. 

In  thick  weather  a  vessel  should  not  approach  the  southeast  and  west 
sides  of  Northeast  Shingle  to  a  less  depth  then  20  fathoms.  On  the 
north  end  and  east  sides  she  may  shoal  to  10  fathoms. 

Club  Island  is  two  miles  long  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.,  with  a  max- 
imum breadth  of  one  mile,  the  northwest,  north  and  east  sides  are  fairly 
steep  to,  but  from  South  point.  Club  Island  ledge  extends  in  a  general  S. 
W.  by  S.  direction,  |-  of  a  mile,  at  which  distance  there  is  a  depth  of  3^ 
fathoms.  To  pass  eastward  of  this  ledge,  keep  the  point  of  Club  island, 
which  is  north  of  the  harbor,  well  open  east  of  South  point,  bearing  N. 
N.  E. 

The  east  extreme  of  Rabbit  island  in  line  with  the  same  side  of  Erie 
shingle,  N.  f  W.,  leads  west. 

The  south  end  of  White  cliff  (Manitoulin  island)  in  line  with  north- 
east point  of  Fitzwilliam  island,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  leads  1^  miles  south  of 
Club  Island  ledge. 

From  the  south  point  of  Club  island,  the  stony  shore  trends  in  a  N. 
N.  W.  direction,  nearly  If  miles  to  Back  cove  (a  shallow  indentation 
into  which  a  boat  may  carry  6  feet  of  water). 

From  this  shore  of  Club  island,  shoal  water  extends  an  average  dis- 
tance of  one-third  of  a  mile.  From  Back  oove,  the  coast  trends  northeast- 
ward, and  is  steep-to. 

OLUB  ISLAND  HARBOR,  with  its  entrance  on  the  east  side 
of  the  island  contains  excellent,  although  limited,  anchorage  in  3^  fathoms. 


'■« 


.--.J... 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


129 


id.  There  are  not 
;h  shore  is  shoal  to 
»  be  approached  to 

n  5^  fathoms  near 
'  pass  close  uorth- 
receive  a  berth  of 
W.,  11  miles.  This 
e  in  width.     The 
rom  4  feet  on  the 
)ung  Squaw  islet, 
Jquaw  Island  har- 
d  of  the  reef,  and 
uth  end. 

narrow  bank,  the 
S.  S.  W.  is  com- 
of  water.     This 
•  i  E.,  distant  4 
allow  patch,  dan- 
S.  W.  direction, 
igth  of  the  shoal 
'eet,  bears  N.  E. 
The  summit  of 
of  Lonely  island, 
The  southeast 
!  part  of  Lonely 
heast  of  it,  with 
in  line  with  the 
estward  of  this 

itheast  and  west 
thoms.     On  the 

tV^.,  with  a  max- 
sides  are  fairly 
in  a  general  S. 

is  a  depth  of  3^ 
of  Club  island, 

'int,  bearing  N. 

me  side  of  Erie 


V:->l^ 


The  entrance  is  obstructed  by  two  rocky  ledges,  known  as  North 
ihoal  and  South  spit,  between  which  not  less  than  15  feet  may  be 
rried  in. 

North  Shoal,  with  depth  varying  from  4  to  9  feet,  extends  250 
fords  from  the  north  shore  of  the  entrance. 

South  Spit,  with  the  same  depth,  makes  off  100  yards  from  the 
lortheast  part  of  Fishery  point  (as  the  south  entrance  is  called).     The 
restern  gravelly  part  of  this  point  is  steep-to,  close  to  tbe  dry  stones, 
id  not  less  than   12  feet  water  will  be  had  at  a  radius  of  230  yards 
^from  this  gravelly  point,  right  around  to  North  shoal.     At  a  greater  dis- 
tance, the  water  rapidly  shoals  to  the  shores.     The  anchorage  under 
Fishery  point  is  confined  to  a  space  of  about  6  acres. 

Day  Beacons. — On  Fishery  point  are  erected  two  white  beacons, 
which  in  line,  S.  W.  by  W.  k  W.,  lead  southeast  of  North  shoal.  On  the 
western  shore  of  the  harbor  stand  a  couple  more,  which  in  line,  W.  ^  8., 
lead  between  North  shoal  and  South  spit,  with  the  least  water  of  15  feet. 
In  approaching  the  harbor,  therefore,  the  back  one  of  the  Fishery  point 
beacons  should  be  kept  south  of  its  fellow,  until  the  West  beacons  are  in 
line,  when  proceed  in;  turn  sharp  around  Fishery  point  and  anchor  in 
the  middle  of  the  cove,  with  the  entrance  points  in  line. 

Erie  Shingle  is  the  name  of  a  narrow  bank  of  small  stones  ele- 
vated 7  feet  above  water,  300  yards  in  length,  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  The 
northeast  side  is  steep-to,  but  shoal  water  extends  in  every  other  direc- 
tion. Westward,  it  makes  out  nearly  half  a  mile,  where  there  is  not 
more  than  12  feet.  Rather  more  than  that  distance  southward  there  is 
but  15  feet,  with  5  feet  400  yards  northeast  of  it. 

A  detached  patch,  with  16  feet  on  it,  lies  S.  W.  by  S.,  a  little 
more  than  1^  miles  from  Erie  shingle. 

To  pass  westward  of  Erie  bank,  keep  Church  hill  (James  bay)  open 
westward  of  Rabbit  island  half  the  breadth  of  the  latter,  N.  ^  W.  The 
south  end  of  Owen  island  (Manitoulin),  touchjiag  the  northwest  side  of 
Wall  island,  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  leads  a  ^  of  a  mile  northwest  of  it.  Lonely 
island  light-house  open  north  of  Club  island,  E.  ^  S.,  leads  north. 

OWEN  CHANNEL  (North  •  Passage)  is  the  name  given  to 
thfi  passage  into  Georgian  bay  from  Lake  Huron,  between  Manitoulin 
island  and  Fitzwilliam  island,  being  in  the  narrowest  part  a  little  over  a 
mile  wide  from  shore  to  shore.  A  description  of  the  dangers  will  now 
be  given. 

liittle  Rock,  with  13  feet  water  on  it,  as  tbe  name  indicates,  is  a 
small  patch  lying  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  distant  1^  miles  from  the  southwest  ex- 
treme of  Perseverance  island.  A.  rock,  with  19  feet  water,  lies  N.  by  E., 
nearly  If  miles,  and  another,  with  21  feet,  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  a  little  more 
than  that  distance  from  the  same  island. 

These  are  the  shallowest  outlying  spots  between  Perseverance  island 
and  Phoebe  point. 

Shoal  water  extends  from  the  latter  to  the  depth  of  18  feet,  W.  by  S. 
f  S.,  one-third  of  a  mile. 

Channel  Rock,  6  feet  above  the  water,  and  sufficiently  separated 
from  the  shore  of  Fitzwilliam  island,  as  to  render  it  conspicuous,  is  situ- 
ated one-third  of  a  mile  northeastward  from    the  northwest  part  of 


180 


GEOROIAM    BAY 


PhoBbe  point.   Between  the  latter  and  Ohauuel  rook,  shoal  water  extends 
from  the  shore,  300  yards. 

Stewart  Rock,  with  4  feet  on  it,  bears  N.  W.  ^  W.,  600  yards 
from  Channel  rook.  From  Stewart  rook  the  bank  continues  in  a  south- 
westerly direction,  half  a  mile,  with  a  depth  of  from  12  to  18  feet. 

Ship  Bank  is  the  name. given  to  an  extensive  piece  of  shoal 
ground,  separated  from  Stewart  rock  by  a  narrow  lane  of  4  fathoms. 
The  least  water  on  Ship  bank  is  10  feet.  The  length  of  the  shoal,  under 
the  depth  of  1 8  feet,  is  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  east  and  west,  by  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  in  breadth. 

A  Patch  of  4  fathoms  lies  N.  N.  W.,  360  yards  from  the  northwest 
angle  of  ship  bank.  ' 

Owen  Island  is  200  yards  long  north  and  south,  and  separated 
from  the  Manitoulin  shore  by  a  similar  distance.  It  is  the  only  small 
island  on  this  shore  of  Owen  channel,  and  therefore  easily  recognizable. 

Owen  Island  Bank,  with  depths  varying  from  12  to  18  feet, 
extends  on  all  sides  from  Owen  Island;  the  depth  of  13  feet  being  found 
at  half  a  mile  due  East  of  the  south  extremity,  and  the  same  depth  S.  by 
W.,  400  yards.  This  bank  renders  the  shore  of  Manitoulin  island  shoal 
for  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  Owen  island  towards  Georgian  bay, 
and  the  same  distance  in  the  direction  of  Lake  Huron. 

At  half  a  mile  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.  from  the  south  end  of  Owen  island, 
is  the  southern  edge  of  a  rocky  spit,  having  7  feet  of  water  on  it,  extend- 
ing 500  yards  from  the  shore  abreast. 

The  coast  of  Manitoulin  island  If  miles  westward  of  Owen  island  takes 
a  more  northerly  turn,  forming 

Hung^erford  Point. — This  most  southerly  extreme  of  Manitoulin 
island  may  be  known  by  its  small  white  stony  beaches.  Scattered  stones 
and  shallow  water  extend  from  this  point,  and  from  the  shore  westward 
of  it,  a  distance  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  leaving  a  fairly  steep  shore  bet- 
ween it  and  Owen  island  bank,  for  one-third  of  a  mile. 

Beach  Point,  of  Fitzwilliam  island,  derives  its  name  from  the 
fact  of  its  being  the  northeasterly  termination  of  a  long  stony  beach, 
with  four  small  sharp  points  of  rock  jutting  out  on  it.  This  point  is  im- 
portant, as  being  the  boundary  between  the  shallow  and  deep  waters  on 
this  side  of  Owen  channel.  . 

Beach  Point  Flat  is  the  name  given  to  an  extensive  rocky  bank, 
with  12  to  15  feet  over  it,  fronting  the  beach  jusi  alluded  to.  It  com- 
mences at  Beach  point,  and  its  north  edge  runs  W  ^  N.,  for  half  a  mile. 
Thence,  under  the  name  of  the  Ridse,  it  joins  Owen  Island  bank  with  not 
less  than  17  leet  water.  The  northeast  side  of  the  ridge  rises  abruptly 
from  a  depth  of  10  fathoms. 

The  edge  of  Beach  point  flat  will  be  found  stretching  400  yards  off  the 
southwest  end  of  the  beach  whence  it  derives  its  name.  Hence,  it  con- 
tinues almost  straight  to  Channel  rock,  before  described. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  TAKING  OWEN   CHANNEL.- 

in  approaching  this  channel  froni  the  westward  or  northwestward,   in 
Lake  Huron,  bring  the  north  fall  of  Fitzwilliam  island  (near  Rattlesnak<' 
harbor)  in  line  with  the  eastern   part  of  Beach   point  oearing  E.  i  N. 
This  range  leads  through  the  North  Passage  (as  the  deep  water  be 
tween  Ship  bank  and  Hungerford  point  is  called)  as  far  as  Beach  point; 


I* 


GEORGIAN    BAT. 


131 


shoal  water  extendi 

i  W.,  600  yards 
ntinues  in  a  south- 
12  to  18  feet, 
ve  piece  of  shoal 
ine  of  4  fathoms, 
of  the  Bhoal,  under 
ast  and  west,  by  a 

Tom  the  northwest 

ith,  and  separated 
is  the  only  small 
isily  recognizable. 
»m  12  to  18  feet, 
1  feet  being  found 
!  same  depth  S.  by 
)ulin  island  shoal 
ds  Georgian  bay, 

d  of  Owen  island, 
ater  on  it,  extend- 

Owen  island  takes 

imeofManitoulin 
Scattered  stones 
shore  westward 
steep  shore  bet- 
name  from   the 
ng  stony  beach, 
rhis  point  is  im- 
1  deep  waters  on 

sive  rocky  bank, 
d  to.  It  com- 
for  half  a  mile, 
d  bank  with  not 
e  rises  abruptly 

'0  yards  off  the 
Hence,   it'  con- 

tlANNEL.- 

Lh  westward,  in 
ear  Rattle8nak(> 
3aring  E.  i  :N. 
leep  water  be- 
18  Beach  point; 


with  1  fathoms  in  North  passage,  6  fathoms  southward  of  Owen  Island 
bank,  and  across  the  ridge  with  not  less  than  17  feet.  If  wishing  to 
proceed  along  the  east  cqast  of  Manitoulin  island,  as  soon  as  the  south- 
west end  of  Perseverance  Island  is  in  line  with  Phoebe  point,  bearing  S. 
W.  by  S.,  the  Ridge  maybe  crossed  on  this  range,  or  anvwhere  between 
this  range  and  the  original  one,  with  not  less  than  17  feui  of  water. 

SOUTH  PASSAGE  of  Owen  channel  divides  Stewart  rock  from 
the  shallow  shore  of  Fitzwllliam  island;  its  least  breadth  being  350  yards 
and  depth  4  fathoms. 

To  take  this  passage  from  Lake  Huron,  bring  the  right  or  south  ex- 
eme  of  Wall  island  trees  in  line  with  the  northwest  side  of  Fitzwilliam 
[Island  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.  Keep  this  range,  crossing  the  bank  extending 
uthwestward  from  Stewart  rock,  with  not  less  than  21  feet  water,  until 
he  southwest  end  of  Perseverance  island  is  in  line  with  Phoebe  point, 
when  keep  the  latter  marks  on  to  cross  the  ridge  as  before  directed. 

In  approaching  the  entrance  to  Owen  channel  from  the  southwest- 
ward  the  southwest  extreme  of  Perseverance  island  should  not  be  brought 
to  bear  southward  of  S.  S.  E.  until  (if  wishing  to  take  the  South  Passage) 
the  marks  for  that  channel  come  on.  Or  (if  preferring  the  North  Pas- 
sage) until  the  west  side  of  Owen  island  is  open  the  least  thing  south- 
eastward of  the  Manitoulin  shore,  bearing  N.  E.  by  E.  This  range  should 
be  kept,  to  lead  westward  of  Ship  bank,  until  the  regular  North  Passage 
leading  mark  comes  on. 

In  thick  weather,  the  west  side  of  Fitzwilliam  island  should 
cot  be  approached  to  a  less  depth  than  20  fathoms. 

Northeast  Point  Reef. — From  Northeast  point  (as  the  extrem- 
ity of  Fitzwilliam  island  is  called),  a  shoal,  with  from  6  to  15  feet  water 
over  it,  makes  off  in  the  same  direction  600  yards. 

Wall  Island  lies,  with  its  low,  narrow  south  extremity,  bearing  N. 
N.  E.  ^  E.,  and  is  distant  nearly  1  mile  from  Northeast  point. 

The  Wall. — From  the  south  end  of  Wall  island,  a  reef,  named  the 
Wall  (on  account  of  the  steepness  of  its  eastern  side),  extends  S.  ^  E.,  1 
mile.  It  is  a  very  dangerous  reef,  having  only  7  feet  water  near  its  south- 
ern end.  A  detached  spot,  of  3^  fathoms,  lies  S.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  600 
yards  from  Northeast  point. 

The  east  fall  of  Cape  Smith  shore  in  line  with  the  east  extreme  of 
Rabbit  island,  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  leads  ^  mile  eastward  of  the  Wall. 

On  the  west  side  of  Wall  island  are  two  small  islets,  separated  from 
the  main  island  by  a  distance  of  200  yards. 

West  Flat. — From  these  two  islands,  sunken  rocks  and  shoal  water 
extend  nearly  ^  of  a  mile,  to  pass  northward  of  which,  keep  the  whole  of 
Club  island  open  north  of  Wall  island,  E.  by  S.  \  S. 

Northeast  point  of  Fitzwilliam  island,  touching  any  part  of  Flower- 
pot island,  leads  west  of  this  shoal.  The  north  side  of  Wall  island  is 
8tt'L»p-to,  and  the  east  side  fairly  so. 

RATTLESNAKE  HARBOR.— The  north  entrance  point  of 
this  excellent  harbor  is  situated  three-quarters  of  a  mile  southwestward 
from  northeast  point  of  Fitzwilliam  island.  It  contains  shelter  from  all 
winds  in  from  3  to  5  fathoms  over  mud.  Little  island  is  a  good  mark  in 
approaching  the  harbor.  A  narrow  ridge  of  dry  stones  extends  from  the 
island,  E.  N.  E.,  200  yards;  from  the  end  of  these  stones,  shoal  water 
continues  in  a  northeasterly  direction,  200  yards  further. 


132 


GEORGIAN   BAY. 


From  the  north  entrance  point  of  Rattlesnake  harbor  a  spit  extends 
in  a  westerly  direction,  200  yards,  leaving  a  passage  between  it  and  the 
shoal  water  from  Little  island,  before  alluded  to,  400  yards  in  width, 
through  the  middle  of  which  4  fathoms  may  be  carried  in  the  harbor. 

Little  Island*  and  the  shore  of  Fitzwilliam  island  for  ^  a  mile 
westward  of  it,  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  300  yards;  thence 
to  Beach  point  (previously  described)  the  shore  is  steep-to. 

FITZWILLIAM  CHANNEL  is  the  name  given  to  the  passage 
between  Fitzwilliam  and  Yeo  islands,  the  dangers  in  which  will  now  be 
described. 

YEO  ISLAND  is  l^  miles  long,  by  f  of  a  mile  in  breadth.  It  has 
two  summits,  each  about  100  feet  high;  the  northeasternmost,  known  as 
Black  summit,  falling  steeply  to  the  bay.  The  northeast,  east  and  south- 
east sides  of  Yeo  island  are  fairly  steep-to,  but  from  the  north  gravelly 
point,  200  yards  northwest  of  Black  summit,  a  rocky  spit  with  less  than 
6  feet  water  over  it,  makes  out  in  a  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  direction,  400  yards, 
under  the  name  of 

Yeo  Island  Spit. — To  pass  northward  of  this  spit,  keep  Cove 
Island  light-house  in  sight  (and  at  night,  the  light),  S.  by  E. 

Indian  Harbor  Point  is  the  name  given  to  the  southern  extreme 
of  Fitzwilliam  or,  as  it  is  usually  called,  Horse  island. 

It  forms  also  the  eastern  entrance  point  to  Indian  harbor;  a  boat  cove, 
much  resorted  to  by  the  Manitoulin  Indians,  during  the  trawling  season 
for  trout,  in  t?  3  fall  of  the  year. 

The  point  is  at  present  well  marked  by  a  large  stone  cairn. 

Indian  Harbor  Reef  is  a  dangerous  rocky  ledge,  extending  in 
a  southwesterly  direction,  over  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  above- 
mentioned  point,  with  depths  on  it  varying  from  4  to  18  feet. 

To  pass  southeastward  of  this  reef,  with  22  feet  least  water,  keep  the 
south  extreme  of  Club  island  a  little  open  southeast  of  Fitzwilliam  island, 
N.  E.  by  E. 

McLelan  Rock,  with  12  feet  of  water  over  it,  is  the  worst  obs- 
truction in  Fitzwilliam  channel.  It  is  300  yards  long  in  an  E.  N.  E.  and 
W.  S.  W.  direction,  by  200  yards  broad.  The  centre  of  the  shoal  bears 
S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  distant  a  little  more  than  a  mile  from  Indian  harbor  point. 
The  passage,  between  this  rock  and  Indian  harbor  reef  is  nearly  one-third 
of  a  mile  wide  and  7  to  9  fathoms  deep. 

Smith  Shoal  is  a  small  rocky  patch  with  three  fathoms  over  it, 
lying  south  nearly  1^  miles  from  Indian  Harbor  point. 

A  bank  with  6  to  0  fathoms  joins  this  and  McLelan  rock,  from  which 
it  is  separated  by  a  dibtance  of  half  a  mile. 

This  passage  however  cannot  be  safely  used  by  strangers  of  large 
draught,  on  account  of  there  being  no  leading  mark. 

The  Best  Passage  throug^h  Fitzwilliam  Channel  is 

between  Smith  shoal  and  Yeo  island,  by  keeping  the  southeast  fall  of 
Lonely  island  in  line  with  the  northwest  side  of  James  island,  N.  E.  by 
B.  f  E. 

This  mark  also  leads  northwest  of  Manitoba  ledge,  but  requires  olear 
weather  to  disoern  Lonely  island. 

When  the  north  end  of  Flower-pot  island  appears  northward  of  Yeo 


^ 


-  mil 


%iif 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


138 


•bor  a  spit  extends 
between  it  and  the 
)0  yards  in  width, 
2d  in  the  harbor. 

island  for  ^  a  mile 
300  yards;  thence 
jp-to. 

iven  to  the  passage 
which  will  now  be 

in  breadth.  It  has 
ernmost,  known  as 
ast,  east  and  south- 
the  north  gravelly 
jpit  with  less  than 
rection,  400  yards, 

8  spit,  keep  Cove 
byE. 

3  southern  extreme 

irbor;  a  boat  cove, 
le  trawling  season 

le  cairn. 

dge,  extending  in 
e  from  the  above- 

8  feet. 

8t  water,  keep  the 

itzwilliam  island, 

is  the  worst  obs- 
1  an  E.  N.  E.  and 
f  the  shoal  bears 
ian  harbor  point. 
nearly  one-third 

'athoms  over  it, 
ock,  from  which 
angers  of  large 

1  Channel  is 

[)Utheast  fall  of 
island,  N.  E.  by 

It  requires  olear 

thward  of  Yeo 


v.'  - 


% 


i.^r 


land,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.,  midway  between  the  south  point  of  Club  island 
id  the  northwest  extremity  of  Lonely  island. 

This  course  shall  lead  between  James  Island  reef  and  McCarthy 
point  ledge. 

If  wishing  to  proceed  in  the  direction  of  Cape  Smith,  when  past 
imes  island,  steer  N.  N.  E.,  keeping  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  a  line 
fining  the  east  sides  of  James  and  Rabbit  islands. 

McCarthy  Ledge. — The  eastern  edge  of  this  danger  runs  from 
iUcCarthy  point  (which  is  on  the  east  side  and  about  the  middle  of  Fitz- 
%illiam  island)  in  a  general  S.  W.  by  S.  direction,  2  miles,  where  it  ter- 
minates in  a  small  rocky  isolated  patch,  with  13  feet  water  over  it. 
i"  To  pass  east  of  this  danger,  keiep  the  east  fall  of  Fitzwilliam  island 
'^ear  Rattlesnake  harbor)  in  line  with  Pavement  point  N.  N.  E. 

'  ,     James  Island,  2|  miles  south  of  McCarthy  point,  is  9  feet  high, 

"^  iitid  nearly  400  yards  long  north  and  south,  by  half  that  distance  in 

'  l^adth.     Its  north  side  is  fairly  steep-to,  but  a  rock^  ledge  extends 

.^fDnthwestward  from  it  any  depth  under  15  feet,  for  a  distance  of  rather 

,v  ftlore  than  1  mile. 

James  Island  Reef,  as  this  shoal  is  called,  has  a  f'.hannel  between 
It  and  Yeo  island  spit,  f  mile  in  width,  and  4  to  8  fathoms  in  depth;  to 

tass  through  which,  keep  the  west  extreme  of  Lucas  island  locked  with 
le  east  point  of  Yeo  island  S.  by  W. 

'.'      BABBIT  ISLAND,  situated    due    south,   ^\  miles    from    the 
•  ji^trance  to  James  bay,  may  be  approached  on  its  northwest,  north  and 

t'  Eust  sides,  to  100  yards;  but  from  the  southwest  low  shore  an  extensive 
ank  spreads  out,  known  as 

Babbit  Island  Bank. — W.  by  S.  f  S.,  a  little  more  than  a  third 
^^f  a  mile  from  the  west  point  of  the  island,  there  is  on^y  7  to  9  feet  of 
^ater,  while  from  the  southeast  extreme  it  runs  off  equally  shoal,  S.  by 
|f\r.,  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 

A  patch,  with  16  feet  over  it,  is  situated  with  its  south  end  bear- 

ig  S.  W.  ^  S.,  nearly  a  mile  from  the  west  extremity  of  Rabbit  island. 

Another  spot,  with  3^  fathoms  on  it,  lies  8.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  distant 

1^  miles  from  the  same.     South  point  of  Club  island  open  south  of  Erie 

•hingle,  S.  E.  f  S.,  crosses  Rabbit  island  bank,  southwest  of  these  shoals, 

with  4  fathoms.     Northeast  point  of  Fitzwilliam  island  in  line  with  the 

ery  west  extreme  of  Wall  island,  S.  by  W.,  leads  westward  of  these 

oals,  with  4^  fathoms.     Horsburgh  point  well  open  east  of  Rabbit 

and,  bearing  north,  leads  eastward  of  this  bank. 

The  Coast  of  Manitoulin  Island  trends  from  Little  bluff,  N. 

.  \  N.,  5^  miles,  to  Red  Cliff  bight  (so  called  from  a  small,  low  earth 

liff  of  that  color) ;  and  for  the  first  3  miles  is  steep-to.    Thence,  across 

'  e  bight  above  mentioned,  to  the  southwest  part  of  Tamarack  point,  the 

ihore  is  foul. 

'.^^t^.ir  ^  Tamarack  Cove  runs  in  north  of  the  latter  point  one-third  of  a 

Jnile,  but  on  account  of  there  being  only  6  to  7  feet  water,  and  that  over 

rocky  bottom,  it  is  only  fit  for  boats. ' 

From  the  southwest  part  of  Tamarack  point,  the  coast  is  again  steep- 

|o,  for  a  couple  of  miles,  as  far  as  the  south  point  of  Shallow  cove,  from 

'Ate  north  pomt  of  which  a  shoal  extends  in  a  8.  by  W.  direction,  nearly 

>De-third  of  a  mile. 


»4 


:«?? 


184 


GEORGIA.N   BAT. 


From  the  north  point  of  Shallow  cove  the  coast  continues  foul  totbel 
extent  of  300  yards,  as  far  as  the  last  of  these  indentations,  knowD  ai| 
North  cove.     Hence,  to  within  one  mile  of  the  turn  in,  to  James  b 
the  straight  shore  may  be  approached  to  200  yards. 

HORSBURGH  POINT  (Manitoulin  island)  is  the  name  givejl 
to  the  southern  point  of  James  bay,  and  has  good  water  on  the  northeaitl 
side,  but  from  the  east  shore,  for  1^  miles  southward  of  the  turn  in,  tol 
James  bay,  shoal  water  extends  a  distance  of  300  yards. 

James  Bay  is  a  wide,  open  indentation  northward  of  Horsbur;^ 
point,  with  a  sandy  beach  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  broad.     On  the. 
northern  side  of  the  bay  is  snugly  situated  one  of  the  Ojibbewa  Indian 
reserve  villages,  called  Wekwemikongsing.     The  church  stands  upon  the 
rising  ground,  nearly  half  a  mile  back  from  the  village,  and  is  conspicU' 
ous  from  the  bay. 

Church  Hill. — Northwestward,  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
from  the  church,  is  a  hill  300  feet  high,  rendered  conspicuous  by  its  steep 
fall  to  the  northeastward,  and  long  slope  in  the  opposite  direction. 

James  bay  is  shallow,  not  more  than  12  feet  being  found,  400  yards 
from  the  north  and  west  shore. 

Clay-f^liff  is  the  name  given  to  a  remarkable  bank  of  white  claj 
and  gravel,  260  feet  in  height,  which  with  the  lower  cliffs  of  the  same 
character  on  either  side  of  it,  presents  a  conspicuous  object  to  the  mar- 
iner. 

From  these  cliffs,  shoal  water  extends  for  a  distance  of  400  yards, 
and  so  continues  3^  miles,  until  one  third  of  a  mile  f'^om  an  isolated 
patch  of  dry  stones,  known  as  the  Nest.  Hence  to  thenc  -.heast  extreme 
of  Cape  Smith,  the  shores  may  be  approached  to  200  yards. 


Cape  Smith   to    Clapperton   Island,  including  Gull  Islanck 

and  Collins  Inlet. 

Cape  Smith  forms  the  uouth  entrance  point  to  Smith  bay,  at  the 
head  of  which  is  situated  the  Indian  village  Wekweraikong.  The  cape 
is  rendered  conspicuous  by  the  sudden  orraination  Oi  tlio  clay  bank, 
The  bank  culminates  here  in  a  height  of  370  feet,  including  the  trees. 
The  northeast  extreme  of  the  cape  bears  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  and  is  17^  miles 
from  the  east  point  of  Lonely  island,  and  S.  S.  W.  \  W.,  12  miles,  from 
Killarney  east  light-house.  This  part  of  the  cape  may  be  passed  at  a 
distance  of  200  yaras  in  a  depth  of  5  fathoms. 

Campbell  Rock,  with  12  feet  of  water  over  it,  lies  N.  E.  \  E., 
2^  miles  from  the  northeast  point  of  Cape  Smith,  and  W.  \  S.,  3^  miles, 
from  the  west  rook  of  Squaw  island.  For  a  large  draught  vessel  in  a 
southeast  sea,  this  is  \  formidable  danger.  The  eastern  part  of  C;vpe 
Smith  bearing  south,  will  lead  1^  miles  west  of  Campbell  rock.  If  pro- 
ceeding to  Killarney,  an  excellent  mark  is  afforded  by  keeping  Ilor""- 
burgh  point  just  open  of  Clay  cliff,  S.  W.  by  S.,  which  will  lead  a  ves  ^1 
half  a  lie  eastward  of  Campbell  rook.  A  vessel  will  be  northward  of 
this  danger  when  Papoose  island  passes  northward  of  Young  Squaw 
island,  E.  ^  N.  When  the  same  island  is  touching  north  point  of  Squaw 
island,  E.  by  N.,  a  vessel  will  be  south  of  the  danger. 


GEOKOIAN    BAY. 


135 


ast  continues  foul  to  tbej 
indentations,  known  al 
torn  in,  to  James  bar 

IS.  "I 

and)  is  the  name  eiveti 
water  on  the  northea« 

ward  of  the  turn  in  u\ 
yards.  '  ■ 

rthward  of  Horsburel 
a  mile  broad.     On  it 

t  theOjibbewalndiac 
church  stands  upon  the 
lUage,  and  is  conspica. 

ree-quarters  of  a  mile 
snspicuous  by  its  steei) 
posite  direction. 
>eing  found,  400  yards 

t)Ie  bank  of  white  clav 
wer  cliffs  of  the  same 
us  object  to  the  mar- 


From  the  northwest  proug  of  Cape  Smith  the  shore  trends  in  a  south- 
it  direction,  f  mile,  to  East  Red  cliff,  and  If  miles  to  West  Red  cliff. 
Red  Cliff  Flat. — Between  the  northeast  and  northwest  prongs  of 
cape,  the  coast  is  shoal  about  300  yards  out,  and  westward  of  this  it 
eases,  wheu  N.  W.  ^  N.,  nearly  t  of  a  mile  from  East  Red  cliff,  with 
12  feet  water  over  it. 
Gold-Hunter's  Bank,  with  6  feet  of  water  on  it,  lies  N.  W.  by 
J  W.,  nearly  1^  miles  from  the  northeast  extremity  of  Cape  Smith, 
a  circular  patch  of  small  boulders,  200  yards  in  diameter.     Cape 
lith  points  in  range  leads  south  of  it,  E.  by  8.  ^  S.     The  top  of  Badge- 
island,  in  line  with  the  east  side  of  Big  Burnt  island,  N.  by  E.  ^  E., 
8  west  of  Gold-buDter  bank. 
Wekw^emikongf  is  situated  on  the  rising  ground  in  the  north- 
1|f8t  corner  of  Smith  bay. 

William  or  Whiskey  Island  is  on  the  northern  side  of  Smith 

It  is  800  yards  long  northeast  and  southwest,  and  200  yards  wide. 

PelkiP  Bock,  with  8  feet  on  it,  is  in  the  track  of  vessels  entering 

bay  froiii  the  north.     It  is  ^  mile  long  northeast  and  southwest,  and 

0  yards  wide;  its  southern  end  bears  E.  ^  S.,  li  miles,  from  the  south 

int  of  William  island.     The  summit  of  Badgely  island  well  open  east 

Big  Burnt  island,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  leads  east  of  it. 

Big^  Burnt  Island  is  the  largest  and  easternmost  of  the  group 


,^/if  islands,  is  1^  miles  long,  and  ^  mile  wide,  its  northeast  point  is  N.  |^ 
distance  of  400  yards.  I      '"^W"''  H  miles  from  the  east  point  of  Cape  Smith, 
aile  f^ora  an  isolated"   V  j,^    Bernard  Rock. — Red  and  black  horizontally  striped  8par  buoy 


then(   'Iheast  extreme 
0  yards. 


'in£-  Gull  Islands 


to  Smith  bay,  at  the 
^raikong.  The  cape 
>i  the  clay  bank, 
'"eluding  the  trees, 
W.,and  is  17^  miles 
W.,  12  miles,  from 
may  be  passed  at  a 

•  it,  lies  N.  E.  4-  E., 
3  W.  i  S.,  3i  mibl 
draught  vessel  in  a 
stern  part  of  C.vpe 
)bell  rock.     If  pro- 

by  keeping  Hor'-- 
1>  will  lead  a  ves  •jl 
11  be  northward  of 

of  Young  Squaw 
th  point  of  Squaw 


,y 


,'||  placed  on  it  lying  between  George  and  Big  Burnt  islands.  The  rock, 
ith  10  feet  of  water  over  it,  bears  S.  W.  \  S ,  distant  6  miles  from  Kil- 
rney  East  light  The  summit  of  Badgely  island,  over  the  end  of  Ko- 
inongwi,  leads  east,  and  over  the  west  end  of  the  island,  leads  west,  and 
illarney  East  light,  shut  in  with  George  island,  leads  north  of  it.  The 
th  fall  of  Sheguiandah  hill  in  line  with  Bold  point,  Manitoulin  island, 
\  N.,  leads  200  yards  south  of  Bernard  rock. 

Northwest  Burnt  Island  is  situated  half  a  mile  northwest- 
ward from  Big  Burnt  island.  It  is  next  in  size  to  the  latter,  being  a 
little  more  than  f  mile  long. 

Burnt  Island  Bank  is  a  dani^erous  shoal  extending  northward 

d  eastward  from  Northwest  Burnt  island;  the  total  length  of  the  shoal 

ing  1^  miles  in  an  east  and  west  direction.      The   western  part  is  the 

allowest,  with  only  1  foot  of  water  on  it  and  generally  breaks,  but  the 

Item  part,  with  6  feel  on  it,  is  the  most  dangerous,  being  the  turning 

int  into  the  North  channel  of  Lake  Huron.     To  pass  eastward   of  it, 

eep  the  Lion's  Head  (a  sharp  and   conspicuous  hill   between   Badgely 

land  and  Frazer  bay)  in  line  with  the  east  end  of  High  beach  (on  the 

uth  shore  of  Badgely  island),  bearing  N.  i^  W.       And  to   pass   north- 

ard  of  it,  bring  Ead's  bush  (Little  Current)  to  the  northward   of  the 

mmit  of  Hey  wood  island,  and  in  line  with  the  south  shore  of  Partridge 

land,  W.  by  N. 

Skull  Pointy  on  Manitoulin  island  bears  W.  f  N.,  1^  miles   from 
e  north  point  of  Northwest  Burnt  island. 

BKUIiL   POINT  REEF  extends  in  a  direction   a  little   east- 
rd  of  north,  ^  mile;  least  water  on  it  three  feet;  between  this  reef  and 


186 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


Burnt  Island  bank  there  is  deep  water  for  ^  a  mile.     Indian  Dock  pok] 
just  in  sight  W.  S.  W.  leaks  northwestward  of  this  shoal.     The  middlj 
of  KokanoDgwi  island  in  line  with  the  south  point  of  Badgely  island 
by  N.  ^  N.  also  leads  clear  on  the  same  side. 

Bold  Pointy  with  good  water  close-to,  is  f  mile  northwestward  of| 
Skull  point.     It  is  the  most  northerly  point  of  this  peninsula. 

SQUAW  IS1:jAND.— Its  south  point  bears  E.  i  S.  5|  miles  froml 
Cape  Smith,  the  island  itself  is  low,  but  its  thick  and  fairly  high  tirnbetj 
makes  it  visible  a  considerable  distance.     It  is  an  important  fishing  sta 
tion.    The  island  is  1^  miles  long,  greatest  breadth  1,200  yards. 

Toung^  Squaw  islet  is  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  mile  from  the  north  point  ot 
Squaw  island,  and  is  connected  to  it  by  a  rocky  bar,  with  6  feet  of  water 
on  it. 

Annie  Rock,  with  three  feet,  lies  N.  W.,  ^  mile  from  Youno 
Squaw,  and  shoal  water  extends  the  same  distance  in  the  opposite  direc 
tion. 

West  Rock  is  a  small  bank  of  limestone  gravel  5  feet  hign,  W.  S 
W.  one  mile  from  north  point  of  Squaw  island,  it  is  separated  from  tlit 
latter  by  a  narrow  channel  with  4  to  5  fathoms,  but  should  not  be  at 
tempted  by  strangers. 

North  Spit  extends  in  a  N.  f  W.  direction  ^  mile  from  West 
Rock,  at  which  distance  there  is  13  feet  West  Rock  should  not  be  ap 
proached  from  the  westward  nearer  than  600  yards,  while  S.  by  W.  \ 
W.,  ^  mile  from  West  Rock,  is  the  southern  termination  of  the  bank, 
with  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  which  shoals  rapidly  as  West  Rock  is  ap- 
proached. 

Ragged  Point  is  situated  about  the  middle  of  the  west  side  of 
Squaw  island,  which  is  fringed  with  boulders  and  shoal  water  for  a  dis- 
tance of  i  mile,  while  off  this  point,  a  bank  extends  W.  S.  W.  half  a 
mile,  with  less  than  3  fathoms. 

Soutll  Point  is  the  southerly  terminat'  '^f  the  island;  shallow 
water  extends  600  yards  from  it. 

The  Bar  is  the  name  given  to  the  shallow,  rocky  bank,  just  east  of 
ibe  enti'ance  of  the  harbor,  with  depth  from  6  to  12  feet.  To  clear  the 
northeast  side  of  it,  Lion's  Head  should  be  kept  open  of  Young  Squaw, 
N.  W.  ^  N.  To  lead  southeast  of  it,  keep  Clay  cliff  (Cape  Smith  shore 
open  southeast  of  Squaw  island,  S.  \V.  by  W. 

Squaw  Island  Harbor  is  on  the  north  east  side  of  the  island, 

and  contains  shelter  from  south  winds,  as  indeed  from  all  winds,  ileptli 
from  12  to  15  feet  over  mud.  No  vessel  drawing  over  8  feef,  should  at 
tempt  to  enter  it;  the  larger  vessels  should  anchor  with  the  southeast 
point  of  entrance  W.  N.  W.,  about  ^  mile. 

Directions  for  Entering  Squaw  Island  Harbor.— If 

from  the  southward,  bring  the  Lion's  Head  in  line  with  north  point  of 
Squaw  island,  N.  W.  ^  N.,  proceed  to  the  southeast  entrance  point  on 
this  mark;  round  the  point  closely,  and  anchor  in  the  middle  of  the  har 
bor  or  run  to  the  dock.  If  from  the  northwestward,  give  the  ground 
about  Annie  rock  a  good  berth;  after  passing  Young  Squaw,  keep  Lion'n 
Head  open  noriheast  of  it,  until  Clay  cliff  is  seen  open  of  south  point  ot 
Squaw  island;  fc^teer  on  this  mark  until  the  low  southeast  entrance  point 
of  the  harbor  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  when  the  latter  point  may  be 
steered  for. 


4u 


.Vi\Aif.  . 


&i£OBOIAN    BAY. 


137 


e.  Indian  Bock  poIbJ 
8  shoaL  The  middlJ 
ot  Ifadgely  island  A 

mile  northwestward  ofl 
peninsula.  f 

E.|S.  Similes  froj 
ind  fairly  high  timber 
important  fishing , 
1,200  yards. 

om  the  north  point  of  I 
r,  with  6  feet  of  water  j 

*  mile  from  Younjl 
n  the  opposite  direc 

vel  5  feet  hign,  W.  3 

8  separated  from  the 
It  should  not   be  at ; 

I  i  mile  from  West 
'ck  should  not  be  ap  . 
,  while  S.  by  W  A* 
nation  of  the  bank 

9  West  Rock  is  a 


of  the  west  side  of  \ 
>al  water  for  a  dis 
b   W.  S.   W.  half  a 


the  island;  shall 


ow 


;  bank,  just  east  of 
eet.     To  clear  the 
of  Young  Squaw,  i 
Oape  Smith  shore)  | 
i 
side  of  the  island, 
1  all  winds,  :^epUi 
r  8  feet  should  at- 
vith  the  southeast 

,d  Harbor.— If 

th  north  point  of 
entrance  point  on 
aiddle  of  tJie  har- 

give  the  ground 
qfuaw,  keep  LionV 
of  south  point  of 
't  entrance   point 

er  point  may  be 


Alec  Clark  Rock,  with  3  fathoms  of  water  on  it,  is  a  narrow 

mk^  mile  long,  N.  N.  W.  andS.  S.  E.,  and  lies  with  the  north  extremity 

fearing  N.  E.  ^  E.,  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  Young  Squaw,  and  in   this 

)8ition  will  be  found  only  13  feet.     There  is  from  4  to  6  fathoms  be- 

reen  this  rock  and  Young  Squaw. 

Matheson  Bock,  with  3^  fathoms,  lies  E.  i  S.,  nearly  2  miles 
rem  Young  Squaw. 

Azov  Ledges  are  very  dangerous  rocks,  8.  W.  by  W.  J  W.,  nearly 
miles  and  1^  miles  respectively  from  South  point  of  Squaw  island, 
lese  shoals  are  separated  from  Squaw  island  f  mile,  with  6  to  7  fath- 
18,  but  its  passage  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers.     The  N.  W. 
[de  of  Green  island,  touching  the  southeast  extreme  of  Squaw  island, 
I.  E.  ^  E.,  leads  200  yards  S.  E.  of  Azov  ledges.     The  north  extreme  of 
^ape  Smith,  in  line  with  the  southwest  end  of  Wekwemikong  clay  bank, 
V.  by  N.  i  N.,  leads  f  of  a  mile,  south  of  the  Azov  ledges.     In  thick 
reather  do  not  shoal  to  less  than  10  fathoms  around  Squaw  island  and 
fl^ts  shoals. 

Papoose  Island,  lO  feet  high,  bears  W.  |  N.,  distant  3|  miles 
t^rom  Gull  island.     It  is  one-third  mile  long  east  and  west,  quite  narrow, 
nd  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  boat  channel.     A  few  huts  are  erected 
D  the  western  and  larger  portion.     The  east,  north  and  northwest  sides 
f  Papoose  island  may  be  approached  to  200  yards,  but  from  the  south 
iide  a  dangerous  rocky  ledge  extends  ^  mile.     To  pass  southwestward  of 
'^!  this  reef,  keep  Broad  hill  in  line  with  Killarney.East  light-house,  y.  W. 
"by  N. 

Gull  Island  lies  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  16  miles  from  the  eastern  entr.  u:ik> 
|to  the  North  channel  of  Lake  Huron,  and  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  4^  miles,  from 
;the  east  side  of  Green  island.  It  is  10  feet  high,  350  yards  long  north- 
east and  southwest,  and  100  yards  wide,  the  southern  portion  having  on 
it  a  few  stunted  trees  and  bushes.  Shoal  water  extends  200  yards  from 
the  southeast  side,  and  250  yards  from  the  southwest  side;  the  rest  of 
the  shores  are  bold. 

Green  Island,  so  called  on  account  of  its  trees.  It  is  composed 
of  limestone  from  10  to  15  feet  high,  and  over  ^  mile  in  diameter.  It 
bears  S.  E,  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  is  distant  8f  miles  from  Killarney  East  light- 
house, and  may  be  said  to  mark  the  northern  limit  of  the  deep  water  in 
this  locality.  It  is  3^  miles  from  the  coast  of  Phillip  Edward  island, 
and  6^  miles  from  the  east  entrance  to  Collins  inlet.  Shoal  water  extends 
from  the  southwest  and  west  sides  of  the  island  a  distance  of  300  to  400 
yards;  the  remainder  of  the  island  may  be  approached  to  200  yards. 

Steele  Rock,  with  ll  feet  water  on  it,  is  a  small  spot  W.  ^  N.,  f 
mile  from  the  west  point  of  Green  island,  and  between  is  a  good  passage 
of  10  or  11  fathoms. 

Single  Rock  is  a  solitary  stone  4  feet  high,  E  f  S.,  f  mile  from 
Scarecrow  island,  and  it  may  be  approached  on  all  sides  to  60  yards. 

Scarecrow  Island,  fairly  wooded,  6  feet  high,  lies  due  west 
nearly  2  miles  from  Green  island,  and  S.  E.  ^  E.,  7^  miles  from  Killar- 
ney East  light-house.  It  is  200  yards  in  its  greatest  length,  composed 
of  limestone  gravel.  Its  north  side  may  be  approached  to  160  yards, 
but  on  its  other  sides  shoal  water  stretches  oflf  under  the  name  of 

Scarecrow  Island  Bank.— This  rocky  bank  extends  from  the 


138 


GSOBOIAN    BAT. 


island  400  yards  in  a  S.  E.  direction,  and  to  the  S.  W.  half  9,  mile.  To 
pass  westward  of  it,  keep  Bed  rock  in  line  with  Eillarney  peak  N.  N. 
W.  i  W.,  and  to  pass  northeastward  of  the  bank  keep  the  gap  westward 
of  Leading-mark  hill  in  line  with  Red  rock  N.  W.  ^  N. 

Smooth  Rock,  18  feet  high,  N.  by  £.  ^  mile  from  the  north  ura- 
velly  point  of  Green  island,  the  water  is  deep  close-to  on  all  sides.  The 
passage  is  good  between  Green  island  and  Smooth  rock,  but  strangers 
should  not  attempt  to  pass  through  any  of  the  channels  between  the 
islands  north  of  Smooth  rock. 

Southwest  Hawk  Island  is  the  name  given  to  sn  island  38 
feet  high,  situated  N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  a  little  over  three  quarteis  of  a  mile 
from  the  northwest  extremity  of  Green  island.  It  is  the  most  southerly 
and  westerly  of  the  group  of  islands  north  of  Green  island.  It  has  a  few 
trees  on  its  summit,  and  is  steep-to  on  its  west  and  southwest  aides. 

Lie  Haye  Rock,  small  and  just  above  the  surface,  lies  N.  W.  ^  N. 
If  miles  from  the  west  point  of  Green  island.  The  water  is  bold  on  its 
south  and  west  sides. 

The  Triangle  is  three  sunken  rocks,  with  4,  1  and  8  feet  water 
r'^er  them.  The  southwestern  rock  of  the  three,  with  7  feet  water  on  it, 
lies  with  the  east  end  of  Papoose  island  open  westward  of  Scarecrow,  the 
breadth  of  the  latter,  and  bears  from  the  west  point  of  Green  island  N. 
W.  by  W.  3i  miles. 

West  Fox  Island  is  the  most,  westerly  of  a  group  of  islands  1| 
miles  northwestward  of  Hawk  islands.  It  is  from  70  to  80  feet  in  height, 
fairly  wooded  and  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  long  north  and  south;  dry 
rocks  lie  400  yards  off  its  south  and  southwest  sides.  The  west  point  of 
West  Fox  island  bears  N.  W.  by  N.,  and  is  distant  3^  miles  from  the 
west  point  of  Green  island. 

Nicholson  Rock,  with  5  feet  water  upon  it,  lies  half  a  mile 
southwestward  from  this  island. 

The  Brothers  are  two  small  rocks,  5  feet  in  height,  f  mile  west- 
northwestward  from  West  Fox  island.  They  bear  E.  by  8.  2  miles  from 
Bed  rock. 

Harty  Patches  are  the  names  of  two  small  rocks,  with  6  and  13 
feet  on  them,  lying  half  a  mile  westward  of  the  Brothers.  The  northeast 
and  shallower  one  bears  E.  by  S.  If  miles  from  Red  rock. 

Red  Rock,  a  bare  islet  of  that  color  E.  by  S.  I  S.,  3^  miles  from 
Killarney  east  light-house,  and  N.  W.  f  N.  4:^  miles  from  Scarecrow 
island ;  it  is  1 1  feet  high,  and  by  its  isolation  is  conspicuous.  It  is  a  good 
guide  to  the  approaches  of  the  western  entrance  to  Collins  inlet. 

A  Rock  with  10  feet  over  it,  lies  160  yards  northwestward  of  Red 
rock,  and  a  spot  with  13  feet  on  it,  lies  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  260  yards  from 
the  same;  Red  rock  is  otherwise  bold-to. 

Alexander  Rock,  with  9  feet  on  it,  lies  S.  E.,  1^  miles,  from 
Red  rock. 

Halkett  Rock,  with  6  feet  over  it,  lies  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  ^  mile 
from  Red  rock. 

To  pass  southward  of  all  these  dangers,  a  vessel  should  not  pro- 
ceed farther  eastward  than  to  bring  Red  rock  in  line  with  the  gap  west- 
ward of  Leading-mark  hill,  N.  W.  ^  N.  This  mark  leads  but  200  yards 
southwestward  of  Alexander  rock. 


^W.  half  ft  mile.    To 
ullarney  peak  N.  N 
ep  the  gap  westward 

from  the  north  ma- 
te on  all  sides.    The 

rock,  but  stran^^ers 
lannels  between  the 

ven  to  in  island  38 
equartenof  a  mile 
the  most  southerly 
''and.  It  has  a  iei 
)uthivest  sides, 
ace,  lies  N.  W.  ^  N 
(vater  is  bold  on  its 

and  8  feet  water 
7  feet  water  on  it, 

I  of  Scarecrow,  the 
of  Green  island  N. 

roup  of  islands  ijj 

0  80  feet  in  height, 

thand  south;  dry 

The  west  point  of 

H  miles  from  the 


,  lies  half  a  mile 

ight,  f  mile  west- 
^y  8.  2  miles  from 

ka,  with  6  and  13 
8.     The  northeast 

S.,  3|  miles  from 
from  Scarecrow 
ous.    It  is  a  good 
ns  inlet. 

«^estward  of  Red 
260  yards  from 

•  H  miles,  from 

N.  I  N.,  I  mile 

I  should  not  pro- 
th  the  gap  west- 
Is  but  200  yards 


OEOSGIAM    BAT. 


189 


COLLINS  INLGT  is  the  name  given  to  the  water  which  separ- 

lites  Philip  Edward  island  from  the   main  shore;  it  can  be  entered  on 

ftither  side  of  the  inland,  but  the  eastern  entrance  is  an  indifferent  one, 

id  has  fallen  into  disuse.     A  considerable  lumber  business  is  carried  on 

»y  the  Midland  and  North  Shore  Lumber  Co.     Vessels  drawing  less  than 

10  feet  can  proceed  to  the  mill  about  1 1  miles  from  the  western  entrance, 

rhich  is  4^  miles  east-northeabtward  from  the  east  e;  "^  ance  to  Eillarney, 

rbere  it  is  recommended  that  strangers  should  procu  ■;  a  pilot. 

6£ORG]B  ISLAND,  which  may  be  said  to  ot  the  north  entrance 
loint  of  the  North  channel  of  Lake  Huron,  is  of  a  triangular  shape,  the 
length  of  each  of  the  sides  being  about  if  miles,  the  northeast  side  form- 
ing the  south  shore  of  Killarney  harbor.  The  southeast  coast  from 
liortheast  point  is  bold-to. 

Petley  Rock,  with  l  foot  of  water  on  it,  lies  150  yards  from  the 
loutb  extreme  of  George  island,  and  shoal  water  continues  from  it  400 
yards  in  a  W.  S.  W.  direction.     The  shore  here  should  be  given  a  berth 
.  of  f  of  a  mile. 

George  Rock,  the  tr    of  which  is  just  covered,  lies  N.  by  W.  J 
,  W.,  a  little  over  f  mile  from  ^at    j  cove  ledge,  and  i  of  a  mile  from  the 
nearest  part  of  George  islard. 

Sandy  Cove  Ledge,  2  feet  high,  lies  260  yards  from  the  mouth 
of  the  cove,  S.  W.  point  of  George  island;  from  it  the  water  falls  off 
deep  to  the  westward  and  so  .thward;  there  is  no  passage  between  it  and 
the  shore.  The  west  sir'  ">  of  George  island  to  Fish  point,  its  N.  W.  ex- 
['  tremity,  is  rugged  and  i  iged  with  a  rocky  bank  extending  for  an  aver- 
age distance,  ^  mile  from  shore. 

Gull  Roost,  11  feet  high,  is  the  highest  of  the  granite  rocks  which 
skirt  the  shore. 

Fish  Point  is  the  northwestern  extremity  of  George  island;  it  is 
composed  of  two  low,  bare  islets,  5  feet  high. 

Ann  Long  Bank.— j-A  depth  of  1  feet  will  be  found  600  yards  in 
a  westerly  direction  from  Fish  point;  to  lead  west  of  it,  keep  the  west 
lighthouse  in  line  with  the  highest  part  of  Leadingmark  hill,  N.  E.  ^  N. 

KILLARNEY  EAST  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  12  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  42  feet  above 
lake  level.  The  old  reflectors  have  been  replaced  by  a  lens  apparatus. 
The  light  shows  with  equal  intensity  in  all  directions,  and  is  visible  in 
the  bay  to  the  eastward  of  the  station  where  the  old  light  did  not  show. 
It  is  situated  on  Red  Rock  point  (close  to  which  there  is  deep  water), 
on  the  north  side  of  the  eastern  entrance  to  the  harbor.  One  mile  east 
of  Killarney. 

Entrance  Rocks,  6  feet  high,  lie  150  yards  northward  of  the  north- 
east point;  they  are  100  yards  in  extent  northwest  and  southeast;  not 
more  than  8  feet  can  be  carried  between  them  and  George  island,  but 
they  are  steep-to  on  the  north  side. 

Jackman  Rock,  a  small  lump  with  8  feet  least  water  over  it» 
lies  E.  by  S.  200  yards  from  Entrance  rock.  Fish  point  closed  with  the 
docks  on  the  north  shore  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  leads  north  of  this  obstruction. 

Killarney  Harbor  is  a  narrow  strait  dividing  George  island 
from  the  main  shore,  and  affords  excellent  shelter  from  all  winds,  least 
depth  in  the  channel  being  21  feet,  the  north  shore  of  the  harbor  is  in 


140 


OEOBOIAN    BAT. 


I 


dented  by  throe  oovcs,  the  eastermost  of  which  rnns  in  Immediately  west- 
ward of  the  east  light-house. 

Range  Lights.— To  be  built. 

Directions  for  Entering  Killarney  Harbor  from  the 
Soutlieastward. — Bring  the  east  light-house  under  the  highest  part 
of  Leading-mark  hill  bearing  N.  ^  E.,  at  night  keep  the  light  on  this 
bearing,  and  proceed  for  it  thus  to  avoid  Jackman  rock,  until  Fish  point 
is  closed  with  the  wharves  at  the  village  bearing  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  This 
mark  will  lead  northward  of  Jackman  rock.  After  passing  the  entrance 
rocks,  which  can  generally  be  made  out  on  a  dark  night,  keep  the  George 
Island  shore  on  board  to  avoid  a  shallow  stone,  lying  fifty  yards  of!  a 
point  on  the  north  shore  immediately  opposite  the  Bayfield  bluff. 

Le  Hayes  Point.- -The  southwest  extremity  of  the  main-land 
shore,  and  the  north  point  ci  entrance  from  the  westward.  This  point 
has  a  rock  6  feeft  high,  lying  40  yards,  together  with  a  small  dry  stone 
100  yards  west  »»f  it;  the  channel  here  being  only  70  yards  wide.  The 
south  shore  of  the  harbor,  between  Northeast  and  Fish  points  although 
straight  on  the  whole,  is  broken  by  several  coves. 

KILLARNEY  WEST,  OR  PARTRIDGE  ISLAND 
LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  miles.  White, 
square  wood  tower.  On  the  south  point  of  an  island,  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  a 
little  more  than  f  of  a  mile  from  the  western  entrance  of  Killarney  har- 
bor.    (Range  lights  are  to  be  erected.) 

Directions  for  Entering  Killarney  Harbor  from  the 
Westward. — If  from  the  North  channel.  Lake  Huron,  the  most  direct 
track  is  between  Kokanongwi and  Badgely  islands;  and  the  west  light- 
house is  to  be  steered  for  in  line  with  the  highest  part  of  Leading-mark 
hill,  N.  E.  ^  N.,  to  lead  east  of  Double  Island  ledges,  and  west  of  Ann 
Long  bank.  The  vessel's  head  may  be  turned  more  eastward  when 
Badgely  rocks,  (hereafter  described)  come  in  line  with  Lion's  Rump,  W. 
^  S.  Run  on  the  latter  mark  until  the  northeast  part  of  George  island 
is  touching,  or  slightly  closed  with  Le  Hayes  point,  E.  S.  E.  The  most 
water  that  a  vessel  can  carry  into  the  harbor  by  western  entrance  is  11 
feet.  Entering  from  the  eastward,  not  less  than  4  fathoms  can  be  car- 
ried to  the  wharves.  A  stranger  should  not  attempt  either  of  the  en- 
trances to  Killarney  by  night. 

Hadgely  Rocks,  about  lO  feet  above  water,  lie  N.  E.  by  N.,  half 
a  mile  from  Maxwell  point,  the  N.  E.  extreme  of  Badgely  island. 

BADGELY  ISLAND  has  a  total  length  of  3f  miles,  greatest 
breadth  1^  miles;  the  highest  part  is  situated  f  mile  from  its  N.  E.  ex- 
treme; greatest  elevation,  370  feet. 

Twin  Islands,  30  feet  high,  consist  of  two  high  bare  rocks,  \ 
mile  southeastward  of  Maxwell  point,  deep  water  on  their  east  and  south 
sides.  The  southeast  side  of  Badgely  island  as  far  as  High  beacli  is 
steep-to. 

Linter  Rock,  with  14  feet  least  water  on  it,  lies  S.  ^  E.,  a  little 
more  than  ^  mile  from  the  southern  Twin  island,  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  a  little 
more  than  that  distance  from  the  north  part  of  Kokanongwi  island.  The 
west  light-honse  and  Leading-mark  hill  range  before  alluded  to,  leads 
westward  of  this  shoal  also. 

KOKANONGWI  ISLAND.— The  Indian  name  for  a  small  fish, 


! 


OEOROIAM    BAT. 


141 


in  immediately  west- 


larbor  from  the 

ader  the  highest  part 
eep  the  light  on  this 
■ock,  until  Fish  point 
'•  by  N.  ^  N.  This 
'  passing  the  entrance 
ght,  keep  the  George 
ng  fifty  yards  off  a 
►ayfield  bluflF. 

y  of  the  main-land 
Jtward.      This  point 
i  a  small  dry  stone 
0  yards  wide.    The  \ 
ish  points  although   4^ 

DGE    ISLAND 

e  10  miles.  White. 
3,  N.  N.  W.  i  W,  I 
e  of  Killarney  har- 


u. 


arbor  from  the 

ron,  the  most  direct 
md  the  west  light- 
rt  of  Leading-mark 
,  and  west  of  Ann 
>re  eastward  when 
h  Lion's  Rump,  W. 
b  of  George  island 
.  S.  E.  The  most 
Item  entrance  is  17 
ithoms  can  be  ear- 
either  of  the  en- 

e  N.  E.  by  N.,  half 
ely  island. 

J|  miles,   greatest 
rom  its  N.  E.  ex- 

igh   bare  rocks,  \ 

eir  east  and  south 

as  High  bead,  is 

8  S.  i  E.,  a  little 
r.  E.  i  E.,  a  little 
ngwi  island.  The 
alluded  to,  leads 

ne  for  a  small  fish, 


)  f  mile  long,  northeast  and  southwest,  and  400  yards  wide.  It  lies  f 
lile  southeastward  from  the  center  of  Badgely  island.  Shoal  water  ex- 
ends  SCO  yards  south  and  west  from  the  southwest  point,  leaving  its 
lorthwest  and  north  sides  steep-to.  A  large  rocky  Hat  extends  from  the 
)utheast  side  one-third  of  a  mile,  almost  joining  the  shoal  water  from 

Kokanongwi  Shingle. — A  bank  of  stones  6  feet  high,  bearing 
G.  by  S.  f  S.,  \  mile  from  the  north  point  of  Kokanongwi  island.  A  shal- 
low spit  extends  from  it  in  a  northeast  direction  200  yards  and  a  bank 
rans  from  it  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  \  mile,  leaving  a  channel  200  yards  wide  be- 
tween it  and  the  bank  from  Kokanongwi  island. 

Evans  Point  is  the  southwest  projection  of  Badgely  island,  off  it 
loal  water  extends  200  yards. 

CENTER  ISLAND  is  the  next  large  island  westward  of  Badgely 
island,  the  east  extremity  is  composed  of  three  islets,  the  eastern  of  which, 
Harris  island,  is  200  yards  in  diameter,  and  separated  from  Underbill 
point  (the  west  point  of  Badgely  island),  by  a  deep  channel  300  yards 
wide. 

Center  Island  Bank,  least  water  7  feet,  extends  from  west 
end  of  the  island  in  a  southeasterly  direction  f  mile,  this  bank  extends  f 
mile  from  the  shore  and  narrows  the  channel  between  it  and  Skull  point 
reef  to  a  little  over  ^  a  mile.  The  southeast  corner  of  this  extensive 
rocky  bank  bears  W.  by  S.  If  miles  from  the  southwest  point  of  Badgely 
island,  and  the  southwest  ext''emity  of  the  bank  bears  E.  by  S.,  If  miles 
from  the  western  part  of  Partridge  island.  The  south  extreme  of  Kok- 
anongwi island  open  south  of  Badgely  island,  E.  by  N.,  leads  south  of 
Center  island  bank  and  Bayfield  reef. 

Partridge,  or  Round  Island  is  the  western  one  of  the  three, 
separated  from  Center  island  by  a  deep  but  narrow  channel;  the  summit 
of  the  island  is  190  feet  above  water. 

Partridge  Island  Rocks  are  two  small  rocky  patches  having 
12  feet  of  water  on  them,  one  S.  E.  by  E.  \  mile,  the  other  E.  by  S.  f  S., 
^  mile  from  the  southwest  point  of  Partridge  island.^  Shoal  water 
fringes  the  south  shore  of  the  island  an  average  distance  of  200  yards. 

HEYWOOD,  OR  RAT  ISLAND  is  the  next  large  island  west 
of  Partridge  island;  it  is  2f  miles  long  east  and  west,  average  width  f  of 
a  mile,  and  178  feet  high;  the  water  on  the  south  shore  is  good  to  the 
line  of  points.     Southeast  point,  the  name  given  to  that  point,  is  steeD-to. 

Watts  Rock,  with  one  foot  of  water  on  it,  lies  \  mile  east  of  the 
eastern  point  of  Hey  wood  island.  A  spur  of  three  fathoms  makes  off  in 
a  northeast  direction  nearly  200  yards.  The  summit  of  Badgely  island 
in  line  with  the  north  side  of  Partridge  island,  E.  by  N.  \  N.,  leads  south 
of  this  danger. 

Oxley  Point  is  the  western  extremity  of  Heywood  island,  a  flat 
with  three  fathoms,  extends  400  yards  in  a  northwest  direction. 

Wharton  Point  is  the  southwest  point  of  Heywood  island,  a  nar- 
row spit  makes  out  160  yards,  at  which  distance  there  is  8  feet  of  water. 

MANITOWANING  BAT,    OR   HEYWOOD   SOUND, 

the  next  indentation  westward  of  Smith  bay,  i  i  fine  sheet  of  water  11 
miles  long,  and  free  from  outlying  dangers;  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay  ia 
situated  the  town  of  Manitowaning,  with  a  population  of  about  400. 


' 


I 


142 


OBOR6IAN    BAY. 


Indian  Dock  Point  is  the  eastern  point  of  entrance  to  Manito- 
waning  bay.     Shoal  water  extends  from  the  shore  on  either  side  of  tbig ! 
point  400  yards. 

Rabbit  Island,  a  low  wooded  island,  S.  W.  ^  W.,  2f  miles  from  \ 
Indian  Dock  point;  shoal  water  between  them  extends  ^  mile  from  shore. 
The  west  fall  of  Leading-mark  hill,  Killarney,  seen  over  the  eastern  ^ 
extremity  of  Center  island,  N.  E.  J  E.,  leads  northwestward  of  all  these 
reefs. 

Rabbit  Island  Rock,  with  6  feet  of  water  over  it,  lies  S.  W.  810 
yards  from  the  west  side  of  Rabbit  island.  To  avoid  it,  keep  Indian 
Dock  point  open  northwestward  of  Rabbit  island,  N.  E.  ^  E. 

Phipp's  Point  Shoal,  a  rocky  patch  with  9  feet  least  water  on 
it,  lies  400  yards  westward  from  the  southern  part  of  Phipp's  point. 
Strangers  should  pass  westward  of  it,  by  keeping  Fanny  island  in  Mani 
towaning  harbor,  touching  Town  point  S.  ^  W. 

MANITOWANING  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  14  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  80  feet  above 
lake  level.  In  the  village  of  Manitowaning,  about  250  yards  northward 
of  the  Government  wharf  and  50  yards  from  the  shore. 

Gibraltar  Cliff,  a  rather  remarkable  rocky  bluff,  j[  mile  back  from 
the  beach  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  as  this  cliff  is  just  in  sigli; 
when  on  Phipp's  point  shoal,  care  should  be  taken  on  approaching  or 
leaving  Manitowaning,  that  it  is  well  open  of  the  eastern  shore. 

Manitowaning^  Harbor,  a  good  anchorage  between  Fanny 
island  and  the  docks,  in  3  to  5  fathoms,  the  nearer  the  town  the  better; 
but  the  whole  of  the  bay  to  the  east  and  southeast  of  the  light  is  an 
excellent  harbor,  good  anchorage  in  any  depth  under  10  fathoms. 

SHEGUIANDAH  BAY  is  a  deep  indentation  between  Mani- 
towaning and  Little  current. 

liOOn  Island  is  a  low  and  wooded  island  250  yards  long  and 
100  yards  wide,  situated  N.  by  W.,  If  miles  from  Ten-mile  point  (the 
western  entrance  point  of  Manitowaning  bay).  From  the  south  point 
a  shoal  extends  in  a  S.  S.  W.  direction  400  yards.  Its  other  sides  are 
fairly  steep-to. 

LOON  ISLAND  REEF,  with  1  feet  least  water  on  it,  is  a  dan- 
geroue  obstruction,  lying  with  its  northern  edge  E.  ^  N.,  |  mile  from 
the  north  point  of  Loon  island.  The  south  edge  of  the  reef  bears  E. 
by  S.  from  the  same.  To  pass  east  of  Loon  island  reef,  keep  the  south- 
east fall  of  Cloche  bluff  in  line  with  the  west  point  of  Heywood  island, 
N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  as  this  mark  leads  close,  care  must  be  taken  not  t& 
open  the  bluff.  To  pass  200  yards  westward  of  the  reef,  keep  the 
rock  (an  eminence  166  feet  high,  ^  mile  back  of  the  village  of  Mani- 
towaning) in  line  or  closed  with  Ten-mile  point,  S.  4  W.  From  the 
southward  it  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  the  line  of  the 
south  points  of  King  William  and  Loon  islands  in  range,  W.  by  N. 
To  lead  north  of  the  reef,  keep  the  foot  of  Sheguiandah  hill  in  line 
with  the  south  point  of  Strawberry  island,  W.  by  N. 

STRAWBERRY  ISLAND  is  4|  miles  long,  in  a  nearly  north 
and  south  direction,  with  greatest  width  If  miles.  Its  coast  line  is 
indented  by  numerous  deep  coves;  South  point  is  the  most  southerly  ex- 
tremity of  the  island.     The  depth  of  16  feet  will  be  found  850  yards 


'h       -i   ■      .-*!■■ 


t  of  entrance  to  Maniu. 
>re  on  either  side  of  thii 

W.  i  W.,  2f  miles  from] 
tends  ^  mile  from  shore, 
,  seen  over  the  eastern 
rthwestward  of  all  these 

er  over  it,  lies  8.  W.  8uo 
>  avoid  it,  keep  Indian 
I,  N.  E.  ^  E. 

th  9  feet  least  water  oo 

part  of   Phipp's  point, 

;  Fanny  island  in  Mani- 

rON.— A  fixed  white 
er,  light  80  feet  above 
It  260  yards  northward 
3  shore. 

T  bluff,  ^  mile  back  from 
}  cliff  is  just  in  sigiit 
iken  on  approaching  or 
the  eastern  shore, 
jorage  between  Fanny 
per  the  town  the  better; 
least  of  the  light  is  an 
under  10  fathoms. 

ntation  between  Mani- 

250   yards  long  and 
)m  Ten-mile  point  (the 
From  the  south  point 
3s.     Its  other  sides  are 

t  water  on  it,  is  a  dan- 
E.  ^  N.,  ^  mile  from 
'  of  the  reef  bears  E. 
d  reef,  keep  the  south- 
tit  of  Hey  wood  island, 
nust  be   taken  not  to 
the    reef,  keep  the 
the  village  of  Mani- 
S.  i  W.     From  the 
ban  the   line    of   the 
in  range,  W.  by  N. 
Jguiandah  hill  in  line 
N. 

)ng,  in  a  nearly  north 
lies.  Its  coast  line  is 
he  most  southerly  ex- 
1  be  found  860  yards 


OEOKOIAN    BAT. 


14S 


.f 


ivth  of  the  point,  and  15  feet  at  160  yards.     The  shore  from  the  South 
(int  trends  in  northeast  direction  nearly  3  miles  to  East  point. 

Beaver  Island  is  a  narrow  island,  1,200  yards  long,  low  and  thickly 
ooded.     Its  eastern  shore  may  be  approached  to  200  yards,  but  from  its 
uth  point  shoal  water  extends  in  a  southwest  direction  ^  mile,  with 
^epth  from  15  to  18  feet  over  it     The  north  end  of  Beaver  island  is  oon- 
ihected  with  Strawberry  by  a  bar  with  9  feet  over  it. 

East  Point  is  the  name  given  to  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  island; 
there  are  3  fathoms  to  within  ^  mile  of  the  point. 

To  enter  Shegruiandah  northward  of  Loon  Island.— 

lep  the  foot  of  Sheguiandah  hill  in  line  with  South  point  of  Strawberry 
.nd;  when  past  King  William  island,  do  not  shut  in  the  north  point  of 
m  island  behind  the  former,  until  Leech  Island  reef  is  past;  when 
ir  for  the  wharf,  or  anchor  at  the  head  of  the  bay. 

Leech  Island  is  a  narrow  bank  of  stones,  thickly  wooded;  its 
,h  end  bears  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  1  mile  from  the  north  end  of  King  William 
iland. 

Leech  Island  Reef  extends  N.  E.,  860  y^rds,  at  which  distance 
17  feet  will  be  found;  the  north  points  of  King  William  and  Loon  islands 
line,  E.  f  S.,  lead  north  of  this  reef. 

Langevin  Rock,  with  ll  feet  of  water  on  it,  is  N.  i  W.,  f  mile 
om  East  point  of  Strawberry  island.  To  clear  this  patch,  keep  the 
hole  of  Loon  island  open  east  of  East  point,  S.  ^  W. 

Garon  Point  is  f  mile  S.  E.  of  Strawberry  Island  light-house. 

Caron  Reef.  This  shoal  has  a  depth  varying  from  9  feet  on  the 
mer,  to  1 7  feet  on  its  outer  part.  To  pass  eastward  of  it,  keep  the  east 
oint  of  Loon  island  open  of  East  point  of  Strawberry  island  due  south, 
''he  north  point  of  Beauty  island  in  line  with  Strawberry  Island  light, 

W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  leads  northeastward  of  the  reef. 

STRAWBERRY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION— A  fixed 
bite  light,  visible   11   miles.     White,  square  wood  tower,  attached  to 
welling.     On  the  northermost  point  of  island,  which  is  steep-to  at  the 
Bght-house  point. 

Garden  Island. — Is  a  barren  limestone  island,  9  feet  high,  lying 
iBOO  yards  northward  of  Strawberry  island  light-house;  it  is  600  yards 
|bng  by  250  yards  wide. 

Garden  Island  Bank  is  a  dangerous  rocky  flat  extending  from 

the  south  shore  of  Garden  island  to  within  360  yards  of  Strawberry  Is- 

nd  light-house.     There  is  as  little  as  3  feet  on  the  southeastern  part  of 

e  bank,  but  the  northeast,  north  and  northwest  sides  of  Garden  island 

e  steep-to. 

Beauty  Island  is  70  or  so  feet  high  at  its  northern  extremity,  is 
Stuated  on  the  north  side  of  the  eastern  approach  to  Little  Current,  and 
plortheastward  ^  mile  from  Gibbons  point  (thp  south  side  of  the  eastern 
j^pproach).  Its  southeast  point  is  fairly  bold  >,  but  from  the  south  shore 
%  rocky  bank  extends  a  quarter  of  a  mile  fr<  -  the  island,  to  avoid  which 
in  approaching  or  leaving  Little  Current,  koep  the  inner  or  southern 
"^fhthouse  at  that  place  in  line  with  or  closed  with  Shut-in  point,  W.  by 
If.  ^  N.  This  mark  will  serve  for  day  or  night  leading  over  not  less  than 
yl7  feet  water. 


■r 


144 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


LITTI'S  CURRENT,  or  Shaftesbury  occupies  an  important 
position  cs  being  the  narrow  channt  through  which  all  vessels  must  pass, 
when  navigating  this  part  of  the  7  orth  Channel  of  Lake  Huron.  The 
passage  lies  between  the  north  shore  of  Manitoulin  island  on  the  south, 
and  Goat  island  on  the  north,  the  western  part  having  been  excavated  to 
a  depth  of  17  feet. 

The  western  entrance  points  are  Magazine  point  (the  west  point  of 
Goat  island)  and  Spider  island. 

Griffith's  Point  is  600  yards  to  the  westward  of  Gibbons  point, 
and  between  them  a  shallow  bank  extends  100  yards  from  the  south  shore. 
The  remainder  of  the  shore  is  fairly  steep-to.  It  is  one  mile  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  southern  light-house. 

Twelve-Foot  Rock. — This  small  lump  is  situated  with  the  east- 
ern wharf  in  line  with  the  southern  lighthouse,  and  eastward  of  the  for- 
mer 250  yards,  with  deeper  water  between  it  and  the  south  shore. 

Current. — The  stream  through  this  cutting  runs  in  either  direction, 
very  strong  at  times,  requiring  when  contrary  a  good  head  of  steam  and 
careful  steering. 

Shaftesbury  or  Little  Current  Range  Lights.— Two 

fixed  white  lights,  visible  6  miles.  White,  square  wood  towers,  2il  and 
24  feet  high.  To  guide  through  the  Little  Current.  They  bear  from 
each  other  N.  i  W.  and  S.  f  E.,  460  yards  apart.  The  southern  light 
stands  near  the  shore  between  the  docks.  The  northern  one  is  on  the  east 
point  of  Spider  island. 

Directions. — In  proceeding  through  Little  Curjrent  from  the  east- 
ward, after  passing  Gibbons  point  keep  rather  nearer  the  south  shore 
than  the  Goat  island  shore;  pass  close  to  the  docks,  keeping  in  the  line 
of  the  lights,  and  give  the  northern  light  a  berth  of  50  yards.  When 
the  buoys  are  in  position,  keep  the  red  buoys  on  the  starboard,  and  black 
on  port  hand,  when  proceeding  in  this  direction. 

The  whole  of  the  north  shore  from  Goat  island  to  Flat  island,  a 
a  distance  of  2^  miles,  is  shallow  for  a  long  way  out,  and  should  be  care- 
fully avoided,  by  keeping  the  islands  on  the  Manitoulin  shore  on  board. 

Flat  Island  may  be  considered  the  southwest  extremity  of  Great 
Cloche  island. 

Spider  Island  is  low  and  flat;  it  is  250  yards  in  length  east  and 
west,  and  70  yards  wide.  Shoal  water  extends  100  yards  into  the  chan- 
nel from  the  west  end.     The  northern  light  stands  on  the  east  point. 

Low  Island,  of  the  same  character,  lies  next  west  of  Spider  islau'l, 
separated  by  a  shallow  passage  200  yards  wide.  This  island  is  400  yards 
in  diameter,  and  its  north  point  is  steep-to.  The  ship  channel  here  is 
about  that  number  of  yards  wide. 

Picnic  Island  lies  with  its  west  extremity  1  mile  northwestward 
from  Spider  Island  light  houHc;  it  is  ^  mile  long,  by  nearly  400  yards 
wide.  The  channel  here  is  less  than  400  yards  wide,  and  the  deepest 
water  that  can  be  carried  past  the  northwest  point  is  21  feet.  To  avoid 
the  shoal  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel  westward  of  Picnic  island,  a 
vessel  should  keep  the  north  end  of  Low  island  in  line  with  or  olost'd 
behind  the  north  extremity  of  Picnic  island,  E.  8.  E. 

A  Cluster  of  stones,  ^  mile  W.  by  8.  f  S.,  from  the  northwest  point 


GEORGIAN   BAY. 


145 


scupies   an    important 
Q  all  vessels  must  pass 
3f  Lake  Huron.     The 
n  island  on  the  south, 
'ing  been  excavated  to 

Qt  (the  west  point  of 

ard  of  Gibbons  point, 
I  from  the  south  shore. 
i  one  mile  to  the  east- 

lituated  with  the  east- 
eastward  of  the  for- 
le  south  shore. 

ms  in  either  direction, 
)d  head  of  steam  and 

ige  Lights.— Two 

wood  towers,  2ij  and 

it.     They  bear  from 

The  southern  light 

ern  one  is  on  the  east 

urjrent  from  the  east- 
irer  the  south  shore 
keeping  in  the  line 
of  60  yards.  When 
starboard,  and  black 

nd  to  Flat  island,  a 
and  should  be  caro- 
in  shore  on  board. 

extremity  of  Great 

9  in  length  east  and 
rards  into  the  ohan- 
the  east  paint. 

stof  Spider  islan. I, 
island  is  400  yards 
lip  channel  here  is 

iiile  northwestward 
'  nearly  400  yards 
>,  and  the  deepest 
21  feet.  To  avoid 
jf  Picnic  island,  a 
ine  with  or  closed 

16  northwest  point 


I*icnic  island,  and  from  these  stones  a  spit  makes  out  to  the  northwestward,  300 
jrards. 

NARROW  ISI^AND  LIGHT-STATIOHf.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible 
11  miles.  Square,  white,  wooden  tower,  with  kitchen  attached.  The  tower  is  sur- 
.  mounted  by  an  iron  lantern,  painted  red.  On  the  west  end  of  Narrow  island,  in  the 
ehannel  north  of  Great  Manitoulin  island,  about  3  utiles  to  the  westward  of  Little 
Current.  North  side  of  Foster  bank  W.  i  N.  4f  miles;  west  side  of  Halfway  islands 
N.  by  E.  i  E.  3f  miles. 

Narrow  Island  is  i  mile  long  east  and  west,  and  very  little  breadth.  The 
aorthwest  point  of  this  island  bears  W.  i  N.,  U  miles,  from  the  same  extremity  of 
Picnic  island,  and  no  vessel  should  go  to  the  southward  of  this  line. 

Narrow  Island  is  important  as  marking  the  south  entrance  point  of  the  western 
approach  to  Little  Current,  and  unlike  flat  island  on  the  opposite  side,  its  channel 
shore  may  be  approached  to  150  yards. 

Two  Rocks,  with  7  feet  water  on  them,  lie  400  yards  westward  of  Narrow 
Wand,  the  northern  one  bearing  due  west  from  the  northwest  extremity  of  that 
liland.     To  lead  north  of  this  danger,  the  whole  of  Picnic  island  should  be  kept  open 
ilorthward  of  Narrow  island,  E.  by  8.  i  8. 
'     East  Rous  Island  is  the  next  large  island  west  of  Great  Cloche. 

Mink  Island  is  the  largest  and  eastermost  of  a  group  of  islands 
•OQth  of  East  Rous  island. 

Blake  Island,  lO  feet  high,  is  the  southermost  of  this  group. 
The  south  side  of  this  island  may  be  approached  to  200  yards. 

West  Rous  Island  is  the  next  large  island  west  of  East  Rous 
island;  it  is  shoal  on  all  sides  except  the  north. 

',       BEDFORD   ISLAND  is  the  next  large  island  westward  of  the 
Rous  islands,  its  greatest  diameter  being  3;^  miles. 

Straubenzee  Point  is  the  name  given  to  the  southwest  extrem- 
ity,  and  from  it  a  dangerous  reef  extends  f  mile  in  a  southwest  direction, 
with  as  little  as  3  feet  of  water  on  it. 

Foster  Bank,  with  seven  feet  least  water  on  it,  lies  with  its 
eastern  and  shallowest  end  bearing  S.  by  £.,  1^  miles,  from  Straubenzee 
point.;  from  this  position  the  bank  runs  westward,  nearly  half  a  mile. 

Eleven-foot  Rock,  with  that  depth  of  water  over  it,  is  400 
yards  westward  of  Foster  bank.  It  bears  8.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  1^  miles,  from 
Straubenzee  point. 

James  Foote  Patch,  with  3f  fathoms  on  it,  lies  ^  mile  south- 
ward of  the  last  mentioned  shoals. 

Vessels  mast  pass  south  of  these  shoals,  by  keeping  the  north  end  of 
Picnic  island  in  line  with,  or  south,  of  the  south  side  of  Narrow  island 
due  east.  The  northeast  side  of  Elm  island  touching  the  southwest 
shore  of  Amedroz  island,  N.  W.  ^  N.,  leads  southwest  of  Eleven -foot 
rock. 

The  northwest  fall  of  the  spur  from  Mt.  McBean,  in  line  with  the 
southwest  point  of  Bear's  Back  island,  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  leads  west  of 
Eleven-foot  spot. 

Bear's  Back  Island  lies  midway  between  the  southern  portion 
of  Bedford  and  Amedroz  islands.  It  is  ^  mile  long.  Its  east  and  south- 
east sides  are  steep-to,  but  from  the  west  low  side  of  the  island. 

BcMir's  Back  Shoal  makes  out  i  of  a  mile,  to  the  depth  of  3 
fathoms.  The  northeast  extremity  of  Clapporton  island  in  lino  with  the 
southwest  side  of  Amedroz  island,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  leads  south  of 
this  reef. 


146 


GEORGIAN   BAT. 


Elm  Island)  so  called  from  a  single  tree  of  that  kind,  which  it  j 
still  preserves,  is  a  narrow  bank  of  stones,  1  feet  high  and  200  yards 


distant  one  mile  southwestward  from  the  west  extreme  of  Bear's  Back 
island. 

EHm  Island  Bank,  with  6  to  12  feet  over  it,  extends  400  yards 
in  aN.  N.  E.  and  N.  W.  direction  from  Elm  island;  its  other  sides  may 
be  approached  to  200  yards. 

Lansdowne  and  Lone  Rocks,  with  17  feet  of  water  on 
them,  lie  respectively  S.  E.  by  E.  -J  mile,  and  E.  ^  N.,  f  mile  from  Elm 
island. 

The  bare,  rocky  summit  of  Wilson  point  (Croker  island)  open  west  of 
Amedroz  island  N.  W.  f  N.  leads  southwestward  '^'^  Elm  Island  bank. 

AMEDKOZ  ISLAND  lies  eastward  of  Clapperton  island,  and 
the  greatest  diameter  is  three  miles. 

Carleton  Point. — This  low  south  extremity  of  the  island,  and 
the  shore  eastward  of  it  for  f  of  a  mile  are  fringed  with  shoal  water  for 
a  distance  of  300  yards. 

Mag^ee  Point  is  situated  |-  of  a  mile  northwestward  from  the  last 
mentioned,  enclosing  between  them  a  deep  shallow  indentation,  known  as 
Reedy  bay. 

Magee  Bank  is  the  name  of  the  rocky  flat  extending  nearly  ^  mile 
from  these  islets  and  Carleton  poiut.  Croker  island  open  westward  of 
Amedroz  island  N.  N.  W.,  leads  west  of  this  bank.  The  central  and 
gravelly  projection  of  Magee  point  should  be  given  a  berth  of  200  yards. 
From  the  north  part  of  this  point,  the  northwest  side  of  Amedroz  island 
runs  in  a  northeasterly  direction  to  Robinson  point,  the  most  northerly 
projection  of  Amedroz  island.  This  coast  is  fairly  steep-to;  and  may  be 
approached  to  200  yards. 

CLAPPERTON  ISLAND.— Thi^  aland  is  one  of  the  longest 
in  this  parf  of  the  North  Channel  of  Lake  1  .ron,  being  5i  miles  in  length 
from  the  light-house  to  South  point,  and  foims  part  of  the  eastern  bound- 
ary of  the  open  water  of  the  North  channel. 

South  Point. — A  very  shoal  rocky  spit  makes  off  from  the  end  of 
this  point,  in  a  southerly  direction  400  yards,  and  a  bank  terminating  in 
a  rock  with  10  feet  on  it,  extends  ^  mile  east  of  this  point. 

Baker  Point  is  2  miles  northward  of  South  point  of  Clapperton 
island,  and  to  within  i  mile  of  Sorth  point  the  coast  may  be  approached 
to  300  yards. 

Carlingf  Point. — This  point  is  situated  nearly  GOO  yards  south- 
westward  of  the  islet  on  the  south  side  of  Logan  island,  and  may  be  ap- 
proachud  from  the  eastward  to  250  yards. 

Carling^  Bay  is  contained  between  Carling  and  Baker  points. 

Logan  Island  lies  1  mile  southeastward  from  Gartwright  point, 
being  separated  from  the  main  island  on  the  northwest  by  a  barrier  of 
sunken  rocks.  The  north  side  of  this  island  is  shoal  for  300  yards,  and 
its  eastern  side  for  150  yards,  while  ^  of  a  mile  in  the  latter  direction,  is 
a  spot  with  a  depth  of  3^  fatlioms,  falling  down  suddenly  to  20. 

Logan  Bay  is  a  double  indentation  at  the  back  of  the  island  of 
that  name,  and  although  shallow,  it.  fairly  level.  Temporary  anchorage 
may  be  had  in  15  to  18  feet  between  the  outer  part  of  Logan  island  and 
the  south  entrance  point  of  the  bay. 


S:' 


e  of  that  kind,  which  J 

;  high  and  200  yards  Ion? 
extreme  of  Bear's  Back' 

'    -I       ' 

Br  it,  extends  400  yards  i 
and;  its  other  sides  may  i 

'i^xT  ^^^^  ®^   ^**6^  on 
i  -N.,  f  mile  from  Elm 

ker  island)  open  west  of 
I  ^   Elm  Island  bank. 
Clapperton  island,  and 

iity  of  the  island,  and 
ed  with  shoal  water  for 

westward  from  the  last 
indentation,  known  as 

3xtending  nearly  ^  mile 
nd  open  westward  of 
nk.  The  central  and 
a  a  berth  of  200  yards, 
ide  of  Amedroz  island 
it,  the  most  northerly 
steep-to;  and  may  be 

is  one  of  the  longest 
eing  5i  miles  in  length 
t  of  the  eastern  bound- 

ces  off  from  the  end  of 
I  bank  terminating  in 
point. 

h  point  of  Clapperton 
't  may  be  approached 

irly  GOO  yards  south- 
and,  and  may  be  ap- 

id  Baker  points, 
fn  Gartwright  point, 
west  by  a  barrier  of 
I  for  300  yards,  and 
e  latter  direction,  is 
lenly  to  20. 

tck  of  the  island  of 
oiuponvry  anchorage 
yi  Logan  island  and 


aEOKaiAN    BAY. 


147 


OliAPPERTON  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
^hite  light,  visible  8  miles.     White,   square  wood  tower,  36   feet  high. 

the  north  point  of  the  island.  Marks  the  channel  between  Clapperton 
•nd  Croker  islands.  Gore  Bay  light,  W.  S.  W.  |^S.,  14  miles.  The  range 
leads  over  foul  ground. 

From  the  southeastward,  this  light  is  noi  visible  until  bearing  W.  ^  S. 

Robertson  Bock,  with  8  feet  water  over  it,  lies  N.  E.  ^  E.,  i 
mile  from  Clapperton  Island  light-house,  and  to  avoid  this  obstruction 
yessels  should  keep  pretty  close  to  the  Clapperton  Island  shore,  or  when 
passing  it,  the  south  end  of  Amedroz  island  should  not  be  opened  north- 
ward of  Cartwright  point  (the  N.  E.  point  of  Clapperton  island)  bearing 
S.  E.  by  E.  i  E,  From  the  light-house  to  Cartwright  point,  If  miles  to 
Uie  eastward,  the  shore  line  has  deep  water  close  to. 

Croker  Island  is  separated  from  Clapperton  island  by  a  channel 
li  miles  wide. 

Wilson  point  is  the  southern  extremity  of  Croker  island;  it  is  sur- 
mounted by  a  bare  peaked  rock  126  feet  :.i  height.  The  water  is  deep 
Olose-to. 

Clapperton  Channel. 

Var.  4°  West. 

West  (Honora)  Bay  is  8^  miles  deep,  the  breadth  between 
Wabos  island  and  Francis  point  on  the  west  being  6  miles. 

Wabos  Island. — This  island  lies  two-thirds  of  a  mile  west  of 
Freer  point,  and  marks  the  east  entrance  point  of  West  bay.  It  is 
low,  narrow  and  wooded,  ^^  oi  9>  mile  long  in  a  northeast  and  south- 
west direction;  its  northwest  coast  may  be  approached  to  within  100 
yards,  shoal  water  between  it  and  Freer  point. 

Tamarack  Point. — The  southern  part  is  5|  miles  from  the 
head  of  the  bay;  may  be  coasted  at  a  distance  of  160  yards. 

Sounding  Cave.— At  the  south  part  of  Tamarack  point  the 
coast  turns  abruptly  to  the  eastward,  forming  a  bay  known  as  Sound- 
ing Cove,  in  which  vessels  may  find  good  shelter  from  north  winds  in 
from  6  to  7  fathoms,  mud  bottom,  keeping  not  less  than  300  yards 
I  from  the  north  shore  of  the  cove. 

Dutchman's  Head  is  the  name  given  to  a  steep  bluff  180  feet 
high  ^\  miles  from  the  head  of  West  bay,  on  the  west  side;  the  shore 
on  the  west  side  may  be  approached  to  200  yards. 

The  Tooth  is  the  name  given  to  a  small  sharp  rock  3  feet  high, 
two-thirds  of  a  mile  northward  of  the  shore  under  Dutchman's  head, 
and  \  mile  from  the  west  shore  of  the  bight;  it  should  not  be  approached 
from  the  eastward  within  150  yards;  shoal  water  between  it  and  the 
shore. 

Francis  Point  is  the  name  given  to    the  northeast    extremity 

of  the  promontory  dividing  West    and   Mudge  bays.     It  is  the   south 

entrance  p  'nt  to  Clapperton  channel  from  the  eastward;  the  east  side 

is  tolerably  steep-to,  but  shoal  water  extends  off  the  point  \  mile  to 

the  northeastwani,  audi  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  called  Tach6  Island 
reef. 


148 


GE07?0IA^'    BAY. 


McRae    Patc'v  v,itb   .?V    fathoms  over 


?r,c* 


lies   N.  E.  -]•  E, 


nearly  one  mile  lror,>    'H^'-ayiCist  poln', 

Clapperton  f^haiiTi-iil  sepa'  ates  Manitoahn  island  from  Olar. 
perton  island.  Between  Souta  point  of  Clappei  toi,  island  and  Francis 
point  on  the  east,  and  Courti^ey  i:  land  and  the  western  part  of  Maple 
point  on  the  west,  and  may  be  navigated  in  clea '  weather,  at  daylight, 
by  vessels  drawing  12  feet  of  water.  The  north  shore  of  the  channel 
between  South  point  and  Courtney  island  will  first  be  described. 

South  Point  is  the  southern  e  tremity  of  Clapperton  island;  it  is 
low  and  narrov/;  a  shoal  extends  from  it  8.  ^  E.  350  yards  with  less  than 
6  feet  of  water  on  it. 


Mowat  Island  lies  with  its  bouthern  extremity  W.  by  N.  ^  N, 


)    4 


mile  from  South  point.  From  this  extremity,  shoal  water  extends  in  a 
southwesterly  direction  200  yards  to  a  depth  of  16  feet.  The  passui^a' 
between  Mowat  island  an(   Clapperton  island  is  only  fit  for  boats. 

Meredith  Island  is  the  next  island  northwestward  of  Mowat 
island.  It  is  the  largest  of  the  five  islands  in  this  loca^ty ;  it  is  separated 
from  Clapperton  island  by  a  shal'ow  boat  channel  full  ^  rushes.  From 
the  west  point  of  this  island  a  rocky  ridge  extends  in  a  S.  T7.  by  S.  dirtc- 
tion,  nearly  f  mile,  terminating  in  a  bank  of  boulders  with  but  1  foot  of 
water  on  them  and  called  the 

Meredith  Roclc. — Thisiock  has  deep  water  close  to  its  soutii- 
west  and  eastern  sides.  The  soutliwest  point  of  Courtney  island,  toucli- 
ing  the  northern  Spilsbury  island,  N.  W.,  leads  southward  of  Mereditli 
rock.  The  east  side  of  Hai'bor  island  touching  the  west  side  of 
Burbidge  island  N.  N.  E.  -^  E.,  clears  the  west  side  of  the  whole  of 
The  Midge.  Sailing  vessels  may  stand  from  the  eastward  towards  Mere- 
dith rock  and  llie  Ridge  until  the  west  side  of  Meredith  island  touches 
the  east  side  of  Harbor  ieland  ^^  f  E. 

Surbidge  Island  lies  nearly  400  yards  westward  from  Meredith 
island,  the  passage  between  thum  containing  a  depth  of  9  feet.  A  bank 
extends  v/eatward  from  Burbidge  island  350  yards  ^-ith  as  little  as  one 
foot  o^         er  in  one  place. 

CU-  i»  'irton  Harbor  is  on  the  south  shore  of  Clapperton  island, 
it  is  a  semicircular  bay  in  which  excellent  anchorage  and  shelter  from  all 
winds  can  be  found.  Sandfield  point  forms  the  western  point  of  the 
bay  and  350  yards  southeastward  from  it  lies 

Beverly  Island. — A  low,  round  little  island  of  less  than  150  yards 
in  diameter,  and  separated  from  ii'andfield  point  by  a  boat  channel.  The 
eastern  side  of  the  island  is  fairly  steep-to.  A  patch  with  two  feet  water 
on  it  lies  W.  i  S.  600  yards  from  Beverly  island. 

Harbor  Island  is  the  northerraost  of  the  group.  Its  north  and 
west  sides  are  bold,  but  from  its  southeast  extremity  a  bar  extends  acrons 
to  Panet  point  with  depth  from  4  to  10  feet.  The  best  anchorage  in 
Clapperton  harbor  is  un  ier  the  northeast  point  of  and  about  200  ^ftrds 
from  Harbor  island  in  5  fathoms  over  clay. 

Vank0Uj2^hliet  iHiaud  is  the  largest  of  the  two  islands  -M  the 
BouthwoHt  extremity  of  Clapperton  island.  Its  length  1  mile,  and  breadth 
nearly  2  mile.  Between  it  and  Clapperton  island  there  is  a  passage  known 
aa  Indian  channel  through  which  9  feet  may  be  carried. 


'\w:i'^i9sm'.w<'S^-:'-; 


ifli",;!  <:i',i;v 


GECKaiA-N    BAi'. 


149 


I'ocik,  lies   N.  E.  -}  v 

uLn  island  from  Clap. 
toi,  island  and  Francis 
western  part  of  Maple 
I '  weather,  at  dayliirht 
li  shore  of  the  channel 
St  be  described. 

Clapperton  island;  it  is 
50  yards  with  less  than 

mity  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  I 
>al  water  extends  in  a 
15  feet.  The  passa-^- 
ily  fit  for  boats. 

ihwestward  of  Mowat 
loca'ity;  it  is  separated 
full  f  rushes.  From 
in  a  b.  T7.  by  S.  direc- 
lers  with  but  1  foot  of 

ler  close  to  its  soutii- 
ourtney  island,  touch 
uthward  of  Meredith 
g  the  west  side  of 
side  of  the  whole  of 
stward  towards  Morc- 
redith  island  touches 

;ward  from  Meredith 

of  9  feet.     A  bank 

with  as  little  as  one 

)f  Clapperton  islam!, 
S  and  shelter  from  all 
western  point  of  the 

of  less  than  160  yards 
boat  channel.  The 
with  two  feet  water 

oup.  Its  north  and 
a  bar  extends  across 
>  best  anchorage  in 
nd  about  200  ^yards 

two  islands  at  the 

1  mile,  and  breadth 

^  isd  passage  known 


Secord  Poin*-'  '•=<  t,i,e  -lost  wester;/  point  ■.)'.  CJajpn-t-on  island, 
ivaq  If  miles  r.orth  of  Sandlield  print. 

Secord  Bank  is  the  name  of  the  shallow  rockj'  ba>ric  ^^tvetohing 
Southward  from  Socord  point  to  within  150  yards  of  V-'.vorghiiet  island, 
■leaving  a  passage  of  12  feet  water  close  to  the  latte' . 

Spilsbury  Islands,  two  in  number  and  sicii.i  li^  r^early  ^  of  a 
mile  from  the  south  shore  of  Vankoughnet  island,  an  vt  juinedtOi^ether 
by  boulders.  A  narrow  and  crooked  channel  with  .  d-  pth  of  12  feet 
water  exists  between  these  small  islands  and  Vankoughnet  island.  The 
water  is  fairly  good  on  the  west  side  of  Spilsburg  islaiids,  12  feet  being 
found  at  200  yards,  but  in  a  southeasterly  direction  extends  a  dangerous 
rocky  bank  known  as 

Boulder  Bank. — This  shoal  extends  in  the  above  direction  about 
1  mile  with  depth  ranging  from  one  to  seven  feet. 

Courtney  Island  forms  the  north  entrance  point  to  Clapperton 
channel  from  the  westward,  and  with  the  exception  of  the  northeast 
,|ade  it  is  surrounded  wi+h  shoal  water,  and  joined  to  Vankoughnet  island 
by  a  bank  of  dry  stones, 

Courtney  Bank. — This  dangerous  and  extensive  bank  of  boulders 
is  situated  at  a  distanv^^,  '»f  half  a  mile  westward  of  Courtney  island.  It 
is  over  one-third  of  a  mile  long  northeast  and  southwest  by  a  quarter  of 
»  mile  wide,  with  depth  from  a  few  inches  to  six  feet. 

Griffin  Bank,  the  least  depth  on  which  is  8  feet,  lies  north  of  the 
'Courtney  bank,  and  N.  W.  by  W.  rather  more  than  half  •»  mile  from  the 
northwest  extremity  of  Courtney  island. 

Miall  Patch,  with  least  depth  of  12  feet,  is  dtuaied  W.  by  S.  ^ 
8.  f  mile  from  the  southwest  point  of  Courtney  ibla>  1,  being  *?eparated 
from  Courtney  bank  by  about  the  same  depth  of  water. 

Western  Reef,  so-called  from  beinj  the  wf isiermost  of  all  the 
patches  lying  near  the  W38t  entrance  to  Clap^js  r^or^  < 'lannel,  lies  W.  iN. 
about  1^  miles  from  the  southwest,  point  oJ  ^'  irtn  ;:  island.  Ic  isabo  Jt 
100  yards  in  diameter,  and  has  11  feet  wa :  -  over  it.  It  is  nearly  in  the 
track  from  Clapperton  light-house  to  Gore  bay.  ^  good  channel  3  to  9 
fathoms  in  depth  and  f  mile  wide,  separattu  vt  fi om  the  ucarest  of  the 
shoals  previously  described. 

Kange. — The  Clappei  on  light-house  .  .  the  hollow  of  the  hills  at 
Fort  La  Cloche,  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.  leads  400  yards  northwest  of  this  shoal. 
The  southwest  point  of  Innis  island,  touching  the  north  point  df  Darch 
island,  N.  N.  W.  leads  ^  mile  southwest  ward  of  Western  reef. 

North  Shoal  is  the  northermost  of  the  three  banks  which 
Ifroit  the  western  entrance  to  the  Clapperton  channel,  is  a  rocky  bank 
•  over  a  third  of  a  mile  long  in  an  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.  direction  and 
1 200  yards  wide,  with  least  depth  4  feet,  its  wetlern  extremity  bearing  S. 
1 W.  i  W.  and  distant  about  1  mile  from  the  soutinvest  extreme  of  Court- 
fney  island. 

Middle  Biiiik,  with  4  feet  over  it,  is  the  most  dangerous  rbstruo- 
^tion  in  the  west  entrance  to  Clapperton  channel.  It  is  300  yurdf,  loa^ 
■  east  and  west,  by  200  in  v  tdth  and  is  composed  of  boulders.     Its   south 

side  bears  W.  N.  W.  one  mile  from  the  north  extremity  of  Maple  poinf<. 

It  is  separated  from  North  shoal  by  a  five  fathom  channel  400  yards 

wide,  but  au  it  is  not  buoyed  it  cannot  be  used. 


.150 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


To  Pass  Westward  of  GriflSn  bank,  Courtney  bank,  Mial! 
patch,  North  shoal  and  Middle  bank,  keep  the  western  extremity  of  the 
next  island  west  of  Croker  island  in  line  with  the  N.  W.  end  of  the  spur 
from  Mt.  McBean  K  N.  E.  J  E. 

Description  of  the  south  side  of  Clapperton  channel  commencing 
from  the  westward. 

Maple  Point  is  the  name  of  the  promontory  which  may  be  con 
sidered  the  south  entrance  point  from  the  westward,  Johnson's  point  ig 
about  f  of  a  mile  in  a  west  southwesterly  direction  from  Maple  point. 

Soutll  Spit  extends  ^  mile  northward  of  Johnson's  point  at 
which  distance  there  is  a  depth  of  12  feet.  A  dry  stone  lies  350  yards 
northeastward  from  Johnson's  point.  Between  South  spit  and  Middle  bank 
is  tlie  ciiannel  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide  and  5  fathoms  deep,  and 
to  lead  between  these  shores  keep  South  point  of  Clapperton  island  in 
line  with  the  north  fall  of  Manitoulin  island  E.  by  S. 

Little  Island  is  a  low,  narrow,  wooded  islet  80  yards  long,  lying 
800  yards  eastward  of  the  east  shore  of  Maple  point. 

Little  Island  Sand  Bank  is  a  large  flat  sand  bank  extending 
1^  miles  from  the  east  shore  of  Maple  point  at  which  distance  there  is 
only  8  feet. 

Sutherland  Shoal  with  15  feet  water  on  it  lies  S.  by  E.  ^  mile 

from  Little  island. 

Gooseberry  Island,  250  yards  long  north  and  south,  low  and 
narrow,  its  north  end  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  a  little  over  a  mile  from 
Francis  point,  its  north  end  should  receive  a  berth  of  200  yards. 

Martin  Reef  lies  on  the  same  bearing  from  Francis  point,  ^  mile 
from  Got-  .eberry  island.  It  is  composed  of  dry  stones  2  feet  high  and 
should  not  be  approaclied  from  the  northward  nearer  than  300  yards. 

Mclnnis  Bank  lies  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  l^  miles  from  the  north 
point  of  Gooseberry  island,  least  water  on  it  16  feet,  and  in  line  with 
Kagawong  light  and  west  side  of  Clapperton  harbor. 

Tache  Island  is  the  first  island  westward  of  Francis  point,  ^J  mile 
distant  from  it.  A  patch  of  dry  and  sunken  rocks  extend  from  it  in  a 
northeasterly  direction  about  ^  mile,  called  the  Tach^  Island  reef. 

Directions  for  takings  tlie  Clappevton  Channel  from 
the  Westward. — Before  the  west  end  of  the  island  next  west  of 
Croker  island  (Benjamin  island)  passes  to  the  westward  of  the  N.  W. 
end  of  the  spur  from  Mt.  McBean,  bring  South  point  of  Clapperton 
island  under  the  north  fall  of  Manitoulin  island,  E.  by  S.,  which  range 
will  be  a  little  open  of  Maple  point.  This  mark  kept  on,  will  lead  be- 
tween South  spit  and  Middle  bank,  in  not  less  than  4  fathoms  water. 

As  Maple  point  is  approached,  open  the  north  fall  of  Manitoulin 
island  sufficiently  to  the  northward  of  South  point  of  Clapperton  island, 
to  clear  the  flat  which  extends  100  yards  from  Maple  pomt.  After  the 
northern  part  of  this  point  is  passed,  the  leading  mark  should  again  bo 
brought  on  exactly,  and  kept  on  until  nearly  abreast  of  the  eastern  ex- 
treme of  Little  Island  Sand  bank,  which  position  will  be  indicated  by 


northern  Spilsburg  island   touching  the   southwest    point   of   Courtney 
)eanng  N.  W.     The  latter  niark   shoul ' 
Meredith  rock  is  passed,  or  when  Meredith  island  touches  Harbor 


island  bean 
unti 


lould   now  be  kept   on  astern 


OEOROIAN    BAY. 


151 


'  Courtney  bank,  Miall 
e  N.  W.  end  of  the  spa! 
•ton  channel  commencing 

tory  which  may  be  con- 
ard,  Johnson's  point  k 
on  from  Maple  point. 

of  Johnson's  point  at 
ry  stone  lies  350  yards 

'thspit  and  Middle  bank- 
is  fathoms  deep,  and 

of  Clapperton  island  in 
J  S. 

et  80  yards  long,  lying 


It  sand  bank  extend, 
^hich  distance  there 


ing 

is 


it  lies  S.  by  E.  ^  mile 

j  and  south,  low  and 
iittle  over  a  mile  from 
of  200  yards. 

Francis  point,  ^  mile 
ones  2  feet  high  and 
sr  than  300  yards. 

miles  from  the  north 
feet,  and  in  line  with 

Francis  point,  :J:  mile 
ercend  from  it  in  a 
11'^  Island  reef. 

a  Cliannel  from 

island  next  west  of    j 
«^ard  of  the  N.   W     | 
>oint  of  Clapperton 
.  by  S.,  which  range 
opt  on,  will  lead  be- 

fathoms  water. 

fall  of   Manitoulin 

'  Clapperton  island, 
le  point.  After  the 
irk  should  again  bo 
t  of  the  eastern  ex- 
ill  be  indicated  by 
point   of   Courtney 

he  kept  on  asterii 
nd  touches  Harbor 


stand,  N.  f  E.  From  the  intersection  of  the  ranges  an  E.  ^  S.  courcie 
rill  take  a  vessel  in  the  direction  of  Little  Current,  or  if  proceeding  to 
"^est  bay,^  she  may  continue  with  the   Spilsburg  island  mark   astern, 

^which  will  also  clear  the  shoals  off  Francis  point. 

In  proceeding  to  Mudge  bay,  a  vessel  may  turn  to  the  southward  off 

the  Spilsburg   island  mark,  when  Burbidge  island  appears  its  own  width 

east  of  Harbor  island. 

Taking  Clapperton  Channel  from  the  Eastward.— If 

from  Little  Current  a  W.  ^  S.  course  from  Narrow  island  should  carry  a 
vessel  nearly  half  a  mile  south  of  Foster  bank  (the  north  side  of  Picnic 
Island  in  line  with  south  side  of  Narrow  island,  bearing  due  east  leads 
clear  of  Foster  bank)  and  nearly  ^  of  a  mile  from  the  shoal  off  south 
point  of  Clapperton  island.  Bring  the  northern  Spilsbury  island  to  touch 
the  southwest  point  of  Courtney  island  N.  W.,  this  mark  kept  ahead  will 
lead  between  Meredith  rock  and  Little  Island  Sand  bank.  As  soon  as 
pouth  point  of  Clapperton  island  comes  in  line  with  the  north  fall  of 
3tfanitoulin  island,  E,  by  S.,  keep  it  so  astern.  As  Maple  point  is  ap- 
proached bring  t.>e  north  fall  of  Manitoulin  island  northward  of  south 
point  of  Clapperton  island,  sufficient!  7^  to  pass  200  yards  from  northern 
part  of  Maple  point,  when  past  it,  stai  board  again  so  as  to  bring  the  lead- 
ing mark  exactly  on,  which  will  lead  out  between  South  spit  and  Middle 
.  bank.  If  a  vessel  wishes  to  haul  to  thv>  northward  she  may  do  so  on  the 
Mt.  McBean  spur  range,  which  kept  on  atioad  will,  as  before  remarked, 
lead  west  of  all  the  shoals  excepting  Western  reef,  which  it  passes  more 
than  ^  mile  eastward  of. 

Entering  Clapperton  Harhor. — If  for  any  reason  a  vessel 
wishes  to  enter  the  barber  from  the  eastward,  she  should  keep  on  the 
Spilsbury  Island  range,  until  the  east  side  of  Harbor  island  touches 
the  west  side  of  Burbidge  island,  bearing  N.  N.  E.  f  E.  From  this 
position  a  N.  ^  E.  course  will  lead  west  of  the  Burbidge  Island  shoal. 
After  passing  the  latter,  the  course  may  be  changed  more  to  the  east- 
ward, rounding  Harbor  island  at  a  distance  of  200  yards,  and  anchoring 
jUnder  the  northeast  point  at  about  that  distance  therefrom. 

Entering  Clapperton  Harbor  from  the  Westward. — 

When  upon  the  leading  mark — South  point  of  Clapperton  island  in  line 
with  the  north  fall  of  Manitoulin  island;  as  soon  as  the  Spilsbury  island 

!  range  conies  on,  steer  N.  E.  for  the  northwest  point  of  Harbor  island ; 

; give  it  a  berth  of  200  yards,  and  anchor  as  before  directed.  A  vessel 
may  cross  The  Ridge  with  13  feet  water,  by  keeping  the  north  fall  of 
Manitoulin  island  its  own  height  open  north  of  South  point  of  Clapper- 
ton island. 

KAGAWONG  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  11  miles.  Lantern  on  a  mast  with  white  shed  at  base,  40  feet 
above  lake  level.  At  the  foot  of  Mudge  bay,  N.  shore  of  Manitoulin 
island,  75  feet  back  from  shore,  and  100  feet  west  from  the  dock. 

GORE  BAY  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  with  dwelling  attached. 
On  the  west  point  of  entrance  to  Janet's  cove.  There  is  a  wood  dock 
at  tlie  head  of  the  bay,  west  side,  behind  a  little  point,  with  good  water, 
protected  frouj  all  winds. 

CAPE  ROBERT  LIGHT-STATION. —A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  12  miles.     White,  wood  tower,  square  in  plan,  41  feet  high. 


m^ 


152 


GEORGIAN    BAY. 


with  dwelling  attached.  On  the  northern  extremity  of  the  cape,  north 
shore  of  Manitouliii  island. 

A  Newly  DlscOTered  Rock. — A  rocky  bank  has  been  die 
covered  by  Staflf  Commander  Boulton.  It  lies  two  miles  east  of  the 
two  low  flat  islands,  which  are  situated  5^  miles  due  north  of  Cape  Rol 
ert.  On  the  bank  there  are  \<wo  spots  with  9  feet  and  13  feet  water 
only. 

SPANISH     RIVER     MILLS     LIGHT-STATION.- A 

fixed  red  light,  visible  7  miles.  White,  square,  wooden  tower,  39  feet 
high.  On  a  small  rocky  islet  about  two  miles  southeasterly  from  Spanish 
River  mills,  near  the  channel  leading  into  the  mills  and  the  mouth  of  the 
river  from  the  eastward.     Lantern  and  gallery  painted  red. 

MISSISSAGUA    ISLAND    LIGHT-STATION.— A  re 

volving  white  light,  visible  12  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  at- 
tached to  dwelling,  visible  except  where  obscured  by  trees.  On  the 
south  point  of  the  island.  Gore  Bay  light  E.  S.  E.  ^  S.,  27|  miles, 
Northwest  point  of  Manitoulin  island,  S.  W.  ^  S.,  13^  miles. 

SULPHUR      ISLAND      LIGHT-STATION.  —  A   fixed 

white  light,  visible  12  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  45  feet 
above  lake  level.  On  west  end  of  island.  East  point  of  Druramond 
island,  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  12f  miles.  Point  au  Gravier,  N.  W.  ^  W.,  13| 
miles. 

THESSALON     RIVER     LIGHT-STATION.— A     fixe] 

white  light,  visible  7  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  East  side  oi 
mouth  of  river. 

NORTH    SISTER  ROCK  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 

white  light,  visible  11  miles,  illuminates  the  entire  horizon.  White,  hex 
agonal  wood  tower,  30  feet  high.  On  square  crib  pier,  7  feet  high,  on 
small  bare  rock.  North  side  of  channel,  Canadian  entrance  to  St.  Mary's 
river,  north  of  St.  Joseph's  island.     To  guide  through   narrow  channel. 

Wilson's  Channel  Starboard  Beacon.— A  day  beacon 

of  crib  work,  rising  4  feet  out  of  water,  surmounted  by  an  iron  tripod 
surrounded  by  hoops,  and  bearing  on  the  top  a  globe  ot  slat-work.  The 
whole  superstructure  is  painted  red,  and  is  17^  feet  high  above  the  crib. 
On  the  outer  edge  of  the  shoal  near  the  western  entrance  to,  and  on  the 
north  side  of  Wilson's  channel.  The  crib  stands  in  3  feet  of  water,  but 
the  depth  increases  rapidly  on  the  channel  side.  This  beacon  is  about 
half  a  mile  below  Wilson's  Channel  light. 

WILSON'S  CHANNEL  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  34  feet  high,  with 
dwelling  attached.  On  a  rocky  islet,  north  side  of  channel,  a  short  dis- 
tance above  the  narrow  passage  of  Wilson's  channel,  and  guides  from 
Richard's  landing,  2;^  miles  above,  to  the  channel 

SHOAL  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  11  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  34  fe^t  high,  with  dwelling 
attached.  On  an  islet  of  rock  on  the  south  side  of  channel,  about  2 
miles  above  Richard's  landing,  and  guides  therefonn. 


GEORGIAN   BAY. 


153 


jmity  of  the  cape,  north 

ky   bank  has  been  dig 

two   miles  east  of  the 

due  north  of  Cape  Rol 

feet  and  13  feet  water 

HT-STATION.-A 

wooden  tower,  39  feet  ^ 

itheaeterly  from  Spanish  '• 
lis  and  the  mouth  of  the  ' 
tinted  red. 

-STATION.— A   re 

quare  wood  tower,  at- 
ired  by  trees.     On  the 
S.  E.  ^  S.,  271  miles, 
,  13^  miles. 

NATION.  — A    fixed 

od  tower,  light  45  feet 

point   of  Druramond 

er,  N.  W.  i  W.,  13| 

^ATION.— A     fixed 
tower.     East  gide  of 

TATION.— A  fixed 

horizon.  White,  hex 
>  pier,  V  feet  high,  on 
mtrance  to  St.  Mary's 
ugh  narrow  channel, 
on, — A  day  beacon 
3d  by  an  iron  tripod 
36  of  slat-work.    The 

high  above  the  crib. 

ranee  to,  and  on  the 

3  feet  of  water,  but 
This  beacon  is  about 

■ON.— A  fixed  white 

34  feet  high,  with 

channel,  a  short  dis- 

el,  and  guides  from 

A  fixed  white  light, 

■^  high,  with  dwelling 

of  channt^l,  about  2 


-'M 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances   in  Georgian  Bay  and 

North  Channel. 

NoTK. — The  Courses  are  magnetic;  Distances  in  statute  miles. 

Cove  Island  to  Colli  iigwood. — When  ^  mile  north  of  Cove 
island  light,  steer  for  the  north  side  of  Flower  Pot  islanu,  E.  by  S.  |  S., 
6t  miles,  to  a  point  \  mile  north  of  the  Castle,  haul  around  the  point  to 
the  southeastward  until  the  Cove  Island  light  is  closed  behind  the  N.  E. 
point  of  Flower  Pot  island,  when  steer  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  keeping  the  light 
closed  as  above  for  2  miles,  until  past  Bear's  Rump  shoal,  when  steer  E. 
by  S.  f  S.,  14:^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northeast  of  Point  Wingfield,  when 
steer  S.  E,  \  S.,  73  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  CoUingwood  IBreak- 
water  light.  Passing  1^  miles  northeast  of  Surprise  shoal;  in  thick  and 
oggy  weather,  keep  a  little  more  to  the  eastward  until  past  the  shoal. 

To  pass  north  of  Bear's  Rump  Island. — When  \  mile 

north  of  Cove  Island  light,  steer  E.  b^  S.  \  S.,  ranging  on  the  south  point 

of  Bear's  Rump  island  for  5^  miles,  until  Tobermory  light  is  closed  with 

the  west  end  of  Flower  Pot  island  (and  note  that  the  fall  of  Cabot  Head 

J. in  line  with  the  south  extreme  of  Bear's  Rump,  E.  S.  E.,  leads  south  of 

:  Confiance  shoal);  thence  E.  ^  N.,  3;^  miles,  to  a  point  \  mile  north  of  the 

.north  point  of  Bear's  Rump  island;  when  steer  E.  S.  E.,  14^  miles,  to  1 

mile  northeast  of  Point  Wingfield. 

Cove  Island  to  Owen  Sound. — When  i  mile  northeast  of 
Point  Wingfield,  as  in  the  course  from  Cove  island  to  CoUingwood,  steer 
S.  E.  i  S.,  30  miles,  to  a  point  5  miles  E.  §■  S.  of  Cape  Croker,  passing  1^ 
miles  to  the  northeast  of  Surprise  shoal;  thence  S.  \  W.,  18^  miles,  to  a 
point  \\  miles  east  of  McKenzie's  Wharf  light;  thencesteer  up  the  mid- 
dle of  the  sound  about  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  7^  miles,  for  the  range  lights  at 
the  mouth  of  Sydenham  river. 

Cove  Island  to  French  River.— When  i  of  a  mile  north  of 
Bear's  Rump,  as  in  the  course  to  CoUingwood,  steer  E.  N.  E.  \  N.,  15 
miles,  until  the  east  side  of  Cabot  head  bears  S.  |  W.,  12 J  miles,  and 
Half-moon  island  W.  f  N.,  8^  miles;  thence  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  36  miles,  to  a 
point  2  miles  west  of  Bustard  Rocks  light,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  10- 
foot  spot  lying  about  if  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  the  main  light. 

Cove  Island  to  Byng  Inlet. — When  ^  of  a  mile  north  of  Bear's 
Rump,  as  in  the  course  of  CoUingwood,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  49  miles, 
to  a  point  4  miles  west  of  Byng  Inlet  light.  Tugs  are  generally  in  readi- 
ness to  tow  vessels  to  the  mills. 

Cove  Island  to  Parry  Sound. — When  ^  of  a  mile  north  of 
Bear's  Rump,  as  in  the  course  to  CoUingwood,  steer  east  56  miles  to  a 
point  2  miles  west  of  Parry  Sound  light. 

Cabot  Head  to  Hope  Island  and  Giant's  Tomb  Island. 

— When  1  mile  northeast  of  Point  Wingfield,  steer  E.  S.  E.  i  S.,  61  miles, 
to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Hope  Island  light,  passing  3  miles  south  of  the 
Western  islands;  thence  S.  E.  by  E.  9^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
the  south  point  of  Giant's  Tomb  island. 

Owen  Sound  to  CoUingwood.— When  3  miles  N.  by  E.  f  E. 
from  front  range  light,  steer  N.  E.  :i  N.   11  miles,  until  Point  William 


f 


154 


GEORGIAN    BAV. 


bears  southeast  2  miles;  thence  E.  f  S.  9^  miles,  until  Point  Rich  bearg 
southwest  2  miles;  whence  steer  S.  E.  i  E.  23  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
north  of  CoUingwood  Breakwater  light. 

Owen  Sound  to  Christian  Island  Light.— When  2  milei, 

northwest  from  Point  William,  as  in  thecourse  to  CoUingwood,  steer  east 
32  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  light. 

Owen  Sound  to  Parry  Sound.— When  3  miles  N.  by  E.  |  e, 
from  front  range  light,  steer  N.N.  E.  |  E.,  67  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
W.  S.  W.  from  Parry  Sound  light. 

Owen  Sound  to  Byng  Inlet.— When  3  miles  N.  by  E.  ^  E 
from  the  front  range  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  11  miles,  to  a  point  4 
miles  S.  E.  ^  E.  of  Cape  Commodore  and  in  range  of  it  and  Point  Wil- 
liam; when  steer  N.  |-  E.,  Q7^  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  W.  by  S.  from 
Byng  Inlet  light. 

Owen  Sound  to  French  River. — When  4  miles  S.  E.  k  E 
from  Cape  Commodore,  as  in  the  last  course,  steer  N.  -J  W.,  78  miloH,  to 
a  point  2  miles  west  of  Bustard  Rocks  light,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the 
10-foot  shoal  2  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  the  main  light. 

Owen  Sound  to  Little  Current. — When  3  miles  N.  by  E.  \ 
E.  from  front  range  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  11  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles 
S.  E.  ^  E.  from  Cape  Commodore  and  in  line  with  it  and  Point  William; 
when  steer  N.  I  E.,  12f  miles,  until  the  east  point  of  Cape  Croker  bears 
W.  f  N.,  5^  miles  distant,  thence  N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  65  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  north  of  Lonely  Island  light,  passing  about  three-fourths  of  a  mile 
from  the  northeast  point  of  the  island,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  south 
end  of  Northeast  shingle ;  when  steer  N.  by  W.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  Ij 
miles  east  of  the  north  point  of  Cape  Smith,  then  keep  the  west  and  high- 
est beach  on  Badgely  island  in  line  with  the  first  hill  left  of  the  Lion's 
head  (a  sharp  and  conspicuous  bare  hill  on  the  main  land  behind  Barlgely 
island),  the  same  course  N.  by  W.,  7^  miles,  passing  f  mile  east  of  Burnt 
island,  and  ^  mile  east  of  Burnt  Island  bank  until  Ead's  bush  (Little  Cur- 
rent) is  seen  to  the  northward  of  the  summit  of  Heywood  island  and  in 
line  with  the  south  shore  of  Partridge  island  W.  by  N.  and  the  highest 
part  of  Leading-mark  hill  in  line  with  Killarney  West  light  N.  E.  }  N., 
then  steer  W.  ^  N.  for  the  hill  on  Strawberry  island,  passing  ^  mile  south 
of  Center  Island  bank,  keeping  the  south  point  of  Kokanongwi  island 
open  of  Badgely  island,  which  range  leads  south  of  it;  this  course  should 
lead  one-third  of  a  mile  south  of  Heywood  island  ;  haul  around  its  south- 
west point  (Wharton  point),  giving  it  a  berth  of  not  less  than  300  yards, 
then  steer  N.  N,  W.  |  W.  to  clear  Caron  reef,  with  Strawberry  Island 
light  on  port  bow  and  east  point  of  Garden  island  ahead,  when  the  light 
bears  N.  W.  by  W.  }  W.  and  in  line  with  north  point  of  Beauty  island; 
haul  up  on  that  course  round  the  light-house  point,  fairly  close-to,  and 
steer  for  Gibbons  point  W.  ^  N.  Before  Beauty  island  is  abeam  see  that 
the  southern  light-house  at  Little  Current  (or  Miller's  House)  is  in  line 
with  Shut-in  point,  on  the  south  shore  of  Little  Current,  W.  by  N.  ^  N. 
At  night  the  light  may  be  kept  opening  and  shutting  to  make  sure  of 
the  range.     When  see  directions  for  proceeding  through  Little  Current. 

CoUingwood  to  Cliristian  Island. — When  2  miles  north 
of  breakwater  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  16^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
south  of  the  light. 

CoUingwood   to   Parry  Sound.— When  2  miles  north  of 


tf  ■■'  "*^ 


IS!' 


,  until  Point  Rich  bears 
niles,  to  a  point  2  miles 

[iigrht.— When  2  miles 

0  Collingwood,  steer  east 

in  3  miles  N.  by  E.  |  £ 
liles,  to  a  point  2  miles 

1  3  miles  N.  by  E.  ^  E. 
11   miJes,  to  a  point  4 

:e  of  it  and  Point  Wij. 
4  miles  W.  by  S.  from 

hen  4  miles  S.  E.  |  E 
'.  N.  i  W.,  78  miles,  to 
►ing   a  lookout  for  the 
main  light. 

hen  3  miles  N.  by  E.  ^ 
miles,  to  a  point  4  miles 
it  and  Point  William; 
of  Cape  Croker  bears 
65  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
three-fourths  of  a  mile 
lookout  for  the  south 
16  miles,  to  a  point  If 
:eep  the  west  and  high- 
bill  left  of  the  Lion's 
n  land  behind  Badgely 
g  I  mile  east  of  Burnt 
Cad's  bush  (Little  Cur- 
Bywood  island  and  in 
y  N.  and  the  highest 
Vest  light  N.  E.  ^  N., 
passing  ^  mile  south 
Kokanongwi  island 
it;  this  course  should 
haul  around  its  south- 
t  less  than  300  yards, 
h  Strawberry  Island 
head,  when  the  light 
int  of  Beauty  island; 
t,  fairly  close-to,  and 
and  is  abeam  see  that 
;r's  House)  is  in  line 
;rent,  W.  by  N,  ^  N, 
ing  to  make  suro  of 
•ough  Little  Current. 
Vhen  2  miles   north 
?8,  to  a  point  1  mile 

n    2  miles  north  of 


OEOR(^IAN    BAY. 


155 


miles  west  of 
point  2  miles 


breakwater  light,  steer  N.  |  W.,  35  miles,  to  a  point  2 
the  Western  islands,  thence  N.  ^  W.,  2?.^  miles,  to  a 
iW.  S.  W.  from  Parry  Scnnd  light. 

Collingwood  to  Byng  Inlet.— When  2  miles  north  of  break- 
ater  light,  steer  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  85    miles,  to    a  point  5  miles  W. 
^  y  S.  from  Byng  Inlet  light,  passing  about  3  miles  west  of  the  Lime- 
itone  islands,  and  1^  miles  west  of  a  shoal  4  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  of  Byng 
Inlet  light,  when  haul  up  to  within  2  miles  of  the  light,  where  a  pilot 
pye  tug  should  be  taken. 

Collingwood  to  French  River. — When  2  miles  north  of 
breakwater  light,  steer  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  100  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
west  of  Bustard  Rocks  light,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  10-foot  shoal 
about  2  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  the  main  light. 

Collingwood  to  Little  Current.— When  2  miles  north  of 
breakwater  light,  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  95  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north 
of  Lonely  Island  light,  passing  about  1  mile  from  the  northeast  point  of 
the  island,  and  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  south  end  of  Northeast  shingle, 
when  see  course  from  Owen  Sound  to  Little  Current. 

Collingwood  to  Cove  Island  Passage.— When  i  mile 
north  of  breakwater  light,  pteer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  73  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
northeast  of  Point  Wingfield,  passing  1^  miles  east  of  Surprise  shoal; 
thence  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  ranging  on  the  north  end  of  Flower-pot  island  for 
15f  miles,  to  within  ^  mile  (keeping  Cove  Island  light  just  closed  with  it 
fr  to  clear  Bear's  Rump  shoal),  when  haul  around  to  the  northward;  give 
Castle  point  a  berth  of  i  mile,  and  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  6^  miles,  to  a 
point  i  mile  north  of  Cove  Island  light. 

Collingwood  to  Killarney. — When  2  miles  nortb  of  break- 
water light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  106  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  p  ist  of 
Papoose  island.  (This  course  should  lead  4  miles  east  of  Dawson  rock, 
which  lies  S,  by  E.,  16  miles  from  east  side  of  Papoose  island);  then  steer 
N.  W.  i  N.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  S.  i  W.  of  Killarney  East  light, 
and  in  range  with  it  and  Leading-mark  hill,  when  see  directions  for  enter- 
ing Killarney  from  the  southeastward. 

French  River  to  Killarney. — When  at  the  Bustard  Rocks 
range  lights,  steer  W.,  18f  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  north  of  Papoose 
island,  passing  north  of  Gull  island;  then  N.  W.  ^  N.,  9  miles,  passing 
south  of  Scarecrow  Island  bank,  to  a  point  ^  mile  S.  -^  W.  of  Killarney 
East  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Leading-mark  hill. 

To  Enter  Smith  Bay  from  the  North  Channel,— When 

northward  of  Burnt  Island  bank,  haul  to  the  southeastward;  keep  Lion's 
Head  (a  sharp  and  conspicuous  hill  between  Badgely  island  and  Fruzer 
bay)  in  line  with  the  east  end  of  High  beach  (on  the  south  shore  of 
Badgely  island)  bearing  N.  ^  W.  After  passing  Big  Burnt  island,  which 
may  be  passed  close  on  the  east  side,  keep  the  summit  of  Badgely  island 
well  open  east  of  Big  Burnt  island,  N.  by  E,  i  E.,  to  lead  eastward  of 
Pelkey  rock,  and  when  East  Mound  (a  little  gravelly  bank  2  feet  above 
the  water,  lying  ^  mile  eastward  from  the  north  point  of  William  island) 
comes  in  line  with  the  Spur,  N.  W.  f  N.,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  up  the 
bay.  Or,  if  wishing  to  anchor  under  Cape  Smith,  edge  a  little  to  the 
westward,  so  as  to  bring  the  summit  of  Badgely  island  in  line  or  closed 
with  the  southeast  point  of  Big  Burnt  island  in  order  to  lead  westward 
of  Gold-hunters  bank. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


^/ 


/. 


.** 


f/. 


1.0 


I.I 


bilM    |Z5 
lAo    12.0 


■u 


IL25  i  1.4 


I 

IIIIIM 
1.6 


<^ 


PhotographJc 

Sciences 
Corporation 


33  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTM.N.Y.  MStO 

(716)S72-4S03 


'^^^i*  ^ 

^4^ 

^ 


^  ^> 


156 


GEORGIAN   BAT. 


To   enter  Smith  Bay  from  the   South  ward,— Follow 

around  Cape  Smith  about  a  ^  mile  distant,  in  order  to  pass  south  of 
Gold  hunters  bank,  and  when  abreast  of  the  northwest  point  of  the  cape, 
bring  the  center  of  the  village  of  Wekwemikong  about  a  point  on  the 
starboard  bow,  in  order  to  get  the  points  of  Cape  Smith  in  line  E.  by  S. 
i  S.  This  ran{^e  should  be  on  astern  before  the  west  end  of  Bushy  clump 
and  the  east  end  of  West  Red  cliff  are  touching,  but  not  before  East  Red 
cliff  bears  south.  Keep  the  points  of  the  cape  in  line  until  the  sunimit 
of  Badgely  island  is  in  line  with  the  southeast  point  of  Burnt  island,  when 
Gold-hunters  bank  and  the  outer  part  of  Red  Cliff  flat  will  be  passed.  A 
vessel  may  anchor  off  West  Red  cliff  on  the  last  mentioned  clearing  mark 
as  before  directed,  or  proceed  further  up  the  bj»,y.  A  vessel  will  find 
less  than  10  fathoms  over  mud  anywhere  inside  the  line  joining  Cape 
Smith  and  William  island. 

To  enter  the  bay  northward  of  Gold-hunters  bank,  the  Spur  should 
not  be  brought  to  the  eastward  of  the  middle  of  William  island,  N.  N. 
W.  i  W.,  until  the  summit  of  Badgely  island  is  over  the  southeast  point 
of  Big  Burnt  island,  when  a  vessel  may  haul  towards  the  cape  shore  and 
anchor,  or  proceed  up  the  bay.  In  doing  the  latter  she  will  probably 
pass  close  to  Doyle  shoal,  the  least  water  on  which  is  22  feet. 

To  enter  Manitowanlne  Bay  from  the  Eastward.- 

Bring  the  west  fall  of  Leading-mark  hill  Killarney  over  the  eastern  ex- 
treme of  Center  island,  N.  E.  f  E.,  directly  astern,  and  proceed  on  that 
range  until  the  northeast  point  of  Strawberry  island  is  open  of  the  south- 
west point  of  Heywood  island,  N.  W.  ^  N.,  when  steer  for  the  Rock  ^ 
mile  westward  of  the  village  of  Manitowaning  S.  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  8  miles,  toa 
point  ^  mile  west  of  Phipps  point  shoal  (see  Gibraltar  cliff),  keep  on  the 
above  course  until  Fanny  island,  Manitowaning  harbor,  is  in  hne  with 
Town  point,  S.  ^  W.    See  Manitowaning  harbor. 

To  enter  Manitowanins^  Bay  from  the  Westward.- 

Passing  north  of  Loon  island  reef,  note  that  the  south  point  of  Straw- 
berry island,  in  line  with  foot  of  Sheguiandah  hill,  W.  by  N.,  leads  north; 
and  southeast  fall  of  Cloche  bluff  in  Tine  with  the  west  point  of  Hey  wood 
island,  N.  by  B.  ^  E.,  leads  200  yards  to  the  eastward  of  it.  Bring  the 
southwest  point  of  Hey  wood  island  over  the  stern  and  steer  for  the  village 
of  Manitowaning,  S.  |  W. 

Killarney  to  Little  Current. — Continue  with  the  west  light- 
house inline  with  the  highest  part  of  Leading-mark  hill,  N.  E.  |  N.;^ive 
High  beach,  near  the  southeast  extreme  of  Badgely  island,  a  berth  of  200 
yards  or  more,  and  keep  the  south  end  of  Kokanongwi  well  open  of 
Badgely  island  to  lead  south  of  Center  island  bank.  When  the  north 
side  of  Heywood  island  comes  open  of  Partridge  island,  haul  to  the 
northward  to  pass  a  quarter  of  a  mile  westward  of  the  latter;  steer  thenoe 
for  Heywood  rock,  and  after  passing  200  yards  northeast  of  it,  bring  it 
in  line  with  the  southwest  extremity  of  Partridge  island  to  clear  8hoal 
island  spit.  When  the  north  point  of  Shoal  island  bears  S.  S.  E.,  Straw- 
berrv  Island  light-houae  may  be  steered  for,  N.  W.  by  W.  j  W.  Oii 
reaching  the  light-house,  proceed  as  dirtcted  in  the  course  from  Owen 
Sound  to  Little  Current. 

Manitowaning  to  Little  Current.— Leaving  the  village, 

steer  for  the  southwest  point  of  Heywood  island,  N.  f  E.,  to  within  i  of 
a  mile,  when  see  course  from  Owen  Sound  to  Little  Current. 


GEORGIAN   BAT. 


157 


From  Little  Current   to   Olapperton  Island.— Give 

Spider  island  a  berth  of  150  yards;  pass  100  yards  north  of  Low  island, 
from  60  to  100  yards  northward  of  Pionio  island,  200  yards  north  of  the 
west  extremity  of  Narrow  island.  Thence  steer  W.  ^  S.  to  bring  the 
soath  side  of  Narrow  island  in  line  with  the  north  side  of  Picnic  island 
bearing  due  east  (the  south  fall  of  Frazer  hill  will  be  seen  also  on  this 
range).  This  leading-mark  leads  south  of  Eleven-foot  rook  and  Foster 
bank,  when  Elm  island  touches  Amedros  island  N.  W.  ^  N.  steer  to  pass 
westward  of  the  former,  in  which  position  a  vessel  will  know  herself  to 
be  when  the  rocky  summit  of  Wilson  point  (Croker  island)  comes  open 
west  of  Amedroz  island.  When  steer  for  Cartwright  point,  the  north- 
east extreme  of  Clapperton  island.  Bound  the  point  close-to,  and  keep 
the  shore  close  on  board  as  far  as  the  light-house.  When  abreast  the 
bluff  point  ^  mile  eastward  of  the  li^ht-house,  see  that  Amedros  island  is 
closed  with  Cartwright  point  to  avoid  Robertson  rock. 

Clapperton  Island  to  Innis  Island.— When  ^  mile  north 
of  Clapperton  Island  liffht,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  5f  miles,  ranging  on 
Blackstook  point  until  the  south  point  of  Innis  island  bears  north,  distant 
1  mile. 

Innis  Island  to  Point  Mildram.— When  i  mile  south  of 

;  Innis  island,  steer  W.  ^  N.,  23  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  Cape 

Robert  light,  when  steer  W.  f  S.,  18  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of 

:  Mildram  point,  the  northeasterly  point  of  entrance  to  the  Straits  of  Mis- 

i  sissagua  from  the  North  Channel.    This  course  should  lead  about  1  mile 

north  of  Crescent  island.    See  Straits  of  Mi^fisRagua,  Lake  Huron,  page 

116. 

Innis  Island  to  False  Detour.— When  i  mile  south  of 
Innis  island,  steer  W.  f  N.,  48  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of  Thorap- 
[son  point,  the  north  point  of  Cockburn  island,  and  the    northeasterly 
[point  of  entrance  to  the  False  Detour  channel.    See  page  116. 

Innis  Island  to  Sulphur  Island.— When  i  mile  south  of 
[Innis  island,  steer  W.  :^  N.,  23  miles,  until  Cape  Robert  light  bears  south 
Is  miles ;  then  W.  by  K.  ^  N.,  38  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Sul- 
iphnr  Island  light. 

Clapperton  Channel  to  Cape  Robert.— When  if  miles 
iW.  by  N.  from  Maple  point,  and  in  range  with  South  point  of  Clapper- 
[ton  island,  steer  W.  |  N.,  23  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  C^pe 
|Robert  light. 

Clapperton  Channel  to  Gore  Bay.— When  if  miles  W. 

Eby  N.  from  Maple  point,  as  in  the  preceding  course,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S. 

[ranging  on  Janet  Head  for  6^  miles,  until  Town  point  bears  S.  i  W., 
rhen  haul  up  on  that  course  about  2^  miles,  keep  about  midway  between 
Town  point  and  the  east  shore,  and  when  past  the  point  haul  in  for  the 
rood  dock.  Vessels  can  lie  at  the  dock  with  northerly  winds  with 
ifety. 


158 


STRAITS   OF   MACKINAC. 


STRAITS    OF    MACKINAC. 

Light  Houses,  Buoys  and  Harbors  Standing  to  the   West- 
ward, 

Note. — The  Straits  of  Mackinac  embrace  those  waters  commencing  at  the  east 
point  of  Isle  iBois  Blanc  and  extending  to  the  south  point  of  Beaver  Island. 

Bois  Blanc  Island. — A  Life  Saving  Station  has  been  estab- 
lished near  the  middle  of  the  east  end  of  the  island. 

BOIS  BLANC  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th 
order,  visible  ISf  miles.  Yellow  tower,  38  feet  high,  rising  from  yellow 
dwelling.  On  the  northeast  point  of  the  narrow  neck  of  land  extending 
to  the  northward  from  the  easterly  end  of  Bois  Blanc  island.  A  guide 
into  the  north  channel  of  the  Straits  of  Mackinac.  Detour  light-house, 
K.  E.  by  E.  I  E.,  26^  miles.  Spectacle  Reef  light-house,  E.  by  S.,  14 
miles.     Fort  Mackinac,  W.  N.  W.  f  W.,  9i  miles. 

In  the  Bay  south  of  the  light  there  is  good  anchorage  and  pro- 
tection from  all  winds,  except  those  from  W.  S.  W.  by  the  westward  and 
northward  to  N.  N.  E.  The  shore  is  bold  from  the  east  point  of  the 
island  to  the  ilght.  A  spit  extends  from  the  light-house  point  in  a  W. 
N.  W.  direction  from  one-half  to  five-eighths  of  a  mile.  To  make  ihe 
anchorage  from  the  eastward:  When  half  a  mile  north  of  the  light  steer 
west  for  three-fourths  of  a  mile,  thence  south  three-fourths  of  a  mile, 
when  haul  up  E.  S.  E.  for  about  half  a  mile  and  come-to  in  about  6 
fathoms  with  the  light  bearing  N.  N.  E. 

Note. — There  is  a  shoal  spot  between  f  and  J  of  a  mile  N.  W.  of  the 
light,  on  which  at  the  present  low  stage  of  water  there  is  not  more  than 
15^  feet,  heavy  draft  vessels  should  keep  outside  of  it. 

Poe's  Reef. — Red,  2d-olass  can  buoy  in  17  feet  of  water.  Placed 
on  the  southeast  point  of  Poe's  reef,  1^  miles  from  the  southeast  end  of 
Bois  Blanc  island.  The  reef  extends  in  an  easterly  and  westerly  direc- 
tion about  2,000  yards,  with  the  least  depth  of  water  on  it  of  12  feet. 
There  is  a  narrow  channel  on  the  north  side  of  it,  which  should  not  be 
attempted  by  strangers.  Spectacle  Reef  light  house,  E.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  12 
miles.    Cheboygan  light-house,  S.  W.  f  S.,  3^  miles. 

Oheboyg^an  Reef. — Black,  2d-clas8  nun  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water. 
This  buoy  marks  a  dangerous  shoal  on  'vhioh  there  is  not  more  than  U 
feet  of  water,  it  is  about  350  yards  long  in  an  east  and  west  direction. 
Cheboygan  Main  light  bears  S.  S.  W.  \  W.,  }  mile. 

CHEBOYGAN  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  5th 
order,  varied  by  white  flashes  every  90  seconds,  visible  12^  miles.  White 
tower,  33  feet  high,  rising  from  dwelling.  On  the  north  point  of  the 
land  to  the  eastward  of  McLeod's  bay,  south  channel  of  the  Straits  of 
Mackinac.  A  guide  into  the  south  channel.  A  fog  signal  has  been 
established  at  this  station,  it  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle,  during  thick  or 
foggy  weather  it  will  souiid  blasts  of  6  seconds  with  intervals  of  2')  sec- 
onds. Poe's  Reef  buoy,  N.  E.  f  N.,  3^  miles.  St.  Helena  light,  N.  W. 
by  W.  ^  W.,  26  miles.     South  point  of  Bois  Blanc  island  N.,  3^  miles. 

Cheboygan  Pierhead  Crib  Light.  —A  fixed  red  light,  4th 
order,  visible  12  miles.     Red,  iron,  octagonal  tower,  36  feet  high.    Oa 


STRAITS   OF   MAOKINAO. 


159 


ion  has  been  estab- 


6  feet  high.    On 


>lated  orib  off  the  entrance  into  the  Cheboygan  river,  Miohig^an.     Ves- 
bIs  bound  into  Cheboygan  should  pass  the  crib  close-to  on  east  side  and 
iteer  in  on  the  range.   Spectacle  reef,  N.  B.  by  E.  i  E.,  17|  miles.   Point 
[St.  Ignace,  N.  W.,  17^  miles.     Good  anchorage  off  the  light  in  3  to  4 
[fathoms. 

McLeod'ti  Bay  has  good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds. 
[To  enter  it,  when  one-fourth  of  a  mile  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Cheboygan  orib 
[light,  steer  S.  E.  by  E.  1  mile,  heading  a  little  outside  the  lumber  docks 
[at  Duncan  City.     Come  to  abreast  the  lumber  docks  in  3^  fathoms. 

Cheboygran  River  Ranges. — Two  fixed  red  lights,  on  the  west 

side  of  tbe  Cheboygan  river.     Front  light,  42  feet  above  the  lake,  in 

tower  rising  from   frame  dwelling;  rear  light  68  feet  above  the  lake,  in 

I  open  framework  tower.     Towers  850  feet  apart,  on  the  prolongation  of 

the  center  line  of  the  cut,  and  a  range  for  passtng  through  it.     The  out 

[was  completed  in  1887;  it  is  200  feet  wide  and  15  feet  deep  from  the  16- 

[foot  curve  in  the  straits  up  to  the  steamboat  landing. 

Zela  Shoal. — Red,  Sd-class  can  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  On  the 
[extreme  west  end  of  the  shoal,  extending  2  miles  W.  N.  W.  from  Zela 
[point,  south  side  of  Bois  Blanc  island.  There  is  no  passage  way  between 
[the  buoy  and  the  island.  West  point  of  Mackinac  island,  N.  W.  f  N.,  7^ 
[miles.  Cheboygan  light-house,  S.  E.  ^  E.,  9j  miles.  Point  au  Sable,  S. 
\k  E.,  4f  miles. 

Major's  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizont  1  stripes,  2d  class  can  buoy  in  19 

I  feet  of  water.    On  the  middle  of  the  shoal.    The  general  direction  of  the  shoal  is  N. 

|W.  and  S.  £.,  and  it  is  about  1,200  feet  long.    There  is  a  14-foot  spot  about  400  feet 

southeast  of  this  buoy.     East  side  of  Mackinac  island  N.  £.  8^  miles.    West  side  of 

Mackinac  island  N.  i  £.  3^  miles.    From  the  buoy  the  west  side  of  Grosse  Isle  St. 

Martin  is  just  open  by  the  west  side  of  Mackinac  island,  and  the  north  point  of  St. 

[ISelena  is  in  line  with  Point  La  Barbe. 

Miickinac  Harbor.— Red,  Sd-class  can  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
[end  of  the  spit  extending  off  the  south  point  of  Mackinac  island;  tliis  spit  extends  in 
[a  southeasterly  direction.  A  spit  extends  in  a  similar  direction  from  the  east  point 
[of  the  island,  wliich  with  the  bay  between  the  two  points  form  Mackinac  harbor. 
[The  liarborr'is  safe  from  all  winds,  except  from  the  east.  Large  steamers  can  lie  at 
[the  piers  ia  any  weather.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to  pass  between  the  buoy  and 
[the  island,  at  the  same  time  taking  care  to  avoid  the  shoal  to  the  northwest  of  liound 
'  iland.  To  make  tlic  harbor  from  the  west,  get  McGulpin's  Point  light  astern,  and 
lie  east  fall  of  Mackinac  island  in  range  E.  N.  E.  t  N.,  until  Bois  Blanc  light  opens 
'  Round  island,  when  haul  up  slowly  for  it,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  spit  off 
}und  island,  and  when  well  past  it,  haul  up  for  the  piers  at  Mackinac  on  a  bearing 
N.  W.  i  W.,  with  the  east  end  of  Round  island  a  little  on  the  port  quarter. 

South  Graham  Shoal.— JRed,  Ist-class  automatic  bell  buoy  in 
14  feet  of  water.  On  the  southeasterly  edge  of  South  Graham  shoal. 
The  Graham  shoals  bear  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.,  respectively,  from  each 
>ther  three-fourths  of  a  mile.  Between  the  shoals  and  Point  St.  Ignace 
there  is  a  channel  which  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers.  The 
)urrents  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Graham  shoals  and  the  Straits  of  Mackinac 
re  often  strong  and  irregular.  After  fresh  gales,  vessels  anchored  in  the 
traits  often  trend  to  windward.  The  least  water  on  the  South  Graham 
6  feet.  McGulpin's  Point  light-house,  8.  W.  ^  W.,  4^  miles.  Point 
it.  Ignace,  N.  i  W.,  1^  miles.  Point  La  Barbe,  W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  2^ 
liles. 

North  Graham  Shoal.— Red,  2d-olaBs  can  buoy  in  12  fleet  of 

[water.    Placed  on  the  southeast  point  of  the  shoal.    Least  water  on 

■hoal,  8  feet.     Rabbit's  Back  peak,  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  6f  miles.     North 

[point  of  Mackinac  island,  N.  E.  |-  N.,  4  miles.     South  Graham  Shoal 

|>l>uoy,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  1,400  yards.     Range  lines  A'om  the  north  tide  of 


160 


8TRAIT8   OF   MAOKINAC. 


li 


I 


Isle  St  Helena  and  Point  La  Barbe,  and  from  Qrosse  Point  and  Point 
St.  Ignaoe,  intersect  each  other  on  the  South  Graham  shoal. 

Point  St.  If^nace  is  theterminns,  on  the  north  side  of  the  straits, 
of  the  Detroit,  Mackinac  and  Marquette  Railroad.  To  make  St.  Ignace 
from  Mackinac  harbor,  haul  around  the  south  point  of  the  island,  and 
steer  W.  bv  N.  ^  N.,  4^  miles,  to  the  docks.  Vessels  coming  from  the 
west  should  range  Old  Point  Mackinac  and  the  west  point  of  Mackinac 
island,  N.  £.  by  N.,  until  in  range  with  the  south  side  of  Round  inland 
and  the  dock  at  Point  St.  Ignace,  when  haul  up  on  the  range  W.  N.  W. 
i  N*.    There  is  good  water  at  either  of  the  docks. 

Carp  River,  in  St.  Martin's  bay,  is  12  miles  norths  of  Point  St. 
Ignace.  There  is  good  anchorage  off  the  mouth  of  the  river;  vessels  can 
lie  there  in  any  weather.  To  make  the  anchorage  from  the  west  side  of 
Mackinac  island,  steer  north  in  mid-channel  between  Grosse  Isle  St. 
Martin  and  Grosse  point,  and  when  past  the  point,  steer  N.  ^  W.  3^ 
miles.  Come-to  in  8^  fathoms  off  the  mouth  of  the  river.  A  spit 
extends  in  an  easterly  direction  from  Grosse  point  one-half  mile.  To 
make  the  mouth  of  Carp  river  from  the  east,  when  half  a  mile  north  of 
Bois  Blanc  light,  steer  N.  W.  }  W.,  15  miles,  keeping  Grosse  point  a 
little  open  on  the  starboard  bow,  and  when  the  middle  of  the  channel 
between  Grosse  Isle  St.  Martin  and  Grosse  point  bears  north,  haul  up  on 
that  bearing,  and  when  past  the  point  steer  N.  ^  W.,  3^  miles,  to  abreast 
the  mouth  of  the  river.  Shoal  water  extends  off  the  south  point  of  Grosse 
Isle  St.  Martin  half  a  mile,  and  off  the  south  point  of  Little  St  Martin's 
island  nearly  1  mile.  To  run  through  between  the  islands,  bring  the  middle 
of  the  passage  to  bear  north  and  run  through  on  that  bearing.  To  run 
through  between  Little  Isle  St.  Martin  and  Point  St  Martin,  bring  the 
middle  of  the  channel  to  bear  N.  by  W.,  and  run  through  on  that  bear- 
ing. A  detached  shoal  off  St.  Martin's  point  extends  east  and  west  one 
mUe  in  length.  Vessels  should  give  the  point  a  berth  of  one  mile.  A 
spit  extends  off  the  east  point  of  Grosse  Isle  St.  Martin  three-eighths  of 
a  mile  in  an  easterly  direction.  *  • 

Goose  Island  Shoal  lies  in  range  of  Fort  Mackinac  and  the 
middle  of  Goo^e  island,  and  also  in  the  range  of  Bois  Blanc  light  and 
west  side  of  Point  St.  Martin,  N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  6f  miles,  from  Bois  Blanc 
light  and  S.  W.  f  W.,  3^  miles  from  the  north  point  of  Goose  island. 
Least  water,  6  feet. 

Goose  Island  Spit  extends  in  a  8.  8.  E.  direction  1  mile  from 
south  end  of  the  island.  The  south  end  of  the  spit  bears  N.,  6^  miles 
from  Boiu  Blanc  light 

Marquette  Bay  has  good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all 
winds,  and  is  easy  of  access.  The  east  point  of  entrance  is  N.  ^  W.,  2\ 
miles  from  the  north  end  of  Goose  island.  To  enter  the  bay,  haul  around 
the  east  point  of  entrance,  giving  it  a  berth  of  300  yards,  and  come-to  in 
4  or  6  fathoms.  There  is  a  good  channel  between  Goose  Island  and  Isle 
Marquette.  Shoal  water  extends  from  Isle  Marquette  in  the  direction 
of  Goose  island  ^  mile. 

Old  Fort  Mackinac  is  the  terminus  on  the  south  side  of  the 
straits  of  the  Detroit,  Mackinac  &  Marquette  Railroad.  There  is  a  large 
railroad  wharf,  with  deep  water  alongside.  Good  anchorage  in  the  bay 
east  of  Old  Point  Mackinac,  and  protection  from  all  westerly  winds.  To 
make  the  anchorage  from  the  west,  haul  around  the  point  and  strnd  into 


STRAtTS   OF   MACKINAC. 


161 


B8,  from  Bois  Blanc 
it  of  Goose  island. 


bay,  until  past  the  range  of  the  point  and  St.  Helena  light,  and  come-to.    Furtlier 
kp  in  the  bay  the  water  is  shoal. 

OLD  MACKIWAC  POINT  FOO-SI€?MAL  STATION.— The  signal 

I  a  10-inch  steam  whistle,  gives  blasts  of  5  seconds,  altematc  silent  intervals  of  17 

nd  33  seconds.     Brown  corrugated  iron  fog-hoiise,  gable  facing  the  lake.     On  the 

north  side  of  Old  Mackinac  point.    McGulpin's  Pomt  light  W.  2i  miles.     St.  Helena 

ight  N.  W.  i  W.  8  miles.     Cheboygan  Mam  light  8.  E.  by  E.  i  E.  Ifl*  miles. 

LIght'house  to  be  built. — The  light  will  be  fixed  white,  varied  by  a  white 
ish  at  intervals  of  10  seconds. 

Good  anchorage  on  the  south  side  of  the  straits  between  Point  Sable  and  Old 
^oint  Mackinac. 

Excellent  holding  ground  and  protection  from  northeast  gales  can  be  found  south 
yt  Round  island  and  off  tlic  west  end  of  tiois  Blanc  island. 

»IcGUL.PlN»S  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 

flight,  3i  order,  visible  17^  miles.    Yellow  tower,  38  feet  high,  rises  from 

Iwelling.     On  McGulpin's  point,  south  side  of  the  Straits  of  Mackinac, 

fcbout  2  miles  west  of  Old  Fort  Mackinac  point.     The  light  is  situated  on 

|a  bluff,  which  is  about  70  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.      Old  Fort 

lackinac  point,  E.  f  N.,  2  miles.     South  Graham  Shonl  buoy,  N.  £.  ^  £., 

|4i  miles.     St.  Helena  light-house,  N.  W.  |  N.,  6|  miles. 

ST.  HELENA    LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light,  3^ 
>rder,  visible  16^  miles.     White  tower,   66   feet  high,   connected    by   a 
sovered  way  with  red  brick  dwelling.       On  the  southeast  point   of  St 
Telena  island.     A  guide  to  vessels  making  »  lee  under  St.  Helena  island, 
id  also  a  leading  mark  to  vessels  bound   westward   through   the  south 
iohannel  of  the  Straits  of  Mackinac.     In  entering  St.  Helenii  harbor  from 
>e  westward,  when  three-quarters   of  a  mile  north   of   Waugoshance 
light,  steer  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  12  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile  S. 
~C.  ^  8.  from  St.  Helena  light,  and  in  range  with  it  and  McGulpin's  Point 
light,  when  haul  to  the  northward,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  spit  v;hich 
(tends  hair  a  mile  to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  the  light,  and  marked 
>ya  26  foot  black  spar  buov  in  18  feet  of  water.  Co  ae-to  off  the  dock  on 
[the  east  side  of  the  island,  m  from  6  to  8  fathoms.     To  pass  tothenorth- 
[ward  of  the  island,  when  three-quarters  of  a  mile  north  of  Waugoshance 
night,  bteer  E.  N.  E.  |  N.,  11^  miles,  to  a  point  one-quarter  of  a  mile 
[north  of  the  island,  passing  about  half  a  mile  south  of  St.  Helena  Shoal 
|buoy,  when  haul  to  the  southeastward  and  come-to  off  the  dock.    VeBsela 
ipproaching  from  the  south  channel  of  the  straits  should  bring  McGul- 
pin's Point  light  astern,  and  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  which  will  lead  to  the  an- 
shorage.     Waugoshance  light-house,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  11|  miles. 

St.  Helena  Southeast  Shoal.— Black  spar  buoy  in  18  feet 

>f  water.      On  the  southeast  end  of  shoal  extending  1,000  yards  south- 

[east  of  St.  Helena  light-house.     In  entering  St.  Helena  harbor  from  the 

[eastward,  give  the  buoy  a  berth  of  100  yards.      St.   Helena  light-house, 

(N.  W.  I  W.,  1,000  yards. 

St.  Helena  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2d-olaB8 
loan  buoy.  On  the  south  Hide  of  the  center  of  St.  Helena  shoal,  which 
[lies  If  miles  west  of  the  northwest  end  of  St.  Helena  island.  The  shoal 
jii  about  750  yards  in  extent  northwest  and  southeast,  and  600  yards 
[northeast  and  southwest,  with  8  feet  of  water  on  its  shoalest  part.  The 
JKOundicgs  are  irregular;  bottom  roekv,  with  3  to  4  fathoms  close-to. 
^North  point  of  St.  Helena  island,  E.  i  N.,  2  miles.      McGulpin's   Point 

light-house,  S.  E.  |  E.,  8|  miles.      Waugoshance  light-house,  S.  W.  by 

W.,  91  miles. 


162 


STRAITS   OF   MACKINAC. 


Manltoa  Pajrmen  Shoal.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  Sd-clafls  nuo 
buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  OflE  the  south  point  of  ^>nitou  Paymen  shoal,  the  ofinttr 
of  which  is  about  4  idles  from  the  north  shore.  'I'ue  shoal  is  about  three-fourths  of 
a  mile  in  extent  northeast  and  southwest,  aud  800  yards  northwest  and  soiitlicnst. 
Least  water  on  it,  6  feet.  Waugoshance  light-house,  8.  i  W.,  Hi  miles.  Point 
Epoufette.  N.  W.  i  W..  8^  mUes.    Simmons  reef,  8.  W.  by  W.  i  W..  6i  miles. 

Simmont  Reef  Llght-Tessel.— Moored  in  about  26  feet  of  water  tn  the 
southeastward  of  the  reef,  and  shows  at  each  masthead  a  group  of  three  fixed  red  lens 
lantern  lights.  The  focal  plane  of  each  group  is  80  feet  above  the  lake,  and  the  lip-lits 
are  yisible  in  clear  weather  8i  miles.  The  vessel  has  two  masts,  schooner  rifjged, 
and  no  bowsprit.  The  hull  is  painted  red.  with  '  'Simmons  Betf"  in  large  white  lotters 
on  each  side,  and  "No.  55"  m  white  figures  on  the  stern.  The  lantern  masts  are 
painted  yellow,  and  abaft  of  each  there  is  a  trysail  mast;  two  black  smoke  pipes,  and 
the  fog-signal  are  between  the  masts. 

The  fog-signal  is  a  6-inch  steam  whistle,  and  in  thick  or  foggy  weather  will  sound 

blasts  as  follows: 

Silent  n,.^  Silent  m,^-^  Silent 

interval.  "'*"•  interval.  "'*"•  int«rval. 

3  seconds. 


Blast 


1  second.       10  seconds. 


10  seconds.       1  second.       85  seconds. 


Simmons  Reef  is  composed  of  4  shoals  extending  in  an  easterly  and  westerly  direc- 
tion li  miles,  and  about  800  yards  in  a  northerly  and  southerly  direction.  Least 
water,  3  feet.  Waugoshance  light-house,  8.  8.  E.  1  E.,  9  J  miles.  Hat  Island  (left 
tangent),  8.  W.  i  8.,  8  miles. 

White  Shoal  Lfght-Vegsel.— Moored  in  about  26  feet  of  water,  to  the 
northeastward  of  the  shoal,  and  shows  at  each  masthead  a  group  of  three  fixed  white 
lens-lantern  lights.  The  focal  plane  of  each  group  is  80  feet  above  the  lake,  and  the 
lights  are  visible  in  clear  weather  Hi  miles.  The  vessel  has  two  masts,  schooner 
rigged,  and  no  bowsprit.  The  hull  is  painted  white,  with  "White  Shoal"  in  large 
black  letters  on  each  side,  »'nd  "No.  56"  in  black  figures  on  the  stern.  The  lantern 
masts  are  painted  yellow,  and  abaft  of  each  there  is  a  trysail  mast.  Two  black 
smoke  pipes,  and  the  fo^-signal  are  between  the  masts. 

The  fog-signal  is  a  6  inch  steam  whistle,  and  in  thick  or  foggy  weather  will  sound 
blasts  as  follows: 

Sllet't  p,„^  Silent  t,,^^  Silent 

interval.  "'"*^-  interval.  "'*^^-  interval. 


Blast. 


1  second.       10  seconds.       1  second.        10  seconds.       3  seconds.       86  s.  conds. 

Waugoshance  light-house,  8.  8.  E.  f  E.,  4|  miles.    Hat  island  (left  tangent),  W. 
by  8.  i  8.,  8  miles.    St.  Helena  light-house,  E.  i  N  ,  1'  Ij  miles. 

White  Shoal  (southirest  end).— A  l8t-cla»s  i  ad  and  black  horizontal  stripes 
spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 

The  White  Shoals  are  composed  of  irregular  ro^.ky  reefs  extending  i  mile  in 
a  northeasterly  and  southwesterly  direction.     Least  wa'.er,*3  feet. 

WArGOSHANCE  L.10HT-SYATI0W.- A  fixed  light,  varied  by  white 
flashes  at  intervals  of  90  seconds,  4th  order,  visible  15i  miles.  Tower  65  feet  high, 
attached  to  dwelling,  both  pdnted  brown,  surrounded  bv  a  souare  crib.  On  the 
extreme  point  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  northwestward  of  Waugoshance  island, 
and  marks  the  turning  point  from  the  Straits  of  Mackinac  into  I^ake  Michigan, 
between  Beaver  island  and  the  main-land.  There  is  a  passage-way  to  the  eastward 
and  close  to  the  light,  but  it  should  not  be  used  unless  familiar  with  the  locality. 
During  thick  or  foggy  weather  there  is  sounded  a  steam  whistle,  giving  blasts  of  6 
seconds  at  intervals  of  25  seconds.  St.  Helena  Shoal  buoy,  N.  E.  bv  E.,  9|  miles. 
Manitou  Paymen  buoy,  N.  ^E.,  11|  miles.  Simmons  Reef  lightship,  N.  N.  W.J 
W. ,  91  miles.  White  Shoal  light-shL,  N.  N.  W.  f  W. ,  4fmiles.  Gray's  Reef  light 
ship,  W.  4i  miles.  Hog'9  Island  Reef  buoy,  W.  8.  W.  i  W. ,  12f  miles.  Skilligallee 
light-house,  8.  8.  W.  |  W.,  8f  miles. 

Waugoshance  IS-Foot  Shoal. — A  2d-class  red  and  blf>ck  horizontal 
stripes  nun  buoy  in  17i  feet  of  water.  Marks  a  large  boulder,  on  which  the  light- 
house tender  "Dahlia''  found  but  17i  feet  of  water.  Waugoshance  light-house,  8. 
byE.  iE.,  li  miles. 

Tienna  Shoal.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2d-class  can  buoy,  in  IC 
feet  of  water.  Marks  the  northwest  point  of  tlie  Vienna  shoal,  which  has  an  extent 
of  800  yards  from  east  to  west,  and  175  yards  north  to  south.  The  large  boulder  was 
blown  up  last  year  by  the  U.  S.  Engineers,  but  there  are  still  a  numl)er  of  small  ones 
near  the  center  of  the  shoal  with  16  feet  of  water  over  them.  Waugoshance  light,  £. 
by  N.  t  N.  li  miles.    Skilligallee  light,  8.  by  W.  i  W. ,  7i  miles. 


8TBAIT8    OF   MAOILINAC. 


1G3 


oggy  weather  will  sound 


?gy  weather  will  sound 


black  horizontal  stripes 


GBAY'S  RF.EF  liIGflT-VESSEE..— Moored  in  about  26  feet  of  water. 

the  eastward  of  the  reef,  and  shows  a  group  of  tliree  fixed  white  lens-lantem 

Ighta  at  thu  foremast  head,  and  three  fixed  red  lens-lantern  lights  at  the  mainmast 

lead.    The  focal  plane  of  each  group  is  30  feet  above  the  lake,  and  the  white  light  is 

lidsible  in  clear  weather  llj  miles.    The  vessel  has  two  masts,  schooner  rigged,  and 

nio  bowsprit.    The  hull  is  painted  red  up  to  the  bulwarks.    The  bulwarks  are  painted 

hite,  '"ith  "Gray's  Beef"  in  large  black  letters  on  each  side,  and  "  No.  57  "  in  black 

igures  on  the  stern.    The  lantern  masts  are  painted  yellow,  and  abaft  of  each  there 

I  a  trysail  mast.    Two  black  smoke  pipes,  and  the  fog  signal  are  between  the  masts. 

The  fog-signal  is  a  6-inch  steam  whistle,  and  in  thick  or  foggy  weather  will  sound 

Iblasts  as  follows: 

Riu*  Silent  p,--x  Silent  p,„,.  Silent 

"'*^  Interval.  "'"^  Interval  """^  Interval. 

8  seconds.        10  seconds.       1  second.       10  seconds.       1  second.        10  seconds. 

Gray's  reef,  which  is  comi  ;osed  of  a  series  of  shoals  extending  east  and  west  about 

^-8^  miles,  and  about  1^  miles  north  and  south.     Least  water,  6  feet.    The  soundings 

'  between  the  reef  and  Hat  island  are  irregular  and  foul.     Waugoslmnce  light-house, 

E.  4f  miles.    Skilligallee  light-house,  B.  i  E.,  7i  miles.     St.  Helena  light-house,  E. 

!byN.  iN.,  16i  miles. 

Skilligallee  Shoal.— Black,  Sd-class  nun  buoy,  in  18  feet  of  water.    Marks 
;  the  end  of  a  shoai  extending  in  a  northwesterly  direction  from  Skilligallee  light-house, 
I  and  vessels  should  not  atteiir  pt  to  pass  between  the  buoy  and  the  light.     Skilligallee 
light-house,  8.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  f  of  a  mile. 

SHIL.£.IGAL.L1:E  light-station.— a  fixed  white  light,  4th  order, 

visible  14  miles.     White  brick  tower,  52  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with 

..dwelling,  all  white.    On  Skilligallee  rock  (Isle  aux  Galets),  between  Beaver  island 

l«nd  the  ma'n-land,  and  5f  miles  from  the  latter.     A  guide  to  and  from  the  Straits  of 

Mackinac.     During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  10-inch  steam  whistle  will  sound  blasts 

of  5  seconds,  with  alternate  intervals  of  10  and  40  seconds. 

Waugoshance  light-house,  N.  N.  E.  |  E.,  8|  miles.  Gray's  Reef  buoy,  N.  by  W. 
i  W.,  7i  miles.    Hog  Island  reef  buoy,  W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  8|  miles. 

There  is  a  detached  shoal  If  miles,  the  middle  of  it  bearing  E.  N.  E.  i  N.  from 
Skilligallee  light,  with  only  12  feet  of  water,  rocky  bottom.  The  shoal  is  half  a  mile 
hi  length  and  an  eighth  mile  wide,  and  extends  in  a  northeast  direction. 

Hog  Island  Reef. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2d-class  can  buoy,  in  18 
keet  of  water.  Off  the  southeast  end  of  Hog  Island  reef.  The  greatest  extent  of  the 
reef  is  east  and  west  three-eighths  of  a  mile,  and  north  and  south  220  yards.  The 
shoalest  spot,  6  feet,  is  on  the  west  end  of  the  reef,  with  soundings  to  the  westward, 
ciose-to,  of  4  and  5  fathoms.     Skilligallee  light-house,  E.  S.  E.  i  E. ,  8f  miles.     Wau- 

Soshance  light-house,  E.  N.  E.  i  E. ,  12f  miles.    Gray's  Reef  light  vessel,  N.  E.  by 
I.  i  E.,  8}  miles.    Beaver  Island  Harbor  light-house,  W.  i  N.,  ^  miles. 

BEAVER  ISLAND  HARBOR  LIGHT-STATION.— A 

fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  visible  i'.?,^  miles.  White  tower,  34  feet  high, 
connected  by  a  covered  way  with  dwelling,  all  white.  On  the  north  side 
of  the  entrance  into  Beaver  harbor.  A  guide  into  the  harbor.  Vessels 
entering  must  be  careful  to  avoid  the  shoal  on  the  north  side  of  entrance. 
With  the  light-house  ahead,  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.,  distant  1  mile,  open 
the  light  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow,  heading  about  W.  N.  W.,  vrhich 
will  lead  into  the  harbor.  Pass  the  light- house,  giving  it  a  berth  of 
about  200  yards,,  Good  anchorage  can  be  found  on  a  line  between  the 
inner  and  orter  docks.  Skilligallee  light-house,  E.  8.  E.  f  E.,  17  miles. 
Hog  Island  Reef  buoy,  E.  f  8.,  8^  miles.  Life-Saving  Station  about  166 
feet  west  of  light-house. 

BEAVER  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  varied  by  white  flashes  at  intervals  of  1  minute.  4th  order,  visible 
17^  miles.  Yellow  tower,  40  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with 
dwelling,  all  of  yellow  brick.  On  the  bluff,  about  60  feet  high,  at  the 
south  end  of  lieaver  island.  A  guide  through  the  channel,  9^  miles  wide, 
between  Beaver  and  North  Fox  islivnds.  The  fog-aignal  is  a  Ist  class 
iteam-siren.  The  fog-signal  house  is  on  a  point  660  feet  S.  W  by  W.  ^ 
W.  from  the  light-houst'.     In  thick  and  foggy  weather  there  will  bo 


164 


LAKE  MIOHIOAN. 


Bounded  blasts  of  7  seconds  with  intervals  of  42  seconds.  North  point 
of  North  Fox  island,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  llf  miles.  Grand  Traverse 
light-house,  S.  f  E.,  25^^  miles.  Shoal  watfer  extends  off  the  south  and 
southwest  points  of  the  island  f  of  a  mile. 

lilTTLE  TRAVERSE  LI  GHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red 
light,  4th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  Red  brick  tower,  41  feet  high,  at- 
tached to  dwelling;  lantern  black.  On  the  extremity  of  Harbor  point. 
Marks  the  entrance  to  Little  Traverse  bay.  Beaver  Island  light-house, 
W.  N.  W.,  31  miles.  South  Fox  Island  light-house,  W.  f  S.,  42  miles. 
To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  westward,  haul  close  around  Harbor  point, 
which  is  steep-to,  and  run  to  the  docks  in  the  head  of  the  bay,  or  come- 
to  on  the  north  side.  In  the  middle  of  the  bay  the  water  is  too  deep  to 
anchor. 

CHARLEVOIX    PIERHEAD    LIGHT-STATION.-A 

fixed  red  light,  5th  order,  visible  9f  miles.  White,  square,  open-frame 
tower.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor 
of  Charlevoix. 

The  harbor  improvemeilt  consists  of  a  dredged  channel  con- 
necting Pine  lake  with  Lake  Michigan,  and  protected  on  both  sides  by 
revetments  and  piers  extending  into  Lake  Michigan.  The  piers  are  160 
feet  apart,  and  extend  out  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.  The  north  pier  is  40  feet 
longer  than  the  south  pier.  A  bar  has  formed  outside  the  end  of  the  south 
pier,  and  reduced  the  depth  to  10^  feet  at  the  entrance  from  Lake  Mich- 
igan. 


LAKE     MICHIGAN.  J 

Light-Houses y  Buoys  and  Harbors  Standing  South   Alon^ 

the  East  Coast  of  Lake  Michigan 

and  Islands. 

SOUTH  FOX  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red 
light,  varied  by  red  flashes  at  intervals  of  2  minutes,  4th  order,  visible  15 
miles.  Yellow  tower,  39  feet  high,  rises  from  yellow  dwelling.  On  the 
southern  extremity  of  South  Fox  island.  A  guide  through  the  chaniiel 
between  South  Fox  and  North  Manitou  islands.  A  shoal  extends  to  the 
southward  of  South  Fox  island  for  the  distance  of  9f  miles,  with  two 
spots  on  it  with  13  and  16  feet  of  water,  respectively,  marked  by  buoys. 
Grand  Traverse  light-house,  S.  E.  f  E.,  18^  miles.  Northwest  point  of 
North  Manitou  island,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  19  miles.  From  the  north  point 
of  the  South  Fox  island  a  spit  extends  1  mile  in  a  northwest  direction, 
and  another  from  the  south  point  in  a  southwest  direction  \  mile.  The 
North  Fox  can  be  approached  within  half  a  mile  except  on  the  southwest 
side,  where  shoal  water  extends  nearly  1  mile.  The  holding  ground 
around  the  Foxes  is  very  good,  and  they  afford  shelter  from  all  winds 
except  from  the  northwest  and  southeast.  On  the  east  side  the  water  is 
deep  and  vessels  come-to  in  from  15  to  22  fathoms. 


LAKX  mOHIGAll. 


165 


Fox  lalai  1  Shoal  (inside).— Second-class  nun  bnoy,  red  and 
>lack  horizontal  stripes,  in  20  feet  of  water.     To  the  southward,  and 
alose  to  the  inner  spot  on  the  reef  extending  to  the  southward  of  South 
7ox  island,  distant  4^  miles  from  South  Fox  Island  light.     The  chart 
jives  13  feet  as  the  least  depth  of  water  at  this  point,  but  rocks  with 
[only  1 1  feet  on  them  have  been  found.     The  bottom  near  the  buoy  is 
[rocky;  the  soundings  are  irregular,  and  deeply-laden  vessels  should  be 
{careful    in  navigatmg  in  this  vicinity  when  the  weather  is  thick   or 
[foggy.     In  clear  weather  the  buoy  may  be  passed  on  either  side  at  a  dis- 
tance of  a  quarter  of  a  mile.     South  Fox  island  light-house,  N.  J  E.,  4 J 
miles.     Outer  Shoal  buoy,  S.  i  E.,  3^  miles. 

Note. — Vessels  bound  down  through  this  passage,  to  avoid  this  shoal 
should  keep  the  highest  land  on  North  Fox  island  closed  with  the  south 
point  of  South  Fox  island  until  within  two  miles  of  the  point,  when 
steer  N.  E.  i  E.  for  Waugoshance. 

Fox  Island  Shoal  (outside].— Third-class  can  buoy,  red  and 
black  horizontal  stripes,  in  20  feet  of  water.  To  the  southward,  and 
close  to  the  outer  shoal  spot  on  the  reef  extending  to  the  southward  of 
South  Fox  island,  distant  7f  miles  from  South  Fox  Island  light.  The 
chart  gives  16  feet  as  the  least  depth  of  water  at  this  point,  but  spots 
have  been  found  with  only  12  feet  of  water  on  them.  This  locality 
should  be  avoided  in  thick  weather,  but  when  the  buoy  can  be  seen, 
it  may  be  passed  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  Inner  Shoal  buoy,  N. 
i  W.,  3^  miles.     South  Fox  Island  light-house,  N.  ^  E.,  7f  miles. 


Grand  and  Little   Traverse  Bays. 

From  Middle  Villagre  to  the  Foot  of  the  East  Arm 
of  Grand  Traverse  Bay. — The  cr  s  far  as  Little  Traverse 
can  be  approached  within  half  a  mile.  *  are  detached  rocks  and 

rocky  spots  within  one-third  of  a  mile  .  o  shore.  From  Little  Tra- 
verse to  Big  Rock  point  the  coast  can  be  approached  safely  within 
one-fourth  of  a  mile,  the  shallow  water  being  in  the  indentations  of 
the  shore.  From  Pine  River  point  a  rocky  flat  extends  one-fourth  of 
a  raile  to  the  west  and  north.  Dangerous  reefs  extend  to  the  north 
and  northwest  for  almost  a  mile  from  Fisherman's  island.  From  this 
island  to  the  foot  of  the  east  arm  of  the  bay  are  many  detached  rocky 
spots  and  ledges  and  numerous  spits  extending  from  shore,  but  not  less 
than  12  feet  of  water  will  be  found  on  any  part  within  half  a  mile 
from  the  general  direction  of  the  shore,  except  at  the  foot  of  the  bay, 
where  12  feet  are  found  in  spots  three-fourths  of   a  mile  from  shore. 

From  the  Foot  of  the  East  Arm  to  Traverse  City.— 

From  the  foot  of  the  bay  to  the  village  of  Old  Mission  the  coast  can 
be  approached  within  1,000  feet  everywhere,  but  half  a  mile  south  of 
the  village  a  flat  extends  1,600  feet  into  the  bay.  From  the  point 
opposite,  and  east  of  the  village,  a  spit  runs  out  in  a  southeasterly 
direction.  A  dangerous  rocky  flat  extends  from  Old  Mission  point 
north  and  west  for  \\  miles  from  the  shore.  From  Old  Mission  point 
to  Tucker's  point  several  spits  extend  from  the  shore,  making  navi- 
gation unsafe  within  half  a  mile  from  the  coast.  From  Tucker's  point 
a  rocky  spit  runs  out  south  for  half  a  mile.  A  rocky  spit  extends  from 
the  south  point  of  Hog  island  for  more  than  half  a  mile  to  the  south* 


166 


LAKE  MIOHIOAN. 


ilii'i 


l! 


west,  and  a  smaller  one  in  a  northeasterly  direction  from  its  northern 
point  From  Bower's  harbor  to  Traverse  City  the  shore  can  be  approached 
within  one-fourth  of  a  mile. 

From  Traverse  City  to  Llgrbt-house  Point.— Two  milei 
north  of  the  dock  at  Traverse  City,  a  dangerous  9-foot  spit  extends  half 
a  mile  from  the  shore.  The  coast  from  here  to  Lee's  point  is  safe  within 
half  a  mile.  From  Lee's  point  a  spit  extends  to  the  south  for  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile.  North  of  Lee's  point  u  flat  runs  almost  half  a  mile 
from  shore,  half-way  to  Sutton's  point.  From  this  point  a  rocky  spit 
extends  three-eighths  of  a  mile  to  the  northward.  The  western  shore  of 
Sutton's  bay  is  shallow  within  half  a  mile.  The  coast  from  Pishaiibe'a 
village  to  Northport  is  generally  good,  but  a  lookout  should  be  kept  for 
a  rocky  spit  extending  for  almost  a  mile  N.  by  E.  from  the  northern  end 
of  New  Mission  point.  There  is  shoal  water  for  one-fourth  of  a  mile  to 
the  north  and  east  of  Bellow's  island.  Two  dangerous  shoals  with  6  and 
8  feet  of  water  on  them  lie  between  Northport  point  and  Northport.  A 
rocky  spit  runs  out  in  a  southeasterly  direction  for  half  a  mile  from  a 
point  three-fourths  of  a  mile  north  of  Northport  point.  From  thence  to 
Light-house  point  the  shore  can  be  safely  approached  within  half  a  mile, 
but  at  the  Light-house  point  a  rocky  spit  extends  almost  half  a  mile  to 
the  northward. 

Petoskey  is  on  the  south  side  of  Little  Traverse  bay,  S.  by  E.  | 
E.,  3  miles,  from  Little  Traverse  light.  It  has  a  dock  and  considerable 
trade.  It  is  the  terminus  of  the  Grand  Rapids  and  Indiana  B.  R.,  and 
has  become  important  as  a  summer  resort.     It  has  no  light-house. 

GRAND  TRAVERSE  lilGHT- STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  4th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  Black  lantern  on  yellow  brick  dwell- 
ing, 34  feet  high.  On  the  northwest  point  of  Lighthouse  point,  at  the 
entrance  of  Grand  Traverse  bay.  A  guide  into  the  bay  and  to  the  pass- 
age between  the  main  land  and  the  Manitous.  South  Fox  Island  light- 
house N.  W.  f  W.,  18t  miles.  Northwest  point  of  North  Manitou,  W. 
by  S.,  24^  miles. 

MISSION  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  6tb  order,  visible  13^  miles.  Black  lantern  on  white  frame  dwell- 
ing, 35  feet  high.  On  the  northeast  point  of  Old  Mission  point,  Grand 
Traverse  bay.  A  guide  into  the  east  and  west  arms  of  Grand  Traverse 
bay.  Reefs  extend  off  this  point  from  W.  to  N.  by  E.  of  light-house,  If 
miles.  Dock  at  Northport,  N.  W.  }  N.,  llf  miles.  New  Mission  point, 
N.  W.  I W.,  6f  miles. 

Northport  Bay  is  6  miles  south  of  Grand  Traverse  point.  It  has 
good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds.  To  enter  the  harbor  from 
the  northward,  haul  around  Northport  point;  give  it  a  berth  of  three- 
eighths  of  a  mile,  when  steer  W.  f  S.,  2^  miles,  to  the  docks,  keeping  a 
lookout  for  two  shoals  nearly  in  range  with  Northport  point  and  the 
docks. 

Sutton's  Bay  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  West  arm  of  the  bay,  6 
miles  west  of  Mission  Point  light-house;  has  good  anchorage  and  easy  of 
access.     The  bay  is  open  from  the  northeast. 

Bower's  Harbor  is  on  the  east  r'^e  of  the  West  arm  of  the  bay, 
10  miles  N.  N.  E.  from  Traverse  City.  Good  anchorage  and  protection 
from  all  winds.  To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  north,  run  in  between 
Tucker's  point  and  Hog  island,  keeping  a  little  nearer  to  Hog  island.  A 


LAKE   MIOHIOAN. 


167 


Bky  spot  extends  half  a  mile  sonth  from  Tucker's  point,  and  one  abont 
le  same  distance  northeast  from  Hog  island. 

Old  Mission  Bay  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  East  arm  of  the  bay, 
H  miles  south  from  Mission  Point  light-house;  it  has  good  anchorage  and 
protection  from  all  winds.  To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  north,  haul 
iround  the  point,  giving  it  a  berth  of  half  a  mile  to  clear  the  spit  ex- 
ending  southeast  from  the  point,  and  come-to  o£f  the  village  in  ft 
fathoms. 

New  Mission  Point,  or  Dougherty's  Harbor,  is  5  J  miles  N.  W. 
W.  from  Mission  Point  light. 
Elk  Rapids  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  East  arm  of  the  bay,  7  miles 
JS.  S.  £.  i  E.  ^om  Mission  Point  light. 


Standing  South  on  the  East  Shore  of  Lake  Michigan, 

From  Light-liouse  Point  to  Point  Betsey.— Between 
(the   light-house  and  Cat  Head  point  two  spits  extend  over  half  a  mile 
ffrom  shore. — From  Cat  head  to  Carp  river  the  coast  can  be  approached 
iirithin  half  a  mile,  but  there  are  two  12-foot  detached  rocky  spots  4 
[miles  N.  E.  ^  N.  from  the  dock  at  Carp  river,  If  miles  from  shore. — In 
:  Good  Harbor  bay  are  several  shoals  with  only  8  feet  of  water  on  them. 
One  of  these  will  be  found  bearing  N.  E.  ^  N.  from  the  dock  at  Unity, 
and  distant  4  miles;  the  shoal  is  directly  on  the  line  joining  Carp  River 
and  Pyramid  points.     Another  8-foot  spot  bears  from  Unity  dock  N.  E. 
\  E.,  distant  3f  miles,  and  is  a  little  inside  the  line  joining  Unity  dock 
and  Carp  River  point. — Southeast  frcm  the  last  spot,  and  half  a  mile  dis- 
tant, is  a  10-foot  spot. — Three  miles  south  of  Pyramid  point  a  rocky  spit 
runs  half  a  mile  from  shore,  and  shoal  water  extends  for  one  mile  towards 
Sleeping  Bear. — From  thence  to  Point  Betsey  the  shore  is  bold,  and  can 
be  approached  within  one-fourth  of  a  mile,  except  at  Platte  River  point,, 
where  a  spit  extends  to  the  north,   having  only  6  feet  of  water  over  it 
three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  shore. 

Cat  Head  Point  and  Bay  afford  shelter  in  southerly  winds. 
Good  holding  ground  under  Pyramid  point.  Unity  dock  affords  protec- 
tion  in  all  winds,  except  those  from  the  north  and  northeast. 

Glen  Arbor  in  the  bay  between  Sleeping  Bear  point  and  Pyramid 
point  has  good  shelter  from  all  winds,  from  the  west  round  by  the  south 
to  northeast. 

'      SOUTH    MANITOU   ISLAND    LIGHT-STATION.-A 

fixed  white  light,  3d  order,  visible  17^  miles.  White  tower,  91  feet  high,, 
connected  by  a  covered  way  with  yellow  brick  dwelling.  On  the  southeast 
point  of  South  Manitou  island.  A  guide  into  Manitou  harbor  and  through 
the  channel  to  the  eastward  of  the  Manitous.  During  thick  or  foggy 
weather,  a  steam  whistle  is  sounded,  giving  a  blast  of  8  seconds'  dura- 
tion  each  minute.  The  fog-signal  houses  are  34  yards  to  the  noitheast  of 
the  Ifght.  Southeast  point  of  North  Manitou,  N.  il.  by  E.,  7^  miles. 
Point  Betsey  light-house,  S.  by  W.  |  W.,  23  J  miles. 

South  Manitou  Harbor  is  protected  from  all  winds,  with  good 
holding  ground.  The  water  is  deep  in  the  middle  of  the  bay;  the  best 
anchorage  is  on  the  west  side,  about  one-third  the  distance  from  the  south 
dock  to  the  Light-house  point. 


168 


LAKB  MIOHIGAN. 


Is 


% 


South  Manitou  Island  can  be  approached  within  a  quarter  of 
a  mile  everywhere,  except  on  the  south  and  southwest  sides,  where  shoal 
water  extends  half  a  mile  from  shore.  There  is  also  a  rock,  with  only 
3  fathoms  of  water  over  it,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.  from  the  southwest  point  of 
Manitou  island,  2^  miles. 

North  Manitou  Island  can  be  approached  with  safety  within 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  on  the  north  Hide,  and  within  half  a  miU  on  the  east 
and  west  sides,  butthereextenasina  southerly  direction  a  rocky  spit  more 
than  three-quarters  of  a  raiie  from  the  southwest  point  of  the  island. 
Good  shelter  can  be  had  in  the  bight  on  the  east  side  of  the  island  from 
winds  from  the  southwest  to  northwest.  The  water  is  deep — from  14  to 
20  fathoms. 

POINT  BETSEY  LIGHT-STATION,— A  flashing  white 
light;  interval  of  flash,  10  seconds;  4th  order,  visible  13f  miles.  Yellow 
tower,  34  feet  high,  with  brink  dwelling  attached.  On  Point  Betsey 
(Pointe  aux  Beos  Scies),  east  shore  of  Lake  Michigan.  Marks  the  turning 
point  for  vessels  bound  to  and  from  the  south  end  of  Lake  Michigan  when 

Eassing  through  the  chaunel  to  the  eastward  of  the  Manitous.  South 
[anitou  Island  light-house,  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  23^  miles.  From  Point  Bet- 
sey to  Big  Point  Sable  the  shore  is  bold,  and  can  be  approached  anywhere 
to  within  2,000  feet;  sand  bottom.  The  Life  Saving  Station  is  a  little 
south  of  the  light-station.  The  fog-signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle 
giving  blasts  of  5  seconds  duration,  separated  by  alternate  silent  inter- 
vals of  10  and  40  seconds.  The  fog-signal  house  is  about  175  feet  N.  E. 
by  N.  from  the  light-tower.  It  is  a  corrugated  iron  structure  painted 
dark  brown. 

FRANKFORT  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed 
red  light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  25 
feet  high;  76  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  at  Frankfort, 
Michigan,  4^^  miles  from  Point  Betsey  light.  Width  between  piers,  200 
fe'3t.  The  harbor  improvement  consists  of  a  dredged  channel  connecting 
Lake  aux  Bees  Scies  with  Lake  Michigan.  The  channel  is  protected  on 
both  sides  by  revetments  and  parallel  piers  extending  west  into  Lake 
Michigan.     The  south  pier  extends  200  feet  beyond  the  north  pier. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  at  the  inner  end  of  the  south  pier. 

PORTAGE  LAKE  PIERHEAD  LIGHT-STATION- 
A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  visible  12i  miles.  Square,  white,  pyramidal,' 
open  frame-work  tower,  upper  part  enclosed.  Near  the  outer  end  of 
north  pier. 

Rang^e  Light.-  A  fixed  red  light  shown  from  a  lens  lantern,  on 
a  post  at  the  outer  end  of  the  no>  th  pier.  This  light  with  the  pierhead 
light  forms  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the  piers,  and  the  course 
for  entering  the  harbor. 

Portage  Lake  Harbor  is  23  miles  south  of  Point  Betsey,  and 

24  miles  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.  I'roin  Big  Point  Sable.  The  project  is  to  make  it 
a  harbor  of  refuge,  with  a  navigable  channel  370  feet  wide,  with  not  less 
than  18  feet  of  water.  The  piers  extend  into  the  lake  W.  ^  N.,  and  are 
parallel.  The  north  pier  is  650  feet  in  length,  and  the  south  pier  500 
feet.  A  channel  has  been  dredged  75  feet  wide  and  11  feet  deep,  but  it 
is  thought  that  it  will  soon  fill  up  again. 

MANISTEE  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed 
red  light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  27 
feet  high.     Near  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier.     The  fog  signal  is  a 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


109 


llO-inch  steam  whistle  in  duplicate;  during  thick  and  foggy  weather  it 
[will  sound  blasts,  at  the  pierhead  light-station,  of  5  seconds,  with  inter- 
vals of  26  seconds.     Width  between  piers,  180  feet.     Tbo  north  pier 
-extends  100  feet  beyond  the  south  pier.    Grande  Pointe  au  Sable  light- 
chouse,  S.  8.  W.  f  W.,  15f  miles.     The  harbor  improvements  consist  of 
a  dredged  channel  connecting  Manistee  river  with  Lake  Michigan.     The 
channel  on  both  sides  is  pn     oted  by  revetments  and  parallel  piers 
extending  into  the  lake  W.  by  N.  ^  N. 

Bangle   Liight. — A  fixed  red  light  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern 

ion  a  post  25  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.      On  the  outer  end  of  the 

I  south  pier.     This  light  will  be  visible  in  clear  weather  2  to  3  miles,  and 

will  form  with  the  main  pierhead  light  a  range  showing  the  direction  of 

the  pier  and  the  course  for  entering  the  harbor. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  near  the  inner  end  of  the  north  pier  at 
Manistee. 

GRANDE  POINTE  AU  SABLE  LIGHT-STATION  — 

A  fixed  white  light,  3d  order,  visible  lYf  miles.  Yellow  tower,  100  feet 
high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  dwelling,  all  of  yellow  brick.  A 
coast  light- on  Grande  Pointe  au  Sable,  east  shore  of  Lake  Michigan. 
Petite  Pointe  au  Sable  light-house,  8.  28i  miles.  Point  Betsey  light,  N. 
by  E.  i  E.,  46  miles. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  close  to  the  light-house  on  the  south  side. 

Hamlin  is  2  miles  south  of  Big  Point  au  Sable;  it  has  a  small  pier. 

Lincoln  is  5^  miles  to  the  southward  of  Big  Point  au  Sable,  and 
2k  miles  north  of  Ludington.     It  has  a  harbor  of  very  limited  capacity. 

LUDINGTON  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed 
red  light,  6t'a  order,  visible  8^  miles.  A  white,  open,  frame-work  tower, 
20  feet  high,  near  the  end  of  the  south  pier  at  Ludington,  Michigan,  out- 
let of  Pere  Marquette  lake.  The  harbor  works  consist  of  two  parallel 
piers  and  a  dredged  channel  between  them,  connecting  the  deep  water 
in  Pere  Marquette  lake  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan.  Width 
between  piers,  260  fpet  at  the  outer  end;  as  now  constructed  the  south 
pier  extends  350  feet  beyond  the  north  pier.  Direction  of  the  piers 
about  W.  ^  N.  Ludington  is  the  terminus  of  the  Flint  <fc  Pere  Marquette 
Railroad,  which  keeps  its  boats  running  throughout  the  year.  A  fog- 
signal  is  to  be  established  at  this  station. 

Range  Liglit. — A  fixed  red  light  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern 
on  a  post  25  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  On  the  outer  end  of  the 
south  pier  in  front  of  the  main  pierhead  light.  This  light  will  be  visible 
in  clear  weather  2  to  3  miles,  and  with  the  pierhead  light  will  form  a  range 
showing  the  direction  of  the  pier  and  the  course  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Ludington  North  Pierliead.— A  fixed  white  light  shown 
from  a  tubular  lantern  suspended  from  a  post  at  the  outer  end  of  north  pier. 

Life  Saving  Station  near  the  inner  end  of  north  pier.  Pent- 
water  Pierhead  light,  S.  ^  E.,  llj  miles. 

PENT  WATER  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A 
fixed  red  light,  6th  order,  visible  8i  mile«.  White,  open  frame  work 
tower,  25  feet  high.  On  the  end  of  the  south  pier  at  Pent  Water,  Michi- 
gan, outlet  of  Pent  Water  lake  and  river.  Width  between  piers,  160 
Feet.  Grande  Pointe  au  Sable,  N.  by  W.  i  W.,  19  miles.  The  harbor 
improvement  consists  of  a  dredged  channel  connecting  the  deep  water  in 
Lake  Michigan  with  the  deep  water  in  Pent  Water  lake.  The  sides  of 
the  channel  are  protected  with  revetments  and  parallel  piers  extending 
into  Lake  Michigan  in  a  W.  N.  W.  direction.     The  north  pier  projects 


170 


LAKE   MIOHIOAN. 


650  feet  and  the  south  pier  about  600  feet  beyond  the  shore  line;  the  north  pier  pro. 
jects  about  150  feet  beyond  the  south  pier.  At  the  present  time  a  bar  extends  about 
100  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  in  the  direction  of  the  nortli  pier. 
Entering,  keep  close  to  the  north  pier  until  inside,  when  keep  in  the  middle;  about 
lOi  feet  can  be  carried  in.  Close  to  the  north  pier,  in  places,  there  is  not  more  than 
one  foot  of  water.  In  southerly  gales,  vessels  can  make  a  good  lee  5  or  6  miles  N.  £. 
by  N.  of  Little  Point  au  Sable.    Come-to  close  in  shore. 

Raniire  lAght, — A  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern  on  a  post  25 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  at  Pentwater. 
This  light  is  visible  in  clear  weather  2  to  8  miles,  and  will  form  with  the  picrliead 
light  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the  pier  and  the  cours<^  for  entering  the  haibor. 

Life  Saving  Station  near  the  inner  end  of  north  pier. 

PETITE  POINTB  AU  SABLE  LIGHT-STATION.-. 

A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  white  flashes,  3d  order,  visible  18  miles. 
The  interval  between  flashes  is  30  seconds.  A  coast  light  on  Petite 
Pointe  au  Sable.  Red  tower,  100  feet  high,  connected  by  a  co\  ered  way 
with  red  dwelling.  Grande  Pointe  aa  Sable  light-house,  N.,  28^  miles. 
The  tower  and  dwelling  as  seen  from  the  lake  are  projected  against  a 
background  of  sand  hills,  partially  covered  with  light  timber. 

Beuona,  6^  miles  to  the  southward  of  Little  Point  au  Sable,  has  a 
pl3r  at  the  outlet  of  Stony  lake. 

WHITE  RIVER  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
varied  by  red  flashes,  4th  order,  visible  14  miles.  The  interval  between 
flashes  is  1  minute.  Yellow,  square  tower,  38  feet  high,  rising  from  the 
northwest  corner  of  yellow  dwelling.  A  coast  and  harbor  light  on  the 
south  bank  at  the  entrance  into  White  lake  and  river. 

Ignite  River  Pierhead  Beacon-liglit.— A  fixed  red  light, 
6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame  work  tower,  27  feet  high. 
Near  the  end  of  the  south  pier  at  the  entrance  to  White  lake.  Width 
between  piers,  200  feet.  The  south  pier  extends  250  feet  beyond  the 
north  pier.  The  shore  line  south  of  Little  Point  au  Sable  bears  N.  N.  W. 
The  harbor  improvements  consist  of  a  dredged  channel  connecting  the 
deep  water  in  White  lake  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan.  Tlie 
sides  of  the  channel  are  protected  with  piers  extending  W.  ^  S.  into  Lake 
Michigan.  As  now  constructed  the  north  pier  extends  450  feet  into  Lake 
Michigan,  and  the  south  pier  700  feet.  Depth  of  water,  last  summer  a 
channel  was  dredged  48  feet  wide  and  12  feet  deep. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  north  pier. 

Duclc  Lalce  is  2^  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  White  river. 

MUSKEGON  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th 
order,  visible  13  miles.  Lantern  on  white  frame  dwelling,  37  feet  high. 
A  coast  and  harbor  light  on  the  south  bank,  at  the  entrance  into  Muske- 
gon lake  and  river,  about  100  yards  from  lake  Michigan,  and  12J  miles 
to  the  northward  of  Grand  Haven. 

Muskegon  Pierliead  Beacon-liglit.— Atixed  red  light,  6th 
order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  27  feet  high. 
On  the  end  of  the  south  pier,  at  the  entrance  into  Muskegon  lake.  Width 
between  piers,  300  feet.  During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  fog-bell, 
struck  bv  macliinery,  is  sounded,  giving  one  blow  every  15  seconds, 
Grand  Haven  Pior  light,  S.  8.  E.  i  E.,  12^  miles.  The  shore  line  of  Duck 
lake  bears  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.  The  harbor  improvomonts  consist  of  rovtt 
ments  on  each  side  of  the  old  channel  connecting  Muskegon  lake  with  Lake 
Michigan,  and  the  prolongation  of  these  revetments  by  piers  extending 


LAKE   MIOHIOAN. 


171 


ito  Lake  Michigan.     Direction  of  piera,  S.  W.  by  W.     Formerly  the 

ridth  between  piers  was  200  feet,  but  in  1881  the  width  of  the  entrance 

ras  increased  to  300  feet  by  locating  the  extension  of  the  north  pier 

ibout  100  feet  further  to  the  north.     The  south  pier  from  the  outer  end 

Etends  straight  in;  the  north  pier  from  the  outer  end  is  parallel  to  the 

>uth  pier  for  a  distance  of  450  feet;  it  then  converges  towards  the 

}uth  pier  so  as  to  contract  the  width  between  the  piers  to  about  186 

feet. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  north  pier. 

Bangle   Light. — A  fixed  red  light  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern 
>n  a  post,  25  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.      On  the  outer  end  of  the 
kouth  pier.      This  light  will  be  visible  in  clear  weather  2  to  3  miles,  and 
rill  form  with  the  piei'head  light  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the 
Dier,  and  the  course  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Bank  Point.  Lake  Muskegon.— Black  can  buoy  in  12  feet 
yf  water.  Marks  the  extreme  point  of  the  shoal,  extending  three-fourths 
}f  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  Bank  point,  in  Lake  Muskegon,  and  also 
larks  the  turning  point  of  the  lake.  There  is  no  passageway  to  the 
lorthward  of  the  buoy.  Vessels  bound  to  Muskegon  will  steer  IL.  ^  S.  on 
leaving  the  cut  and  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  buoy,  then  haul  up  to 

E.  ^  N.  until  abreast  of  the  docks.  Entrance  to  the  out  bears  from 
Ithe  buoy  west  1|^  miles.     Good  anchorage  in  from  4  to  8  fathoms. 

Black  Lake,  or  the  Crimea,  is  4f  miles  S.  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  from 
[Muskegon.  There  are  two  slab  piers,  but  not  sufficient  water  to  enter. 
[Vessels  load  outside. 

The  shore  from  Big  Point  au  Sable  to  St.  Joseph  is  bold,  and  can 
[be  approached  at  any  place  to  within  2,000  feet. 

GBAND  HAVEN  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
I  light,  varied  by  white  flashes,  4th  order,  visible  15^  miles.  The  interval 
between  flashes  is  00  seconds.  White  tower,  24  feet  high,  attached  to 
I  dwelling,  lantern  black.  Light  70  feet  above  lake  level.  A  coast  and 
[harbor  light  on  the  bluff  at  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  into  Qrand 
i  Haven,  Michigan. 

Grand  Haven  Pierhead  Beacon-liffht.— A  fixed  white 

[light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.     White,  open  frame-work  tower,  26 

[feet  high;  3U0  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  at  the  entrance 

to  Grand  Haven.     Width  between  piers,   400  feet.     During  thick  or 

'  ^^SSY  weather  there  is  sounded  a  steam-siren,  giving  blasts  of  5  seconds 

at  intervals  of  30  seconds.     The  fog-signal  house  is  on  the  pier  adjoining 

■  and  inside  of  the  beacon.     Signal  in  duplicate.    Muskegon   Pier  Light, 

N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  12^  miles.    Kalamazoo  Pier  light,  S.  i  E.,  27^  miles. 

The  harbor  works  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  with  a  dredged  channel 

connecting  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan  with  the  deep  water  in  Grand 

river.     As  now  constructed  the  north  pier  projects  about   1,156  feet 

beyond  the  shore  line,  and  the  south  pier  about  1,350  feet.   The  shoalest 

water  on  the  bar  last  fall  was  14  feet,  by  keeping  near  the  south  pier  15 

to  16  feet  could  be  carried  in. 

Bange  Lights. — A  fixed  red  light  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern 
on  a  post,  26  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  On  the  outer  end  of  the 
south  pier.  This  light  will  be  visible  in  clear  weather  2  to  3  miles,  and 
will  form  with  the  pierhead  light  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the 
pier  and  the  course  fur  entering  the  harbor.     Grand  Haven;  is  the  bes^ 


■  ■ 

I'  ■- 


\ 


172 


LAKE   MIOHIOAir. 


harbor  on  the  east  shore  of  Lake  Michigan.  In  heavy  gales  from  the 
south  or  southwest  a  strong  current  sets  down  the  shore  and  across  the 
entrance,  and  the  same  in  heavy  gales  from  the  northwest  a  strong  cur 
rent  sets  to  the  south.  The  same  condition  is  noticeable  all  along  the 
east  shore.  In  such  cases  vessels  should  be  careful  to  keep  well  to  wind- 
ward. Grand  Haven  is  the  western  terminus  of  the  Detroit,  Grand 
Haven  &  Mil  wank  ie  R.  R.,  which  keeps  their  steamers  running  through- 
out th'^  year. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  north  pier  inside  the  shore  line. 

HOLLAND,  OR  BLACK  LAKE  PIERHEAD  BEA- 
OON-LIGHT.— A  fixed  red  li^ht,  visible  11^  miles,  5th  order  White, 
open  frame-work  tower,  27  feet  highi    Near  the  outer  end  of  the  south 


LAKH   MIOHIOAN. 


173 


de  the  shore  line. 


at  the  entrance  to  Black  lake,  Michigan.     Width  between  piers,  200 
»t.    Grand  Hayen  Pier  lights  N.  f  W.,  19|  miles.     Kalamaioo  Pier 
rht,  S.  ^  B.,  7f  miles.     The  harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  par- 
lel  piers,  with  a  dredged  channel  connecting  the  deep  water  in  Black 
\e  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan.     The  piers  extend  into  Lake 
[ichigan  about  700  feet  from  the  shore  line.     Direction  of  piers,  west, 
^epth  of  water,  on  the  bar  just  outside  the  piers  and  at  the  entrance, 
iere  are  12  feet,  but  between  the  piers  for  a  distance  of  800  feet  there 
only  6  feet.     A  cut  26  feet  wide  and  12  feet  deep  was  made  last  July 
but  it  filled  up  again  in  the  fall.     The  channel  has  been  dredged  out  fre- 
luentl  V,  but  owing  to  a  leakage  of  sand  through  the  piers,  and  that  blown 
kbout  by  the  winds  from  the  sand  hills,  the  depth  cannot  be  maintained. 
Raiif^e  Llg^ht. — Fixed  red  light,  tubular  lantern  suspended  on  a 
>st,  25  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.     On  outer  end  of  south  pier, 
id  forms  with  the  pierhead  light,  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the 
irbor  entrance. 
Life  Saving  Station  near  inner  end  of  south  pier. 
Pig^eon  Lake  is  9  miles  north  of  Hollana. 

KALAMAZOO     PIERHEAD      BEACON-LIGHT.—A 

ced  white  light,  6th  order,  visible  llf  miles.  White,  open  frame-work 
>wer,  27  feet  high.  Near  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier,  at  the  entrance 
>  Kalamazoo  river.  Width  between  piers,  225  feet.  Holland  Pier  light, 
r.  ^  W.,  7f  miles.  Chicago  main  light,  S.  W.  f  W.,  90  miles.  The  har- 
or  works  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  and  a  dredged  channel  between 
lem  connecting  Lake  Michigan  with  the  Kalamazoo  river.  The  south 
ier  extends  288  feet  beyond  the  north  pier.  The  direction  of  the  pier 
W.  by  S.  In  September,  last  there  was  a  narrow  channel  dredged 
>8S  the  outer  bar  12  feet  deep,  but  in  the  fall  there  was  scant  8  feet; 
le  best  water  was  on  a  line  with  the  south  pier  close-to. 

SOUTH    HAVEN  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A 

ed  red  light,  visible  11^  miles,  5th  order.  White,  open  frame-work 
>wer,  27  feet  high.  Near  the  outer  end  of  the  South  pier,  at  South 
kven,  entrance  of  South  Black  river.  Width  between  piers,  180  feet, 
je  north  pier  extends  60  feet  beyond  the  south  pier.  St.  Joseph  Pier 
iht,  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  22i  miles.  Chicago  main  light,  8.  W.  by  W.  f  W., 
ri  miles.     The  improvement  at  this  harbor  consists  of  two  parallel  piers, 

snding  from  the  mouth  of  South  Black  river  into  Lake  Michigan. 
Krection  of  piers,  W.  I  S.  On  the  bar  outside,  the  depth  of  water  last 
Wmer  was  12^  feet,  between  the  ends  of  the  piers  13  to  14  feet,  and 
^rther  up  not  more  than  10  feet.     The  Life  Saving  station  is  on  tho 

th  pier. 

Signal-Service  Station  on  lieht-houfje  reservation. 

Between  Soutli  Haven  and  St.  Joseph  tliere  are  several  piers  at  which  vessels  of 

lit  draught  can  load. 

ST.  JOSEPH  LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  white 

lies  at  intervals  of  90  seconds,  4th  order,  visible  1 7  miles.     Lantern  on  white  frame 

dling,  44  feet  high,  on  the  bluff  south  of  the  harbor  in  tho  city  of  St.  Joseph, 

Signal-Service  Station  400  yards  north  of  light-house. 

St.  Joseph  Pierhead  Beacon-llglit.— A  fixed  red  light,  Sth  order,  vis- 

•  Of  miles.    White,  open  frame-work  tower,  light  60  feet  above  lake  leveL    Near 

outer  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  St.  Joseph  river,  Michigan.  A 
f-bcll,  struck  by  machinery,  at  the  pierhead  light,  during  thick  and  foggy  weather 

give  1  stroke  at  intervals  of  80  seconds.     Width  between  piers,  240  feet.     Mich- 

I  City  Pier  light,  S.  W.  i  8. ,  84^  miles.    Kalamazoo  Pier  light,  N.  by  E.  |  E.,  41 

«.    Chicago  main  light,  W.  8.  W.  |  W.,  61  miles. 

The  harbor  improvement  consists  of  two  piers  connecting^St.  Joseph  river  with 
te  Michigan.    Direction  of  piers,  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.    Depth  of  water:    Last 


174 


LAKB   MICHIGAN. 


Jane,  on  tbe  bar  ontside  the  piers,  tbei^e  was  15  feet,  between  the  pien| 
and  to  the  ore  docks  16  feet,  and  theuce  to  Benton  harbor  18  feet.  Ig 
the  fall  not  more  than  13  feet  was  to  be  found  at  the  ent/anoe.     A  san 
bar  had  formed  at  the  break  in  the  north  pier.    The  Life  Saving  Station  I 
is  on  the  inner  end  of  the  north  pier.     Good  anohorago  off  tbe  piers  in  J 
fathoms  of  water. 


I  I 


^^KE    MICH/ 


GAN 


LAKE    MIGHIOAN. 


1T6 


Rangfe  Lig^ht* — Owing  to  the  formation  of  a  bar  ontside  of  the 
.  jth  pier,  the  fixed  red  tabular  lantern  range  light  shown  from  a  post 
^t  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  has  been  temporarily  dUeontinuea. 
Channel  Bu9y* — Blaclk  2G-foot  spar  buoy  marks  the  north  side 
the  channel,  at  the  end  of  the  shoal  making  out  from  the  north  pier, 
^erhead  light-house,  E.  f  N.,  360  yards.  The  red  buoy  has  been  removed 
>m  the  opposite  sid^^the  channel.  As  regards  the  depth  of  water  at 
lis  harbor,  no  reliabl^feprmation  can  be  given,  owing  to  sadden  f orma- 
ion  of  sand  depositlHjn  inside  and  outside  of  the  piers,  caused  by 
^eavy  gales.  ^^ 

The  Shore  from  St.  Joseph  to  Michigan  City  is  bold,  and  can  be 
Ipproacbed  to  within  2,000  feet,  except  for  a  short  distance  south  of  the 

lers  at  St.  Joseph,  where  a  shoal  extends  8,000  feet 
There  are  several  piers  between  St.  Joseph  and  Michigan  City.     At 
and  Marais,  8  miles;  Greenbush,  17|  miles;  Chickaming,  19  miles; 

Tilkinson,  20^  miles,  and  Union  22  miles,  all  of  which  bear  about  S.  S. 

r.  i  W.  from  St.  Joseph  beacon-light. 

New  Buffalo  is  0|  miles  N.  E.  by  E.  from  Michigan  City.  There 
no  light  at  New  Buffalo  and  the  harbor  is  not  available  for  commerce. 

MICHIGAN  CITY  MAIN  LIGHT.— A  fixed  white    light, 

lible  13f  miles,  5th  order,  tower  rising  from  yellow  brick  dwelling  34 

St  high.     Near  the  east  side  of  entrance  to  the  harbor.     Chicago  main 

|ght,  W.  N.  W.  f  W.,  38^  miles.    St.  Joseph  pierhead  light,  N.  E.  i  N., 

miles. 

Beacon  Lights. — A  fixed  red  light  near  the  outer  end  of  the 

sakwater  pier  and  a  fixed  white  light  near  the  inner  end  of  the  break- 

Iter  pier.    These  two  lights  form  a  ran^e  for  entering  the  harbor.     A 

ced  red  light  on  the  easterly  end   of  the  outer  breakwater,  and  a 


MioHioAK  crrr. 


17« 


LAKB   MIOHIOAN. 


\ 


fixed  white  light  on  the  outer  end  of  the  west  harbor  pier;  these  lighti 
are  all  shown  from  tubular  lanterns  suspended  on  masts.  They  are 
maintained  by  the  U.  S.  engineer  in  charge  of  the  harbor  works.  Tbe 
two  lights  on  the  breakwaterpier,  red  and  white,  are  320  feet  apart,  and 
bear  from  each  other  N.  by  W.  1  W.  and  S.  by  E.  f  E. 

Michigan  City  harbor  improvements  consist  of  an  inner  har- 
bor and  ail  outer  basin.  The  inner  harbor,  j||k  mouth  of  the  creek, 
has  been  widened  and  dredged.  The  uppaRp|bding  basin  is  com- 
pleted. Y%f' 

The  Outer  Basin. — A  jner  starts  from  the  shore  at  a  'point  \,4()0 
feet  east  of  the  entrance  to  the  inner  harbor  and  extends  about  N.  K.  if, 
into  the  lake  1,100  feet,  connecting  with  a  "breakwater"  which  runs  ir  4vV 
S.  W.  direction  to  within  200  feet  of  the  outer  end  of  the  west  pier,  from  »Li8 
point  a  pier  "called  the  breakwater  pier  which  is  now  conf-pieted, 
projects  into  the  lake  in  a  N.  by  W.  f  W.  direction  600  feet.  There 
IB  an  opening  between  the  inne '  end  of  the  breakwater  pier  and  tbe 
outer  end  of  the  old  eatit  pier  of  480  feet.  The  basin  eiiclosed  has  an 
area  3f  about  36  acres,  but  it  has  net  been  dredged  to  a  sufficient  depth 
to  be  of  much  service. 

Outer  Breakwater. — ^The  east  end  of  the  Outer  Breakwater 
begins  at  a  point  400  feet  W.  S.  W.  from  the  outer  end  of  the  break- 
waterpier, (600  feet  of  which  is  now  under  contract),  and  is  to  extend  in 
a  westerly  direction  1,000  feet  to  the  angle,  this  part  is  called  the  east 
arm,  thence  in  a  direction  about  S.  S.  W.  1,000  feet  to  wi  lin  460  feet  of 
the  18-foot  curve  of  the  shore,  this  part  will  be  known  as  he  west  arm. 
If  completed  as  proposed  it  will  afford  an  area  of  protection  against 
northerly  winds  of  about  30  acres.  Entering  the  harbor  run  straight 
in,  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  keeping  a  look  out  for  tbe  end  of  the  west  harbor 

?ier.    There  is  good  anchorage  off  the  harbor  in  from  6  to  8  fatbomB. 
he  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  old  east  pier  near  the  shore  line. 

The  Shore  around  the  south  end  of  the  lake  as  far  as  the  Calu- 
met is  bold,  with  the  exception  of  two  18-foot  spots,  which  bear  S.  £. 
by  £.  f  E.  from  the  Calumet  Pierhead  light,  6^  milas. 


Stamhng  North  Along  the   West  Shore  of  Lake  Michigan. 

Calumet  Pierhead  Beacqn-Llght.— A  fixed  red  light,  4th 

order,  visible  1  If  miles.  .Gray,  open  framework  tower,  30  feet  liigh. 
An  elevated  walk  along  the  pier  to  the  shore.  On  the  outer  end  of  the 
north  pier  at  the  entrance  to  the  Calumet  river,  11  miles  to  the  south- 
eastward of  the  Chicago  breakwater.  Chicago  Water  Works  crib,  K. 
by  W.  \  W.,  12^  miles.  Michigan  city  harbor  piera  E.  \  N.,  32^  miles. 
The  harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  parallel  piers,  300  feet 
apart,  projecting  from  the  shore  in  a  N.  E.  by  E.  direction  into  Lake 
Miohigan.  The  north  pier  is  8,640  feet  in  length  and  projects  1,320 
fefl'.<  Trom  the  shore  line;  the  south  pier  is  2,020  feet  in  length  and  pro- 
jects about  1,600  feet  into  the  lake  from  the  C.  and  C.  C.  and  D.  Co's. 
breakwater.  The  north  pier  extends  into  the  lake  1,600  feet  beyond  the 
south  pier.  Depth  of  water:  Last  July,  the  channel  was  dredged 
to  10  feet,  but  in  the  fall  not  more  than  16  feet  could  be  carried  to  tha 


MICHIGAN. 


177 


bor  pier;  these  lighu 
on  masts.  They  art 
B  harbor  works.  Tbe 
are  320  feet  apart,  and 
fE. 

isist  of  an  inner  har- 
.mouth  of  the  creek, 
nding  basin  is  con- 

shore  at  a  '^oint  1,400 
:tend8  about  N.  N.  W, 
ter"  which  runs  ir  avV 
the  west  pier,  from  tbis 
3h  is  now  conr.pieted, 
tion  600  feet.  There 
akwater  nier  and  the 
»asin  e&cfosed  has  an 
i  to  a  sufficient  depth 

he  Outer  Breakwater 
;er  end  of  the  break- 
it),  and  is  to  extend  in 
art  is  oalled  the  east 
b  to  wi  in  450  feet  of 
own  as  che  west  am. 
of  proteoticn  against 

!)  harbor  run  straight 
d  of  the  w&f>t  harbor 
Tom  6  to  8  fathoms. 
ear  the  shore  line. 

as  far  as  the  Calu- 
ts,  which  bear  S.  £. 

38. 


f  Lake  Michigan, 

\  fixed  red  Mgbt,  4th 
tower,  30  feet  liigh. 
the  outer  end  of  the 
1 1  miles  to  the  south- 
ater  Works  crib,  K. 
rd  B.  i  N.,  32^  miles. 
allel  piers,  SCO  feet 
direction  into  Lake 
and  projects  1,320 
et  in  length  and  pro- 
id  C.  C.  and  D.  Co's. 
1,600  feet  beyond  the 
lannel  was  dredged 
uld  be  canned  to  tho 


lling  Mills  slip,  which  is  2,800  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier. 
le  Life  Saviiag  Station  is  inside  the  piers  on  the  north  side  of  the  river. 


OALUHBT. 

Clark's  Point  Shoal  (off  Calumet).— Red  spar  buoy,  in  18 
Bt  of  water.  Marks  the  east  side  of  Rocky  reef.  If  miles  from  Cain- 
Pier  ligbt,  and  by  keeping  300  feet  outside  of  this  buoy,  and  head- 
200  yards  east  of  pier  light,  no  less  than  18  feet  of  water  will  be 
id.  No  vessel  should  attempt  to  pass  between  this  buoy  and  the 
re.     Calumet  Pier  light,  S.  f  E.,  If  miles. 

South  Park  Shoal* — Red  and  black  horizontal  sl^ripes,  2d-clasB 
I  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  east  end  of  the  11-foot  shoal  off 
ith  Park.  This  shoal  is  nearly  2  miles  from  the  beach,  and  inside 
it  and  the  Hyde  Park  buoy  there  is  a  channel  f  of  a  mile  wide. 
ssels  using  it  must  keep  half  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  buoys, 
[timet  Pier  light,  S.  by  £.  f  E.,  4^  miles.  Chicago  Pier  light,  N.  W. 
*l\  miles. 

Hyde  Park  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  8d-claM 
buoy  in  18  feet  of  wa^er.     Marks  the  east  side  of  a  small  16-foot 
\  off  Hyde  Pane,  111.,  2  miles  from  the  beach.     Calumet  Pier  light, 
[by  E.  i  E.,  6i  miles.     Chicago  Pier  light,  N.  W.  f  N.,  6^  miles. 

Morgan's  Point.— Black,  16-foot  spar  buoy  in  11  feet  of  water. 

rks  the  west  side  of  a  small  6-foot  shoal  outside  the  wharves  at  Hyda 
krk,  111.  Small  vessels  keeping  close  to  the  shore,  between  Chioaso 
4  South  Chicago,  shouldpass  between  it  and  the  shore.  Chicago  Pier 
^ht-station,  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  6^  miles. 

}hioagr<>  Breakwater  Beaoon-liipht  (south).— A  fixed  red 
6th  order,  visible  10  miles.    .White,  open  frame-work  toweri  80 


178 


LAKB  MIOHIOAir. 


feet  high.     On  the  north  side  of  the  southern  opening  in  the  breakvau 
forming  the  outer   harbor  of  Chicago.    The   breakwater    commenwii 
on  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  into  the  Chicago  river^and.  ^xtw^rTl 
-••<»4<'>fii«»J*r^S-7«r!}srSii<r'^aB  an  opening  260  yards  4Tl«w!3th,  83  yardj 
.y*  from  its  southern  end,  where  it  turns  toward  the  shore,  extending  68i  f 

yards  in  a  S.  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  direction,  protecting  the  harbor  from  souti 
easterly  gales.  There  ic  also  an  entrance,  260  yards  wide,  from  the  river 
into  the  harbor  on  its  nci  .  .     The  area  enclosed  is  465  acres,  be. 

tween  the  dock  line  (which  .^  _,i/00  feet  west  of  the  breakwater  and  par 
allel  to  it)  and  the  breakwater  there  is  an  area  of  270  acres,  which  iii 
dredged  to  a  depth  of  16  feet.  To  enter  the  harbor  from  the  southward 
bring  the  southern  breakwater  light  to  bear  west,  or  nearly  so,  and  steer  I 
in  through  the  opening,  and  as  you  pass  the  beacon  haul  up  to  the  north- 
ward for  an  anchorage  close  to  the  breakwater.  Chicago  light-house,  N, 
by  W.  f  W.,  seven-eighths  of  a  mile.     . 

Chicago  Breakwater  Beacon-light  (north).— A  fixed  I 

white  light,  lens  lantern,  visible  6  mile.  Shown  from  a  white  post,  1} 
feet  high.  On  the  northeast  angle  of  the  breakwater,  and  the  south  side 
of  the  entrance  into  the  harbor.  A  guide  into  the  river.  Chicago  light- 
house, W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  404  yards.  ' 

ChlCBffO  Pierhead  Beacon-lilKht.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th  order,  tj»  I 
ible  12  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  27  feet  high.  About  40  feet  from  the 
end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  entrance  into  the  Chicago  river.  The  width  between  tht 
piers  at  the  entrance  into  the  river  is  about  500  feet,  and  narrows  as  you  ascend  the 
river.  The  north  pier  extends  out  into  the  lake  beyond  the  breakwater  about  201) 
yards.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather,  there  is  sounded  a  fog-bell,  struck  by 
machinery  at  intervals  of  20  seconds,  double  and  single  blows  alternately.  Directioi 
of  piers,  east.  Chicago  light  house,  W.  f  8. ,  525  yards.  Chicago  Water-workj  | 
crib,  N.  E.  \  N.,  2,900  yards.  Southeast  end  of  outer  breakwater,  N.  E.  by  E.  JE„ 
1,717  yards. 

Range  lilcht. — A  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern  on  a  post  8(1 
feet  above  the  lake  level.    On  outer  end  of  the  north  pier.    This  light  will  form  I 
with  the  pierhead  light  a  range  showing  the  direction  of  the  pier,  and  the  course  for  | 
entering  the  harbor. 

CHICAGO  lilGHT-STATION.—A  fixed  white  light,  3d  order,  I 
visible  16^  miles.  Black  iron-pile  tower,  72  feet  high,  connected  by  a  I 
covered  way  with  a  gray  frame  dwelling.  A  coast  and  harbor  light  od 
the  inner  pier  at  the  north  side  of  entrance  to  the  Chicago  river.  Mich- 
igan City  light-house,  E.  S.  £.  f  E.,  38i  miles.  Chicago  Water-worla 
crib,  N.  E.  ^  N.,  2  miles.  Entering  the  harbor  this  light  in  range  with 
the  pierhead  light  W.  \  S.  leads  to  the  end  of  the  north  pier;  16  feet  can  | 
be  carried  in  at  the  ordinary  stage  of  water. 

The  Harbor  Improvements  at  Chicago  consist  of  an  enter  j 
harbor  adjoining  the  entrance  to  the  Chicago  river,  on  the  south  side; 
and  a  harbor  of  refuge,  protected  by  the  new  breakwater,  affording  good  I 
anchorage  in  deep  water,  and  safe  access  to  the  outer  harbor  and  month  | 
of  the  ri  er. 

f  The   New    Breakwater,  nowpractioally  completed  is  about 

midway  between  the  Chicago  Water  Works  Inlet  crib  and  the  outei 
end  of  the  north  harbor  pier.  Commencing  at  a  point  4,968  feet  N.  f  W. 
from  the  Chicago  Pierhead  Beacon  light  in  about  21  feet  of  water,  nit 
projected  in  a  S.  E.  by  E.  f  E.  direction  6,436  feet,  and  terminates  in  39 
leet  of  water.  The  outer  end  bears  from  the  Pierhead  Beacon  ligbt  N< 
£.  bv  E.  I  £.,  6,200  feet,  or  abont  1  mile.  '  From  the  outer  end  of  thej 
breakwater  the  Water  Works  Inlet  orib  bears  N.  f  E.,  4,860  feet.    Mak- 


I 


LAKE    MIOHIOAH. 


179 


-  '.^^••^ 


•KMII»im««Vll»A«»  «w 


CHICAGO. 


ig  the  harbor  from  the  north  and  east,  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  Water- 
rorks  crib,  keeping  nothing  to  the  west  of  south  until  the  North  Pier- 
lead  beacon  bears  W.  S.  VV.,  and  then  ran  for  the  entrance.     Approach- 

Rng  along  the  land  from  the  northward  and  intending  to  pass  between 
the  western  end  of  the  breakwater  and  the  shore,  bring  the  North  Pier< 
lead  beacon  to  bear  S.  by  E.  and  run  through  on  that  course. 

Outer  Breakw^ater  Llcht.— The  Light-house  establishment  is  erecting  a 
ight  bouse  on  a  crib  60  feet  inside  the  outer  end  of  the  breakwater,  to  be  completed 
a  1892.  It  will  be  a  3d-order,  red  and  white  flash,  interval  between  flashes,  10  seconds. 
?endin^  its  completion,  it  will  be  marked  by  two  lights  shown  vertically,  red  above 
rhite,  from  tubular  lanterns  on  a  post  about  35  feet  above  the  lake  level  at  the  outer 
nd  of  the  breakwater,  and  a  fixed  white  light  shown  from  a  lens  lantern  on  a  post 
kt  the  inner  end  of  the  breakwater. 

Chicago  Water-iYorks  Crib. — A  fixed  white  light  on  the 

[Water-works  crib,  4,350  feet  N.  i  E.,  from  east  end  of  outer.breakwater. 

[During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  bell  is  struck  by  machinery  about  IS 

[times  every  minute.    The  station  is  maintained  by  the  city  of  Chicago. 

Chicago  Inshore  Water  Works  Crib.— A  fixed  blue  elec- 
Itric  light.  White  lantern  on  browc  irame-work  tower  on  stone  crib.  On 
[auxiliary  Water-works  crib,  700  fef'u  from  shore,  and  3,000  feet  S.  W. 
|by  W.  i  W.  from  inner,  or  westiirly  end  of  outer  breakwater.  In  foggy 
for  thick  weather  a  bell  is  struck  by  machinery  8  times  every  minute. 
|This  station  is  maintained  by  the  city  of  Chicago. 

The  New  Water-works  Crib  for  the  new  tunnel  south  of  the 
larbor  piers  have  been  placed  as  follows: 

The  Outer  orib  has  been  placed  at  a  point  4  miles  due  east  from  Peck 
>urt,  and  will  bear  E.  by  S.  f  8.,  about  3^  miles,  from  the  Pierhead 
saoon-light.  The  Middle  orib  has  been  placed  at  a  point  about  800  feet 
»uth  of  a  point  2^  miles  due  east  of  Peck  court  and  in  line  with  the 


180 


LAKE   mOHIOAN. 


Oater  crib  and  Park  row,  and  will  bear  S.  E.  f  B.  about  2^  milea  from 
the  Pierhead  beaoon-light.  Both  cribs  will  be  lighted  by  fixed  white  lan- 
tern lights  placed  aloft,  and  also  by  the  lights  used  to  carry  on  the  work. 
Chicago  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  south  harbor  pier,  opposite  the 
main  light. 

GBOSSE  POINTE  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
varied  by  red  flashes,  visible  18^  miles,  2d  order.  The  interval  between 
flashes  is  3  minutes.  Tellow  tower,  99  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered 
way  with  brick  dwelling.  A  coast-light  on  Grosse  Pointe,  12^  miles  from 
the  Chicago  light-house.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  10-inch 
steam  whistle  will  sound  blasts  of  6  seconds  at  intervals  of  20  and  4o 
seconds.  Focal  plane  119^  feet  above  lake  level.  Chicago  light-hoase, 
S.  by  E.  f  E.,  12^  miles.    Waukegan  light-house,  N.N.  W.  i  W.,  2 If  miles. 

Evanston  is  pleasantly  situated  on  Grosse  Pointe.  It  has  two  pile 
piers,  with  from  10  to  11  feet  of  water  at  each. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  Northwestern  University  grounds. 

Highland  Park,  lO  miles  north  of  Gross.'  Pointe,  on  the  North- 
western Railroad,  has  a  pier  extending  1,000  feet  into  the  lake  in  an 
easterly  direction;  14  to  16  feet  of  water. 

WAUKEGAN  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  14  miles,  6th  order.  White  tower,  rising  from  frame  dwelling, 
86  feet  high.  On  the  bluff,  south  side  of  Little  Fort  river,  in  the  town 
of  Waukegan,  Illinois,  ab«^ut  300  yards  from  the  beach.  There  is  good 
anchorage  in  4  fathoms  northeast  from  the  outer  end  of  the  old  pile  pier. 
The  point  north  of  Waukegan  protects  the  anchorage  from  northwest 
winds. 

Wauke^'^an  Harbor  works  in  process.  The  works  are  located 
a  little  north  of  the  old  pile  pier.  The  project  is  to  enclose  a  small  basin 
by  projecting  piers  into  the  lake,  and  obtaining  additional  room  by 
dredging  a  channel  from  the  basin  through  the  low  ground  between  the 
lake  and  bluffs.  The  south  pier,  as  now  constructed  is  900  feet  long  and 
extends  into  the  lake  £.  ^  N.  The  north  pier  extends  into  the  lake  530 
feet  from  the  angle,  direction  E.  by  S.  -^  S.,  thence  E.  ^  N.  392  feet. 
The  north  pier  extends  200  feet  beyond  the  south  pier.  Width  between 
the  outer  ends  of  the  piers  220  feet.  In  consequence  of  the  large  deposit 
of  sand  in  the  vicinity  of  the  harbor  it  wiU  be  difficult  to  maintain 
any  considerable  depth  of  water. 

KENOSHA,  OR  SOUTHPORT  LIGHT-STATION.- 

A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  white  flashes;  the  interval  between  flashes 
is  90  seconds,  4th  order,  visible  lef  miles.  Yellow  tower,  66  feet  high; 
yellow  dwelling  detached.  A  coast  and  harbor  light  on  the  north  side 
of  the  entrance  to  Kenosha  harbor,  about  100  jrards  from  the  beach,  and 
10  miles  to  the  southward  of  Racine,  Wind  Point  (Racine  Point)  light- 
house, N.  f  E.,  13f  miles. 

Kenosha  Pierhead  Beacon-light.— A  fixed  red  light,  6th 
order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  30  feet  high. 
Near  the  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  Kenosha  harbor.  Width 
between  the  piers,  170  feet. 

The  harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  parallel  piers,  extend- 
ing into  the  lake  E.  |  N.,  with  a  dredged  channel  between  them,  con- 
necting Pike  creek  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan.  As  now  con- 
structed the  north  pier  extends  2*70  feet  into  the  lake  beyond  the  south 


LAKE   MICH  lO AH. 


181 


about  2^  miles  from 
id  by  fixed  white  Ian- 
to  carry  on  the  work, 
bor  pier,  opposite  tlie 

• — A  fixed  white  light 
rhe  interval  between 
anected  by  a  covered 
Dinte,12i  miles  from 
J  weather  a  10-inch 
ervals  of  20  and  4o 
Chicago  light-house 
'.W.iW.,21f  miles.' 
inte.  It  has  two  pile 

CTniversity  grounds. 
ointe,  on  the  North- 
into  the  lake  in  an 

fixed  white  light, 
m   frame  dwelling,' 

river,  in  the  town 
oh.    There  is  good 

of  the  old  pile  pier. 
ge  from  northwest 

e  works  are  located 
Qclose  a  small  basin 
dditional  room  by 
round  between  the 
is  900  feet  long  and 
Is  into  the  lake  530 

E.  i  N.  892  feet. 

.  Width  between 
)f  the  large  deposit 
ifiicult  to  maintain 

T-STATION.- 

val  between  fiashes 
wer,  66  feet  high; 
t  on  the  north  side 
'om  the  beach,  and 
loine  Point)  light- 

ixed  red  light,  eth 
wer,  80  feet  high. 
«ha  harbor.  Width 


pier.  Depth  of  water. — Last  Aogust,  in  mid-channel  there  was  more 
than  14  feet,  but  in  the  fall  not  more  than  11  feet  could  be  carried  in. 
The  Life  Saving  Station  is  a  little  inside  the  inner  end  of  the  north  pier. 


BAOINE  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th  order, 

^visible  18:^  miles.  Tellow  tower,  36  feet  high,  rising  from  brick  dwelling. 

'  On  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  into  Root  river,  Racine,  about  210  yards 

inside  of  the  outer  end  of  the  pier.      This  light  kept  open  to  the  north- 


182 


LAKB   MIOHIQAN. 


ward  of  Pierhead  light  insures  clearing  Raoine  reef.     Wind  Point 
(Raoine  Point)  light-house,  N.  by  E.  i  E.,  3f  miles. 

Racine  Pierhoad  Beacon-light.— A  fixed  red  light,  6th 
erder,  visible  Similes.  White,  open  framc-^rork  tower,  80  feet  high. 
Near  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  entrance  into  Racine  bar* 
bor.  Width  between  the  piers,  270  feet.  Main  light  bears  W.  i  S.  650 
feet. 

Racine  Harbor. — The  improvements  consist  of  two  piers  and 
a  dredged  channel  between  them,  connecting  the  mouth  of  Root  river 
with  the  deep  water  of  Lake  Michigan.  The  north  pier  as  now  con- 
structed extends  50  feet  farther  into  the  lake  than  the  south  pier, 
Direction  of  piers  E.  by  N.  The  two  lights  in  range  lead  to  the  end 
of  the  north  pier,  and  is  a  guide  to  enter  the  harbor  at  night.  Depth 
of  water:  Owing  to  the  formation  of  sand  bars  at  the  outer  ends  of 
the  piers  no  reliable  information  can  be  given.  The  Life  Saving  Station 
is  inside  the  harbor. 

Racine  Reef. — Red,  Ist-class  can  buoy,  in  17  feet  of  water.  On 
the  westerly  edge  of  Racine  reef,  and  about  500  yards  8.  W.  hj  W.  from 
its  shoalest  spot,  which  lies  E.  by  S.,  1^  miles  from  Racine  light-house. 
The  reef  extends  in  an  E.  N.  E.  and  W.  S.  W.  direction  about  five-eighths 
of  a  mile,  and  north  and  south  about  three-eighths  of  a  mile,  with  8  feet 
of  water  on  its  shoalest  part.  The  channel  between  the  reef  and  the 
city  has  a  depth  of  water  from  3  to  6  fathoms;  sand  and  clay.  Racine 
Pier  light,  W.  N.  W.  f  W.,  If  miles.  Wind  Point  light-house  (Racine 
Point),  N.  by  W.,  3 J  miles.  This  reef  is  covered  by  a  red  light,  dis- 
played from  the  watch  room  in  the  tower  at  Wind  Point  light-station. 

Racine  Reef,  East  End. — Red  sjpar  buoy,  25  feet  long,  in  18 
feet  of  water.  Marks  the  eastern  point  of  Racine  reef,  least  depth  of 
water  between  the  buoys  is  8  feet.  Racine  Pierhead  light,  W.  f  N.,  2J 
miles.     Wind  Point  light,  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  3f  miles. 

WIND  POINT.  OR  RACINE  POINT,  LIGHT-STA- 
TION.— A  flashing  white  light,  3d  order,  visible  18  miles;  interval  be- 
tween flashes,  30  seconds.  In  addition  to  the  3d-order  light  there  ia  dis- 
plaved  from  the  watch-room  window  of  the  same  tower,  immediately 
under  the  main  light,  a  small  fixed  bbd  light  of  the  6th  order,  with  an 
arc  of  illumination  covering  Racine  reef,  a  dangerous  ledge  of  rocks, 
lying  8.  by  E.  i  E.,  4  miles  distant  from  the  light-house.  This  red  light 
is  visible  between  the  bearings  N.  ^  W.  and  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  from  pea- 
ward.  Yellow  tower,  102  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with 
brick  dwelling,  both  yellow.  On  Wind  Point,  3^  miles  north  of  Kacine 
light,  Wisconsin.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather,  there  is  sounded  at 
this  station  a  10-inoh  steam  fog-whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  3  seconds,  fol- 
lowed by  an  interval  of  26  seconds;  then  a  blast  of  6  seconds,  fol- 
lowed by  an  interval  of  26  seconds.  Milwaukee  (North  point)  light- 
house, N.  by  W.  J  W.,  20^  miles.  Grosse  Pointe  light-house,  8.  i  E.,  60^ 
miles. 

Milwaukee  Pierhead  Beacon-light.~A  fixed  red  light, 
4th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  32  feet 
high.     On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  into  Milwao- 


LAKE   MIOHIQAN. 


IPS 


kee  river.  Width  between  piers,  286  feet.  During  thick  or  foggy 
weather,  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded,  giving  blasts  of  5  seconds  at  inter- 
vals of  55  seconds.  The  fog-signal  house  is  on  the  pier,  inside  of  and 
adjoining  the  beacon-light.  The  keeper's  dwelling,  with  the  tower  of 
the  old  discontinued  light  attached,  both  built  of  Milwaukee  brick,  is  on 
the  north  pier,  inside  of  the  Pierhead  light.  Milwaukee  light-house,  N. 
by  E.  f  E.,  3  miles. 

Milwaukee  Harbor. — This  improvement  consists  of  two  par- 
allel piers  and  a  dredged  channel  between  them,  known  as  the  "North 
cut,"  connecting  the  deep  water  in  Milwaukee  river  with  the  deep  water 
in  Milwaukee  bay.  The  piers  are  of  equal  length,  about  1,800  feet. 
Direction,  L.  4r  N.  Depth  of  water:  The  channel  between  the  piers  for 
a  width  of  100  feet,  is  16  feet  deep.  The  Life  Saving  Station  is  near  the 
inner  end  of  the  south  pier. 

Harbor  of  Refugee,  in  Milwaukee  bay,  in  process  of  constrac- 
tion.  The  project  is  to  construct  a  breakwater,  the  north  arm  of  which 
commences  near  North  j- jint  at  a  distance  of  about  600  feet  from  the 
north  shore  of  the  bay,  in  a  depth  of  8  feet  of  water,  and  extends  S.  S.  E. 
I  E.,  2,460  feet  to  the  north  angle.  From  this  point  the  direction  of 
the  main  arm  of  the  breakwater  is  changed  to  S.  ^  W.  for  the  proposed 
distance  of  5,200  feet,  with  an  opening  of  400  feet  at  a  distance  of  1,000 
feet  from  the  angle  to  provide  a  fair  weather  entrance  and  exit  for 
vessels. 

Present  Condition  of  the  Work.— The  north  arm  of  the 
breakwater,  2,450  feet  is  completed,  and  1,U00  feet  of  the  main  arm  of 
the  breakwater  to  the  40Q  feet  opening  is  completed,  and  the  main  arm 
south  of  the  400  feet  opening  has  been  extended.  400  feet.  A  light-ship; 
painted  red,  is  anchored  at  the  south  end  of  the  unfinished  breakwater, 
just  inside  with  room  to  swing.  A  red  and  white  light  is  shown  verti- 
cally, white  above  red. 

Depth  of  water:  The  18-foot  curve  of  the  bottom  extends  from 
about  the  middle  of  the  north  arm  of  the  breakwater  to  the  outer  end  of 
the  harbor  piers,  and  about  a  uniform  distance  from  the  shore,  nearly 


MILWAUKKK. 


184 


LAKB   MIOHIGAN. 


[     ^ 


2,000  feet.  The  average  depth  alonq  the  south  arm  of  the  breakwater 
is  84  feet  From  the  south  end  of  the  breakwater,  as  it  now  exists,  to 
the  east  end  of  the  harbor  piers  is  7,200  feet,  bearing  S.  W.  by  S.  f  s! 

Dangers,— About  4  miles  southeast  from  Milwaukee  Pierhead 
light  there  are  shoal  spots  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  shore,  with  from 
13  to  16  feet  of  water  over  them.  A  O-fcot  spot  lies  half  a  mile  east 
from  Fox  point,  7  miles  north  of  Milwaukee  light,  and  a  14-foot  spot 
two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  shore,  3^  miles  north  of  Fox  point.  With  the 
above  exceptions  the  shore  in  the  vicinity  of  Milwaukee  bay  is  bold,  and 
can  be  approached  within  half  a  mile  from  shore.  There  is  no  reef  off 
Milwaukee  North  point. 

MILWAUKEE  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
varied  by  white  flashes,  at  intervals  of  2  minutes,  4th  order,  visible  18| 
miles.  Brown  tow^,  28  feet  high,  attached  to  white  frame  dwelling, 
light  122  feet  above  lake  level.  A  coast-light,  on  the  extreme  north 
point  of  Milwaukee  bay,  3  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  entrance  into 
the  harbor.  Milwaukee  Pier  light,  8.  by  W.  f  W.,  3  miles.  Wind  Point 
(Racine  Point)  light-house,  S.  by  E.  }  £.,  2o|  miles. 

TJlaOy  4f  miles  south  of  Port  Washington,  has  a  pile  pier.  South 
of  the  pier  there  are  shoal  spots  with  11  feet  over  them  half  a  mile  from 
shore,  and  a  9-foot  spot  600  feet  east  from  the  pier. 

PORT  WASHINGTON  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  18^  miles,  4th  order.  Lantern  on  yellow  brick  dwelling, 
40  feet  high.  A  coast-light,  on  the  bluff  in  the  north  part  of  the  town 
of  Port  Washington,  about  23  miles  to  the  northward  of  Milwaukee,  and 
27^  miles  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Sheboygan. 

Port  Washington  Pierhead  Beacon-ligrht.— A  fixed  red 
light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  lan- 
tern black  with  brown  parapet,  upper  part  of  tower  inclosed  for  a  watch 
room.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor 
of  Port  Washington.  Milwaukee  North  point,  S.  ^  E.,  23  miles.  Little 
Point  Sable  light,  E.  N.  E.,  70  miles. 

Port  Washington  Harbor. — This  improvement  consists  of 
two  parallel  piers,  about  160  feet  apart,  extending  from  the  shore  line 
into  14  feet  of  water.  The  north  pier  is  920  feet  long,  and  extends 
100  feet  beyond  the  south  pier.  Together  with  the  formation  of  two 
interior  basins,  with  an  area  of  2f  and  3  acres  respectively.  Depth  of 
water:  In  September,  1889,  there  was  a  channel  76  feet  wiJe  and  12 
feet  deep  adjacent  to  the  north  pier,  and  a  navigable  channel  of  the  same 
depth  on  the  east  and  west  sides  of  the  north  basin,  and  the  north  side  of 
the  west  basin.  Along  the  south  pier,  for  about  60  feet  therefrom,  the 
depth  is  from  6  to  8  feet.  Boulders  and  parts  of  a  wreck  make  it  dan- 
gerous near  the  south  pier. 

Rouksville,  lOJ^  miles,  and  Amsterdam,  12i  miles,  north  of  Port 
Washington,  have  pile  piers  extending  into  deep  water. 

The  shore  from  Ulao  to  Sheboygan  is  bold,  and  can  be  approached  at 
any  place  within  one-third  to  half  a  mile. 

Sheboygan  Pierhead  Beacon-Light.— A  fixed  red  light, 
6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  26  feothigh. 
On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  entrance  to  the  Sheboygan 
river,  about  60  miles  to  the  northward  of  Milwaukee.  Width  between 
piers,  256  feet.     Sheboygan  light-house,  N.  f  E.,  1  mile. 


LAKE   MIOHIOAN. 


186 


L  arm  of  the  breakwater 
ter,  as  it  now  existg,  to 
A'ing  S.  W.  by  S.  f  S. 

a  Milwaukee  Pierhead 
e  from  shore,  with  from 
»ot  lies  half  a  mile  east 
wht,  and  a  14-foot  spot 
if  Fox  point.  With  the 
waukee  bay  is  bold,  and 
e.     There  is  no  reef  off 

— A  fixed  white  light, 
8,  4th  order,  visible  18| 
'  white  frame  dwelling, 
t,  on  the  extreme  north 
ird  of  the  entrance  into 
''.,  3  miles.  Wind  Point 
iles. 

has  a  pile  pier.  South 
ir  them  half  a  mile  from 
ier. 

LTION.— A  fixed  white 
I  yellow  brick  dwelling, 
north  part  of  the  town 
ward  of  Milwaukee,  and 
sboygan. 

►n-light.— A  fixed  red 
frame-work  tower,  Ian- 
iv^er  inclosed  for  a  watoh 
e  entrance  to  the  harbor 
}.  ^  E.,  23  miles.     Little 

aprovemont  consists  of 
ag  from  the  shore  line 
feet  long,  and  extends 
1  the  formation  of  two 
•espectively.  Depth  of 
el  76  feet  wi3e  and  12 
able  channel  of  the  same 
in,  and  the  north  side  of 
60  feet  therefrom,  the 
a  wreck  make  it  dan- 

2i  miles,  north  of  Port 
water, 
id  can  be  approached  at 

it. — A  fixed  red  light, 
irork  tower,  26  feet  high 
ance  to  the  Sheboygan 
nkee.  Width  between 
1  mile. 


The  Harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  piers  conneotinjf  the 
mouth  of  the  Sheboygan  river  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan, 
and  a  dredged  channel  between  them,  and  deepening  the  river  inside  the 

{>ier8.  The  north  pier  projects  1,725  feet  into  the  lake  from  the  shore 
ine,  and  60  feet  beyond  the  south  pier.  As  regards  the  depth  of  water 
in  the  channel,  no  reliable  information  can  be  given.  The  Life  Saving 
Station  is  in  the  harbor  on  the  east  side.  Direction  of  the  piers,  east, 
their  width  increases  from  190  feet  at  the  shore  line  to  256  at  their  outer 
ends. 

Sheboygan  Reef  (south  end). — Red,  3d  class  can  buoy  in  24 
feet  of  water.     Off  the  south  end  of  Sheboygan  reef,  the  center  of  which 

i  lies  N.  E.  I  N.,  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  from  Sheboygan  Pier  light.   The 

'reef  is 600  yards  in  extent,  north  and  south,  with  7  feet  of  water  on  its 
shoalest  part.  There  is  a  narrow  passage-way  about  300  yards  wide,  between 
the  reef  and  the  land,  but  this  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers. 

[Sheboygan  Pier  light,  S.  W.  f  W.,  1,400  yards.    Sheboygan  light-house, 

i  N,  W.  f  N.,  five-eighths  of  a  mile. 

Sheboygan  Beef  (north  end).— Bed,  3d  class  can  buoy  in  24 
feet  of  water.  Off  the  northeast  end  of  Sheboygan  reef.  Least  depth 
;  of  water  between  the  buoys,  7  feet.  Sheboygan  light-house,  W.  N.  W. 
i^  W.,  800  yards. 

SHEBOYGAN    IiIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  li^ht, 
[6th  order,  visible  16  miles.     Lantern  on  white  dwelling,  34  feet  high. 
On  a  point  1  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  entrance  into  Sheboygan  river, 
[Wisconsin. 

liinzvillo,  8^  miles  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  Sheboygan  light,  has  a 
[pile  pier  extending  into  deep  water. 

Gentervine,  lOj  miles  N.  by  W.  from  Sheboygan  light,  has  two 
[pile  piers. 

Yorkville,  12|  miles  N.  f  W.  from  Sheboygan  I'^ht,  has  two  pile 
Lpiers. 

Nordheim,  16f  miles  N.  ^  W.  from  Sheboygan  light,  has  two 
[pile  piers. 

There  are  many  shoals  and  rooky  spots  along  the  shore,  from  Sheboy- 
in  to  the  south  point  of  Manitowoc  bay,  rendering  navigation  dangerous 
rithin  three-fourths  to  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  from  shore,  particularly 
in  the  vicinity  of  Yorkville  and  Centerville.     Outside  in  from  4  to  6 
Fathoms  the  bottom  is  generally  clay  with  a  light  covering  of  sand, 

MANITOWOC  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed 

red  light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  29 
feet  high.     Near  the  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  into  Manito- 

roo  river.  Width  between  piers,  250  feet.  The  old  light-house  is  in 
khe  town  of  Manitowoc,  near  the  inner  end  of  the  north  pier.  A  bell  is 
Itruck  by  machinery,  two  blows  in  quick  succession  at  intervals  of  30 

soonds,  during  thick  or  foggy  weather.      Twin  River  Point  light-house, 

r.  E.  ^  N.,  lOJ  miles. 

The  Harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  piers,  with  a  dredged 
channel  connecting  the  mouth  of  the  Manitowoc  river  with  the  deep  water 
|>f  Lake  Michigan.  They  are  228  feet  apart  at  the  shore  line,  and  250  at 
|;be  outer  end,  direotion  E.  ^  N.     Depth  of  water:      In   May,  last  year, 


\ 


186 


LAKE    MIOHIOAN. 


there  was  16  feet  at  the  entrance,  and  a  channel   midway  between  the 

?ier8  aboat  100  feet  wide  with  a  depth  of  14  feet.   There  is  no  oater  bar. 
'he  pier  ends  are  opposite  to  each  other. 

Manitowoc  Bay  has  good  anchotage,  and  affords  protection 
from  all  winds,  except  from  northeast  by  the  eastward  to  south.  The 
shore  is  bold,  and  can  be  approached  within  one-third  of  a  mile. 

TWO    RIVERS    PIERHEAD    BEACON-LIGHT.-a 

fixed  red  lisfht,  visible  8^  miles.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier 
harbor  of  Two  Rivers.  White  open  frame  tower,  the  upper  part  encloaed 
for  a  watch  room.  Lantern  black,  light  35^  feet  above  lake  level.  She- 
boygan light-house,  Wis.,  8.  by  W.,  27^^  miles;  Manitowoc  Pierhead 
light,  Wis.,  8.  W.,  6i  miles;  Grande  Pointe  au  Sable  light-house,  Mich. 
E.,  63  miles. 

Two  Rivers  Harbor. — The  improvements  consist  of  two  par- 
allel piers  and  a  dredged  channel  between  them,  connecting  the  mouth 
of  the  river  with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan.  The  north  pier  ii 
1,810  feet  long,  and  the  south  pier  1,710.  Width  between  piers  at  the 
outer  end,  250  feet.  Depth  of  water:  The  channel  is  midway  between 
the  piers,  90  feet  wide  and  12  feet  deep.  Direction  of  piers,  S.  E.  |  S. 
The  Life  Saving  Station  is  at  the  entrance  on  the  north  side. 

TWIN    RIVER    POINT    LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 

white  light,  varied  by  white  flashes  every  30  seconds,  3d  order,  visible  18 
miles.  White  tower,  100  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with 
dwelling.  A  coast  light,  on  Rawley's  point,  about  6  miles  to  the  north- 
ward of  Twin  rivers.  The  light  stands  on  a  low  sandy  shore.  Pine 
barrens  to  the  north,  south  and  west.  The  fog-signal  is  a  10-incb  staam 
whistle,  giving  blasts  of  5  seconds  duration  at  alternate  intervals  of  10 
and  40  seconds.  Fog  signal  house  is  on  the  beach  225  feet  southeast  of 
the  light-house.  Grande  Pointe  au  Sable  light,  E.  f  S.,  50  miles.  Petite 
Pointe  au  Sable  light,  S.  E.  by  E.,  62  miles. 

Good  anchorage  and  shelter  from  S.  and  S.  S.  E.  gales  can  be  found 
in  the  bight  6^  miles  north  of  Twin  River  point.  Come-to  in  4  or  6 
fathoms  of  water. 

Two  Creeks,  7  miles  north  of  Twin  River  Point  light,  has  a  pile 
pier. 

Dean's  Pier  is  13  miles  to  the  northward  of  Twin  River  Point 
light. 

KEWAUNEE  PIERHEAD  BE ACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed 

red  light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  Red,  square  frame-work  tower, 
black  lantern,  with  brown  parapet.  The  upper  part  of  the  tower  is 
inclosed  for  a  watch  room.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the 
entrance  to  the  harbor  of  Kewaunee.  Entrance  to  Ahnepee  river,  N, 
by  E.  i  E.,  11  mV.en.  Twin  River  Point  li^ht-house,  S.  i  E.,  17^  miles. 
Ran^e  Light. — A  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  a  tubular  lantern 
•uupended  25  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  post  set  at  the  outer  end 
of  the  north  pier.  This  light  will  form  with  the  main  pierhead  light  a 
range  showing  the  direction  of  the  pier  and  the  course  into  the  harbor 

Kewaunee  Harbor. — The  improvement  consists  in  the  forma- 
tion of  a  channel,  from  a  point  about  2,000  feet  south  of  the  mouth  of 
the  Kewaunee  river,  through  a  spit  300  feet  wide,  connecting  the  river 
with  the  deep  water  in  Lake  Michigan.  The  piers  have  been  extended, 
the  pierhead  light  moved  out,  and  the  channel  dredged.    Width  between 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


187 


I  midway  between  the 
.   There  is  no  outer  bar. 

and  affords  protection 
;astward  to  south.  The 
third  of  a  mile. 

lACON-LIGHT.~A 

end  of  the  north  pier 
,  the  upper  part  enclosed 
i  above  lake  level.  She- 
s;  Manitowoc  Pierhead 
Sable  light-house,  Mich., 

ents  consist  of  two  par- 
n,  connecting  the  mouth 
igan.  The  north  pier  ii 
Ith  between  piers  at  the 
nnel  is  midway  between 
ition  of  piers,  S.  £.  f  S. 
e  north  side. 

STATION.— A  fixed 

jnds,  3d  order,  visible  18 
by  a  covered  way  with 
)ut  5  miles  to  the  north- 
low  sandy  shore.  Pine 
signal  is  a  10-inch  stoam 
iilternate  intervals  of  10 
ch  225  feet  southeast  of 
E.  f  S.,  60  miles.    Petite 

L  E.  gales  can  be  found 
)int.     Come-to  in  4  or  6 

r  Point  light,  has  a  pile 

rd  of  Twin  River  Point 

)N-LIGHT.-A  fixed 
lare  frame-work  tower, 
ar  part  of  the  tower  is 
f  the  north  pier,  at  the 
e  to  Ahnepee  river,  N, 
juse,  S.  i  E.,  IH  miles. 
from  a  tubular  lantern 
ost  set  at  the  outer  end 
e  main  pierhead  light  a 
course  mto  the  harbor 

t  consists  in  the  forma- 
Houth  of  the  mouth  of 
le,  connecting  the  river 
ers  have  been  extended, 
edged.    Width  between 


piers,  200  feet.     Direction  of  piers,  E.  S.  E.     As  now  constructed,  the 
north  pier  extends  about  70  feet  beyond  the  south  pier. 

The  shore  from  Twin  River  point  to  Ahnepee  is  generally  bold, 
and  can  be  approached  at  any  place  to  within  one-half  to  five-eighths  of 

a  mile. 

About  1^  miles  S.  8.  E.  from  the  dock  at  Dean's,  and  nearly  half  a 
mile  from  shore,  there  is  a  shoal  with  only  3  feet  of  water  on  it. 

There  is  a  6-foot  spot  about  1,000  feet  N.  E.  from  the  outer  end  of 
the  north  harbor  pier  at  Kewaunee. 

Ahnepee  is  28  miles  N.  i  E.  from  Twin  River  Point  light.  Pier- 
head light-house  to  bt  built. 

Harbor  Improvement. — The  first  project  was  for  the  forma- 
tion of  a  small  harbor  connecting  with  the  lake  by  a  channel,  to  be 
formed  by  the  construction  of  two  piers  100  feet  apart.  Also  for  blast- 
ing and  dredging  rock  from  the  river  bed.  The  original  project  was 
modified  so  that  in  extending  the  piers  they  were  placed  50  feet  further 
from  the  center  line  of  the  channel  than  the  old  piers,  making  the  chan- 
nel at  the  entrance  200  feet  wide,  narrowing  to  100  feet.  Direction  of 
pierS)  S.  E.  by  E. 

Along^  the  shore  from  Ahnepee  to  within  2  miles  of  Sturgeon 
Bay  iSbip-canal,  shoal  water  extends  from  three-quarters  to  1^  miles  from 

!  shore.  There  is  a  shoal  1^  miles,  E.  ^  N.  of  the  piers  at  Ahnepee,  with 
17  feet  of  water  on  it;  another  E.  N.  E.  ^  N.,  half  a  mile  from  the  outer 
end  of  the  piers  and  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  shore,  with  12  feet  of 
water  over  it.     From  2  to  4  miles  south  of  the  piers  at  Sturgeon  Bay 

I  Ship-canal  there  are  several  shoal  spots  1^  miles  from  shore,  with  from 
13  to  15  feet  of  water  over  them. 

STURGEON  BA.Y  CANAL  PIERHEAD  LIGHT.— A 

fixed  red  light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work 
tower,  29  feet  high.  On  the  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  to 
Harbor  of  Refuge  and  Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-canal.  During  thick  and 
foggy  weather  there  is  sounded  a  10-inch  steam-whistle,  giving  blasts  of 
6  seconds'  duration  at  intervals  of  25  seconds.  Fog  signals  adjoining 
light-house  on  north  pier.  Point  Betsey  light,  E.  f  S.,  63  miles.  South 
Fox  Island  light,  N.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  83  miles.    In  passing  through  Stur- 

geon  bay  from  the  eastward,  black  buoys  will  be  left  on  the  starboard 
and  and  red  buoys  to  port. 

Harbor  of  Refugee  at  the  Entrance  of  Sturgeon  Bay 

Ship-canal. — The  harbor  works  oonsist  of  two  piers  1,200  feet  long, 

850  teet  apart  at  the  shore  line,  and  235  feet  apart  at  the  outer  ends, 

inclosing  a  basin  of  10  acres,  at  the  lake  entrance  to  the  canal.     Beyond 

the  piers  are  two  detached  piers,  each  150  feet  long  and  335  feet  between 

their  outer  ends,  which  are  in  18  feet  of  water.     Each  detached  pier  is 

[Connected  to  the  main  pier  by  a  double  row  of  fender  piling.     Depth  of 

[Water,  last    September,  there  was   16    feet   at   the  entrance,  thence  to 

[the  canal  on  the  center  line  between  the  piers  there  was  a  depth  of  15^ 

to  16  feet  for  a  width  of  75  feet.     In  the  southwest  corner  ot  the  basin, 

!  100  feet  from  the  channel  leading  into  the  canal,  there  are  rocks  with 

[only  11^  feet  of  water  over  them.     Entering  the  harbor  steer  straight 

[in  between  the  piers  and  into  the  canal  N.  W.  ^  W.    Life  Saving  Station 

|bn  eastern  entrance  of  canal,  north  end. 

White  Fish  Point. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  17  feet  of  water.    Marks 
[the  end  of  the  shoal  off  the  point.     From  VVIiite  Fish  point  to  Sturgeon 


188 


LAKK    MIOHIOAN. 


8TUEQE0N   BAY    CANAL. 


HI 


Bay  Ship-canal,  the  coast  trends  in  a  southwesterly  direction;  there  an 
shoals  and  rocky  spii/S,  rendering  the  coast  dangerous  to  a  distance  of 
over  1  mile  from  shore.  Sturgeon  Bay  Canal  light,  8.  W.  ^  W.,  1\ 
miles.  The  range  leads  over  foul  ground.  White  Fish  point  N.  W.  | 
W.,  1  mile, 

BAYLEY'S    HARBOR     RANGE    LIGHTS.  — Front 

liisht,  fixed  white,  6th  order,  visible  10^  miles.     White  tower,  V^  feet  j 

high. 

Rear  iLiirht,  lixed  white,  5th  order,  visible  13  miles,  lantern  on  white  frame 
dwelling,  24  feet  high,  on  the  north  shore  of  Baylev's  harbor,  a  little  north  of  the 
village  of  Bayley's  Harbor.  To  anchor  in  the  harbor,  bring  the  towers  in  range 
when  4  nailes  irom  the  beacon;  stand  in  on  the  range  and  anchor  in  8^  or  4  fathoms 
of  water,  when  between  the  old  light-house  and  the  village,  being  careful  to  avoid 
the  shoal  which  extends  about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  old  light-house.  The 
entrance  between  the  shoals  at  the  mouth  of  the  harbor  is  about  three-fourths  of  s 
mile  wide.  The  beacon  and  rear  litrlit  are  in  range  N.  N.  W.  and  8.  8.  E.,  and  are 
distant  from  each  other  950  feet.  There  are  three  pile  piers  on  the  west  side  of  Bay- 
ley's  harbor  with  from  8  to  10  feet  of  water  at  them.  On  the  west  side  of  tlie  bay 
the  bottom  is  sand  and  rock,  on  the  east  side  near  the  old  light-house  the  bottom  is 
mud  and  clay.  Vessels  seeking  shelter  in  southerly  gales  should  stand  in  on  the 
ranges  until  nearly  abreast  of  the  old  light  house,  when  haul  up  for  it,  and  come-to 
in  auout  3^  fathoms  of  water  close  in,  and  avoid  the  swell  that  sets  into  the  harbor, 

Bayley'ii  Harbor  IVUddle  Ground.— Black  24-foot  spar  buoy,  in  18  feet 
of  water.  Marks  the  southeastern  point  of  the  middle  ground  shoal  in  the  entrance 
to  Bayley's  harbor.  Front  range  light,  N.  I  W.,  8|  miles.  White  Pish  Point  buoy, 
8.  by  W.  iW.,  12mlle8. 

Bayley's  Harbor  Entrance  CNorth  Side).— Red  24-foot  spar  buoy,  io 
18  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  southwestern  point  of  the  shoal  making  out  from  the 
eastern  point  of  entrance  at  Bayley's  harbor.  Front  range  light,  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  2i 
miles.    Middle  Ground  huoy,  8.  8.  W.  i  W.,  U  miles. 


LAKB   MIOHIOAH. 


189 


GAN 


terly  direction;  there  an 
ngerous  to  a  distance  of 
al  light,  8.  W.  i  W.,  >i\ 
hite  Fish  point  N.  W.  \ 

LIGHTS.  —  Front 

IB.     White  tower,  IV  feel  | 

liles,  lantern  on  white  frame 
}  harbor,  a  little  north  uf  the 
r,  bring  the  towers  in  range 
id  anchor  in  8i  or  4  fathoms 
llage,  being  careful  to  avoid 
of  the  old  light-house.    The 
)r  is  about  three-fourths  of  a 
N.  W.  and  8.  8.  E.,  and  are 
)iers  on  the  west  side  of  Bay- 
On  the  west  side  of  the  bay 
d  light-house  the  bottom  l< 
ales  should  stand  in  on  the 
liaul  up  for  it,  and  come-to 
b11  that  sets  into  the  harbor, 

24-foot  spar  buoy,  in  18  feet 
ground  shoal  in  the  entrance 
es.     White  Fish  Point  buoy, 

I.— Red  24-foot  spar  buoy,  in 

shoal  making  out  from  the 

ge  light,  N.  N.  W.  tW.,2i 


Hind  Bay  is  midway  between  the  old  light-house  at  Bayley's  harbor  and  Cana 
'island;  it  has  good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds  except  from  the  south- 
feast.  To  make  the  anchorage,  stand  in  for  the  middle  of  the  bay  beading  about  N.W. 
rby  N.,  and  come-to  in  about  3i  fathoms  well  into  the  bay.  Vessels  have  laid  in 
;  Mud  bay  through  the  heaviest  southcasters. 

CANA  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
[ad  order,  visible  16^  miles.  Yellow  brick  tower,  80 feet  high,  conneotedby 
ia  covered  way  with  brick  dwelling.  A  coast  light,  on  Cana  island,  14| 
Imiles  S.  by  W.  f  W.  of  the  Porte  des  Morts  entrance  to  Green  bay,  and 
U  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  entrance  to  Bayley's  harbor.  White 
[Fish  point  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  17  miles. 

North  Bay  Entrance  (south  side).— Black  spar  buoy  in  14 
[feet  of  water.  Marks  the  extreme  point  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the 
lortheastward  from  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  to  North  bay,  which 
[is  about  7  miles  to  the  northward  of  Bayley's  harbor.  To  enter  the  har- 
Ibor,  which  is  small,  pass  midway  between  the  buoys  and  round-to  under 
Uither  point,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  wind.  Care  must  be  taken 
jnot  to  run  too  far  in,  as  the  anchorage  ground  is  only  three-fourths  of  a 
[mile  deep  from  the  entrance  buoys.  The  width  of  the  entrance  between 
Ithe  buoys  is  about  three-eighths  of  a  miie.  Cana  Island  light-house,  S.  f 
[E.,  2^  miles.     Wood  dock  north  side  of  bay  N.  ^  W.,  f  mile. 

North  Bay  Entrance  (north  side). — Red  spar  buoy,  in  24 
Ifeet  of  water.  Marks  the  point  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  southward 
[from  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  into  North  bay.  Cana  Island  light- 
jhouse,  S.  ^  W.,  3  miles. 

RaMTlcy'fi  Bay,  Four-Foot  Shoal.— Red  24-foot  spar  buoy,  in  18  feet  of 
^Mrater.  Marks  the  soutlieastern  point  of  the  shoal.  Cana  Island  light-house,  S.  8. 
[W.  \  W.,  5i  miles.     Outer  Shoal  buoy,  N.  N.  E.  J  E.,  6f  miles. 

Rawley's  Bay  or  False  Door.— The  head  of  this  bay  is  6 

liles  north  of  the  entrance  to  the  North  bay;  strangers  should  be  care- 

|ful  to  avoid  the  shoals,  whioh  extend  in  a  southerly  direction  from  the 

>oint  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay.     To  make  the  head  of  the  bay,  when 

jne-half  mile  east  of  the  point  north  of  the  entrance  to  North  bay,  steer 

T.  f  W.,  4^  miles,  until  Spider  island  bears  east,  when  come  to  in  4| 

fathoms  of  water.     This  course  leaves  the  Hog's  back  reef,  on  which 

lere  is  only  4  feet  of  water,  to  the  eastward. 

Outer  Shoal. — Red  2d-cla8s  nun  buoy  in  21  feet  of  water.  Off 
bhe  southeast  end  of  the  extreme  easterly  shoal  between  Gravel  and 

>ider  islands,  south  side  of  the  entrance  into  Porte  des  Morts  passage. 

^essels  bound  through  the  passage  from  the  southward  will  pass  one- 
lalf  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  buoy,  and  when  abreast  of  it,  haul  up  to 
"  N.  W.  \  W.  until  abreast  of  Nine-foot  Shoal  buoy,  Porte  des  Morts 
)assage,  when  change  course  to  N.  W.  ^  W.,  which  will  lead  fair  into 
Ireen  bay.     Porte  des  Morts  light-house,  N.  ^  E.,  3^  miles.     Gravel 

ilands,  N.  W.  f  W.,  2  1-16  miles.  Spider  island  (middle)  8.  W.  i  W., 
If  miles. 

The  Coast  from  White  Fish  point  to  Porte  des  Morts,  is  rooky 
knd  dangerous,  with  lar^e  indentations  fringed  with  rocky  spits  and  de- 
shed  shoals;  all  of  which  may  be  avoided  when  bound  to  the  north- 
rd  by  steering  N.  N.  E.  when  3  miles  east  of  White  Fish  point. 

PORTE  DES  MORTS  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red 

ight,  4th  order,  visible  12^  miles.     Lantern  on  yellow  brick  dwelling, 

14  feet  high,  on  Pilot  island,  in  the  Porte  des  Morts  passage,  between 

"'ro  Michigan  and  Green  bay.     During  thick  and  foggy  weather  there 


190 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


is  sounded  a  steam-siren,  giving  blasts  of  5  seconds  at  interv^lR  cf  30 
seconds.  Cana  Island  light-house,  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  14|  miles.  Rocky 
spits  extend  from  this  island  to  the  southeast  and  southwest  for  one 
quarter  of  a  mile. 

Nine-foot  Shoal  (Porte  des  Slorts  Passage).— Black  2d. 
class  nun  buoy  in  18  feet  o't  water.  Marks  the  southeast  end  of  the  9. 
foot  shoal  in  the  Porte  des  Morts  passage,  on  the  southwest  side  of  the 
channel.  Vessels  bouad  tlircugb  the  passage  from  Lake  Michigan  can 
steer  N.  W.  ^  W.  when  abreast  this  buoy.  Porte  des  Morts  light  liouse 
N.  E.  by  E.  ^E.,  li  miles.  Northwest  point  of  Plum  island,  N.  |  w' 
2^  miles.     Outer  Shoal  buoy,  S.  S.  E.  i  E.,  3  miles.  ' 

To  Enter  Green  Bay  through  Death's  Door  (Porte  des  Morts) 
passage,  when  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light,  steer  N.  W.  1 
W.  until  fairly  into  the  bay. 

Detroit  Island  Passage.— Red  spar  buoy  in  11  feet  of  water. 
On  the  southwest  point  of  the  shoal,  which  lies  in  the  passage-way  be- 
tween Detroit  and  Plum  islands.  The  charts  give  12  feet  as  the  least 
depth  of  water  on  the  shoal,  but  spots  have  been  found  with  only  10  feet 
of  water  on  them.  The  anchorage  between  Detroit  and  Plum  islands  is 
a  safe  one,  and  is  frequently  used,  during  eastern  gales,  by  vessels  bound 
from  Green  bay  into  Lake  Michigan.  The  range  between  the  west  point 
of  Washington  island  and  Pilot  Island  light  leads  fair  between  this  buoy 
and  Plum  island  buoy,  and  in  good  water. 

Porte  des  Morts  Range  Lights.— To  be  built  on  the  south 
west  side  of  Plum  island. 

Plum  Island. — Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
northeast  point  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  northward  from  Plum 
island.  It  can  be  passed  close-to  from  the  northward,  but  on  approach- 
ing it  from  the  westward  it  should  be  given  a  berth  of  at  least  a  half  of 
a  mile.     Northwest  end  of  Plum  island,  S.  W.  ^  W.,  ^  mile. 

Nine-foot  Shoal  (Bock  Island  Passage).— Red,  3d  class 
can  buoy  in  21  feet  of  water.  On  the  southwest  side  of  the  small  9-foot 
shoal  in  the  passage  into  Green  bay,  between  Rock  and  St.  Martin's 
island,  about  2  miles  distant  from  the  south  end  of  St.  Martin's  Island 
and  2^  miles  from  Rock  island.  The  shoal  is  of  small  extent,  with 
deep  water  close-to.  The  usual  passage-way  is  between  the  buoy  and 
Rock  island,  and,  unless  familiar  with  the  locality,  vessels  should  not 
pass  to  the  northward  of  the  buoy.  Pottawatomie  light-house,  S.  W.  by 
W".  i  W.,  3  miles.  Southeast  point  of  St.  Martin's  island,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  2^ 
miles.     Fish  island  (awash),  S.  by  E.,  3f  miles. 

POTTAWATOMIE,  OR  ROCK  ISLAND  LIGHT-STA- 
TION. — A  fixed  white  light,  4th  order,  visible  19^  miles.  Lantern  on 
gray  stone  dwelling,  34  feet  high,  light  137  feet  above  lake  level.  On 
the  north  point  of  Rock  island.  A  guide  into  the  passage  between  Rock 
and  St.  Martin's  islands.  Off  the  southeast  point  of  Rock  island  there 
are  two  dangerous  reefs,  witli  rocks  above  wattr  or  awash,  bearing  from 
the  point  E.  by  S.  f  S.  and  S.  S.  E.  -J  E.,  distant  respectively  about  2^ 
and  3^  miles.  There  is  a  passage-way  between  these  shoals  and  Wash- 
ington and  Rock  islands.  Vessels  from  Lake  Michigan  for  Green  bay 
can  bring  the  light  to  bear,  in  18  fathoms  water,  from  W.  f  N.  to  W.  by 
S.  i  S.,  and  stand  for  it,  hauling  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  as  they 
approach  the  light,  with  the  light  abeam  when  standing  for  the  west- 
ward.   Southeast  point  of  St.  "Martin's  island,  N.   E.  |  N.,  4f 


LAKK    MICHIGAN. 


191 


3onds  at  intervals  of  30 
W.,  U|  miles.  Rocky 
and  southwest  for  one 

Passagre).— Black  2d. 
southeast  end  of  the  9. 
he  southwest  side  of  the 
'om  Lake  Michigan  can 
e  des  Morts  light  house 
■  Plum  island,  N.  |  w' 
les.  ** 

Door  (Porte  des  Morts) 
nd  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^ 

►uoy  in  11  feet  of  water. 
in  the  passage-way  be- 
ive  12  feet  as  the  least 
found  with  only  10  feet 
'oit  and  Plum  islands  is 
gales,  by  vessels  bound 
J  between  the  west  point 
8  fair  between  this  buoy 

'o  be  built  on  the  south- 

3t  of  water.  Marks  the 
northward  from  Phim 
ivard,  but  on  approach- 
rth  of  at  least  a  half  of 
W.,  ^  mile. 

laage).— Red,  3d -class 
side  of  the  small  9-foot 
Rook  and  St.  Martin's 
of  St.  Martin's  Island 
of  small  extent,  with 
between  the  buoy  and 
ty,  vessels  should  not 
e  light-house,  S.  W.  by 
sland,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  2'i 

.ND  LIGHT-STA. 

9^  miles.  Lantern  on 
above  lake  level.  On 
passage  between  Rock 
t  of  Rook  island  there 
)r  awash,  bearing  from 
respectively  about  2^ 
hese  shoals  and  Wash- 
chigan  for  Green  bay 
•om  W.  f  N.  to  W.  by 
le  northward  as  they 
tan  ding  for  the  west- 
E.  I  N.,  4f  miles. 


North  point  of  Boyer's  bluff,  W.  f  S.,  6t  miles.     Point  Peninsula  light- 
house, N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  I7i  miles. 

POVERTY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  flashing  red 
light,  4th  order,  visible  15|  miles;  the  interval  between  flashes  is  15  sec- 
onds. White  tower,  65  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  white 
dwelling.  On  the  south  point  of  Poverty  island.  A  guide  to  the  passage 
into  Green  bay,  between  the  Gull  islands  and  Poverty  island.  Heavy 
draught  vessels  bound  into  Green  bay  should  keep  at  least  f  of  a  mile 
south  of  Poverty  Island  light,  then  steer  midway  between  the  buoys  on 
Gravelly  Island  and  Poverty  Island  shoals  about  N.  W.  ^  W.,  and  when 
past  Gravelly  Shoal  buoy  W.  by  N.  f  N.  to  clear  Corona  shoal.  The  fog- 
signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle,  giving  a  blast  of  5  seconds  duration, 
followed  by  an  interval  of  45  seconds,  then  a  blast  of  3  seconds,  followed 
by  an  interval  of  10  seconds.  Point  Peninsula  light-house  N.  W.  by  W. 
^  W.,  I7i  miles.     Pottawatomie  light-house  S.  W.  ^  W.,  10^  miles. 

Gravelly  Island  Shoal. — Black,  25-foot  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
water.  Marks  a  small  shoal  with  17  feet  of  water  over  it  1^  miles  north 
of  Gravelly  island.  There  is  a  small  14-foot  patch  f  of  a  mile  north  of 
the  island;  therefore  only  light-draught  vessels  should  pass  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  buoy.  Poverty  Island  Shoal  buoy,  N.  E.  ^  E.,  1^  miles. 
Poverty  Island  light-house,  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  3^  miles. 

Poverty  Island  Shoal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes  spar 
buoy,  25  feet  long,  in  18  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  southwestern  point 
of  a  small  shoal  to  the  westward  of  Summer  island.  Least  water  is  15 
feet.  Gravelly  Island  Shoal  Buoy,  S.  W.  J  W.,  1^  miles.  Poverty 
Island  light-house,  S.  E.  ^  E.,  2f  miles. 

POINTE  SEUL  CHOIX  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
white  light,  4th  order,  visible  16  miles.  Open  frame-work  tower  47  feet 
high,  surmounted  by  an  octagonal  wooden  lantern  painted  black.  On 
the  extremity  of  Seul  Choix  Pointe.  Poverty  Island  light,  S.  W.  f  W., 
46  milcR.  St.  Helena  light,  E.  ^  8.,  51  miles.  North  point  of  Squaw 
island,  E.  by.  S.  f  S.,  16i  miles.  In  the  bay  to  the  north  and  eastward 
of  the  light  there  is  good  anchorage,  and  protection  from  all  windg 
except  from  the  south  and  east.  Come-to  with  the  light  about  S.  S.  W. 
1^  miles  distant.     Keep  a  lookout  for  trap  nets. 

Squaw  Island. — A  light-house  and  fog-signaMto  be  built  early 
this  season,  for  which  an  appropriation  is  available. 

Squaw  Island  Shoal. — Black  2d-class  nun  buoy  in  22  feet  of 
water,  on  the  north  end  of  Squaw  Island  shoal.  The  western  edge  of 
Whiskey  island  slightly  open  to  the  west  of  Squaw  island.  Northwest 
end  of  Squaw  island  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  2^  miles.  East  tangent  of  Garden 
island,  S.  E.  -J  E. 

Oarden  Island  Shoal. — A  red  and  black  horieontal  stripes  ^^ar  buoy  in  16 
feet  of  water,  known  on  the  chart  as  the  18-foot  spot,  N.  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  aj  miles 
from  the  northwest  end  of  Qarden  island. 


Light  Houses,  Buoys  and  Harbors  Standing  to  the  North- 
ward in  Green  Bay, 

Drlsco*!  Shoal.— Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2d-clada  can  buoy  in  2t 
feet  of  water.  Off  the  northeast  end  of  Drisco's  shoal,  in  the  north  end  of  Green  bay. 
The  shoal  is  a  dangerous  one,  lying  nearly  in  the  track  of  vessels  bound  from  Porte 
des  Morts  to  Escanaba,  and  is  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  in  extent  in  a  northeast  and 
Soutliwest  direction.    The  charts  indicate  6  and  7  fatlioms  of  water  in  its  position. 


192 


OBBBN   BAT. 


and  the  least  depth  of  water  found  by  the  light-house  steamer  "  Dahlia,"  in  many 
souAdings,  was  12  feet  on  the  northeast  end  of  the  shoal.  It  is  possible  that  there 
may  be  spots  with  less  water  on  them,  and  in  thick  weather  tlvi  locality  of  th(!  slioal 
should  be  avoided.  When  clear,  the  buoy  may  be  passed  within  one-eighth  of  a  mile 
to  the  eastward,  and  one-half  a  mile  to  the  westward.  Mill  at  mouth  of  Ford  river 
N.  W.  f  W.,  12i  miles.  Point  Peninsula  light-house,  N.  i  W.,  7|  miles.  Hock 
Island  light-house,  S.  E.  f  S.,  lOf  miles.  Center  of  Boyer's  bluff,  8.  i  E.,  9i  miles. 
Corona  Slioal. — Red  and  black  horizontal  stripes  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  southern  point  of  Corona  shoal,  which  has  its  greatest  extent,  275  yards, 
in  a  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  8.  W.  direction.  The  least  water,  18  feet,  is  about  100  yards 
northeast  of  the  buoy.  Heavy-draught  vessels  in  a  sea  should  pass  at  least  three- 
eighths  of  a  mile  south  of  the  buoy.  Point  Peninsula  light-house,  N.  i  W.  3f  miles 
Ten-foot  Shoal  buoy,  N.  W.  i  W.  U  miles. 

Ten-foot  Shoal  (oflF  Point  Peninsula).— Red  2d-clas8  nun 
buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  On  the  south  side  of  the  10-foot  shoal  off 
Point  Peninsula.  Unless  perfectly  familiar  with  the  locality,  vessels 
must  not  attempt  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  buoy.  There  is  a  small 
shoal  spot,  with  16  feet  of  water  on  it,  one-half  of  a  mile  E.  ^  N.  from 
the  buoy.  Point  Peninsula  light-house,  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  2f  miles.  Escan- 
aba  light-house,  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  8  miles.  Mouth  of  Ford  river,  W.  N. 
W.  i  W.,  8J  miles. 

Point  Peninsula  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy.  Marks  the  south 
end  of  the  shoal  extending  in  a  southerly  direction  from  Peninsula  point, 
One  mile  to  the  southwestward  of  this  buoy  there  is  a  10-foot  shoal, 
marked  by  a  2d-cla8s  can  buoy,  with  a  passage-way  between  the  buoys, 
which,  however,  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers.  Point  Peninsula 
light-house,  N.  f  E.,  If  miles.  Ten-foot  Shoal  buoy,  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  1 
mile. 

POINT    PENINSULA   LIGHT-STATION.  —  A   flashing 

white  light,  4th  order,  visible  12^  miles,  interval  between  flashes  30  seconds. 
Yellow  tower,  36  feet  high,  rises  from  brick  dwelling.  On  tho  extreme 
south  point  of  Point  Peninsula.  Marks  the  approach  to  Little  .?.nd  Big 
Bays  de  Noquette.  A  shoal  extends  to  the  southward  of  the  light,  If 
miles,  and  there  is  a  dangerous  10-foot  spot,  diarked  by  a  buoy,  2^  niles 
to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Peninsula  point,  which  should  be 
passed  to  the  southward.  Escanaba(Sand  Point) light-house,  N.  W.  f  1^., 
6|  miles.     Poverty  Island  light-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  IVf  miles. 

Sand  Point  (off  Escanaba). — Black  spar  buoy.  Marks  the 
end  of  the  shoal  extending  in  a  northeasterly  .direction  from  Sand  point, 
and  should  be  passed  to  the  eastward.  Escanaba  light-house,  S.  W.  by  W.  | 
W.,  f  mile.  Iron  dock  (Escanaba),  W.  f  S.,  I  mile.  Ten-foot  shoal  buoy, 
off  Point  Peninsula,  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  8  miles.  When  well  past  this  buoy, 
haul  up  for  the  steamboat  landing,  or  the  iron  ore  docks.  Good  anchor- 
age and  protection  from  all  winds  in  the  bay  north  of  Escanaba. 

ESCANABA  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order, 
visible  13  miles.  Yellow  brick  tower  rises  from  brick  dwelling.  Near 
the  end  of  Sand  Point  (Escanaba).  A  shoal  extends  three-eighths  of  a 
mile  to  the  northeastward  of  Sand  point.  A  guide  into  the  harbor  of 
Escanaba  and  Little  Bay  de  Noquette.  Point  Peninsula  light-house,  S. 
E.  f  S.,  6|  miles.    Saunders  point,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  7i  miles. 

Little  Bay  de  Noo  ShoaL-— Red  3d-class  oan  buoy  in  18  feet 
of  water.  Marks  the  southwestern  point  of  the  shoal  on  the  eastern  side 
of  Little  Bay  de  Noquette.  Escanaba  light-house.  S.  W.  i^  S.  1|  miles. 
Point  Peninsula  light-house,  S.  S.  E.  }  E.,  6f  miles.  Ten-foot  Shoal  buoy, 
S.  by  E.  f  E.  8f  miles. 


ORBKN    BAT. 


198 


Saunders  Point  Shoal.— Red  Sd-class  nuD  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.    Marks 
[the  eastern  point  of  tlie  shoal  making  out  from  Saunders  point  (Gladstone).     Escanaba 
lighthouse,  S.  by  W.  i  W..  7^  miles.     Squaw  point,  8.  8.  W.  i  S.,  H  miles.     End 
[of  wharf  at  Saunders  point.  S.  W.  by  W.  i  W..  260  yards. 

I  Saunders  Point  Shoal  (Inside).— Black  spar  buoy  in  17  feet  of  water. 
JMarks  the  nortliern  edge  of  the  shoal  making  out  from  Saunders  point  (Gladstone). 
[End  of  wharf  at  Saunders  point,  S.  by  E.,  420  yards.  Saunders  Point  buoy,  S.  E. 
[by  E.,  430  yards. 


Standing  to  Southward  in  Green  Bay, 

Whale's  Back  Shoal  (east  end).— Red  27-foot  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
[water.  Marks  the  southeastern  point  of  Whale  Back  sboal,  which  extends  in  a  north- 
[westerly  and  southeasterly  direction  1^  miles,  and  northeasterly  and  southwesterly  \ 
[mile,  with  its  shoalest  spot  midway  between  th«  ends,  and  awash,  or  nearly  so.  The 
soundings  in  the  proximity  of  the  shoal  are  irregular;  bottom,  stone,  sand,  and 
[gravel.  Great  care  should  be  observed  in  approaching  its  locality,  except  in  clear 
[weather.  Porte  des  Morts  light-house,  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  13i  miles.  Chambers  Island 
[light-house,  S.  W.  |  S.,  14^  miles. 

Whale's  Back  Shoal  (west  end).— Black  27-foot  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
(water.  Marks  the  northwestern  point  of  the  Whale's  Back  shoal.  Chambers  Island 
IHght  house,  S.  W.  by  8.  i  S.,  14|  miles.  Whale's  Back  Shoal  buoy  (east  end),  S.  E. 
liE.,  li^  miles. 

Cedar  Blver  Pierhead  Beaeon-l.<lffht.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th  order, 
[visible  15  miles.  White,  square  wooden  tower,  focal  plane  66  feet  above  the  level  of 
[the  bay,  black  iron  lantern,  with  brown  parapet.  The  lower  part  of  the  tower  is 
[open  frame- work,  the  upper  part  is  inclosed  for  a  watch  room.  Near  tiie  outer  end 
[of  the  east  pier  at  the  entrance  to  Cedar  river.  Green  bay.  Point  Peninsula  light- 
jhouse,  N.  E.  i  N.,  26  miles.  Pilot  Island  lighthouse,  E.  by  8.  f  S.,  23  miles. 
[Whale's  Back  shoal,  E.  by  8.  f  8.,  8imiles.  Chambers  Island  light-house,  8.,  14^  miles. 
Cedar  River  Range  Lights.— Front  light,  lantern  on  south  corner  of 
[Cedar  River  light-house;  rear  light,  lantern  suspended  from  a  post  on  inner  end  of 
[pier,  500  feet  from  front  light.  Two  fixed  red  lights,  on  channel  side  of  the  east 
[pier,  visible  2  or  3  miles.  Form  a  range  that  shows  the  direction  of  the  harbor 
[sntrance  and  carries  clear  of  the  rock  555  yards  from  the  light-house  and  nearly  in  the 
[line  of  direction  of  the  west  pier. 

Cedar  River  is  on  the  west  shore  of  Green  bay,  25  miles  W.  f  S.  from  Rock 
[bland  light,  and  the  same  distance  about  N.  E.  by  N.  from  the  Menomonee  river. 
[The  harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  200  feet  apart,  extending 
labout  8.  by  E  \  E.  from  the  mouth  of  Cedar  river. 

Cedar  River  Entrance.— Black  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water.    Marks  a 
ek,  with  14  feet  of  water  over  it,  555  yards  from  the  light-house,  and  nearly  in  the 
[line  of  direction  of  tlie  west  pier.    Cedar  River  light-house,  N.  i  E.,  555  ynrds. 

Horse  Shoe  Reef.  —  Red  2d-class  can  buoy  in  about  5  fathoms  of  water 
learly  \  mile  E.  N.  E.  from  a  rock  with  4  feet  of  water  over  it,  at  the  northeastern 
lend  of  the  Horseshoe  reef.  This  was  formerly  the  black  buoy  that  marked  the  north- 
least  end  of  the  reef.  It  has  been  moved  to  the  eastward  one  half  mile  from  its  for- 
ler  position  and  painted  red.  Duath's  Door  bluff,  N.  E.  f  E.,  8^  miles.  Eagle  Bluff 
ight-house,  S.  8.  W.  i  W..  4|  miles.  North  point  of  Chambers  island,  W.  by  8.  i 
"  ,  7  miles.     East  end  of  Whale's  Back  reef,  N.  i  E. ,  8f  miles. 

Eagle  Harbor  and  Horseshoe  Island. — There  is  good  anchorage  in 
tgle  harbor,  and  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds  can  be  found  on  the 
)uth  side  of  Horseslioe  island.     Come-to  close  to  the  island  in  5  fathoms  of  water, 
[ud  bottom.     The  shores  of  the  island  are  bold. 

Strawberry  Island  Reef.— Red  spar  buoy.  Marks  the  easterly  side  of  the 
iorth  end  of  the  Strawberry  Island  reef.  It  is  located  1  mile  northwest  of  Eagle  Bluff 
ight-house. 

EAOL.E   BLUFF  LIOHT'STATION.— A  fixed  white  light.  Si  order, 
ible  15i  miles.    Yellow  tower,  88  feet  high,  rises  from  the  corner  of  brick  dwelling. 
)n  the  extreme  westerly  point  of  Eagle  bluff,  2f  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  village 
jf  Fish  Creek.    A  guide  through  the  Strawberry  passage  between  the  islands  and 
main  shore.     Strangers  should  not  attempt  to  pass  between  the  Strawberries  and 
Chambers  isUnd.    Chambers  Island  light-house,  W.  N.  W.  i  W.,  6t  miles.    O^een 
Bland  light- house,  S.  W.  by  W. ,  14*  miles. 
Strawberry  Islandf  Reef  (south  end).— Red  spar  buoy.     Marks  the 


194 


OBBBN    BAT. 


southeast  edge  of  the  Strawberry  Island  reef.    Eagle  Bluff  light-house,  N.  K  by  N 
f  N..  li  miles.    East  side  of  Hat  island.  S.  W.  f  S..  4|  miles. 

CHAMBERS  ISLAND  1.I0HT-STAT10IV.  —  A  fixed  white  li^ht, 
varied  by  white  flashes  at  intervals  of  1  minute,  4th  order,  visible  15  miles.  Yellov 
tower,  88  feet  high,  rises  from  the  corner  of  brick  dwelling.  On  the  western  point 
of  Chambers  island,  and  is  a  guide  through  the  western  passage  (6  miles  'widej 
between  the  island  and  the  main-land.  A  reef  extends  off  the  north  point  of  the 
island  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  Strangers  should  not  attempt  the  passage  between 
Chambers  island  and  the  Strawberries.  Green  Island  light-house,  S.  S.  W.  |  W 
111  miles.  Whale's  Back  Shoal  buoy,  N.  E.  i  N.,  18*  miles.  Boyer's  bluff,  N.  E 
f  E.,  25f  miles. 

There  is  good  anchorage  on  the  south  side  of  Chambers  island,  and  protection 
from  all  winds  from  north  to  east.  Shoal  water  extends  from  the  west  side  of  the 
island  1^  miles.  A  spit  extends  from  the  southeast  point  of  the  island  in  a  southeast 
direction  nearly  2  miles. 

MENOraOIVEE  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— Aflxed  red  light, 
4th  order,  visible  11*  miles.  White,  conical  iron  tower,  29  feet  high.  On  the  outer 
end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the  entrance  to  the  Menomonee  river.  A  guide  into  the 
Menomonee  river.  Green  Island  light-house,  8.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  5  miles.  Chambers 
Island  light-house,  N.  E.  by  E.,  13  miles. 

Menomonee  Harbor  improvements  consist  of  two  parallel 
piers,  and  a  dredged  channel  connecting  the  mouth  of  the  river  with  the 
deep  water  in  Green  bay.  The  north  pier  is  1,864  feet  in  length,  term- 
inating in  16  feet  of  water,  and  the  south  pier  is  2,710  feet  long,  and  ex- 
tends 100  feet  beyond  the  north  pier.  The  piers  are  400  feet  apart.  Di- 
rection of  piers  about  E.  N.  E.  Depth  of  water:  Last  July,  there 
was  16^  feet  at  the  entrance,  thence  to  the  inner  end  of  north  pier  there 
was  a  channel  180  feet  wide  with  a  depth  of  14  feet,  thence  to  the  bridge 
13  feet. 

GREEN  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 

visible  14  miles,  4th  order.  Lantern  on  white  dwelling,  40  feet  high. 
Near  the  southeast  point  of  Green  island.  Reefs  extend  off  from  the 
western  and  southeastern  ends  of  the  island,  three-quarters  and  one-half 
mile  respectively.  The  usual  channel  way  is  to  the  eastward  of  the 
island.  Peshtigo  Shoal  buoy,  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  8  miles.  Chambers  Island 
light-house,  N.  N.  E.  ^-E.,  11  miles. 

There  is  good  anchorage  on  the  southwest  side  of  the  island,  and 
protection  from  north  and  northeav.^  gales.  Come-to  close  to  the  island 
in  4  fathoms.  Rounding  the  southeast  point,  give  it  a  good  berth  to 
clear  the  end  of  the  reef. 


Entering  into  Sturgeon  Bay  from  Green  Bay, 

To  enter  Sturgeon  bay  from  Green  bay,  after  passing  in  by  Sher- 
wood's point,  and  with  the  right-hand  shore  close  aboard,  bring  the  lights 
on  Dunlap  reef  nearly  in  range,  keeping  the  rear  light  just  open  or  visi- 
ble to  westward  of  front  light,  until  surely  past  Black  buoy  No.  3,  and 
between  that  and  the  N.  W.  Middle  ground,  red-and-black  buoy, — that 
is,  about  three-fourths  mile  from  the  front  light — when  open  the  lights 
more,  giving  them  a  berth  of  about  250  yards,  and  pass  on  either  side  of 
reef.  After  this,  if  bound  through  the  canal,  the  best  water  will  be 
found  in  mid-channel. 

SHERWOOD'S  POINT  LIOHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white  light, 
varied  by  a  red  flash  every  20  seconds,  4th  order,  visible  14  miles.  Red  tower,  32  feet 
high,  with  dwelling  attached,  both  of  brick.  On  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  into 
Sturgeon  bay.  Eagle  bluff,  N.  N.  E.,  21i  miles.  Chambers  island,  west  side,  N.  \ 
E.,  21  miles.    Green  island,  N.  N.  W.  i  N.,  lli  miles. 


OBEEN   BAT. 


196 


uflf  light-house,  N.  E.  by  jf. 
miles. 

•N.  —  A  fixed  white  liifht 
5r,  visible  16  miles.  Yello» 
ling.  On  the  western  point 
tern  passage  (6  miles  wide) 
8  off  the  north  point  of  the 
ttempt  the  passage  between 
light-house,  S.  8.  W.  |  W 
niles.     Boyer's  bluflf,  N.  e! 

abers  Island,  and  protection 
s  from  the  west  side  of  the 
t  of  the  island  in  a  southeast 

IGHT.— Aflxed  red  light 
J9  feet  high.  On  the  outer 
Be  river.  A  guide  into  the 
^.  ♦  E.,  5  miles.    Chamben 


onsist  of  two  parallel 
th  of  the  river  with  the 
64  feet  in  length,  term- 
2,710  feet  long,  and  ex- 
are  400  feet  apart.  Di- 
Jr:  Last  July,  there 
end  of  north  pier  there 
set,  thence  to  the  bridge 

f.— A  fixed  white  light, 
Iwelling,  40  feet  high, 

j- 
) 


extend  oflF  from  the 
quarters  and  one-half 
the  eastward  of  the 
iles.     Chambers  Island 


ide  of  the  island,  and 
B-tocIose  to  the  island 
ire  it  a  good  berth  to 


Green  Bay. 

'  passing  in  by  Sher- 
|)oard,  bring  the  lights 
ight  just  open  or  visi- 
Jlack  buoy  No.  3,  and 
-nd-black  buoy,— that 
when  open  the  lights 
pass  on  either  side  of 
e  best  water  will  be 


.—A  fixed  white  light, 
liles.  Red  tower,  32  feet 
side  of  the  entrance  into 
:s  island,  west  side,  N.  | 


(|uarr]r  Point  (Starnfeon  Bajr).— Red  20-foot  spar  buoy  in  15  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  eastern  side  of  a  small  shoal  with  only  6  feet  of  water  over  it,  off  thd 
entrance  to  Sawyer's  harbor.  Dunlap's  Reef  Range  front  light,  S.  8.  E.  i  E. ,  8jr 
miles.    Northern  point  of  entrance  to  Sawyer's  harbor,  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  660  yardJs. 

Hill's  Point  (outside). — Black,  20-foot  spar  buoy  in  15  feet  ot 
water.  Marks  the  western  edge  of  the  shoal  ground  that  extends  nearly 
across  Sturgeon  bay  from  the  east  shore,  leaving  a  narrow  channel  be- 
tween it  and  Hill's  point  on  the  west  shora.  Vessels  bound  into  Stur- 
geon bay  should  keep  to  the  westward  of  this  buoy,  and  of  Nos.  3  and  6 
as  well,  and  when  near  the  buoy  on  the  northwest  end  of  the  Middle 
ground  (Dunlap  reef),  the  channel  on  either  side  may  be  taken.  Hill's 
point,  S.  W.  i  S.,  400  yards. 

Hill's  Point. — Black,  2d-clas8  nun  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  western  edge  of  the  same  shoal  as  No.  1.  Hill's  point,  W.  } 
N.,  220  yards. 

Hill's  Point  (inside).— Black,  20-foot  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of 
water.  Marks  the  southwest  point  of  the  same  shoal.  Hill's  point,  N. 
W.  i  N,  560  yards. 

Middle  Ground  (northwest  end).— Red  and  black  horizon- 
tal stripes,  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  northwest  end  of 
the  middle  ground,  which  lies  in  raid-channel.  Dunlap's  Reef  Front 
light,  S.  S.  E.  i  E  ,  300  yards. 

DUNLAP  REEF  RANGE  LIGHTS.— Front  light,  fixed 
white,  6th  order,  visible  9f  miles.  Hed  wooden  tower,  14  feet  high,  on 
a  orib. 

Rear  Light. — Fixed  white,  5th  order,  visible  12  i  miles.  Lantern 
on  keeper's  white  frame  dwelling,  36  feet  high,  on  a  crib.  These  lights 
are  680  feet  apart,  bearing  S.  8.  E.  J  E.,  and  N.  N.  W.  |  W.  A  guide 
through  narrow  channel  abreast  Hill's  point,  Sturgeon  bay.  At  present 
the  best  water  is  found  in  the  channel  by  keeping  the  rearlight  just  open 
to  the  westward  of  the  front  light. 

West  Channel  Buoy.— Black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of^  water. 
Marks  th  o  west  point  of  the  middle  ground,  and  is  a  guide  through  the 
west  channel.  Buoy  on  northwest  end  of  the  middle  ground,  N.  by  W. 
^  W.,  430  yards.     East  channel  buoy,  E.  ^  S.,  333  yards. 

East  Channel  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  is  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  northeast  edge  of  the  middle  ground,  and  is  a  guide  through 
the  east  channel.  Buoy  on  northwest  end  of  middle  ground,  N.  W.  f  W., 
600  yards.     West  channel  buoy,  W.  i  N.,  333  yards. 

Middle  Ground  (southeast  end).— Red  and  black  horizontal 
stripes,  spar  buoy,  bushy  top,  in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks  the  southeast 
point  of  the  middle  ground  (Dunlap  reef).  Wharf  foot  of  Portage 
street.  Sturgeon  bay,  E.  S.  E.  f  E.,  900  yards. 

Bridge. — Just  above  the  middle  ground,  near  the  foot  of  St.  John's 
street,  in  the  city  of  Sturgeon  Bay,  a  bridge  spans  the  bay.  The  draw 
is  near  the  city  end  of  the  bridge. 

Standing  to  the  Southward  in  Green  Bay. 

Little  Sturgeon  Bay  is  6  miles  W.  S.  W.  from  the  southwest 
point  of  entrance  to  Big  Sturgeon  bay.  The  shore  between  the  two  bays 
18  rooky  with  spits  and  detached  rocky  shoals  2  miles  from  shore. 


196 


obehn  bat. 


PeshtigO  Shoal. — Red,  2d  class  can  buoy,  in  21  feet  of  water. 
Off  the  extreme  point  of  the  shoal,  which  extends  in  a  southeasterly  direc- 
tion from  Peshtigo  point.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to  pass  between 
the  buoy  and  the  point,  and  when  bound  to  Peshtigo  river  from  the 
northward  will  pass  the  buoy  three-fourths  of  a  mile  before  heading  for 
the  mouth  of  the  river.  Peshtigo  point,  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  3  miles. 
Green  Island  light-house,  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  8  miles. 

Oconto  Rivei*. — The  mouth  of  the  river  is  12  miles  W.  S.  W. 
from  the  extremity  of  Peshtigo  shoal.  There  is  a  pile  pier  extending 
into  12  feet  of  water,  about  2,000  feet  north  of  the  harbor  piers.  There 
is  no  light -house  at  Oconto. 

•  Oconto  Harbor. — The  project  for  the  improvement  of  this  har- 
bor consists  in  extending  the  slab  piers  built  by  the  city  of  Oconto  at 
the  mouth  of  the  river  into  10  feet  of  water,  the  piers  to  be  parallel,  150 
feet  apart,  direction  N.  E.  ^  E.  A  channel  to  be  dredged  between  them 
100  feet  wide  to  a  depth  of  8  feet  at  the  shore  line  and  10  feet  at  the 
outer  ends.  The  present  condition:  The  north  pier  is  1,600  feet  in 
length,  and  the  south  pier  is  2,150  feet.  The  south  pier  extends  into 
the  bay  875  feet  beyond  the  north  pier. 

Penpaukee  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  13  feet  of  water.  Marks 
the  extreme  end  of  the  shoal,  which  extends  in  a  southeasterly  direction 
from  the  land,  between  the  Oconto  and  Pensaukee  rivers.  The  least 
water  on  the  shoal  is  6  feet.  Mouth  of  the  Pensaukee  river,  W.  N.  W  I 
W.,  3|^  miles.     Peshtigo  Shoal  buoy,  N.  E.,  16  miles. 

Oconto  Bank. — ^This  shoal  is  2  miles  in  length,  and  about  ^  mile 
in  width  at  the  widest  part;  it  lies  about  3  miles  from  shore  between  the 
mouth  of  the  Oconto  river  and  Pensaukee  point.  The  outer  end  of  the 
harbor  piers  at  Oconto  bears  N.  W.  2^  miles  from  the  north  end  of  the 
bank,  and  the  Pensaukee  Shoal  buoy  bears  S.  W.  |-  S.,  3^  miles  from  the 
south  end.  The  general  direction  of  the  bank  is  north  and  south,  least 
water  is  6  J  feet. 

Pensaukee  River. — The  mouth  of  the  river  is  16  miles  N.  by 
E.  i  E.  from  Tail  Point  light,  and  3f  miles  W.  by  N.  from  Pensaukee 
Shoal  buoy. 

Pensaukee  Harbor. — The  project  for  the  improvement  of  this 
harbor  consists  in  the  construction  of  a  single  pier  into  10  feet  of  water, 
with  a  dredged  channel  100  feet  wide  and  10  feet  deep.  Present  condi- 
tion: 1,300  feet  of  the  proposed  2,600  feet  is  built,  and  a  channel  25 
feet  wide  and  10  feet  deep.  The  business  of  Pensaukee  being  entirely 
suspended,  the  further  prosecution  of  the  work  has  been  discontinued. 
A  storm  destroyed  the  pier  built  by  private  enterprise,  and  the  channel 
has  filled  up;  there  is  about  2  feet  depth. 

Big  and  Little  Suamico  Rivers  are  3  and  7  miles  respect- 
ively from  Tail  Point  light.  Vessels  load  at  anchor.  There  is  good 
holding  ground  off  both  places. 

The  west  shore  of  Qreen  bay  from  Peshtigo  point  to  Tail  point, 
at  the  head  of  the  bay,  is  shallow,  with  sandy  bottom.  Shoals  extend 
from  2  to  3  miles  from  shore,  which  require  a  sharp  lookout  and  frequent 
use  of  the  lead. 

TAIIi  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th 
order,  visible   14  miles.     Lantern  on  white  dwelling,  56  feet  high,  near 


GBBEN   BAT. 


197 


ngth,  and  about  ^  mile 


the  south  end  of  Long  Tail  point,  at  the  head  of  Green  bay,  and  4^  miles 
from  the  mouth  of  Fox  river.     A  guide  to  the  entrance  of  the  river. 
Grassy  Island  outer  light,  S.  f  W.,  2^  miles.    Red  Banks,  E.  by  N.,  6  miles.    • 
The  fog-signal  is  a  bell  struck  by  machinery  at  intervals  of  10  seconds. 

Green  Bl^  Harbor. — To  enter  the  Fox  river  from  Green  bay, 
bring  the  Tail  Point  light-house  to  bear  N.  W.  i  W.,  distant  1  mile, 
then  steer  in  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  leaving  the  Long  Tail  Point  buoy  on 
the  starboard  hand  close-to,  and  when  the  Sable  Point  buoy  bears  a  little 
abaft  the  beam,  steer  S.  ^  E.  for  the  outer  entrance  buoy  of  the  new  cut; 
then,  as  this  buoy  is  approached,  haul  up  and  pass  close  to  it,  to  the  east- 
ward, on  the  course  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  which  will  lead  fair  into  the  cut. 
Follow  the  buoys  until  the  deep  water  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  is 
reached  and  the  inaer  buoy  is  passed,  when  the  mid-channel  may  be 
taken  for  Green  Bay  city.  The  cut,  with  the  channel  dredged,  com- 
mences near  the  head  of  deep  water,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and 
extends  3,850  feet  in  a  N.  ^  E.  direction,  then  turns  to  the  eastward  in  a 
N.  by  E.  j  E.  direction,  extending  6,900  feet  to  13  feet  of  water  in  the 
channel  north  of  Grassy  island.  It  is  200  feet  in  width,  and  at  usual 
stages  of  water  the  depth  is  12^  feet.  Where  the  cut  passes  through 
Grassy  island  there  is  close  piling  with  a  light  at  each  end,  on  the  east 
side,  and  the  keeper's  frame  dwelling  on  the  island  between  them.  These 
lights  are  not  intended  to  be  used  as  ranges,  and  if  so  used  will  lead  ves- 
sels ashore,  but  they  mark  the  ends  of  the  piling.  At  the  mouth  of  the 
Fox  river  northeast  gales  usually  raise  the  water  from  1  to  2  feet,  and 
southwest  gales  lower  it  about  the  same. 

liong  Tail  Point. — Red,  2d-cla8s  can  buoy,  in  16  feet  of  water. 
At  the  southeast  point  of  the  shoal  off  Long  Tail  point,  and  is  the  first 
buoy  as  the  mouth  of  Fox  river  is  approached.  Tail  Point  light-house, 
N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  1,720  yards.  Sable  Point  buoy,  S.  W.  f  S.,  1,130 
yards. 

Sable  Point. — Black,  Sd-olass  nun  buoy,  in  15  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  end  of  the  spit  which  extends  in  a  westerly  direction  3^  miles 
from  Sable  point,  and  is  8.  ^  W.,  l-^  miles  from  Tail  Point  light.  Long 
Tail  Point  buoy,  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  1,130  yards.  Grassy  Island  outer  light, 
8.  i  W.,  2,370  yards. 

Outer  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  12  feet  of  water.     Marks  the 
west  side  of  the  outer  entrance  into  the  new  out  at  Grassy  island,  mouth* 
of  Fox  river,  Wisconsin.     Grassy  Island  outer  light,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  780 
yards.     Sable  point,  E.  IfT.  E.  ^  E.,  df  miles. 

Second  Buoy. — Red  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks  the 
West  Channel  bank  of  the  new  cut,  between  the  outer  entrance  buoy  and 
Grassy  Island  outer  light.  Outer  buoy  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  410  yards.  Grassy 
Island  outer  light,  S.  f  W.,  870  yards. 

GRASSY    ISLAND      LIGHT-STATION    (ui)per).— A 

fixed  white  light,  6th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work 
tower,  29  feet  high.  On  the  north  end  of  the  close-piling  on  the  east 
side  of  the  new  cut  through  Grassy  island,  at  the  entrance  to  Fox  river. 
The  keeper's  frame  dwelling  is  situated  on  the  island,  between  the  outer 
and  inner  lights.  Tail  Point  light-house,  N.  f  E.,  2^  miles.  Sable  Point 
N.  E.  by  E.  i  K.,  4iV  miles. 

GRASSY    ISLAND    LIGHT-STATION    (lower). -A 

fixed  white  light,  dth  order,  visible  11^  miles.     White,  open  frame-work 


198 


STBAITS   OF   MAGKmAO. 


the  close-piling  on  the  east 
Grassy  Island  outer  light, 


tower,  22  feet  high.     On  the  south  end  of 
aide  of  the  new  cut  through  Grassy  island. 
N.  by  E.  f  E.,  676  feet 

From  the  lower  light  in  the  cut  to  the  mouth  of  Fox  river,  the  dis- 
tance is  about  2,500  yards.  The  cut  is  200  feet  wide  and  marked  with  5 
red  buoys,  placed  on  the  channel  bank,  about  500  yards  apart,  and  are  io 
plain  night  from  one  to  another. 

Compass  Courses  and  Distances  in  the  Straits  of  Mackinac. 

Oheboygan  liight  to  Waugoshance. — When  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  north  of  light,  steer  W.  1  mile,  thence  N.  W.  by  W.  \  W.,  16 
miles,  with  Cheboygan  light  directly  astern  and  St  Helena  light  ahead,  to 
a  point  1  mile  north  of  the  railroad  dock  at  Old  Fort  Mackinac,  thence 
W.,  18j  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance  light,  pass- 
ing three-quarters  of  a  mile  north  of  it. 

Cheboygan  Biver  Light  to  Mackinac. — Run  out  on  the 

ranges  half  a  mile  past  the  light,  when  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  9  miles,  to  a 
point  three-quarters  of  a  mile  W.  S.  W.  of  the  buoy  on  Zela  shoal  (and 
note  that  the  Babbit's  Back  peak,  open  on  the  west  side  of  Mackinac 
island,  leads  clear  of  this  shoal),  thence  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  5^  miles,  then 
E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  mid-channel  between  Mackinac  and  Bound  islands,  when 
see  directions  for  entering  Mackinac  harbor  from  the  west. 

Cheboygan  River  Light  to  Point   St.   Ignace.— Run 

out  on  the  ranges  half  a  mile  past  the  light,  when  steer  ^.  W.  f  N.,  Vl\ 
miles,  to  the  railroad  wharf. 

Cheboygan  to  Detour. — Bun  out  on  the  range  l^  miles,  thence 
E.  by  N.  3  miles,  when  steer  N.  E.  f  E.,  with  Cheboygan  Main  light  di- 
rectly astern  for  30  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east  of  Detour  light  and  in 
range  of  Frying  Pan  and  Pipe  island  lights.  This  course  should  lead  to 
the  westward  but  very  close  to  the  Thirteen  foot  shoal  W.  f  N.  3f  miles 
from  Spectacle  Beef  light.  Heavy  draught  vessels  should  steer  N.  E.  by 
E.  f  E.,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  Spectacle  reef,  and  then  haul  up  about 
N.  E.  for  Detour. 

,      Cheboygan  to  Georgian  Bay.— See  courses  on  Lake  Huron, 
page   112. 

Cheboygan  to  Presque  Isle,  etc.— See  courses  on  Lake 
Huron,  "Fort  Gratiot  to  the  Straits  of  Mackinac,"  page  108,  which  re- 
verse. 

Mackinac  to  Waugoshance. — From  the  middle  of  the  har- 
bor, steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  4^^  miles,  and  past  the  range  of  Babbit's  Back 
peak  and  Point  St.  Ignaoe,  thenoe  W.  f  S.,  20  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
northwest  of  the  light. 

Mackinac  to  Detour. — From  the  middle  of  the  harbor,  steer 
E.  9^  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  north  of  Bois  Blanc  light,  then  E.  by  N.  \ 
N.,  26|  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east  of  Delour  light  and  in  range  with 
Frying  Pan  and  Pipe  Island  lights.  This  course  should  lead  about  \  a 
mile  south  of  the  1st  class  can  buoy  on  Martin's  reef,  in  thick  or  foggy 
weather,  or  at  night,  it  would  be  well  to  watch  this  course  closely. 

Mackinac  to  Georgian  Bay.— From  the  middle  of  the  har- 


BTBATTS   Ol    MACKINAC. 


199 


traits  of  Mackinac. 


urses  on  Lake  Huron, 


bor,  steer  E.  f  S.,  9^  miles,  to  a  point  ^  mile  north  of  Bois  Blano  li^ht, 
then  steer  E.  S.  E.  15  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  Spectacle  Reef 
light,  when  steer  E.  by  S.  f  8.,  119  miles,  to  a  point  f  miles  north  of  Cove 
Island  light. 

Straits  of  Mackinac  to  Poverty  Island  Passage,  north 
of  the  Beaver  Group. — When  1  mile  north  of  the  railroad  dock  at  Old 
Fort  Mackirac,  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  \Z\  miles,  passing  1  mile  southwest 
of  St.  Helena  shoal,  until  the  north  side  of  St.  Helena  island  bears  east, 
5  miles  distant,  and  Point  aux  Chenes  northeast  the  same  distance,  when 
Bteer  due  west,  29  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  north  of  Squaw  island,  pass- 
ing midway  between  the  White  shoals  and  Simmons'  reef,  when  steer  W. 
S.  W.  \  S.,  58  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile  south  of  Poverty 
Island  light. 

Straits  of  Mackinac  to  Seul'Choix  Point  and  Manis- 
tique  Kiver. — When  5  miles  west  of  St.  Helena,  as  in  the  course  to 
Poverty  Island  passage,  steer  W.  ^  N.,  45  miles,  passing  about  midway 
between  the  White  shoals  and  Simmons'  reef,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south 
of  Seul  Choiz  point,  thence  W.  f  N.,  16  miles,  to  I  mile  south  of  the 
entrance  to  Manistique  river. 

St.  Helena  to  WaugfOShance. — Haul  around  the  southeast 
point  of  the  island,  giving  the  buoy  a  good  berth,  when  steer  W.  by  S.  | 
S.,  12^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshauce  light,  keeping^ 
a  lookout  for  the  18-foot  shoal. 

Waugoshance  to  Chicago  (South  Passage).— When  i 
mile  northwest  of  the  light,  steer  S.  W.  f  S.,  65^  miles,  until  the  south- 
east point  of  North  Manitou  island  bears  northwest  1  mile,  when  steer 
the  same  course,  32  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light, 
thence  S.  by  W,  \  W.,  207  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago 
light. 

NoTK. — The  courses  given  on  the  charts  lead  south  of  Waugoshance 
light,  but  at  the  present  time  not  more  than  10  feet  can  be  carried 
through  that  channel  with  safety.  There  is  a  shoal  spot  N.  by  W,  \  W., 
1^  miles  from  the  light.  The  chart  gives  18  feet  of  water  over  it,  but 
the  present  stage  of  water  is  not  more  than  16  feet.  It  is  marked  with  a 
spar  buoy.  The  Vienna  shoal  bears  W.  S.  W.  from  the  light  If  miles, 
marked  with  a  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  2d  class  can  buoy.  The 
rock  on  which  there  was  only  13  feet  has  been  removed,  but  the  buoy  is 
continued  to  mark  other  shoal  spots  in  the  vicinity. 

Waugoshance   to   Milwaukee    (Middle    Passage). — 

When  1  mile  northwest  of  the  light,  steer  S.  W.  f  W.,  47  miles,  until  the 
South  Fox  Island  light  bears  north  1^  miles,  thence  the  same  course,  15 
miles,  until  the  west  side  of  North  Manitou  island  bears  south,  and  the 
extreme  north  point,  4^  miles  distant,  when  steer  8.  W.  by  S.  |  S.,  177 
miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light. 

Waugoshance  to  Sheboygan  (West  Passage).— When 
1  mile  northwest  of  the  light,  steer  S.  W.  \  W.,  27  miles,  until  Beaver 
Island  light  bears  northwest,  distant  2  miles,  thence  W.  by  8.  i  S.,  19^ 
miles,  to  a  point  1\  miles  northwest  from  the  north  point  of  South  Fox 
island,  then  steer  S.  W.  by  S.,  148  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  east  of 
Sheboygan  Pierhead  light. 

Waugoshance  to  Green  Bay. — When  2  miles  southeast  of 
Beaver  Island  light,  as  in  the  preceding  course  to  West  Passage,  steer 


200 


STSAnS   OF   MAOKUfAO. 


W.  I  S.,  63  miles,  to  a  point  one-fourth  of  a  mile  north  of  Rock  Island 
light,  keeping  a  lookout  for  the  buoy  on  9-foot  shoal,  2|  miles  S.  by  W. 
i  W.,  from  southeast  point  of  St.  Martin's  island.  Or  W.  ^  S.,  55  miles 
to  a  point  f  of  a  mile  south  of  Poverty  Island  light.  Or  W.  by  S.  |  S., 
70  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light.  When  see 
courses  in  Green  Bay. 

Waugoshance  to  Northport   and  Traverse   City,— 

When  1  mile  northwest  of  the  light,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  10  miles, 
until  Skilligallee  light  bears  east  2  miles,  then  S.  S.  W.  i  S.,  41^  miles, 
until  Northport  point  bears  N.  W.  1^  miles,  thence  to  Traverse  city,  8. 
f  W.,  24f  miles  to  the  dock.  To  make  the  dock  at  Northport,  see  North- 
port,  Harbor,  Grand  Traverse  bay. 

Waugoshance  to  Little  Traverse. — When  i  mile  north- 
west of  the  light,  steer  S.  f  W.,  17  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  west  of  Middle 
village,  passing  1  mile  east  of  the  shoal  lying  1^  miles  E.  N.  E.  of  Skilli- 
gallee light,  when  follow  the  she.  e  around,  giving  it  a  berth  of  1  mile,  for 
15  miles  to  Little  Traverse  point.    See  Little  Traverse  light,  page  164. 

Waugoshance  to  Beaver  Harbor. — When  i  mile  northwest 
of  the  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  12  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  the 
buoy  on  Hog  Island  reef;  thence  W.  ^  S.,  8  m-.les,  to  the  entrance  of  the 
harbor.  See  Beaver  Harbor  light,  page  163.  At  night  it  would  be  safer 
to  steer  S.  W.  by  W.,  12  miles,  when  haul  up  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  8^  miles, 
on  the  range  of  the  lights  at  Skilliscallee  and  Beaver  harbor.  This  range 
leads  1  mile  south  of  the  buoy  on  Hog  Island  reef. 

Waugoshance  to  Seul  Choix  Point  and  Manistique 
River. — When  three-fourths  of  a  mile  north  of  the  light,  steer  W.  by 
N.  ^  N.,  10^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  north  of  Hat  island,  thence  W.  ^ 
N.,  30  miles,  until  Seul  Choix  point  bears  north  1^  miles,  when  steer  W. 
f  N.,  16  miles,  tc  i    oint  1  mile  south  of  the  entrance  to  the  river. 

Waugoshance  to  Poverty  Island  Passage.— When  2 
miles  north  of  Hat  island,  as  in  the  course  to  Seul  Choix  point,  steer  W. 
i  N.,  14  miles,  until  Squaw  island  bears  south  2t  miles,  when  steer  W.  S. 
W.  ^  S.,  58  miles,  to  a  point  threo-fourths  of  a  mile  south  of  Poverty 
Island  light. 

Note. — The  route  from  St.  Helena  and  Waugoshance  to  Green  bay 
north  of  the  Beaver  group,  will  be  found  very  convenient  when  blowing 
hard  from  the  northward.  By  taking  this  route  vessels  can  keep  in 
smooth  water.     The  distances  are  about  equal. 

Waugoshance  to  Sturgeon  Bay  and  Gross  Village.— 

PaSii-ng  between  the  light  and  Waugoshance  island,  with  St.  Helena 
light-house  directly  astern,  steer  W.  S.  W.  i  S.,  passing  ^  mile  south  of 
Waugoshance  light  (keeping  a  lookout  for  the  reef  extending  in  an  east- 
erly direction  from  it),  and  when  in  range  with  Waugoshance  and  Skilli- 
gallee lights,  haul  up  on  that  bearing  S.  S.  W.  f  W.,  until  the  west  point 
of  Waugoshance  island  bears  E.  N.  E.  distant  2^  miles;  when  steer  S.E. 
i  E,,  8  miles,  to  the  middle  of  Sturgeon  bay;  or  S.  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  the 
same  distance  to  Cross  Village.  This  route  is  not  recommended  for  ves- 
sels drawing  over  9  feet  of  water. 

Sturgeon  Bay  is  a  good  harbor  for  small  vessels;  it  is  3^  miles  in 
a  northeasterly  direction  from  Cross  Village.  On  the  west  side  of  the 
bay,  a  point  with  shoal  water  extends  i  mile  into  the  lake  which  protects 


LAEB  UIOHIQAN. 


201 


it.froin  southwest  winds.  The  sand  hills  terminate  a  little  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  bay,  which  affords  a  good  leading  mark  at  night. 

NoTB. — ^The  light-houses  at  Waugoshance  and  Skilligallee  afford  a 
good  opportunity  for  vessel  masters  to  test  their  compasses,  by  hauling 
up  on  the  range  for  a  mile  or  two.  The  compass  course  is  S.  S.  W.  ^  to 
f  W. 

Beaver  Island. — ^There  is  good  anchorage  in  the  bight  on  the  east 
side  of  the  island,  and  protection  from  all  westerly  gales.  Large  sailing 
vessels  prefer  it  to  Beaver  harbor,  on  account  of  having  more  s^a  room 
to  get  away.  Vessels  frequently  come-to  off  the  harbor  in  from  6  to  8 
fathoms  with  the  light  ber,ring  about  "W.  N.  W. 

Hig^h  Island,  lying  west  of  the  north  end  of  Beaver  island,  has  a 
good  harbor  on  its  northeast  end,  with  good  holding  ground  and  protec- 
tion from  all  winds,  except  from  the  south.  To  make  the  anchorage 
from  the  south:  When  midway  between  Beaver  island  and  the  south  end 
of  High  island,  steer  about  north  until  abreast  of  the  bay,  and  haul  in 
W.  by  N.  ^  N.  Come-to  well  in  the  bay,  in  about  6  fathoms.  There  is 
a  flat  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay. 

Gull  Island  Reef.— 'This  very  dangerous  shoal,  with  only  5  feet 
of  water,  and  shoal  spots  to  the  south  and  east  of  it,  bears  S.  S.  E.  i  E., 
4  miles,  from  the  south  point  of  Gull  island,  and  in  range  with  the  south- 
east point  of  High  island  and  a  hill,  the  nearest  one  to  the  northwest 
point  of  Beaver  island.  Gull  island  is  the  most  westerly  island  of  the 
Beaver  group. 

Beaver  Island  Harbor  to  Little  Traverse.— When  i 

mile  E.  S.  E.  of  the  light,  steer  S.  E.  ^  E.,  31  miles,  to  within  1  mile  of 
the  shore,  then  E.  by  S.,  3  miles  along  the  shore,  giving  it  a  berth  of  1 
mile,  to  abreast  of  Harbor  point.  See  Little  Tra^^erse  Light-station, 
page  164. 

Beaver  Island  Harbor  to  Waugoshance.— When  i  mile 
E.  S.  E.  of  the  light,  steer  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  on  a  range  of  the  lights  at 
Beaver  harbor  and  Skilligallee,  8^  miles,  passing  1  mile  south  of  Hog  Is- 
land reef,  and  observe  that  Hog  Island  reef  lies  in  the  range  of  the  south 
point  of  Garden  island  and  the  middle  of  Whiskey  island,  when  steer 
N.  E.  by  E.,  12  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance  light. 

Beaver  Island  Harbor  to  Middle  Passage.— When  2 
miles  E.  S.  E.  from  the  light,  steer  S.  |  K,  9  miles,  passing  close  to  a  flat 
off  the  east  side  of  the  island,  thence  S.  W.  i  W.,  24|  miles,  to  a  point 
1^  miles  south  of  the  South  Fox  Island  light,  thence  S.  W.  f  W.,  16  miles, 
until  the  west  side  of  North  Manitou  island  bears  south,  and  the  extreme 
north  point  4^  miles  distant. 

Beaver  Island  Harbor  to  South  Passage.— When  2  miles 
E.  S.  E.  from  the  light,  steer  S.  f  E.,  0  miles,  passing  close  to  a  flat  off 
the  east  side  of  the  island,  thence  S.  W.  by  S.  i  S.,  44J  miles,  until  the 
southeast  point  of  North  Manitou  island  bears  N.  W.  1  mile,  when  steer 
S.  W.  f  S.,  32  miles,  to  a  point  4J  miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light. 

Beaver  Island  Harbor  to  Green  Bay.— When  2  miles  E. 
S.  E.  from  the  light,  steer  S.  f  E.,  9  miles,  thence  S.  W.  ^  W.,  6  miles, 
until  Beaver  Island  light  bears  northwest,  2  miles  distant,  when  see  course 
from  Waugoshance  to  Green  bay. 


202 


LAKE   MIOHIOAN. 


c 


II 


\  ' 


^' 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  on  Lake  Michigan. 

Nons. — Courses  and  bearings  corrected  for  magnetic  variation.    DistancM  in  , 
statute  miles. 

Little  Traverse  to  South  Passage.— When  one-qnarter 
of  a  mile  south  of  the  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  11^  miles,  to  a  point  1 
mile  north  of  Big  Rock  point,  then  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  24  miles,  until 
Cat  Head  point  bears  southeast  2  miles,  when  steer  southwest  29^  miles, 
until  Sleeping  Bear  point  bears  southeast,  1^  miles,  when  steer  S.  W.  f 
S.,  20f  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light. 

Little  Traverse  to  South  Fox  Island.— When  one-quarter 
of  a  mile  south  of  light,  steer  W.  f  S.,  4 If  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
south  of  South  Fox  Island  light. 

Northport  to  Point  Betsey. — When  i  mile  southeast  from 
Northport  point,  steer  N.  N.  E.,  4i  miles,  keeping  1  mile  from  shore,  then 
steer  N.  N.  W.  \  W.,  3^  miles,  until  Grand  Traverse  light  bears  S.  W.  by 
S.,  1^  miles;  thence  W.  by  8.  \  S.,  5^  miles,  until  Gat  Head  point  bears 
southeast,  2  milei ,  when  steer  80uthwest,29^  miles,  until  Sleeping  Bear 
point  bears  southeast  1^  miles,  when  steer  S.  W.  f  S.,  20f  miles,  to  a 
point  4^  miles  west  of  Pr'  :t  Betsey  light. 

South  Manitou  ^o  Beaver  Island  Harbor.— With  the 

light  astern,  steer  E.  N.  E.  ^  N.,  8  miles,  until  the  southeast  point  of 
North  Munl!^ou  island  bears  northwest,  1  mile  distant,  when  sea  course 
from  Beaver  island  harbor  to  South  passage. 

Middle  Passage  to  Chicago. — When  i^  miles  south  of  South 
Fox  Island  light,  steer  S.  W.  f  W.,  21  miles,  or  until  the  west  side  of 
South  Manitou  island  bears  south,  when  steer  S.  by  W.  \  W.,  a  little 
southerly,  240|  miles,  to  a  point  1\  miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

Point  Betsey  to  Chicago. — When  4^  miles  west  of  Point 
Betsey  light,  steer  S.  by  W.  \  W.,  207  milf,  to  a  point  2^  miles  east  of 
Chicago  light. 

Point  Betsey  to  Manistee. — When  2  miles  west  of  Point 
Betsey  light,  steer  S.  ^  W.,  31^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Manistee 
Pierhead  light. 

Point  Betsey  to  Grand  Haven.— When  4^  miles  west  of 
Point  Betsey  light,  steer  S.  by  W.,  45  miles,  until  Big  Point  Sable  light 
bears  east,  2  miles  distant,  thence  due  south,  30}  miles,  until  Little  Point 
Sable  light  bears  northeast,  3  miles,  passing  2  miles  west  of  it;  thence  8. 
by  E.  I  E.,  41^  miles,  to  a  poinc  m  range  with  Grand  Haven  lights, 
and  2^  miles  distant. 

Point  Betsey   to    Sturgeon   Bay   Ship-Canal.— From 

light  to  light,  W.  f  JN.,  52^  miles. 

Point  Betsey  to  Milwaukee.— When  4ti  miles  west  of  light 
steer  S.  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  139  miles,  to  a  point  8  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light. 

Point  Betsey  to  Michigan  City.— When  4^  miles  west  of 
light,  steer  S.  by  V* ,,  46  miles,  until  Big  Point  Sable  light  bears  east,  2 
miles,  when  stoer  8.  f  W.,  164  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northwest  of  the 
pierhead  light  at  Michigan  City. 


LAKE   MICHIOA.N. 


203 


ianal.— From 


Frankfort  to  Milwaukee. — When  1^  miles  west  of  light,  steer 
S.  W.  by  !S.  i  S.,  135  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead 
light. 

Frankfort  to  Manitowoc  and  Two  Rivers.— When  H 

miles  west  of  light,  steer  S.  W.  bjr  W.  ^  W.,  74  miles,  to  a  point  4^ 
miles  east  of  Manitowoc  Pierhead  lignt. 

Frankfort  to  Green  Bay. — When  l^  miles  west  of  light,  steer 
N.  W.  f  N.,  53  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light. 

Manistee  to  Sheboygan. — When  2  miles  west  of  pierhead 
light,  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  J  W.,  73  miles,  to  a  point  IJ  miles  east  from 
Sheboygan  Pierhead  light. 

Manistee  to  Manitowoc  and  Two  Rivers.— When  2  miles 
west  of  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  60  miles,  to  a  point  4;^  miles  east  of 
Manitowoc  Pierhead  light. 

Manistee  to  Green  Bay. — When  2  miles  west  of  light,  steer 
N.  N.  W.,  73  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light. 

Manistee  to  Michlg^an  City. — When  2  miles  west  of  light, 
steer  8.  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  16  miles,  to  u  point  2  miles  west  of  Big  Point 
Sable,  when  see  course  from  Point  Betsey  to  Michigan  City. 

Biff  Point  Sable  to  Little  Point  Sable.— When  2  miles 
west  of  Big  Point  Sable  light,  steer  due  S.,  28^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
west  of  Little  Point  Sable  light. 

liUdingfton  to  Big:  Point  Sable. — When  l^  miles  west  of 
Pere  Marquette  light,  steer  N.  N.  W.  ^  W.,  7f  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
west  of  Big  Point  Sable  light. 

Ludingfton  to  Little  Point  Sable. — When  l^  miles  west  of 
Pere  Marquette  light,  steer  S.  f  W.,  21  miles,  to  a  point  l|  miles  west  of 
Little  Point  Sable  light. 

Ludingrton  to  Manitowoc  and  Two  Rivers.— When  U 
miles  west  of  Pere  Marquette  light,  steer  W.  f  N.,  55  miles,  to  a  point 
4^  miles  east  from  Manitowoc  Pierhead  light. 

Ludington  to  Kewaunee. — When  l^  miles  west  of  Pere  Mar- 

Sjiette  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  60  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  E.  S. 
!.  from  the  end  of  north  pier  at  Kewaunee. 

Ludington  to  Sheboygan.— When  i^  miles  west  of  Pere  Mar- 
quette light,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  61  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  east  of 
Sheboygan  Pi'^rhead  light. 

Pentwater  to  Little  Point  Sable.— When  i^  miles  west  of 
Pentwater  light,  steer  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  10^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west 
of  Little  Point  Sable  light. 

Pentwater  to  Manitow  )c  and  Two  Rivers.— When  i^ 

miles  west  of  Pentwater  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  59  miles,  to  a  point 
4^  miles  ea£f<  of  Manitowoc  Pierhead  light. 

Pentwater  to  Sheboygan. — When  l^  miles  vest  of  Pentwa- 
ter light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  60  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  east  of  Sheboygan 
Pierhead  light. 

Pentwater  to  Milwaukee.— When  1^  miles  west  of  Pentwa- 
ter light,  steer  S.  W.  ^  W.,  86  miles,  to  a  'point  8  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light. 


I 


\ 


*         y 


204 


LAKE  MIOHIOAN. 


':■:■ 


White  Lake  to  Sheboygan.— When  i|  miles  west  of  White 
River  Pierhead  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  66  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles 
east  of  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light. 

Mnskegron  to  Sheboysan. — When  l^  miles  west  of  Muskegon 
Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  74^  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles 
east  of  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light. 

Muskegon  to  Milwaukee. — When  l^  miles  west  of  Muskegon 
Pierhead  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  75  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  east  of 
Milwaukee  Pierhead  light. 

Muskegon  to  Chicago. — When  l^  miles  west  of  Muskegon 
Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  110  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  east 
of  Chicago  light. 

Muskegon  to  St.  Joseph. — When  l^  miles  west  of  Muskegon 
Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  ^  AV.,  78  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  W.  by  W. 
from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light. 

Grand  Haven  to  Manitowoc. — When  in  range  of  the  two 
lights  at  Qrand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  N.  W.,  96  miles,  to  a  point 
3  miles  east  of  Manitowoc  Pierhead  light.. 

Grand  Haven  to  Sheboygan. — When  in  range  of  the  two 
lights  at  Qrand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  83  J 
miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  east  of  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light. 

Grand  Haven  to  Milwaukee. — When  in  range  of  the  two 
lights  at  Grand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  77^  miles,  to  a 
point  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light. 

Grand  Haven  to  Bacine. — When  in  range  of  the  two  lights 
at  Grand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  77^  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  of  Racine  Pierhead  light. 

Grand  Haven  to  Michigan  City.— When  in  range  of  the 
two  lights  at  Grand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  98 
miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northwest  from  the  pierhead  light.. 

^  Grand  Haven  to  Green  Bay. — When  in  range  of  the  two 
lights  f  Grand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  N.  N.  W.,  41^  miles,  until 
Little  Point  Sable  light  bears  northeast  3  miles,  when  steer  N.  by  W., 
116^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light. 

Grand  Haven  to  Chicago.— When  in  range  of  the  two  lights 
at  Grand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  S.  W.  f  8.,  103^  miles,  to  a  point 
2|  miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

Grand  Haven  to  Waukegan.— When  in  range  with  the  two 
lights  at  Grand  Haven,  and  2^  miles  off,  steer  S.  W.  f  W.,  90  miles,  to  a 
point  1^  miles  east  of  Waukegan  light. 

South  Haven  to  Sheboygan.— When  li  miles  W.  |  N.  from 
South  Haven  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  116  mile^,  to  a  point  If  miles  east 
of  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light. 

South  Haven  to  Waukegan.— When  li  miles  W.  ^  N.  from 
South  Haven  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  76i  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  east  of 
Waukegan  light. 

St.  Joseph  to  Green  Bay.— When  H  miles  N.  W.  by  W. 
from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  f  W.,  215f  miles,  to  a  point  2 
miles  S.  S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light. 


LAKE   MIOHIQAir. 


205 


St.  Joseph  to  Point  Betsey.— When  U  ™ile<3  northwest 
from  the  beacon-light,  steer  N.  f  W.,  107  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west 
of  Little  Point  Sable  light;  thence  due  N.,  28^  miles  to  a  point  2  miles 
west  of  Big  Point  Sable  light,  thence  N.  by  E.,  45  miles,  to  a  point  4^ 
miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light. 

St.  Joseph  to  Waukegan.— When  i^  miles  N.  W.  by  W. 
from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light,  steer  W.  by  N.,  67^  miles,  to  a  pomt  1^ 
miles  east  of  Waukegan  light. 

St.  Joseph  to  Chicago.— When  H  miles  N.  W.  by  W.  from 
St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light,  steer  W.  by  S.  }  S.,  56^  miles,  to  a  point  2^ 
miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

Michigan  City  to  Green  Bay.— When  i^  miles  northwest 
from  the  beacon-light,  steer  N.  ^  W.,  242  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S. 
E.  from  Pilot  Island  light. 

Michigan  City  to  St.  Joseph. — When  1|  miles  northwest 
from  the  beacon-light,  steer  N.  E.  f  In.,  34  miles,  to  a  point  N.  W.  by 
W.,  1^  miles  from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light. 

Michigan  City  to  Milwaukee. — When  i^  miles  northwest 
from  the  beacon-light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  100  miles,  to  a  point  8 
miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light. 

Michigan  City  'to  Chicago. — When  l^  miles  northwest  from 
the  beacon-light,  steti:  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  34^  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  east 
of  Chicago  light. 

Chicago  to  Wangoshance. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago 
light,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  207  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  west  of  Point 
Betsey  light;  thence  N.  E.  f  N.,  97^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest 
of  Waugoshance  light,  passing  1  mile  southeast  of  the  southeast  point  of 
North  Manitou  island. 

Chici^O  to  Green  Bay. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  i  E.,  238  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  8.  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light. 
For  directions  to  enter  the  bay,  see  Pilot  Island  light. 

Chicago  to  South  Haven. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chics^go 
light,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  73^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  W.  ^  N.from 
Soath  Haven  light. 

Chicago  to  Saugatuck. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  E.  i  E.,  86  miles,  to  a  point  1^* miles  west  of  Kalamazoo  light. 

Chicago  to  Holland. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  northeast,  91  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of  Holland  light. 

Chicago  to  Grand  Haven.— When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago 
light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  103-^  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  from  the  piers,  and 
in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand  Haven. 

Chicago  to  Muskegon. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  E.  oy  N.  ^  N.,  110  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of  Muskegon 
Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  White  Lake. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago 
light,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  117  miles,  to  a  point  1|  miles  west  of 
White  River  Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Pentwater. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  N.  E.  ^  N.,  181  miles,  until  Little  Point  Sable  light  bears  east  8 


rr 


11 

J   ; 

I    I        , 


206 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


l!    It". 


miles,  when  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  11  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of 
Pentwater  Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Ludington. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  by  £.  f  E.,  153  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of  Pere  Mar- 
quette Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Manistee. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  by  E.  I  £.,  159  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Big  Point  Sable 
light;  thence  N.  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Manis- 
tee Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Frankfort. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chicago  light, 
steer  N.  by  £.  f  E.,  200  miles,  passing  2  miles  west  of  Big  Point  Sable 
light,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of  Frankfort  Pierhead  lignt. 

Chicago  to  Calumet. — When  l  mile  ea?*;  of  Chicago  Pierhead 
light,  steer  S.  E.  by  S.,  6f  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east  of  buoy  on  Hyde 
Park  shoal,  then  S.  by  E.  5i  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east  of  Calumet 
Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Waukegan. — From  the  east  end  of  the  outer  break- 
water, steer  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  12  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  east  of  Grosse 
Pointe  light,  thence  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  22  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  east  of 
Waukegan  light. 

Chicago  to  Kenosha. — From  the  east  end  of  the  outer  break- 
water, steer  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  49^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  from 
Kenosha  Pierhead  light,  passing  inside  Chicago  Water-works  crib. 

Chicago  to  Racine. — From  the  east  end  of  the  out€x  breakwater, 
steer  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  59  miles,  to  a  point  half  a  mile  aast*  of  Racine 
Pierhead  light,  passing  inside  the  Racine  shoal.  See  Racine  reef,  page 
182. 

Chicago  to  Milwaukee.-^From  the  east  end  of  the  outer  break- 
water, steer  N.  f  W.,  62  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Wind  Point  light, 
passing  1}  miles  east  of  Racine  shoal,  then  N.  N.  W.  i  W.,  18  miles^  to 
a  point  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Sheboygan. — From  the  east  end  of  the  outer  break- 
water, steer  N.  ^  W.,  129  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  east  of  Sheboygan 
Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Manitowoc  and  Two  Rivers.— From  the  east 
end  of  the  outer  breakwater,  steer  N.  i  W.,  154  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles 
east  of  Manitowoc  Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Twin  River  Point,  Kewaunee  and  Ahne-^ 
pee. — From  the  east  end  of  the  outer  breakwater,  steer  N.  i  W.,  162 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Twin  River  Point  light,  thence  N.  f  W., 
17  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  the  pierhead  light  at  Kewaunee, 
or  N.  i  E.,  27i  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  the  harbor  piers 
at  Ahnepee. 

Chicago  to  Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Cai\aL — When  2^  miles^ 
east  of  Chicago  light,  steer  nopth,  205  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  southeast 
from  Sturgeon  Bay  Canal  Pierhead  light. 

Chicago  to  Bayley's  Harbor. — When  2^  miles  east  of  Chic- 
ago light,  steer  N.  ^  E.,  221  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  S.  S.  E.  i  E.  from 
the  Bayley's  Harbor  range-lights,  and  in  range  of  them. 

Chicago  to  Manistique  River. — When2i  miles  east  of  Chic- 


LAKE    MICHIGAN. 


201 


lilea  west  of 

bicago  light» 
f  Pere  Ilar- 

licago  ligbt> 

Point  Sable 

est  of  Manis- 

bicago  ligbty 
Point  Sable 

go  Pierbead 

loj  on  Hyde 

of  Calumet 

outer  break- 
ist  of  Grosse 
miles  east  of 

outer  break- 
ly  S.  i  S.  from 
ks  orib. 
i'  breakwater^ 
stp  of  Racine 
le  reef,  page 

9  outer  break- 
d  Point  ligbt, 
18  miles  J  to 

e  outer  break- 
>f  Sheboygan 

From  tbe  east 
point  3  milea 

md  Ahne- 

M.  i  W.,  162 
ence  N.  f  W., 
at  Kewaunee, 
barbor  piers 

hen  2^  miles^ 
liles  soutbeast 

east  of  Chic- 
E.  i  E.  from 

}  east  of  Chic- 


ago light,  steer  N.  ^  E.,  292  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  entrance  to 
Manistique  river,  passing  1  mile  east  of  the  shoal  east  of  Wiggins  point. 

Waukegan  to  Michigan  City.— When  i^  miles  east  of  Wau- 
kegan  light,  steer  S.  E.  f  E.,  61^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  northwest 
from  Michigan  City  Pierhead  light.- 

Waukegan  to  Point  Betsey  and  Soutli  Passage.— 

When  1^  miles  east  of  Waukegan  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  ^  N.,  178^^  miles, 
to  a  point  4^  miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light,  when  see  course  from 
Chicago  to  Waugoshance. 

Wankogan  to  Little  Point  iSable.— When  ij  miles  east  of 
Waukegan  light,  steer  N.N.  £.  f  E.,  110  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west 
of  Little  Point  Sable  light. 

Kenosha  to  Michigan  City.— Wheu  l  mile  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  from 
Kenosha  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  E.  f  S.,  73^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
northwest  of  the  pierhead  light  at  Michigan  City. 

Kenosha  to  South  Haven. — When  i  mile  E.  by  S.  i  S.,  from 
Kenosha  Pierhead  light,  steer  E.  ^  S.,  76^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
W.  ^  N.  from  South  Haven  light. 

Kenosha  to  Grand  Haven.— When  i  mile  E.  by  S.  ^  8., 
from  Kenosha  Pierhead  light,  steer  E.  N.  E.  f  N.,  82  miles,  to  a  point 
2^  miles  off.  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand  Haven. 

Kenosha  to  Point  Betsey. — When  i  mile  E.  byS.  ^  8,  from 
Keiiosha  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  163  miles,  to  a  point  4^ 
miles  west  of  Poin<^  Betsey  light. 

Bacine  to  Michigan  City.— When  l  mile  S.  E.  by  S.  from 
Bacine  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  E.  |  S.,  80^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
northwest  of  pierhead  light  at  Michigan  City.  This  course  leads  inside 
the  Bacine  shoal.     The  buoy  is  on  its  western  edge. 

Bacine  to  St.  Joseph. — When  l  mile  S.  E.  by  8.  from  the  pier- 
head light  at  Bacine,  steer  S.  E.  h^  E.  ^  E.,  76  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
N.  W.  by  W.  from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light  Avoid  the  extensive 
shoal  E.  by  S.,  1|  miles  from  Bacine  light 

Bacine  to  Manistee. — When  l  mile  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from  Ba- 
cine Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  127  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
west  of  Manistee  light.  Observe  that  the  main  light  kept  open  to  the 
northward  of  the  pierhead  light  leads  clear  of  Bacine  shoals. 

Bacine  to  Waugoshance. — When  i  mile  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from 
Bacine  Pierhead  light,  sLeer  N.  N.  £.  ^  E.,  152  miles,  to  a  point  4^ 
miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light,  when  steer  N.  K.  f  N.,  97J  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshanc*^.  iigbt,  passing  1  mile  southeast 
of  the  southeast  point  of  North  ManitCfU  island. 

Bacine  to  Green  Bay. — When  l  mile  El.  by  N,  ^  N.  from  Ba- 
cine Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  3^  miles  to  a  point  1  mile  east 
of  Wind  Point  light,  when  steer  N.  i  E.,  176  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S. 
S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light. 

Milwaukee  to  St.  Joseph. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  E.  ^  E.,  91i  miles,  to  a  point  N.  W.  by  W.  1^ 
miles  from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light. 

Milwaukee  to  South  Haven. — When  3  miles  east  of  Mil. 


208 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


'>} 


i  '■:  I  I 


1 

J 

wuakee  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  £.  by  E.  |  £.,  88f  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  W.  ^  N.  from  South  Haven  light. 

Milwaukee  to  Grand  Haven.— When  3  miles  east  of  Mil- 
waukee Pierhead  light,  steer  £.  ^  N.,  77^  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  from' 
the  piers,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand  Haven. 

Milwaukee  to  Muskegon. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  75  miles,  to  a  point  l^  miles  w^'st  of 
Muskegon  Pierhead  light. 

Milwaukee  to  Ludingrton.— When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.,  93  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of  Pere 
Marquette  light. 

Milwaukee  to  White  Lake. — When  3  miles  oast  of  Milwau- 
kee Pierhead  light,  steer  E.  N.  E.,  75  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of 
White  River  Pierhead  light. 

Milwaukee  to  Manistee. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  111^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of 
Manistee  light. 

Milwaukee  to  Saugatuck. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  E.  by  8.  ^  S.,  84  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of 
Kalamazoo  light. 

Milwaukee  to  Frankfort. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  185  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
west  of  Frankfort. 

Milwaukee   to  Point  Betsey  and   Waugoshance.— 

When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  stfjer  N.  E.  by  N.  f  N., 
139  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  west  of  Point  Betsey  light,  when  steer  N. 
B.  f  N.,  97^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance  light, 
passing  1  mile  from  the  southeast  point  of  North  Mauitou  island. 

Milwaukee  to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance.— 

When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  f  N., 
174  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  from  the  most  northerly  point  of  North 
Manitou  island,  and  in  range  of  its  west  side;  thence  N.  £.  f  E.,  15  miles, 
until  the  South  Fox  Island  light  bears  north  1^  miles,  thence  the  same 
course  N.  E.  f  E.,  47  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance 
light. 

Note. — Vessela  bound  down  through  this  passage  should  keep  the  highest  land 
OD  North  Fox  closed  with  the  southern  point  of  South  Fox  until  within  1  miles  of 
this  point,  to  avoid  the  18-foot  shoal  4i  miles  8.  f  W.  from  South  Fox  Island  light. 
A  rocky  spit  extends  in  a  southwest  direction  from  the  south  end  of  South  Fox 
island  one-half  mile. 

Milwaukee  to  Sheboygan. — When  S  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  ^  E.,  50^  miles,  to  a  point  if  miles  east  of  She- 
boygan Pierhead  light,  passing  1  mile  from  the  point  south  of  Sheboygan. 

Milwaukee  to  Twin  Biyer  Point  and  Sturgeon  Cay 
Ship-Canal. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer 
N.  f  E.,  84  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Twin  River  Point  light; 
thence  the  same  course  40^  miles  to  a  point  1^  miles  southeast  from  the 
Ship-canal  Pierhead  light,  passing  close  to  the  rooky  spots  south  of 
ttntrance  to  canal.  , 

\Iilwaukee  to  Bayley*s  Harbor.— When  3  miles  east  of 


LAKE   MICUIOAN. 


S09 


miles  east  of 


Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  by  E.,  142  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles 
S.  S.  E.  ^  E.  from  the  beacon,  and  in  line  with  the  range  lights.  When 
see  Bayley's  Harbor  range  lights. 

Milwaukee  to  Green  Bay. — When  3  miles  east  of  Milwaukee 
Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  159^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S. 
E.  from  Pilot  Island  light.     See  Pilot  Island  light. 

Milwaukee  to  Manistique  River.— When  3  miles  east  of 
Milwaukee  Pierhead  light,  steer  iN.  by  E.  f  E.,  214  miles,  to  a  point  S 
miles  tS.  S.  E.  from  the  entrance  to  Manistique  river. 

Port  Washington  to  Manistee. — When  i  mile  S.  E.  by  E. 
from  Port  Washington  light,  st^eer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  94^  miles,  to  a  point  2 
miles  west  of  Manistee  Pierhead  light. 

Port  Washington  to  North  Manitou  and  Waugo- 
shance. — When  l  mile  S.  E.  by  E.  from  Port  Washington  light,  steer 
N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.,  154  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  from  the  most  northern 
point  ot  Manitou  island,  and  in  range  with  its  west  side;  thence  N.  E.  f 
E.,  62  miled,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance  light.  See 
course  from  Milwaukee  to  Waugoshance. 

Port  Washington  to  Grand  Haven.— When  i  mile  S.  K 
by  E.  from  Port  Washington  light,  stter  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  81  miles,  to  a 
point  2}  miles  from  the  piers,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand 
Haven. 

Port  W^ashington  to  Green  Bay.— When  3  miles  east  from 
Port  Washington  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  135^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
S.  S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light. 

Port  Washington  to  Muskegon. — When  i  mile  S.  E.  by 
E.  from  Port  Washington  light,  steer  E.  ^  S.,  16  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  west  of  Muskegon  Pierhead  light. 

Port  Washington  to  ^t.  Joseph.— When  i  mileS.  E.  by 
E.  from  Port  Washington  light,  steer  S.  E.  f  S.,  110  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  N.  W.  by  W.  from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light. 

Port  Washington  to  Milwaukee.— When  i  mile  S.  E.  by 
£.  from  Port  Washington  light,  steer  S.  f  E.,  22  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
east  of  Milwaukee  North  Point  light,  then  S.  by  "VY".  f  W.,  ?  luJles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  east  of  Milwaukee  Pierhead  light. 

Sheboygan  to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance.— 

When  If  miles  east  from  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  |-  N., 
128  miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  from  the  most  northern  point  of  North 
Manitou  island,  and  in  range  of  its  west  side,  when  see  course  from  Mil- 
waukee to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. 

Sheboygan  to  St.  Joseph. — When  if  miles  east  of  Sheboy- 
gan Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  126^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
N.  W.  by  W.  from  St.  Joseph  Pi  -head  light. 

Sheboygan  to  Twin  River  Point  and  Sturgeon  Bay 
Ship-Canal. — When  if  miles  east  of  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light,  steer 
N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  83^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Twin  River  Point 
light;  thence  see  coarse  from  Milwaukee  to  Twin  River  point  and  Stur- 
geon Bay  ship-canal. 

Sheboygan  to  Green  Bay. — When  if  miles  east  of  Sheboygan 


210 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


'fl    ' 


Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  i  £.,  Ill  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E. ' 
of  Pilot  Island  light. 

Sheboyg^an  to  Waugoshance  (west  passage).— When 
If  miles  east  of  Sheboygan  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  NT,  148  miles, 
to  a  point  2^  miles  northwest  of  the  north  point  of  South  Fox  island; 
thence  E.  by  N.  |  N.,  19^  miles,  until  Beaver  Island  light  bears  north- 
west, 2  miles  distant,  when  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  27  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
north  ivest  of  Waugoshance  light. 

Note.— This  ronte  is  often  preferred  in  the  spring  and  fall,  when  heavy  westerly 
winds  prevail.  Ycajels  holding  on  to  the  west  shore  until  arriving  in  the  vicinity  of 
Bayley's  harbor,  will  keep  in  smooth  water,  and  if  the  wind  should  haul  to  the 
northwest,  they  can  fetch  the  passage  and  not  be  exposed  to  a  very  heavy  sea. 

Manitowoc  to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. — 

When  4^  miles  east  from  Manitowoc  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  ^  N.,  108 
miles,  to  a  point  4^  miles  from  the  most  northerly  point  of  North  Man- 
itou island,  and  in  range  with  its  west  side,  when  see  course  from  Mil- 
waukee to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. 

ManitO'^v  oc  to  Michigan  City. — When  3  miles  east  of  Man- 
itowoc Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  168  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles 
northwest  from  the  beacon-light  at  Michigan  City. 

Manitowoc  to  St.  Joseph. — When  3  miles  east  of  Manito- 
woc Pieihead  light,  steer  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  148  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N. 
W.  by  W.  from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light. 

Manitowoc   to  Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal.— When  4^ 

miles  east  from  Manitowoc  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  9^ 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of  Twin  River  Point  light,  when  see  course 
from  Milwaukee  to  Twin  River  point  and  Sturgeon  Bay  ship-canal. 

Manitowuc  t(^  South  Haven. — When  3  miles  east  from 
Manitowoc  Pierhead  i.ght,  steer  8.  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  134  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  W.  ^  N.  frcu  South  Hriven  Pierhead  light. 

Manitowoc  tc  Muskegon. — When  3  miles  east  from  Mani- 
towoc Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  E.  f  E.,  85  miles,  to  a  point  li  miles  west 
of  Muskegon  Pierhead  light. 

Manitowoc  to  Green  Bay. — When  2  miles  east  of  Twin 
River  Point  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Manitowoc  to  Sturgeon  Bay 
ship-canal,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  76  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from 
Pilot  Island  light. 

Manitowoc  to  Sheboygan. — When  if  miles  east  of  Manito- 
woc Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  i  W,  24  miles,  to  a  point  if  miles  east  of 
Sheboygan  Pierhead  light.  See  courses  from  Chicago  and  Milwaukee  to 
Sheboygan. 

Kewaunee  to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. — 

When  1  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  the  Kewaunee  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  f 
E.,  88  miles,  to  a  point  i^  miles  from  the  most  northerly  point  of  North 
Manitou  island,  and  in  range  with  its  west  side;  thence  see  course  from 
Milwaukee  to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. 

Kewaunee  to  Manistee. — When  i  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  the 
Kewaunee  Pierhead  light,  steer  £.  by  S.,  66^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
west  of  Manistee  Pierhead  light. 

Kewaunee  to  Grand  Haven.— When  i  mile  E,  S.  E.  from 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


211 


2  miles  S.  S.  B. 


9  £.  8.  £.  from 


the  Eewaanee  Pierhead  light,  fiteer  S.  E.  f  S.,  112  miles,  to  a  point  2^ 
miles  from  the  Pierhead  light,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand 
Haven. 

Kewaunee  to  St.  Joseph.— When  i  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  the 
Kewaunee  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  169  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  N.  W.  by  W.  from  St.  Joseph  Pierhead  light. 

Ke'waunee  to  Chicago. — When  2  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  the 
Kewaunee  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  ^  E.,  170  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles 
east  of  Chicago  light. 

Kewaunee  to  Green  Bay. — ^When  i  mile  E.  S.  E.  from  the 
Kewaunee  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  6i^  miles,  to  a  point  3 
miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light. 

Note. — There  are  rocky  spits,  detached  shoals,  and  rocky  spots  along  the  shore 
from  Kewaunee  to  Death's  Door,  rendering  navigation  dangerous  in  places  2  miles 
from  shore.  The  soundings  are  gradual,  and  in  thick  weather  or  on  dark  nights  the 
frequent  use  of  the  lead  is  necessary. 

Kewaunee  to  Twin  River  Point.— When  i*  mile  E.  S.  E. 
of  the  Kewaunee  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  f  E.,  17  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles 
east  of  Twin  Biver  point,  when  see  courses  from  Milwaukee  and  Chi- 
cago. 

Ahnepee  to  Twin  River  Point.— When  i^  miles  E.  S.  E. 
from  the  harbor  piers,  steer  S.  ^  W.,  27^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  east  of 
Twin  River  Point  light. 

Ahnepee   to   North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. — 

When  1^  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  the  harbor  piers,  steer  N.  E.  i  E.,  79  miles, 
to  a  point  4^  miles  from  the  most  northerly  point  of  North  Manitou 
island,  and  in  range  with  its  west  side;  whence  see  course  from  Milwau- 
kee to  North  Manitou  and  Waugoshance. 

Ahnepee  to  Grand  Haven. — When  i^  miles  E.  S.  E.  from 
the  harbor  piers,  steer  S.  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  119  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles 
from  the  Pierhead  light,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights  at  Grand  Haven. 

Ahnepee  to  Manistee.-  When  i^  miles  E.  S.  E.  of  the  har- 
b^:"  pK-8,  steer  E.  by  S.  |-  S.,  66^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  west  of  Manis- 
tee irierliead  light. 

Ahnepee  to  St.  Joseph. — When  l^  miles  E.  S.  E.  from  the 
harboi"  piers,  steer  S.  by  E.  |  E.,  178  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  W.  by 
W.  from  the  pierhead  light  at  St.  Joseph. 

Ahnepee  to  Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal. — When  2  miles 
E.  S.  E,  from  the  harbor  piers,  steer  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  18|  miles,  to  a  point 
2  miles  southeast  from  Sturgeon  Bay  Canal  light.  This  course  leads 
close  along  the  shore  and  requires  watching. 

Sturg^eon  Bay  Sliip  Canal  to  Michigan  City.— vV^hen 
1^  miles  southeast  of  the  pierhead  light,  steer  S.  ^  E.,  212  miles,  to  a 
point  1^  miles  northwest  irom  the  beacon-light  at  Michigan  City. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal  to  Racine. — When  1|  miles 
southeast  of  the  pierhead  light,  steer  8.  f  W.,  142  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
east  of  Wind  Point  light;  thence  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  3^  miles,  to  a  point  1 
mile  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from  Racine  Pierhead  light. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal  to  i^rand  Haven.— When 

1^  miles  southeast  of  the  pierhead  light,  steer  S.  8.  E.  ^  E.,  128  miles,  to 


■^:  -  ^-t ' 


212 


LAKE   MlGUlOAi;. 


a  point  2^  miles  from  the  pierhead  light,  afid  in  rang^  with  the  two  lights 
at  Grand  Haven. 

Sturgeon    Bay    Ship-Canal    to    Manistee.— When   i| 

miles  southeast  of  the  pierhead  light,  steer  S.  E.  f  E.,  58  miles,  to  a  point 
2  miles  west  of  Manistee  Pierhead  light. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal  to  Waugoshance,  passing 
south  of  Fox  islands. — When  1^  miles  southeast  of  the  pierhead  light, 
steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  81^  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  south  of  South  Fox 
island  light,  when  see  course  from  Milwaukee  to  Waugoshance. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal  to  Traverse  City.— When 
1^  miles  southeast  of  the  pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  66} miles, 
to  a  point  2  miles  from  the  most  northern  point  of  North  Manitou  island, 
and  in  range  with  its  west  side;  thence  E.  f  N.,  26  miles,  to  a  point  1^ 
miles  N.  E.  by  N.  from  Grand  Traverse  light;  thenoe  S.  S.  E.  ^  E.,  2^ 
miles,  when  steer  S.  ^  W.,  30  miles,  to  the  docks  at  Traverse  City. 

Sturgeon  Bay  Ship-Canal  to  South  Manitou.— When 

1^  miles  southeast  of  its  pierhead  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  t  N.,  60|  miles, 
to  a  point  2  miles  south  of  South  Manitou  Island  light. 

Bayley's  Harbor  to  Green  Bay.— Run  out  on  the  ranges  S. 
S.  E.  i  E.,  3  miles  from  the  front  light,  then  steer  E.  N.  E.,  3  miles,  when 
Bteor  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  16^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Pilot 
Island  light.     See  note  to  course  from  Kewaunee  to  Green  Bay. 

Bayley's  Harbor  to  South  Manitou. — Run  out  on  the 

ranges  S.  S.  I£.  ^  E.,  3  miles  from  the  front  light,  then  E.  i  S.,  49  miles, 
to  a  point  2^  miles  south  of  South  Manitou  Island  light. 

Bayley's  Harbor  to  Waugoshance,  north  of  the  Fox 
islands.  Run  out  on  the  ranges  3  miles  from  the  front  light,  S.  S.  E.  i 
E.;  thence  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  65  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  northwest 
of  the  north  point  of  South  Fox  island,  when  see  coarse  from  Sheboygan 
to  Waugoshance. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door).— Entering  Green  bay 
through  this  passage — When  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light,  steer 
N.  W.  i  W.,  4f  miles,  until  the  northwest  side  of  Plum  island  bears 
northeast,  passing  1  mile  south  of  Pilot  Island  light. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Ludington.— When 

2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light,  steer  S.  by  E.  ^E.,  84  miles,  to 
a  point  li^  miles  west  of  Big  Point  Sable:  thence  S.  S.  E.,  1^  miles,  to  a 
point  1^  miles  west  of  Pere  Marquette  Pierhead  light. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  I>oor)  to  Waugoshance. — 

When  2  miles  S.  S.  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light,  steer  E.  by  N.  i  N.,  70 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  southeast  of  Beaver  Island  light;  thence  N.  E.  i 
E..  27  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance  light. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  South  Manitou 
Island.— When  2  miles  S.  8,  E.  from  Pilot  Island  light,  steer  E.  S.  E. 
^  S.,  41  miles,  until  the  southwest  point  of  South  Manitou  island  bears 
north  2  miles;  then  steer  east  3  miles,  until  South  Manitou  Island  light 
bears  north  2  miles. 

llock  Island  Passage  into  Green  Bay,  between  Rock 
and  h»t.  Martin's  island.     See  Pottawatomie  light. 

Rock  Island  Passage  to  Chicago.— When  2  miles  E.  i  8. 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


213 


the  two  lights 


from  Rock  Island  light,  steer  S.  ^  W.,  246  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  east 
of  Chicago  light,  passing  inside  the  Fishing  Island  shoals. 

Poverty  Island  Passage  Into  Green  Bay,  between  Poverty 
island  on  the  east  side  and  Gull  islands  and  Gravelly  island  on  the  west. 
— For  directions  to  enter  the  bay  by  this  passage,  see  Poverty  island 
light. 

Poverty  Island  to  Chicago. — When  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
south  of  Poverty  Island  light,  steer  S.  f  W.,  256  miles,  to  a  point  2| 
miles  east  of  Chicago  light. 

Poverty  Island  to  Michigan  City. When  three-quarters 

of  a  mile  south  of  Poverty  Island  light,  steer  S.  ^  £.,  262  miles,  to  a 
point  1^  miles  northwest  from  the  beacon-light  at  Michigan  City. 

Poverty  Island  to  Waugoshance. — When  three-quarters  of 
a  mile  south  of  Poverty  Island  light,  steer  E.  ^  N.,  55  miles,  to  a  point  2 
miles  southeast  of  Beaver  Island  light;  thence  N.  E.  i  E.,  27  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  northwest  of  Waugoshance  light. 

Poverty  Island  to  the  Straits  of  Mackinac,  north  of 
the  Beaver  group. — When  three-quarters  of  a  mile  south  of  Poverty  Is- 
land light,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  58  miles,  to  a  point  2^  miles  nort^h  of 
Squaw  island;  thence  east  29  miles,  ranging  on  north  side  of  St.  Helena, 
parsing  about  midway  between  the  White  shoals  and  Simmons'  reef,  to  a 
point  6  miles  west  of  the  north  side  of  St.  Helena,  and  the  same  distance 
southwest  from  Point  aux  Chenes;  thence  E.  by  S.  f  3.,  13^-  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  north  of  the  railroad  dock  at  Old  Fort  Mackinac,  passing  1 
mile  south  of  St.  Helena  shoal  and  the  light  on  St.  Helena  island. 

Magnetic    Declinations  in  degrees  and  tenths,  corrected  to 

the  year  1890. 

• 

McGulpin's  Point '. 0. 5  E. 

Waugosbance 0.7  E. 

Beaver  Island  Light 1.8  E. 

South  Fox  iBland 1.0  E. 

South  Manitou  Island 2.0  E. 

Manistee 8.3  E. 

Little  Point  au  Sable 2.6  E. 

Grand  Haven 2.0  E. 

St.  Joseph 2.2  E. 

Michigan  City 2.7  E. 

Chicago 3.3  E. 

Racine 3.7  E. 

Milwaukee 4.0  E. 

Sheboygan 4.1  E. 

Twin  River  Point 4.0  E. 

Bayley's  Harbor 3.8  E. 

Rock  Island 2.9  E. 

Seul  Cholx  Point 1.4  E. 


between   Rock 
2  miles  B.  i  8. 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  in  Green  Bay. 

Bock  Island  Passage  to  Green  Bay.— When  one-fourth  of 
a  mile  north  of  Rook  Island  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  6  miles,  until  Boyer's 
bluff  bears  E.  S.  E.  1  mile;  thence  S.  W.  f  S.,  22^  miles,  keeping  Eagle 
Bluff  light  a  little  open  on  the  port  bow,  until  it  bears  S.  S.  £.  \  E.,  half 
a  mile  distant;  thence  S.  by  W.  6^  miles,  heading  a  little  inside  the  point 


214 


OREEN    BAY. 


"i 


north  of  Egg  harbor  (passing  the  light  give  the  shore  a  berth  of  500 
yards),  until  Hat  island  bears  W".  i  S.,  when  steer  8.  W.  I  S.,  49  miles, 
with  Grassy  Island  lights  open  a  little  on  the  port  bow  until  Long  Tail 
Point  light  bears  N.W.  ^  W.,  1  mile.     See  directions  to  enter  Fox  river. 

Rock  Island  Passage  to  Menominee. — When  one-fourth 
of  a  mile  north  of  Rock  Island  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  6  miles,  until  Buyer's 
bluflf  bears  E.  S.  E.,  1  mile;  thence  S.  W.  ^  W.,  26i  miles,  until  Cham- 
Jbers  Island  light  bears  E.  I  N.,  If  miles,  when  steer  S.  W.,  lOj  miles, 
to  a  point  1  mile  E.  N.  E.  of  Menomonee  Pierhead  light. 

Bock  Island  Passage  to  Escanaba.— When  one-fourth  of  a 
mile  north  of  Rock  Island  light,  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  16  miles,  until  Point 
Peninsular  light  bears  ir  E.  by  N.  |  N.,  3  mil  ,  and  the  buoy  on  10-foot 
shoal  E.  N.  E.  i  N.,  1  mile,  when  steer  N.  by  V.  ^  W.,  8^  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  east  of  Sand  Point  light. 

Rock  Island  Passage  to  Cedar  River. — When  one-fourth 
of  a  mile  north  of  Rook  Island  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  6  miles,  until  Boyer's 
bluff  bears  E.  S.  E.  1  mile;  thence  Vv'.  f  S.,  18|  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
southeast  of  the  Cedar  River  Pierhead  light. 

Rock  Island  Passage  to  Burnt  BlufiT,  Garden  Bluff, 
a,nd  the  Head  of  Bay  de  Noquette. — When  one-fourth  of  a  mile 
north  oJ  Rock  Island  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  18  miles,  to  a  point  one- 
fourth  of  a  mile  west  of  Burnt  bluff;  thence  N.  N.  E.  ^  E,,  8  miles,  to  a 
point  one-fourth  of  a  mile  west  of  Garden  bluff;  thence  the  same  course, 
5^  miles,  to  the  head  of  the  bay  in  3^  fathoms,  and  2^  miles  west  of 
Jack's  bluff. 

Poverty  Island  Passage  to  Escanaba.— When  three-fourths  of  a  mile 
«outh  of  Poverty  Island  light,  steer  W.  N.  W. ,  18i  miles,  until  Point  Peninsula  light 
bears  N,  E.  by  N.  #  N..  3  miles,  and  the  buoy  on  10-foot  shoal  bears  E.  N.  E.  i  N., 
1  mile,  when  steer  N.  by  W.  i  W. ,  8^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east  of  Sand  Point  light. 
Heavy-draught  vessels  when  about  f  mile  south  of  the  light  should  steer  N.  W.  i  W., 
8A  miles,  to  a  point  about  midway  between  the  buoys  on  Gravelly  Island  and  Pilot 
Island  shoals,  then  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.  14i  miles,  passing  f  mile  south  of  the  Corona 
shoal,  when  steer  as  above. 

Poverty  Island  Passage  to  Big  Bay  de  Noquette.— When  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile  south  of  Poverty  Island  light,  steer  N.  W.  i  W  5}  miles,  until 
Rock  Island  light  is  open  by  the  west  side  of  St.  Martin's  island;  thence  N.  i  E.,  8 
miles,  to  a  point  one  fourth  of  a  mile  west  of  Big  Burnt  bluflE;  thence  N.  N.  E.  i  E., 
ISi  miles,  until  Jack's  bluff  bears  east  2i  miles  distant. 

Burnt  Bluff. — In  the  bay  north  of  Burnt  bluff  there  is  good 
anchorajje  and  protection  from  all  winds;  to  make  the  anchorage,  haul 
around  the  bluff  and  steer  E.  f  N.  about  1  mile,  and  come-to  in  5  fathoms 
of  water. 

Og^ontz  Bay  is  on  the  northwest  side  of  Big  Bay  de  Noquette. 
To  enter  Ogontz  bay:  Get  the  west  side  of  Burnt  bluff  astern,  and  steer 
N.  f  W.,  10^  miles,  from  it  to  the  head  of  the  bay,  parsing  1  mile  east  of 
Isle  St.  Vital,  and  the  same  distance  west  of  a  9-foot  spot  2f  miles  E.  N. 
E.  i  N.  from  Round  island,  and  in  range  with  it  and  Garden  bluff. 

Garden  Bay  is  on  the  east  side  of  Garden  bluff.  It  has  good 
anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds.  To  make  the  anchorage:  Haul 
around  the  bluff,  and  steer  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  1^  miles,  and  come-to  in  3 
fathoms  of  water.    Just  east  of  the  bluff  the  water  is  shoal. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Escanaba.— When  2 

miles  S.  S.  E.  of  Pilot  Island  light,  steer  N.  W.  i  W.,  4|-  miles,  until  the 


n 

3( 


OBEEN    BAY. 


215 


!8,  until  Cham- 
W.,   lOi  miles, 

one-fourth  of  a 
88,  until  Point 


northwest  side  of  Plum  island  bears  N.  E.  1  mile,  when  steer  N.  f  W., 
30^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  east  of  Sand  Point  light,  passing  1^  miles 
west  of  buoy  on  Ten-foot  shoal.  When  well  past  the  buoy  on  Sand 
point,  haul  up  for  the  docks  at  EsoAuaba. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Big  Bay  de  No- 
quette. — When  the  northeast  side  of  Plum  island  bears  N\  E.  1  mile, 
steer  N.  i  E.>  o  miles,  until  the  north  point  of  Boyer's  bluflf  bears  east  1 
mile;  thence  N.  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  21f  miles,  to  a  point  one-half  mile  west 
of  Burnt  bluff;  thence  the  same  course  8  miles  until  Garden  bluff  bears 
east  i  mile. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Cedar  River.— When 

the  northwest  side  of  Plum  island  bears  N.  E.  1  mile,  steer  west  4^  miles; 
thence  W.  by  N.  i  N.,  14^  miles,  with  the  north  point  of  the  Door  bluff 
directly  ascem,  to  a  point  1  "iile  southeast  of  the  Cedar  River  Pierhead 
light,  passing  three-fourths  mile  south  of  buoy  on  the  Whale's  Back 
shoal. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Green  Bay.— When 

the  northwest  side  of  Plum  island  bears  N.  E.  1  mile,  steer  west,  5^  miles, 
to  a  point  1^  miles  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  the  north  point  of  the  Door  bluff; 
thence  S.  W.  f  S.,  12  miles,  until  Eagle  Bluff  light  bears  S.  S.  E.  -J  E.,  ^ 
mile,  when  see  course  from  Rock  island  to  Greeu  bay. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Menomonee. — 

When  the  northwest  side  of  Plum  island  beara  N.  E.  1  mile,  steer  west 
5^  miles  to  a  point  1^  miles  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  the  north  point  of  the 
Door  bluff;  thence  Vv.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  17^^  miles,  until  Chambers  Island  light 
bears  E.  f  N.,  If  miles,  when  steer  pouthwest,  lOf  miles,  to  a  point  1 
mile  E.  N.  E.  of  Menomonee  Pierhead  light. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Green  Bay,  passing 
West  of  Chambers  Island. — When  Chambers  Island  light  bears  E.  f  N., 
If  miles,  as  in  the  course  to  Menomonee,  steer  S.  f  W.,  12^  miles,  until 
Oreen  Island  light  bears  N.  W.  f  W.,  2^  miles;  thence  S.  W.  ^  8.,  39f 
miles,  until  Long  Tail  Point  light  bears  N.  W.  J  W.  1  mile. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Peshtigo.— When 

Green  Island  light  bears  N.  W.  f  W.,  2^  miles,  as  in  the  course  from 
Death's  Door  to  Green  Bay,  steer  S.  W.  |  S.,  8  miles,  until  the  buoy  on 
Peshtigo  shoal  bears  N.  W.  f  W.,  ^  mile  distant;  continue  the  same 
course  three-fourths  mile  to  clear  the  shoal,  when  haul  up  W.  by  N.  f 
N.,  3^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  the  mouth  of  Peshtigo  river. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Oconto.— When  tho 

buoy  on  Peshtigo  shoal  beara  N.  W.  f  W.,  ^  mile,  as  in  the  course  to 
Peshtigo,  sLeer  W.  S.  W.,  12  miles,  to  a  point  one-half  mile  northeast 
of  the  harbor  piers. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Favette.  — ^ /hen 
one-half  mile  w.ist  of  Burnt  bluff,  as  in  the  course  from  Death's  Door  to 
Big  Bay  de  Noquette,  steer  N.  E.  ^  N.,  heading  on  Snake  island  for  3f 
miles,  until  the  houses  in.  Snail  Shell  harbor  bears  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  when 
haul  in  mid-channel. 

Porte  des  Morts  (Death's  Door)  to  Washington 
Harbor. — When  the  northwest  side  of  Plum  island  bears  northeast  1 
mile,  steer  N.  ^  E.,  8  miles,  until  the  north  point  of  Boyer's  bluff  bears 
east  1  mile,  when  haul  around  the  bluff  point,  giving  it  a  berth  of  one- 


216 


ORE  EN    BAT. 


third  of  a  mile,  until  the  head  of  the  hay  hears  S.  hy  E.,  when  run  to  the 
dock  on  the  west  side,  or  come-to  in  the  head  of  the  hay  in  10  fathoms  of 
water.  There  is  good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds  except 
from  N.  N.  W.  hy  the  northward  to  N.  E.  The  shores  are  bold  and  can 
be  approached  close-to. 

Escanaba  to  Green  Bay. — When  i  mile  east  of  Sand  Point 
light,  steer  S.  |  E.,  6^  miles,  until  Point  Peninsular  light  bears  E.  ^  N., 
distant  3  miles;  thence  S.  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  37  miles,  until  Chambers  Island 
light  bears  E.  f  N<,  1}  miles;  when  see  course  from  Death's  Door  to  Green 
Bay  west  of  Chambers  island. 

Escanaba  to  Cedar  River. — When  l  mile  east  of  Sand  Point 
light,  steer  S.  J  E.,  5^  miles,  until  Point  Peninsular  light  bears  E.  ^  N., 
distant  3  mik*s;  thence  S.  W.  |  S.,  23|  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  southeast 
of  the  Cedar  River  Pierhead  light. 

Cedar  Fiver  to  Green  Bay.— When  i  mile  southeast  of  the 
Cedar  River  Pierhead  light,  steer  8.  ^  W.,  13^  miles,  until  Chambers 
Island  light  bears  E.  f  N.,  If  miles,  when  see  course  from  Death's  Door 
to  Green  Bay  west  of  Chambers  island. 

Cedar  River  to  Menomonee. — When  i  mile  southeast  ot  the 
Cedar  River  Pierhead  light,  steer  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  8^  miles,  until  Point 
Rochereau  bears  W.  N.  W  ,  2  mile^,  when  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  14| 
miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  E.  'A.  E.  of  Menomonee  Pierhead  light. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Menomonee.— When  i  mile  east  of 
Sherwood^  Point  light,  steer  N.  N.  W.  f  W.,  16^  miles,  to  a  point  1 
mile  E.  N.  E.  of  Menomonee  Pierhead  light,  passing  Ik  miles  west  of  the 
northwest  point  of  Green  island,  and  the  same  distance  east  of  the  shoal 
S.  S.  E.  of  the  entrance  to  Menomonee  river. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Green  Bay.— When  l  mile  east  of  Sher- 
wood's Point  light,  steer  W.  N.  W.,  2  miles;  thence  m  est,  4  miles,  until 
the  west  point  of  entrance  to  Little  Sturgeon  bay  bears  8.  ^  W.,  4  miles, 
when  steer  S.  W.  f  S.,  30  milee,  until  Long  Tail  Point  light  bears  N.  W. 
^  W.,  1  mile. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Feshtigo. — When  1  mile  east  of  Sher- 
wood's Point  light,  steer  W.  N.  W.,  2  miles;  thence  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  10^ 
miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  the  mouth  of  Peshtigo  river. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Oconto. — When  l  mile  east  of  Sher- 
wood's Point  light,  steer  W.  N.  W.,  2  miles;  thence  W.  f  S.,  17  miles,  to 
a  point  half  a  mile  northeast  of  the  harbor  piers. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Escanaba. — When  l  mile  east  of  Sher- 
wood's Point  light,  steer  N.  i  W.,  21J  miles,  until  Chambers  Island  light 
bearu  E.  f  N.,  If  miles,  passing  close  to  the  shoal  off  the  west  side  of 
Chambers  island;  thence  N.  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  37  miles,  until  Point  Penin- 
sular light  bears  E.  ^  N.,  3  miles,  when  steer  N.  ^  W.,  6^  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  east  of  Sand  Point  light. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Cedar  River,— When  if  miles  W.  f  S. 
from  Chambers  Island  light,  as  in  the  course  from  Sturgeon  bay  to  Es- 
canaba, steer  N.  i  E.,  13^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  southeast  of  the  Cedar 
River  Pierhead  light. 

Sturgeon  Bay  to  Fensaukee. — When  l  mile  east  of  Sher- 
wood's Point  light,  steer  W.  N.  W.,  2  miles;  thence  W.  S.  W.  k  S.,  19^ 


ORKKN    BAY. 


217 


to  a  point  1 


miles,  to  a  point  half  a  mile  southeast  from  Pensauke'e  Shoal  buoy,  when 
see  Pensaukee  river. 

Stureeon  Bay  to  Egg  Harbor. — When  i  mile  east  of 
Sherwood^  Point  light,  steer  N.  J  E.,  7^  miles,  ranging  on  the  west  side 
of  Chambers  island,  until  Green  Island  light  bears  northwest,  6  miles; 
thence  northeast  1  miles,  heading  on  the  point  2  miles  north  of  Egg 
harbor,  until  in  range  with  Hat  island  and  the  wood  dock  on  the  west 
side  of  Egg  harbor,  when  run  to  the  dock.  There  is  good  anchorage  in 
Egg  harbor,  but  the  bay  is  open  to  the  northwest. 

Egg  Harbor  to  Fish  Creek. — Bun  out  on  the  range  of  Hat 
island  1^  miles,  then  N.  by  E.  |  E.,  heading  on  Eagle  Bluff  light,  Bk 
miles,  until  the  dock  at  Fish  Greek  bears  southeast,  when  haul  in  for  it. 

Fish  Creek  to  Escanaba. — Run  out  on  the  range  of  the  dock 
and  the  South  Strawberry  island,  until  a  little  past  the  range  of  the  bluff 
bank,  1  mile  south  of  Fish  creek  and  Eagle  Bluff  light,  when  haul  up 
about  N.  by  E.,  heading  a  little  outside  Eagle  Bluff  light,  to  a  point  one- 
third  of  a  mile  west  of  it.  And  note  that  about  1  mile  north  of  the  dock 
at  Fish  creek,  a  rocky  flat  extends  from  the  main  shore  about  400  yards. 
A  rocky  shoal  extends  from  the  South  Strawberry  island  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  in  a  southeast  direction.  The  channel  is  between  these  shoals, 
and  is  about  one-third  of  a  mile  wide.  When  one-third  of  a  mile  west 
of  Eagle  Bluff  light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  9  miles,  until  Sister  bluff  bears 
S.  E.,  li  miles,  when  steer  N.  f  E.,  2li  miles,  until  Point  Peninsular 
light  bears  E.  i  N.,  3  miles;  thence  N.  ^  W.,  5^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile 
east  of  Sand  Point  light. 

Magnetic  Declinations,  in  degrees  and  tenths,  corrected 
to  the  year  1890: 

Head  ojf  Green  Bay 4°  .5  E. 

Green  island 3"  .9  E. 

Menomonee  harbor 4°  .0  E. 

Sturgeon  bay «'  .9  E. 

Egg  harbor H°  .4  E, 

Plum  island 2°  .9  E. 

Little  Bay  de  Noquette 3'  .0  E. 


<> » 


p-^T-*— ** 


218 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


H    ', 


I 


f 


it 
I 


1 

s 

.1 


'«^n* 


'M 


[IIpIIillP^TslI^^ 


wo 

CO 


«9*0« 


"f^A 


5^     g^iSiS^sSssss  g  8t:$S 


i^'^o^     feSsSsSSsegS2S  S  SS  :  :  :  :  : 


'^■8!fo 


■*. •«•  01  vH  ^^  ;^  ^-  r-l  r^  »     . 


y^oft. 


'°'n»»» 


1^ 


troa 


■»e4». 


''^JfOJI 


'flr 


■•^OWo 


*/0»B 


■»«/ft 


•4H, 


Ponifl     SfcSff 


■9oo 


*a-    ss 


o^m 


'Or    PisiiiSSsssjs 


•'s    iggpsSises 


^"^G   gggSI^SfeSS 


J -H  m  a<  I- ■<*  T< 
3  ^- o>  o  c»  o  »-i 

i  l-H  ?-l  T-l 

♦  


1-.®  —  QMJJf-CS 


■o*..,.^      ■*  vH  ■P^  1-»  ^^  1-^ 


*«  tH,»-i  »-t  -^  « 


i-ceoi-iiON 


'41       » 


Si  i 

Is 

•a  « 
0^[ 


:  fl 
o 

:  w 


:  a 


a. 


a 

I 
If 

S 

GO 


aas*.S»aiiM 


MsU 


8^ 


BTBAIT8   OF   8T.    HABT. 


219 


STRAITS  OF  ST.  MARY. 

Light-Houses  and  Buoys  Standing  North  and  West  in  tJie 

Straits  of  St.  Mary. 

The  St.  Mary's  River,  connecting  Lake  Huron  and  Superior,  is 
60|  miles  in  length  from  Point  Detour  to  Round  island,  Lake  Superior, 
and,  at  the  usual  stages  of  water,  is  navigable  for  vessels  drawing  15^ 
feet  of  water.  To  ascend  the  river  from  Lake  Huron  with  Detour  light- 
house N.  N.  W.  \  W.,  distant  2  miles,  and  in  line  with  Flying  Pan  Is- 
land, and  Pipe  Island  lights,  bearing  N.  \  W.  nearly,  proceed  on  that 
course  to  within  ^  to  |  of  a  mile  of  Frying  Pan  Island  light,  when  haul 
to  tlie  northeastward  to  clear  it,  giving  the  light  a  berth  of  about  250 
yards,  and  when  well  past  it  haul  up  for  the  east  side  of  Pipe  island,  and 
when  within  \  mile  of  it,  haul  to  the  northwestward  and  open  Pipe  Is- 
land light  on  the  starboard  bow,  leaving  black  buoy  No.  I  on  the  port 
hand.  When  abreast  of  Pipe  island,  head  for  the  opening  between  St. 
Joseph's  and  Lime  islands,  and  run  in  this  direction  1\  miles;  then  open 
Lime  island  on  the  starboard  bow,  heading  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.  until 
Round  island  is  about  twice  its  width  open  to  the  loft  or  westward  of 
Lime  island;  then  change  course  to  the  northward,  and  bring  Round  is- 
land  a  little  on  the  port  bow,  which  will  lead  clear  past  Lime  and  Round 
islands. 

After  passing  Round  island,  Pointe  auz  Chenes  black  buoy  will  be  in 
light  on  the  port  bow,  and  some  rocks  above  water  on  the  starboard. 
When  well  past  Pointe  aux  Chenes  black  buoy,  having  these  rocks  above 
water,  bearing  kbout  southeast,  change  course  so  as  to  bring  them  directly 
astern,  heading  N.  W.  \  W.  for  the  Ist-class  can  buoy  marking  the  turn- 
ing point  in  Mud  lake.  From  this  buoy,  head  a  little  east  of  Raines'  is- 
land, passing  up  the  river  between  the  buoys,  which  are  in  sight  from 
one  to  another  up  to  Little  Mud  lake,  the  course  through  which  is  north 
until  you  make  the  black  buoy  No.  13,  then  the  buoys  marking  each  side 
of  the  channel  are  again  in  sight  one  from  another,  until  above  the  Nee- 
bish  rapids. 

The  new  cu:  on  the  American  side  of  the  East  Neebish  rapids  ia  now 
completed  and  marked  by  buoys.  All  vessels  are  recommended  to  use  it. 
The  Eastern,  or  Canadian  channel,  is  still  buoyed,  but  is  not  as  safe  for 
vessels  <lrawing  over  12  feet  cf  water.  After  passing  the  rapids,  head 
about  N.  N.  W.  until  Duck  Island  buoy  is  in  sight,  which  must  be  left 
on  the  starboard  hand.  With  Duck  Island  buoy  abeam,  head  N.  by  W. 
for  the  cut  through  Lake  George,  which  is  marked  by  eleven  (11)  pairs 
of  buoys.  After  passing  through,  between  the  buoys,  head  N.  N.  E.  for 
Churchville  Point  black  buoy,  which  marks  another  turning-point,  and 
must  be  left  on  the  port  hand  in  passing  up. 

Above  this,  the  channel  is  marked,  up  to  the  canal,  by  buoys  visible 
from  one  to  another,  with  the  exception  of  the  bend  around  the  head  of 
Sugar  island,  above  Churchville,  in  making  which  the  Canada  shore  should 
be  kept  close  aboard. 

DETOUR  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  3d  order, 
visible  15^  miles.  White  iron  pile  tower,  70  feet  high,  connected  by  a 
covered  way  with  dwelling.     A  coast  light  on  the  south  end  of  Point 


220 


8TEAIT8   OF   8T.    MART. 


f 


I    1 

!  i 


Detour,  on  the  west  side  of  the  Detour  passage,  and  a  guide  into  the  pass- 
age. During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded,  giving 
a  Diast  of  8  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  52  seconds,  during  every 
minute.  Spectacle  Reef  light-house,  S.  W.  ^  S.,  16f  miles.  Bois  Blanc 
light-house,  i'.  W.  by  W.  i  W.,  264  miles.  Martin's  Reef  buoy,  W.  S.  W. 
f  W.,  Hi  miles. 

Detour  Shoal.— ?*!ack  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water.  Marks  a 
shoal  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  St.  Mary's  river.  Vessels  run- 
ning on  the  range  of  Frying  Pan  Island  light,  and  Pipe  Island  light  pass 
about  I  mile  to  the  eaotwara  of  this  shoal.  Frying  Pan  island,  N.  ^  £., 
If  miles.     Detour  light-house,  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  f  mile. 

FRYING-PAN  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed 
red  light,  visible  5f  miles.  Conical  iron  tower,  dark  red,  15  feet  high. 
On  Frying-Pan  Island,  mouth  of  St.  Mary's  river.  This  light  kept  in 
line  with  Pipe  Island  light,  bearing  nearly  N.  ^  W.,  distant  2  miles, 
guides  into  Detour  Passage.  Detour  light-house,  S.  S.  W.  i  W.,  2i 
miles. 

PIPE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light,  «th 
order,  visible  10  miles.  Red  brick  tower,  lantern  black;  detached 
white  frame  dwelling;  light  37^  feet  above  lake  level.  On  the  S.  W. 
end  of  Pipe  island,  4^  miles  above  Detour  light.  This  light  forms  a 
range  with  Frying-Pan  Island  light,  and  marks  the  channel  down  from 
Lime  island.  The  shores  of  Pipe  island  are  fairly  bold,  except  on  the 
north  side,  where  it  is  connected  to  a  small  islet  with  shoal  water; 
five-foot  shoal  buoy,  8.  f  E.,  1,400  yards. 

St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal  Range  (North  Pier)  Bea- 
con.— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  14  miles.  Upper  half  white,  lower 
half  black.  Triangular  open-frame  iron  tower,  60  feet  high.  Upper 
half  slatted.  On  the  north  pier,  about  450  feet  from  the  outer  end. 
Forms  a  range  with  the  following  light  for  the  channel  approaching 
the  canal.  St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal  Pierhead  light-station  (end  of  south 
pier),  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  1,650  feet. 

ST.  MARY'S  FALLS  CANAL  PIERHEAD  LIGHT- 
STATION. — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  11^  miles.  Brown,  circular 
iron  towor,  25  feet  high,  black  lantern.  On  the  outer  end  of  south 
pier.  Vessels  leaving  or  approaching  the  canal  will  bring  this  light  in 
range  with  the  one  on  the  north  pier,  bearing  E.  by  N.  f  N.  This 
range  passes  close  to  Red  buoy  No.  68,  which  is  placed  about  500 
yards  south  of  Vidal  shoal.  Pointe  aux  Pins  light-house  (Canada),  S. 
W.  by  W.  i  W.  5^  miles.  St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal  range,  north  pier  bea- 
con, E.  N.  E.  f  E,,  1,650  feet. 

St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal. — All  vessels  wishing  to  use  the  locks 
of  this  canal  must  give  the  following  signal,  viz.:  Two  long  and  two 
short  blasts  of  the  steam-whistle. 

The  International  Bridge,  which  spans  the  St.  Mary's  river 
at  the  head  of  the  Falls,  crosses  the  canal  near  the  upper  end. 

After  leavings  the  canal  get  on  range  of  the  lights  at  the  head  of 
the  canal,  which  guide  through  the  dredged  channel  southward  of  Vidal 
shoal  about  1  mile  above  the  canal,  and  when  well  past  the  shoal,  which 
is  marked  at  the  lower  end  by  a  red  buoy,  haul  a  little  to  the  westward, 
W.  by  S.  i  S.,  until  Big  point,  the  first  prominent  point  above  the  oanal 


I  iil 


ST&AITS   OF   ST.    MABT. 


221 


into  the  pass- 
anded,  giving 
during  every 
,  Bois  Blanc 
iioy,W.S.W. 

ber.    Marks  a 
Vessels  run- 
land  light  pass 
land,  N.  i  E., 

iN.— A  fixed 
,  15  feet  high. 
i  light  kept  in 
stant  2  miles, 
W.  i  W.,  2i 

red  light,  6th 
ack;   detached 

On  the  S.  W. 

light  forms  a 
nel  down  from 
,  except  on  the 
1  shoal   water; 

Pier)  Bea- 

f  white,  lower 
high.  Upper 
the  outer  end. 
el  approaching 
1  (end  of  south 

D  LIGHT- 

irown,   circular 

end  of   south 

ling  this  light  in 

'n.  t  N.    This 

sed    about    500 

ise  (Canada),  S. 

north  pier  bea- 

|to  use  the  locks 
long  and  two 

|st.  Mary's  river 
end. 

is  at  the  head  of 
[hward  of  Vidal 
jbhe  shoal,  which 
to  the  westward, 
I  above  the  canal 


on  the  Bonth  side,  bears  south ;  thence  S.  W.  by  W.  till  Point  stiz  Pins 
bears  N.  W.;  thence  S.  \V.  ^  S.  until  Point  aux  Pins  light  bears  north 
about  200  yards  distant,  when  steer  for  the  point  below  the  Mission, 
about  W.  B.  W.;  get  on  the  line  of  the  range  lights  to  guide  through 
the  cut  below  Round  island,  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  and  keep  on  this  range  until 
up  to  Round  island,  when  take  up  the  range  lights  to  guide  through  the 
cut  between  Round  island  and  Point  Iroquois,  W.  N.  W.  f  N.,  until  the 
Mission  bears  southwest,  when  steer  N.  "NV.  ^  N.  for  White  Fish  point 

To  pass  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  the  Middle  ground  and  Waiska  Bay 
shoal:  When  abreast  of  Round  island,  with  the  light-house  bearing  S.  by  £.  i  E., 
steer  W.  8.  W.  J  8.,  headmg  on  Waiska  Bay  point  lor  two  milf;8,  when  steer  N.  W. 
i  N.  for  White  Fish  point. 

Foote's  Dock  Beacon-Ught.— A  fixed  red  light  shown  from  a  lens  lantern 
hoisted  on  a  mast  on  the  shore  end  of  the  dock,  visible  5  miles  in  clear  weather.  A 
guide  to  clear  the  shoals  on  the  south  side  of  the  river. 

Point  nux  Pins  (Canadian  light).— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  8  miles. 
White,  square  wood  tower,  23  feet  high.  On  Point  aux  Pins,  at  the  north  side  of 
entrance  to  St.  Mary's  River. 

ROUND  ISLAND  BANGE  LIGHT  (Lower  Range).— 

Two  fixed  red  lights;  front  one  visible  10^  and  rear  light  12  miles. 

FrODt  lighty  6th  order,  white,  square  frame  tower,  18  feet  high. 

Rear  light,  5th  order,  white  pyramidal  tower,  square  in  plan,  83 
feet  above  the  lake  level,  lanterns  black.  White  frame  dwelling  near 
front  light.  On  south  side  of  entrance  to  St.  Mary*s  river,  nearly  oppo- 
site Point  aux  Pins.  This  range  guides  through  the  cut  below  Round 
island,  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  marked  by  2  spar  buoys. 

BOUND  ISLAND  RANGE  LIGHTS  (tipper  Range).— 

Two  fixed  white  lights;  front  one  visible  10^  miles,  and  rear  light  visible 
12  miles. 

Front  light,  6th  order,  white,  square  frame  tower,  21  feet  high. 

Rear  light,  5th  order,  white  pyramidal  tower,  square  in  plan,  36 
feet  above  lake  level,  lanterns  black.  White  frame  dwelling  near  front 
light.  On  the  main  land^  about  1  mile  E.  S.  £.  from  Round  island. 
This  range  guides  through  the  cut  between  Bound  Island  and  Point  Iro- 
quois, N.  W.  by  W.  f  W. 

ROUND  ISLAND  LIGHT  (Discontinued).— Gray  tower, 
36  feet  high,  rising  from  the  corner  of  stone  dwelling.  Near  the  north 
point  of  Round  island.     Point  Iroquois  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  6^  miles. 

Opposite  Middle  Ground. — Black  spar  buoy,  bushy  top,  in 
17  feet  of  water,  marks  the  south  side  of  the  cut  between  Round  island 
and  Point  Iroquois,  and  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand  in  passing  out  of 
the  river.  Round  Island  light-house,  S.  E.  by  E.  ^E.,  2,130  yards.  Point 
Iroquois,  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  4|  miles. 

Middle  Ground. — Red  spar  buoy,  bushy  top,  in  17  feet  of  water. 
On  the  north  side  of  the  cut  between  Round  island  and  Point  Iroquois, 
and  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  in  passing  up  the  river. 

Waiska  Bay. — Red,  3d-class  can  buoy  in  24  feet  of  water.  Three 
hundred  and  fifty  yards  south  of  a  group  of  three  shoals  west  of  Round 
island,  and  should  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  in  passing  into  Waiska 
bay  from  the  eastward.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to  pass  between  this 
buoy  and  the  black  Middle  Ground  buoy  No.  79.  Round  Island  light- 
house,  E.  i  S.,  1,800  yards.  Point  Iroquois  light-house,  N.  W.  by  W.  ^ 
W.,  6-J  miles. 


i  if 


m; 


I     l' 


222 


LAXS  8UPSBIOB. 


Waiska  Bay  Ib  a  good  harbor,  but  of  limited  capacity.  It  is  8 
miles  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.  from  mid-channel  opposite  Round  ittland,  and  4^ 
miles  S.  £.  by  S.  from  Point  Iroquois.  To  enter  the  harbor  haul  close 
around  the  point,  and  alongside  the  dock  which  is  just  inside  the  point. 
Or  come  to  anchor  a  little  inside  the  range  of  the  point;  further  in  the 
bay  ihe  water  is  shoal.  Vessels  generally  come*to  outside  the  point,  be- 
tween it  and  the  Mission,  in  from  4  to  5  fathoms,  where  there  is  good 
anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds  except  from  the  northwest;  but 
the  shoal  water  between  the  Mission  and  Point  Iroquois  prevents  any 
heavy  sea  making,  when  the  wind  is  in  that  direction. 

Channel  North  of  the  Middle  Ground  off  the  Mis- 
sion.— Buoys  have  Lccm  placed  by  authority  of  the  Light  House  Estab- 
lishment, as  follows: 

A  red  and  black  horizontal  striped  spar  buoy  in  17  feet  water,^ 
at  the  lower  end  of  the  middle  ground.  Round  Island  lighthouse  bears 
8.  E.  by  E.  i  E.,  2j  miles. 

A  red  and  blauk  horizontal  striped  spar  buoy  on  the  14-foot 
spot  near  the  middle  of  the  middle  ground. 

A  red  and  black  horizontal  striped  spar  buoy  at  the  upper  end 
of  the  middle  ground  in  18  feet  of  water.  Point  Iroquois  light-house 
bears  W.  by  M.,  2  miles. 

The  above  described  buoys  mark  the  middle  ground,  which  extend.^ 
about  1  k  miles  N.  W.  from  the  lower  buoy,  the  shoal  varies  in  depth 
from  14  to  18  feet. 

On  the  Canadian  side  of  this  channel  there  are  two  buoys,  as  follows: 

A  red  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water.  Round  Island  light-house 
bears  S.  E.  ^  £.,  2|  miles. 

A  red  spar  buoy  in  19  feet  of  water.  This  is  the  upper  buoy 
and  bears  N.  N.  W.,  1,100  yards  from  the  lower  red  buoy.  Tliese  two 
buoys  mark  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel,  which  is  in  no  place  less 
than  ^  a  mile  wide. 

After  passing  the  buoys  in  the  cut  near  Round  island,  haul  a  little  to 
the  northward  and  steer  N.  W.  This  will  carry  through  the  center  of 
channel  with  nothing  less  than  five  fathoms.  This  channel  is  broader> 
deeper  and  straighter  than  the  course  usually  steered. 


LAKE  SUPERIOR. 

Light-Houses f  Buoys  and  Harbors  Standing  Westward  along 
the  South  Shore  of  Lake  Superior, 


POINT  IROQUOIS  lilGHT-STATION.— A  flashing  white 
light,  4th   order,  visible  16:^  miles,  interval  between  flashes  30  seconds. 
White  tower,   56  f  3et  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way   with   white 
dwelling,  on  Point  Iroquois.    A  guide  to  and  from  St.  Mary's  river.    The 
fog-signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle,  in  duplicate,  which  will  sound  a 
blast  of  6  seconds  followed  by  an  interval  of  25  seconds.     Gros  Cap 


LAKE   Sni'EBIOB. 


223 


OQ  the  14-fool 


in  no  place  lesu 


yestward  along 


(Canada),  N.  N.  F.  f  E.,  3|  miles.    White  Fish  Point  light-house,  N.W. 
\  N.,  25^  miles.     Parisian  Island,  N.  N.  W.,  12  miles. 

WHITE  FISH  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  3d  order,  visible  16^  miles.  This  light  is  ordered  to  bechanced  to  a 
fixed  tohite  light  varied  by  red  flashes  at  intervals  of  20  seconds;  the  order 
of  the  light  will  not  be  changed.  Brown  iron  pile  structure,  70  feet  high, 
connected  by  a  covered  way  with  the  dwelling.  A  coast  light  on  White 
Fish  point,  and  a  guide  to  and  from  White  Fish  bay,  southeast  extremity 
of  Lake  Superior.  During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  steam-whistle  is 
Hounded,  giving  a  blast  of  5  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  13  sec- 
onds; then  a  blast  of  two  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  40  seconds. 
Point  Iroquois  light-house,  S.  E.  ^  S.,  25  J  miles.  North  point  of  Paris- 
ian island,  E.  S.  E.  f  E.,  11^  miles.  There  is  good  anchorage  in  the  bay 
south  of  the  light,  and  protection  from  north  and  westerly  gales;  the 
water  is  deep,  and  it  is  necessary  to  come-to  close  to  the  shore;  the  best 
anchorage  is  a  little  south  of  the  dock.  To  make  a  lee  from  the  west- 
ward haul  around  the  point,  giving  it  a  berth  of  three-fourths  of  a  mile, 
and  steer  in  W.  S.  W.,  about  1  mile  south  of  the  light.  Storm,  oantion- 
ary,  and  wind  signals  are  displayed  from  a  mast  near  the  fog-signals. 

Grand  Marais  (Mich.)  is  49  miles  about  W.  i  S.  from  White 
Fish  point,  and  8^  miles  east  of  Big  Sable  light. 

Grand  Marais  Harbor. — The  project  for  a  harbor  of  refuge  at 
this  place  consists  in  the  construction  of  two  parallel  piers,  500  feet 
apart,  extending  into  22  feet  of  water  in  Lake  Superior,  and  connected 
with  the  deep  water  in  the  bay  of  Grand  Marais,  by  a  cut  through  the 
sand  spit  which  separates  the  bay  from  the  lake,  making  a  channel  20  feet 
deep  and  300  feet  wide.     Direction  of  piers,  north. 

Present  Condition. — 1,300  feet  of  the  north  pier  is  completed 
and  about  800  feet  of  the  east  pier.  Last  summer  a  channel  was  dredged 
into  the  harbor,  midway  between  the  piers,  175  feet  wide  and  17  feet  deep, 
but  it  is  thought  it  will  soon  fill  up  again  unless  the  piers  are  extended. 

BIG  SABLE  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  3d 
order,  visible  171  miles.  White  tower  connected  by  covered  way  with 
<i  welling,  light  107  feet  above  lake  level.  A  coast  light  on  Point  au 
Sable,  67  miles  to  the  westward  of  White  Fish  point.  Grand  Island 
light-house,  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  27  miles.  A  rocky  spit  extends  from  the 
light  li  miles,  in  a  N.  N.  W.  direction. 

The  Shore  from  White  Fish  point  to  Big  Point  Sable,  is  fairly 
bold  with  sandy  b/)Ach,  and  can  be  approached  safely  to  within  1  mile. 

Grand  Sable. — A  stupendous  dune  of  Sand  between  Big  Sable 
light  and  Grand  Marais,  extends  4^  miles,  and  reaches  an  elevation  of 
400  feet,  making  an  excellent  landmark. 

Tlie  Pictured  Rocks.— After  passing  the  Rocky  spit  off  Big 
Point  Sable,  the  shore  is  bold  with  a  sandy  beach  for  about  16  miles, 
when  the  famous  Pictured  Rocks  are  reached;  they  extend  from  the 
Chappel  rock  to  within  2^  miles  of  Sand  point,  a  distance  of  nearly  10 
miles;  the  shore  along  the  Pictured  Rocks  is  bold,  and  caa  be  approached 
close-to;  their  greatest  height  is  170  feet. 

GRAND  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  light,  va- 
ried by  white  flashes,  interval  between  the  flashes  90  seconds,  4th  order, 
visible  19^  miles.  Yellow  tower,  rising  from  brick  dwelling,  light  206 
feet  above  lake  level.     On  the  westward,  one  of  the  two  north  points  of 


LAKE   8UP££IOU. 


225 


Grand  island.  A  coast-light  and  guide  into  Grand  Island  harbor.  Big 
Sable  light-house.,  £.  N.  E.  f  E.,  27  miles. 

Grand  Island  Harbor.— Red  spar  buoy,  in  12  feet  of  water. 
Marks  the  extreme  end  of  shoal  off  Grand  Island  Harbor  light-house. 
Grand  Island  Harbor  light-house,  W.  ^  S.,  distant  360  yards. 

GRAND   ISLAND   HARBOR   LIGHT-STATION.—A 

fixed  white  light,  visible  13^  miles.  White  tower,  on  frame  dwelling. 
On  a  low  sand  point  on  the  southeast  extreme  of  Grand  island,  at  the 
narrowest  point  of  the  channel  between  the  island  and  the  main-land. 
Sand  point,  E.  by  S.,  1,200  yards.     Powell's  point,  S.  W.  f  W.,  m  miles. 

To  Enter  Grand  Island  Harbor  from  the  Eastward. — When 
half  a  mile  north  of  the  Grand  Portal,  steer  S.  W.  ^  S.,  passing  one-quar- 
ter of  a  mile  outside  of  Castle  point.  On  approaching  the  narrows,  keep 
the  red  buoy  on  the  shoal  350  yards  E.  ^  N.  of  the  beacon,  a  little  open 
on  the  starboard  bow,  and  passing,  give  it  a  berth  of  150  yards,  keeping 
a  lookout  for  the  shoal  off  Sand  point. 

Making  this  harbor  from  the  northward,  give  Trout  point,  the  most 
easterly  point  of  Grand  island,  a  good  berth,  and  avoid  the  shoal  extend- 
ing northeast  two-thirds  of  a  mile,  and  another  detached  shoal  1^  miles 
southeast  from  it,  and  do  not  haul  up  for  the  entrance  until  the  light 
opens  out  by  the  shore,  when  bring  it  to  bear  a  little  on  the  starboard 
bow,  heading  S.  W.  ^  S.,  and  proceed  as  above.  When  abreast  of  the 
light,  steer  S.  W.  by  S.  f  S.  for  the  anchorage  at  the  head  of  South  bay, 
or  stand  on  until  Williams'  landing  bears  west,  when  haul  up  on  that 
bearing,  and  on  approaching  it  haul  to  the  northward,  and  come-to  off 
the  houses  on  the  west  shore  off  the  North  bay,  in  6  to  8  fathoms.  Good 
anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds. 

Munising^y  on  the  east  side  of  the  south  bay,  has  a  dock  at  present 
very  much  out  of  repair,  and  an  iron  furnace,  which  is  out  of  blast,  and 
business  is  almost  entirely  suspended. 

Williams'  Landing  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  12  feet  of 
water.  On  the  south  point  of  the  12-foot  curve  of  the  shoal  south  of 
Grand  island.  Williams'  landing,  N.  E.  ^  E.,  740  yards.  Grand  Island 
Harbor  Range  light  (front),  S.  W.  i  S.,  1,490  yards. 

Grand  Island  Harbor  Range  Lights. — Two  fixed  white 
lights;  front  light  visible  10^  miles;  rear  light,  12^  miles.  Front  light, 
wooden  beacon,  19  feet  high.  Rear  light,  tower  on  frame  dwelling,  32 
feet  high.  Both  painted  white.  On  the  south  shore,  at  the  western 
entrance  into  Williams'  harbor  and  South  bay.  They  are  guides  for 
entering  the  western  channel.  The  lights  are  in  range  N.  by  W.  i  W. 
and  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  distant  from  each  other  500  feet. 

To  Enter  Grand  Island  Harbor  from  the  Westward. — 
When  1  mile  N.  E.  |  N.  of  the  North  point  of  Wood  island,  and  in  line 
with  the  northwest  side  of  Grand  island,  steer  in  on  the  ranges  S.  by  E. 
I  E.,  and  when  a  little  past  the  range  of  the  two  lower  points  of  Grand 
island,  haul  up  to  E.  ^  S.,  heading  for  Powell's  point,  and  passing  to  the 
southward  of  the  buoy;  and  when  the  southwest  point  of  Grand  island 
and  the  south  point  of  Williams'  island  are  in  range,  haul  up  to  north- 
east for  an  anchorage  in  Williams'  harbor,  or  stand  on,  following  the 
shore  around  Powells'  point,  not  approaching  it  nearer  than  400  yards, 
for  an  anchorage  in  South  bay.     Or  stand  in  on  the  ranges  until  within 


!l! 


3sa 


LAKB  SUPEBIOB. 


5: 


i 


a  little  less  than  half  a  mile  of  the  front  light,  until  the  water  shoals  to  8 
fathoms,  when  haul  up  E.  ^  N.  about  half  a  mile,  and  oome-to  south  of 
the  red  buoy,  where  there  is  good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all 
winds,  in  10  to  12  fathoms  of  water. 

NoTB. — StraDgers  should  not  attempt  the  passage  south  of  Williams'  island  or 
betweea  Williams'  and  Wood  islands. 

The  shore  from  Grand  Island  harbor  to  Shot  poiri'  is  generally 
rocky  and  dangerous.  There  are  numerous  rocks  and  sand  spits  between 
the  south  point  of  Williams*  islrnd  and  the  main  shore  to  the  south  of 
it.  A  rocky  spit  extends  nearly  half  a  mile  N.  N.  W.  from  the  north 
end  of  Wood  island;  rocky  shoals  If  miles  north  of  Train  point;  a  rocky 
shoal  N.  N.  W.,  1  mile  from  tlie  north  end  of  Train  island,  and  rocky 
spits  extending  in  a  northern  direction  from  Laughing  Fish  point  and 
Shot  point. 

From  Shot  point  to  Marquette  ^he  shore  in  bold,  with  sand  and  gravel 
beach. 

MARQUETTE  LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white  light, 
4th  order,  visible  15|  miles.  Yellow  tower,  33  feet  high,  rising  from 
brick  dwelling.  Light,  77  feet  above  lake  level.  A  coast  and  harbor 
light,  about  130  yards  from  the  end  of  the  north  point  of  Marquette 
harbor.  During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded, 
giving  2  blasts  each  minute,  with  equal  intervals  between  them:  duration 
of  each  blast,  5  seconds.  The  signal-house  is  situated  close  to  the  end  of 
the  point.  Grand  Island  light-house,  E.  ^  N.,  33  miles.  To  the  east- 
ward of  the  light,  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile,  there  are  rocks  awash  and 
shoal  spots. 

Marquette  Breakwater  Beacon-Light.  —  A  fixed  red 
light,  6th  order,  visible  8^  miles.     Brown  skeleton  iron  tower,  square  in 

Klan.     On  the  outer  end  of  the  breakwater  protecting  Marquette  harbor, 
[arquette  light-house,  N.  by  E.,  956  yards  from  the  beacon. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  at  the  north  end  of  the  breakwater* 
The  breakwater  commences  at  the  bluff  point,  410  yards  inside,  or  to  the 
westward  of  Light-house  point,  and  extends  out  from  the  land  S.  f  E., 
670  yards.  Vessels  intending  to  anchor  in  the  harbor  will  pass  the 
southern  end  of  the  breakwater,  and  haul  up  to  the  northward,  anchor- 
ing in  4  or  4^  fathoms  of  water,  160  or  200  yards  from  it;  or  run  along- 
side the  breakwater. 

Presque  Isle  is  a  rocky  point  8i  miles  north  of  Marquette  light, 
the  shore  un  the  point  is  steep-to.  A  little  less  than  five-eighths  of  a  mile 
east  of  the  point,  there  are  three  large  rocks  which  rise  abruptly  from  the 
bottom;  the  northerly  one  is  the  largest,  being  about  20  feet  high. 
There  is  a  good  wide  channel  between  the  rooks  and  the  point.  Vessels 
passing  Presquo  Isle  point  on  a  dark  night,  should  not  haul  up  for  Mar- 
quette until  the  red  light  on  the  breakwater  opens  to  the  eastward  of  the 
main  light,  as  the  two  lights  in  range  lead  to  the  eastward  and  clear  of 
the  rocks.  And  observe  that  the  beacon  in  range  with  the  cupola  on  the 
Marquette  rolling  mills  clears  the  rocks  oft  the  Marquette  main-light. 

GRANITE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  variod  by  red  fliishes,  at  intervals  of  00  seconds,  4th  order,  vif^ible 
17  miles,  light  03  feet  above  lake  level.     Granite  tower,  34  feet  high, 


LAKE   8UPRBIOB. 


227 


lliams'  island  or 


rising  from  granite  dwelling.  On  Granite  island,  about  12^  miles  to  the 
northward  of  Marquette.  During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  fog-bell, 
struck  by  machinery,  is  sounded,  giving  5  strokes  a  minute.  Granite 
rock  has  an  area  of  about  1  acre,  and  is  steep-to  on  all  sides.  Prenque 
Isle  point,  S.  by  E.  ^  £.,  0  miles.  Grand  Island  light-house,  E.  S.  E.  f 
E.,  36^  miles. 

STANNARD  ROCK  LIGHT-STATION.— A  flashing  white 
light,  visible  17f  miles,  2d  order,  interval  between  flashes  30  seconds. 
Gray,  circular,  cut  stone  tower,  78^  feet  high,  on  circular  pier  23J  feet 
above  the  lake.  Marks  northern  end  of  dangerous  outlying  reef,  extend- 
ing in  a  N.  by  W.  and  8.  by  E.  direction,  970  yards,  and  about  500  yards 
wide.  The  fog-signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle  (in  duplicate),  giving  a 
blast  of  3  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  an  interval  of  10  seconds;  then 
a  blast  of  5  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  an  interval  of  42  seconds.  Mar- 
quette light-house,  S.  f  W.,  distant  about  44^  miles.  Manitou  light- 
house, N.  W.  f  W.,  24|-  miles.  Vessels  passing  north  of  the  reef  should 
give  the  light  a  berth  of  800  yards.  Shoal  water  extends  in  a  northwest- 
erly direction  350  yards,  and  there  is  a  small  shoal,  least  water  10  fqet, 
three-fourths  to  seven-eighths  of  a  mile,  about  W.  by  N.  from  the  lighi. 
The  3-foot  spot  reported  to  be  one-half  mile  northwest  of  the  light,  and 
the  2  detached  rocks  with  8' feet  of  water  1,400  feet  west  of  the  beacon, 
have  no  existence  in  those  localities. 

Stannard  Rock  Day  Beacon. — Cut  stone  beacon  8  feet 
high,  9  feet  diameter  at  base,  surmounted  by  a  wrought  iron  shaft.  On 
the  south  shoal  of  Stannard's  reef,  about  40  yards  from  its  extreme  south 
end.  Stannard's  Rock  light-house,  N.  N.  W.,  730  yards.  Vessels  can 
pass  close  to  the  beacon  on  the  south  side. 

HURON  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  3^  order,  visible  22^  miles.  Granite  tower  34  feet  high,  rising 
from  granite  dwelling;  light  197  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  A 
ooast  light,  on  the  north  side  and  nearly  midway  between  the  two  ends 
of  West  Huron  island.  During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  steam-whistle 
is  sounded,  giving  a  blast  of  8  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  52 
seconds.  Fog  signal  on  the  northwest  end  of  the  island.  Stannard's 
Rock  light-house,  N.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  39}  miles.  Manitou  Island  light- 
house, N.  N.  E.  ^  E.,  37^  miles.  The  shores  of  Huron  islands  are  bold 
and  can  be  approached  close-to;  except  off  the  east  end  of  East  Huron, 
where  there  are  two  small  patches  of  rock  awash.  There  is  a  good  chan- 
nel between  the  East  and  West  Huron  islands,  and  a  channel  2^  miles 
wide  between  the  islands  and  the  main  shore. 

The  shore  from  Presque  Isle  to  Point  Abbaye  is  rocky,  with  bays, 
points  and  islands.  A  spit  extends  one-half  mile  north  from  a  point  1 
mile  east  from  Little  Iron  river.  From  Big  Bay  point  a  dangerous  spit 
with  only  8  feet  of  water  extends  1  mile  to  the  north.  A  large  shoal 
extending  1^  miles  northeast  from  Huron  River  point  has  to  be  carefully 
avoided;  and  note  that  a  range  line  from  Huron  Island  light,  touching 
the  north  side  of  a  small  bushy  island  a  little  north  of  the  east  end  of 
East  Huron  island,  just  clears  the  north  end  of  this  shoal. 

Huron  Bay* — There  is  good  anchorage  and  shelter  from  all  winds 
in  the  bay  south  of  Sand  point,  which  is  about  half  way  up  Huron  bay 
on  the  east  side.  The  tower  formerly  used  for  a  light  on  Sand  point,  and 
the  dock  and  buildings  used  for  a  depot,  while  building  Stannard  Rook 


ii! 
I 

I 


I 


i  i 


ill 


228 


LAKE   SrPEBIOB. 


light-house,  mark  the  point.  The  Slate  Quarry  dock  is  near  the  head  of 
the  bay  on  the  east  side.  To  enter  the  bay,  bring  the  narrow  entrance  to 
bear  W.  S.  W.  f  S.  and  run  in  on  that  bearing,  with  Huron  Island  light 
directly  astern,  and  when  in  mid-channel  abreast  the  first  low  sandy  point 
on  the  east  side  of  the  bay,  steer  S.  W.  f  W.,  2  miles,  to  abreast  of  Sand 
point,  which  can  be  passed  close-to.  To  make  the  slate  dock  at  the  head 
of  the  bay,  steer  up  mid-channel  3f  miles  from  Sand  point,  when  keep 
the  west  side  best  on  board  for  three  fourths  of  a  mile  to  the  dock.  There 
is  a  sand-bar  with  only  2  feet  of  water  on  it  off  the  mouth  of  Valley 
creek,  which  extends  half  way  across  the  bay,  and  one-half  mile  along  the 
shore;  the  extreme  point  of  the  shoal  is  outside  the  range  of  the  end  of 
the  dock. 

A  Railroad  is  being  built  from  the  iron  mines  to  Huron  bay,  and  the  ore 
docks  are  being  constructed  on  the  east  side  of  the  bay  near  the  slate  dock. 

Point  Abbaye  Shoal.— This  shoal  is  about  1  mile  in  length  from  north  to 
south,  and  seven-eighths  of  a  mile  from  east  to  west;  least  water,  7  feet.  The  middle 
of  the  shoal  is  about  1^  miles  east  of  the  east  point  of  Point  Abbaye;  and  a  line  join- 
ing the  north  point  of  Point  Abbaye  and  the  west  point  of  West  Huron  island,  crosses 
the  reef  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  its  northern  limit.  The  buoy  formerly  on  the 
north  point  of  this  shoal  has  been  removed.  Strangers  should  not  attempt  the 
pu&sage  between  this  shoal  and  Point  Abbaye. 

SAKD-POINT  lilGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light, 
5th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  R'^d  brick  tower,  rising  from  brick 
dwelling,  32  feet  high.  On  a  low  sandy  point,  ^hree-eighths  of  a  mile 
northward  of  Sand  point,  west  side  of  L'Anse  bay,  head  of  Keweenaw 
bay.  Portage  River  light-house,  N.  I  E.,  133^  miles.  Church  at  Method- 
ist Mission,  N.  E.  by  E.,  2-j<^  miles. 

The  bay  west  of  Sand  point,  at  the  head  of  Keweenaw  bay,  is  one  of 
the  best  harbors  on  the  lake.  To  make  the  harbor:  When  one-quarter 
of  a  mile  east  of  Sand  Point  light,  steer  8.  W.  by  S.  three-quarters  of  a 
mile,  when  haul  up  about  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  for  half  a  mile,  and  come-to  off 
Baraga;  and  note  that  a  sand  spit  extends  from  Sand  point  in  a  southwest 
direction,  800  yards. 

li'Anse  is  situated  on  the  east  side  of  the  head  of  Keweenaw  bay. 
The  docks  bear  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  If  miles  from  Sand  Point  light.  It  has  a 
merchandise  dock,  and  an  elevated  iron  ore  dock.  It  is  on  the  Mar- 
quette, Houghton  &  Ontonagon  Railroad,  and  the  seat  of  Baraga  cou  ^ty. 

Pe-qua-qua-wa-ming  Point,  on  the  east  shore  of  Keweenaw 
bay,  is  sf  miles  N.  N.  E.  i.E.  from  Sand  Point  light,  and  S.  by  E.  i  E., 
9  miles  from  Portage  entry.  In  the  bay  eastward  of  the  point  there  is 
good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  win'^ls,  particularly  north  and 
northeast  winds.  A  rocky  spit  extends  about  one-third  of  a  mile  in  a 
southwesterly  direction  from  the  point.  Hibbard's  extensive  lumber  mill 
and  shingle  factory  are  located  there.  When  in  operation  they  are 
lighted  by  electricity,  which  marks  the  point.  Entering  the  bay  from 
the  northward,  the  only  precaution  necessary  is  -o  avoid  the  spit.  Come- 
to  in  4  fathoms,  with  the  mills  bearing  northwest,  or  run  to  the  slab  piers. 

PORTAGE  RIVER  LIGHT-STATION.-  A  fixed  light, 
varied  with  red  flashes,  at  intei .  m  of  1  minute,  6th  order,  visible  19 
miles.  White  stone  tower,  46  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way 
with  red  brick  dwelling.  Nearlv  1  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance 
into  Portage  river,  west  shore  of  Keweenaw  bay.  North  point  of  Point 
Abbaye,  E.,  12^  miles.     Sand  Point  light-house,  S.  ^  W.,  ISj  miles. 


LAKE    8UPBRIOB. 


229 


Portage  Range  Lights. — Two  fixed  white  lights,  visible  10^ 
and  11  miles.  Front  light,  wooden  beacon,  19  feet  high.  Rear  light, 
lantern  on  frame  dwelling,  25  feet  high,  both  painted  white.  On  the 
west  side  of  Portage  river,  near  its  mouth,  and  a  guide  into  the  out. 
Distance  between  the  lig^^^s,  500  feet.     On  range  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E. 

Tbe  liarbor  works  consist  of  a  cut  connecting  the  deep  water 
in  Portage  river  with  Keweenaw  bay.  The  outer  end  of  the  cut  is  pro- 
tected by  a  pier  on  the  east  side,  extending  S.  by  E.,  900  feet,  into  the 
bay.  The  dredged  channel  extends  about  250  yards  beyond  the  pier, 
and  is  marked  with  a  red  buoy  on  the  east  side  at  the  outer  end;  depth 
of  water,  14  feet.  The  range  lights  are  on  the  west  side  of  the  river,  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  center  line  of  the  cut.  There  is  no  light  on  the 
pier. 

In  heavy  gales  from  th^  northeast  it  is  not  a  safe  harbor  to  make  with 
deep  laden  vessels.  Good  shelter  can  be  found  in  Pe-qua-qua-wa-miug 
bay,  8.  by  E.  ^  E.,  9  miles  from  the  outer  end  of  the  cut. 

Bete  Grise  Bay  is  35  miles  N.  E.  ^  N.  from  Portage  River 
light.  There  is  good  ancLiorage  in  the  west  end  of  the  bay,  and  protec- 
tion from  all  winds  except  from  E.  N.  E.  by  the  eastward  to  S.  S.  E.  The 
north  shore  of  the  bay  is  bold.  A  ship  canal  connects  the  bay  at  its  west 
end  with  Lac  La  Belle.  There  are  piers  at  the  entrance  to  the  canal 
from  Bete  Grise  bay.  On  the  south  side  of  the  bay  there  is  a  large  shoal 
which  extends  1  mile  into  the  lake  and  around  Point  Isabelle,  the  south 
point  of  the  bay.  A  few  years  ago  business  was  suspended  at  Mendota, 
the  light  was  discontinued  by  the  Government,  and  a  sand  bar  formed 
between  the  piers.  The  mining  companies  dredged  a  channel  between 
the  piers,  but  the  light  has  not  been  re-established.  The  light-keeper's 
yellow  briuk  dwelling  is  on  the  south  side  of  the  entrance.  The  beacon 
was  removed  from  the  pier. 

MANITOU  LIGHT-STATIOX.— Afixed  white  light,  varied 
by  white  flashes,  3d  order,  visible  16  miles;  interval  between  the  flashes 
is  one  minute.  Brown,  iron  cylinder,  70  feet  high,  on  piles,  connected 
with  frame  dwelling.  A  coast  light  on  the  east  point  of  Manitou  island, 
6  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Keweenaw  point.  During  thick  and  foggy 
weather  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded,  giving  blasts  of  3  and  5  seconds, 
with  intervals  of  26  seconds.  Stannard's  Rock  light-house,  S.  E.  f  E., 
24^  miles.     Huron  Island  light-house,  S.  S.  W.  ^  W.,  37^  miles. 

Gull  Rock  Shoal. — Red  spar  buoy,  in  12  feet  of  water.  Marks 
a  recently  discovered  gravelly  shoal  near  Gull  Rocklight-house,  on  which 
there  is  less  than  12  feet  of  water.  Gull  Rock  light-house,  N.  f  W., 
distant  seven-eighths  of  a  mile.    Southern  end  of  Manitou  island,  E.  f  N. 

GULL  ROCK  LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  red  light,  4th 
order,  visible  13^  miles.  Yellow  tower,  39  feet  high,  rising  from  keep- 
er's dwelling.  On  Gull  rock,  between  Manitou  island  and  Keweenaw 
point  and  a  guide  through  the  passage.  Huron  island  light-house,  S.  S.  W"., 
35 1  miles.  Portage  River  light-house,  S.  W.,  46f  miles.  Granite  Island 
light-house,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  50^  miles. 

COPPER  HARBOR  MAIN  LIGHT —A  fixed  white  li^ht, 
4th  order,  visible  14^  miles.  Yellow  tower  rising  from  brick  dwelling. 
About  60  yards  from  the  east  point  of  the  entrance  into  Copper  harbor. 
Copper  Harbor  Range  lig' t  (front),  8.  S.  W.  I  W.,  980  yards. 

COPPER  HARBOR  RANGE  LIGHTS.— Two  fixed  white 


230 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


\ 


lights,  visible  10^  and  12^  miles.  Front  light,  wooden  beacon,  16  feet 
high.  Rt^ar  light,  lantern  on  frame  dwelling,  26  feet  high,  both  painted 
white.  On  the  soath  shore  of  Copper  harbor.  A  guide  into  the  harbor. 
To  enter  the  harbor:  Bring  the  lights  m  range,  when  three-quarters  of 
a  mile  distant  from  the  front  light,  and  stand  in  on  the  range  S.  f  W. 
until  well  past  a  patch  of  rocks,  awash  on  tbe  starboard  hand  at  the 
entrance,  when  haul  up  due  west  for  the  west  end  of  the  bay  and  come- 
,  to  about  half  way  between  the  two  docks,  and  nearest  to  the  north  shore, 
where  there  is  good  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds. 

Agnate  Harbor  ha&  been  entirely  deserted  for  many  years;  the 
warehouse  and  docks  were  burnt;  tbe  target  still  remains.  But,  since 
Range  lights  were  established  at  Copper  harbor  and  Eagle  harbor.  Agate 
harbor  is  not  used  as  a  harbor  of  refuge. 

EAGLE  HARBOR  LIGHT-STATIOX.— A  fixed  light, 
varied  by  white  flashes  at  intervals  of  2  minutes;  4th  order,  visible  14^ 
miles.  Red  tower,  38  feet  high,  rising  from  corner  of  brick  dwelling. 
On  the  west  point  at  the  entrance  into  Eagle  harbor.  Eagle  Harbor 
Range  light  (froct)  S.  E.  f  E.,  750  yards.  A  steam  fog  signal  to  be  es- 
tablished at  this  station. 

Eagle  Harbor  Ringe  Lights. — Two  fixed  white  lights,  visi- 
ble 10  and  11;^  miles.  Front  light,  wooden  beaoon,  19  feet  high.  Rear 
light,  lantern  on  frame  dwelling,  27  feet  high,  both  painted  white.  The 
lights  are  1,000  feet  apart.  On  range  S.'  S.  E.f  E.  and  N.  N.  W.  f  W. 
On  the  south  side  of  the  harbor  to  the  westward  of  the  mouth  of  Cedar 
creek.  To  enter  the  harbor:  Bring  the  lights  in  range  when  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  distant  from  the  front  light,  and  stand  in  on  the  range, 
passing  between  the  two  bulkheads  which  have  been  constructed  across 
the  bar  at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  iti  line  with  the  range,  and  when 
inside  of  the  bulkheads  haul  to  the  westward  and  run  to  the  dock  on 
north  side  of  the  bay,  or  come-to  oflp  the  front  range  light  in  the  widest 
part  of  the  harbor.  There  are  only  10  feet  at  the  dock  on  the  south  side. 
The  bulkheads  or  guiding  piers  are  130  feet  apart.  The  buoys  to  mark 
the  reef  off  the  entrance  have  been  removed.  The  bowlders  that 
obstructed  the  channel  between  the  guiding  piers  have  been  removed, 
and  there  are  now  14  feet  in  the  channel. 

The  shore  from  Point  Abbaye  to  Eagrle  River.- -From 
Pe-qua-qua-wa-ming  point  a  spit  extends  one-third  of  a  mile  to  the  south- 
west. A  flat  fills  up  most  of  the  bay  at  Portage  entry.  Shoal  water 
extends  for  a  mile  to  the  south,  to  the  east  and  to  the  north  from  Point 
Isabelle.  There  is  a  3-foot  spot  one-fourth  of  a  mile  south  of  Keewee- 
naw  point.  A  rocky  flat  extends  from  Manitou  island  to  Gull  Rook  light 
and  for  half  a  mile  to  the  northwest;  from  Eagle  harbor  to  Eagle  river  a 
succession  of  reefs  extend  along  the  coast  in  a  southwest  direction,  from 
one-eighth  to  three-fourths  of  a  mile  from  shore. 

EAGLE  RIVER  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  13  miles,  6th  order.  Lantern  on  keeper's  yellow  dwelling,  24  feet 
high.  In  the  town  of  Eagle  River,  and  on  the  west  bank  of  the  river, 
about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  end  of  the  pier.  There  are  two 
shoals  off  the  river,  which  commence  at  a  point  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.  from 
its  mouth,  and  extend  about  2  miles  in  a  northeasterly  direction,  parallel 
to  the  shore,  and  distant  from  it  about  flve-eighths  of  a  mile,  with  a  pas- 
sage-way between  them.     To  approach  the  dock  through  this  passage. 


LAKB   SUPERIOR. 


331 


Dai  to  be  es- 


■teer  S.  -^  W.  for  the  end  of  it,  when  a  mile  and  a  half  distant,  and  the 
coarse-  will  lead  fair  between  the  shoals.  Least  water  on  the  shoals,  6  to 
10  feet.  To  approach  the  dock  from  the  westward  of  the  shoal:  Bring 
the  north  end  of  it  to  bear  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  and  run  for  it  on  that  bearing, 
and  nearing  it  haul  tor  the  northward  in  order  to  range  the  dock. 

At  the  present  time  the  dock  is  in  a  most  dilapidated  condition, 
the  channel  on  both  sides  is  filled  up  with  sand,  and  the  shipping  busi> 
ness  seems  to  be  entirely  suspended. 

PORTAGE  LAKE  SHIP-CANAL  LIGHT-STATION.— 

A  fixed  white  light,  visible  14  miles,  3^  order.  Bed  tower,  33  feet 
high,  attached  to  brick  dwelling.  A  coast  and  harbor  light  on  the 
west  bank  of  the  entrance  into  Portage  Lake  ship-channel.  Rock  of 
Ages  N.  W.  f  N.,  54  miles.     Passage  Island  light,  N.  ^  E.,  69  miles. 

Portag^e  Lake  Ship-Canal  Pierhead  Beacon-light. — 

A  fixed  red  light,  6th  order,  visible  11^  miles.  White  tower,  18  feet 
hi^h,  on  PM  open  frame-work  foundation,  with  an  iron  lantern  on  top. 
Elevated  walk  along  the  pier  to  the  shore.  On  the  end  of  the  west 
pier,  at  the  entrance  to  the  Portage  Lake  ship  channel.  The  light 
marks  the  end  of  the  pier,  and  is  not  intended  as  a  range  light  with 
the  main  one.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  fog-bell  struck  by 
machinery  will  be  sounded — a  single  blow  at  intervals  of  20  seconds. 
The  bell  is  on  the  end  of  the  west  pier,  connected  to  the  beacon-light 
tower. 

Portagre  Lake  Ship  Canal  Harbor  of  Refiig-e.-^The  har- 
bor works  consist  in  the  construction  of  two  crib  piers  1,0P0  feet  in  length, 
enclosing  the  Lake  Superior  entrance  to  the  canal.  The  piers  are  250 
feet  apart  at  the  outer  ends;  the  east  pier  is  straight;  direction,  N. 
W.  ^  N.  The  west  pier  diverges  so  as  to  enclose  a  small  basin,  which 
is  not  dredged.  Depth  of  water  usually  from  12  to  14  feet.  This  dept.h 
is  not  always  reliable,  owing  to  the  formation  of  a  sand  bar  between 
the  piers,  but  the  bar  does  not  extend  far  beyond  the  outer  endL  of  the 
piers. 

To  enter  the  harbor:  Bring  the  lights  in  range  about  S.  E.  by  S.,  and 
when  about  one-fourth  of  a  mile  from  the  beacon  open  the  main  light  a 
little  to  the  eastward  of  it,  and  run  in  mid-channel;  follow  the  east  pier, 
giving  it  a  berth  af  about  llu  feet,  which  will  lead  into  the  canal.  Tlie 
channel  is  not  dredged  close  to  the  piers. 

Portage  Lake  ship-canal  connects  the  head  of  Portage  lake  with  Lake 
Superior.  The  canal  is  2^  miles  in  length,  100  feet  in  width  at  the  nar- 
rowest point,  and  160  feet  in  Lily  pond,  the  widest  part.  Depth  of 
water,  13  feet.  The  sides  of  the  canal  are  protected  by  a  pile  revetment 
with  a  donble  row  of  sheet  pilinsf. 

The  Portage  Lake  Canals  have  been  sold  and  transferred  to 
the  United  States,  and  extensive  improvements  are  contemplated. 

The  Life  Saving  Station  is  on  the  east  bank  of  the  canal  about  ^  mile 
from  the  piers. 

ONTONAGON  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
6th  order,  visible  13^  miles.  Yellow  tower,  39  feet  high,  rising  from 
brick  dwelling.  A  coast  and  harbor  light,  on  the  west  bank  of  the  mouth 
of  Ontonagon  ri^er.  La  Point  light-house,  W.  S.  W.  f  W.,  Tl  miles. 
Michigan  Island  light-house,  W.  ^  S.,  55^  miles. 

OutonaKon  Pierhead  Beacon-light.— A  fixed  red  light, 
6th  order,  visible  1  miles.     White  open  frame-work  tower,  22  feet  high. 


I 


fi32 


LAKE   8UPEBIOR. 


I 


I   > 


and  at  present  about  450  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  west  pier.  An  elevated  walk 
along  the  pier  to  the  shore.  The  two  lights  in  range  lead  to  the  end  of  the  west  pier, 
although  not  iu tended  for  range  lights. 

Ontonagon  harbor  consists  of  two  parallel  piers  250  feet  apart,  extending  in 
a  N.  W.  t  N.  direction  from  the  mouth  of  the  Ontonagon  river.  As  now  constructed 
the  west  pier  extends  into  the  lake  1,700  feet  from  tlie  shore  line,  and  projects  150 
feet  beyond  the  east  pier;  the  outer  150  feet  is  without  superstructure  and  vessels 
entering  at  night  should  look  out  for  the  submerged  eribs.  The  east  pier  projects 
1,950  feet  into  the  lake  beyond  the  shore  line  (the  shore  lines  are  not  opposite  each 
other).  The  bar  outside  the  piers  continues  to  advance,  and  the  channel  across  it  is 
uncertain  and  shifting.    Last  season  the  depth  of  water  was  from  12  to  18  feet. 

The  Shore  from  Eagle  River  to  Ontonagon. — One  mile 
north  of  the  Portage  Lake  ship-canal  there  is  a  spit  extending  one-half 
mile  to  the  north,  and  from  14-mile  point  there  extends  also  a  spit  to  the 
north  for  one    '"liF  'v  mile. 

OUTER  Tj^tSTD  light-station.— a  flashing  white 
light,  3d  order,  ibl  »)^  miles;  interval  between  flashes  is  90  seconds. 
White  brick  tow^",  19  i  ^'-  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  red 
brick  dwelling.  Height  of  .light  above  lake  level,  130  feet.  On  the 
north  point  of  Outer  island.  Apostle  group.  During  thick  and  foggy 
weather  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded,  giving  a  blast  of  8  seconds,  with  an 
interval  of  62  seconds.  Fog  signals  on  the  bluflf  about  300  feet  west  of 
the  tower.  Grand  Marais,  Minn.,  N.  ^  W.,  47  miles.  Norih  point  of 
Devil  island,  W.  ^  S.,  14^  miles.  Good  anchorage  in  the  bight  on  the 
west  side  of  Outer  island,  and  protection  from  easterly  gales;  a  sand  spit 
extends  from  the  south  point  of  the  island  about  one-fourth  mile  with 
deep  water  close-to;  a  shallow  spot  1  mile  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  from  the  light. 

DEVIL.  iSiLAND  E.I0HT-STAT10W.— A  fixed  red  light,  4th  order,  vis- 
ible 13  miles.  Black  lantern  surmounting  a  white  open  frame-work  tower,  60  feet 
high.  The  upper  part  is  enclosed  for  a  watch-tower.*  The  focal  plane  is  87  feet 
above  lake  level.  Red  brick  dwelling  in  rear  of  tower.  On  the  north  point  of  Devil 
island,  the  most  northerly  of  the  Apostle  group.  The  fog-signal  is  a  10-inch  steam 
whistle,  and  in  thick  or  foggy  weather  will  sound  blasts  of  5  seconds  duration  with 
alternate  niieut  intervals  of  10  and  40  seconds.  The  fog-signal  house  is  located  on  a 
point  about  500  feet  northwest  from  the  light-tower.  The  island  is  steep-to  on  all 
sides.  Sand  Island  light,  S.  W.  i  W.,  Hi  miles.  Outer  Island  light,  E.  i  N.,  14i 
miles.    Two  Harbors  light,  W.  by  S,  i  8.,  44^  miles. 

MICHIGAN  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  3^  order,  visible  19^  miles.  White  stone  tower,  44  feet  high,  stone 
dwelling  attached.  Light  129  feet  above  lake  level.  On  the  south 
point  of  Michigan  island,  and  a  guide  between  Michigan,  Magdalene, 
and  Stockton  islands  to  Bayfield  and  La  Pointe.  Ontonagon  light-house, 
E.  i  N.,  55^^  miles.  There  is  a  rocky  islet  three- fourths  of  a  mile  north- 
east of  Michigan  island  with  shoal  water  between  it  and  Michigan  island; 
shoal  water  extends  along  the  south  shore  of  the  island;  two  dangerous 
spots  lie  nearly  three-fourths  mile  south  of  the  light.  A  spit  extends 
from  the  northeast  point  of  Magdalene  island  in  an  easterly  direction 
nearly  three-fourths  of  a  mile.  Entering  the  channel  between  Michigan 
and  Magdalene  islands,  bring  Michigan  Island  light  to  bear  N.  E.  f  N., 
2  miles  distant,  when  steer  W.  N.  W.,  5  miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths 
mile  north  of  the  northern  point  of  Magdalene  island;  thence  S.  W.  -J 
W.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  of  a  mile  east  of  Bayfield. 

Presque  Isle  Harbor. — There  is  good  anchorage  in  the  bay 
on  the  west  side  of  Presque  Isle,  and  pi*oteotion  from  all  winds.  To  make 
the  harbor  from  the  southward,  when  Michigan  Island  light  bears  N.  E. 


.-^ 


LAKB   8UPEBIOB. 


233 


I  N.,  distant  2  miles,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  4^  miles,  when  haal  up  east  into 
the  bay  and  come-to  in  7  fathoms. 

liA  POINTE  IiIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  red  light,  4th 
order,  visible  12f  miles.  Lantern  on  white  frame  dwelling,  light  42  feet 
above  lake  level.  Near  the  north  end  of  Cbaquamegan  point  at  the  »o  \ 
channel  entrance  into  Chaquamegan  bay.  Ontonagon  light  house,  E.  n. 
E.  f  E.,  71  miles.  From  the  southwest  point  of  Magdalene  island  a  4- 
foot  spit  extends  in  a  southeasterly  direction  for  one-half  a  mile. 

The  Fos-§lgnal  is  a  10  inch  steam  whistle,  gives  blasts  of  5  seconds  with 
silent  intervals  of  25  seconds.  The  signal  is  on  the  oeach  about  three-fourMis  of  a 
mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  light-house. 

Entering  the  South  Channel  to  Bayfield,  steer  W.  by  S. 

S.,  keeping  the  south  side  best  on  board  until  La  Pointe  light  bears  S. 

.  f  E.,  1  mile  distant,  when  steer  N.  f  W.,  4J  miles,  to  Baytield;  or  S. 
by  W.  f  W.,  7  miles,  thence  about  8.  by  W.  for  the  outer  end  of  break- 
water. 

•  La  Pointe  is  in  the  bight  on  the  west  er  of  Magdalene  island,  Sf 
miles  to  the  northward  of  La  Pointe  light;  it  L/is  ^afe  harbor  with  good 
anchorage  in  4  fathoms  of  water  off  the  old  -^ock.  At  present  the  dock 
is  in  a  dilapidated  condition  and  the  shipping  nyusiness  entirely  suspended. 

Bayfield  is  on  the  main  shore,  opposite  La  Pointe.  It  has  two 
good  docks,  with  deep  water  alongside  of  th^m.  It  has  an  important 
trade  in  fish  and  lumber.  In  heavy  gales  "om  the  northeast  vessels  can- 
not lie  at  the  docks  in  Bayfield;  at  such  ti  .^es  La  Pointe  affords  excellent 
shelter. 

Chaquamegran  Bay. — In  the  bay  the  1 2-foot  curve"  extends  2 
miles  westward  from  Oak  point.  In  the  head  of  the  bay  the  12-foot 
curve  extends  1^  miles  from  shore.  Towards  the  north,  along  the  west 
coast  of  the  bay,  and  as  far  as  Point  Detour,  there  is  deep  water  close 
to  the  shore. 

Oood  anchorage  and  protection  from  all  winds  can  be  found  almost 
anywhere  inside  the  Apostle  island. 

Washburn  is  situated  on  the  west  shore  of  Chaquamegan  bay,  about 
two  miles  to  the  southwestward  of  Houghton  point.  It  has  become  quite 
an  important  shipping  point.  It  is  the  lake  terminus  of  the  Chicago,  St. 
Paul,  M.  &  O.  R,  R.  There  are  two  docks  with  deep  water  alongside  of 
them,  one  is  the  general  merchandise  dock  with  warehouse  on  it,  and  the 
other  is  the  grain  elevator  dock;  there  is  a  bulkhead  connecting  the  two 
docks,  used  for  unloading  cargoes  of  coal.  At  night  there  is  a  red  light 
shown  from  each  dock,  one  on  the  end  of  the  Warehouse,  and  the  other 
from  a  window  in  the  elevator. 

Ashland  is  situated  near  the  head  of  Chaquamegan  bay,  and  is  now 
one  of  the  most  important  shipping  points  on  Lake  Superior. 

Harbor  Improvements. — The  present  project  is  the  construc- 
tion of  a  breakwater  to  protect  the  wharves  of  the  city  from  the  action 
of  the  north  and  northeast  storms,  and  to  afford  protection  to  the  ship- 

Sing  while  loading  and  unloading,  and  also  for  dredging  in  front  of  the 
ock  line  to  provide  for  vessels  drawing  16  feet.  As  now  constructed 
the  breakwater  commences  in  about  12  feet  of  water  and  extends  in  a  W. 
N.  W.  direction  4,650  feet  into  the  bay,  and  about  1,000  feet  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  iron  ore  docks. 


LAKE    KUPEBIOB. 


1 

1* 

LAKE   SUPEBIOB. 


285 


55 


% 


Rocky  Island  and  South  Twin  island  are  connected  by  shoal 
water.  North  Twin  island  has  a  spit  extending  half  a  mile  to  the  south- 
west. York  island  has  a  spit  extending  half  a  mile  to  the  south.  The 
passage  between  Sand  island  and  the  main  shore  ought  not  to  be 
attempted  by  vessels  drawing  more  than  6  feet. 

R  VSPBERRY  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION. -A  fixed  light 
varied  by  white  flashes,  at  intervals  of  90  seconds,  6th  order,  visible  15 
miles.  Lantern  on  white  frame  dwelling,  light  77  feet  above  lake  level. 
On  the  southwest  point  of  Raspberry  island,  Apostle  group.  A  guide  for 
the  channel  between  main-land  and  Raspberry  island. 

To  enter  Raspberry  Island  passage,  bring  Raspberry  Island  light  to 
bear  S.  E.  \  E.,  and  run  for  it  on  that  course,  until  Sand  Island  light 
bears  S.  W.  \  W.,  3j^  miles,  when  haul  up  southeast,  11  miles,  until  the 
southwest  point  of  Oak  island  bears  N.  i  W.,  1^  miles,  passing  about 
half  a  mile  southwest  of  Raspberry  Island  light.  Good  anchorage  on 
south  side  oi  Raspberry  island  and  protection  from  all  winds. 

SAND  ISLAND  LIGHT-S  x'ATION.— A  fixed  white  li^ht, 
4th  order,  visible  14  miles.  Red  sandstone  tower,  37  feet  high,  rising 
from  sandstone  dwelling.     On  the  north  point  of  Sand  island. 

The  shore  on  the  south  side  of  Lake  Superior  from  the  Apostle 
islands  to  the  head  of  the  lake  is  bold,  and  can  be  approached  anywhere 
within  half  a  mile. 

Minnesota  Point  Lig^ht-honse  (light  discontinued). 

— White  stone  tower,  45  feet  high,  connected  by  covered  way  with 
dwelling.  On  the  south  end  of  Minnesota  point,  at  the  south  entrance 
iuto  Superior  bay  and  bay  of  Allouez. 

ST.  LOUIS  RIVER  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— 

A  fixed  white  light,  6th  order,  visible  13f  miles.  White  frame  tower, 
light  63  feet  above  lake  level.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier,  at  the 
south  entrance  to  Superior  and  Allouez  bays. 

The  harbor  works  consist  of  two  parallel  piers  connecting  the 
south  end  of  Superior  bay  with  Lake  Superior,  with  a  dredged  channel 
between  them.  The  piers  are  2,600  feet  in  length  and  300  feet  apart,  ex- 
tending N.  E.  :J  E.  Present  depth  of  water:  On  lake  approach,  16  feet; 
entry  between  the  piers,  16  feet;  in  the  St.  Louis  River  channel  from  the 
entry  to  Connor's  point,  16  feet;  from  St.  Louis  River  channel  to  North- 
ern Pacific  dock,  16  feet;  in  front  of  Quebec  dock,  16  feet.  The  chan- 
nels are  all  well  buoyed  by  private  enterprise. 

Entering  the  harbor  keep  straight  in  midway  between  the  piers,  when 
about  half  way  up,  keep  nearest  the  south  pier  until  up  to  its  end,  giving 
it  a  fair  berth,  then  port  slowly  and  head  up  just  outside  the  dock  op- 
posite the  old  light  house,  keeping  between  the  buoys.  In  northeasterly 
gales  a  scrong  current  generally  sets  out  of  the  piers,  and  vessels  should 
have  good  headway  until  inside  the  piers. 

Tugs  are  generally  at  the  piers  to  assist  heavy  draught  vessels  to  the 
different  points  in  the  bay. 

DULUTH  PIERHEAD  BEACON-LIGHT.— A  fixed  ed 
light,  4th  order,  visible  12^  miles.  White,  open  frame-work  tower,  37 
feet  high.  On  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier,  at  the  entrance  into  Du- 
luth  harbor.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  steam-whistle  is  sounded, 


28R 


\i 


LAKE  BITPBBIOB. 


- 


iMMT 


SUPERIOR 
HARBdR 


LAKE  SUPERIOR 


8T.   LOUIS. 

giving  blasts  of  5  seconds,  followed  by  an  interval  of  30  seconds.  Fog 
signal-house  of  corrugated  iron,  connected  to  the  tower.  Elevated  walk 
along  the  pier  to  the  shore.    St.  Louis  River  light,  S.  E.  i  E.,  6^  miles. 

DUIiUTH  MAIN  LIGHT.— A  red  flashing  light,  4th  order, 
giving  a  red  flash  every  6  seconds,  visible  13  miles.  White,  square, 
wooden  tower,  64  feet  above  the  lake  level,  black  lantern  with  brown 
parapet.  The  lower  part  of  the  tower  is  open  frame-work,  the  upper 
part  is  enclosed  for  a  watch  room.  On  the  inner  end  of  the  south  pier 
at  the  entrance  to  Duluth.  This  light  with  the  beacon-light  forms  a 
range  showing  the  direction  of  the  pier,  and  the  course  to  be  followed  in 
entering  the  harbor.    Beacon-light,  N.  E.  by  E.,  1,100  feet. 

The  Harbor  of  Duluth  consists  of  a  canal  cut  through  Min- 
nesota point,  connecting  Superior  bay  with  Lake  Superior.  The  sides  of 
the  canal  are  protected  by  piers  300  feet  apart,  and  1,150  feet  in  length, 
extending  into  the  lake  N.  E.  by  E.  Depth  between  the  piers  at  the 
entry,  17  feet,  in  the  harbor  16  feet,  in  the  Blast  Furnace  channel  to  a 
point  opposite  Elevator  E  16  feet.  From  point  opposite  Elevator  E 
through  dredged  channel  along  east  side  of  Rice's  point  to  the  St.  Louis 
river  16  feet.  In  channel  on  north  shore  of  St.  Louis  bay,  for  a  distance 
of  7,300  feet,  there  is  a  depth  of  16  feet.    Entering  the  harbor,  vessels 


LAKE   8UPBRI0B. 


S37 


QUtZ 


seconds.  Fog 
Elevated  walk 
^  E.,  6i  miles. 

rht,  4th  order, 
V^hite,  square, 
rn  with  brown 

fork,  the  upper 
the  south  pier 
-light  forms  a 
be  followed  in 
t. 

|t  through  Miu- 
.  The  sides  of 
|feet  in  length, 
.he  piers  at  the 
le  channel  to  a 
lite  Elevator  E 
[o  the  St.  Louis 
;,  for  a  distance 
harbor,  vessels 


should  give  the  end  of  the  south  pier  a  berth  of  at  least  20  feet  to  avoid 
rip-rapping.  In  northeasterly  gales  a  strong  current  generally  sets  out 
of  the  harbor,  or  across  the  end  of  the  piers,  when  vessels  entenng  re- 
quire to  keep  good  headway. 

TWO  HARBORS  LIGHT-STATION. -A  fixed  r  light, 
4th  order,  visible  13  miles.  Red  brick  tower,  43  feet  high,  forms  a  cor- 
ner of  a  two-story  red  brick  dwelling,  with  red  roof.  The  focal  plane  is 
78  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  On  the  point  of  land  between  Agate 
and  Burlington  bays.  The  fog-signal  is  a  10- inch  steam  whistle;  during 
thick  and  foggy  weather  it  will  sound  blasts  of  6  seconds  duration,  with 


i\ 


;  ( 


238' 


LAHE   SUPBfilOS. 


alternate  silent  intervals  of  17  and  33  seconds.  The  fog-sig  al  house  is 
located  about  100  feet  southwest  from  tho  light  tower,  it  is  au  ron  struc- 
ture, painted  dark  brown.  Sand  Island  light-house  E.  f  N  S4^  milfs. 
Isle  aux  Roches,  S.  W.  ^  S.,  7  miles.  Devil  Island  light-house,  E.  by  N. 
i  iJ.,  44j^  miles. 

Two  Harbors,  or  Agate  Bay. — ^Two  Harbors  is  on  the  north 
shore  of  Lake  Superior,  27  ^liles  N.  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  from  the  St.  Louis 
River  Pierhead  lighu,  and  45  miles  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  from  a  point  1^  miles 
north  of  Devil  island.  It  has  two  elevated  iron  ore  docks  with  a  dredged 
slip  between,  where  vessels  load,  the  docks  extend  E.  S.  E.  There  are 
two  recrcnjindise  docks  to  the  eastward  of  the  ore  docks;  they  extend 
into  the  lake  S.  S.  E.,  and  have  deep  water  alongside.  The  shore  around 
the  point  between  Agate  and  Burlington  bays  is  bold.  Anchorage  off 
the  ore  docks;  vessels  must  come-to  close  in,  as  the  water  is  very  deep, 


SupE^of^- 


From  Duluth  to  Two  Harbors,  run  out  in  line  with  the  piers  :J  of  a  mile, 
when  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  18  miles,  until  Granite  point  bears  N.  W.  1  mile 
distant;  thence  N.  E.  ^  N.,  7  miles,  to  abreast  the  docks.  It  is  said  that 
vessels  can  lie  at  the  docks  in  heavy  northeasters. 

Breakwater. — The  present  project  for  the  improvement  of  this 
harbor,  adopled  in  1887,  consists  in  the  construction  of  two  breakwater 

Eiers  extending  froiu  the  eastern  and  western  points  of  the  bay,  the  east 
reakwater  to  bo  1,000  feet  in  length,  and  the  west  000  feet  long,  and  on 
a  line  with  each  other,  leaving  an  opening  of  1,340  toot  between  the  outer 
extreraeties  and  enclosing  an  area  of  109  acres;  750  linear  feet  of  the  east 
breakwater  has  been  conipleted. 

Gooseberry  River  Keel*.-— This  is  a  small  rocky  shoal  with  only 
13  feet  of  water  over  it  in  its  shualest  place.     Its  greatest  length  is 


/ 


LAKB   SUPEBIOB.' 


239 


north  and  south,  being  about  400  feet  inside  the  18-foot  curve  of  the  bot- 
tom. It  does  not  appear  on  the  chart  of  the  lake  survey,  and  its  exist- 
ence is  not  generally  known.  It  lies  one  mile  south  of  Gooseberry  river, 
^  mile  from  shore,  1^^  miles  from  Castle  Danger  reef,  and  13  miles  north- 
east of  Two  Harbors. 

GRAND  MABAIS  (MINN.)  PIERHEAD  BEACON- 
LIGHT.— A  fixed  white  light,  5th  order,  visible  12;^  miles.  White, 
square  pyramidal  tower,  lantern  black,  light  38  feet  above  lake  level.  On 
the  outer  or  west  end  of  breakwater.  A  fog-bell,  struck  by  machinery, 
will  be  sounded  from  the  beacon  during  thick  and  foggy  weather,  giving 
a  double  blow  at  intervals  of  30  seconds.  Minnesota  point,  S.  W.  f  S., 
107  miles.'  Ontonagon,  S.  E.,  77  miles.  Outer  Island  light,  S.  ^  E.,  47 
miles. 


y«llNN!:SOT/\ 


i/i/rg' 


SaP£RIOR 


Grand  Marais  Harbor  consists  of  a  small  bay  about  2,500  feet 
from  efi3t  to  west  and  1,400  feet  from  north  to  south,  semicircular  in 
form,  and  protected  by  a  breakwater  extending  from  the  east  point  350 
feet  W.  \  N.  The  project  is  to  extend  the  breakwater  350  feet  more,  and 
dredge  the  entire  harbor  area  within  the  6-foot  curve  of  the  bottom.     At 

E resent  there  is  &  dredged  area  of  22  acres  16  feet  deep.  To  enter  the 
arbor:  Run  in  heading  from  N.  E.  to  N.  N.  E.,  haul  around  the  west 
uid  of  breakwater,  giving  it  a  berth  of  100  feet,  and  steer  for  the  dock 
about  E.  N.  E.  The  water  is  deep  at  the  west  end  of  the  breakwater, 
but  shoal  on  the  inside  caused  by  rip-rapping.  There  is  16  feet  of  water 
up  to  the  dock. 

The  north  shore  of  Lake  Superior  from  Duluth  to  Portage  bay 
is  rocky  and  bold,  and  can  be  approached  with  safety  within  f  of  a  mile. 
Grand  Marais  is  the  only  harbor  of  refuge  and  the  only  light  between 
those  points. 


«  • 


240 


LAKE   8CPKSI08. 


■! 


iL 


Light-Houses  and  Harbors  on  Isle  Roy  ale  and  Passage  Is- 
land, 

ISLE  ROYALE  (MENAGERIE  ISLAND)  LIGHT- 
STATION.— A  fixed  white  light,  4th  order,  visible  15^  miles.  White 
tower,  65  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  dark-brown  dwell- 
ing, all  stone.  On  the  eastern  end  of  Menagerie  island,  at  the  south  side 
of  the  entrance  into  Siskiwit  bay,  Isle  Royale.  A  coast  light,  and  marks 
the  entrance  into  Siskiwit  bay.  Manitou  light,  S.  E.  by  E.  f  E.,  66 
miles.  Portage  Lake  ehip-canal,  S.  by  E.,  60j  miles.  To  make  an  an- 
chorage in  the  bay:  When  half  of  a  mile  north  of  the  light,  steer  W. 
8.  W.  i  S.,  11  miles,  to  near  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  come-to  in  6  or  7 
fathoms  nearest  to  south  shore.  Good  holding  ground  and  protection 
from  all  winds  except  from  the  nortlieast. 

Danglers. — There  are  two  small  patches  of  rock  bearing  N.  E.  by 
E.  from  the  light,  one  950  yards  with  8  feet,  and  the  other  1,200  yards 
with  6  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Rock  Hai;l)or  Light-house  (light  discontinued).— Drab 

tower,  70  feet  high,  of  mixed  stone  and  brick,  connected  by  a  passage- 
way with  brick  dwelling.  On  the  west  side  of  the  west  entrance  into 
Rock  harbor.  Isle  Royale,  and  about  10  miles  from  the  northeast  end  of 
the  island.  To  enter  the  harbor:  Bring  the  west  passage  to  bear  N.  W". 
by  W.  ^  W.,  and  run  in  on  that  course,  mid-channel,  between  the  light- 
house and  a  group  of  small  islands  (Middle  islands).  The  channel  is 
*  deep  but  narrow.  A  rocky  ledge  extends  nearly  half-way  across  the 
channel  from  the  old  light-house,  or  about  260  feet  east  of  it.  Wher 
through  the  passage  haul  to  the  west  and  come-to  in  7  or  8  fathoms  c 
the  north  side  of  the  harbor;  the  water  shoals  rapidly;  good  anchora^  / 
and  protection  from  all  winds.  Leaving  Rock  harbor  bound  to  the  nortn- 
ward,  keep  the  inside  passage  N.  E.  f  E.,  about  10  miles,  mid-channel; 
passing  out  of  the  channel,  look  out  for  the  6-foot  spot  1  mile  east  of 
JBlake's  point,  the  northeast  extremity  of  Isle  Royale. 

PASSAGE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.  — A  fixed  red 
light,  4th  order,  visible  17  miles.  Gray  tower,  37  feet  high,  rising  from 
stone  dwelling.  Light  97^  feet  above  sea  level.  On  the  sontl^west  point 
of  Passage  island.  A  guide  through  the  channel  between  Isle  Royale 
and  Passage  island.  During  thick  and  foggy  weather  a  ;  0-inch  steam- 
whistle  is  sounded,  giving  blasts  of  6  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  inter- 
vals of  25  seconds.  Fog-signal  adjoining  tower.  Five-foot  spot  1  mile 
east  of  the  northeast  extreme  of  Isle  Royale,  S.  S,  W.  |  W.,  3|  miles. 
The  southwest  point  of  Passage  island  is  steep-to.  Vessels  should  keep 
this  side  of  the  passage  best  on  board. 

Siskiwit  Bay. — In  southwest  end  protection  will  be  found  from 
all  winds  except  from  the  northeast,  also  good  holding  ground  l^  miles 
south  of  Wright's  island.     See  Menagerie  Island  light. 

Washington  and  Grace  Harbors  are  good,  giving  protec- 
tion from  all  except  south  winds,  with  generally  good  holding  ground. 

Todd's  Harbor  will  afford  good  protection,  except  in  northerly 
winds;  but  care  should  be  taken  to  avoid  the  1-foot  spit  in  the  middle  of 
the  harbor. 


LAKE   8UPEEI0E. 


241 


Tobin's  Harbor  gives  protection  from  all  winds,  with  excellent 
holding  ground.  Care  should  be  taken  to  anchor  in  the  middle,  as  there 
is  not  much  room  to  swing.  The  entrance  is  narrow,  but  the  shores  are 
8teep-to. 

Dangers  to  be   Avoided. 

The  6  and  12-foot  shoals  one-half  and  one  mile  to  the  southwest  and 
south  of  Rock  of  Ages  should  be  avoided;  also  the  8  and  14  foot  spits,  1 
mile  northeast  of  Rock  of  Ages,  should  not  be  approached  without  due 
caution. 

The  south  coast  of  Isle  Royale  from  Siskiwit  bay  to  the  most  south- 
ern point  of  Isle  Royale  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  2  miles 
from  shore,  as  it  abounds  in  ledges  and  rocky  spots,  rendering  this  coast 
very  dangerous. 

There  is  a  3-foot  spit  three-fourths  mile  southwest  from  Washington 
island,  near  the  entrance  to  Grace  harbor.  The  coast  from  Washington 
harbor  to  McCargoe's  cove  shows  some  detached  rocks  from  one-fourth 
to  one-half  mile  from  shore. — 3-foot  spit  three-fourths  mile  W.  S.  W.  of 
Canoe  rocks. — 5-foot  shoal  1  mile  east  of  Blake's  point. — 9-foot  '•eef  2^ 
miles  W.  N.  W.  of  Gull  islands. — 1  and  3-foot  spots  one-half  a  mile 
south  of  Gull  islands. — 3  foot  spot  one-third  mile  east  of  Batteau  rocks. 
Foul  ground  within  one-half  mile  around  Wright's  island  in  Siskiwit  bay. 


Compass  Courses  and  Distances  on  Lake  Sz^penor. 

Note. — Courses  and  bearings  corrected  for  magnetic  varialiou.  Distances  in 
statute  miles. 

Point  Iroquois  to  White  Fish  Point.— When  U  miles 
northeast  of  Point  Iroquois  light,  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  2b^  miles,  until 
White  Fish  Point  light  bears  southwest  1^  miles  distant,  when  follow 
around  the  point  1  mile  until  the  light  bears  south  l^  miles  distant. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Duluth.— When  l^  miles  north  of  the 
light,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  145^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  north  of  Cop- 
per Harbor  main  light,  passing  about  12  miles  to  the  northward  of  Stan- 
nard  Rock  light,  and  1^  miles  north  of  Manitou  light;  thenco  W.  7  miles, 
thence  W.  by  S.  8  miles  to  a  point  2  miles  off  Eagle  Harbor  main  lighc, 
and  in  line  of  thu  range  lights,  keeping  two  miles  off  shore;  thence  steer 
W.  by  S.  i  S.,  124  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  f  W.  of  Devil  island, 
passing  about  5  miles  north  of  Outer  Island  light;  thence  W.  S.  W.  i  S., 
68  miles,  to  within  \  mile  of  the  beacon,  and  in  range  of  the  two  lights 
at  Dululh. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Ashland.— When  2  miles  off  P:agle 
Harbor  main  light  as  in  the  course  to  Duluth  from  White  Fish  point, 
steer  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  136  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  W.  &  W.  from 
La  Point  light,  thence  8.  by  W  J^  W.,  8  miles,  to  the  outer  end  of  the 
proposed  extension  of  the  breakwater  at  Ashland, 

White  Fish  Point  to  Two  Harbors.— When  2  miles  off 
Eagle  Harbor  main  light  as  in  the  course  from  White  Fish  point  to 
Duluth,  steer  W.  by  8.  i  8.,  keeping  a  little  to  the  westward,  for   168 


243 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


uiilea,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  the  breakwater  ;.:  *.:^T.te  hay  f  r  Two 
Harbors,  oassing  8  miles  north  of  Outer  Island  l),<Tht  an  i  >  miles  north 
of  Devil  island. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Grand  Marais.- -When  i^nlies  north 
of  the  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  15  miles,  until  past  Point  Vermilion;  thence 
W.  f  S.,  34  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  north  of  the  piers. 

Wliite  Fish  Point  to  Grand  Island  Ha-rbor.— When  1^ 

miles  north  of  the  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.,  56  J  miles,  until  Big  Sable  light 
bears  south  distant  2  miles;  when  steer  S,  W.  f  W.,  18^  miles,  to  a  point 
one-half  mile  north  of  Grand  Portal;  thence  S.  W.  ^  S.,  lOi^  ii.iles,  to 
abreast  of  the  beacon.  See  Grana  Island  Harbor  Beacon  for  further 
directions. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Marquette. — When  i|  miles  north  of 
the  light,  steer  W.  ^  S.^  56|  miles,  until  Big  Sable  light  bears  south  2 
miles  distant;  when  steer  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  60  miles,  to  the  beacon  on  break- 
water.    This  course  leads  4^  miles  north  of  Grand  Island  light. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Portage  Entry.— Wh(^n  H  mWea 
north  of  the  light,  steer  W.  i  N.,  145  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  f  W. 
of  Huron  Island  light;  whence  steer  W.  ^  S.,  20  miles,  or  until  the  lights 
at  the  entry  are  in  range,  passing  three-fourths  of  a  mile  south  of  Port- 
age River  light. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Mendota  (Lac  La  Bel !«).— When 
1^  miles  north  of  tne  light,  steer  W.  by  N,  f  N.,  146  milest,  ranging  on 
Mt.  Bohemia,  and  passing  4  miles  north  of  Stannard's  Rock  light,  until 
Mendota  light-house  (light  discontinued)  bears  W.  f  S.,  when  haul  up  on 
that  bearing  for  the  canal,  2  miles  distant. 

White  Fisli  Point  to  Copper  Harbor. — When  1^  miles 
north  of  the  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  145^  miles,  pahsing  1^  miles 
north  of  Manitou  light,  until  abreast  of  Copper  harbor,  l^  mi'es  distant, 
and  in  line  of  the  range  lights. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Roclc  Harbor  (Tsle  Royale).— 

When  1^  miles  nortl'  of  the  lig'U,  .stedr  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  192^  miles, 
ranging  on  the  light-he  use  to  wit!  >  f  '  le-half  mile  of  it,  when  see  Rock 
Island  light-house  for  further  directions. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Silver  Islet  Landing.— When  l^ 

miles  north  of  the  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  187  miles,  to  a  point 
1  mile  south  of  Passage  Island  light;  thence  W.  by  N.  f  N,,  22;J^  miles,  to 
the  north  entrance  to  the  landing,  passing  two-thirds  mile  porthward  of 
Silver  islet.  Silver  Island  landing  is  on  the  main  shore  behind  Burnt 
island.  To  make  the  landing  from  the  southward,  when  1  mile  south  of 
Passage  island  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  22  miles,  to  a  point  one-fourth 
mile  W.  ^  S.  of  the  crib  on  Silver  islet,  thence  about  N.  W.  ^  W.,  until 
the  passage  between  Burnt  island  and  the  main  shore  is  fairly  op^n,  when 
steer  in  mid-channel  about  N.  E,  ^  E.,  keeping  a  lookout  for  patches  of 
rooks  on  each  side;  there  are  two  high  posts  of  the  wharf  on  which  range 
lights  .'re  sometimes  placed  to  guide  to  the  dock  at  night. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Port  Arthur.— When  i 

Pa3'«age  Island  lijjfht  as  in  the  course  to  Silver  islet,  i^teer 

mi'i  -i,  unti'   I'liunder  Cape  light  bears  N.  E.  ^  N.,  distant  2 

N.  W.  I  W.,  9i  mf.las,  to  a  point  three  fourths  mile  northeast  of  the 

Welcome    iwlands;   thenoe   N.  W.  |  W.,  6  miles,  to  the  dock   at  Port 

Arthur. 


mile  south  of 
W.  f  N.  28i 
miles,  thence 


LAKK    SUPEUIOB. 


5*4.3 


hay  rr  iwo 
miles   north 

i^  rilles  north 
ilion;  thence 

r.— When  1^ 
g  Sable  light 
es,  to  a  point 
10^  ii.iles,  to    • 
a  for  further 

niles  north  of 
bears  south  2 
con  on  break- 
;ht. 

ht?n  1^  railes 
niles  N.  f  VV. 
ntil  the  lig[hts 
louth  of  Port- 

11«).— When 
lit,  ranging  on 
ck  light,  until 
en  haul  up  on 

hon  1^  miles 
ing  1^  miles 
lies  distant, 

|Royale). — 

192^  miles, 
idu  see  Rock 

-When  li 
iS,  to  a  point 

22|:  miles,  to 

berth  ward  of 

)ehind  Burnt 

lilo  south  of 
ht  oiiG-fourth 

i  W.,  until 
ly  op'^n,  when 
|or  patches  of 

which  range 

lile  south  of 
}V.  t  N.  28i 
Imiles,  thence 
li''ast  of  the 
look  at  Port 


White  Fifeh  Point  to  Caribou  Island.— When  l^mile? 
north  of  the  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  W.,  55^  miles,  to  a  point  4  miles  south- 
west of  the  south  point,  and  avoid  the  extensive  reef  which  spreado  ou  / 
from  the  southwest  point  of  the  island. 

Wliite  Fish  Point  to  Nepigon  Bay.-  When  ik  miles  ncnH 
of  the  light,  steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  183  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Batl  vi 
Island  light,  passing  2^  miles  to  the  northeastward  of  the  north  point  of 
Caribou  island. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Michipicoten  Island.— When  H 

miles  north  of  the  light,  steer  N.  W.  by  N.,  V*  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles 
southwest  of  Michipicoten  Island  light. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Michipicoten  River.— When  2 
miles  east  of  While  Fish  Point  light,  steer  N.  i  W.,  36  miles,  to  a  point 
3^  miles  west  of  Cape  Choyye,  passing  If  miles  west  of  Cape  Gargantua; 
thence  N.  E.  by  N,  ^  N.,  17^  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  southwest  of  the 
entrance  to  the  river. 

White  Fish  Point  to  Montreal  River.— When  2  miles 
east  of  White  Fish  Point  light,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  30  miles;  thence 
northeast,  5^  railes,  to  a  point  1^  miles  west  of  the  entrance  to  the  river^ 

Grand  Marais  to  Marquette. — When  i  mile  north  of  the 
piers,  steer  W.  ^  N.,  8  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  north  of  Big  Sable  light, 
when  see  course  from  White  Fish  point  to  Marquette. 

Grand  Marais  to  Manitou  Island  and  Copper  Har- 
bor.— When  1  mile  north  of  piers,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  92  railed, 
to  a  point  Ij  miles  north  of  Manitou  light;  thence  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  13 
miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  off,  and  in  range  of  the  lights,  to  guide  into  the 
harbor. 

Grand  Marais  to  Portage  Eatry. — When  l  nil-  n  .rtV. 
of  the  piers,  steer  W.  |^  N.,  98  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  iluron 
Island  light,  whence  see  course  from  White  Fish  poi'^.tto  Portu  «  entry. 

Grand  Island  Harbor  to  Marquette.— Run  oat  .;i   the 

range  lights  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  about  6  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  K.  f  K. 
from  the  north  point  of  Wood  island,  when  Leer  W.  ^  N.,  1"'  raiie;^, 
until  Laughing  Fish  point  bears  south,  distant  i  mile,  thence  W.  g^  S.,  H 
miles,  to  the  beacon-liglit  at  Marquette. 

Grand    Island  Harbor   to  Copper  Harbor.— When   1 

mile  N.  E.  f  N.  from  the  north  point  of  Wood  island,  as  in  the  last 
course,  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  75  railes,  to  a  point  1^  miles  north  of  Manitou 
light,  when  see  course  I'rom  Grand  Marais  lo  Manitou  and  Copper  ha»*bor» 

Grand  Island  Harbor   to  Portage  Entry.— Run    out 

on  the  ranges  N.  by  W.  f  W.,  about  8  railes,  until  Grand  Island  light 
bears  E.  \  N.,  3  railes  distant,  when  steer  W.  N.  W.  ^  N.,  66  railes.  to  a 
point  1^  miles  north  of  Huron  Island  light,  when  see  coursn  from  White 
Fish  point  to  Portage  entry. 

Marquette  to  Portage  Entry. -*Vhen  i  mile  ea»t  of  Mar- 

Juotte  liglit,  steer  N.  ^  W.,  4$  railes,  until  tno  north  point  ot'  Presque 
slo  bears  southwest,  2  railes  distant,  passing  one-quarter  of  a  mile  east  of 
.the  rockfl  extending  five-eighths  of  a  mile  east  of  the  north  end  of  Presque 
Isle,  when  steer  N.  W.  i  N.,  22  miles,  until  P.ig  B.\y  point  bears  H.  W.  ^ 
8,,  9  miles,  thence  W.  N.  W.,  18  miles,  to  a  point   l^  miles  N.  |  W.  of 


m 


244 


LAKE    8UFKR10K. 


!       ! 


il 


t'    i: 


'     » 


Huron  Island  lights  when  see  course  from  White  Fish  point  to  Portage 
entry. 

To  Bun  Inside  the  Rocks  off  Presque  Isle. — When 

abreast  the  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  N.  E.  by  E.,  about  1  mile,  until 
Granite  Island  light  opens  by  Presque  Isle,  when  haul  up  for  it  N.  by 
W,  ^  W.,  6  miles,  passing  mid-channel  between  Presque  Isle  and  the 
rooks,  when  steer  N.  W.  J  N.,  20  miles,  until  Big  Bay  point  bears  S.  W. 
^  S.,  2  miles,  whence  see  preceding  course  to  Portage  entry. 

Marquette  to  Mendota  (Lac  La  Belle). — When  2  miles 
northeast  of  Presque  Isle,  as  in  the  course  to  Portage  entry,  steer  N.  W. 
by  N.  f  N.,  60  miles,  ranging  on  Mt.  Houghton,  until  the  light-house 
(discontinued)  at  the  entrance  to  the  canal  bears  W.  f  S.,  2^  miles  distant, 
when  steer  for  it. 

Marquette  to  Manitou  Passage. — When  2  miles  northeast  of 
Presque  Isle,  as  in  the  course  to  Portage  entry,  steer  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  51^ 
miles,  passing  half  a  mile  east  of  Granite  Island  light,  until  Gull  Rock 
light  bear.?  N.  E.  J  N.,  IJ  miles,  or  about  midway  between  it  and  the 
southeast  extreme  of  Keweenaw  point,  when  follow  around  the  coast, 
keeping  1  mile  from  shore  for  11^  miles  to  Copper  harbor. 

Marquette  to  Stannard  Rock.— When  i  mile  east  of  main 
light,  steer  N.  f  E.,  44  miles,  to  a  point  one-eighth  of  a  mile  west  of  day 
beacon. 

Huron  Island  to  L'Anse. — When  l^  miles  N.  f  W.  of  Huron 
Island  ligUt,  steer  W.  J  S.,  10  miles,  passing  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
north  of  Polnte  Abbaye,  thence  S.  W.  f  W.,  13  miles,  until  Pe-qua-qua- 
wa-raing  point  bears  E.  S.  E.,  1^  m/es,  thence  S,  ^  W.,  7  miles,  to  the 
railroad  whrrf  at  L'Anse. 

L'Ans©  to  Portagre  Entry. — From  the  merchandise  dock  steer 
N.  -^  E.,  14^  miles,  to  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile  S.  by  E.  f  E.  of  the 
pier  at  the  entry,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights. 

Portage  R-Ver. — All  the  dangers  are  marked  with  buoys.  Run- 
ning up,  ket'p  about  the  middle  of  the  river  and  cuts.  Generally  the 
buoys  oan  bo  seen  from  one  to  another.  Some  precaution  is  necessary  to 
prevent  ineeting  steamers  or  tows  in  narrow  water.  Leave  red  buoys  to 
starboard  and  black  to  port.  Least  water  in  channel,  13  feet.  From 
the  entry  to  the  head  of  river  is  6  miles.  Passing  into  Portage  lake, 
steer  N.  by  W .  f  W.,  4f  miles,  until  a  point  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
below  Dollar  b.iy  bears  E.  f  N.,  one-quarter  of  a  mile;  thence  N.  f  W., 
five-eiphi  '13  of  <i  iriie,  until  Dollar  bay  is  seen  through  the  middle  of  the 
passage  *o  it;  v^hef,  steer  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  in  mid-chaimel,  2^  miles  until 
past  the  oid  doclitt  he  Isle  Royale  stamp  mill;  thence  in  raid-channel 
half  a  mile  to  \.he  ducks  at  Houghton,  on  the  south  side,  or  to  Hancock, 
on  the  north,  'Oho  signal  to  open  the  bridge  is  4  blasts  of  the  whistle. 
From  Hancock  to  the  Portage  Lake  ship-canal  the  distance  is  1^  miles; 
good  wide  chain -el. 

Ti'.ere  is  a  shoal  which  extends  off  the  Quincy  dump  about  300  feet. 
The  shoa!f>R*;  spot  is  neariy  in  the  center  line  of  the  north  opening  in  the 
bridge  and  about  600  feet  above  the  biidge. 

Portage  Entry  to  Mendota  (Lac  La  Belle.)— When  2 

miles  E.  by  S.  from  Portage  River  light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  34^  miles, 
until  Mt.  Houghton  bears  N,  W.  by  N.  |  N.,  and  the  entrance  to  the 


t  to  Portage 

sle. — When 
1  mile,  until 
for  it  N.  by 
Isle  and  the 
,  bears  S.  W. 

/"hen  2  miles 
,  steer  N.  W. 
5  light-house 
miles  distant, 

1  northeast  of 

n:  f  w.,  6H 

il  Gull  Rock 
a  it  and  the 
d  the  coast, 

east  of  main 
)  west  of  day 


rs 


W.  of  Huron 

of  a  mile 

Pe-qua-qua- 

miles,  to  the 

le  dock  steer 
<:.  f  E.  of  the  ■ 

buoys.  Run- 
;ut'rally  the 
necessary  to 
|red  buoys  to 
feet.  From 
rtage  lake. 
Is  of  a  mile 
N.  f  W., 
iddle  of  the 
miles  until 
Ira  id -channel 
jto  Hancock, 
the  whistle. 
8  H  miles; 

It  300  feet, 
jning  in  the 

()— When  2 

84^  miles, 

L-ince  to  the 


LAKE    BUPEUIOB. 


245 


oanal  N.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  when  steer  N.  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  until  the  en- 
trance bears  W.  f  S.,  2  miles  distant,  when  run  for  it  on  that  bearing. 

Fortaee  River  to  Manitou  Passage.  -When  2  miles  E. 
by  S.  from  Portage  River  light,  steer  N.  E.  ^  N.,  45  miles,  ranging  on 
Gull  Rock  light  until  within  1^  miles  of  it,  and  in  mid-channel,  when 
follow  around  the  coast,  keeping  about  1  mile  from  shore  for  11^  miles, 
to  Copper  harbor. 

Maiiitou  Island  to  Passage  Island. — When  i  mile  north- 
east of  the  light,  steer  N.  W.  f  N.,  66  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of 
Passage  Island  light.  , 

Manitou  Island  to  Rock  Harbor. — When  l  mile  northeast 
of  the  light,  steer  N.  VV".  f  W.,  65  miles,  until  the  liglit-house  (discontin- 
ued) bears  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.     See  directions  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Manitou  Island  to  Copper  Harbor. — When  i  mile  north 
east  of  the  light,  steer  W.  by  N.  i  IT.,  11  miles,  thence  W.  ^  N.,  3  miles 
to  a  point  1  mile  off,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights. 

Manitou  Island  Passage  to  Ontonagon  and  Inter- 
mediate Ports. — When  1^  miles  S.  W.  ^  S.  from  Gull  Rock  light, 
follow  around  the  coast  at  a  distance  of  not  less  than  one  mile  for  33 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  W.  f  W.  from  Eagle  River  light,  keeping  a  look- 
out for  the  reefs  extending  along  the  coast  from  Eagle  harbor  to  Eagle 
river;  thence  S.  W.  f  W.,  60^  miles,  until  the  two  lights  at  Ontonagon 
are  in  range,  distant  1^^  miles  from  the  beacon. 

Copper  Harbor  to    Rock    Harbor   (Isle    Royale).— 

When  1  mile  N.  f  E.  from  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights, 
steer  N.  W.  ^  N.,  53  miles,  until  the  light-house  (discontinued)  bears  N. 
W.  by  W.  ^  W.     See  directions  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Copper  Harbor  to  Passage  Island.— When  l  mile  N.  ^ 
E.  from  the  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights,  steer  N.  K.  W. 
f  W.,  56  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Passage  Island  light.  See 
course  from  White  Fish  point  to  Port  Arthur  and  Silver  islet. 

Copper  Harbor  to  Eagle  Harbor.— When  l  mile  N.  f  E. 
from  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights,  steer  W.  7  milep,  thence 
W.  by  8.  7f  miles,  to  a  point  II  miles  from  Eagle  harbor  and  in  line  of 
the  range  lights,  keeping  1  mile  from  shore. 

Eagle  Harbor  to  Rock  Harbor  (Isle  Royale.)— When 
1^  miles  from  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  r:;n<ii:e  lights,  steor  N,  N. 
W.  I  W.,  40^^  miles,  until  the  light-house  (discontinued)  bears  N.  W.  by 
W.  I  W.,  about  1  mile  distant. 

Eagle  Harbor  to  Passage  Island.— When  l^  miles  from 
front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights,  steer  N".  by  W.  ^  W.,  52^ 
miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Passage  Island  light. 

Eagle  Harbor  to  Devil  Islaird  and  Duluth.— When  2 

miles  ^^  N.  W.  f  W.  from  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights, 
steer  W.  by  S.  |  S.,  124  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  J  W.  from  Devil 
island,  thence  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  68  miles,  until  Duluth  light  bears  S.  W.  by 
W.,  distant  half  a  mile,  when  see  Duluth  harbor. 

Eagle  Harbor  to  Bayfleld,— When  2  miles  N.  N.  W.  ^  W. 
from  front  beacon,  and  in  lint  of  the  range  lights,  steer  VV.  S.  W.  ^  S., 
123  miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  mile  north  of  the  north  point  of  Mag- 


246 


L.AKK   SUPEBIOB. 


1:1 


dalene  island,  passing  1^  miles  north  of  Michigan  island  and  one-half 
mile  south  of  Prosque  Isle  point,  thence  S.  VV.  ^  W.,  10  miles,  to  a  point 
three-fourths  of  a  mile  east  of  Bayfield. 

Eagle  Harbor  to  La  Pointe.— When  2  miles  N.  N.  W.  f  W. 
from  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  lights,  steer  S.  VV.  by 
W.  i  W.,  136  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  W.  f  W.  of  La  Pointe  light; 
thence  N.  f  W.,  4f  miles,  to  Bayfield. 

Eagle  Harbor  to  Eagle  River. — When  i^  miles  N.  N.  W« 
f  W.  from  front  beacon,  and  in  line  of  the  range  light,  steer  W.  8.  W., 
7^  miles,  to  a  point  if  miles  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  E  igle  River  light,  not 
approaching  the  shore  within  1  mile.  Eagle  Harbor  light  kept  open  to 
the  northward  of  the  shore  west  of  it,  leads  north  of  the  reef  off  Eagle 
river. 

Eaffle  River  to  Portage  liake  Ship-Canal. — When  i| 
miles  N.  W.  ^  N.  from  Eagle  River  ligiit,  steer  S.  VV.  f  W.,  20  miles, 
until  Portage  Lake  Ship-Canal  Pierhead  light  bears  S.  E.  by  8.,  distant 
2  miles. 

Eagle  River  to  Ontonagon. — When  ij  miles  N.  W.  |  N. 
from  Eagle  River  light,  steer  S.  VV.  |  VV.,  61^  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles 
northwest  of  Ontonagon  Pierhead  beacon-light. 

^  Portage  Lake  Ship-Canal  to  Devil  Island  and  Supe- 
rior City. — When  2  luiles  N.  W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer 
W.  by  8.,  98|  miles,  to  a  point  1^  miles  N.  f  W.  from  Devil  island; 
thence  S.  W.  by  VV.,  66  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  N.  E.  ^  E.  from  St.  Louis 
River  Pierhead  light. 

Portage  Lake  Ship-Canal  to  Bayfield. — When  2  miles 
N.  W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  VV.  by  S.  |-  8.,  97  miles,  to  a 
point  three-fourths  mile  north  of  the  most  northerly  point  of  Magdalene 
island;  thence  S.  W.  ^  VV.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  mile  east  of 
Bayfield. 

PoT»:age  Lake  Ship-Canal  to  Port  Arthur  and  Silver 
Island. — When  2  miles  N".  W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer 
N.  f  E.,  68  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  Passage  Island  light,  when 
see  course  from  White  E'ish  point  to  Port  Arthur  and  Silver  islet.  Or 
when  2  miles  N.  W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon,  steer  N.  W.,  55  miles, 
to  a  point  3  miles  W.  \  S.  from  Rock  of  Ages,  keeping  a  lookout  for 
shoal  spots  southwest  of  it,  when  steer  N.  N.  E.  I  E.,  35  miles,  until 
Thunder  Cape  light  bears  N.  ^  W.,  3  miles,  thence  N.  W.  f  W.,  1  li 
miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  mile  northeast  of  Welcome  islands,  when 
steer  N.  W.  f  W.,  6  miles,  to  the  dock  at  Port  Arthur. 

Portage  Lake    Ship-Canal   to  Ontonagon.  —  When   2 

miles  N.  W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  S.  WT  f  W.,41i^  miles, 
to  a  point  If  miles  northwest  of  Ontonagon  Pierhead  beacon-light. 

Portage  Lake  Ship-Canal  to  Grand  Marais.— When  2 

miles  N.  W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  W.  by  N.  f  N.,  85^^ 
miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  beacon-light. 

Portage  Lake  Ship-Canal  to  Ashland.— When  2  miles  N. 
W.  by  N.  of  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  8.  VV,  by  W.  f  W.,  109  miles, 
to  a  point  1  mile  N.  W.  f  W.  from  La  Pointe  light,  thence  8.  by  W.  ^ 
W.,  8  miles,  to  the  outer  end  of  the  proposed  extension  of  the  break- 
water at  Ashland. 


and  one-half 
lies,  to  a  point 

T.  N.  W.  f  W. 

ae:  S.    W.  by 

Pointe  light; 

liles  N.  N.  W. 
eer  W.  S.  W., 
ver  light,  not 
,  kept  open  to 
reef  off  Eagle 

ll.— When  li 
W.,  20  miles, 
by  8.,  distant 

19  N.  W.  -J  N. 
point  If  miles 

and  Supe- 

3on- light,  steer 

Devil  island; 

from  St.  Louis 


W'hen  2  miles 

L  97  miles,  to  a 

[  of  Magdalene 

IS  mile  east  of 


and  Silver 

on-light,  steer 
d  light,  when 
ver  islet.  Or 
W.,  65  miles, 
lookout  for 
5  miles,  until 
V.  f  W.,  1  li 
islands,  when 

-When  2 
»V.,  41^  miles, 
)n-light. 

S. — When  2 

|N.  f  N.,  85i 

bn  2  miles  N. 

.,109  miles, 

S.  by  W.  i 

ii  the  break- 


LAK£   SUPERIOR. 


247 


Ontonagon  to  Bayfield. — When  l  mile  northwest  from  pier- 
head beaoon-iight,  steer  W.  |  S.,  66f  miles,  ranging  on  the  east  end  of 
Magdalene  island  until  Michigan  Island  light  bears  N.  £.  f  N.,  distant 
2  miles,  when  steer  W.  N.  W.,  5  miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  mile 
north  of  the  northern  point  of  Magdalene  island;  thence  S.  W.  i  W.,  10 
miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  mile  east  of  Bayfield. 

Ontonagfon  to  Duluth  and  Superior  City,  passing 
between  the  Apostle  Islands. — When  2  miles  S.  W.  f  S.  from  Michigan 
Island  light,  as  in  the  last  course,  steer  W.  N.  W.  |  W.,  1  miles,  until 
the  west  end  of  Stockton  island  bears  N.  f  W.;  whence  steer  W.  ^  S.,  4 
miles,  until  the  southwest  point  of  Oak  island  bears  N.  f  W.,  1  mile  dis- 
tant, when  steer  northwest  11  miles  until  Sand  Island  light  bears  S.  W. 
^  W.,  C^  miles,  passing  one-half  mile  southwest  of  Raspberry  Island 
light,  when  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  f  W.,  59j  miles,  until  Duluth  light  bears 
8.  W.  by  W.,  distant  one-half  mile;  or  steer  S.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  57  miles, 
to  a  point  1  mile  N.  E.  ^  E.  from  St.  Louis  River  Pierhead  light. 

Ontonagon  to  Duluth  and  Superior  City,  passing  north 
of  the  Apostle  Islands. — When  1  mih;  northwest  from  pierhead  beacon- 
light,  steer  W.  by  N.,  52^  miles,  until  Outer  Island  light  bears  S.  S.  W. 
^  S.,  2^  miles;  thence  W.  f  S.,  15^  miles,  to  a  point  If  miles  N.  f  W. 
from  Devil  island;  whence  see  course  from  Eagle  harbor  to  Devil  island 
and  Duluth,  and  from  Portage  Lake  ship-canal  to  Devil  island  and 
Superior  City. 

Ontonagon   to   Bayfield    (south   channel).  — When  1 

mile  northwest  from  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  W.  by  S.  I  S.,  keeping 
!*  mile  from  shore  along  the  Porcupine  mountains  for  71  ^  miles,  until 
La  Pointe  light  bears  S.  E.  f  E.,  1  mile,  when  steer  N.  f  W.,  4f  miles  to 
Bayfield. 

Ontonagon  to  Grand  Marais. — When  i  mile  northwest 
from  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  northwest  75  miles  until  Grand  Marais 
(Minn.)  light  bears  northeast  1  mile  distant. 

Ontonagon  to  Port  Arthur  and  Silver  Islet.— When 

1  mile  northwest  from  pierhead  beacon-light,  steer  N.  f  W.,  68  miles,  to 
A  point  3  miles  W.  i  S.  of  Rock  of  Ages,  when  see  courses  from  Portage 
Lake  ship-canal  to  Port  Arthur.  To  make  Silver  islet  when  3  miles  W. 
i  S.  from  Rock  of  Ages,  steer  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  37  miles,  until  Thunder 
Cape  light  bears  N.  W.  ^  W.,  1^  mdes,  when  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  5f  miles 
to  Silver  Islet  landing. 

Bayfield  to  Bay  City  and  Ashland.— When  abreast  of 
dock  close-to,  steer  S.  J  E.,  4f  miles,  until  La  Pointe  light  bears  S.  E.  f 
E.,  I  mile  distant,  when  steer  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  8  miles,  to  the  outer  end 
of  the  proposed  extension  of  the  breakwater. 

Bayfield  to  Duluth  and  Superior  City,— When  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile  east  of  Bayfield,  steer  N.  by  E.  f  E.,  7  miles,  until  the 
southwest  point  of  Oak  island  bears  N.  f  W.,  1  rallc;  when  see  course 
from  Ontonagon  to  Duluth  and  Suparior  city,  passing  between  the 
Apostle  islands. 

Bayfield  to  Grand  Marais.— When  three-fourths  of  a  mile 
east  of  Bayfield,  steer  N,  iL.  ^  E.,  10  miles,  to  a  point  three-fourths  of  a 
mile  north  of  the  most  northerly  point  of  Magdalene  island,  thence  E. 
N.  E.  5^  miles,  passing  half  a  mile  south  of  Presque  Isle  point,  until  the 
east  point  of  Stockton  island  bears  N.  4  W..  S\  milea;  thence  N.  |  E.,  12 


348 


LAKE   SUPEBIOB. 


miles,  passing  half  a  mile  east  of  Stockton  island  and  1  mile  west  of 
Outer  island,  until  Outer  Island  light  bears  E.  f  N.,  distant  2^  miles, 
when  steer  N.  i  E.,  48^  miles,  until  Grand  Marais  Pierhead  light,  bears 
northeast  1  mile  distant. 

Bayfield  to  Silver  Islet  Landing:  and  Port  Arthur.— 

When  3^  miles  S.  f  E.  of  the  east  point  of  Stockton  island,  as  in  the  last 
course,  steer  N.  N.  E.  |  E.,  85  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  W.  |  S.  from 
Rock  of  Ages;  thence  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  37  miles,  until  Thunder  Cape 
light  bears  N.  W.  ^  W.,  Ij  miles,  when  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  6f  miles,  to  Sil- 
ver Islet  landing.  Or  to  make  Port  Arthur,  when  3  miles  W.  ^  8.  of 
Rock  of  Ages,  steer  N.  N.  E.  f  E.,  35  miles,  until  Thunder  Cape  light 
bears  N.  ^  W.,  3  miles;  thence  N.  W.  f  W.,  11^  miles,  to  a  point  three- 
fourths  of  a  mile  northeast  of  Welcome  islands,  when  steer  N.  W.  i  W., 

6  miles,  to  the  docks  at  Port  Arthur. 

Sand  Island  to  Beaver  Bay.— When  the  light  bears  S.  W.  i 
W.,  distant  S^  miles,  steer  N.  W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  25  miles,  to  the  bay. 

Superior  City  to  Two  Harbors.— When  i  mile  N.  E.  i  E. 
from  St  Louis  River  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  N.  E.  -J-  E.,  25  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  south  of  the  breakwater  at  Two  Harbors. 

Superior  City  to  Beaver  Bay.— When  i  mile  N.  E.  i  E.  from 
St.  Louis  River  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  |  N.,  50  miles,  to  a  point  1 
mile  south  of  the  bay. 

Superior  City  to  Grand  Marais.— When  i  mile  N.  E.  i  E. 
from  St.  Louis  River  Pierhead  light,  steer  N.  E.  f  N.,  105  miles  until 
Grand  Marais  Pierhead  light  bears  northeast,  1  mile  distant. 

Superior  City  to  Silver  Islet  Landing  and  Port 
Arthur. — When  l  mile  N.  E.  ^  E.  from  St.  Louis  River  Pierhead 
light,  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  146  miles,  to  a  point  3  miles  W.  ^  S.  from  Rock 
of  Ages;  when  see  course  from  Bayfield  to  Silver  Islet  landing  and  Port 
Arthur. 

Superior  City  to  Duluth. — Run  out  in  a  line  with  the  piers, 
half  a  mile,  and  haul  up  northwest,  6  miles,  until  Duluth  light  bears  S. 
W.  by  W.,  half  a  mile  distant. 

Duluth  to  Two  Harbors. — When  ^  mile  outside  the  beacon 
and  in  line  of  the  two  lights  at  Duluth,  steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  18  miles,  or 
until  Granite  Point  bears  N.  W.,  1  mile,  thence  N.  E.  ^  N.,  7  miles,  to  a 
point  1  mile  south  of  the  breakwater  at  Two  Harbors. 

Duluth  to  Beaver  Bay. — When  ^  mile  outside  the  becoon  and 
in  line  of  the  two  lights  at  Duluth,  steer  N.  E.  ^  E,,  27  miles,  until  the 

Soint  on  the  east  side  of  Agate  bay  bears  west,  2^  miles;  thence  N.  E.  f 
r.,  23^  miles,  to  a  point  1  mile  south  of  the  bay. 

Duluth  to  Grand  Marais. — When  ^  mile  outside  the  beacon 
and  in  line  of  the  two  lights  at  Duluth,  steer  N.  E.  I  E.,  18  miles,  until 
Granite  point  bears  N.  W.,  1  mile;  thence  N.  E.  ^  N.,  87  miles,  until 
Grand  Marais  Pierhead  light  bears  northeast,  distant  1  mile. 

Duluth  to  Port  Arthur  and  Silver  Islet  Landing.— 

When  ^  mile  outside  the  beacon  and  in  line  of  the  two  lights  at  Duluth, 
steer  N.  E.  f  E.,  171  miles,  passing  2  miles  southeast  of  Lucille  island 
until  the  highest  peak  on  the  west  end  of  Pie  island  bears  N.  W.  ^  W., 

7  miles  distant;  thence  N.  N.  E.  i  E.,  9|  miles,  until  Thunder  Cape  light 
bears  N.  ^  W.,  3  miles;  thence  N.  W.  f  W.,  11^^  miles^  to  a  point  three- 


LAKB   SUPBBIOB. 


249 


and   Port 


fourths  of  a  mile  northeast  of  Welcome  islands,  when  steer  N.  W.  |  W., 
6  miles,  to  the  docks  at  Port  Arthur.  To  make  Silver  Islet  landing:: 
When  the  highest  peak  of  Pie  island  bears  F.  W.  ^  W.,  7  miles,  steer  N. 
N.  E.  J  E.,  11^  miles,  until  Thunder  Capo  light  bears  N.  W.  J  W.,  l^ 
miles;  thence  N.  E.  ^  E.,  6f  miles,  to  Silver  Islet  landing. 

Two  Harbors  to  Bayfield. — When  l  mile  south  of  the  break- 
water, steer  E.  f  N.,  37^  miles,  or  until  Sand  Island  light  bears  S.  W.  by 
W.,  3^  miles,  and  the  west  side  of  York  island  S.  |  E.,  2^  miles,  when 
steer  S.  E.,  11  miles,  until  the  southwest  point  of  Oak  island  bears  N.  f 
W.,  1  mile,  when  steer  S.  by  W.  I  W.,  7  miles,  to  a  point  i  mile  east  of 
Bayfield. 

Two  Harbors  to  Devil  Island  and  Portage  Lake 
Ship  Canal. — When  l  mile  south  of  the  breakwater,  steer  E.  by  N. 
i  N.,  45  miles,  to  a  point  1 J  miles  N.  f  W.  from  the  north  point  of  Devil 
island;  thence  E.  by  N.,  98^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  W.  by  N.  from 
the  beacon-light  at  Portage  Lake  Ship  canal. 

Beaver  Bar  to  Grand  Marais.— When  l  mile  east  of  the  bay 
steer  N.  E.  ^  E.,  55  miles,  until  Grand  Marais  Pierhead  light  bears  north- 
east, distant  1  mile. 

Grand  Marais  to  Port  Arthur  and  Silver  Islet  Land- 
ing^.— When  1  mile  south  of  the  beacon-light,  steer  E.  N.  E.,  14^  miles, 
until  the  mouth  of  Brule  river  bears  north  1  mile;  thence  E.  N.  E.  ^  N., 
25^  miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  southeast  of  Lucille  island;  thence  N.  E.  f 
E.,  27^  miles,  until  the  highest  peak  on  the  west  end  of  Pie  island  bears 
N.  W.  ^  W.,  7  miles  distant,  when  see  course  from  Duluth  to  Port 
Arthur  and  Silver  Islet  landing. 

Grand  Marais  to  Copper  Harbor  and  White  Fish 
Point. — When  1  mile  south  of  the  beacon-light,  steer  E.  ^  S.,  117 
miles,  to  a  point  2  miles  N.  ^  E.  from  the  front  light,  and  in  line  of  the 
range  lights  at  Copper  harbor,  when  steer  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  145^  miles,  to  a 
point  1^  miles  north  of  White  Fish  Point  light,  passing  1^  miles  north 
of  Manitou  Island  light. 

Magnetic  Declinations  in  degrees  and  tenths  corrected  to 
the  year  1890: 

White  Fish  Point '. 0.5  W. 

Grand  Island,   L.  H 2.1  E. 

.    ^       Marquette a.O  E. 

Manitou  Island 3.0  E. 

Head  Keweenaw  Bay 4.5  E. 

Copper  Harbor '. 3.4  E. 

Ontonagon 5.4  E. 

Magdalene  island 7.0  E. 

Minnesota  Point ....    9.7  E. 

Agate  bay 9.0  E. 

Grand  Marais,  nortli  shore 7.0  E. 

Wasliington  Harbor,  Isle  Royale 5.3  E. 

Siskiwit  point 4.5  E. 


IMAGE  EVALUATrON 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


1^128    |Z5 
■^   Uii    |Z2 


iU 


12.0 


! 

'•2^  II  '-^  J4 

^ 

6"     

► 

^ 


<^ 


/2 


K^ 


/. 


/^ 


!$&. 


"F 


7 


Photoeraphic 

Saences 
Corporation 


33  WISf  MAIN  STRUT 

WMSTIR.N.Y.  USM 

(716)  173.4303 


7, 


nii'i  "IfN* 


260 


LAKE   8UFEKIOK. 


Sailing  Distances  on  Lake  Superior. 


*Via  Portage  Lake. 


Light-Houses  on  the  Canadian  Shore  of  Lake  Superior. 

POINT  AUX  PINS  LIGHT-STATION.-A  fixed  white 
liffht,  visible  8  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  80  feet  above 
lake  level.     St.  Mary's  river,  6  miles  above  the  Sault. 

CORBAY  POINT  LIGHT-STAXION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  16  miles.  White  outagonal  wood  tower,  with  dwelling  attached, 
light  77  feet  above  lake  level.  On  the  north  point  of  the  entrance  to 
Batchewana  bay. 

CARIBOU  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  revolving 
white  light,  interval  of  revolution,  10  seconds,  visible  16  miles^  White, 
octagonal  wood  tower,  76  feet  high.  Red  lantern,  dwelling  attached. 
Fog-signal  building,  white  with  brown  roof.  On  a  small  island,  on  the 
«outhwcst  side  of  Caribou  island.  Fog*signal  100  feet  south  of  light. 
During  thick  or  foggy  weather  it  will  give  olasts  of  5  seconds'  duration, 
with  intervals  of  25  seconds.  A  large  rocky  flat  extends  in  a  south- 
westerly direction  for  a  distance  of  nearly  3  miles;  the  norlhwcfit  side  of 
the  island  is  shoal,  and  a  reef  extends  from  the  north  point  1^  miles;  the 
east  side  of  the  island  is  fairly  bold. 

GARGANTUA  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  16  miles.      Hexagonal  wooden  to>«er,  p.inted  white,  iron  lantern 

{tainted  red,  tower  48  feet  high,  focal  plane  0 V  Tjet  above  the  level  of  the 
like.  On  the  summit  of  a  small  island  in  the  mouth  of  Oargantna  bar- 
bor  on  the  northeast  coast  of  Lake  Superior.  South  point  of  Caribon 
island  W.  by  S.  \  S.,  42^  miles.  White  Fish  Point  light  south  66^  miles. 

MICHIPICOTEN    ISLAND     LIGHT-STATION.  —  A 

fixed  white  light,  vinible  16  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  60 
feet  above  lake  level.  On  the  Bouth  point  of  the  island.  A  fog-bell  at 
this  station. 


— >"■<    M.»- 


LAKE  8UPKBI0B. 


951 


/i/    /    / 

,r  1    I 

M-^/l/     / 

^m 

Islilii 

f 

9V, 

871    804 

S04 

])3()    858 

«84 

Sm   818 

•i78 

♦«8B 

«-4A9 

•1W« 

♦IR-i 

•SOT 

♦in 

•16» 

1M 

117 

184 

«07 

106 

1K9 

1»« 

87 

14« 

1«9 

n 

ll^ 

187 

7!> 

M 

'.B 

89 

7a 

94 

M 

178 

197 

81 

IM 

1  '  *  *  * 

.... 

o| 

Superior, 

i  fixed  white 
30  feet  above 

d  white  light, 
lling  attached, 
entrance  to 

-A  revolving 
liles.  White, 
ling  attached, 
island,  on  the 
iouth  of  li^ht 
>nd8'  duration, 
is  in  a  south- 
rthw68t  side  of 
t  1^  miles;  the 

white  light, 
,e,  iron  lantern 
he  level  of  the 
Jargantna  har- 
nt  of  Caribou 
Duth  65^  miles. 

LTION.  —  A 

ower,  light  66 
A  fog-bell  at 


AGATE  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  32  feet  above  lake 
level.    In  Quebec  harbor,  near  Michipicoten  Island  harbor. 

PENINSULAR  HARBOR  LIGHT-STATION.  — A  re- 
volving white  light,  greatest  brilliancy  every  30  seconds,  visible  16  miles. 
White,  square  wood  tower,  with  white  dwelling  attached.  Focal  plane 
106  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake.  Lantern  painted  red.  Coast  light 
and  marks  the  entrance  to  Peninsular  harbor.  On  the  south  end  of  the 
island  opposite  the  Peninsular.  Vessels  entering  the  harbor  should  leave 
it  about  one-third  of  a  mile  distant  on  the  port  hand,  but  there  is  good 
water  throughout  the  entrance  between  island  and  the  Peninsular. 

BATTLE   ISLAND   LIGHT-STATION.  —  Alternate  red 

and  white  flash,  greatest  brilliancy  every  4  minute,  \iRible  18  miles. 
White,  square  wood  tower,  light  105  feet  above  lake  level.  Entrance  to 
Nepigon  bay. 

LAMB  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white  light, 
visible  17  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  with  dwelling  attached. 
Western  entrance  to  Nepigon  bay. 

PORPHYRY  POINT  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  14  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  56  feet  above 
li^e  level.    Entrance  to  Black  bay,  Edward  island,  Algoma. 

THUNDER  CAPE  LIGHT-STATION.-  A  revolving  white 
light;  period  of  revolution,  1  minute;  visible  12  milca.  White,  square 
wood  tower,  45  feet  above  lake  level,  dwelling  attaciied.  Fog-signal 
building  white,  with  brown  roof,  50  yards  south  of  light-house. 
Entrance  to  Thunder  bay.  Fog-horn,  operated  by  compressed  air,  gives 
blasts  of  5  seconds'  duration,  with  intervals  of  25  seconds. 

KAMINISTIQUIA  REAR  RANGE  LIGHT.— A  fixed 
white  light,  visible  10  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  dwelling  at- 
tached.    On  the  north  shore  of  the  river,  near  Fort  William. 

Kamlnistlquia  Front  Range  Liffht.— A  fixed  white  light 
visible  8  miles.  Open  frame  lower,  293  yards  E.  N.  E.  from  rear  light. 
These  two  lights  in  one  lead  through  the  dredged  channel  at  mouth  of 
river. 

PORT  ARTHUR  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  1 1  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower,  light  43  feet  above 
sea  level.  On  the  westermost  end  of  the  breakwater,  built  out  in  the 
bay  to  protect  the  harbor,  2,320  feet  S.  E.  ^  S.,  from  its  former  position 
on  the  end  of  the  C.  P.  R.  wharf.  The  light  is  81  feet  from  the  ex- 
treme end  of  the  breakwater.  Vessels  running  for  shelter  of  the  break* 
water,  will  leave  it  on  their  starboard  hand  in  passing. 

VICTORIA  ISLAND  LIGHT-STATION.— A  fixed  white 
light,  visible  16  miles.  White,  square  wood  tower.  Lantern  red,  white 
frame  dwelling,  on  lower  ground  southwest  of  the  tower.  The  light  is 
78  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  is  visible  all  around  the  horizon,  except 
where,  intercepted  by  trees  on  the  north  and  east  sides  of  the  island.  Tne 
light  stands  on  a  high  rook  rising  abruptly  from  the  low  ground  near  the 
western  extremity  of  the  island. 


252 


BAILING   DISTANCES. 


HilllllllllilllllsfillP" 


i§§ii§§gg§i§i§g§§§iiP^s 


§giiS§gg^§§§^§ggig|fP 


§§8§gggg§§i§§§iggSg|| 


sii§i§ssi§^§§^gi§§^°°- 


^is§ii§l§§§i^ies§s 


i§§liS7ll^i«i§sii 


lg|gg§ii§§§i|^3S 


^eg§gi§i§li§SS3 


Sfgaiiiiiiiggg 


i§i.^3§§§ISs§S 


Isl^iillilS- 


sililSi^ii® 


Seo^S!SSif 


sfsssssess 


§S2ssa 


SSSESiS 


{3gSiS 


^39 


SS 


S 


^ 


BU 


« I 

m 


<sa| 


'Sgai 


•S 
5« 


§S||; 


I 


3 


•-)»• 


nil 


i 


s 


THE  FOLLOWING  WAS  ADOPTED 


BT  THE 


GRAND  LODGE  of  the  E.M.B.A. 


AT 


Cleveland,  at  their  last  meeting. 


'  I  'HAT  in  going  through  all  narrow  channels  or  shoal 

waters,  when  boats  are  meeting  head  to  head,  the 
descending  boat  should  have  the  right  of  way ;  that  the 
ascending  boat  should  on  all  occasions  check,  and  if  neces- 
sary stop,  especially  if  signaled  to  do  so  by  the  usual 
check  whistle  of  the  descending  boat.  We  deem  the  Lime 
Kiln  Crossing,  Grosse  Pointe,  St.  Clair  canal,  Sailors 
Encampment,  foot  of  Sugar  Island,  Neebish  cut,  Lake 
George  Flats  (especially  Collision  Bend),  Squirrel  Island 
and  Topsail  Island,  to  be  among  the  very  dangerous  pas- 
sing points. 

In  the  case  of  passing  boats  going  the  same  way, 
especially  tows,  steamers  should  check  to  as  slow  a  speed 
as  possible  to  pass,  and  the  boat  or  boats  being  passed 
should  also  check,  so  as  to  allow  the  faster  boat  to  pass 
them  as  quickly  as  is  practicable  in  consistence  with  safety. 


APPENDIX. 


PILOT-RULES  FOR  LAKE  AND  SEABOARD. 

Hules  and  Begulationa  for  the  government  of  pilots  navigating  eecuj 
gulf  By  lakes  J  bags,  sounds^  or  rivers,  except  rivers  flowing  into  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  their  tributaries.  Revised  and  adopted  by  the 
Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors  June  10, 1871,  as  authorized  by 
act  of  Congress  "  to  provide  for  the  better  security  of  life  on  board 
of  vessels  propelled  in  whole  or  in  part  by  steam,  and  for  other  pur- 
poses,^* approved  February  28,  187 1^  to  take  effect  January  1,  1872. 
{Amended  January,  1876,  1881,  and  1882.) 

RuLB  1. — When  steamers  are  approaching  each  other  "head  and 
head,"  or  nearly  so,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  each  steamer  to  pass  to  the 
righ^  or  port  side  of  the  other;  and  the  pilot  of  either  steamer  may  be 
first  in  determining  to  pursue  this  course,  and  thereupon  shall  give,  as  a 
signal  of  his  intention,  one  short  and  distinct  blast  of  his  steam-whistle, 
which  the  pilot  of  the  other  steamer  shall  answer  promptly  by  a  similar 
blast  of  his  steam-whistle,  and  ^hereupon  such  steamers  shall  pass  to 
the  right,  or  port  side  of  each  otiiui\  But  if  the  course  of  such  steam- 
ers is  so  Tar  on  the  starboard  of  each  other  as  not  to  be  considered  by 
pilots  as  meeting  "  head  and  head,"  or  nearly  so,  the  pilot  so  first  decid- 
ing shall  immediately  give  two  short  and  distinct  blasts  of  his  steam- 
whistle,  which  the  pilot  of  the  other  steamer  shall  answer  promptly  by 
two  similar  blasts  of  his  steam-whistle,  and  they  shall  pass  to  the  left,  or 
oc  the  starboard  side,  of  each  other. 

NoTH.— la  the  night,  iteamera  will  be  considered  as  meeting  "  head  and  head  " 
io  long  as  both  the  colored  lights  of  each  are  in  yieW  of  the  other. 

RuLB  11.-^ When  steamers  are  approaching  each  other  in  an  oblique 
direction  (as  shown  in  diagram  of  the  fourth  situation),  tbey  jhall  pass 
to  the  right  of  each  other,  as  if  meeting  "  head  and  head,"  or  nearly  so, 
and  the  signals  by  whistle  shall  be  given  and  answered  promptly  as  in 
that  case  specified. 

RuLB  nL — ^If,  when  steamers  are  approaching  each  other,  the  pilot 
of  either  vessel  fails  to  understand  the  course  or  intention  of  the  other, 
whether  from  signals  being  given  or  answered  erroneously,  or  from,  other 
catises,  the  pilot  so  in  doubt  shall  immediately  signify  the  same  by  giving 
several  short  and  rapid  blasts  of  the  steam-whistle ;  and  if  the  vessels 
shall  have  approached  within  half  a  mile  of  each  other,  both  shall  be 
immediately  slowed  to  a  speed  barely  sufiloient  for  steerage-way  until 
the  proper  signals  are  given,  answered,  and  understood,  or  until  the  ves- 
sels shall  have  passed  each  other. 

RuLB  rV. — When  steamers  are  running  in  a  fog  or  thick  weather,  it 
•hall  be  the  duty  of  the  pilot  to  cause  a  long  blast  of  the  steam-whisUe 
to  be  sounded  at  intervals  not  exceeding  one  minute. 


251 


APPENDIX. 


Steamers,  when  dbiftino  or  at  anchor,  in  the  fair  way  of  other  ves- 
sels  in  a  fog  or  thick  weather,  shall  ring  their  bells  at  intervals  of  not 
more  than  two  minutes. 

Rule  V. — Whenever  a  steam<)r  is  nearing  a  short  bend  or  onrve  in  the 
channel,  where,  from  the  heights  of  the  banks  or  other  cause,  a  steamer 
approaching  from  the  opposite  direction  cannot  be  seen  for  a  distance  of 
half  a  mile,  the  piloi<  of  spch  steamer,  when  he  shall  have  arrived  within 
half  a  mile  of  such  curve  or  bend,  shall  give  a  signal  by  one  long  blast 
of  the  steam-whistle,  which  signal  shall  be  answered  by  a  similar  blast, 
given  by  the  pilot  of  any  approaching  steamer  that  may  be  within  hear- 
ing. Should  such  signal  be  so  answered  by  a  steamer  upon  the  farther 
side  of  such  bend,  then  the  usual  signals  for  the  meeting  and  passing 
shall  immediately  be  given  and  answered;  but  if  the  first  alarm-signal 
of  such  pilot  be  not  answered,  he  is  to  consider  the  channel  dear  and 
govern  himself  accordingly. 

RuLB  YL — ^The  signals,  by  the  blowing  of  the  steam-whistle,  shall  be 
given  and  answered  by  pilots,  in  compliance  with  these  rules,  not  only 
when  meeting  "  head  and  head,"  or  nearly  so,  but  at  all  times  when 
passing  or  meeting  at  a  distance  within  half  a  mile  of  each  other,  and 
whether  passing  to  the  starboard  or  port. 

Rule  YII. — Relates  only  to  steamers  navigating  the  Bast  river,  New 
York. 

RuLB  YIIL — When  steamers  are  running  in  t?ie  same  direction,  and 
the  pilot  of  the  steamer  which  is  astern  shall  desire  to  pass  on  the  right 
or  starboard  hand  of  the  steamer  r^head,  he  shall  give  one  short  blast  of 
*li,i  .iteam-whistle  as  a  signal  of  such  desire  and  intention,  and  shall  put 
I rtM  iielm  to  port;  and  the  pilot  of  the  steamer  ahead  shall  answer  by  the 
bUiae  signal,  or,  if  he  prefers  to  keep  on  his  course,  he  shall  give  two 
short  and  distinct  blasts  of  the  steam-whistle,  and  the  boat  winhin^  to 
pass  must  govern  herself  accordingly,  but  the  boat  ahead  shall  in  no  o.\se 
attempt  to  cross  her  bow  or  crowd  upon  her  course. 

N.  B. — The  foregoing  rules  are  to  be  complied  with  in  all  cases  except  when 
steamers  are  navigating  in  a  crowded  channel,  or  in  the  vicinity  of  wharves;  ander 
such  circumstances  steamers  must  be  run  and  managed  with  great  cauti'>n.  sounding 
the  whifitle,  as  may  be  necessary,  to  guard  against  collision  or  other  accidents. 

Section  4283,  RsviiBD  Statttes. — BuU  Uo&uiy-four.  In  construing  and  obejring 
these  rules,  due  rp^ardmust  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation,  and  to  any  speciu 
circumstances  Vuicb  oiay  ezibt  in  any  particular  caas  rendering  a  departure  from 
them  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate  dauger. 

Rule  IX. — All  double-ended  ferry-boats  on  lakes  and  seaboard  shall 
carry  a  central  range  of  clear,  bright,  white  lights,  .bowing  all  around 
the  horizon,  placed  at  equal  alcitudes  forward  and  aft,  also  suoh  side- 
lights as  specified  in  section  4233,  Revised  Statutes,  Rule  Three,  para- 
graphs B  and  C. 

Local  inspectors  in  districts  having  ferry-boats  shall,  whenever  the 
safety  of  navigation  may  require,  designate  for  each  line  of  such  boats  a 
oertam  light,  white  or  colored,  which  shall  show  all  around  the  horizon, 
to  designate  and  distinguish  such  lines  from  each  other,  which  light  shall 
be  carried  on  a  flag-staff  amidship,  fifteen  feet  above  the  white  range- 
lights. 

The  line  dividing  jurisdiction  between  Pilot-Rules  on  Western  Rivers 
and  Lakes  and  Seaboard  at  New  Orleans  shall  be  the  lower  limits  of  the 
city. 


appendix: 


256 


EXTRACTS  FROM  REVISED  STATUTES 

SiiO.  4233.  The  fo'^owing  rules  for  preventing  collisions  on  the 
water  shall  he  followed  in  the  navigation  of  vessels  of  the  Navy,  and  of 
the  mercaiUile  marine  of  the  United  States: 


STEAM  AND  SAIL  VBS8BLS. 


RuLB  Onb.  Every  steam  vessel  which  is  under  sail,  and  not  under 
Bteam,  shall  be  considered  a  sail- vessel;  und  every  steam  vessel  which 
is  under  steam,  whether  under  sail  or  not,  shall  be  considered  a  steam- 
vessel. 

LIGHTS. 

BuLX  Two.  The  lights  mentioned  in  the  following  rules,  and  no 
others,  shall  be  carried  in  all  weather,  between  sunset  and  sunrise: 

Rule  Thbbb.  All  ocean-going  steamers,  and  steamers  carrying  sail, 
shall,  when  underway,  carry — 

(A)  At  the  foremast  ht^ad,  a  bright  white  light,  of  such  a  character 
as  to  be  visible  on  a  dark  night,  with  a  clear  atmosphere,  at  a  distance  of 
at  leant  five  miles,  and  ao  constructed  as  to  show  a  uniform  and  un- 
broken light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  twenty  points  of  the  compass, 
and  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  ten  points  on  each  side  of  the  vessel, 
namely,  from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  either  side. 

(B)  On  the  starboard  side  a  green  light,  of  such  character  ^s  to  be 
visible  on  a  dark  night,  with  a  clear  atmosphere,  at  a  distance  of  at  least 
two  miles,  and  so  constructed  as  to  show  a  uniform  and  unbroken  light 
over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of  the  compass,  and  so  fixed  as 
to  thro  >7  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the 
starboard  side. 

(C)  On  the  port  side,  a  red  light,  of  such  character  as  to  be  visible  on 
a  dark  night,  with  a  clear  atmosphere,  at  a  distance  of  at  least  two  miles, 
and  so  constructed  as  to  show  a  uniform  and  unbroken  light  over  an  arc 
of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of  the  compass,  and  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the 
light  from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  port  side. 

The  green  and  red  lights  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard  scre^sns,  project- 
ing at  least  three  feet  forward  from  the  lights,  so  as  to  prevent  them 
from  being  seen  across  the  bow. 

RuLB  FouB.  Steam-vessels,  when  towing  other  vessels,  shall  carry 
two  bright  white  mast-head  Hghts  vertically,  in  addition  to  their  side- 
lights, so  as  to  distinguish  them  from  other  steam  vessele.  Each  of  these 
mast-head  lights  shall  be  of  the  same  character  and  construction  as  th« 
mast-head  lights  prescribed  by  Rule  Three. 

RuLB  FiYB.  All  steam  vessels,  other  than  ocean-going  steamers,  and 
steamers  carrying  sail,  shall,  when  under  way,  carry  on  the  starboard 
and  port  sides  lights  of  the  s'^.me  character  and  construction  and  in  the 
same  position  as  are  prescribed  for  side-lights  by  Rule  Three,  except  in 
the  case  provided  in  Rule  Six. 

RuLB  Six.  Relates  only  to  steamers  navigaticg  waters  flowing  into 
the  Qulf  of  Mexico. 


SS6 


APPENDIX. 


RuLM  Sbyxv.  am  coasting  steam-vesse'.s,  and  Bteam-vessela  other 
than  ferry-boats  and  vessels  otherwise  expressly  provided  for,  navigating 
the  bays,  lakes,  rivers,  or  other  inland  waters  of  the  United  States  ex- 
cept those  mentioned  in  Rale  Six,  shall  carry  the  red  and  green  lights, 
as  presoribeo  for  ocean-going  steamers;  and,  in  addition  thereto,  a  cen- 
tral range  of  two  white  lights;  the  after  light  being  carried  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  at  least  fifteen  feet  above  the  light  at  the  head  of  the  vessel.  The 
head  light  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  show  a  good  light  through  twenty 
points  of  the  compass,  namely:  From  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft 
the  beam  on  either  side  of  the  vessel;  and  the  after  light  so  as  to  show 
all  around  the  horizon.  The  lights  for  ferry-boats  shall  be  regulated  by 
snch  rules  as  the  board  of  supervising  inspectors  of  steam-vessels  shall 
prescribe. 

DIAGRAMS. 

The  following  diagrams  iare  intended  to  illustrate  the  workings  of  the 
foregoing  system  of  colored  lights,  and  are  to  be  used  by  pilots  in  con- 
nection with  the  rules,  as  sailing  directions  on  meeting  or  nearing  other 
steamer*.' 

FIBST  SITUATION. 

Here  the  two  colored  lights,  visible  to  each,  will  indicate  their  direct 
approach  (''head  and  head")  toward  each  other.    In  this  situation  it  is  a 


standing  rule  that  both  shall  put  their  helms  to  port  and  pass  to  the 
right,  each  having  previously  given  one  blast  of  the  steam-whistle. 


8B00ND    SITUATION. 


Here  the  green  light  only  will  be  visible  to  each,  the  screens  prevent- 
ing the  red  light  horn  being  seen.  They  are  therefore  passing  to  star- 
board, which  is  ralable  in  this  sitaation,  each  pilot  havi.ig  previously 

j^  signified  his  intention  by  two  blasts  of   the 

steam-whistle. 


THIBD  BITUATIOir. 


A  and  B  see  each  other's  red  lisht  onlv,  the  screens  preventing  the 
green  lights  from  being  seen.  Both  vessels  are  evidently  passing  to  port, 
which  is  ralable  in  this  situation,  each  pilot 
having  previously  signified  his  intention  by 
one  blast  of  th^i  steam-whistle. 


APPEirDIZ. 


867 


rOUBTH   BITUATlOir. 

This  is  a  situation  reqairing  great  caution;  the  red  light  of  B  in  view 
to  A,  and  the  green  light  of  A  in  view  to  B,  will  inform  both  that  they 
are  approaching  each  other  in  an  oblique  direction.  A  should  put  hu 
helm  to  f)ort,  and  pass  astern  of  B,  while  B  should  continue  on  his  course, 
or  port  his  helm,  if  necessary  to  avoid  collision,  each  having  previously 
^iven  one  blast  of  the  steam- whistle,  as  required  by  the  rules  when  pass- 
ing to  the  right. 


FIFTH  SmiATJON. 

This  is  a  situation  requiring  great  caution;  the  red  light  of  A  in  view 
to  B,  and  the  green  light  of  B  in  view  to  A,  will  inform  oth  that  thej 
are  approaching  each  other  in  an  obliij^ae  direction.  B  s.ionM  put  his 
helm  to  port,  and  pass  astern  of  A,  while  A  should  continn<  iis  oonrae 
or  port  his  helm,  it  necessary  to  avoid  collision,  each  hav  reviously 

given  one  blast  of  the  steam  whistle,  as  required  by  tlie  >    es  when 
passing  to  the  right 


SIXTH  SITUATICN. 


In  this  situation  the  steamer  A  will  only  see  the  red  light  of  the 
steamer  B  in  whichever  of  the  three  positions  the  latter  may  happen  to 
be,  because  the  green  light  will  be  hid  from  view;  A  will  be  assured  that 
the  port  side  of  B  is  toward  him,  and  the  latter  is  therefore  crossing  th« 


268 


AmanxpL 


bows  of  A  in  lome  direction  to  port;  A  will  therefore  (if  lo  near  as  to 
fear  a  collision)  port  his  helm  with  confidence  and  pass  clear.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  steamer  B,  in  either  of  the  three  positions,  will  see  both 
the  red  and  green  lights  of  A,  by  which  the  former  will  know  that  a 
steamer  is  approaching  directly  toward  him;  B  will  act  accordingly.  And 
keep  away  if  necessary. 


B 


B 


BSVSNTB  SITUATION. 

In  this  sitaation  the  steamer  A  will  only  see  the  green  light  of  the 
steamer  B  in  whichever  of  the  three  positions  the  latter  may  happen  to 
be,  because  the  red  light  will  be  hidden  from  view;  A  will  be  assured 
that  the  starboard  side  of  B  is  toward  him,  and  that  the  latter  is  there- 
fore crossing  the  bows  of  A  in  some  direction  to  starboard;  A  will  there- 
fore (if  so  near  as  to  fear  a  collision)  starboard  his  helm  with  confidence 
and  pass  clear.  On  the  other  hand,  the  steamer  B,  in  either  of  the  three 
positions,  will  see  both  the  red  and  green  lights  of  A,  by  which  the  for- 
mer will  know  that  a  steamer  is  approaching  directly  toward  him;  B  will 
act  accordingly,  and  keep  away  if  necessary. 


The  manner  of  fixing  the  colored  lights  should  be  particularly  attended 
to.  They  will  require  to  be  fitted  each  with  a  screen^  of  woc<^  or  can- 
vas,  on  the  inboard  side,  and  dose  to  the  light,  in  order  to  prevent  both 
being  seen  at  the  same  moment  from  any  direction  bat  that  of  right 
ahcM  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam. 


APPENDIX. 


269 


This  is  important,  for  without  the  soreens  any  plan  of  bow-lights 
wonld  be  ineffectual  as  a  means  of  indicating  the  direction  of  steerug. 
This  will  be  readily  understood  by  a  reference  to  the  preceding  illustra- 
tions, where  it  will  appear  evident  that  in  any  situation  in  which  two 
Tessels  may  approach  each  other  in  the  dark,  the  colored  lights  will  in- 
stantly indicate  to  both  the  relative  course  of  each;  that  is,  each  will 
know  whether  the  other  is  approaching  directly,  or  crossing  the  bows 
either  to  starboard  or  port. 

This  intimation,  with  the  signals  by  whistle,  as  provided,  is  all  that 
is  required  to  enable  vessels  to  pass  each  other  in  the  darkest  night  with 
almost  equal  safety  as  in  broad  day.  If  at  anchor,  all  vessels,  without 
distinction,  must  exhibit  a  bright  white  light  at  least  twenty  feet  above 
the  surface  of  the  water. 


RULES  OP  THE' ROAD  AT  SEA. 


▲ID  TO   MBMOBT,  IK  FOITB  VBBSKS,  BT   THOMAS   OBAT. 
1.     TWO  STEAM-BHIFS  IIEETINO. 

When  both  side-lights  you  see  ahead, 
Port  your  helm,  and  show  your  RED. 

9.     TWO  STBAX-BHIFS  PASSmO. 

GREEN  to  QREBN.  or  RED  to  RED^ 
Perfect  safety— Go  ahead  I 

8.      TWO  STBAM-8HIP8  CBOBSINO. 

\^OTB.— >Thi8  is  the  position  of  greatest  danger;  there  is  nothing  for  it  but  good 
lookout,  caution,  and  judgment,  with  prompt  action. 

If  to  your  starboard  RED  appear,  * 

It  is  your  duty  to  keep  clear; 

To  act  as  judgment  says  is  proper;— 

To  Port— or  Starboard— Back— or  Stop  her!  * 

But,  when  upon  your  Port  is  seen 
A  steamer's  starboard  light  of  GREEN, 
There's  not  so  much  for  you  to  do. 
For  GREEN  to  port  keeps  clear  of  you. 


1.      ALL  SHIPS  MUST  KBBP  A  OOOD  LOOKOUT,  AKO  8TBAM  SHIPS  MUST  STOP  AND  SO 

ASTBBN  IP  MECB88ART. 

Both  in  safety  and  in  doubt 
Always  keep  a  good  lookout; 
In  danger,  with  no  room  to  turn. 
Ease  her  I— Stop  her  1— Go  astern! 


\ 
360 


▲PPKNDUL 


I 


a 


RULES 

BE0OHHKin>IKa  OBBTAIK    FOO-SIOKALS  TO    BB    OBSBBVED    BT  STBAMBBS, 
SAILINO-VBSSBLS,  AND    OTHXB  GRAFT. 

Svery  steamer,  when  undei;  way,  shall  use  a  steam-whistle.  Sailing 
vessels,  and  all  other  craft  propelled  by  sails,  shall  use  a  fog-horn. 

Whenever  there  is  a  fog,  whether  by  day  or  night,  the  fog-signals 
described  below  shall  be  sounded. 

Sailing-vessels  and  every  craft  propelled  by  sails  upon  the  ocean, 
lakes,  and  rivers,  shall,  when  on  their  starboard  tack,  sound  one  blast  of 
their  fog-horn;  when  on  their  port  tack,  they  shall  sound  two  blasts  of 
their  fog-horn;  when  with  the  wind  free,  or  running  large,  they  shall 
sound  threie  blasts  of  their  fog-horn;  when  lying-to  or  at  anchor,  they 
shall  sound  the  bell.  In  each  instance  the  above  signals  shall  be  sounded 
at  intervals  of  not  more  than  two  minutes. 

Sailing-vessels,  when  not  under  way,  and  anchored  or  moored  in  the 
channel  or  fair-way  of  commerce,  shall  sound  the  bell  signal  at  intervals 
of  not  more  than  two  minutes;  and  all  steamers  navigating  in  a  fog  or 
thick  weathsr  shall,  by  the  rules  governing  pilots,  sound  their  steam- 
whiutle  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute. 

Sailing-vessels  shall  at  all  times,  on  the  approach  of  any  steamer 
daring  the  night-time,  show  a  lighted  torch  upon  that  point  or  quarter 
to  which  such  steamer  shall  be  approaching.  And  upon  any  craft  navi- 
gating rivers  without  being  in  tow  of  a  steamer,  such  as  rafts,  flat-boats, 
wood  boats  and  other  like  craft,  they  shall  sound  a  fog-horn  at  intervals 
of  not  more  than  two  minutes. 

It  shall  at  all  times  be  the  duty  of  steamers  to  give  to  the  sailing- 
vessel,  or  other  craft  propelled  by  sails,  every  advantage,  and  keep  out 
of  her  way. 

FOO  SIGNALS   FOB    rO\7ING-BOATS. 

AU  steam-vessels,  when  engaged  in  towing  during  fog  or  thick 
weather,  shall  sound  three  distinct  blasts  of  their  steam-whistles  in  quick 
succesiion,  repeating  at  intervals  not  exceeding  one  minute. 

Approved  March  1,  1884. 

GhAS.    J.    FOLOBB, 

Secretary. 


STEERING  AND  SAILING  RULES. 

Rule  XVI. — If  two  sail-vessels  are  meeting  end  on,  or  nearly  end  on, 
so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the  helms  of  both  shall  be  put  to  port, 
BO  that  oach  may  pass  on  the  port  side  of  the  other. 

RjLB  XVII. — When  two  sail-vessels  are  crossing  so  as  to  involve 
risk  of  collision,  then,  if  they  have  the  wind  on  different  sides,  the  vessel 
with  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  vessel 
with  the  wind  on  the  starboard  side,  except  in  the  cape  in  which  the  ves- 
sel with  the  wind  on  the  port  side  is  close-hauled,  and  the  other  vessel 
free,  in  which  case  the  latter  vessel  shall  keep  out  of  the  way.     But  if 


APPENDIX. 


261 


they  hftve  the  wind  on  the  same  side,  or  if  one  of  them  has  the  wind  aft, 
the  vessel  which  is  to  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  vessel 
which  is  to  leeward. 


Rule  X  v  ill. — If  two  vessels  nnder  steam  are  meeting  end  on,  or 
nearly  end  on,  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the  helms  of  both  shall 
be  pat  to  port,  so  that  each  may  pass  on  the  frt  side  of  the  other. 

Bulb  XIX. — If  two  vessels  under  steam  i^e  crossing  so  as  to  involve 
risk  of  collision,  the  vessel  which  has  the  other  on  her  own  starboard  side 
shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

RuLB  XX. — If  two  vessels,  one  of  which  is  a  saiUvessel  and  the  other 
a  steam- vessel,  are  proceeding  in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of  col- 
lision, the  steam*ves8el  shall  Keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  sail-vessel. 

RuLB  XXI. — Everv  steam-vessel,  when  approaching  another  vessel, 
so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  shall  slacken  her  speed,  or,  if  necessary, 
stop  and  reverse;  and  every  steam- vessel  shall,  when  in  a  fog,  go  at  a 
moderate  speed. 

Bulb  XXII. — Every  vessel  overtaking  any.  other  vessel,  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  last-mentioned  vessel. 

Rui5!  XXIII.— Where,  by  Rules  XVII,  XIX,  XX,  and  XXII,  one 
of  two  vessels  shall  be  kept  out  of  the  way,  the  other  shall  keep  her 
course,  subject  to  the  qualifications  of  Rule  XXIV. 

RuLB  XXIV. — In  construing  and  obeying  these  rules,  due  regard 
must  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation,  and  to  any  special  circum- 
stances which  may  exist  in  any  particular  case  rendering  a  departure 
from  them  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  imn^ediate  danger. 

OROSS-SIQNALS. 

Extract  from  circular  issued  by  the  Supervising  Inspector-General, 
and  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  June  21,  1888.  Refer- 
ring to  Rule  III,  it  says:  The  rule  quoted  qualifies  all  the  others,  and 
is  the  only  qualification  that  can  be  permitted  with  safety  when  nleamera 
are  meeting  in  such  positions  as  to  render  collisions  possible.  There  is 
no  authority  in  the  rules  and  regulations  for  what  has  become  techui> 
oally  known  among  pilots  as  "cross-signals" — that  is,  answering  one 
whistle  by  two,  ana  answering  two  whistles  with  one.  In  all  cases,  and 
under  all  circumstances,  when  a  pilot  receiving  either  of  the  whistle  sig- 
nals  provided  in  the  rul.^s,  which  for  any  reason  he  deems  injudicious  to 
comply  with,  instead  of  answering  it  with  a  cross-signal,  as  is  now  so 
mucn  the  custom  to  do,  it  is  his  imperative  duty  to  at  once  observe  the 
provisions  of  Rule  III,  namely,  give  the  alarm  signal  whistle  and  at  once 
slow  his  engine  and  reduce  speed  to  bare  steerage- way;  and  the  oppos- 
ing vessel,  immediately  on  hearing  the  alarm-signal  whistle,  should 
also  slow  down,  and  stop  if  necessary,  till  the  danger  of  collision  is 
passed. 

In  investigating  collision  cases,  insp^jctors  of  steam-vessels  would  be 
justified  in  considering  any  pilot  who  gives  a  cross-signal  instead  of  com- 
plying with  Rule  \\\  prima  faci«  guilty  of  neglect  ofduty.  So,  also,  of 
the  pilot  giving  the  first  signal,  woo  fails  to  slow  or  stop  his  boat  im- 
mediately after  hf^  discovers  his  signal  whistles  are  answered  otherwise 
than  as  given  by  himself. 

Rule  2  of  the  Pilot-Rules  for  Western  Rivers  has  the  same  applioa- 


263 


A^PKNDIX. 


tion  to  those  niles  that  Rule  III  of  the  Pilot-Rales  for  Lakes  and  Sea- 
board has  to  the  latter  rules,  and  it  must  be  observed  in  the  same  man- 
ner. It  is  desirable  that  all  pilots  should  thoroughly  understand  that 
when  whistles  are  blown  as  passing  signals  it  is  a  rule,  n^n^er  to  be  devi- 
•""*"-««dJ^rom,  that  one  wt^i^tfe  ipaftna.Jj>a6*-ti?fe  -*«8ril&rglving  such  signal  is 
or  intenHs  ptSrcingTer  Ae/m/  two  whistles,  that  the  vessel  giving  it  is  or 
intends  putting  her  helm  to  starboard. 


I 


GENERAL  RULE  FOR  STEAM-SHIPS  MEETING, 

AND 

PARTICULAR  RULE  FOR  STEAM-SHIPS  CROSSING. 


(fBOM  THB  sailors'  POOKET  book,  BT  OAPT.  F.  a.  D.  BSnFORD,  B.  N.) 


The  general  rule  of  the  road  for  steamers  is  precisely  the  same  as  the 
general  rule  of  the  pavement  for  foot  passengers  in  London  and  in  all 
our  large  towns,  viz.,  that  in  all  ordinary  cases  two  steamers,  like  two 
pedestrians,  meeting  face  to  face,  or  "end  on  or  nearly  end  on,"  so  as  to 
involve  risk  of  collision,  sbull  port,  that  is  to  say,  shall  keep  to  the  right, 
so  that  each  may  pass  on  the  port  (left)  side  of  the  other.  Nothing  can 
be  more  simple  than  this;  but  the  man  who  will  persist  in  crossing  right 
over  the  pavement,  if,  when  proceeding  along  the  left  hand  side,  he  sees 
another  man  coming  along  to  his  own  right  on  the  other  side,  cannot 
justify  his  proceoding  by  the  rule.  He  will  obviously  get  in  the  way  of 
the  other. 

The  particular  rule  of  the  road  for  steamers  is,  that  if  they  are  cross- 
ing, then  the  steamer  that  has  another  steamer  on  her  own  right  hand 
side  shall  get  out  of  her  way.  ^ 

Steam-ships  crossing  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision  always  show  to 
each  other  a  different  colored  light — green  to  red,  and  red  to  green;  un- 
less, therefore,  a  steamer  sees  another  steamer's  green  light  on  her  own 
port  side,  or  another  steamer's  red  light  on  her  own  starboard  side,  there 
IS  no  danger  so  far  as  steamers  crossing  are  concerned. 

There  are  only  six  cases  in  which  it  is  your  duty  to  alter  course  to 
avoid  risk  of  collision  — 

1.  In  a  steamer  meeting  a  steamer  end  on  or  nearly  end  on. 

2.  In  a  steamer,  nearing  a  sailing-vessel. 

8.     In  a  steamer,  approaching  another  on  your  starboard  side. 

NoTB.— This  case  should  be  carefully  considered,  as  it  it  Is  one  requiring  the 
most  caution  and  judgment. 

4.  If  under  sail  on  the  port  tack,  nearing  a  vessel  under  sail — on  the 
starboard  tack. 

6.    If  under  sail  going  free,  nearing  a  vessel  under  sail— close-hauled. 

6.  If  under  sail  going  free,  and  npr^ring  another  vessel  to  leeward — 
going  also  free. 


APPKMDIX. 


268 


In  the  Jirat  ccue  only  ig  it  right  to  port  the  helm  without  further  oon- 
■ideratioD. 

In  the  other  five  oases  the  course  should  not  be  altered  until— either 
by  bearings  taken  with  an  interval  between  them,  or  by  bringing  the 
vestol  on  with  some  part  of  the  rigging,  and  watching  whether  she  draws 
aft  or  forward — it  is  ascertained  tnat  the  vessels  are  converging  on  one 
point,  and  which  is  the  best  way  to  alter  it,  to  avoid  collision. 

Seamen  are  to  be  found  who  port  at  every  light  seen  ahead,  or  nearly 
ahead ;  but  if  they  port  when  they  should  not — for  example  with  a  green 
light,  say  two  points  on  their  starboard  bow,  and  say  they  do  it  because 
the  light  is  nearly  ahead  or  nearly  end  on  with  them — that  is  no  fault  of 
the  rule,  and  has  no  reference  to  the  rule,  for  the  rule  does  not  apply  in 
oases  where  there  is  no  risk  of  collision;  and  there  is  no  risk  of  collision 
as  has  already  been  admitted,  if  a  green  light  is  seen  ahead  or  any- 
where on  the  starboard  side. 

One  of  the  most  fruitful  causes  of  collision  is,  that  the  ship  that  has 
by  the  rules  to  alter  course,  does  not  do  so  promptly  and  sufficiently  to 
show  to  the  other  ship  clearly,  and  evidently,  that  she  knows  her  duty 
and  is  performing  it.  When  this  is  not  done,  the  other  ship  is  often  led 
to  adopt  some  wrong  'bourse  to  avoid  collision,  and  thus  bring  it  to  pass. 
If  under  steam,  a  slight  yaw  with  the  helm  will  serve  to  show  the  direc- 
tion you  intend  to  take;  if  under  sail  and  about  to  tack,  let  fly  the  jib 
sheet;  if  to  bear  up,  start  the  after  sheets. 

So  long  as  you  keep  a  green  light  opposed  to  a  green  light,  or  a  red 
light  opposed  to  a  red  light,  no  collision  can  happen  between  passing 
ships. 

The  reckless  use  of  port  helm  leads  to  collision. 

Thb  Rulb  op  thk  Road  should  be  so  thoroughly  mastered  that 
there  would  be  no  hesitation  in  the  action  to  be  taken  in  meeting  or  pass- 
ing vessels,  by  night  or  day,  whether  under  steam  or  sail.  The  sailor 
should  be  as  familiar  with  these  laws  as  he  is  with  the  points  of  the 
compass,  so  as  to  enable  him  to  move  his  ship  as  instinctively  as  he 
moves  his  own  body.  The  state  of  the  bow  lights  as  well  as  that  of  the 
masthead  lights  should  be  the  constant  care,  not  only  of  the  officer  of  the 
deck,  but  also  of  the  lookout  man. 

The  Lead. — Above  all,  the  sailor's  attention  is  most  earnestly  called 
to  that  simple  but  important  instrument,  to  that  best  of  all  inventions 
for  saving  life  at  sea,  viz. :  the  lead;  the  neglect  of  which  may  be  said  to 
have  been  the  great  cause  of  many  of  the  modern  disasters  to  shipping. 
The  deep  sea  lead  as  well  as  the  hand  lead,  should  never  be  lost  sight  of, 
and  the  crew  made  familiar  with  the  method  of  "passing  the  line  along," 
so  as  to  obtain  a  deep  sea  cast  with  as  little  delay  as  possible. 


^ ,  ■" 


CODE  OF  ENGINE-SIGNALS  FOR  THE  EIGHTH  AND  NINTH 
SUPERVISING  INSPECTION  DISTRICTS. 

The  attention  of  Maatera,  Pilots  and  Migineera  is  directed  to  the  code 
of  signals  adopted  by  the  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors  of  Steam- Ves- 
sels, and  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  February  18,  1886, 
for  nae  on  steam- vessels  navigating  the  following-named  waters: 


364 


▲PPEMDUL. 


EiOBTH  DivnicT'^All  the  wcUera  of  the  lake*  north  and  toeat  of  Lake 
JSrie,  with  their  tribiUarieSf  and  the  upper  portion  of  the  Illinois  river 
dovm  to  and  indttding  Peoria,  lU. 

Ninth  Dmtbiot — All  the  waters  of  Zake  M-ie,  Ontario,  and  Cham 
»-^pMirC,  9oUhthe  Riifir  St,  Zawrence,  and  their 'triotdUriee, 


•If 


COnE   OP  SIONALfl. 

1  Whistle  or  Bell Oo  ahead. 

1  Whlgtleor  Bell Stop. 

SWhistleBor  Bells Back. 

8  Whistles  or  Bells Cheek. 

1  Long  Whistle  or  4  Bells Strong. 

1  Long  Whistle  or  4  Bells All  right. 

2  Whistles  or  2  Bells,  when  the  engine  is  working  ahead,  will  always  be  a  signal 
to  Stop  and  Back  Strong. 


DEFINITION    OF    GEOGRAPHICAL,    OR    NAUTICAL,   AND 

STATUTE    MILES. 

A  nautical  mile,  or  a  sea  mile,  is  the  length  of  one  minute  of  longi* 
tude  of  the  earth  at  the  equator,  at  the  levc '  of  the  sea,  or  the  vriirT  P^''^ 
of  the  earth's  equatorial  circumference.  By  the  United  States  standard, 
and  as  used  by  the  Coast  Survey,  its  length  is  1,162,664  common  statute 
or  land  milert;  1865.11  meties;  2028.69  yards;  or  6086.07  feet;  conse- 
quently, 1  degree  of  longitude  at  the  equator=69.160  land  miles;  and  a 
land  mile=:0. 86755  of  a  nautical  mile.  By  British  standard  the  sea  mile 
is  about  4  inches  longer  than  by  United  States.  Sometimes  one  minute 
of  mean  latitude  is  taken  as  a  nautical  mile.  A  minute  of  latitude  at  the 
equator  is  about  6,046  feet;  and  at  the  poles  about  6,107;  the  mean  of 
which  is  6,076^  feet. 


LENGTH  OF  A  DEGREE  OF  LONCTUDB. 

IN   DIVKSBEXt   LATITUDES,   AND   AT  THE   LEVEL  OF  THE    SEA. 


These  lengths  are  in  common  land  or  statute  miles,  of  5,280  feet. 
Since  the  figure  of  the  earth  has  never  been  preciaeli/  aHcertained,  these 
are  but  close  approximations. 


I 
on.  IB 

69  18 
68  U« 
68.78 
6H.4tt 
68.19 
«7.M 


1^ 


U 
16 
]H 
flO 
83 
84 
86 


•17.18 
(IH.50 
65  80 
«fi08 

tu.is 

61.81 
08  80 


88 
80 
88 
84 
86 
88 
40 


a 


61.11 

MIM 
M.70 
t)7M 
B6  01 
M.&6 
03  OB 


48 
44 

46 
48 
SO 
A8 
M 


M.47 
4tt.H3 
48.18 
40  86 
44.n4 
48.07 
40.74 


M 
08 
00 
03 
04 
06 
08 


S8.70 
8tl.74 
8167 
33.00 
8()40 
88.31 
80.  »8 


70 

73 
74 
76 
78 
80 
8S 


98  78 
81  48 
19.18 
16.78 
14.48 
18.00 
9.60 


APPENDIX. 


LIFE-SAVING  SERVICE! 


£Rp( 


^ 

3 

3 

1 

0 

as  78 

9 

81  48 

4 

10.18 

A 

16.78 

8 

14,4tj 

0 

18.()5 

9 

0.60 

IirSTBTJCnONS  TO     MABIHXR8    IN    CASK    OF    SHIPWRECK,  WITH    OXNSBAL 
INFORMATION   GONCSRNIMO  THK  Lir£-8AVINO   STATIONS. 

Life-saviDg  Btations  are  located  upon  the  lake  coast,  as  shown  in  the 
lilt  of  stations  following. 

Upon  the  lake  coast  the  stations  are  manned  from  the  opening 
ontil  the  close  of  navigation. 

All  life-saving  stations  are  fally  supplied  with  boats,  wreck-gun, 
beach  apparatus,  restoratives,  etc. 

All  services  are  performed  by  the  life-saving  crews  without  other 
compensation  than  their  wages  from  the  Government,  though,  in  view  of 
the  meagerness  of  their  pay,  they  are  not  prohibited  from  receiving  such 
rewards  for  labor  performed  or  rmks  incurred  at  wrecks  as  owners  or 
masters  of  vessels  or  other  persons  may  see  fit  to  voluntarily  bestow  upon 
them,  but  they  are  strictly  forbidden  to  solicit  such  rewards. 

Destitute  seafarers  are  provided  with  food  and  lodging  at  the  nearest 
station  by  the  Government  as  long  ao  necessarily  detained  by  the  oir- 
onmstances  of  shipwreck. 

The  station  crews  patrol  the  beach  from  two  to  four  miles  each  side 
of  their  stations  four  times  between  sanset  and  sunrise,  and  if  the  weather 
is  foggy  the  patrol  is  continued  through  the  day. 

Each  patrolman  carries  Goston  signals.  Upon  discovering  a  vessel 
standing  into  danger  he  ignites  one  of  them,  wliich  emits  a  brilliant  red 
flame  of  about  two  minutes*  duration,  to  warn  her  off;  or  should  the  ves- 
sel be  ashore,  to  let  her  crew  know  that  they  are  discovered  and  assist- 
ance is  at  hand.  In  the  day-time,  a  red  flag  will  be  shown  from  the 
station  for  the  same  purpose. 

If  the  vessel  is  not  discovered  by  the  patrol  immediately  after  striking, 
rockets  or  flare-up  lights  should  be  burned;  or  if  the  weather  be  foggy, 
guns  should  be  fired  to  attract  attention,  as  the  patrolman  may  be  some 
distance  away  on  the  other  end  of  his  beat. 

Masters  are  particularly  oautionedf  if  they  shotUd  be  driven  ashore 
anywhere  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  etations,  especially  on  any  of  the 
sandy  coasts  where  there  is  not  much  danger  of  vessels  breaking  up  immc' 
diatelyf  to  remain  on  board  until  assistance  arrives^  and  under  no  cir- 
cumstances should  they  attempt  to  land  through  the  surf  in  their  own  boats 
until  the  last  hope  of  assistance  from  the  shore  has  vanished.  Often, 
when  comparatively  smooth  at  sea,  a  dangerous  surf  is  running  which  is 
not  perceptible  four  hundred  yards  off  shore,  and  the  surf  when  viewed 
from  a  vessel  never  appears  as  dangerous  as  it  is.  Many  lives  have  been 
unnecessarily  lost  by  toe  orews  of  stranded  vessels  being  thus  deceived 
and  attempting  to  land  in  the  ships'  boat. 

The  difficulties  of  rescue  by  operations  from  the  she  re  are  greatly 
increased  in  cases  where  the  anchors  are  let  go  qfter  entering  the  break- 
ers, as  is  frequently  done,  and  the  chances  of  saving  life  correspondingly 
lessened. 

INSTRUCTIONS. 

JResoue  with  the  Life- Boat  or  Surf  Boat. 

The  patrolman,  after  discovering  your  vessel  ashore  and  burning  i 
Coston  signal,  hastens  to  his  station  for  assistance.    If  the  use  of  a  boat 


mm*. 


I  • 


266 


APPKNDaC 


■  i 


ii  practicable,  either  the  large  life-boat  is  launched  from  its  ways  in  the 
station  and  proceeds  to  the  wreck  by  water,  or  the  lighter  surf-boat  is 
hauled  overland  to  a  point  opposite  the  wreck  and  launched,  as  circum- 
stances may  require.        ^ 

Upon  tne  boat-reaoTing  youf^essel,  tue~llire6tions  and  orders  of  the 
keeper  (who^ always  commands  and  steers  the  boat)  should  be  implicitly 
obeyed.  Any  headlong  rushing  and  crowding  should  be  prevented,  and 
the  captain  of  the  vessel  should  remain  on  board,  to  preserve  order,  until 
every  other  person  has  left. 

Women,  children,  helpless  persons,  and  passengers  should  be  passed 
into  the  boat  first. 

Goods  or  baggage  will  positively  not  be  taken  into  the  boat  until  all 
are  landed.  If  any  be  passed  in  against  the  keeper's  remonstrance,  he  is 
fully  authorized  to  throw  the  same  overboard. 

Heacue  toith  the  Breeehea-Btioy  or  Life- Car, 

Should  it  be  inexpedient  to  use  either  the  life-boat  or  surf -boat,  recourse 
will  be  had  to  the  wreck-gun  and  beach  apparatus  for  the  rescue  by  the 
breeches-buoy  or  the  life-car. 

A  shot  with  a  small  line  attached  will  be  fired  across  your  vess^L 

Get  hold  of  the  line  as  soon  as  possible,  and  haul  on  board  until  yon 
get  a  tail-block  with  a  whip  or  etidless  line  rove  through  it.  This  tail- 
block  should  be  hauled  on  board  as  quickly  as  possible  to  prevent  the 
whip  drifting  off  with  the  set  or  fouling  with  wreckage,  etc.  Therefore, 
if  yon  have  been  driven  into  the  rigging  where  but  one  or  two  men  can 
work  to  advantage,  cut  the  shot-line  and  run  it  through  some  available 
block,  such  as  the  throat  or  peak  halliards  block,  or  any  block  which  will 
afford  a  clear  lead,  or  even  between  the  ratlines,  that  as  many  as  possible 
may  assist  in  hauling. 

Attached  to  the  tail-block  will  be  a  tally-board  with  the  following 
directions  in  English  on  one  side  and  French  on  the  other: 

"  Make  the  tail  of  the  block  fast  to  the  lower  mast,  well  up.  If  the 
masts  are  gone,  then  to  the  best  place  you  can  find.  Cast  off  shot-line, 
see  that  the  rope  in  the  block  runs  free,  and  show  signal  to  the  shore." 

The  above  instructions  being  complied  with,  the  result  will  be  as 
shown  in  Figure  1  on  page  267. 

As  soon  as  }i  our  signal  is  seen,  a  three-inch  hawser  will  be  bent  on  to 
the  whip  and  hauled  off  to  your  ship  by  the  life-saving  crew. 

If  circumstances  will  admit,  you  can  assist  the  life  saving  crew  by 
manning  that  part  of  the  whip  to  which  the  hawser  is  bent  and  hauling 
with  them. 

When  the  end  of  the  hawser  is  got  on  board  a  tally-board  will  be 
found  attached,  bearing  the  following  directions  in  English  on  one  side 
and  French  on  the  other: 

"Make  this  hawser  fast  about  2  feet  above  the  tail  block,  see  all  clear 
and  that  the  rope  in  the  block  runs  free,  aud  show  signal  to  the  shore." 

These  instructions  being  obeyed  the  result  will  be  shown  in  Figure  2. 

Take  particular  care  that  there  are  no  turns  of  the  whip-line  round 
the  hawser.  To  prevent  this  take  the  end  of  the  hawser  up  between  the 
parte  of  the  whip  b^ore  making  it  fast.. 

When  the  hawser  is  made  fast,  the  whip  cast  off  from  the  hawser,  and 
your  signal  seen  by  the  life-saving  crew,  they  will  haul  the  hawser  taut 
and  by  means  of  the  whip  will  haul  off  to  your  ship  a  breeohes-baoy  8«b- 


APPSVDIX. 


ser 


as  oironm- 


FIQURB  1. 


FIOUBB  2. 


e  bent  on  to 


ponded  from  a  traveler  blook,  or  a  life-oar  from  rings,  running  on  the 
hawser. 

Figure  8  on  the  following  page,  represents  the  apparatus  rigged,  with 
the  breeches  buoy  hauled  off  to  the  ship. 

If  the  breeches  buoy  be  sent,  let  one  man  immediately  get  into  it, 
thrusting  his  legs  through  the  breeches.  If  the  life  oar,  remove  the 
hatch,  place  as  many  persons  into  it  as  it  will  hold  (''dur  to  six),  and 
secure  the  hatch  on  the  outside  by  the  hatch-bar  and  hook,  signal  as 
before,  and  the  buoy  or  car  will  be  hauled  ashore.  This  will  be  repeated 
until  all  are  landed.  On  the  last  trip  of  the  life-car  the  hatch  must  be 
secured  by  the  inside  hatch  bar. 

In  many  instances  two  men  can  be  landed  in  the  breeches  buoy  at 
the  same  time  by  each  putting  a  leg  through  a  1'3(;  of  the  breeches  and 
holding  on  to  the  lifts  of  the  buoy. 

Children  when  brought  ashore  by  the  buoy  should  be  in  the  arms  of 
older  persons  or  securely  lashed  to  the  buoy.  Women  and  children 
should  be  landed  first. 

In  signaling,  as  directed  in  the  foregoing  instructions,  if  in  the  day- 
time, let  one  man  separate  himself  from  the  rest  and  swing  his  hat,  a 
handkerchief,  or  his  hand;  if  at  night,  the  showing  of  a  light,  and  con- 
cealing it  once  or  twice,  will  be  understood;  and  like  signals  will  be  made 
from  shore. 

Circumstances  may  arise,  owing  to  the  strength  of  the  current  or  set, 
or  the  danger  of  the  wreck  breaking  up  immediately,  when  it  would  be 
impossible  to  send  off  the  hawser.  .  in  such  a  case  a  breeches-buoy  or 
lifeHsar  will  be  hauled  ofT  instead  by  the  whip,  or  sent  off  to  you  by  the 
shot-line,  and  you  will  be  hauled  ashore  through  the  surf. 

If  your  vessel  is  stranded  during  the  night  and  discovered  by  the 
patrolman,  which  you  will  know  by  his  burning  a  brilliant  red  light,  keep 
a  bright  lookout  for  signs  of  the  arrival  of  the  life-saving  crew  abreast 
of  your  vessel. 

From  one  to  four  hours  may  intervene  between  the  burning  of  the 
light  and  their  arrival,  as  the  patrolman  will  have  to  return  to  his  tta- 


268 


▲PPSNDIX. 


[ 


(I- 


f 


'tl 


1 


--  \ 


nOURE  3. 

tfon,  perhaps  three  or  four  miles  distant,  and  the  life-saving  orew  draw 
the  apparatus  or  surf  boat  through  the  sand  or  over  bad  roads  to  where 
your  vessel  is  stranded. 

Lights  on  the  beach  will  indicate  their  arrival,  and  the  sound  of  <}annon- 
firing  from  the  shore  may  be  taken  as  evidence  that  a  line  has  been  fired 
across  your  vessel.  Therefore,  upon  hearing  the  cannon,  make  a  strict 
search  aloft,  fore  and  aft,  for  the  shot-line,  for  it  is  almost  certain  to  be 
there.  Though  the  movements  of  the  life-saving  crew  may  not  be  per- 
ceptible to  you,  owing  to  the  darkness,  your  ship  will  be  a  good  mark 
for  men  experienced  in  the  use  of  Ihe  wreck  gun,  and  the  first  shot  sel- 
dom fails. 

RECAPITULATION. 

Remain  by  the  wreck  until  assistance  arrives  from  the  shore  unless 
your  vessel  snows  signs  of  immediately  breaking  up. 

If  not  discovered  immediately  by  the  patrol,  burn  rockets,  fiare-np,  or 
other  lights,  or,  if  the  weather  be  foggy,  fire  guns. 

Take  particular  care  that  there  are  no  turns  of  the  whip  line  round 
the  hawser  before  making  the  hawser  fast. 

Send  the  women,  children,  helpless  persons,  and  passengers  ashore  first. 

Make  yourself  thoroughly  familiar  with  these  instructions,  and  re- 
member  that  on  your  coolness  and  strict  attention  to  them  will  greatly 
depend  the  chances  of  success  in  bringing  you  and  your  people  safely 
to  land. 


AIM'KNDU. 


269 


LI8T  OF  LIFE-SAVING  DISTRICTS,  AND  STATIONS  ON  THE 

LAKES. 
NINTH  DISTRICT. 

BMBRAr^NO   LAKES   ONTARIO   AND*  ERIE. ^_ 


NAMTC  OP  STATION. 

KEEPER. 

POSTOFFICE  ADDRESS. 

BIk  Suidjr 

Williftin  FiHh 

Elltoburg,  New  York. 
Texas,  New  York. 

Sabnon  C  reek. 

Edwin  E.  ChaDman 

Oswesro.  New  York. 

Obarloito 

Joseph  0.  Doyle 

Charlotte,  New  York. 

Buffalo 

Thomas  WilllAnu 

Buffalo.  New  York. 

Brie 

Andrew  Jansen 

Erie,  Penn. 

Falport 

Oeorite  F.  Bab"OCk 

Painesville.  Ohio. 

OieT<>!iMid 

Char  les  0.  Gtoodwin 

Cleveland,  Ohio. 

?r,'.at  filarblehead. 

Luc'sii  M.  Clemens 

Point  Marblehead.  Ohio. 

Louisville * '. . 

WilUam  II.  Devan 

Louisville,  Kentucky. 

TENTH  DISTRICT. 
LAKES   HURON   AND  SUPERIOR. 


NAME  OF  STATION. 


KEEPER. 


POSTOFFICE  ADDRESS. 


SandBeaoh 

Point  anx  Barques . . 

Grindstone  City 

Ottawa  Point 

Stumreon  Point 

Thunder  Bay  Island. 

Middle  Island 

Hammond  Bay 

Bois  Blanc 

Vermilion  Point. . .  . 

Crisp's .• 

Two  Heart  River. . . . 
Muskallonge  Lake. . . 

Marquette 

Ship-Canal 


George  W.  Plough. 

Henry  D  Ferris 

Henry  Gill,  Jr. 

Frank  J.  Ocha.  — . . , . . 
James  E.  Henderson. . , 

JohnD.  Persons 

Donald  McKenzie 

Joseph  Valentine 

George  8.  Cleary ....... 

Samuel  F.  Bemier 

Robert  M.  Small 

Thomas  H.  McCormick. 

John  H.  Frahm 

Henry  Cleary 

George  A.  Smith 


Sand  Beach,  Mich. 

Huron  City,  Mich. 

Grindstone  City,  Mich. 

East  Tawas,  Mich. 

Harrisville,  Mich. 

Alpena,  Mich. 

Alpena,  Mich.  [gan.  Midi. 

Hammond's  Bay,  via  Cheboy- 

Bois  Blanc,  Mich. 

Deer  Park,  Luce  Co ,  Mich. 

Deer  Park,  Luce  Co.,  Mich. 

Deer  Park,  Luce  Co.,  Mich. 

Deer  Park,  Luce  Co.,  Mich. 

Slurquette,  Mich. 

Hancock,  Mich. 


ELEVENTH  DISTRICT. 

LAKE    MICHIGAN. 


NAJtE  OF  STATION. 


Beaver  Island 

North  Manitou  Island. . . 

PointBetsy 

Frankfort 

Manistee 

Grande  Pointe  au  Sable. 

Lud^ngton 

Pent  Water. 

White  River 

Mu8kef.on 

GranJ  Haven. 

Holland 

South  Haven. 

Saint  Joseph    

Michigan  City 

Chicago 

South  Chicago. 

Evanston 

Kenosha 

Racine 

Milwaukee 

Sheboygan  

Two  luvers 

Sturgeon  Bay  Canal .... 


Owen  Gallagher. ...... 

Peter  Olsen 

Harrison  Miller 

George  Morenoy 

John  Hanson 

George  Wilson 

Charlee  Tufts. . . .  .■ 

Martin  Ewald 

Charles  Lysaght 

Henry  J.  Woods 

John  Lysaght 

Charles  Mv  "ton 

John  I'..  McKenzie  . . . . 
William  L.  ijtevens.. . . 

Henrv  Finch 

Telesford  Nt.  Peter 

Edmond  Dionnc> 

Lawrence  O.  Lawson . 
Benjamin  G.  Cameron 
George  Breckenfeld. . . 

Nells  A.  Peterson 

Wm.  Nequette 

Oliver  Pilon 

Joseph  Dionne 


POSTOFFICE  ADDRESS. 


St.  James,  Beaver  Harbor,  Mich. 

Leland,  Mich. 

South  Frankfort,  Mich. 

Frankfort,  Mich. 

Manistee,  Mich. 

liii.coln,  Mich. 

Ludington,  Mich. 

Pent  Water,  Mich. 

Montague,  Mich. 

Muskegon,  Mich. 

Grand  Haven,  Mich. 

Holland,  Mich. 

South  Haven,  Mich. 

St.  Joseph,  Mich. 

Michigan  City,  Ind. 

I.  C.  Pier  No.  1,  Chicago,  111. 

South  Chicago,  III. 

Evanston,  III. 

Kenosha,  Wis. 

Box  683,  Racine,  Wis. 

Milwaukee,  Wis. 

Sheboygan,  Wis. 

'I  wo  Rivers,  Wis. 

Sturgeon  Bay,  Wis. 


S70 


APPBNDIX. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  RESTORING  THE  APPARENTLY 

DROWNED. 

Role  I.  Arouse  the  patient. — Unless  in  danger  of  freezing,  do  not 
more  the  patient,  but  expose  the  face  to  a  oarrent  of  fresh  air,  wipe  dry 
the  month  and  nostrils,  rip  the  clothing,  so  as  to  ev  .  -e  chest  and 
waist,  and  give  two  or  three  quick,  smarting  slaps  l  .  ..  stomach  and 
ohesv  with  the  open  hand.  If,  however,  there  is  reason  to  believe  that 
considerable  time  has  elapsed  since  the  patient  bedame  insensible,  do  not 
lose  furlj^er  ticie  by  practicing  Rule  I,  but  proceed  immediately  to  Rule 
IL  After  loosening  clothing,  etc,  if  the  patient  does  not  revive,  then 
proceed  thus: 

RuLB  II.  To  draw  off  water,  eto.,f^om  the  stomach  and  chest. — If 
the  jaws  are  clenched,  separate  them,  and  keep  the  mouth  open  by 
placing  between  the  teeth  a  cork  or  small  bit  of  wood;  turn  the  patient 
on  the  face,  a  large  bundle  of  tightly-rolled  clothing  being  placed  beneath 
the  stomach,  and  press  heavily  on  it  for  half  a  minute,  or  bo  long  as 
fluids  flow  freely  from  the  mouth. 

Rule  IIL  To  produce  breathing. — Clear  the  mouth  and  throat  of 
mucus,  by  introducing  into  the  throat  the  corner  of  a  handkerchief 
wrapped  closely  around  the  forefinger;  turn  the  patient  on  the  back, 
the  roll  of  clothing  being  so  placed  beneath  it  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the 
stomach  above  the  level  of  any  other  part  of  the  body.  It  there  be 
another  person  present,  let  him,  with  a  piece  of  dry  cloth,  hold  the  tip  of 
the  tongue  out  of  one  corner  of  the  mouth  (this  prevents  the  tongue  from 
falling  back  and  choking  the  entrance  to  the  windpipe),  and  with  the 
other  hand  grasp  both  wrists  and  keep  the  arms  forcibly  stretched  back 
above  the  head,  thereby  increasing  the  prominence  of  the  ribs,  which  tends 
to  enlarge  the  chest.  The  two  last-named  positions  are  not,  however,  ab- 
solutely essential  to  success.  Kneel  beside  or  astride  the  patient's  hips, 
and  with  the  balls  of  the  thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit  of  the 
stomach,  let  the  fingers  fall  into  the  grooves  between  the  short  ribs,  so  as 
to  afford  the  best  grasp  of  the  waist.  Now,  using  your  knees  as  a  pivot, 
throw  all  your  weight  forward  on  your  hands,  and  at  the  same  time 
squeeze  the  waist  between  them,  as  if  yon  wished  to  force  everything  in 
the  chest  upward  out  of  the  mouth;  deepen  the  pressure  while  you  can. 
count  slowly  one,  two,  three;  then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final  push, 
which  springs  you  back  to  your  first  kneeling  position.  Remain  erect 
on  your  knees  while  you  can  count  one,  two,  three;  then  repeat  the  same 
motions  as  before  at  a  rate  gradually  increased  from  four  or  five  to 
fifteen  times  in  a  minute,  and  continue  thus  this  bellows  movement  with 
the  same  regularity  that  is  observable  in  the  natural  motions  of  breath- 
ing which  you  are  imitating.  If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored,  after 
a  trial  of  the  bellows  movement  f  v  r  the  space  of  three  or  fout-  minutes, 
then  turn  the  patient  a  second  time  on  the  stomach,  as  directed  in  Rule 
n,  rolling  the  body  in  an  opposite  direction  from  that  in  which  it  was 
first  turned,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air  passages  from  any  remain- 
ing water.  Continue  the  artificial  respiration  from  one  to  four  hours,  or 
until  the  patient  breathes,  according  to  Rule  III;  and  for  a  while,  aiter 
the  appearanoe  of  returning  life,  caref nlly  aid  the  first  short  saeps  until 
deepened  into  full  breaths.  Continue  the  drying  and  rnbbmg,  which 
should  have  been   unceasingly  practised  from  the  beginning  by  the 


APPENDIX. 


271 


isriatants,  taking  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  means  employed  to  pro< 
'lace  breathing.  Thns  the  limbs  of  the  patient  should  be  rabbed,  always 
in  an  npward.direc^jo/i  jtowards  the  body,  with  jBrm-grasping  pressure 
and  energy,  nsing  the  bare  hands,  dry  flannels  or  handkerchiefs,  and  con* 
tinning  the  friction  under  the  blankets  or  over  the  dry  clothing.  The 
warmth  of  the  body  can  also  be  promoted  by  the  application  of  hot 
flannels  to  the  stomach  and  arm  pits,  bottles  or  bladders  of  hot  water, 
heated  bricks,  Ac,  to  the  limbs  and  soles  of  the  feet. 

RuLB  IV.  Aftbb  Treatmbnt. — Bxtemally:  As  soon  as  breathing 
is  established,  let  the  patient  be  stripped  of  all  wet  clothing,  wrapped  in 
blankets  only,  put  to  bed  comfortably  warm,  but  with  a  free  circulation 
of  fresh  air,  and  left  to  perfect  rest.  Internally:  Give  whisky  or  brandy 
and  hot  water  in  doses  of  ateaspoonful  to  a  tablespoon ful,  according  to 
the  weight  of  the*patient,  or  other  stimulant  at  hand,  every  ten  or  fifteen 
minutes  for  the  first  hour,  and  as  often  thereafter  as  may  seem  expedi- 
ent. Later  manifestations:  After  reaction  is  fully  established,  there  is 
great  danger  of  congestion  of  the  lungs,  and  if  perfect  rest  is  not  main- 
tained for  at  least  forty-eight  hours,  it  sometimes  occurs  that  the  patient 
is  seized  with  great  difficulty  of  breathing,  and  death  is  liable  to  follow 
unless  immediate  relief  is  afforded.  In  such  cases  apply  a  large  mustard 
plaster  over  the  breast.  If  the  patient  gasps  for  breath  before  the 
mustard  takes  effect,  assist  the  breathing  by  carefully  repeating  the  arti- 
oial  respiration. 

NoTB. — An  eminent  authority,  Dr.  Labordette,  the  Supervising  Surgeon  of  th6 
Hospital  of  Lisieux,  in  France,  appears  to  haVe  established  that  the  clinching  of  the 
Jaws  and  the  semi-contraction  of  the  fingers,  which  have  hitherto  been  considered 
signs  of  death,  are,  in  fact,  evidences  of  remaining  vitality.  After  numerous  ex- 
periments  with  apparently  drowned  persons,  and  also  with  animals,  he  concludes 
that  these  are  only  signs  accompanying  the  first  stage  of  suffocation  by  drowning, 
the  jaws  and  hands  becoming  relaxed  when  death  ensues.*  This  being  so,  the  mere 
clenching  of  the  jaws  and  semi-contraction  of  the  hands  must  not  be  considered  as 
reasons  ror  the  discontinuance  of  efforts  to  Bave  life,  but  should  serve  as  a  stimulant 
to  vigorous  and  prolonged  efforts  to  quicken  vitality.  Persons  engaged  in  the  tasks 
of  resuscitation  are,  therefore,  earnestly  desired  to  take  hope  and  encouragement  for 
the  life  of  the  sufferer,  from  the  signs  above  referred  to,  and  to  continue  their  en- 
deavors accordingly.  In  a  number  of  cases  Dr.  Labordette  restored  to  life  persons 
whose  jaws  were  so  firmly  clenched  that,  to  aid  respiration,  their  teeth  had  to  be 
forced  apart  with  iron  instruments. 


TREATMENT  OF  FROST-BITES. 


AS  BBCOHMBNDBD  BT  THB  8UBOBON-OEKBBAL    OF  THB   HABINE- HOSPITAL 

BBBYICB. 

1.  Do  not  bring  the  patient  to  the  fire,  nor  b^ohe  the  parts  in  warm 
water. 

2.  If  snow  be  on  the  ground,  or  accessible,  take  a  woolen  cloth  in  the 
hand,  place  a  handful  of  snow  upon  it,  and  gently  rub  the  frozen  part 
until  tne  natural  color  is  restored.  In  case  snow  is  not  at  hand,  bathe 
the  part  gently  with  a  woolen  cloth  in  the  ooXAe^t  fresh  water  obtainable 
— ioe  water  if  practicable. 

rrhe  mtwoaUr  rigidity  of  death  {Hgor  inortU)  oooort  later,  atter  the  temporaiy  relaxation 
referred  to. 


n% 


▲PPSMDIZ. 


8.  In  OMO  ihe  froat<bite  is  old,  and  the  skin  hu  tnrned  black  or  begun 
to  scale  off,  do  not  attempt  to  restore^  its  vitality  by  friction,  bat  apply 
carron  oil  on  a  little  cotton;  after  which  wrap  the  part  loosely  in  flannel. 

4.  In  all  oases,  as  soon  at  the  vitality  has  been  restored,  apply  the  car- 
ron oil,  prej[>ared  according  to  Service  formula.  As  it  contains  opium, 
do  not  administer  morphia  or  other  opiate. 

5.  In  the  case  of  a  person  apparently  dead  from  exposure  to  cold,  fric- 
tion should  be  appliea  to  the  body  and  the  lower  extremities,  and  arti- 
ficial respiration  practiced  as  in  oases  of  the  apparently  drowned.  As 
soon  as  the  circulation  appears  to  be  restored,  administer  spirft  and  water 
at  intervals  of  15  or  20  minutes,  until  the  flesh  feels  natural.  Even  i^ 
no  signs  of  life  appear,  friction  should  be  kept  up  for  a  long  period,  as 
instances  are  on  record  of  recovery  after  several  hours  of  suspended  ani- 
mation. 

Carron  oil — (Service  formula): 
Olive-oil  or  linseed-oil  (raw). 
Lime-water,  of  each  12  parts. 
Tincture  of  opium,  1  part  , 

Mix. 


MEASURING  DISTANCES  BY  SOUND. 

Sound  travels  at  the  rate  of  1090  feet  in  a  second  of  time  when  the 
temperature  is  at  the  freezing  point,  and  about  1125  feet  when  the  tem- 
perature is  60  degrees  above  zero  ^.cale  of  Fahrenheit),  which  may  be 
used  for  all  ordinary  purposes. 

This  circumstance  affords  an  aid  to  the  mariner  navigating  in  a  fog, 
if  by  sounding  the  steam-whistle  he  can  get  an  echo  from  the  shore.  The 
usual  method  is  to  observe  carefully  the  time  in  seconds  between  the 
sound  of  the  whistle  and  the  echo,  and  multiplying  it  by  the  distance  that 
sound  travels  in  a  second. 


i  •  * 


EXAMPLE. 

H. 

The  whistle  is  sounded  at 10 

The  echo  is  heard  by  the  observer  at 10 


M.  s. 
6  13 
6       81 

10 


Then  1125x19=21,375  feet,  which  is  approximately  four  miles.  But 
it  must  be  observed  that  the  shore,  or  whatever  the  sound  was  projected 
against,  is  only  one-half  that  distance  from  the  observer,  because  the 
sound  had  to  travel  there  and  return.  In  this  connection  it  may  be  well 
to  remark  that  the  echo  does  not  always  come  from  the  nearest  shore, 
but  sometimes  from  a  neighboring  hill-side,  back  from  the  shore  or  from 
a  dense  fog  bank,  when  there  is  no  land  near  in  that  direction.  < 


t' 


APPENDIX. 


978 


TO    DETERMINE    THE    DISTANCE    OF    AN    OBJECT    ON 
SHORE,  WHEN  RUNNING  ALONG  THE  LAND. 

Take  the  bearing  of  the  object,  and  note  the  time,  keeping  the  tame 
coarse;  see  how  many  points  it  differs  from  the  coarse;  when  its  differ- 
ence is  doubled,  the  ship  will  be  as  far  from  the  object  as  she  has  run  in 
the  interyal. 

EzAMPLB. — Steering  N.  by  W.  along  the  shore  making  10  miles  an 
hour;  at  noon  Sand  Beach  ligbt-hoase  bore  N.  W.  by  N.  The  difference 
between  the  course  and  bearing  2  points,  proceeding  on  the  same  course 
until  it  bears  N.  W.  by  W.,  which  is  4  points  from  the  course,  or  double 
the  difference  of  two  points,  time  half-past  twelve;  the  distance  run  in 
the  half-hour,  6  miles,  equals  the  distance  from  the  light-house  when  it 
bears  N.  W.  by  W. 

Akothbb  Method. — When  an  object  on  shore  is  nearly  abeam,  note 
the  interval  until  the  object  changes  its  bearings  two  and  a  half  points. 
Twice  the  distance  run  in  this  time  is  the  distance  of  the  object. 

EZA.MPLB. — Steering  N.  by  W.  along  the  shore.  Sand  Beach  light- 
house bears  W.,  1  point  forward  of  the  beam,  proceeding  on  the  same 
oourse  until  it  bore  W.  S.  W.  ^  S.,  1^  points  abaft  the  beam;  time 
running,  one-quarter  of  an  hour;  distance  run,  2^  miles;  twice  this  dis- 
tance, 6  miles,  is  the  distance  of  the  light  when  the  second  bearing  was 
taken.  .  . 


THE   BAROMETER. 

1.  Wind  is  air  set  in  motion.  The  barometer  is  almost  always  affect- 
ed before  the  wind  actually  begins  to  blow  or  the  rain  to  fall.  The 
length  of  time  which  passes  between  the  first  appearance  of  a  change  of 
weather  and  the  actual  setting-in  is  not  always  the  same. 

8.  When  the  barometer  is  steady  there  is  no  great  likelihood  of  a 
storm  being  near  us,  while,  when  it  is  unsteady,  there  is  danger  of  the 
wind  freshening  to  a  gale.  This  unsteadiness  may  be  due  to  mere  local 
causes,  so  that  it  is  at  times  very  hard  to  say  whether  it  shows  that  a 
serious  storm  or  only  a  slight  squall  is  coming  on. 

3.  A  sudden  /ise  of  the  barometer  is  very  nearly  as  dangerous  as  a 
sudden  fall,  because  it  shows  that  the  level  is  unsteady.  In  an  ordinary 
gale  the  wind  often  blows  hardest  when  the  barometer  is  just  beginning 
to  rise,  directly  after  having  been  very  low. 

4.  When  the  barometer  at  any  place  rises  very  high  and  continues  so 
for  some  days,  it  is  because  there  is  too  mach  air  at  the  place,  and  the 
wind  will  be  very  light.  A  gale  can  only  set  in  when  the  wind  flows 
away,  and  it  will  not  at  first  be  severe  at  that  place. 

5.  When  the  barometer  is  very  low  and  continues  so,  there  may  be 
calm  and  even  dry  weather  for  a  short  time,  what  is  called  a  "  pet  day  ** 
or  a  "  weather-breeder;  ^  but  there  is  great  danger  of  a  serious  storm, 
because  the  air  will  try  to  force  its  way  into  the  districts  where  the  bar- 


274 


APPENDIX. 


ometer  is  low  and  increase  the  pressuro  there.    The  storm  will  probably 
be  the  worst  where  the  barometer  has  been  lowest. 

6.  The  barometer  rises  for  northerly  winds  (including  from  north- 
west, by  the  north  to  the  eastward)  for  dry  or  less  wet  weather,  for  less 
wind,  or  for  more  than  one  of  these  changes. 

7.  The  barometer  falls  for  southerly  winds  (including  from  southeast 
by  the  south  to  the  westward)  for  wet  weather,  for  stronger  wind,  or  for 
more  than  one  of  these  changes. 

8.  Besides  these  rules  for  the  barometer,  there  is  one  about  the  way 
in  which  the  wind  changes,  which  is  very  important.  It  is  well  known 
to  every  seaman,  and  is  contained  in  the  following  couplet: 

"  When  the  wind  veers  against  the  sun, 
Trust  it  not  for  back  it  will  run." 

9.  The  wind  almost  always  shifts  with  the  sun,  that  is,  from  left  to 
right  in  front  of  you.     A  change  in  this  direction  is  called  veering. 

10.  If  the  wind  shifts  the  opposite  way,  that  is  against  the  sun,  the 
change  is  called  backing,  and  it  seldom  occurs  unless  when  the  weather 
is  unsettled. 


THE  THERMOMETER. 

As  the  barometer  shows  weight  or  pressure  of  the  air,  so  tbe  ther- 
mometer shows  heat  and  cold,  or  temperature. 

The  result  of  numerous  observations  shows,  that  in  the  northern  hem- 
isphere: 

The  thermometer  rises  with  E.,  S.  E.,  and  S.  winds;  with  a  S.  W. 
wind  it  ceases  to  rise  and  begins  to  fall;  it  falls  with  W.,  S.  W.,  and  S. 
winds;  and  v  ith  a  N.  E.  wind  it  ceases  to  fall  and  begins  to  rise. 

Tne  above  r3marks  must  be  considered  as  relating  to  the  hemisphere 
generally,  there  are  local  exceptions  to  this  rule,  on  the  lakes  we  some- 
times have  a  high  thermometer  with  northwest  winds.  By  examining 
carefully  the  following  article  on  the  instrumental  and  other  local  indi- 
cations of  approaching  storms  on  the  lakes,  it  will  be  observed  that  as  the 
barometer  falls  rapidly  the  thermometer  rises,  the  only  exception  seems 
to  be  with  northeast  gales,  which  are  sometimes  preceded  by  a  high  bar- 
ometer with  falling  temperature.  Northwest  gales  in  the  fall  are  gener- 
ally preceded  by  light  southeast  winds,  veering  to  the  south,  heavy 
clouds  banked  in  the  west,  with  lightning,  and  rain,  barometer  falling 
rapidly,  and  thermometer  rising. 

The  thermometer  should  always  be  read  in  oonj  unction  with  the  bar- 
ometer. 


APPENDIX. 


975 


k'ith  the  bar- 


INSTRUMENTAL  AND  OTHER  LOCAL  INDICATIONS  OF  AP- 

PROACHING  STORMS. 

(OOMPILBD  FROM   REPORTS   MADE  TO    THE  CHIEF  SIGNAL    OFFICER  BT    OB- 
SERVERS  OF  THE  SIGNAL  SERVICE,  U.    S.  A.) 

Alpena. — Cirrus,  cirro-cumulus  or  cirro-stratus  clouds  in  upper,  and 
a  dull  haze  in  lower  atmosphere.  Lower  winds  from  westerly  direction, 
falling  barometer  and  rising  temperature. 

Buffalo. — Rising  baroneter,  with  comparatively  clear  sky,  mild 
temperature  and  light  to  fresh  winds  from  west  to  southwest. 

Light  cirrus  or  cirro-stratus  clouds  move  from  the  west,  apparently 
very  high  in  the  atmosphere;  humidity  and  wind  decrease,  and  occasion* 
ally  a  calm  ensues. 

This  is  followed  by  light  winds  froL'^  northeast,  east,  or  southeast. 
Barometer  begins  to  fall,  and  temperature  to  rise  slowly;  huinidity  in- 
creases steadily;  cumulus  clouds  appear,  moving  slowly  from  west  to 
southwest,  and  are  soon  followed  by  cumulo-stratus;  wind  increases  in 
velocity,  and  shortly  before  precipitation  occurs  a  dense  white  vapor  re- 
sembling haze,  and  moving  with  the  surface  current,  gradually  covers 
the  whole  sky. 

Wind-storms  are  preceded  by  unusually  rapid  barometric  depression, 
increase  in  temperature  and  humidity,  stratus  or  cumulo-stratus  clouds, 
with  southwest  winds.  Water  at  the  foot  of  lake  Erie  rises  in  advance 
of  the  storm. 

Detroit. — Falling  barometer  from  twelve  to  twenty-four  hours  in 
advance  of  the  storm,  with  wind  from  southeast  to  northeast. 

Duluth. — Northeast  storms,  preceded  by  hazy  atmosphere  and  fog 
over  the  lake,  the  former  turning  to  stratus  and  the  latter  to  nimbus 
cloud  as  storm  approaches.  Falling  barometer,  increasing  humidity  and 
falling  temperature. 

Northwest  storms  by  low  and  falling  barometer,  rising  temperature, 
high  and  increasing  humidity,  with  cumulus  and  cumulo-stratus  clouds. 
This  class  of  storms  most  frequent  in  winter  and  spring. 

Northern  storms  by  falling  barometer,  falling  temperature,  increas- 
ing humidity,  and  cumulus  clouds;  most  frequent  in  wmter,  and  accom- 
panied by  snow. 

Southern  storms  by  falling  barometer,  rising  temperature,  increasing 
humidity,  with  hazy  atmosphere. 

Eastern  storms  by  high  and  rising  barometer,  rising  temperature, 
increasing  humidity,  with  stratus  clouds. 

Western  storms  by  falling  barometer,  high  or  rising  temperature, 
and  humidity,  with  heavy  banks  of  stratus  clouds  in  western  sky.  Occur 
at  all  seasons  of  year. 

Fogs  are  usually  followed  by  rain  within  twenty-four  hours. 

Erie. — Storms  from  north,  northwest,  and  west  are  preceded  by  fall- 
ing barometer,  brisk  to  high  southerly  winds,  rising  temperature,  and 
increasing  humidity.  Storms  from  the  southwest  to  southeast  are  pre- 
ceded by  slowly  falling  barometer,  rising  temperature.  With  steady 
south  wind  at  any  season  of  the  year,  rain  is  probable  within  twelve 
hourfl. 


\ 


976 


APPENDIX. 


Mabqitbttb. — Faliinff  barometer  for  twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours, 
rising  temperature,  southerly  winds,  with  cirro-stratus  clouds  moving 
from  a  westerly  or  southwesterly  direction. 

OswBOO. — Wind  storms  are  preceded  by  rapid  fall  of  barometer,  with 
wind  veering  from  southeast  to  southwest,  west,  and  northwest.  Rain 
storms  by  oscillating  barometer,  with  downward  tendency,  hazy  atmos- 
phere graduallv  changing  to  cirro-stratus  or  cirro-cumulus  clouds  moving 
from  westward. 

Northeast  storms  by  high  barometer  and  low  temperature.  Local 
storms  by  sudden  fall  of  barometer,  rising  temperature,  low  humidity, 
oumulo-stratus  clouds  in  west  or  southwest. 

BocHBSTBB. — Falling  barometer,  rising  temperature,  east  to  south- 
east wind,  low  humidity,  and  clouds  moving  n-om  the  southwest.  A 
northeast  wind  backing  to  northwest  or  west,  or  veering  to  southwest  in 
winter,  indicates  snow. 

Saint  Paul. — Falling  barometer,  rising  temperature,  low  humidity, 
southeast  wind,  with  cirrus  and  cirro-stratus  clouds. 

ToLBDO. — Barometer  falling  rapidly,  rising  temperature,  low  humid- 
ity, easterly  winds,  cirrus  clouds  in  western  horizon  moving  eastward, 
followed  by  stratus  until  sky  is  obscured. 

Laobossb,  Wis. — Barometer  falls  steadily  for  twenty-four  hours,  with 
rising  temperature,  increased  humidity,  and  cirro-stratus  clouds  before 
rain.  Wind  storms  same  as  above,  with  addition  of  cirrus  of  great  ele- 
vation moving  in  opposite  direction  to  surface  wind,  and  apparently 
highly  electrified.  Winter  storms  are  preceded  by  gentle  south  to  south- 
west winds,  veering  to  north  or  northeast. 

PoBT  Huron. — Thick,  heavy  haze  or  clouds  in  northwest,  with  south- 
east wind,  indicates  rain.  Low  and  falling  barometer,  with  wind  from 
the  west,  northwest  or  east-northeast,  indicates  wind. 


PROVERBS  RELATING  TO  CLOUDS. 

STORM-PRBSAQINO   CLOUDS. 

{Metracta  from  Signal  Service  Notes.) 

From  Aristotle's  time  the  value  of  cloud  si^iis  in  storm  and  rain 
progno8ticatix)ns  has  boon  recognized,  but  their  interpretation  has  only 
recently  become  possible,  since  the  movement  of  storm  centers  over 
wide  areas  has  been  systematically  traced.  The  irregular  motions 
of  the  high  clouds,  perhaps  more  than  their  forms  (presenting  the  ap- 
pearance of  having  been  divided  and  torn  up  b^  up-rushing  currents), 
indicate  dangerous  cyclones.  If  the  equatorial  air  current  in  which  cy- 
clones are  borne  along  is  undisturbed  by  a  cyclonic  vortex,  the  clouds 
floating  in  its  higher  strata  would  sail  on  it  at  a  uniform  rate.  But  if  we 
suppose  that  a  storm  is  moving  in  the  great  current,  the  ascending  air  in 
the  storm's  center  is  ceaselessly  invading  the  cloud  stratum  above.  It  is 
this  uprushing  air  which  divides  the  clouds.  But  as  the  interchange  be- 
tween the  surface  and  upper  air  in  the  cyclone  center  tends  to  retard  the 


APPENDIX. 


277 


■wift  upper  onrrent  which  transports  the  oirriform  clouds,  the  motion  of 
these  clouds,  both  over  the  storm  center  and  far  out  in  front  of  it,  must 
often  be  retarded. 

Anvil  Clouds. — AnviUshaped  clouds  are  yery  likely  to  be  followed 
by  a  gale  of  wind. 

Appbajbanoes. — Soft-looking,  delicate  clouds  foretell  fine  weather  with 
moderate,  or  light  breezes.  Hard  edged,  oily  appeariog  clouds,  wind. 
A  dark,  gloomy,  blue  sky  indicates  wind;  a  brignt,  blue  sky,  clear  fine 
weather.  Generally  the  softer  the  clouds  the  less  wind.  Small  inky 
clouds  foretell  rain. 

AssBMBLAQB  OF  Clouds. — If  an  assemblage  of  small  clouds  spread 
out  or  become  thicker  and  darker,  expect  rain. 

Against  thr  Wind. — If  you  see  a  cloud  rise  against  the  wind, 
when  that  cloud  comes  up  to  you,  the  wind  will  blow  the  same  way  that 
the  cloud  came,  and  the  same  rule  holds  good  of  a  clear  place  when  all 
the  sky  is  equally  thick  except  one  clear  edge. 

Bull's  Eye. — A  small,  fast  growing,  black  cloud  in  violent  motion, 
seen  in  the  tropics,  is  called  the  Bull's  £ye,  and  precedes  the  most  violent 
hurricanes. 

Black  Scuds. — Small  black  scudo  (clouds),  drifting  from  southwest, 
is  a  sign  of  rain. 

Blub  Skt. — Enough  blue  sky  in  the  northwest  to  make  a  Scotchman 
a  jacket  is  a  sign  of  approaching  clear  weather. 

Cross- Wind  Clouds. — If  you  see  clouds  going  cross  wind,  there  is  a 
storm  in  the  air. 

Clouds — Wind. — Clouds  flying  against  the  wind  indicate  unsettled 
weather. 

Dabk  Sky. — If  the  sky  becomes  darker  without  much  rain,  an'l  di- 
vides into  two  layers  of  clouds,  expect  sudden  gusts  of  wind.  Dark 
clouds  in  the  west  at  sunrise  indicate  rain  on  that  day. 

EvBNiNO  AND  Morning. — 

Evening  red  and  morning  gray 

Will  set  the  traveler  on  his  way; 

But  evening  gray  and  morning  red 

Will  bring  down  rain  upon  his  head. 
Fair.— 

If  the  sky  beyond  the  clouds  is  blue, 

Be  glad,  there  is  a  picnic  for  you. 

Fine  Wkathkr. — If  clouds  at  the  same  height  drive  up  with  the 
wind  and  gradually  become  thinner  and  descend,  expect  fine  weather. 

Gusts. — If  there  be  a  cloudy  sky  and  dark  clouds  driving  fast 
under  higher  clouds,  expect  violent  gusts  of  wind. 

Hbavy  Sky. — If  the  sky  after  fine  weather  becomes  heavy  with  small 
olouds,  expect  rain. 

Hubs. — Clouds  being  soft,  undefined,  and  feathery,  will  be  fair.  Gen- 
erally, any  deep,  unusual  hue  of  clouds  indicates  rain  and  wind,  while 
the  more  quiet  and  moderate  tints  indicate  fair  weather. 

Low  Clouds. — Clouds  floating  low  enough  to  cast  shadows  on  the 
ground  are  usually  followed  by  rain. 


J 


278 


APPENDIX. 


Maokbrsl  Clouds. — 

Mackerel  scales  and  mares'  tails 
Make  lofty  ships  carry  low  sails. 

Rkd  Skt. — When  it  is  evening,  ve  say  it  will  be  fair  weather,  for  the 
sky  is  red;  and  in  the  morning  it  will  be  foul  weather  to-day,  for  the  sky 
is  red  and  lowering.     (Matthew  xvi:  2,  3.) 

When  the  ulouds  are  gathered  towards  the  sun  at  setting,  with  a  rosy 
hue,  they  foretell  rain. 

If  there  be  red  clouds  in  the  west  at  sunset,  it  will  be  fair;  if  the 
clouds  have  a  tint  of  purple  it  will  be  fine,  or  if  rod  bordered  with  black 
in  the  southeast. 

Stobm. — Behold  there  ariseth  a  little  cloud  out  of  the  sea  like  a  man's 
hand. 

Prepare  thy  chariot  and  get  thee  down,  that  the  rain  stops  thee  not. 

And  it  came  to  pass  in  the  meanwhile  that  the  heavens  were  black 
with  clouds  and  wind,  and  there  was  great  rain.     (Kings  xviii:  44,  46.) 

Wind. — If  the  wind  blow  between  north  and  east  or  east,  with  clouds 
for  some  days,  and  if  clouds  bo  then  seen  driving  from  the  south  high 
up,  rain  will  follow  plentifully,  sometimes  forty-eight  hours  after;  if 
after  the  rain  the  wind  goes  to  the  south  or  southwest,  better  weather 
Will  follow. 

Ykllow  Skv. — A  light  yellow  sky  at  sunset  presages  wind. 
A  pale  yellow  sky  at  sunset  presages  rain. 


PROVERBS  RKLATING  TO  THE  MOON. 

Dbt  Wbatiikr. — When  the  horns  of  the  moon  are  sharp  it  indicates 
dry  weather. 

New  moon  far  in  the  south  indicates  dry  weather  for  a  month. 

East  Wind. — If  the  moon  changes  with  the  wind  east,  the  weather 
during  that  moon  will  be  foul. 

Fair  Wkatiibr. — Phases  of  the  moon  occurring  in  the  evening, 
expect  fair  weather. 

Fine  Weatiikr. — If  the  full  moon  rises  clear,  expect  fine  weather. 

Galb  Moon. — If  the  moon  i«  soon  between  the  scud  and  broken  clouds 
during  a  gale,  it  in  uxpocted  to  souif  away  the  bad  weather. 

Halo. — The  larger  the  halo  (ring)  abcut  the  moon  the  nearer  the  rain 
clouds,  and  the  sooner  the  rain  may  be  expected. 

A  lunar  halo  indicates  rain,  and  the  number  of  stars  inclosed,  the 
number  of  rainy  days.     The  moon  with  a  circle  brings  water  in  her  beak. 

Moon,  Wind-Clouds,  Etc. — 

When  first  the  moon  appears  if  then  she  shrouds 
'    '  Her  silver  orescent,  tipped  with  sable  clouds. 

Conclude  she  bodes  a  tempest  on  the  main, 

And  brews  for  fields  impetuous  floods  of  rain. 

Or  if  her  face  with  fiery  flushings  glow, 

Expect  the  rattling  wind  aloft  to  blow. 


4PPBMDIX. 


379 


But  four  night!  old  (for  that  is  the  best  sign), 

With  sharpened  horns,  if  glorious  then  she  shine, 

Next  day  not  only  that,  but  all  the  moon 

Till  her  revolving  race  be  wholly  run 

Are  void  of  tempests  both  by  land  and  sea. 

MooK  Halo. — A  large  ring  around  the  moon  and  low  clouds  indicate 
rain  in  twenty-four  hours;  a  small  ring  and  high  cloudH,  rain  in  several 
days. 

Moon,  Pointb  or. — If  the  new  moon  appears  with  the  points  of  the 
crescent  turned  up,  the  month  will  be  dry.  If  the  points  are  turned 
down,  it  will  be  wet. 

New  Moon. — New  moon  on  its  back  indicatCH  wind;  Htanding  on  its 
point,  rain  in  the  summer  and  huow  in  winter.     (Dr.  John  Monual.) 

Old  Moon. — 

In  the  old  moon 

A  cloudy  morning  means  a  fair  afternoon. 

The  old  moon  seen  in  the  new  moon's  arms  is  a  sign  of  fair  weather. 

Rbd,  Dim,  or  Pale  Moon. — A  dim  or  pale  moon  indicates  rain,  a  red 
moon  indicAtus  wind. 

If  the  full  moon  riHes  red,  expect  wind.     Whan  the  moon  rises  red  and 
appears  large,  with  cloudH,  expect  rain  in  twelve  hours. 


PROVERBS  RELATING  TO  RAIN. 

Olbabitkss. — Unusual  clearness  in  the  atmosphere,  objects  being  seen 
very  distinctly,  indicates  rain. 

EVKNINO   AND   MORNINO. — 

Evening  red  and  morning  gray,  * 

Are  sure  signs  of  a  fine  day.  " 

Evening  gray  and  morning  red, 
Put  on  your  hat  or  you'll  wet  your  head. 

Hours  op  Commbnoinq. — If  rain  commences  before  daylight,  it  will 
hold  up  before  8  a.  u.;  if  it  begins  about  noon,  it  will  continue  through 
the  afternoon;  if  it  commonceH  after  9  p.  m.,  it  will  rain  the  next  day;  if 
it  clears  off  in  the  night,  it  will  rain  the  next  day;  if  the  wind  is  from 
northwest  or  southwest,  the  storm  will  be  short;  if  from  the  northeast, 
it  will  bo  a  hard  one;  if  from  the  northwoHt,  a  cold  one,  and  from  the 
southwest  a  warm  one. 

If  rain  ceases  after  12  m.,  it  will  rain  next  day. 

If  rain  ceases  before  12  m.,  it  will  be  clear  next  day. 

Morninq  Rain. — 

If  it  rain  before  seven. 

It  will  clear  before  eleven. 

If  rain  begins  at  early  morning  light, 

'Twill  end  ere  day  at  noon  is  brigul.       • 


Notice. - 


Rain  long  foretold,  long  last; 
Short  notice,  soon  past. 


380 


APPSNDIX. 


Wind  and  Rain. — Marry  the  rain  to  the  wind  and  you  have  a  calnu 

Wdid.— 

With  the  rain  before  the  wind, 
Your  topsail  halyards  yon  mast  mind. 


PROVERBS  RELATING  TO  THE  RAINBOW. 

Clsab. — The  rainbow  has  bnt  a  bad  character;  she  ever  commands 
the  rain  to  cease. 

GoLOB. — If  the  green  be  large  and  bright  in  the  rainbow,  it  is  a  sign 
of  rain.  If  red  bo  the  strongest  color,  there  will  be  rain  and  wind  to- 
gether. After  a  long  drought  the  rainbow  is  a  sign  of  rain.  After  much 
rain  it  indicates  fair  weather.  If  it  breaks  up  all  at  once,  there  will  fol- 
low severe  and  settled  weather.  If  the  bow  be  in  the  morning,  rain  will 
follow;  if  at  noon,  slight  and  heavy  rain;  if  at  night,  fair  weather.  The 
appearance  of  two  or  three  rainbows  indicates  fair  weather  for  the  pre- 
sent, but  settled  and  heavy  rains  in  a  few  days. 

Evening  Rainbow. — 

If  there  is  a  rainbow  at  eve, 
It  will  rain  and  leave. 

East  and  West  Rainbow. — Rainbow  in  the  east  indicates  that  the 
following  day  will  be  clear. 

A  rainbow  in  the  west  is  usually  followed  by  more  rain  the  same  day. 

Fair  Wkatheb. — 

The  boding  shepherd  heaves  a  sigh, 
For  see,  a  rainbow  spans  the  sky. 

High  Rainbow. — When  rainbow  does  not  touch  water,  clear  weather 
will  follow. 

MoitNiNG  AND  Evening  Rainbows. — 

Rainbow  in  the  mornrng,  shepherds  take  warning; 

Rainbow  at  night,  shepherds'  delight. 
A  morning  rainbow  indicates  rain;  an  evening  rainbow,  fair  weather. 

West  and  East  Showbb. — Rainbow  in  the  morning  shows  that 
shower  is  west  of  us,  and  we  will  probably  get  it.  Rainbow  in  the  even- 
ing shows  that  shower  is  east  of  us  and  is  passing  off. 


PROVERBS  RELATING  TO  STARS  AND  METEORS. 

.   Comets  Bbino  Cold  Wbatubb. 

Falling  Stabs. — If  there  be  many  falling  stars  during  a  dear  even- 
ing in  summer,  expect  thunder. 

If  there  are  no  falling  stars  on  a  bright  summer  night,  expect  fiu» 
weather. 

Mant  Stabs. — When  the  sky  is  full  of  stars,  expect  rain.  Many 
stars  in  winter  indicate  frost.  In  summer,  when  many  stars  twinkle^ 
dear  weather  is  indicated. 


i  have  a  calnu 


APPENIMX. 


281 


Mii.*:t  Way. — ^The  edge  of  the  Milky  Way,  whioh  is  the  brightest, 
indicates  the  direction  from  which  the  approaching  storm  will  come. 

Shooting  Stars. — ^If  meteors  shoot  towards  the  north,  expect  a  north 
wind  next  day.  Many  shooting  stars  on  summer  nights  indi'^ate  hot 
weather. 

Tempest. — When  a  star  tows  the  moon  and  another  chases  her  astern, 
tempestuous  weather  will  follow.  The  phenomenon  is  probably  styled  a 
big  star  chasing  the  moon. 

Wind  and  Rain. — ^If  the  stars  appear  large  and  clear,  expect  rain 
or  wicd. 


dear  weather 


PROVERBS  RELATING  TO  THE  SUN. 

AuROBA. — Aurora  Borealis  denotes  cold.  *  \ 

Cloudt  Sunset. — 

The  sun  sets  weeping  in  the  lowly  west, 
Witnessing  storms  to  come,  woe  and  unrest. 

— Shakespeare. 

Dark  Clouds. — If  the  sun  sets  in  dark,  heavy  clouds,  expect  rain 
next  day.  If  at  suorise  there  are  many  dark  clouds  seen  in  the  west,  and 
remain  there,  rain  will  fall  on  that  day. 

Double  Setting. — Sun  setting  double  indicates  much  rain.  Red 
sun  indicates  fair  weather.  Orange  sun,  usually  foul  weather.  Mook 
SUDS  in  winter  are  usually  followed  by  intense  cold. 

Dull  Color. — When  the  sun  appears  a  pale  or  dull  color  expect 
rain. 

Drawing  Water. — Rays  of  the  sun  appearing  in  a  cloud  forbode 
rain.    If  the  sun  draws  water  in  the  morning,  it  wUl  rain  before  night. 

Golden  Set. —  * 

The  weary  sun  hath  made  a  golden  set. 
And  by  the  bright  track  of  his  fiery  car,  ' 

Gives  tokens  of  a  goodly  day  to-morrow. 

JRichard  III. 

Halo. — A  solar  halo  indicates  bad  weather.  A  halo  around  the  sun 
indicates  the  approach  of  a  storm,  within  three  days,  from  the  side  which 
is  most  brilliant.  If  there  be  a  ring  or  halo  around  the  sun  in  bad  weather, 
expect  fine  weather  soon.  A  bright  circle  around  the  sun  denotes  a  storm, 
and  cooler  weather. 

Haziness. — A  blur  or  haziness  about  the  sun  indicates  a  storm. 

Pale  Twilight. — Pale^  yellow  twilight,  extending  high  np,  indicate! 
threatening  weather. 

Pale  Sbt. — If  the  snu  sets  pale,  it  will  rain  to-morrow.  A  green 
•onset  indicates  rain. 

Pale  Sunrihu. — If  the  sun  rises  pale,  a  pale  red,  or  even  dark  blae, 
there  will  be  rain  during  the  day. 


283 


apjPbmdix. 


1/    ; 


Red  Clouds. — If  the  clouds  a'l  sunrise  be  red,  there  will  be  rain  the 
following  day. 

Rbd. — A  red  evening  indicates  fine  weather;  but  if  the  red  extends 
'  far  upwards,  especially  in  the  morning,  it  indicates  rain  or  wind. 

Red  Sun. — A  red  sun  has  water  in  its  eye.  • 

Sba-Gbbeit  Sky. — When  the  sky  during  rain  is  linged  with  sea-green 
the  rain  will  increase ;  if  with  deep  blue,  the  rain  will  be  showery. 

Yellow  Sunset. — A  bright  yellow  sunset  indicates  wind;  a  pale  yel- 
low, wet;  a  neutral  gray  is  a  favorable  sign  in  the  morning  and  an  unfav- 
orable one  in  the  evening. 

The  sun  reveals  the  secrets  of  the  sky. 

And  who  dares  give  the  source  of  light  the  lie  ? 


CANALS. 


Table  showing  the  smallest  locks  on  the  several  lines  of  navigation; 
also  the  dimensions  of  the  largest  vessels  which  may  pass  through  them: 


Nai»  or  OiifAi.. 


Lacbfne  

Beauharnois 

Cornwall 

Williamsburgr  

Weliand 

St.  Ours  Lock 

Cbambljr 

Rideau 

Ste.  Anne 

Carillon 

Qrenville 

Culbuce  

St.  Peter's 

River  Trent 

United  States  Canals. 

Erie 

Cbamplaln. 


Dimensiona  of  Lock  in  Feet. 


Length. 


270 
200 
2(10 
200 
270 
200 

Its 

134 
200 
200 
200 
200 
200 
181 


110 
100 


Breadth. 


Depth  of 

water 

on  SUIs. 


45 
45 
65 
46 
45 
45 

g« 

45 
45 
45 
45 

m 


18 
18 


12 
9 
9 
9 

14 
7 
7 
5 
9 
9 
9 
0 

18 


Dlmenaions  of  Vessels  in  FMt. 


Length. 


Breadth. 


Draught 
of  water 

when 
loaded. 


SSO 
180 
180 
180 
250 
180 
110 
120 
180 
18G 
180 
180 
199 


102 
0;i 


44 
44 
54 
44 
44 
44 
28 

f^ 
44 
44 
44 

49 


l^ 


12 
9 
9 
9 

14 
7 
61 


S 


9 

9 

6 

17« 


•4 


Tonnage 

of 
Vessels. 


1,000 
TOO 
760 
700 

1,000 
600 
280 
2fi0 
700 
700 
700 
680 

1,000 


80 


ST.  CLAIR  FLATS  SHIP  CANAL. 


This  canal  was  projected  in  1866,  with  a  view  to  obtaining  a  straight 
channel  across  St.  Glair  Flats,  13  feet  deep,  300  feet  wide,  and  provided 
on  each  side  with  a  dike  7,300  feet  long.  The  dikes  to  consist  of  timber 
cribs  resting  upon  piles  driven  into  the  original  bottom  of  the  shoal,  and 
filled  with  materials  dredged  from  the  channel  between  them,  each  dike 
being  protected  on  both  sides  by  sheet-piling.  The  work  was  oompleted, 
according  to  this  project  in  1871. 


APPENDIX. 


288 


The  project  was  modified  iii  1873,  so  as  to  fartber  improve  the  mid- 
ohannel  to  a  depth  of  16  feet,  and  width  of  200  feet.  This  modification 
was  completed  in  1874.  Improvements  are  now  in  progrest}  by  which 
the  depth  will  be  increased  to  18  feet. 


ST.  MAJIY'S  FALLS  SHIP  CANAL. 

This  canal,  which  overcomes  the  rapids  in  the  St.  Mary  River,  con- 
necting the  water  of  Lakes  Huron  and  Superior,  is  situated  in  the  State 
of  Michigan,  and  was  first  projected  in  1837.  The  canal  was  not,  how- 
ever, commenced  until  4th  June,  1853,  and  the  first  boat  passed  through 
the  old  canal  on  the  18th  June,  1855.  Cost  of  old  Canal  to  14th  May, 
1885,  $999,802.46.  In  1870  the  enlargement  of  the  canal  was  commenced, 
and  it  was  opened  to  navigation  on  1st  September,  1881,  but  not  com- 
pleted until  1882,  up  to  which  time  the  cost  of  enlargement  had  been 
12,150,000. 

The  length  of  the  oanal  is  about  7,000  feet.  The  width  varies;  the 
least,  width  is  at  the  swing  bridge,  or  movable  dam,  108  feet,  the  depth 
of  water  from  15^  to  16  feet.  The  lock  is  515  feet  long  between  gates, 
80  feet  wide  in  chamber,  and  60  feet  wide  at  the  gates,  with  16  feet  of 
water  during  mean  low  water;  total  lift  varies  from  16f  to  18  feet.  The 

fates  and  capstans  are  operated  by  machinery;   the  power  is  produced 
y  two  turbine  wheels,  which  also  furnishes  power  to  run  the  electric 
lights. 

New  Lock. — The  new  look  to  be  constructed  upon  the  site  of  the  eld 
State  locks  is  to  have  a  length  of  800  feet  between  gates,  a  width  of  100 
feet  throughout,  a  depth  cr  21  feet  on  the  miter-sills,  and  a  lift  of  18 
feet.    The  canal  is  to  be  deepened  to  correspond. 


GREATEST  DEPTH  OF  WATER  IN  THE  LAKES. 

Lakb  Suprbior. — The  greatest  depth  as  appears  from  the  Lake  Sur- 
vey is  168  fathoms,  at  a  point  53  miles  N.  N.  E.  \  E.  from  Maniton 
Island  light,  and  61  miles  E.  \  S.  from  Passage  Island  light. 

Lake  Michigan. — The  greatest  depth  is  145  fathoms,  at  a  point  26^ 
miles  S.  W.  by  W.*^  W.  from  Point  Betsey  light,  and  S.  E.  by  E.  i  E. 
33^  miles  from  Sturgeon  Bay  Ship  canal  light. 

Lake  Huron. — The  greatest  depth  is  125  fathoms,  at  a  point  26^ 
miles  S.  S.  W.  \  W.  from  Cove  Island  light,  and  58  miles  E.  \  S.  from 
Thunder  Bay  Island  light. 

Lake  Erie. — ^The  greatest  depth  is  35  fathoms,  at  a  point  6^  miles 
S.  E.  i  E.  from  Long  Point  light,  and  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  24}  miles  from  the 
main  light  at  Erie. 

Lake  Ontario. — The  greatest  depth  is  123  fathoms,  at  a  point  28 
miles  N.  E.  by  E.  \  E.  from  the  pierhead  light  at  Charlotte,  and  N.  N. 
W.  i  W.  15^  milei  from  the  main  light  at  Big  Sodus. 


S84 


APPENDIX. 


WATER  TABLE. 

Showing  the  mean  level  of  Lake  Michigan  and  Lake  Huron  during 
the  months  of  May,  June,  July,  August,  September,|Octoborj  and  Novem- 
ber, for  sixteen  years,  from  1876  to  1891. 


Date. 

Mar. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Not. 

1876 

1.9 

2.2 

2.5 

3.4 

3.4 

3.0 

2.6 

2.5 

1.9 

2.0 

1.3 

2.1 

2.85 

3.63 

3.76 

3.89 

1.0 

2.2 

2.8 

3.3 

2.9 

2.8 

2.4 

2.1 

1.8 

1.7 

1.2 

1.9 

2.55 

8.30 

3.38 

3.94 

1.2 

2.1 

2.3 

3  2 

2.7 

2.6 

2.2 

1.6 

1.7 

1.0 

1.4 

2.0 

2.52 

3.04 

3.14 

8.91 

1.8 

2.2 

2.3 

3.4 

2.8 

2.8 

2.2 

1.5 

1.9 

1.5 

1.5 

2.2 

3.48 

8.10 

8.14 

4.04 

1.8 

2.4 

2.6 

8.5 

2.9 

2.9 

2.3 

1.8 

2.2 

1.6 

1.7 

2.5 

2.78 

3.27 

3.41 

4.20 

1.7 
.2.6 
2.5 
8.7 
8.2 
2.7 
2.5 
2.1 
2.0 
1.8 
1.8 
2.8 
8.07 
8.64 
8.62 
4.57 

1.8 

1877 

2.6 

1878 

2.8 

1879 

8.8 

1880 

8.8 

1881 

2.6 

1882 

2.7 

1883 

2.0 

1884 

2.4 

1885 

2.0 

1886 

2.1 

18S7 

3.2 

1888 

8.25 

1889 

8.98 

1890 

8.83 

1891 

4.88 

NoTK. — The  above  figures,  from  official  records  indicate  the  number 
of  feet  and  tenths,  that  the  level  of  the  lake  was  below  the  plane  of 
reference,  which  corresponds  with  the  High  Water  of  1838.  The  high- 
est water  of  which  we  have  any  authentic  record  was  in  the  year  1838, 
and  the  lowest  water  occurred  in  1819;  the  diflference  between  the 
extreme  fluctuations  was  5^  feet. 

A  new  plane  of  reference  has  been  adopted.  It  is  the  mean  level  of 
the  sea,  observed  in  NetV  York  Bay.  In  January,  1891,  the  mean  level 
of  Lake  Michigan  and  Lake  Huron  was  680.02  feet,  and  Lake  Superior 
600.66  feet  above  this  plane  of  reference. 

The  height  of  Lake  Superior,  as  observed  above  the  lock  in  the  Sault 
River,  is  20.64  feet  above  Lake  Huron.  The  level  below  the  lock  is  3.07 
feet  above  Lake  Huron. 

REGULATIONS    FOR    ISSUING    CHARTS    OF    THE    LAKE 

SURVEY. 

1.  Charts  are  no  longer  issued  free  of  charge  to  vessels.  2.  Charts 
can  be  purchased  by  any  one,  at  the  U.  S.  Engineer's  office,  34  West 
Congress"  St.,  Detroit,  for  20  cents  per  sheet.  The  general  chart  of 
Lake  Superior  is  in  three  sheets,  and  that  of  Lake  Michigan  in  two 
sheets  and  Lakes  Huron,  Erie  and  Ontario  in  one  sheet. 

AREA  OF  THE  LAKES,  AND  THEIR  HEIGHT  ABOVE  THE 

SEA. 

Lake  Superior  contains  31,200  square  miles,  and  its  mean  level  for 
nineteen  years  is  601.55  feet  above  the  mean  level  of  the  sea. 

Lake  Michigan  contains  22,450  square  miles,  and  its  mean  level  for 
19  years,  is  581.56  feet  above  the  mean  level  of  the  sea. 

Lake  Huron  contains  23,800  square  miles,  and  its  mean  level  for  19 
years  is  581.56  feet  above  the  mean  level  of  the  sea. 

Lake  Erie  contains  9,960  square  miles,  and  its  mean  level  is  078  feet 
above  the  mean  level  of  the  sea. 

Lake  Ontario  contains  7,240  square  miles,  and  its  mean  level  is 
246.66  feet  above  the  mean  level  of  the  sea. 


iron  daring 
and  Novem- 


kst. 

Not. 

1.7 

1.8 

2.6 

2.6 

2.5 

2.8 

3.7 

8.8 

8.2 

8.8 

2.7 

2.6 

2.5 

2.7 

2.1 

2.0 

2.0 

2.4 

1.8 

2.0 

1.8 

2.1 

2.8 

8.2 

3.07 

8.25 

3.64 

8.98 

8.62 

8.83 

4.57 

4.88 

INDEX. 


the  number 
the  plane  of 
The  high- 
e  year  1838, 
)etween   the 

lean  level  of 
9  mean  levfal 
ike  Superior 

in  the  Sault 
5  lock  is  3.07 

HE    LAKE 

I.  2.  Charts 
ce,  84  West 
ral  chart  of 
ligan  in  two 

BOVE  THE 

an   level  for 

a. 

lean  level  for 

level  for  10 

al  is  578  feet 

lean  level   is 


Agttte  baj,  287. 
Agate  harbor,  230. 
Agate  island,  'i50. 
Ahnepee,  187,  211. 
Alexaikdria  bay,  27. 
Alexander  rock,  138. 
Alec  Clark  rock.  137. 
Allen  Otty  shoal,  30. 
Alpena,  113. 
A.medroz  inland,  146. 
Amherstburg,  86. 
Amsterdam,  184. 
Anderson  ledge,  121. 
Annie  rock,  136. 
Ann  Long  bank,  189. 
Arran  island,  83. 
Ashland,  233,  234. 
Ashtabula,  61,  75. 
Au  Sable,  104,  111. 
Azov  ledgci.  137. 
Badgely  island,  140. 
Bad  Neighbor  rock,  120. 
Baker  point,  146. 
Ballast  island,  66.  67. 
Bank  point,  171. 
Bar  point,  83. 
bsss  islands,  66. 
Batile  island,  251. 
Bay  Oity,  10  {. 
Bayfleid,  114, 117, 233, 247. 
Bayley'c  harbor,  188,  212, 

213. 
Bay  State  shoal,  24. 
Beach  point,  130. 
Rear's  Back  island,  145. 
Bear's  rump,  122,  153. 
Beauty  island,  148. 
Beaver  bay,  249. 
Beaver   island,    143,   163, 

201,  213. 
Beaver  island  harbor,  168, 

801. 
Bedford  island,  145. 
Belle  isle;  91,  92. 
Belleville,  44. 
Benona,  170. 
Beverly  island,  148. 
Bernard  rock,  185. 
Bete  Qrise  bay.  229. 
Big  Burnt  island,  135. 
Big  Ott.jr  creek,  80. 
Big  Point  Sable,  '<>03,  223. 
Big  Rock  point.  202. 
Big  Sable.  228. 
Big  Sodus,  82,  88,  88,  41. 


158. 


Big  Suamico,  196. 
Bird  Island  reef,  55. 
Black  lake,  171. 
Black  river,  63,  76,  105. 
Black  River  bay,  30. 
Black  Rock  harbor.  64. 
Blake  island,  145. 
Blue  Ledge,  99. 
Bois  Blanc  island,  88, 
Hold  point,  136. 
Bower's  harbor.  166. 
Bowlder  bank,  149. 
Braddock's  point,  88. 
Brock's  group.  22. 
Brockville,  22. 
BroT^n's  point,  43. 
Dnff  alo,  64,  66,  67,  78,  74, 

■';y. 

Bull  Rock  point,  30. 
Burlington  bay,  41,  48,  62. 
Burnt  bluflf,  214, 
Burnt  island,  43,  135. 
Burbidge  island,  148. 
Bustard  rocks,  127. 
Button  bay,  28. 
Byng  inlet,  127. 
Cabot  head,  123,  168. 
Calf  Island  spit,  81. 
Calumet,  176.  177. 
Calumet  islands.  28. 
Campbell  rock,  184. 
Cana  island,  189. 
Canoe  rocks,  241. 
Cape  Robert,  161. 
Cape  Smith.  184. 
Cape  Vincent,  86. 
Caribou  island,  250. 
Carleton  island,  39. 
Carleton  point,  146. 
Carling  point,  146. 
Caron  point.  148. 
Carp  river,  160. 
Cat  Fish  creek,  80. 
Cat  Head  point,  167. 
Cedar  islands,  25. 
Cedar  point,  65. 
Cedar  river,  192,  216. 
Celeron  island,  82. 
Center  island,  141. 
Centerville,  186. 
Chamber's  island,  198. 
Channel  rock,  129. 
Chantry  island.  116. 
Chaquamegan  bay.  288. 
Charity  fsland,  102. 

L'^86] 


Charity  shoal,  29. 
Charles  point,  33. 
Charlevoix,  164. 
Charlotte,  83,  39.  41. 
Chaum^-at  bay,  30. 
Cheboygan,  112,  158,  169, 

198. 
Cherry  island,  30. 
Chicago,  177, 178, 179,  206, 

206,  218. 
Christian  island,  126. 
Church  hill,  134. 
Churchville,  219. 
Clrtpperton  island,  146, 147, 

148,  157. 
Clapperton  channel,    148, 

150,  151,  157. 
Clark's  Point  shoal,  177. 
Clay  cliff,  134. 
Clayton,  28. 
Cleveland,  62,  63,  76. 
Club  island,  128,  129. 
Cobourg,  45,  61. 
Colchester  reef,  82. 
Collingwood,  125, 126, 164, 

165. 
Collins  inlet,  189. 
Cole's  Ferry  shoal,  24. 
Cole  shoal,  42. 
Confiance  shoal,  121. 
Conneaut,  61. 
Copper  harbor,  229.  245. 
Corsica  shoal,  97. 
Corbay  point,  250. 
Corona,  97. 

Cove  island,  116,  120,  158. 
Courtney  bank,  149. 
Crimea,  171. 
Croker  island,  147. 
Cross-Over  island.  24. 
Darling's  reef.  128. 
Darlington,  46. 
Dawson  rock,  128. 
Dean's  pier,  186. 
Deseronto,  44. 
Detour,  108,  112,  219,  220. 
Detroit  river,   72,  78,  78, 

79,  82,  86,  86,  87,  88,  91, 

92. 
Detroit  Island  passage,  190. 
Deviation  of  compass,  7  to 

17. 
Devil  river,  105,  106. 
Devil's  nose,  88. 
Devil  island.  282. 


il 


286 


INDBX. 


Doctor  island,  128. 
Drisco'a  shoal,  101. 
Drummond's  island,  118. 
Duck  lake.  170. 
Dulutb,  285,  286,  237,  248. 
Dunkirk,  67,  58,  74. 
Dunlap  reef,  195. 
Dutchman's  bead,  147. 
Eagle  bluff.  198. 
Eagle   harbor,     193,    280, 

246,  246. 
Eagle  point,  120. 
Eagle  river,  230,  246. 
East  point,  148. 
East  Kous  island.  146. 
Echo  island,  123. 
Lgg  harbor,  217. 
Eighteen -mile  creek,  84. 
Eleven-foot  rock,  146. 
Elk  Rapids,  167. 
Elm  island,  146. 
Emerald  channel,  66,  66. 
Empire  shoal,  26. 
Entrance  to  Georgian  bay. 

118. 
Erie,  68,  59,  60,  61,  74,  76. 
Erie  shingle,  129. 
Escanaba.  192.  216. 
Evans  point,  141. 
Evanstoj.  180. 
Fair  Haven.  32. 
Fairport,  61,  75,  78. 
False  Detour,  116,  119. 
False  Ducks,  41,  44. 
False    Presque  IsLe,    106, 

112. 
Feather-bed  shoal.  28. 
Fighting  island.  87,  90. 
Fish  creek,  217. 
Fisherman's  island,  165. 
Fishery  point.  129. 
Fish  point,  139. 
Fitzwilliam  channel,  132. 
Flat  island,  144. 
Flower- pot  island,  123. 
Forestville,  109. 
Fort  Gratiot.  97,  108,  109, 

117. 
Fort  Maiden,  89. 
Fort  Mississagua,  49. 
Fort  Niagara,  41. 
Foster  bank,  146. 
Fox  Island  shoal,  165. 
Fox  river,  197. 
Francis  point,  147. 
Frankfort,  168,  203. 
Frenchman's  bay.  46. 
French  river,  127,  156.' 
Frontenac  shoal,  27. 
Frying  pan  island,  220. 
Galloo  island.  30. 
Galloo  Island  shoal,  80. 
Gananoque,  42. 
Garden  bay,  214. 
Garden  bluff,  214. 


Garden  City  reef.  108 
Garden  island.  148. 
Gargantua,  260. 
Genesee  river,  88. 
Georgian   bay,    118.    119, 

120. 
George  island,  139. 
George  rock,  189. 
Gibraltar  cliff,  142. 
Gibraltar  point,  46,  51,  52. 
Gig  point,  120. 
Gin  rock,  126. 
Glasgow,  83. 
Glen  harbor,  167. 
Goderich,    113,    114,   117, 

118. 
Gold  Hunters'  bank,  135. 
Good  harbor,  167. 
Gooseberry  River  reef,  238. 
Goose  Island  shoal.  160. 
Goose  Island  spit,  160. 
Gore  bay,  151, 
Grace  harbor,  240. 
Grand  Haven,  80, 171, 172. 

204,  213. 
Grand  island.  226. 
Grand  Island  channel,  58. 
Grand    Island    shoal,    54, 

223,  248. 
Grand    Marais,    228,    224, 

289,  243,  249 
Grand  Point  au  Sable,  16!). 
Grand  river,  80. 
Grand  Sable,  223. 
Grand  Traverse  bay,  165. 
Granite  island,  226. 
Granite  State  shoal,  27. 
Grassy  island.  90.  197. 
Gravel  island.  189. 
Gravelly  point,  102. 
Gravelly  Island  shoal,  191. 
Gray's  reef,  162. 
Great  Barrier,  121. 
Great  Duck  island,  116. 
Green  bay,  190.  197,  217 
Green  island,  68,  77,  137, 

194.  217. 
Grenadier  island,  26,  42. 
Griffith's  island,  124. 
Griffith's  point,  144. 
Grosse  Isle  flats,  90. 
Grosse  Pointe,  92, 180. 
Grosse    Pointe    lightship, 

92. 
Grosse  Isle  St.  Martin,  160. 
Guffln  bftv,  30. 
Gull  island,  191. 
Gull  Island  shoal,  66. 
Gull  Island  reef,  187.  201. 
Gull  rock,  229. 
Gull  Rock  shoal,  229. 
Gull  roost,  189. 
Half  moon  island,  123. 
Halkett  rock,  138. 
Hamilton,  49. 


Hammond  bay,  lift. 
Hamlin,  169. 
Harbor  point,  164. 
Harlem  shoal,  98. 
Harrisville,  105. 
Harty  patches,  138. 
Heywood  island,  141. 
Hey  wood  sound,  141. 
Henderson  bay,  30. 
Hell's  Half  Acre.  64. 
Herson's  island,  96,  96. 
High  island.  201. 
Highland  Park,  180. 
Hill's  point,  195. 
Hinkley's  Point  spit,  28. 
Hog  Island  reef,  163. 
Holland,  172. 
Hope  island,  126. 
Horsburg  point,  184. 
Horse  island,  30. 
Horseshoe     reef,    56,    66, 

198. 
Horseshoe  island,  193. 
Hungerford  point,  130. 
Huron,  64,  77. 
Huron  bay,  227. 
Huron  island,  227,  244. 
Huronia  Beach,  98. 
Hyde  Park  shoal,  177. 
Indian  Dock  point,  142. 
Indian  Harbor  point,  132. 
Innis  island,  157. 
International    bridge,    54, 

220. 
Inverhuron,  116. 
Ironsides  shoal.  26. 
Iron-works  shoal,  68.  - 
Islay  island,  38. 
Isle  Marquette,  160. 
Isle  Royaie,  240. 
Isle  aux  Pdches,  92. 
Jackma    ^'>ck,  189. 
Jackstrav  »hoal,  42. 
James  oay,  184. 
James  Foote  patch,  146. 
James  island.  138. 
Kagawong,  151. 
Kalamazoo,  178. 
Eaministiquia  river,  251. 
Eelley's  island,  66. 
Kenosha,  180,  207. 
Kennedy's  rock,  127. 
Kewaunee,  18tf,  210,  211. 
Killarney,  139,  140,  166. 
Killarney  east,  139. 
Killarney  west,  140.  " 

Kincardme,  115,  118. 
Kingston,  86, 87,  41,  48.  49. 
Kingsville,  82. 
Knapp's  point,  48. 
Kokanongwi   island,   140, 

141. 
Lake  Erie,  66. 
Lake  Huron,  97. 
Lake  Michigan,  164. 


IXTDEX. 


287 


Lake  Ontario,  30,  49. 
l4ikeport.  113. 
Lake  St.  Clair,  92. 
Lake  Superior,  333. 
Lamb  island,  251. 
Langevia  rock,  143. 
Lansdowne  rocks,  146. 
L'Anse,  228.  244. 
La  Point,  2Ji. 
Lead  and  Line,  18. 
Leamington,  Si. 
Leech  island,  143. 
Le  Hayes  point,  140. 
Le  Haye  rock,  188. 
Lewiston;  85. 
Lexington,  100. 
Lime  island,  219. 
Lime-Kiln  crossing,  88,  81) 
Lime- Kiln  reef,  65. 
Lincoln,  169. 
Lindoe  island,  43. 
Linter  rock,  140. 
Lingville.  185. 
Little  Bay  de   Noqaette, 

817. 
Little  Charity  island.  102. 
Little  Current,  144,  167. 
Little  island,  132. 
Little  Point  Sable.  213. 
Little  rock,  139. 
Little  Sod  us,  83. 
Little  Sodus  bay,  38. 
Little  St.  Martin's  island, 

160. 
Little  Sturgeon  bay,  105. 
Little  Suamico,  196. 
Little  Traverse,  164,  203. 
Little  Traverse  bay,  165. 
Logan  island,  140. 
Lone  Brother  islands,  26. 
Lone  rock,  136. 
Lonely  island,  137. 
Long  island,  28. 
Long  point,  60,80,84. 
Long  Tail  point,  107. 
Loon  island,  143. 
Low  island,  144. 
Lucas  channel,  123. 
Ludas  island,  133. 
Lucas  Island  reef,  122. 
Ludington,  203. 
Lyal  island,  116. 
Macuair's  islands,  33. 
Mackinac,  113,  198. 
Mackinac  harbor,  150. 
Magdalene  island,  338. 
Magee  point,  146. 
Magnetic  declinations,  41, 

70,  113,  218,  317,  240. 
Magnetic  reef ,  116. 
Mamajuda,  90. 
Manistee,  168.  308,  318. 
Manistique  river,  100. 
Manitou  island,  330,  245. 
Manitoulin  laland,  188. 


Manitou    Paymen   shoal, 

161. 
Manitowaning,  142,  156. 
Manitowaning    bay,    141. 

156. 
Manitowoc,  185,  210. 
Maple  bank,  150. 
Marblehead,  67.  78. 
Marquette,  226,  243.  244. 
Marquette  bay,  160. 
Martin's  reef,  108. 
Matheson  rock,  137. 
Maumee  bay,  69, 70,  71,  72. 

77,  78. 
McCargoe's  cove,  241. 
McCartliy's  ledge.  133. 
McGuIpin's  point.  161, 318 
McKenzie's  wharf,  134. 
McLelan  rock,  133. 
McLeod's  bay,  150. 
Meaford,  124,  125. 
Menagerie  island,  217. 
Meuomonee,  194. 
Meredith  island,  148. 
Michael's  point,  116. 
Michigan  City,   175.   176, 

205,  313. 
Michigan  island,  2.*)3. 
Middle  island.  83. 106, 123. 
Mid  channel  reef.  34. 
Michipicoten  island,  250. 
Middle  Bass  island.  67. 
Middle  passage,  78.  303. 
Middle  bank,  140. 
Middle  reef,  55. 
Middle  Village.  165. 
Milwaukee.  183.  188.  184. 

207.  208.  200.  213. 
Mink  island,  145. 
Mink  Island  shoal,  58. 
Minnesota  point,  235. 
Ixission  point,  166,  323. 
Mississagua  island,  153. 
Mississagua    straits,    116, 

119. 
Mowat  island,  148. 
Mohawk  island,  70. 
Monroe,  73,  79. 
Morgan's  point,  177. 
Mouse  Island  reef,  68. 
Mud  bay,  188. 
Mud  Island  shoal,  00. 
Munisiug,  225. 
Muskegon,  170,  304. 
Narrow  island,  145. 
Nautical  mile,  10. 
Neebish  rapids,  319. 
New  Buffalo,  175. 
New  Mission  point,  167. 
Niagara  river,  84,  85,  49, 

54. 
Niagara  reef,  68. 
Niagara  shoal,  37,  85,  63. 
Nice's  shoal,  68. 
NicholBon  rock,  188. 


Nine-foot  shoal  (Porte  dea 
Morts  passage),  190. 

Nine-foot  shoal  (Rock  Isl- 
and passage)   190. 

Nordheim,  185. 

North  bay.  189 

North  Colborne  island,  28. 

Northeast  Point  reef.  131. 

Northeast  shingle,  128. 

North  Graham  shoal,  159. 

North  Manitou  island,  168: 

North  point,  106,  113. 

Northport  bay.  166,  202. 

North  shoal,  28,  149. 

North  Sister  rock.  162. 

North  spit,  186. 

Nottawasaga  island,  135. 

Northwest  Burnt  island, 
185. 

Northwest  shoal,  98. 

Oak  Orchard,  84,  89,  41. 

Oak  point.  113. 

Oak  Point  shoal.  24. 

Oakville,  48. 

Oconto,  196. 

Oconto  bank.  196. 

Ogdensburg,  31. 

Ogontz  ba' ,  314. 

Olcott,  84,*  41. 

Old  Fort  Mackinac,  160. 

Old  Mission.  167. 

Old  Point  Mackinac,  160. 

Oneida  shoil,  35. 

Ontonagon,  331, 383,  247. 

Oshawa,  46. 

Oswegatchie  river.  31. 

Oswego.  31, 82,  88,  41. 

Ottawa  poiut,  103,  104. 

Otter  islands,  123. 

Outer  island,  232. 

Outer  shoal,  189. 

Owen  channel,  120,  180, 
181. 

Owen  Island  bank,  180. 

0^-en  Sound,  134, 153, 164. 

Oxley  point,  141. 

Papoose  island,  187. 

Parry  Sound.  126. 

Partridge  island,  141. 

Passage  island,  240. 

Peach  Orchard  point,  67. 

Pelkie  rock,  135. 

Pelee  island,  81,  84,  86. 

Pel6e  spit,  81. 

Penetanguishene,  130. 

Pensaukee,  196. 

Pentwater,  169,  203. 

Pe-qua-qua  warning  point 
328. 

Pere  Marquette,  160. 

Pestigo,  196. 

Peter  rock,  45. 

Petley  rock,  130. 

Petite  Pointe  au  Sable,  170. 

Petoskey,  166. 


2S8 


INDEX. 


\\ 


Phipp's  Point  sliual,  143. 

PicDic  island,  144. 

Pictured  rocks,  2i3. 

Pigeon  island,  iH.      '■ 

Pigeon  lake,  173. 

Pilot  shoal.  2C. 

Pine  River  point,  165. 

Pipe  island,  220. 

Pisbaube's  village,  166. 

Platte  river,  167. 

Plum  island,  190,  217. 

Poe's  reef,  168. 

Point  Abbaye  shoal,  228. 

Point  Abino,  56. 

Pointe  Aux  Barques,  101, 

109,  110. 
Point  Au  Baril,  126. 
Point  aux  Ores,  113. 
Point  aux  Pins,  221,  250. 
Point  Betsey,  168.  202. 
Point  Clark,  114. 
Point  Edwards,  98. 
Point  Epoufelte,  161. 
Point  Iroquois,  223,  341. 
Point  Isabelle,  229. 
Point  Mildram,  157. 
Point  Mouili^,  72. 
Point  Peninsular,  80,  102. 
Point  Peter,  44. 
Point  Pleasant,  44. 
Point  Sable.  104. 
Point  St.  Ignace,  160. 
Porphyry  point,  251. 
Portage  Lake  Imrbur,  168. 
Portage  Lake  Sbip-canal, 

281,  246. 
Portage    river,    228,    229, 

244. 
Port  Arthur,  251. 
Port  Austin,  101. 
Port  Bruce,  80. 
Port  Burweil,  80,  84. 
Port  Clinton,  68. 
Port  Col  borne.  79,  83,  84. 
Port  Credit,  48. 
Port  Diillioiisie,  35,  40.  49. 
Porte  Des  Morts,  181),  190, 

212,  214,  215. 
Port  Dover,  80,  84. 
Port  Elgin,  115. 
Port  Hope,  45,  61. 
Port  Huron,  95. 
Port  Maitland,  80,  81. 
Pou  Sdiiilac,  98,  113. 
Port  :»anley,  80. 

Port  WashiDgton,  184,  209. 
Poverty  island,  191. 
Poverty    Island    passage, 

213.  214. 

Poverty  Island  shoal,  191. 

Pottawatomie  or  Uock  isl- 
and, 190. 

Presqne  Isle,  44,  45,  SO, 
61,  60,  107,  112,326,282. 

Pridgeon  shoal,  26. 


Pullman  shoal,  27. 
Pultneyville.  33. 
Put-in  bay.  67,  78. 
Pyramid  point,  167. 
Rabbit  island,  133,  142. 
Rabbit's  Back  peak,  196. 
Racine.  181,  182,  207,  213. 
Racine  reef,  182. 
Ragged  point,  136. 
Raisin  point,  72. 
Raspberry  island,  336. 
Rat  island,  141. 
Rattle  Snake  harbor,  131. 
Rawley's  bay,  189. 
Red  Cliff  flat,  135. 
Red  Horse  rock,  48. 
Red  rock,  188. 
Robertson's  rock.  147. 
Rock  of  Ages,  241. 
Rock  harbor,  240. 
Rock  island,  27,  218. 
Rock  Island  passage,  312, 

213,  214. 
Rock  Island  reel,  38. 
Rondeau,  81,  84. 
Rouksville,  184. 
Round  island,  221. 
Round  Island  shoal,  26. 
Russell  island,  95,  96. 
Sable  point,  197. 
Sackett's  harbor,  80,  37. 
Saginaw  river,    102,    103, 

110. 
Sand  Beach,  99,  100,  101, 

109. 
Sand  Island,  235,  348. 
Sand  point,  192,  228. 
Sandusky,  64,  66,  77. 
Sandwich  point,  91. 
Sandy  Cove  ledge,  189 
Salmon  point,  44. 
Saugeen,  116. 
Scammon's  Cove,  108. 
Scammon's  harbor,  108. 
Scarecrow  islaud,  187. 
Scott's  Point  shoal,  67. 
Scott's  Middle  ground,  91. 
Scotch  Bonnet,  44. 
Scow  Island  shoal,  20. 
Secord  point,  141. 
Seul  Choix  point,  191,  213. 
Shaftesbury,  144. 
Sheboygan,  184,  186,  209, 

210,  213. 
Shegultindah  bay,  143, 143. 
Sherwood's  point,  194. 
Ship  bank,  130. 
Shoal  point,  152.      ' 
Simcoo  island.  43. 
Simmon's  reef,  168. 
Single  rock,  187. 
Sibklwit  bay,  240. 
Bister  islands,  26. 
Skilligallee,  168. 
Skull  point,  186. 


Bleeping  Bear,  167. 
Smith  bay,  165, 166. 
Smith's  shoal,  132. 
Smooth  rock,  138. 
Snake  island,  43,  121. 
Southampton,  115,  118. 
South  bay,  44. 
South   Fox   island,     164, 

213. 
South  Graham  shoal.  169. 
South  Haven,  173,  204. 
South  Manitou  island,  167, 

168,  203,  213. 
South  Bass  island.  67,  68. 
South  point,  136,  146,  148. 
South  spit,  150. 
Southwest   Hawk    island, 

188. 
South  Park  shoal,  177 
Spanish  River  mills,  153. 
Spectacle  reef,  107,  112. 
Spectacle  shoal,  43. 
Spider  island,  144. 
Spilsbury  island,  149. 
Squaw  island,  27,  136, 191. 
Squirrel  island,  96. 
Stag  island,  97. 
StanDard  rock,  227. 
Starve  Island  reef,  67. 
Statute  mile,  19. 
St.  Clair  Flats,  93,  94. 
St.   Clair  Middle  ground, 

97. 
St.  Clair  river,  94,  96,  96. 

98 
St.  Helena  island,  161,199. 
St.  Helena  shoal,  161. 
St.  Joseph,  173,  174,  176 

204,  205,  213. 
St.  Joseph  island,  219. 
St.  Lawrence  river,  21  t4 

29 
St.  Louis  river,  236,  266, 

257, 
St.  Martin's  bay,  160. 
St.  Martin's  island.  160. 
St.  Mary's  Falls  canal,  220. 
Steele  rock,  137. 
Stewart  rock,  180. 
Stony  point,  31,  41. 
Straits  of  Mackinac,  199. 
Straits  of  St.  Mary,  219. 
Straubenzee  point,  145. 
Strawberry  island,  54, 148. 
Strawberry  Island    shoal, 

63,  142. 
Sturgeon   bay,    194,    200, 

216,  317. 
Bturgeon  Bay  ship  canal, 

187,  188,  211,  212. 
Sturgeon  point,  106. 
Sugar  island,  106,  219. 
Sulphur  island,  152. 
Sunken  rock,  37. 
Superior  City,  386,  348. 


INOKX. 


%^ 


ear,  167. 

165, 166. 
oal.  182. 
Bk,  188. 
id,  43,  121. 
on.  115,  118. 

44. 
island,     164, 

mm  shoal.  169. 
en,  173,  204. 
itou  island,  167, 

213. 

island.  67,  68. 
t,  136,  146,  148. 

150. 

Hawk   island, 

c  shoal,  177 
ver  mills,  153. 
eef,  107,  112. 
ihoal,  48. 
nd,  144. 
sland,  149. 
nd,  27,  136, 191. 
land,  96. 

97. 
ock,  227. 
nd  reef,  67. 
e,  19. 

latB,  98,  94. 
Middle  ground, 

Iver,  94,  96,  96, 

island,  161, 190. 
shoal,  161. 
,  178,  174,  176 
218. 

island,  219. 
ice  river,  21  U 

river,  285,  266, 

s  bay,  160. 
8  island,  160. 
Falls  canal,  220. 
i.  187. 
ck,  180. 
It,  81,  41. 
Mackinac,  199. 
ISt.  Mary,  219. 
ie  point,  146. 
f  island,  64, 148. 
f  Island    shoal, 

bay,    194,    200^ 

Bay  ship  canal, 
,  211,  212. 
joint,  105. 
nd,  106,  210. 
iland,  152. 
)Ck,  27. 
Jity.  286,  248. 


Superior  shoal,  2S. 

Surprise  shoal,  183. 

Sutton's  bay.  166. 

Table  of  distances.  17,  43. 
87.  119,  218,  250,  263. 

Table  of  nautical  miles,  19. 

Table  of  statute  miles,  19. 

Table  for  converting  points 
into  degrees,  16. 16. 

Table  of  compass  devia- 
tion, 12. 

Tail  point,  196. 

Tamarack  cove,  188. 

Tamarack  point,  147. 

Tawas,  103.  104,  110,  111. 

Telegraph  island,  44. 

Ten  foot  shoal,  192. 

Tent  Island  ehoal,  25. 

Thames  river,  92,  98. 

The  Brothers,  188. 

Thessalon  river,  153. 

The  Triangle,  138. 

Thirteen-foot  shoal,  107. 

Third  Brother  island,  26. 

Thirty-mile  point,  84,  40, 
41. 

Thornbury  harbor,  125. 

Thousand  islands,  27. 

Thunder  bay,  105. 

Thunder  Bay  river,  105, 
106,  111. 

Thunder  cape,  251. 

Thunder  Bay  island,  100, 
112. 

Tibbett's  point,  28. 

Tilton  reef,  121. 

Tobermory,  123. 


Tobin'B  harbor,  34t 
Todd's  harbor,  340. 
Toledo,  69. 
lonawanda,  63. 
Tonawanda  spit,  68. 
Toronto,  41,  46,  47. 
Traverse  City,  165,  166. 
Tucker's  point,  165. 
Turtle  island,  69,  70. 
Turtle  Island  shoal,  69. 
Twelve-foot  rock,  144. 
Twelve-mile  creek,  34. 
Twin  islands,  140. 
Twin  River  point,  186. 318. 
Two  creeks,  186. 
Two  harbors,  238,  349. 
Two  rivers,  188. 
Ulao,  184. 
Unity  dock,  167. 
Vankoughnet  island,  148 
Variation  chart,  5. 
Variation  of  compass,  8, 4, 

6. 
Vermillion.  64.  77. 
Victoria  island,  251. 
Vienna  reef,  162. 
Wabos  island,  147. 
Waiskabay,  221,  222. 
Wall  island,  181. 
Washburn,  283. 
Washington  harbor,  240. 
Washington  island,  190. 
Watts  rock,  141. 
Waugoshance,    162,     199, 

200.  218. 
Waukegan,  180,  207. 
Wekwemikong,  135. 


Welland  canal,  40.  79. 

Weller'a  bay,  46. 

West  bay,  147. 

West  Sister  rock,  130. 

West  Sister  island,  68. 

West  flat,  181. 

West  Fox  island,  188. 

West  rock,  136. 

West  Rous  island,  146. 

Whale's  Back  shoal,    34. 

193. 
Wharton  point,  141. 
Whiskey  island,  126. 
Whitby,  46,  51. 
White  Fish  point,  187, 828. 

211.  242,  243. 
White  lake,  204. 
White  river,  170. 
White  rock,  118. 
White  shingle,  131. 
White  shoals,  162. 
Wild  Fowl  bay,  103. 
Wilkinson's  pier,  175. 
William  island,  186. 
William's  landing,  236. 
Willow  creek,  118. 
Wilson's  channel,  163. 
Wilson's  harbor,  84. 
Windmill  point,  93,  98. 
Wind  point,  182. 
Wolfe  island,  43. 
Wood  island,  225. 
Woodtick  island,  96,  97. 
Teo  island,  132. 
Yorkville,  185. 
Toung  Squaw  islet,  186. 
Zela  shoal,  159. 


t 


■ 

1'     I 


HOWARD  H.  BAKER  &  CO., 

Ship  Chandlers  and  Sail  Makers 

iftCanila  Cordage,  Steel  and  Iron  Wire  Bope, 

Blocks,  Twines,  Cotton  Duck,  Faints,  Oils,  Anchors  and 

Chains,  and  Naval  Stores  of  all  kinds. 


OUR  OWN  IMPORTATION. 


Held,  Xarina  and  Opera  OlasBes,  Barometers,  Liquid  Compaisea, 


And  Other  Nautical  Inslrumente. 


18  TO  26  TERRACE,  -  BUFFALO,  N.  Y. 


D.  C.  DEEGAN. 


MEAT  MARKET 

WHOLESALE  AND   RETAIL  DEALER  IN 

Fresh  and  Salt  Meats, 

EAXS,  SH0ULDEB3,  BAOON,  LABB  and  TALLOW, 

Ho.  619  South  Canal  Street,  -  I'^'^Sir.r^"^  -  CHICAGO. 


VESSEL    TRADE    A    SPECIALTY. 


, ''-     r. 


PARKER    &    MILLEN, 

16  Atwatn  St.  West,  SETBOIT,  UiolL 

Vessel  Owners^ Agents 

MARINE  AND  FIRE  INSURANCE. 

COMPANIES    REPRESENTED; 

KAHZNll— The  Union  Marine  ''Limited"  Eng. ;  The  British  and  For- 
eign Marine  Ins.  Co. ;  Western,  Ontario;  L.ouisville,  Ky. ;  Seourityy 
Conn. ;   Exchange,  N.  Y. 

fXSIB— Continental,  N.  Y. ;  Firemen's  Fund,  Cal.  ;  Union,  Cal.;  Cooper 
Ohio;   People's,  N.  Y. 


COMPLETE  WRECKING  OUTFIT. 
Orders  by  Telegraph  or  otherwise.  Promptly  Attended  to. 


Louis  Haubhksb. 


Louis  HAnsBisii,  Jr. 


Okoroe  W.  Hausbbbr. 


Hausheer  &  Sons 


SHIP  SUPPLY  STORE, 


98  and   1 OO  River  Street, 


— H®- 


CLEVELAND,   O. 


^- 


Groceries,  Meats,  and  General  Ship  Supplies. 


TicMcrnoNK  169. 


TU<>  i>i]|.ivi:rv. 


J:  W.  GROVER  &  SON, 

Ship  Chandlers 

SAIL  MAKERS  AJ\rD  RIGGERS, 

IMPORTERS  AND  WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 

Wire  Bope,  ICanila  and  Tarred  Oordage,  Canvas,  Blocks,  Oakum,  Tar,  Fltoh, 

Oars,  Anchors,  Chahs,  etc. 

117  (fc  119  River  Street,  and  134  &  135  Dock, 

CLEVELAND,    O. 


COAL. 


[Offloe  1383. 
TELB^HONK   Noa.-{Tard  1835. 
^Dook 


•]' 


RISSER  &  WARDEN, 

WHOIiESAIjE 

Anthracite  and  Bituminous  Coal 


335    DEARBORAT    STREET. 


STKAMBOAT  COALING  DOCK, 

ILLINOIS  CENTRAL  SLIP  "C 


BOATS  COALED  DAY  OR  NIGHT  WITH 
QUICK  DISPATCH. 


CAPT.  GEO.  TEBO,  Sales  Agent, 
CHICAGO. 


^-  E.  "VI 


DFALKR   IN  K\,\,  KINDS  OF 


•         •         • 


BOA.TS  COALED  AT  ALL  HOURS. 


Dock  foot  of  Bates  Street, 


Lighted  by  Eleotriolty. 


•-^     .{ 


DETROIT 


Brs 


1,  Tar,  Pitch, 

lock, 


1  Ofiloe  iS83. 
•{Tard  1835. 
(Dock 


;  Goal 


,  NIGHT  WITH 
PCH. 


a. 


Eleotriolty. 


MULLEN&COMPANY 


DEALERS    IN 


Docks  at  Government  Pier,  Whiskey  Island,  and  adjoining  Globe  Dry  Dock, 

all  fully  equipped  with  Revolving  Derricks.     Lighter,  Carrying 

Derrick  and  100  2i-Ton  Buckets. 

BOATS  COALED  DAY  or  NIGHT. 

MAIN  OFFICE,  Perkins'  Building,  east  side  Main  St.  Bridge, 
DOCE  OFFICE,  127  West  Biver  Street, 


Tblkphone  8. 


CLEVELAND,    O. 


Docks  at  Amlierstburg,  Ont. 


E.  L  PARRISH  &  CO. 

Ship   Chandlers 


-OEAI_ER8    IN 


uahine  hardware,  cordage 


OF   ALL    KINDS. 


Naval  Stores,  Blocks,  Naotical  Instrnneiits,  Etc.,  Etc. 


11   and  13  MAIN  STREET, 


SAIL  K3XD  RIQOIMO  liOFT  FOOT 
OF  COMMBHOTAL  ST. 


BUFFALO,    N.    Y. 


I 


n 


y?- ,  -71STF'^;/;7--fc;.f;.v--^v;i3,-;7T:;r 


J.  C.  QOBS. 


cr.  o.  Ghoss  &  Oo. 


ti 

ir 


Are  Able  to  name  Lowest  Prioee  oa 

SAILS  FOB  LABaE  VESSELS 
OB  YACHTS, 

.    WEATHEB  CLOTHS, 

BOAT  OOVEBS  and 

BIGGINGof 

Every  Desoription. 

Many  yean  of  practical  experience  en- 
able us  to  guarantee  complete  satisfac* 
tion  in  every  particular.  If  you  desire 
Fine  Setting  Sails  or  Wire  Rigging  fitted 
in  the  rnost  worlcmanlike  manner,  pleaae 
write  us. 


tafjOiur-nrxuMj^  •••n.  ■" 


Detroit  Tent  and  Awning  Co. 

J.  C.  G088  ana  A.  I^.  BECK,  Fropiiutors. 


Manufacturers  of 

SUPERIOR 
TENTS 


OB" 


3ECIXTI3S. 


ftJL 


if  slop,  all  U  Canvas  CoTen,  Banners  ani  Bnntini  Flait 


And  ererythin^  desired  that  can  be  made  ont  of  Canvas. 

ALSO  OONTBAOTOBS  FOR 

COVERING   STEAM   PIPES  AND   BOILERS 

▲OBirTB  FOB  MHiLBB'B  FATBNT  ASBBB108  VBLT. 

♦' 

PlMM  Bnd  tn  niTMtraHd  Otttlogae  ud  Mm  LM. 


Proiupt  a»d  careful  attention  paid  to  inquiries. 

Offloe  and  Lofts  oyer  H.  D.  EDWABDS  A  00., 

24  \A(^oodward  Avenue 

(Entranoe  on  Atwater  Street), 

TiLBPHoira  1430.  DETROIT,  Mioh, 


L  L.  BRGK. 


o. 


riOMOB 

ESSELS 


md 


)8oription. 

perience  en- 
ete  satiflfac- 
you  desire 
Igging  fitted 
nner,  please 


vas. 


ILEB8 


/p. 


CO., 


er  Straet), 

OIT,  Mioh. 


n. 


i 


